ASSEMBLYING STAGES OF AMT105 TESTER The following parts are used to assemble the AMT105 relay
tester. Four wires with Four 2 pin female Phoenix connectors / Four wires with 4 pin female Phoenix
connectors / Current connectors / Voltage connectors
/ Ribbon cables / Neutrik board Back panel Front panel / Switching module Complete side of switching
module / Incomplete side of switching module / Amplifier module Complete side of amplifier module /
Incomplete side of amplifier module
/ Case / To assemble the device, you must first install the back panel on the case. Stand the case in
front of you, in a way that the power socket is on your right side. Connect one of the earth wires to
the power socket and the other
one to the earth socket. / / Placing the amplifier module in the case The amplifier module is placed
into the case where the racks are less spaced opposite to the input power socket. / Position of
amplifier module inside the case The complete
side of the amplifier goes to the case wall. The edges of the module should be placed inside the 4
racks. / Connecting the socket of fan to the amplifier module Insert the module up to 5 cm to the end of
the case, then take the fan wire
from the back of the Spacer and connect the socket to the amplifier then push the module to the bottom
of the case. / Note: make sure that the fan wire is not under any modules or inside the fan. Position of
amplifier module inside the
case The incomplete side of the switching module the one that only has a command board should be on the
side of the case’s wall, so that the Ethernet, USB, RS232, Wi-Fi and GPS ports are downward and placed
in the rear panel. / Connecting
the socket of fan to the switching module Insert the module up to 5 cm to the end of the case, then take
the fan wire from the back of the Spacer and connect the socket to the switching module finally push the
module to the bottom of the
case. / Complete fitting of the switching module By shaking the GPS port, the switching module must be
fully placed at the bottom of the case. / Ethernet and USB socket must be 1 to 2 mm away from the back
of the case. If the socket of
the Ethernet and USB are stuck, In case ports are stuck shaking them allows them to come out from the
back panel. / Note: make sure that the fan wire is not under any modules or inside the fan. Installing
the front panel Before installing
the front panel, check that the varnished wire connected to the back panel is completely straight.
Connecting the input power cable varnished tube Connect the two heads of wires that come from the back
panel to the zero side of the power
switch on the panel. The guards must be faced outwards so that they can be easily opened. / Connecting
four 2 pin Phoenix connectors First, connect two 2 pin female Phoenix connectors to the incomplete board
of the switching modules. Connect
the other side to the switching modules. / Connecting a 4 pin Phoenix connector Connect one side of the
corresponding power cord to 1 key and connect the Phoenix side to the incomplete switching switchboard.
/ / / Connecting the Phoenix
Connectors of the Front Panel First, on the left side, connect the corresponding Phoenixes to the
amplifier. You should first connect the two 16 pin Phoenixes and then connect the two 5 pin Phoenixes. /
Then install the appropriate phoenixes
to the right side of the amplifier. / Connecting the Neutrik Board First, turn the device in a way that
its socket is to your left and the Neutrik board is placed between the amplifier phoenixes so that its
socket is to your right. The
socket connects to the complete board of amplifier. / Complete Installing at front panel The holder is
placed half way on the 6 pin Phoenix voltage connectors. Connecting the voltage 6 pin Phoenix on which
the holder is placed to the switching
and put the holder in place. / Connecting the voltage connectors to the incomplete side of amplifier 2
pin female Phoenix connectors with shorter wires red and black should be connected to the upper 2 pin
male Phoenix connectors. / 3 pin
female Phoenix connectors with shorter wires red, black and blue should be connected to the lower 3 pin
male Phoenix connectors. / Tip: Before placing the phoenixes on the amplifier, place the corresponding
holders on phoenixes. Connecting
the current connectors to the incomplete side of switching / First, put a holder on the 8 pin current
Phoenix blue wire and connect the internal 8 pin Phoenix to the incomplete switching board. / Connect
the 4 pin blue longer Phoenix holder
to the second male Phoenix from the bottom. Connect the 4 pin blue shorter Phoenix holder to the first
male Phoenix from the bottom. / Put a holder on the 4 pin current Phoenix black wire and connect it to
the incomplete switching board.
Connect the 4 pin black male Phoenix to the first male Phoenix from the top. / / Put an 8 pin Phoenix
red wire current and connect it to the 8 pin male Phoenix of the incomplete switching board. / Connect
the 4 pin female Phoenix with
longer red wire holder to the second male Phoenix from the top. Connect the 4 pin female Phoenix with a
shorter red wire holder to the third male Phoenix from the top. Then assemble all the current and
voltage wires with a cable tie wrap.
/ / / Closing a 16 cm 25 * 2 ribbon cable both sides without a guard This ribbon cable connects the
entire side of the switching range to the full range of the amplifier. / Install a short legged IDC
holder on the side of the amplifier
module attached to the wall case. Connect the holder from one side to the IDC and connect it to the IDC
by using a screwdriver or one forceps. Connecting a 15 cm 2*10 Ribbon Cable Connect the incomplete cable
to the complete side of the
switching module. / Installation of two amplifier holders and two switching holders on the middle rails
of the case Holders must be placed on the rails and the two slots embedded on them should be placed on
the module and the original
board. Each holder is closed and tightened by 2 screws 16.5×2 soaked in a special screw along with a
ribbon gasket on the holder and middle rails. / Placing the Micro Holder Place the micro holder on the
middle rail on the one side and
its two pins must be placed on the lower rails of the case on the other side. / Placing the amplifier
holder and Neutrik board This holder is connected to the body of the case from one side using bolts,
nuts and 8×4 flat washers. The slots
embedded on this holder, on the other side, are connected to the amplifier and the neutrik board. The
neutrik board on this holder is fastened by a special glued 8×3nut to a bolt and a spring washer. /
Installing the holder of the module
board and main switching This holder is connected to the wall of the case on one side and connected to
the body of the case using bolts, screw washers, and a 8×4 flat. The other side is connected to the
module and main switching. / Installation
of 10 * 2 IDC holders of 10 * 2 15 cm ribbon cable Place the 2*10 holder on a ribbon cable and push it
slightly towards the IDC. / Connecting the Earth wires The 2 connected wires to the case must be
connected to the complete switching
module and the incomplete side of the amplifier module. / Connecting the voltage connectors to the
incomplete side of switching / Connect the 6 pin Phoenix voltage cable on the holder to the switching
module and put the holder in its place.
/ Connecting the current connectors to the complete side of switching / First, connect the 8 pin black
Phoenix wire with its holder to the complete switching module. Then connect the 4 pin black Phoenix wire
with its holder to the complete
switching module. / In the end, connect the 8 pin red Phoenix wire with its holder to the complete
switching module. / / Connecting the voltage connectors of the complete side of amplifier modual The
female Phoenix connector with a shorter
wire on the holder should be connected to the lower 3 pin male Phoenix connector. The female Phoenix
connector with a longer wire on the holder should be connected to the upper 3 pin male Phoenix
connector. / Connecting the current connectors
to the incomplete side of amplifier modual First, connect the 4 pin blue female Phoenix with longer wire
on the holder to the second 4 pin male Phoenix connector from the bottom. Connect the 4 pin blue female
Phoenix with shorter wire
on the holder to the first 4 pin male Phoenix connector from the bottom. / Connect the 4 pin black
female Phoenix with shorter wire on the holder to the first 4 pin male Phoenix connector from the top.
Connect the 4 pin red female Phoenix
connector with longer wire on the holder to the second 4 pin male Phoenix connector from the top. /
Connect the 4 pin red female Phoenix connector with shorter wire on the holder to the third 4 pin male
Phoenix connector from the top.
/ / Then assemble all the current and voltage wires with a tie wrap. / Connecting a 3.7 cm 25 * 2 ribbon
cable of the front panel one side without the guard and the other side of the guard The connector of
this cable is approximately in
the middle and below the front panel. First, connect the switching side to the switching module, then
attach the uncompressed part to the IDC Latch on the panel and close the guards. / How to connect the
IDC flat cable holder to the front
panel cable On IDC connected to the switching module, install a high legged holder IDC and connect the
two sides of the holder base to both sides of the IDC. / When connecting the ribbon cable, pay attention
to the IDC cable and the groove
on the IDC modules. Closing a 5 cm 25 * 2 ribbon cable two sides without toggle This flange cable
connects the full side of the switching module to the incomplete amplifier module. / Installation of two
amplifier holder and two switching
holders on the middle rails of the case Holders must be placed on the rails and the two slots embedded
on them should be placed on the module and the original board. Each holder is closed and tightened by 2
screws 16.5×2 soaked in a special
screw glue along with a flat washer on the holder and middle rails. / Installing the holder of the
module board and main switching This holder is connected to the wall of the case on one side and
connected to the body of the case using
bolts, screw and flat washers and an 8×4 flat. The other side is connected to the module and main
switching. / Placing the amplifier holder and neutrik board This holder is connected to the body of the
case from one side using bolts, nuts
and 8×4 flat washers. The slots embedded on this holder, on the other side, are connected to the
amplifier and the neutrik board. The neutrik board on this holder is fastened by a special glued 8×3nut
to a bolt and a spring washer. Turnover
the device on in a way that the back panel is facing upwards. / Fasten two screws on RS232 socket /
Fasten an internal tooth lock washer and a golden nut on GPS antenna of the socket Closing Doors The
door with four legs must be installed
underneath the device and the leg-less door is installed on the top. Place the walls in the lower
grooves grooves are on the front panel frame. / Connecting the earth wires to the doors of the device On
both sides of the case, two long
earth wires have been attached to the body. Connect each side to its door, pull the wire a little with a
small force to make sure that they are tight and steady. / / Close the doors completely Place the doors
and install the legs in place;
two star screws must be tightened on each side. You need a star screwdriver to tighten the screws. /
DISPERESING STAGES OF AMT105 TESTER First, turn the device upside down so that the base are upwards,
we then open the case base using Allen wrench 3. After separating the base, separate the 4 screws
connected to the case doors. Now the case
doors are released and we need to remove the yellow earth cables that are attached to the door. Next,
put the base in its own place then open the nuts for the GPS antenna and the dongle port and return the
case over. Now open the 14 screws
in the front panel then release the green connectors attached to the panel Phoenix. After phoenixes, it
is time to release the flat panel cable and the toggle is pulled from the sides of the free cable,
separated from the panel. In the
next step, we release the 4 sockets attached to the key and 1 socket attached to the earth panel, now
the front panel comes out of the case easily. First, we remove the yellow cable earth. To remove the
cables, you must first cut all belt
clamps. Separate the holders attached to the phoenixes, then remove the latched flat cable by pressing
the toggles. In the next step, to separate the holder related the Neutrik, use Allen wrench 3, two
screws attached to the holder, box
wrench 5.5, open the nut attached to the holder and remove the screw attached to the right switch
bracket. Remove the twin screws with Allen wrench 3. The blue and brown wires are then connected to each
side of the circuit, first cutting
the bracket and then the phoenix 2-pin connector. Open the 4 holders on the middle rail using allen
wrench 2 and then go to the other side of the device and seprate the 2 earth cables from the device and
release the holder related to the
flat at the bottom of the device on the right side using a screwdriver. Seprate the other side that has
a latch by releasing the latch from the device. Cut the belt clamps, releasing cables from Phoenix using
a screwdriver. In the next
step, release the flat cable holders attached to the switch, pull the flat back and separat it.
Disconnect the Neutrik board connected to the amplifier and open the 2 Neutrik holder that is attached
to the case body using Allen wrench
3 and the nut under the Neutrik board with a 5.5 box wrench. Remove the flat panel holder then release
the flat, finally, open the holder that connects the switching to the case by 2 screws with Allen wrench
3 and separate it. Open the
screws for 4 holders on the middle rail using Allen wrench 2; then open the screw on the micro holder
with Allen wrench 2 and remove the holder. Finally, all the cables and screws are opened; the amplifier
and switching module are freed
and the fan sockets are released once ejected and easily removed from the case.
INTRODUCING THE DEVICE AND EQUIPMENT In order to remove the device from the suitcase, by pressing
the push button, the handle of the device should be placed in a 45 degree angle and taken out of the
case. / To change the status of handle of
the device, it is necessary to press the side buttons of the device simultaneously and then the status
should be changed. Once the device is positioned on the intended surface, the handle of the device can
be put on the device by pressing
the push button. / Also, it is possible for the handle to be positioned beneath the device so it could
be used as a stand for the device. In addition, the bases that are installed under the device can be
used for this purpose. / At the
bottom of the device are the air conditioning grooves and it is crucial to consider that, while
positioning the device, these grooves must not be blocked under any circumstances. / The front panel of
the device consists of the outputs,
inputs, device status lights, and the on/off power button. / If the green light of the main relay is on,
it means that all main switches of the device are on. / If the green light of “CONNECTED” is on, it
means that the device is correctly
connected to the software via PC or mobile phone. / If the red light of “ERROR” is on, it means that
there is a problem with the device and it has stopped working. As long as the problem is not resolved,
this light will remain on and the
device will not work. / The two voltage groups A and B allow the user to receive up to 150V AC and 212V
DC in all four phases simultaneously with a precision of 10mV with a maximum current of 0.4A AC and 0.6A
DC as well as up to 2A in
transient mode. By changing the wiring, it is possible to receive up to 450V single-phase AC from the
device. Also, it is possible to increase the output voltage and provide the user with a 150V AC with a
maximum current of 0.8A by changing
the wiring and paralleling the two current sources. / The two current groups A and B allow the user to
receive up to 32A in all six phases simultaneously or three-phase 64A. Moreover, by changing the wiring,
it is possible to receive up
to 128 single-phase amperes from the device. / At the “Auxiliary DC” output, a DC voltage as high as 0
to 212V is permanently adjustable. This voltage is independent of the test and can be used to switch on
other devices such as relays.
/ This is where the integrated cable is connected. The amount of the current and the output voltage of
this port are the same as the amounts of the current and voltage ports that have been described earlier.
/ / The analog inputs of the
device are capable of receiving both analog and digital signals. All 8 inputs can be active
simultaneously. Other than reading them, these inputs can show the waveform of voltage in three voltage
levels of 4.5, 30 and 188V with the precision
of 1, 3 and 10mV. / The “Analog DC Input” section is capable of measuring voltages up to 200mV with a
precision of 50µV and current up to 500mA with a precision of 50µA. / Generally, the back of the device
consists of various components
including: Earth port Fuse Power supply RS232 port USB port type A GPS USB port type B LAN and Wi-Fi
switches Ethernet port This port is used to protect the earth connection and the earth cable of the
device is connected to this port.
/ In this section, in order to protect the device, a 15A and 250V fuse is used. / The power supply port
is located here. The power cord of the device is plugged to this port. / The RS232 port is mainly used
for resetting the IP and updating
the firmware. To do this, the RS232 dongle, which is a part of the equipment of the device, needs to be
connected to this port. Then, the necessary operation, described in the following animations, needs to
be performed. / In this section,
by using the switch, the communication protocol between the device and laptop is selected. If the switch
is up, the connection is via Wi-Fi and if the switch is down, the connection is via LAN. The LAN port
located under this switch is
used for the mentioned communication. The laptop settings for connecting a laptop to the device are
described in the following animations. / The GPS antenna, which is used for time synchronization of two
devices for performing a longitudinal
test, is connected to this part. / Inside the black bag comes with a one-way wire-to-female connection,
a lizard clip, a 30 cm test wire, a 10 cm test wire and a 4 mm test socket, and a belt clamp and a test
socket 4 mm in diameter. Other
pieces of equipment that come with the device are communication cables which are used for communicating
with the relay and injecting voltage or current. This side of the cable which has a fixed head is
connected to the device and the head
on the other side which has a dynamic plastic guard is connected to the equipment. LAN cable The blue
cable, shown, is used to connect the device to a laptop. Earth cable The yellow cable is the ground
earth wire where its place of connection
to the device was shown earlier. While one side of this cable is connected to the device, the other
side, where the crocodile clip is attached, is connected to the location of the ground connection. The
black cable on the right is the
power cable and the one on the left is the GPS antenna cable. This antenna is used for End to End tests.
The GPS antenna is used for time synchronization of two devices to performe a longitudinal test. Serial
Dongle: This dongle is used
to reset the device. The 2nd and 3rd pins of this dongle are interconnected, so if the dongle cannot be
accessed, the device can be reset by connecting the 2nd and 3rd pins to the RS232 port located on the
back of the device. Capacitor
box In this capacitor set, there are 3 capacitors 10000μF which are used as a filter in equipment tests.
Integrated or Neutrik cable This cable has 6 output wires on one end and a single part on the other
which is connected to the device.
To plug this cable, first insert the tab of the combination cable as it is shown in the image. Then,
after the Neutrik cable is inserted, spin it to the right until the metal pin fits into its place. To
unplug the Neutrik cable, pull the
tab and spin it to the left. After the spin is complete, it can be removed. There are several labels
attached to the sides of the device. The first label includes contact information for device support.
The second label includes the serial
number and technical information of the device. Soft bag/ Backpack This case is designed for convenient
transportation of the device. To place it inside the case, the device must be standing perpendicular to
the surface. Then it can be
placed in the case and after that, the case can be closed. At the front and back of the case, there are
pockets where the equipment of the device can be placed. Inside the backpack, along with the device,
there are three 7-meter cables
and 8 clamps for testing transformers and circuit breakers, as well as several clamps to hold the
connection between the cables.
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Vebko company's software comes in two versions of “Stable” and “Test”. All the
latest changes of the software are added to this version and, as the title suggests, it is a test
version and may contain software bugs. Once
these bugs are fixed, a stable version is released in which all the software issues are solved and it
can be easily used. It, also, may not contain all features of the test version. Note that you can
install both test and stable versions
at the same time without facing any problem. To download the latest test or stable versions, you can
visit the software section at www.vebko.ir. It should be noted that, before installing the software, if
an older version of the software
is already installed on the currently being used system, to install a newer version, there is no need to
uninstall the old version and the newer version will automatically replace the old one. To install the
software, run the “Test.exe”
file. Then, to continue, select "Next". It is necessary to install the "WinPcap" software before trying
to install the Vebko software. / / Click on "Next" option again. Then the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup message
will pop up which means that
this software has been installed before and if it is necessary to reinstall it, select "Ok"; otherwise
you can select "Cancel" to continue. If the software has not been installed on the currently being used
system, the "Install" option
will be available to install the WinPcap software. Now, in the opened window, check the "I agree" option
and click on "Install". Installing the AMPro Test software takes a few seconds. Now you can run the
software by clicking on the "Run"
option. In the "Security" section on the main page of the software, by clicking on "Open Source
Location", the location where the software is installed will be opened. On this page, right-click on the
"AMPro Application.exe" file and select
"Properties". Now, in the "Compatibility" tab, check the "Run this program as an administrator" option.
Then, you need to repeat the same process for the "AMPro APP Launcher.exe" file. / / / After doing
so,installation software process
is finished and it can be use it for testing. /.
HOW TO CONNECT TO AMT105 In order to be able to perform various tests with the device, it is
necessary to connect to it via a laptop or computer. Before starting the device, the earth wire from the
back of the device needs to be connected.
Note that if the outlet is grounded, there is no need to connect the ground wire from the back of the
device. Then, the power cord is connected to the specified location on the back of the device. After
connecting the power cord, the power
button on the front of the device is pressed and the device turns on. As the device turns on, 8 binary
input lights on the bottom row and 2 analog DC input lights on the top right turn on. There are two ways
to connect to the device: Wi-Fi
and LAN. The switch on the back of the device is adjusted according to the connection type. To switch
the LAN connection, one end of the LAN cable is connected to the device and the other end is connected
to the laptop. When the device
and the laptop are properly connected and the switch is changed from Wi-Fi to LAN, the LAN port light of
the device and the laptop turn on. The setting for the connection of the LAN port is set only once for
each computer before the first
connection. To set these settings, go to the "Control Panel" and open "Network and Sharing Center". / On
this window, by clicking on "Change Adapter Setting" another window opens. There are several sections on
this window. To change the
LAN settings, double click on "Ethernet". Click on “Internet Protocol Version 4” in the opened window.
On this window, enter 192.168.1.20 in the "IP Address" field and then close the window. Then, open the
"AMPRO" software. By clicking
on "Setting" on the start page of the software, a new window opens. / On this window, enter the last
three digits of the serial number of the device in the fourth part of the IP field. To connect to the
device, click on “CONNECT”. If a
new version is connected to the device, the "Firmware" of the device will be updated once and after the
green bar is filled, the device will be connected in a few seconds. To connect via Wi-Fi, the switch on
the back of the device needs
to be set on “Wi-Fi”. Then, from the "Wi-Fi" in quick launch bar on the laptop, find and select the
Wi-Fi connection of the device. The password for this connection is the serial number available from the
label attached to the side of
the device. Once the connection is complete, click on “Setting” on the start page of the software. On
this page, enter the last two digits of the serial number of the deivce in the fourth part of the "I"
field. To connect to the device,
click on “CONNECT”. / /
SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTION OF SEVERAL TESTERS The user can view all devices that are, through different
protocols, connected to the laptop on the "Available Devices" tab on the "Preferences" page. By clicking
on "Start Search", after a few seconds,
the list of network adaptor options of the system will appear in the "Interfaces" slider. / By clicking
on any network adaptor, the list of devices connected to the laptop, as well as all their connection
information, will be displayed.
If the user does not know the name of their network adaptor, they should go to the "Control Panel" page
and click on "Network and Sharing Center". Then, on the left side of this page, they should click on
"Change Adapter Setting". If the
connection cable of the device that is connected to the laptop is unstable, this instability is
indicated by the connection's getting activated and deactivated on the "Network Adaptor" page. / / Upon
returning to the "Available Devices"
page, by clicking on the currently being used "Network Adaptor", the name and IP of the device will be
displayed along with its other connection information. If the user does not have access to the IP of the
device, they can find it by
following these steps and it will no longer be necessary for them to reset the IP of the device. / On
the "Connection & Firmware" tab, the settings for the device connection, changing the IP and updating
the firmware can be set. One of
the features of this software is connecting to multiple devices at the same time. To do so, by clicking
on the green plus button on the "AMT" tab, a new row is added to this table. On each row is the
connection information which should
be different from other connections. / In the case of connecting to multiple devices through one
software, it should be noted that while connecting through a network adaptor", each connection must have
a unique "Mac" and “IP” Address.
To do this, first, you need to connect to the first device by entering its IP. Then, by clicking on the
second row and entering the IP of the second device connect to it and if the "Mac" addresses are the
same, make a small change in them
and by clicking on "Set to AMT" apply the changes. / After properly connecting to multiple devices, by
using them, multiple tests can be performed simultaneously. For example, if the two rooms of "AMT
Sequencer" and "AMT Distance" are
opened, by selecting the "AMT" connection in the "AMT Sequencer" room and "AMT1" in the "AMT Distance"
room, by using two devices, two tests can be performed at the same time and two relays can be tested
simultaneously. /
RESETTING IP ADDRESS When the LEDs of all binaries are on or you do not connect to the device
according to the relevant settings, you must reset the device IP using the dongle. Before resetting the
device’s IP address, it is necessary to make
sure that the device is turned off. Then, the RS232 dongle is connected to its specific port on the back
of the device. / Upon turning on the device, you can see that, the error lights of the device will start
blinking / After blinking
several times, there is a pause and then the device will start blinking again. After this process is
repeated for the third time, the user should turn off the device and disconnect the RS232 dongle from
the back of the device / Now, the
IP address of the device is reset and its serial for connecting via Wi-Fi is changed to 199. After
turning on the device, to establish the connection between the device and the laptop, enter “199” in the
fourth part of the IP field on
the “Setting” page. / Note that if you do not have a dongle or even an RS232 port, you can use a thin
wire to do it. As can be seen, it is enough to connect pins 2 and 3 with a thin wire.
UPDATING FIRMWARE OF DEVICE MANUALLY To update the "Firmware" manually, first, it is necessary for
the device to be turned off. Then click on “Disconnect” in the “Preferences” screen, so that the
software will not send ping to device after
the device is turned on. / To get started, the RS232 dongle needs to be connected to its specific port
on the back of the device Also, the device and the laptop must be connected via LAN cable. / It can be
seen that, after the device turns
on, the "ERROR" light in the front panel of the device starts blinking. / On the main page of the
software, click on “Update Firmware in Flash Mode”. Then, you have to wait for the green bar to get
filled. After that, a message will be
displayed. By clicking on “OK”, you can finish updating the “Firmware”. / Turn off the device and unplug
the RS232 dongle.
GENERAL SETTING OF ROOMS There are four main tabs in the software “setting” page. The “Room” tab
provides a number of features for different rooms. In the "Date-Time" section, you can select “Persian”
or “Christian” as the type of the date
used in the output report. By using the other three options in this section, it is possible to show the
name of the month and week and milliseconds in the report. / In rooms such as "AMT-Distance" and
"AMT-Overcurrent", next to each of
the "Fault Types" are written numbers which show the test points, the number of passed test points, the
number of failed test points, the number of test points that are outside the range of the device and the
number of untested test points
respectively. With this explanation, unchecking each of these options in the "Show/Hide Test Counters"
will cause the number of points associated with that option not to be displayed. / / In the "Report
Refresh Interval" field of the "Report"
section, the update time for the report is specified. In the "Report Package" section, the default
settings for the "Reports" are adjusted. In the "Extra Tools" section, clicking on the " Template Report
Generator", opens the "PDF Report
Creator" page where the desired test files can be imported to get a report. By clicking on "Remove
Signature", the "Remove Signature from Report" page opens where, without needing to open the test files,
the added signatures to the reports
can be removed. In the "Template" section, the settings of the "Test Object" of the device as well as
the settings related to displaying numbers in the "Decimal Places" are adjusted. / By checking the "Auto
Save" option, the software saves
the last changes made to the test page according to the time specified in the "Interval" field. These
files are also saved in the location specified in the “Directory” box in “History” section.The maximum
reserved size for these files
and the maximum duration of time that these files are kept in the system is specified in the “Max Size”
and “Max Time” filed, respectively,and the user is able to change these values. By unchecking any of
these options, the limitation
is removed as well. By doing this, if the software crashes for any reason, the test page and the user
information will remain safe. / In the "Alert-Tone on Hardware Error" dropdown field, you can select an
alert sound for when there is
a hardware error in the device. The settings for specifying and changing the sizes of the tables of the
rooms such as "Distance" and "Differential" are adjusted in the "Styles of Tables" section. You can
customize the "Key Setting" section
to be able to use the "Enter" key and the arrow keys to move in the cells of a table. In the
"Communication Mode" section, you can choose between "Service System" and "Integrated System" for the
connection between different rooms and pages
of the software. "Appearance Setting of Groupbox" is designed for personalizing user interface. This
setting is divided to two categories of “text” and “border”, which are used to personalizing the borders
, color and text’s fonts. In
the following tutorials, all of the above will be stated in detail as well as how to adjust the
settings. / / / /
GENERAL SETTING OF ROOMS, PART2 In the “Templates” section, by clicking on the “Device” button, a
new screen named"Device Settings" appears in which the default settings for the Device are set. If
changes are made to this section, clicking
on the "Save to Template" button will save these changes as a template. After confirming the setting,
The user can reset the settings saved as the template, by visiting the “General Test Object” in any of
the rooms and clicking on “Load
Template” in ”Device Setting” screen. / Clicking on the “Decimal Places” button opens a screen named
“Number of Decimal Places Settings” where the accuracy of the numbers and the number of digits visible
for every parameter are determined.
In the “Item Type” field, the desired section or room is selected and in the “Sample Value” field a
number has been inserted as an example. The name and unit of the parameter are seen in the “Parameter
Name” and “Absolute Unit” columns
respectively. In the “Absolute Eng. Factor” column, the number of digits displayed is specified. For
example, if number 7 is entered in this column, 7 digits of the number entered in the “Sample Value” are
displayed. All changes made on
this screen are considered as default for this section in the software and applied to different rooms.
For example, if "Sequencer" is selected in "Item Type" field, by making and confirming some changes in
this screen, via opening “Sequencer"
room and checking "Decimal Places", it can be seen that done setting considered as default. There are
several audio files available in the “Alert Tone on Hardware Error” section in the “Preferences” screen
which can be used as the alarm
tone in case of a hardware error. / / By activating the “Automatic” option in the “Style of Tables”,
dimensions of table cells will be set by the software automatically. By activating the “Manual” option,
the user can modify the dimensions
of the cells of the tables. In this drop-down list, user chooses how table cells dimensions be set. In
the “height of table cells” the height of each cell is adjusted by pixels. For example by selecting and
confirming "All Cells", If you
visit the “Distance” room and shot several points, you see the width of each column is equal to the
title of its header and due to selecting "Manual" state its dimensions is changeable by the user. In the
“Key Setting” section, by activating
the “Enter like Tab in Forms” option, the user chooses “Enter” as the “Tab” key to move between the
cells. By activating the “Arrow like Tab in Forms” option, the user chooses to move between the cells in
the tables by using the arrow
keys. / By selecting “Service System” in the “Communication Mode” section, each of the rooms on the
first screen of the software, if opened, will launch as a separate exe file and each window will be used
independently from the windows
of other rooms which will reduce the use of system resources; however, by selecting the “Integrated
System” option, if several rooms are running simultaneously, all of them will be running in the same exe
file. In this case, in addition
to using more system resources, if a window is running in one of the rooms, the other rooms and screens
of the software will not be usable. /
DEFAULT SETTING FOR “REPORT” In the “Room” tab and in the “Report” section, the time of updating the
reports in the rooms, if any changes happen, it indicates in the “Report Refresh Interval” field. For
example, the test information is checked
every five seconds and if there is any change the report is updated. In this section, by clicking on the
“Setting” button a new window named “Report Setting” is opened. In “Item Type” the default settings can
be specified to get the report
from a specific room or screen. /. / / The elements that can be added to the report by the user are
located in the “Report Setting” section of this window. By checking the main option, the user can add
all the subsets to their output report.
If the user chooses only some of the subsets of the main option, the square sign next to the main option
will be displayed as a half-filled square. In the column next to the "Report Setting" section, the user
can select HTML or PDF as
the format of the report preview. / / By clicking on the "Advance" button, the screen is displayed more
extensively, and more settings can be applied to the report. By checking each of these categories, their
subcategory is opened and
the needed settings can be applied. At the top of this screen, there are options used for saving the
applied settings and using them again later. / For instance, if “Sequencer” is selected in the “Item
Type” and some specific settings
are set at default and confirmed, after entering the “Sequencer” room, selecting the “Report View”
option from “View” menu and reviewing the “Report Setting” section and then selecting “Load from
Template” option, you will see that the
same settings are set at default for this section as well. In the "Extra Tools" section, the user is
allowed to click on the "Report Generator" button and get a report on the saved test files without
needing to open them. After clicking
on this button, a screen called "PDF Report Creator" opens. On this screen, the user can select their
test files to get a report on by clicking on the “Select Input Files” button. For example, the first two
files are selected. The user
can, also, by clicking on the “Select Input Folders”, select a folder including several test files. and
insert them into the “Files” section. For example, “Vebko Test Files” folder is selected. By clicking on
the “Clear” button, the files
inserted for getting a report can be removed from the list. / / / / / / / By selecting the “Open Folder
after Creating PDF” option in the “Other Setting” section, the folder where the file is saved will be
displayed right after the report
is made. In the “Output” section, by selecting the “Save Report in File Directory” option, the report
files can be saved at the same directory as where the files are imported from. If the “Save all Report
to Selected Directory” option
is selected, the user can select a specific directory and save all their reports in that directory. / /
/ There are two options available in the “Overwrite File” section. In order to clarify this issue with
an example, a file is imported
for getting a report. By selecting the “Bypass Existing PDFs” option, if they’re already exists a report
on a file in the selected directory, the software does not make another report on that file. The
appearance of this screen is due
to the prior selection of the “Open Folder after Creating PDF” option which can be disabled. By
selecting the “Overwrite Existing PDFs”, the new report replaces the previous one. / In the “Report
Setting” section, by selecting the “Load
Report Setting from File” option, it is specified that for making the reports, the setting from the
loaded files should be used. By selecting the “Load Report Setting From Template” option, the settings
which are saved in the Template
file will be used for making the reports. In the “Device Setting” section, by selecting the “Load Device
Setting from File” option, it is specified that for making the reports, the Device setting from the
loaded files will be used, while
in the same section, by selecting the “Load Device Setting from Template” option the settings which are
saved in the Template file will be used for making the reports. By selecting the “Include Test Object
Active Test” option in the “Report
Setting of Instrument” section, if a report is made on the Instrument test files, the information
existing in the “Test Object” tab will be included in the report under any circumstances. / / / / By
selecting “Include Last Active Test”
option, the previously saved equipment test files and the last performed test which has not been cleared
by the user, by selecting “Add to Report” radio-button the report of that test is added to the report as
well but if the user has
added the test result to the output report, by selecting “Bypass When Added To Report” radio-button, the
software does not add the test result to the output report again. / / By clicking on the “Remove
Signature” button in the “Extra Tools”
section on the “Preferences” screen, a new screen named “Remove Signature from Report” appears in which
the user can remove the existing signatures from the reports on their desired files. On this screen, by
clicking on the “Select Input
Files” button, the user selects their files for removing the signature. By clicking on the “Select Input
Folder” button, the user can select a folder containing several report files and import all of these
files into this list altogether.
After the report files have been added to the list, by clicking on the “Modify” button, the existing
signatures in the report will be deleted along with the framework around the report as well as the added
names to the signature. / / /
/
PREFERENCES PAGE "DIRECTORY" & "CASH" TAB In the "Directory" tab, the default paths for saving files
are specified. By clicking on any of the file formats, this default path can be changed. For example, by
double-click on "AMPro-Distance Report
Files", its path can be changed to desktop. To save the existing report file, open "Report View" in the
"Distance” room and click on the “Export Report”. It is seen that the saving path is located on the
desktop. / By checking the squares
in the “Remember Last Location” column, it is specified that if the user chooses another path while
storing the file, the software should remember that path. For example, if you open the “Distance” room,
and set the report file saving
path on drive “C” and save the file and then if you try to save the file again you can see that the
saving path has been changed to that folder. / By clicking on the “Restore Selected to Defaults”
button in the “Preferences” tab, the
changes made to the squares in the “Remember Last Location” column are restored and reset to the default
settings. For example if three squares become unchecked and two of them be selected. By clicking on
"Restore Selected to Defaults"
it's seen that these squares are gotten back to default state. / By clicking on the “Reset to Default”
button, all settings are reset to the default values. It is possible to save the changes made to the
settings of this section in a file
by clicking on the “Export” button. When necessary, this file can be imported and applied to other
screens. Settings related to different sections of the software are saved in the paths stored in the
“Cache” tab. In order to prevent software
slowdown in the long run, the software cache must be cleared. For clearing the cache of the software,
the “Clear” button should be used. The “Open Roaming Directory” button opens the path where the cache is
stored. In this folder, cache
files can be viewed or cleared. For clearing, select all of the folders then press the delete button on
keyboard. /
"CONNECTION & FIRMWARE"TAB In the "Connection & Firmware" tab on the "Setting" page, the settings
for the device connection and "Firmware Update" can be adjusted. Also, the settings for the connection
can be adjusted in the "Details" section.
The "IP" field is used to connect to the device. In the past, the last three digits of the device's
serial number were used for the fourth part of this field, but as of 15/07/2019, the last two digits of
the device's serial number are
used for this purpose. The "DNS", "Gateway", 'Subset Mask" and "Port" fields are used for network
connections. Once connected to the device, you can change these elements and then by selecting the "Set
to ATM" option the changes can be
saved. / The "Serial Number" is not changeable by a user and after connecting to the device, the last
three digits of the device's serial is written in this part. The "Version" field displays the current
version of the device and the "Minimum
Version" field displays the minimum version that allows updating the “Firmware". In the "MAC Address"
field, users can use the same software to connect to two devices. If the "MAC Address" of both devices
is the same, it is necessary to
change one of them. "MAC Address" of a device consists of 6 2-character parts. Enabling the "Enable
Update Connection Date by Device" option causes the information of this part to be refreshed
continually. If the user wishes to make and
apply some changes in this section, they should uncheck the mentioned option and by clicking on the "Set
to AMT" option, apply the changes. / The “Connect” button is used to connect to the device, / the
“Refresh Connection” button is used
to connect and disconnect the device once, / the “Disconnect” button is used to disconnect the device, /
the “Ping Entered IP” button is used to check the authenticity of the connection to the device via LAN.
/ and, finally, the “Ping
Wi-Fi” botton is used to check the authenticity of the connection to the device via "Wi-Fi". / If the
connection is made via LAN, by clicking on the “Ping Entered IP”, the IP which is entered in this
section will be pinged. / If the connection
is made via Wi-Fi, by clicking on “Ping Wi-Fi”, this IP 192.168.1.1, which is specified for the Wi-Fi of
all devices, will be pinged. / “Update Firmware” is used to update the firmware of the device which is,
usually, done automatically
after connecting to the device. If it didn’t happen automatically, the “Update Firmware in Flash Mode”
must be used. How to use this option is explained in the related animation. /
DEVICE HARDWARE SETTING The general settings of the device are adjusted in the “Hardware” tab on the
“Preferences” page. In the “Fan mode” section, selecting "Silent" will change the speed of the "Fan"
depending on the temperature of the switches
or heatsinks of the device which is displayed on this page. But, if the "Max.Power" option is selected,
the fan of the device will work at its maximum power constantly. / / By activating the "Smart Delay"
option, if the temperature of
the device reaches 55 degrees, in the rooms such as "Distance" and "OverCurrent" where points are used
for the test, the test will automatically pause and a message saying "Cooling" will be displayed on the
bottom bar of the test screen.
The test will not resume until the temperature reaches 45 degrees. The maximum operating temperature of
the device is specified in the "Maximum Temperature" section. If the temperature of the device exceeds
this value, the device will
stop working completely. This value can be changed up to 70 degrees but, except for certain conditions,
the user must not set the temperature above 60 degrees. / In the "Switch Off After Test" section, the
user can specify how many seconds
after the test is finished, the current and voltage switches should be opened. This number is set to 5
seconds by default but it can be increased up to 10 seconds.In the "Deviation" section, the reporting
conditions for “Other” errors
can be specified. By default, it is specified in the software that if there is a difference between
actual voltage of the device and value specified in the software exceed 4 volts or the current
difference goes over 500 mA, the “Other”
error should be displayed. In the "Relative" section, this value is specified as a percentage of the
value specified in the test. In the actual operating mode, the device uses the lowest value among these
two for the error message. / /
In the "Binary Input Status" section, it is specified which binary is connected and which binary is not.
/ In the "Disable Error" section, a list of possible errors of the device is available and you can
disable them. "Select All Error
Other": this error is displayed when the device is unable to produce the current and voltage asked by
the user. The cause for this error can be the voltage outputs' short circuting or the current outputs'
open-circuting. By opening the
drop-down of each errors’ fields, any error can be disabled for a number of voltage and current outputs.
"Select All Error Self": every time before running the test, the device checks its internal hardware to
determine whether it is capable
of generating +50V or -50V of voltage and +5A and -5A of current. If there is a problem, the device
displays a "Self" error. "Error Thermal": this error is displayed when the temperature of the device's
sensors is increased. Occasionally,
the thermal sensor of one of the switches has a problem, indicating irrational temperatures such as 800
degrees. In this case, in the slider of this section, it is possible to deactivate the thermal error to
continue working with the device.
"Error Over Current Binary 9": the binary 9 of the device can measure the current up to 500mA. If the
input current of this binary exceeds this value, this error is displayed. "Select All Error Over Voltage
Binary": depending on the duration
specified for them, if their input voltage exceeds the specified limit, the binary inputs of the device
will display this error. For instance, in the 4.5V mode, if the input voltage of any of the binaries
exceeds 4.5V, the device will
display this error. In the "Times For ignoring Over Voltage Binary" field, the maximum time allowed to
ignore the "Over Voltage" error of the binary is specified. By default, it is set that if the time for
the "Over Voltage" error is not
shorter than 100 milliseconds, the device will not display any error about this matter. / This should be
noted that, since "Thermal Error" and "Error Over Current Binary 9" are among the fatal "Errors" of the
device, their deactivation
setting will not be saved by the software and will be disabled each time the software is run, then if
this "Error" needs to be disabled, the user must do this manually. The "Check RAM" section is used for
testing the RAM that is used in
the “AMT”. In the "Repetition" field, the number of times that a series of data are written in the RAM
and erased is specified. This section can be used in case of uncertainty about the performance of the
device's RAM. Since the writing
and reading operations are performed on the RAM multiple times, eventually, if there is a problem in
this process, the error light on the panel of the device will turn on. / In the "Earth" section, it is
possible to enable or disable the
"Earth" error of the device. If the "Enable" option is checked, it is necessary to connect the "Earth"
cable to perform the test. Otherwise, an “Earth” error will be displayed and the device will stop
working. This error can be deactivated
by unchecking the “Enable” option. But, it is vital to note that, doing so during the test can be lethal
and as it is ,also, stated in the displayed message, Vebko company will not be responsible. / It is
possible to activate or deactivate
the main hardware switches of the device in the “Switches” section. The switch number 1 is related to
the voltages and currents of the group A output. The switch number 2 is related to the voltages and
currents of the group B and VDC.
By deactivating every switch, all outputs of that switch will be deactivated. / In the "Combination
Cable" section, if the "Voltage" option is selected, the outputs of the Neutrik cable will include three
current and three voltage phases.
But if the "Current" option is selected, the output of the cable will consist of two three-phase current
groups which are used for various tests such as differential test. / The "Open VDC Setting" option is
used to enable the DC output
voltage of the device. By clicking on this option, the "VCD Diagrams" page opens. On this page, in the
"DC Value" field of the "Apply" section, the output DC value of this port is specified. This value can
be set up to a maximum of 212V
DC. By clicking on the "Apply" option, the "AUX DC" port of the device will inject the amount that is
specified in the "DC Value" field. The "AUX DC" output can be disabled by clicking on the "Disable DC"
option. By activating the "Record
Period" option in the next field, a duration of time is specified for recording the output signal of
this port. / In the "Now Value" section, the amount of current and voltage produced by the "AUX DC" port
is displayed. The "Max Current"
field shows the maximum current pulled from this port. In the following two diagrams, the instantaneous
amounts of voltage and DC current of this port are indicated. It is also possible to save the settings
set on this page as a PDF file
by clicking on the "Export Report" option. To reset and update the amount of the current displayed in
the "Max Current" section, you can click on the "Reset Max Current" option. / By checking the "Dancing
Light" option, the LEDs in front
of the device will turn on in a dancing manner. This operation is to test the healthy "LED" binary
inputs of the device. /
SOFTWARE START PAGE The "Start" page of the software is the first page that the you face when the
software is opened. At the top right is the version name of the software "Stable", "Test" as well as its
version number. If a new version of
the software is provided by Vebko, when you are connected to the internet, an option, saying "New
Version is Available" will appear at the top right. By clicking on this option, you can download and
install the latest version of the software.
Clicking on the "What's New" option opens a page in which the fixes or the features added to different
versions of the software are displayed. For preparing these versions, first, Vebko experts present the
software problems and suggestions
to the software group. Then, after evaluating and correcting this group, the new features are displayed
in detail on this page. / By clicking on the "Launch Remote Help" option, you can connect to the online
software support via one of
the two available methods of "AnyDesk" or "Ammyy Admin". For using AnyDesk, first, the user needs to
give the 9-digit number called AnyDesk ID, which is available at the top left of the "New Connection"
page, to the supporter. Then, the
supporter will enter the code in the "Remote Desk" section and press "Connect" to connect to the user's
"Desktop" page. / / Also, by clicking on "Ammyy Admin", the "Ammyy Admin-Free" page opens. Then, the
user needs to give their "ID"
and "Password" to the supporter. After that, the supporter will enter this information and connect to
the user's desktop. / The "Relay Modules" section contains the special software for Vebko’s relay. In
the "Tester Modules" section, different
relay test rooms are on the left while equipment test rooms are on the right. / You can adjust the
settings for all test pages by clicking on the "Preferences" option. In all rooms, you can see two
letters and numbers at the top right
of the screen: / 1- "M" means that how many megabytes of the ram is occupied by this page. / 2- "AS"
which is "Auto Save" means that if you make a change to the file, after passing the time that is
specified in front of this option, the
software automatically saves the status of the file and if there is a previous file, the new file
replaces the existing one. After the filed is saved, a message saying "Auto Save Done" will be displayed
at the bottom of the page. / The
software repeats this saving process every 30 seconds which can be changed in the “Auto Save” section in
the "Room" tab on the "Preferences" page. This saved file is displayed in the "Recovery" option. If the
software crashes for any reason,
by clicking on the "Recovery" option, you can recover and view the last saved version of your file. This
is an advantage for the software because the "Ctrl+Z" key combination recovers the changes based on this
30 seconds and if the software
crashes, the test file will not be destroyed. / / By clicking on the "Security", two options open.
"Clear Cache" option which is used to clear the cache of the software. / When you install the software
for the first time, you should click
on the "Open Source Location" option to run both "AMPro Application" and "AMPro APP Launcher" files as
an administrator. To do this, right-click on the mentioned files, then select "Properties" and in the
"Compatibility" tab, check the
"Run this program as an administrator" option. After that, you can close the window. / The "Contact us"
option provides you with ways to connect with experts at Vebko. / The "About" option, provides the user
with information about Vebko
company. / By clicking the "Help" option, provides the user with the reference manual and of the tester
and the software. / Various tasks are performed in the "AMT" section. You can directly connect or
disconnect to the device by holding
on the "Control" button and left-clicking on this image. The figure in this section indicates the
connection status to the device. By double-clicking on this section, it is possible to enter the
"Preferences" page directly. If you want
to connect to multiple devices at the same time, right-click on this section and select the device name
to connect to it. By doing this, the device name will appear on the left of the screen. /
GENERAL TYPES OF ROOMS Generally, there are two types of testing rooms available on the main page of
the software. The “VCC” room: this room provides you with a place to perform a series of different
tests. Also, it is possible to perform
several tests from different rooms in a continuous manner in this room. / The other rooms including “AMT
Sequencer”, “AMT Distance”, “AMT Transformer” and “AMT Differential”, have the same main page. The only
difference is that in these
rooms, a few features are made hidden or shown according to the needs. For example, in the “Hardware”
section in the “Sequencer” room, there is an option for “Calibration” but in the same section in the
“Distance” room, this option is
not available and has been made hidden. / All necessary features for performing different tests are
available in the “Sequencer” room. “Table View”, “Detail View” and “Measurement View” are the important
windows of this page while the
“Table View” and “Measurement View” are not available in the other rooms. Also, the “Detail View” window
in this room is different from the “Detail View” in the other rooms like “Distance”. In rooms like
“Overcurrent”, “Distance” and “Differential”,
which are also called the “Medium” rooms, the “Table View” and “Measurement View” windows are not
available but instead, the “Test View” window is available in these rooms. Generally, the “Test View”
window is the same in all “Medium”
rooms. In the “Test View”, some options are made hidden or shown according to the needs. For example, in
the “Differential” room, the “I diff” and “I bias” fields are available, while in the “Distance” room,
the “[z,Left:0,Top:0,Right:0,Bottom:0,Scale:50%]”
and “phi” fields are available. Some parts like “Trigger” and “Binary Output” are the same in all rooms
because changing their parameters was not deemed to be necessary. Those rooms which are used for testing
the equipment are called “State
Sequencer” and the windows available in the “Sequencer” rooms are, also, available in these rooms.
Moreover, the “Instrument View” window, which is not available in the “Sequencer” rooms, is added to
these rooms. Some windows including
“Vector View” and “Signal View” are similar in all rooms and have the same structure but it is possible
that some of their information is made hidden or shown according to the needs.
TOOLBAR AND STATUS BAR, PART 1 By opening each room, a page which contains several windows opens
Along with these windows there is the toolbar and the status bar. After closing these windows, the
explanation of different parts of the menu
and the toolbar will be given in the video This toolbar is the same in all sections and the “Sequencer”
room has another toolbar which is exclusive to it. / To open a new room, click on "File" and select
“New". You can also access the
files that have already been saved by selecting “Open". Use “Save" or “Save as" to save a file. Use
“Recent" to access the files that have recently been saved. / Use “Security” to encrypt a file the
encryption has three levels the first
level, full permission, allows users with an encryption code to access the settings, run the test file
and save the output. / In the second level, users cannot change the settings but can only run the test
file and save the output in the
third level of encryption, users can only view the file. / Use "Export Report" to save the test file as
PDF. Use “Exit" to close and exit the test page. Click on “View" and select “Toolbars" to see different
modes of the toolbar Add or
remove the check mark to show or hide the icons. / Use “Status Bar" to hide or show the status bar at
the bottom of the page. / The "Units" option has three parts: / Choosing time between “Cycles" and
“Seconds”. By default, time is displayed
in terms of seconds while by selecting “Cycles” the time is displayed in terms of cycles. Determine the
cycle time in “Test Object", the “Device” block and then in the “f nom” field. If this frequency is
changed the time is change accordingly.
/ Choosing Parameter’s values between “Absolute” and “Relative” By default Parameters' values are
“Absolute”. use “Relative” to see parameters' values dependent to nominal value The nominal values for
voltage can be determined in the “Test
Object”, “Device” and in the “V nom secondary” field, for current in the “I nom secondary” and for
frequency in the f nom field. / Choosing values between “Primary” and “Secondary. By default, software
values are in terms of secondary.
To see the values in terms of primary use the “Primary” option these values can be determined in the
“Test Object”, “Device” block, “V primary” and “I primary” field / The “Communication Logger" option is
for the communications of devices
and laptops that the Vebko’s programmers use. Different windows in the “Sequencer” page including
“Vector View" and “Signal View” are shown in this list / Use "Revision History" to access all of the
files that were saved by the program
every 30 seconds. By selecting each file, you can reset them as needed Select “Start/Continue" option in
the “Test" menu to run the test. To stop the test use “Stop”. Use “Clear" to remove the test results. /
In the “Parameter” menu, select
“Test Object” to open “General Test Object” page. Select “Report” to open “Report Setting” page. / Use
“Delete all Added Reports" to remove all of the reports that have been added to the output report using
the “Add to Report” option.
/ Using "Number of Decimal Places Setting" option, depended page opens and you can determine parameter
units and determine how to display numbers / If an error occurs during the test, in the “Hardware" menu
click on “Clear Error" to remove
it and run the test again. / Use “Reset Hardware” to reset the device’s hardware automatically. Select
“Configuration” to open the “Hardware Configuration" page. In this page output voltage and current,
input and output binaries setting
and extra setting is set. / Click on "Calibration" to open the calibration page. Vebko’s experts use
this page for device calibration. / In the "Window" menu you can adjust the layouts. The “System Default
Layout” option displays a default
arrangement of windows for the software. Also the "Custom Default Layout" option displays the windows as
"Default Layout" saved by the user. / The "Default Undock" option displays the windows as "Undock" and
the location of each window
can be adjusted. / With the "Cascade" option, the windows are in a row and behind each other. Note that
these options are used when the room layout is in “Default Undock Layout”. / The "Default Layout for
Transient" option is for the test
mode and the "Default Layout for Quick" option is used for the "Quick" mode. / "Manage Layout...” is
used to store the desired layouts, and even several "Layout" can be stored in it. To use a stored
"Layout" click on its name, then select
“Apply Layout" to open the "Layout“. / By choosing the "Current Style as Default" option, the page
layout that is being used is determined a "Custom Default Layout" / The "Schema” option shows different
states and colors for the toolbar
and the background of the test page which can be selected as desired. In the "Help" menu, the "Help
topics" option opens the tips of the software and the tester. / / The "Shortcut keys" option shows all
the shortcut keys in the software.
The "About" option also gives the user information about the company. / /
TOOLBAR AND STATUS BAR, PART 2 There are icons for faster and easier access in the toolbar at the
top of the screen. The first six icons are, in fact, the same as the "View" menu and the "Unit" field
which are available at this page too. /
The "Time in Second" and "Time in Cycle", "Relative Values" and "Absolute Values", and "Primary Values"
and "Secondary Values" icons are used to select the time in seconds or cycles, to specify the values in
relative or absolute values
and to specify whether the values entered are primary or secondary, respectively. / By clicking on the
"New Room" icon, a new window opens on the test page. If you hold this icon down by the "Control" key
and then click on one of the rooms,
a separate room opens without closing the current room. / By clicking on the "Open" icon, a saved test
file opens. If the user wishes to search for a file with a specific extension, they can click on this
icon and then select the desired
room. After that, they can search among the saved files in the selected room. / Also, the “Save” icon,
saves the test file. These icons show the different windows on the “Sequencer” page. / In this section,
you can see the “Report View”,
“Test Object” and “Hardware Configuration” icons. By clicking on any of these icons, the user is
referred to the respective page. / By using the "Number of Decimal Places Setting" icon, it is possible
to specify the number of integers
and decimal digits displayed by the software as well as the quantity of that unit. / By using the
"Static Output" icon, it is possible to specify that the device will only inject the values of a "State"
a selected "State". The icons in
this section are used to "Stop", "Start", and "Clear Test", respectively. / The phrase "Ready to
Connect" means that the software is ready to connect to the device. The "Refresh" icon disconnects and
connects the connection one more time
to fix any existing problem with the test. / This row of the toolbar is only for the "Sequencer" room.
If there are several "State"s, it is possible to select the desired "State" by using these icons and
even jump to the first or last
"State". By using these icons, it is possible to select the first, previous, next and last "State", in
the mentioned order. / The "New State", "Delete State", "Copy Before", "Copy After" icons are used to
create a new "State", delete an
existing "State", create a "State" similar to the previous "State", and create a "State" similar to the
next "State", respectively. / The "Insert Z shot" icon creates three "State"s as an impedance test. The
"Select File to Merge" icon
inserts the "State"s of other saved files in this room and adds them to the "State"s existing in the
file. By using the "Copy & Paste State" icon, it is possible to copy a "State" and "Paste" it somewhere
else. / By clicking on the "Copy
& Paste State", a new page opens with the same name. Then, the desired "State" is selected from the list
and in the "Options for Paste" section, the location for pasting and its number are specified and,
finally, "Ok" is clicked. / The
"Correct Name of State" icon restores the default name of "State"s in case they have been changed. By
clicking on the "All State" icon, the waveform of all the "State"s is displayed in "Signal View". / If
the user only wants the current
"State" to be displayed, they should click on the "Current State" icon. Of course, the "Current State"
has other uses too, especially in transient state testing which will be explained in the future video
tutorials. / The next icon shows
the status of receiving the binary signals from the inputs of the device in case they are enabled. The
icons in the status bar show the status of the voltage and current ports. If there is something wrong
during the test with any of the
ports, the corresponding icon in this section turns red. / / The phrase "St. Cond. "Immed" indicates the
start time of the test, run by the user, which can be displayed instantaneously after clicking on
"Start", in accordance with receiving
signals from the binaries or the "GPS" clock time. / The phrase "CT: Dir. Line" indicates the location
of the "CT" on the line which can be on the "Line" side or on the “Bus bar" side. This is important in
tests such as "Distance" when
injecting current. / The phrase "Running Room: Noun" indicates which room of the software is running the
test. Also, this figure shows the connection status of the device. / In the case of connecting to
several devices at the same time,
from this section, it is possible to specify that to which "AMT" device should this room be connected
for performing the test. /
“NEW BASED ON CUSTOM TEMPLATE” OPTION In addition to “New” option, this option is designed to ease
the test and save time. It is possible for you to create a default “Template” in accordance with your
needs and when necessary, by loading this
“Template” apply the saved changes. / First Mode: “Custom Template” In “Custom Template” you can create
a “Template” by using “Device Template”, “Report Template”, or “Decimal Places Template” modes. This can
be explained by creating a
“Template”. To do so, in “Preferences” in “Room” section, you can create a “Template” from “Device
Template” and “Template Report Package” or “Decimal Places Template”. / For example, after entering
“Preferences” window, in “Decimal Places
Template” section for “Sequencer” room, select and apply “Volt” as the unit for voltage in “Template”.
Enter “Vebko” in “Name” and “Manufacturer” fields in “Device” section, and then by applying the
settings, save these changes as a “Template”.
Now, to use these “Templates” in the rooms, you need to select the saved “Templates”. If you open
“Decimal Places” in “Sequencer” room, you can see that the changes made in “Preferences” is not applied
to this section. Now to apply the
“Template”, by clicking on “New Based On Template” in “New” window, you can see “Custom Template” and
“Saved Template” radio buttons. By selecting “Custom Template” radio button, you can specify which of
the three mentioned sections is
to be applied to the new file. Then, by confirming the settings by selecting “Ok” you can view the
applied changes. / Second Mode: “Saved Template” In “Saved Template”, you can specify the default
necessary windows, arrangements and the
number of fields. To better understand this, select “State Type Continuous”, open “Vector View” window
and specify the desired size. Then, select “Save as Template” from ‘File” menu and select a title for
it. If you wish to apply your
specified “Template” in a new room, you need to click on “New Based On Template” and select “Save
Template” radio button. In the end, select the desired “Template” and apply it. /
DETERMINING DECIMAL NUMBERS, PART 1 After explaining the toolbar, it is necessary to give an
introductory about the basic concepts in the system. Each room includes four main parts: 1- “Number of
Decimal Places Setting” Display settings for
numbers and quantity units in the test rooms. 2- “Hardware configuration” For the Device hardware
settings. 3- “Test Object Parameters” To access the relay settings. 4- “Report View” To access the
output and the test reports. Given these
four components and the nature of each window and its functions in every room, you can run a test. / / /
/ Click on the “Number of Decimal Places Setting” to open its page. In this page you will find the names
of the quantities in the
“Parameters Name”. You will find the units of every quantity written in the “Absolute Unit" block and
they can be changed. The “Absolute Eng. Factor" shows a Number of meaningful figures, for example, if
you enter the number 545569 in
the “Sample Value” and enter the number 3 in the “Absolute Eng. Factor" block, the program shows 546KΩ
which is also displayed in the “Absolute Display” block. If you enter the number 2 in this block, the
number displayed in the “Absolute
Display” block is 550.00KΩ. / / "Absolute Accuracy” block shows the number of decimal fractions rounded
up. For example, if you enter the number 5.235 and enter the number 2 in the “Absolute Accuracy” block,
the final number is 5.2. /
/ Now, in this case, if you enter the number 5 in “Absolute Eng. Factor”, the number 5.2400 is displayed
in the “Absolute Display” which shows 5 meaningful figures that the last two digits are rounded up
corresponding to the “Absolute
Accuracy” block. / The blocks “Relative Accuracy”, “Relative Unit", “Relative Eng. Factor" and “Relative
Display” also have the same functions but only for relative values. For example, if the voltage unit in
“Absolute Unit" is VATR and
in the “Relative Unit" is HYU, clicking on “OK" shows that the voltage unit is changed and changing the
mode from “Absolute” to “Relative” has also changed its unit. / /
DETERMINING DECIMAL NUMBERS PART 2 After setting the "Number of Decimal Places Setting", it is
necessary to get familiar with a number of concepts as well as the method for initializing the software.
Generally, there are three methods for
entering the information. 1-The information that is entered in the tables. 2-The information that is
entered in a separate cell where only entering numbers is possible. 3-The information that is entered in
a separate cell where only entering
text is possible. The point is that it is not possible to enter any information in those cells which are
"Read only" in conditions such as "Line-Line" mode. / If you double-click on a cell, the content inside
the cell becomes highlighted
and while entering the information, its unit of quantity remains stable. In these cells, there is a
space between the entered number and its unit which makes a better view for the user. By holding the
mouse on each cell and clicking on
it, the minimum and maximum numbers which can be entered in the intended cell are displayed. Close the
"Measurement View" and "Detail View" windows and open the "Vector View" window. Then, right-click on
this window and select "Show" in
the opened list and check the "Line-Line" option so that the linear values are displayed on this window.
/ Now in the "Table View", enter “23.00" for the second phase voltage with zero phase. You can see that
the value of "VL1-L2" in the
"Vector View" window is zero. Now, enter "23.0001" for the first phase in the "Table View". Then, you
can see that in the "VL1-L2" linear voltage field, the number "100µV" is displayed while in the "Table
View", both first phases show
the same value of 23.00. The number "23.0001" is in the memory of the software but since it is specified
in the "Number of Decimal Places Setting" that only four meaningful numbers should be displayed, the
number "23.00" is being shown
while the original number is "23.0001" which is stored in the memory of the software. If you
double-click on the first phase, and after it gets highlighted, press "enter" on your keyboard, this
time the number "23.00" gets recorded in
the software and, also, the linear voltage amount changes to zero. / If you enter "23.2568" in the first
phase, the "VL1-L2" linear voltage field will display the number "256.6mV" while in the "Table View" the
number "23.26" will be displayed
which means that, not only according to the "Number of Decimal Places Setting", only four meaningful
digits of this number are being displayed, but also, this number has been rounded. It is also possible
to use measurement units while
initializing. For example, you can enter “10m” instead of the number "0.01". In this case, there is a
space between "m" and "V" after pressing the "enter" button, the "m" acronym sticks to the quantity unit
and the "Space" gets removed
in order to make a better view for the user. In some cells, after entering the intended value, a message
is displayed saying that the entered value is above the allowed limit. In this case, there are two
possibilities: / 1-In some cells,
after clicking on the "OK" option, there is another message displayed saying that if you select the "No"
option, the entered number will not be recorded in the cell and the previous number will replace the new
one but if you select the
"Yes" option, the new number will be recorded and the cell turns red, indicating an error in the
recorded number. / 2-In some other cells, if the entered number is above the allowed limit, if you click
on the “OK” option in the displayed
message, the software will not allow this number to get recorded in the cell and uses the previous
number instead. / In addition to directly entering a number, it is possible to use mathematical
expressions and operations to enter a number
in the software. For example, if you "1/256", which the software will automatically calculate and put
the result in the cell. Or you can enter a mathematical operation in the cell, like "sin45*sqrt25" which
is the amount of "sin" in radians.
The point to note is that it is not possible to enter mathematical operations as something like "11m*1"
and no measurement units are to be used in mathematical operations. /
ANALOG OUTPUT SETTING By clicking on "Hardware Configuration", a new page with the same name opens
where the settings for voltage and current outputs, binary inputs, and outputs of the device as well as
some other settings in "Extra Setting"
are set. In the "Analog Output" tab, the settings for voltage and current outputs, activeness or
inactiveness of outputs, labeling them and displaying the actual values for the output signals of the
device are adjusted. / In "Voltage and
Current Output" sections, the maximum receivable voltage and current from the outputs of the device are
specified according to their wiring, which the users can use depending on their needs. By selecting any
of the options, a figure of
the wiring for receiving the required voltage and current is displayed in a box in the middle of the
page. For example, by selecting single-phase 300 V, to receive up to 300 V with a 400 mA current, the
user needs to do the wiring according
to this figure. In the "Current Output" section, there is some information about wiring. For example, in
the first wiring, there are 6 32 amp current Outputs. In this case, a maximum of 32 amp with 3 V is fed
by every phase and up to 5
amp with 12 V is receivable from the current outputs. / In the "Show Actual Value" column in "Voltage
Output Signal” and "Current Output Signal" sections, it is possible to activate displaying the "Actual"
value of output signal in the
"Signal View" window. To do this, you need to change the value of the cell of your intended signal in
the "Show Actual Value" from "False" to "True". For example, if the "Show Actual Value" of "VL1-E"
signal is changed to "True", by running
the test, it is observed that there are circles on the waveform of its signal. / / In the "Output Label"
column, it is possible to specify a "Label" for each of the outputs. In addition to the labels in the
drop-down field, it is possible
to add new label by typing it. / In the "Output Target" column for each of the outputs a target will be
specified. In selecting an "Output Target", it is important to note that each of these "Output Target"
has a meaning. For example,
if "VL1-E" is selected for the first output of the "voltage output A" and "IL1" for the first output of
the "current output A", by selecting "Set Mode: Z-I const", the software divides the 2 volts of "VL1-E"
into 1 amp of "IL1", which
are the first output of the "voltage output A" and the first output of the "current output A",
respectively, to simulate phase to ground fault with a 2 ohm fault impedance. Now, if, in the "Hardware
Configuration" page, "VL1-E" is selected
for the second output of "voltage output A", in simulating the fault impedance of the previous example,
the software, again, divides the 2 volts voltage of "VL1-E" into 1 amp current of "IL1", except that
this time the voltage of "VL1-E"
and "IL1" is injected from the second output of the "voltage output A" and the first output of the
"current output A", respectively. Also, it should be noted that if "VL3-E" is selected for the third
output of the "voltage output A", and
the same "Output Target" is selected for the single-phase output of the "voltage output B", the third
output of the "voltage output A" changes to "Not Used" and this "Output Target" is selected for the
single-phase output of the "voltage
output B". This means that each of the available "Output Target" can only be selected for a single
output. / / / / As another example, in the "AMT Distance" Room, the software uses "voltage output A" and
"current output A" to simulate
fault impedance. If the user wants to use the "current output B" instead of the "current output A" for
current injection, they should select "IL1", "IL2" and "IL3" as the "Output Target" for the three
outputs of the "current output B"
in the "Hardware Configuration" page. /
BINARY INPUT SETTING, PART1 Under the "Binary Input" tab in “Hardware Configuration" window, the
settings of the 10 binary inputs of the device are set. Binaries 1 to 8 are located at the bottom of the
device from left to right. Binaries 9
and 10 are located in the upper right row of the device. Binaries 1 to 8 are of the voltage type. The
binaries 9 and 10 are used for measuring AC and DC currents with 50micro precision up to 500mA and 240mv
respectively. / Activating and
deactivating a “Binary Input”: Activation or deactivation of binaries is determined in the "Binary Input
Target" column. For example, you can activate binary number 3 by clicking on its relevant field. In this
case, a list of different
targets is displayed and you can select one depending on your test's needs. Note that the binary inputs
of the device may be sensitive to your selected target. While testing the equipment and changing the
hardware configuration of the
device, you should note that the label of binary inputs must be selected in accordance with the
information in the test configuration. By clicking on this field and selecting "Not Used", it is
possible to deactivate the corresponding "Binary
Input". It is also possible to use the "N" shortcut to deactivate a "Binary Input". You can activate or
deactivate the binaries 1 to 8 at the same time by using the square above the binaries' numbers column.
/ / Selecting a “Label” for
a “Binary Input”: You can select a "Label" for your desired "Binary Input" in the "Binary Input Label"
column. By default, the "Label" selected in the "Binary Input Target" is listed in this part but the
user can, also, select a different
"Label" from the drop-down list or enter a new "Label" in Persian or English. It should be noted that in
"Report" and binary signal display in "Signal Label", the "View" specified in this section is displayed
as the label for the signal.
This also applies to "Analog Output" and "Binary Output" and in the "Report" the "Label" is displayed
for the desired parameter. / Specifying Binary-Input Type: In the "Binary Input Type" column, the type
of binary inputs number 1 to 8
is selected from two generic modes of "Dry" and "Wet", which is by default set as "Dry". In this case,
there is a 2V DC on the two ends of "Binary Inputs" Zero Mode and by short-circuiting the output
contacts of the relay, the voltage
decreases to zero and the digital signal 1 is detected by the binary. / In the "Wet" mode, the binaries
number 1 to 8 are set to measuring mode. There are three levels for this mode. In the "Wet Max 4.5V"
level, the "Binary Input" measures
up to 4.5V with 1mV precision, up to 30V with 3mV precision in the "Wet Max 30V" and up to 188V with
10mV precision in the "Wet Max 188V" level. When the "Wet" mode is selected for "Binary Input", the
"Threshold" column is activated. In
this column, a threshold is specified for "Binary Input" status. For example in the "Wet Max 188V"
level, if the threshold is set to "50", if the maximum input voltage is less than 50V, digital signal 0
is detected while with a maximum
input voltage more than 50V, digital signal 1 is detected. / If the "Binary Input" is used for measuring
the voltage, it is important to select the maximum level of "Wet" measurement. For example, to measure a
23V voltage, the binary level
"Wet Max 30V" must be selected. If “Wet Max 4.5V" is selected, when the voltage exceeds 4.5V, the
software gives an "Over Voltage Binary" error message and if the "Over Voltage" error has not been
enabled, by exceeding the specified voltage,
the binary input operates in a dual-purpose mode which means that it records the logical signal pick up
or trip and, also, measures the voltage and by injecting AC voltage, the binary turns into repetitive
zeros and ones. In this case,
the memory of the software gets full and a "Result is Full" error is displayed. Also, if the "Wet Max
188V" is selected, the measurement precision is decreased. / / /
BINARY INPUT SETTING, PART2 “Reverse” column: In "False" mode in the "Reverse" column, the logic of
binary’s becoming 0 and 1 is the same as described earlier. If the "True" mode is selected, the
detection logic of the binary's becoming 1
is reversed. For example, in the "Wet Max 188V" level with a 50V threshold, if the binary voltage goes
below 50V, its status is detected as 1, otherwise, it equals 0. In the "Dry", the "Binary Input" status
is 1 only when it's "Open Circuit"
and it's 0 in the short circuit state. / / The “Show Actual Value” column: In the "Show Actual Value"
column, the mode of displaying the actual voltage value of the input binary is selected from "AC" and
"DC". The "DC" mode is used for
situations where the input voltage of the "Binary Input" is "DC". The "AC" mode, on the other hand, is
for situations where the incoming voltage to the "Binary Input" is "AC". In this case, this is done for
a better display and precision
of the phase calibration and frequency. "None" mode is used for not displaying the actual value of the
binaries. To view the actual value in the "Vector View", it is possible to view the measured value by
the binary after opening this
window. / / “Show Result” column: In the “Show Result” column, it is specified that whether the changes
of the 1 and 0 logical signals of the “Binary Input” should be recorded by the software or not. “True”
means that the logical signal
should be recorded and “False” means the opposite. For example with 50 voltage threshold and “False” for
“Show Result” and “Reverse” the trip signal is sent by the relay to the device. As signal of binary
input 1 excess the threshold the
binary changes are not recorded by “signal view” becqause the signals are not being recorded / / DC
Voltage Injection: In the "Apply VDC" column, it is possible to inject a DC voltage into the binary
input. For example, in the "Wet Max
188V" with a 50V threshold, the number 100V is entered and subsequently the wiring to inject the DC
voltage into the binary input is displayed. According to this wiring, the output relay contact is
switched to "Wet". In this case, if the
input voltage of the binary exceeds 50V, the "Binary Input" equals 1. It should be noted that it is
possible to inject DC voltage only into one "Binary Input" and not into multiple Binary Inputs
simultaneously. If for any reason, the output
relay contact is corrupted, it may not get stimulated by the 2V on the "Binary Input" of the device; so
a, for example, 100V DC is injected into it. In this case, a mild current passes through the relay
contact and its short-circuiting
is detected. / The “Description” column: In this column, there is some information about the condition
where the binary input of the device equals 1. For example, in the “Wet Max 188V” with a 50V threshold,
when the input voltage exceeds
50V, the binary status equals 1. / Configuration of the Binary Input 9 and 10: As mentioned before,
"Input" 9 is used for measuring currents up to 500mA and "Input" 10 is used for measuring Voltages up to
240mV. The columns "Show Result",
"Reverse", "Threshold", Apply VDC" and "Description" are disabled for these two binaries. In the "Binary
Input Type" column, the precision of "Input" 9 is set. On the back of this binary, there are four 1ohm,
20ohm, 100ohm and 1megaohm
resistors which are used to measure the current in different ranges. By selecting any of these resistors
in the "Binary Input Type" column, the 500mV voltage is divided into the resistor and the measurable
current is calculated by the
binary. It is, also, possible to display the actual measured current and voltage value in “DC” or “AC”
in the “Show Actual Value” column. / /
BINARY OUTPUT’S SETTING Under the “Binary Output” tab in the “Hardware Configuration” window, the
settings related to Binary Outputs of the device are set. “AMT 105” has four Binary Outputs and on the
back of each of them, there is a 10amp/240V
relay. Activation or deactivation of “Binary Output” is determined in the "Binary Output Target" column.
For example, to activate “Binary Output 1”, by clicking on the related field, it is possible to select a
target according to your
need from the drop-down list. For example, for Open / Close command of power keys, you can select
“CB52a” and “CB52b”. To deactivate this output, select “Not Used” in the same drop down list. By
checking the square option above the device’s
“Binary Output” numbers, it is possible to activate or deactivate all 4 binaries at the same time. In
the “Binary Output Label” column just like “Binary Input” section, a “Label” is selected for the
activated Binary Outputs. / After setting
the related settings, it is necessary to become familiar with the application of binary outputs. In the
older versions of the software, the "Binary Output" was opened and closed only once in each "State" but
in new versions of the software,
there is a feature added that allows you to change the status of Binary Outputs up to 4 times in a
state. The initial status of a “Binary Output” can be changed in several ways. 1- In the “Bin. Out”
section in the “Table View” window,
it is possible to change the status of a binary to close or open by clicking on while any changes are,
also, displayed in the “Signal View” at the same time. / 2- Similarly, it is possible to change the
status of binaries in the following
address: Detail ViewAnalog OutAnalog Output ChannelsBinary Outputs. The changes are, also, applied in
the “Table View” at the same time. In fact, these two sections are linked and every change is applied in
both sections at the same time.
/ 3- It is, also, possible to change the status of a “Binary Output” from “Binary Output” tab in “Detail
View” section. To determine additional start/stop and other options in a state, “Detail View” section
should be used. In this section,
for every “State”, you can change the status of Binary Outputs up to 4 times. By entering your desired
time in "1st Ch.", "2nd Ch.", "3rd Ch." and "4th Ch." you can specify the time for changing the Binary
Output status. For example, in
a normal situation, "Bin. Out1" is open. If number "1" is entered in "1st Ch." column, it means that
after performing the test, "Bin. Out" is open for 1 second and then it closes. If "2" is entered in "2nd
Ch." column, it means that 2
seconds after closing, the "Binary Output" must open. As All these changes are simultaneously displayed
in "Signal View" as well. You can, similarly, determine the change time for the 3rd and 4th states of
the "Binary Output" for "3rd
Ch." and "4th Ch." columns. / In the Trigger column, it is possible to set a condition for executing the
changes for “Binary Output” and no changes are made to the “Binary Output” until the "Trigger" condition
is met and the binary remains
the same. After the “Trigger” condition is met, the “Binary Output”, immediately, starts changing its
status according to the specified time. By clicking on the “Toggle” column, a list of other Binary
Outputs is opened and by selecting
any of them, the status of the “Binary Output” will be the opposite of the intended binary. This means
that whenever “Binary Out 1” is closed, “Binary Out 3” must be open and vice versa. These changes are,
also, displayed in “Signal View”.
/ / /
EXTRA SETTING Under the "Extra Setting" tab in the "Hardware Configuration" page, the settings for
the serial port of the device as well as some other operation enhancer settings are set. In tests where
the test run time is longer than 100
seconds, a lot of memory is required to display the "Actual Value" in "Signal View" throughout the test.
This amount of information slows down the software. By checking "Save last actual data" in "Extra
Setting" during the test run, the
"Actual Value" is displayed in "Signal View", for example in the last 10 seconds of the test, according
to the amount of data. In fact, this option plays the role of a short memory oscilloscope. By clicking
on "Maximum fan during test"
during the test run, the fan of the device starts working in "Maximum fan" mode and after the test ends,
it returns to normal mode. In “Binary Link Serial” field, it is possible to enter a number between 0 and
255 so that before the test
begins, the device sends a command to the equipment test board through “Binary Output” number four and
this board adjusts the appropriate connections for any of the equipment tests in accordance with the
received command. / In this section,
there is a part named “Serial Setting”. By adjusting the settings in this section, it is possible to
send a serial "Packet" in each "State" via the "AMT105" device. In the "Baud Rate" field, the
transmitting and receiving speed the speeds
must be the same are adjusted for making the connection. In "Data" field, the bit number of each data
that is sent is specified. In this section, to identify the end of the original data, one or two bits,
which are called "Stop bit", are
sent. The "Parity" field is used to indicate whether the number of 1 bits is odd or even and is also
used to identify the error code. In the "Initial Serial Command" section, you can write a message to
identify the data exchange. After
setting under the "Serial" tab in "Detail View", the sent command is written in the "Serial Command"
field. For each "State" of the device, the "AMT105" can send a command for the intended equipment. In
fact, this section can be used in
equipment test because there is an interface board between the "AMT105" and the equipment being tested.
By doing this while performing the test, the device sends a "Serial Command" to the board and this board
adjusts the settings according
to the "Serial Command". For example, send "abc" to "State1" and "cvf" to "State2". / / /
RELAY SPECIFICATION IN TEST OBJECT By clicking on “Test Object”, you can open the “General Test
Object” page. On this page, the settings related to “Object” or relay are adjusted. To enter the
information of the relay on this page there are
several ways. In the first case, the user reads all the information of the relay and enters manually.
For example, to enter the nominal Specifications of the relay, you can double-click on “Device” in the
“Service Setting” page in the
“Nominal Values” section and enter frequency and nominal voltage of the PTs as well as the nominal
current of the CTs. / Also, it is possible to enter information such as device name, serial number etc.
in the “Device” section. After that,
to save the information, it is necessary to click on “OK”. It should be noted that whatever is in the
"Device" block on the "Device Setting" page also exists in the "Device" block Tree diagram and the
values can be entered here too.
For example, there is a series of information about nominal values of the device, “Substation”, “Bay”,
“Nominal Values”, etc. You can also find this information in the branches of “Device” Tree diagram. This
means that in the “Name plate”
section, you can also find information about device’s ID or in the “Nominal Values” section, you can
find information about the nominal values of the relay. If “Vebko” is entered in the “Value” field, in
the “Device Name” row in the “Name
Plate” section, by opening the “Device” page, this word is also recorded in the intended section. / In
fact, these two sections are linked and enter changes simultaneously. After entering the nominal values
of the relays manually, it is,
also, necessary to manually enter the specifications of the protective function. For example, to enter
the specifications of the “Distance” protective function, you can enter the related information such as
tolerances, length and angle
of the line by clicking on “Distance” block in the “Distance Protective Parameters” page. You can also
draw the relay zones according to the catalog under the “Zone Setting” on this page. To do this, click
on “New” to open a new row and
then click on “Edit” and in the opened page enter the zone information according to the relay catalog
and then click on “OK”. After that you can see that the zone is drawn. / / By opening the “Distance”
block, the entered information can
be seen in the form of a tree diagram. For example, the information related to “Zone” is displayed in
this section too. You should note that these sections are linked. To enter information of functions such
as “Differential” and “Over
Current” you can click on the related block and enter the information. After entering the relay
information manually, by clicking on “OK”, you can import the settings to the software and continue the
test. You can enter a value in the
upper right corner of the “Value” feed and the software displays the parameters that have this value. /
You can also search for your intended word, by entering it in the “Tree” section. For example, by
entering “360” degrees in “Value”,
the parameters that have this value are displayed and if the word “Distance” is entered, this block and
its subcategories are displayed in a highlighted mode. There are two options of “OK” and “Cancel” on the
bottom of the page. “OK” is
used to enter the information and “Cancel” is used to cancel entering the information. If you check
“Show/Hide” option on the bottom, you can change the status of the lower window to hidden or visible
which will be fully explained in future
videos. The important point is that some of the relays provide the user with the settings as a “Rio”
file. By directly loading, all the settings of the relay are entered to the software automatically and
there is no need for manual insertion
of the information. /
INTRODUCING THE “RIO” By opening a “Rio” file in notepad, you see that the specifications of the
relay are mentioned in this file. For example, between “BEGIN DEVICE” and “END DEVICE” section,
information and nominal specifications of the
relay are mentioned. Or, in the “BEGIN DEVICE” section to the “END DISTANCE”, the information regarding
the distance function and in the “BEGIN ZONE” section, the information regarding the relay zones are.
Similarly, all the relay information
is mentioned in this file. / By having a “Rio” file, you can “Load” this file in “Test Object” through
“File” option. After loading, all of the information existing in the Rio file is displayed. So, the
second method for entering information
of relays whose software gives a “Rio” output file, is loading “Rio” file in “Test Object”. This is how
the relay information is loaded in the software. / The point is that the information in a “Rio” file is
fixed, meaning that it is not
possible to add or delete a new block or parameter in the “Device” block. In fact, “Rio” is a fixed file
and much of the "Test Object" design is related to the "Rio" file design. The purpose of "Rio" file is
that, for example, each "Distance"
relay be end to “Device” and “Distance” blocks and contain a series of nominal specifications, zones and
a series of times. However, it is possible that the “Distance” relay itself contains thousands of
parameters and not all of these
parameters exist in the “Rio” file but ultimately the “Rio” output file of the “Distance” relay contains
information mentioned in “Device” and “Distance” blocks. This is, also, true for “Differential” and
“Overcurrent” relays. So, the
“Rio” file is a fixed part of the relay settings and includes information related to “Device” block and
protective functions. Also, the “CB Configuration” block is added to “Rio” files for simulation of power
key operation. It is possible
to add other blocks to “Rio” file. For example, by opening “AMT Distance” room from “Test Object” window
it is possible to add another block, if necessary, by right-clicking on “Rio” and selecting the “Add
Block” option. / After making
a new block, it is possible to rename it by right-clicking on the block. Assume that a relay has two
functions of “Distance” and “Under Excitation”. These functions are tested by the impedance method. So
it is necessary that there are
two “Distance” blocks in this section. After adding a new block, by right-clicking on it and selecting
“Rename Block”, its name is changed to “Under Excitation”. By double-clicking on “Under Excitation”
block and selecting “Zone Setting”
tab on this page, a “Quad” zone is defined for this block according to the described settings. After
that, click on “OK”. / Now that there are two “Distance” blocks, one of them should be active. If the
cube next to the block is colored,
it means that it is active; if it white, it means that it is not active. Now, if you click on “OK”, the
information of the active distance block is displayed. Here, the “Mho” characteristic is active. Now,
for activating the second distance
block it is necessary to right-click on the intended block in the “Test Object” window and select “Set
as Active Function”. By doing this, the intended block is activated and the previous block is
deactivated and by clicking on “OK” the
characteristics of “Distance” and “Under Excitation” blocks that are from the “Quad” type are displayed
in the “Impedance View”. Also, in the advanced mode, it is possible to mix these two blocks. By
right-clicking on each block of “Rio”
file, it is possible to delete it. / Column Description: Each of these parameters has some information
in their row. In the “State” column, by double-clicking on each cell, “Rio Parameter Viewer” page is
opened. In the “Enabled” section,
you can activate or deactivate this parameter. By deactivating a parameter, the status of its “state”
changes. In the “Name” column, the name of the intended parameter is provided. In the “ID” column, there
is a unique name selected for
each parameter. In the “Description” column, there is an additional description provided for the
intended parameter. / In the “Value” column, the user can select a value for the intended parameter. In
the “Type” column, the type of the
inserted data for the parameter is specified. In the “Min” and “Max” columns, the minimum and maximum
allowed value for the parameter are specified. The “Formula” column is an indicator of that whether this
parameter is derived from a
formula or is dependent on another parameter. More will be said about this column in the “XRio” section.
/ How to make a Rio file by Excel: The point is that there is a series of relays that do not provide a
“Rio” file as an output. To
get a “Rio” file from this type of relays, click on the “Excel to Rio Files” icon on the “Rio Converter
Excel” page. Then, select your intended relay from the list. In this list, you can find the name of
relays whose “Excel” file exists
in the created software. After selecting the relay, its related “Excel” file opens. On this page, you
can enter information about the relay and after entering the information, by clicking on the “Save Rio
File” option, a “Rio” file is
created from the intended relay. This “Rio” file can be imported by using the “Import from File” icon
and after that you can save the relay information. By selecting “Advanced” from the “View” menu, a new
row is added to this toolbar page
so you can add or delete new blocks or parameters manually if you decide to do that. / /
INTRODUCING “XRIO” The first matter that should be discussed in the “XRIO” part of the instruction
is the reason for turning to these files. The first reason was that “RIO” files did not have a specific
set of standards for coding. For example,
if from the list of “RIO” files of the relays on the “Load XRio and Rio File From list” page which is
provided in the software, the and files are opened in the notepad, you can see that these two files have
different coding and there is
no specific standard to them. The second reason was that when an "RIO" file was loaded, only "RIO"
information was available. "RIO" information is that into which all relay settings can be compiled. For
example, when “Distance” characteristic
of the “Micom” relay is translated and the characteristic curve is formed, there is some information
that is not inserted into the software. For example, it is possible that it exists in the relay of
“power swing blocking” function but
its information is not inserted into the “RIO” because, basically, it is not possible to do so. The
third reason was that specification changes of the relay were not the same in relay and the software. It
means that, if the user made a
change to the translated “RIO” which was a known format, it is not clear that which settings needed to
change in the relay so that it could follow the curve of specified characteristics. The fourth reason
was that if a parameter was changed
from the setting of the relay, it was necessary to get those settings, again, from the “RIO” relay and
this file had to be loaded and translated in the software so that the relay and software settings were
exactly the same. The second
important matter which is related to “XRio” is that the user needs to know the components of an “XRio”
file and what happens when it is loaded in the Vebko software. To explain this a little further, a
“XRio” file is loaded from the “Micom
p441” relay. You can see that the first thing that happens is that a “SCRIPT FUNCTION” and a tree
diagram of the settings are formed in this section of the software. In the end, the “RIO” which is a
translated version of the relay characteristics
is completed. We will discuss more the concept of “XRIO” and its components in future videos. /
XRIO CONVERTER FILE To further study the “XRio Converter” file, by clicking on “Import from list”
icon on the “Load XRio Converter and Rio file from list” page, an “XRio Converter” file related to the
“AREVA MiCOM P441” is loaded. After the
“XRio Converter” file is loaded, it is possible to export this file from the software separately. To do
this, by clicking on “File” menu, you can export the “XRio Converter” file in forms of with or without
formula. In this part, for a
better understanding, first, export the “XRio Converter” file without formula by using the “Export
without formula….” option. / Then, the same “XRio Converter” file is loaded in the software without
formula. By opening the “XRio Converter”
file in notepad++, you can see that this file is written in “xml” format. In the subset of "XRio", the
version and language of the file are defined. It is then observed that the "XRio Converter" file without
formula consists of two main
parts of "Rio Converter" and "Rio Type". / By opening the “Rio Converter” section, you can see that this
section consists of another section named “Properties” where information about date and time are
mentioned. In fact, the style of
this type of coding is “xml” where each section opens and closes with a tag. For example, “XRio” tag is
opened here and again closed in the end and the “/” sign indicates its closure. also, it is possible to
open or close the “Rio Converter”
tag by clicking on the square next to it. The “ScriptReference” tag is opened and closed in the same
line because there is a “/” sign in the end. The second part which is the “Rio Type” tag, contains fixed
information of the relay and
is the same “Rio” file as described before. / By opening this tab, it is observed that the “Rio” tag
consists of “DEVICE”, “DISTANCE”, “OVERCURRENT”, “CBCONFIGURATION” blocks which are originated from the
relay specifications. These blocks
are the “xml” model of the “Rio” file which is included in the “XRio Converter” file. As it is written,
the “Rio” tag is of the “Block” kind. By opening this block it is observed that the “Rio” block consists
of other blocks. By opening
this block it is observed that inside this block there is a “DEVICEMODEL” which is of the “Parameter”
kind. This means that this block has a “value” of “P441 P442 P444”. Likewise, there are other parameters
including “MANUFACTURER”, “DEVICETYPE”,
etc. in the “NAMEPLATE” block. / / This information can be observed in the “Vebko AMPro Test” software
after entering the “XRio Converter” file. The information related to “XRio Converter” file is available
in the “Test Object” window.
In the tree diagram of this section is the “XRio Converter” block and its subsets -similar to the “Rio”
Block-. Likewise, the “Device” block and its subsets are -similar to the “Name Plate” block-. In the
“Name Plate” block the parameters
mentioned in “XRio” are entered in the table. For example, the “DEVICE MODEL” parameter which has the
value of “P441 P442 P444”, is displayed in the “Value” column of this table. As another example, in the
“Rio” block in the “XRio Converter”
file and in the path of “DISTANCE” and “PROTECTEDOBJECT” blocks, it is observed that the value of “LINE”
is entered for “PT connection” with “ID”:”PTCONN”. / If you follow the same path in the “Test Object”
window in the “Vebko AMPro Test”
software, namely the “Distance” directory in the “Rio” block, you can see in the “Protected Object”
table that for a parameter with “ID” :”PTCONN” in the “Value” column, “at line” is entered while in the
“XRio Converter” file, “Line” was
entered as the value. The reason for the difference in values of the“Vebko AMPro Test” software and the
“XRio Converter” file is that the codes written in the “Rio” section, receive the values from “XRio” and
then enter the corresponding
values for different parameters in accordance with design of the codes, which is here “Line” for a
parameter with “ID”:”PTCONN” in the “XRio” corresponds to “at line” in “Rio”. / In “Vebko AMPro Test”
software, there are columns like “Name”,
“Description”, etc. for each parameter which provides the user with information about the intended
parameter and there may be no code for these sections in the “XRio Converter” file. Initialization of
these columns in the "Rio" is in the
way that according to the code written by the programer, wherever in the "ID" column the phrase "PTCONN"
is written, its name is "PT Connection" and "Potential transformer connection side" is entered as
described in the "Description" column
for it. Also, the programer coded other columns like “Type” has mentioned it in the code to be displayed
in the “Rio” section. For the mentioned parameter it is “Enumeration” which means that it is selective
and the user can select a value
from the drop-down field in the “Value” column. / It should be noted that for every piece of information
in the “Custom” part which is not fixed, its code must be written in “XRio”. This will be more explained
in future videos. Another
point is that the “User Interface” mode is included in “Rio” section. This means that by double-clicking
on any block of the subsets of “Rio”, for example, “Device” block, the “Device Setting” page opens where
all parameters of the subset
of this block can be observed and changed. These changes are, simultaneously, recorded in parameters
table as well. But, if you double-click on any block other than “Rio”, a series of information about
“ID” of the block as well as its
name are displayed.
XRIO CONVERTER, PART2 After identifying the problems with “RIO” files, “OMICRON” company decided to
implement a new idea. According to this idea, a file format named “XRIO” was created in which a section
named “Relay parameter section” was
designed for every relay and all relay menus were arranged and addressed exactly the same way as in the
relay software. / Another section of this file is “Additional information” which includes that necessary
information which is not available
in the relay software and should be read from its catalogue. For example, if you click on “General
information” tree diagram on “General” block, you can see that “AREVA” is recorded as the “Manufacturer”
which is not available in the relay
menu but is necessary to complete the device information. / / The important point in getting familiar
with “XRio” is that you should know how “XRio” blocks are defined. For example, in “Relay Parameter
Section” tree diagram and in the
“SYSTEM DATA” block, the “Language” parameter is of “Enumeration” type and its value is defined as
“English”. Now, if the “XRio” file of this relay is opened in “Notepad++”, after opening the “Custom”
tag, you can see the “Setting” block,
“ID_00” block and parameter with “id=ID_0001”. The “Name”, “ForeignId” and “DataType” of this parameter
are “Language”, “0001” and “Enumeration” respectively. In the “EnumList” tag, you can see that, four
languages including English, French,
German and Spanish are available as “Value” for this section and in this case “English” has been
selected. / / Now, if you return to the “Vebko AMPro Test” software, you can see the exact same
information in the “Test Object” section.
This means that by double-clicking on “Relay Parameter Section” in the tree diagram you can see that its
“ID” is defined as “SETTINGS”; then by double-clicking on the “System Data” block you can see that its
“ForeginID” is defined as “ID_00”.
In its parameters table, you can see that “Enumeration” is defined as “Type” for the parameters named
“Language” and “ForeignID:0001”. Also, in the “Value” field there are four languages of English, French,
German and Spanish available
where “English” is selected by default in accordance with the displayed codes. / After an “XRio” file is
loaded, the necessary settings and information of the “Rio” section are completed accordingly and the
cells whose information is dependent
on a formula or parameter from the “XRio” file, are turned purple. For example, the value of nominal
frequency in the “Nominal Values” block is defined according to a formula from the “Formula” column and
if this value is modified manually,
the color of the cell changes to pink which means that there is no more a connection between the value
of this cell and the formula defined for it. To make the value of this cell again dependent on the
formula, right-click on it and select
"Recalculate formula". / To find out about that how the nominal frequency with purple color is defined,
first, you should select it and then click on the “Reference Map” icon to view a map of the parameters
to which the frequency is dependent.
By clicking on any of the boxes in this section, the parameter that affects the final value of the
frequency is displayed which, in here, the frequency is taken from “Fnom”. The value of “Fnom” parameter
is, itself, based on a formula
and is dependent on another parameter which by clicking on the “Map” box, you can see that a parameter
named “Frequency” is used. This means that, since “50” is set as the value for “Nominal Values”, the
value for “Fnom” is, according
to its formula, “50” too and finally the amount of nominal frequency in “Nominal Values”, according to
the defined relation, is “50” Hz. / Now, if you open the “XRio” file in “Notepad++”, you can view the
path that was used to find the
affective parameters in the software in the codes of this file. Follow the path “Rio-Device-Nominal
Value” in the codes of this file until you find “Fnom”. You can see that this parameter has a value of
“50” but has a “ValueRefList” whose
affective parameters are in the mentioned “Reference”. To find this parameter, you need to follow the
mentioned path which is “CUSTOM.RIOPLUS.POWERSYSTEMPARAMETERS.FNOM”. You can see that type, value, unit
and formula of this parameter
are mentioned in this path. It is mentioned in the formula of this section that if “ID_0009=FIFTY”, the
value for this parameter is 50, otherwise it equals 60. It is also necessary to define the two phrases
“ID_0009” and “FIFTY”. To view
the definition of these two phrases, you need to open the “ValueRefList” tag. You can see that there is
a “Value reference list” mentioned for each of these phrases. For “ID_0009” you should follow the path
“CUSTOM.SETTINGS.ID_00” and
find the value of “ID_0009”. In this case, you can see that this parameter is named “Frequency” and its
“ForeginID:0009” and is of the “Enumeration” type. Also, in the “EnumList” tag, “50” Hz is defined for
“FIFTY” while “60” Hz is defined
for “SIXTY”. / The explained case is a very simple example of defining parameters values of a relay for
test. An another example, it is possible to select and open the “ZONE P GROUND” block from the tree
diagram of the distance block and
then click on “M3” to view its parameters in the table. If the “Reference Map” of the “Angle” parameter
is opened, you can see that this parameter is dependent on many other parameters. By clicking on any of
the available boxes in this
“Reference Map”, the given parameter for address is displayed.
COMPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION ABOUT “XRIO CONVERTER” In previous sections, some explanations about “XRio
converter” and ways of addressing parameters were provided. According to what have been said, “XRio” has
a series of “Xml” codes as well as
various parts such as “Script”, “Custom” and “Rio”. In “Custom”, all the information that is included in
a tree diagram of the software is defined in “XRio Converter”. “Script” includes intermediate functions
by using which it is easier
to create or define blocks and parameters of “Custom”. “Rio” block, mostly, contains specific fixed
parts some of which such as “Name” and “Description” do not exist in the codes of “XRio Converter” and
are added to the “Vebko AmPro Test”
software separately. As has already been said, if the cell color of any parameter is purple, it means
that the value of this parameter is obtained by using from a formula and is related to some other
parameters. To investigate the relationship
between parameters and the influence of each parameter on other parameters, open its “Reference map”.
For a more thorough examination of “Reference map”, if you select “Frequency” parameter from “System
Data” block and then open its “Reference
map”, by selecting “Reference End To this Node” radio button, you can see that this parameter affects
two other parameters. You can see those parameters by clicking on any of the boxes in which your
intended parameter’s address is mentioned.
/ As another example, if you click on “DISTANCE ELEMENT” from “SETTING GROUP” tree diagram and open
“Reference map” after selecting “Zp” parameter, you can see that this parameter has influence on so many
other parameters in the settings
of this relay and by changing this parameter, the related ones change too. On this page, in addition to
observing the relationship between parameters based on value, it is possible to specify that based on
what parameter is each block
or parameter active or inactive. For example, by selecting “AUTORECLOSE” block and opening its
“Reference map”, you can see that this block’s activeness is related to “Internal A/R” parameter but
because “Disabled” mode is selected in
the “Value” column, this block is inactive as well. / As another example, if you select “Dead time2”
parameter from “AUTORECLOSE” and select “Enable” radio button from “Reference map”, you can see that
this parameter’s activeness is related
to the four other parameters displayed on the map of this page ”Reference map”. /
XRIO AND XRIO CONVERTER After getting familiar with “XRio Converter”, it is necessary to, also, get
familiar with the concept of “Name”, “ID”, “Foregin ID” and “Description”. ”ID” Definition: The relay
producer companies define a unique “ID”
for every parameter and in all relays of a brand, this ‘ID” is used for a specific parameter; for
example, in the “7UT613” Siemens relay, “ID=21015” is related to the “PROT.OBJECT” parameter. This “ID”
is used in other relays produced
by this company for the same parameter. Also, in connecting to the relay via Modbus protocol, if this
“ID” is sent to the relay as a “Packet”, the relay will return the parameter value related to the sent
“ID”. / ”Foreign ID”: Unlike “ID”
which is used as a standard for identification of the same parameters in relays produced by a company,
“Foreign ID” is used as a means of differentiation between parameters of different relays which allows
them to be used in other software’s.
As an example, in “7UT613” relay of Siemens, there is a parameter named “PROT.OBJECT” defined with
“ID=21015” and “Foreign ID=0105”. If the user intends to enter and analyze some models of relays
produced by different companies in a software
like “Digsilent”. / The interesting point is that in some relays such as Siemens, the “ID” and “Foreign
ID” are different while in some other relays such as “P441”, after loading its file in the “Load XRio
and Rio file from list” page,
it can be seen that the “ID” and “Foreign ID” are the same. Also, in “Name” and “Description” sections
there is information, provided by the producer company, about name of the parameter as well as some
description about that parameter.
/ An introduction to “XRio” and its difference with “XRio Converter”: By clicking on the “Import from
list” icon on the “Load XRio and Rio file from list” page, “XRio Converter” of a relay is selected where
the information regarding the
relay is complete in the “Custom” and “Rio” sections. It should be noted that it is not possible to
extract the “XRio Converter” file from a relay because producer companies do not put the file in their
relays. In fact, the relay producer
companies never limit their relays to a single tester device such as “Omicron”. / / Therefore, instead
of the “XRio Converter” file, the relay producer companies provide a file with “.CSV” or “.text” format
in which information of the
“Custom” section along with the values set to the relay can be found. Upon extensive use of “XRio” which
has been created by “Omicron” company, most relay producers decided to provide their users with “XRio”
output files of their relays
too. You should consider that this file is not the same as the “XRio Converter” file which is designed
and written by producers of the tester device and is available in the tester software. The “XRio” file
of the relay contains “Custom”
section as well as “Relay Parameter Section” and “Additional Information” blocks with the information
and values set to the relay, but it does not contain “Rio Plus” and “Template Controller” sections. If,
in the tester software, the “XRio
Converter” file is selected correctly, after loading the “XRio” file of the relay in the “XRio
Converter”, the settings and necessary information of the relay are completely imported to the “Rio”
section. / Some more points regarding “XRio”
and “XRio Converter” should be mentioned: The first point is that if the “XRio” file of the “7SA522”
relay is opened in “notepad++”, by opening the “Rio Converter” tag it can be seen that unlike “XRio
Converter”, there are no “Script References”
functions in this section. Einige weitere Punkte zu „XRio“ und „XRio Converter“ sollen noch erwähnt
warden: / The second point is that in the “Custom” tag, only information regarding “Setting” block is
available which is the same as “Relay
Parameter Section” in the software and in some relays such as “7SA522”, the information regarding
“Additional Parameter” is also available which is the same as “Additional Information” in the software.
Also, the information regarding “Device”
block has been made available in the “Rio” section by a producer of the relay. / / / The third point is
that if the “XRio” file of a relay is selected and loaded by clicking on “Import from file” and without
“XRio Converter”, it can be
seen that the mentioned sections are available in the “XRio” section of the software but because of not
using the “XRio Converter”, the values of “RIO” section are not linked with the “XRio” information and
only the “DEVICE” section has
been completed according to the information of the “XRIO” file. / The last point is that if the “XRio”
file of a differential relay such as “7UT613” is loaded in a universal room such as the sequencer room,
in the “Rio” section, the blocks
other than those completed according to the settings of the relay and information of the loaded “XRio”
by “XRio Converter”, like “Distance” block which are entered to the software by the designer of the
tester are empty of information
because in the “XRio” file of the relay there is no information about them.
XRIO & RELAY SETTING IN THE SOFTWARE After getting familiar with “XRio” file that is provided by the
relay as an output, it is necessary to get familiar with other sections of this file. First, open the
“XRio” file of the “7SA522” Siemens
relay with “notepad++”. In this file, the relay provides the user with the information regarding the
“Setting” as well as the values that are “Set” to the relay. As it has been said before, in this file,
unlike “XRio Converter”, there
are no “Script References” functions in “Rio Converter” tag. / The information related to “Relay
Parameter Section” block with “ID=Setting” can be found in the “Custom” tag while the relay parameter
information is available in its subcategories.
For example, you can find “ID=PID_16611”, “Description=Setting Group Change Option”, “Foreign ID= 0103”,
“Data Type= Enumeration” and “Enum List” in the parameter with “Name= Grp Chge OPTION”. Moreover, the
information regarding “Device”
block is mentioned in the “Rio” section. / Entering relay information in the software: Before loading
the “7SA522” relay settings in “Vebko AMvPro Test” software, it is necessary, the “XRio Converter” file
related to “7SA522” Siemens relay,
which is available in the “Vebko AMPro Test” software, to be loaded. By clicking on “Import from list”
icon, the “Load XRio and Rio file from list” page opens. On this page, in “XRio” mode, the model of
“7SA522” relay is entered in the
“Search” field. Then, its “XRio Converter” should be selected. After this file is loaded, the “XRio”
file of the relay should be entered. To do this, click on “File” menu, then select “Load Relay Setting”.
After that, select “XRio” relay
output format from “Relay Config Type” field. / / In the “Config file path” the path to the “XRio” file
is determined and the “XRio” file is selected. In the “Matching Algorithm” section, the user needs to
specify the type of information
that is to be loaded from the “XRio” file to the “XRio Converter”. If “Equal ID” option is checked and
the other options are unchecked, then, only those parameters of the relay whose “ID” is the same in the
“XRio” and “XRio Converter”
files are loaded in the software. By clicking on “OK”, a message is displayed. In this message, the
phrase “Parameter Values Imported” shows the number of parameters that are loaded in the software and
their “ID” is the same as the “XRio
Converter”. / Also, the “Different Names” phrase shows the number of loaded parameters that have the
same “ID” but whose “Name” is not the same in “XRio” and “XRio Converter” files. The phrase “Corrected
Names” shows the number of parameters
whose “Name”, being different, is corrected by the software in accordance with the “XRio Converter”. The
phrase “Errors” shows the number of erred parameters. The error can have various reasons; for example,
the “Type” of a “Text” parameter
can be specified as “String” in the “XRio Converter”. The phrase “Corrected Errors” shows the number of
parameters whose error is corrected according to the “XRio Converter”. The phrase “Duplicate IDs” shows
the number of parameters that
have the same “ID” or “Foreign ID” in “XRio Converter” or “XRio” file. In such a case, Vebko software
does not load the values of these parameters. / After clicking on “OK”, the relay information is loaded
in the “XRio Converter”. After
the relay information is loaded, the parameters entered on the left side are displayed in “Relay Config
Log” field at the bottom of “Test Object” page while “xml” format of the “XRio” file is displayed on the
right side. For example, the
“Grp Chge OPTION” parameter is loaded in the software with no problem or the name of “RG/RLZ1” parameter
in “XRio” file is different from its name in “Xrio Converter” file. / / Load Relay Setting Page: By
reopening “Load Relay Setting”
window, after determining the format of the relay file and selecting the path of “XRio” file, by
clicking on “Advanced View” option, a window with the same name opens. Tree diagrams and the “xml”
format of these two files are located at
the top and bottom of this page, respectively, in a way that the “XRio” file of the relay can be seen on
the right while the “XRio Converter” file can be seen on the left. If “Show XML documents” option is
checked, these two files are,
also, displayed as “xml”. For example, in the “XRio” file of the relay in “CUSTOM” block, the “Grp Chge
OPTION” has “ID=PID_16611”. This parameter has the same “ID” in “CUSTOM” block in the “Xrio Converter”
file of the software. As another
example, a parameter in “XRio” file with “Id=PDI_25555” is named “50N – B1 instBl” while in “Xrio
Converter” file the same “ID” is named “50N-B1 Pil/Bl”. This is why this parameter is placed in
“Different Names” category. / / In “Matching
Algorithm” part of the “Load Relay Setting” window, if the “Equal Foreign ID” option is checked, the
parameters whose “Foreign ID” is the same in both “XRio” and “XRio Converter” files of the relay, are
loaded. If the “XRio Contains Setting
Foreign ID” and “Setting Contains XRio Foreign ID” options are checked, the parameters whose “Foreign
ID” in “XRio” file includes some additional parameters, such as a letter or a half-space, are loaded and
vice versa. For example, a parameter’s
“Foreign ID= 109A” in XRio file while the same parameter’s “Foreign ID= 109A-B” in “XRio Converter”
file. If the “XRio Contains Setting Foreign ID” option is checked, this parameter is loaded in the
software and vice versa. / The “Equal
Code of Foreign ID PCM600” option is for “ABB” relays. There is no connection between the “Foreign ID”
of relay’s “XRio” and “XRio Converter” file in “XRio” file of these relays but in some conditions, the
“Foreign”s in the “XRio” file
of the relay and “XRio Converter” file are connected. For example, on the “Test Object” page, by
clicking on “Import from file”, first, an “XRio Converter” related to the “ABB REL 65f0” is loaded;
then, by clicking on “File” menu and selecting
“Load Relay Setting” option, the “XRio” file related to this relay is selected. Also, in the “Matching
Algorithm” tab, only the “Equal Code of Foreign ID PCM600” option is checked. By opening the “Advanced
View” page, both files are displayed
as “xml”. / As an example, a parameter named “BIM_3” with a specific “Foreign ID” is selected in the
“XRio Converter” file while this parameter has a different “Foreign ID” in the “XRio” file of the relay.
But it is seen that a part of
the “Foreign ID” is the same in both files which means that the eight first characters and then the four
second, third and fourth characters and the twelve fifth characters should be the same in the “Foreign
ID” of both files so that this
parameter is loaded in the “XRio Converter”. Then, by clicking on “OK”, it is seen that “2179”
parameters are loaded in the “XRio Converter”. / /
XRIO CONVERTER FORMULA WRITING To write the “XRio Converter” file, it is necessary to get familiar
with some concepts. To begin, load “XRio Converter” of “7SJ62” relay in “Test Object” window. By
clicking on “50” block in the path of “50/51
Overcur”, “Setting Group A” and “Relay Parameter Section” on tree diagram of the “XRio Converter” file,
parameters of the “50” block are displayed. / Description of a block’s specifications: By
double-clicking on “50” block, the “Rio Parameter
Viewer” window opens; you can find “ID”, “Name” and “Description” of a block in “General Settings”
section. Also, it is possible to specify a “Comment” and “Foreign ID” in every block. In the “Enabled”
section you can see whether a block
is enabled and if it’s dependent on a formula. By clicking on “…” option, “XRio Formula Editor” window
opens. / On the right of this window, a formula is written for this block. “References” section includes
“Ref. Enums” and “Ref. Params”
sections and whether the “50” block is enabled depends on parameters and the “Enumerations” added in
this section. To add a parameter, click on “+” option and select a parameter from the “XRio” tree
diagram on the “Add Ref. Param” window;
its details are displayed in the “Details” section. Details include “Name”, “ID”, “Description”,
“Value”, “Data Type”, RefParam Name” and “RefEnum Name”. “Ref Enums” of this parameter are displayed in
the form of a tree diagram at the
bottom of the page. / / By clicking on “Add RefParam” and “Add RefEnum” options respectively, the
selected parameter and its “RefEnum” are added to the “References” section. After adding the parameters
to the “References” section, the
formula should be entered on the right side by using the “ID” of the added parameters. Also, you can use
the toolbar available on this page to write the formula. In the “Result” section, the final formula
along with the type of acceptable
data and the result of this formula are displayed. After writing the formula, you should click on “Test”
option. If the formula is written correctly, a notification “Test was successful” is displayed. / /
Description of a parameter’s specifications:
If you double-click on one of the parameters from the “State” column, for example, “50-3 PICKUP”
parameter, the “Rio Parameter Viewer” window opens. In the “General Setting” section, just like the
“Block” section’s description, the same
info, such as “Foreign ID” and “ID” are displayed but this time for a parameter. The difference is that
this time there are “Value Properties” and “Display Properties” sections as well. In the “Value
Properties” section, the value of a
parameter, as well as its type and maximum / minimum allowed values are mentioned. Also, it is possible
to depend on the value of a parameter on another parameter by using the formula. / / In this case, its
formula is displayed in the
“Formula” field which is exactly similar to the “Block” section. If the value of a parameter depends on
another parameter, its cell is purple. In “Display Properties” section, the settings related to how the
value of a parameter is displayed
are set. In the “Unit” field, the unit of the parameter and in the “Digits after decimal” field, the
number of decimals displayed the “Value” field is specified. In the “Multiplier” field, it is possible
to specify a coefficient for unit
of the parameters. For example, if unit A is specified, by selecting coefficient K, this parameter is
displayed in kilo amperes. /
WRITING “XRIO CONVERTER” FOR AN OVERCURRENT RELAY To write an “XRio Converter” file in the “Test
Object” page, first, you need to add a block. To begin, right-click on “Custom” block and select “Add
Block”. Also, you can use “Ctrl+B” Combined
key to add a block. Likewise, another block is added to the subset of “Custom” block. / Then, the blocks
should be named; to rename the blocks, right-click on “Custom” block and select “Rename Block”. “7sj62”
is selected as the name for
this block which is an example of an Over current relay. It should be noted that you can also use “F2”
shortcut key to rename a block. The blocks “Block1” and “Block2” are named “Relay Parameter Section” and
“Additional Information” respectively
according to the relay menu. / After naming them, you should specify “ID”, “Name”, etc. for each of the
blocks. By double-clicking on “7sj62” block on “Rio Parameter Viewer” page, “ID=CUSTOM” and “Name=7sj62”
are specified. You can also
specify “Description= Custom defined relay parameters”, “Foreign ID” and “Comment” for this block. In
“Enabled” section, by selecting “Enable” it is specified that this block is active enabled. Then, click
on “OK” to save the changes.
Likewise, double-click on “Relay Parameter Section” and specify “ID=SETTING”. Also, for the “Additional
Information” block, specify “ID=ADD_PARAM”. It should be noted that only capital letters are accepted as
“ID” and it is not possible
to use characters such as “”, “{}”, “/” etc. the only allowed character is “_”. / Next, the “Relay
Parameter Section” block is selected and three more blocks are added to its subset. The first block is
named “Device Config” and by double-clicking
on it, “ID=DC” short for Device Config. is specified. To add a parameter to this block, right-click on
it and select “Add Parameter”; then select the parameter type from the options available in the
“Enumeration” on the “Parameter Type”
window. Then, the list of “Enumerations” of this parameter is specified on the “Edit Enumeration Items”
window and for each “Enumeration”, “IDstring” and “Valuestring” is entered. For example, the first
“Enumeration” with “ID=TXT_1_101”
and “Value=Disabled”, the second “Enumeration” with “ID=TXT_2_101” and “Value=Definite Time” and the
third “Enumeration” with “ID=TXT_1_101” and “Value=Time Overcurrent” are specified. By clicking on “OK”,
this parameter is added to the
box on the right side and a “Name” and an “ID” should be specified for it. By double-clicking on “State”
column, “Rio Parameter Viewer” window opens and “ID=OC_101”, “Name=50/51” and “Description=Time
Overcurrent” are specified for the
parameter. / / / Next, rename the second block to “Power System Data” and by double-clicking on it,
specify “ID=PS” short for Power System. Then, add another block named “CT’s” with “ID=CT” to the subset
of this block. Now, add a “Real”
type parameter to this block. “Real” type is used for parameters with numerical value. By
double-clicking on “State” column, on this window, specify “ID=CT_PRIMARY”, “Name=CT PRIMARY”,
“Value=300”, “Min Value=10”, “Max Value=5000” and
“Unit=A” for the parameter. This time add an “Enumeration” type parameter and specify two “Enumerations”
with “ID=TXT_1_201”, “Value=1A”, “ID=TXT_2_201” and “Value=5A”. Then, by double-clicking on “State”
column, specify “ID=CT_SEC” and
“Name=CT Secondary”. / / Now, to proceed, press “F2” button and rename the third block to “Setting
Group” and by double-clicking on it, specify “ID=SG” short for Setting Group. By using “Ctrl+B”
combination key, add another block to the
subset of this block and name It “50/51”; then double-click on it and specify “ID=ID_50_51” for this
block. Add two more blocks with the names of “50” and “51” to the subset of this block and specify
“ID=ID_50” and “ID=ID_51” for them
respectively. / In the “50” block which includes the function “50”, add “Time Delay 50” and “Pickup 50”
parameters according to the aforementioned information. As an example, for “Pickup 50” parameter,
information such as “ID=PICKUP_50”
and “Name=Pickup 50” are specified on “Rio Parameter Viewer” window. / Likewise, add two parameters to
block “51”. After adding these two parameters with names of “Pickup 51” and “Time Dial 51”, you should
add another parameter in which
curve function “51” is specified. This parameter is of “Enumeration” type with two “Enumerations” and
with “ID=TXT_1_51”, “Value=Normal Inverse”, “ID=TXT_2_51” and “Value=Very Inverse”. Then, double-click
on “State” column and specify
“ID=CURVE_51” and “Name=IEC_Curve”. / / Add a block named “Relay Information” with “ID=RI” short for
Relay Information to the subset of “Additional Parameter” block. In this new block, information such as
time and current tolerances are
entered which are specified according to the manual of the relay. To do this, press “Ctrl+P”, select a
“Real” type parameter and specify “ID=I_TOL_ABS1” and “Name=I Tolerance abs” for this parameter and then
according to the manual of
the relay, specify “10mA” as its “Value”. Add more parameters to this block with names of “Operate
Time”, “t-Tolerance rel”, t-Tolerance abs”, “I-Tolerance abs5” and “I-Tolerance rel5”. The information
related to these parameters is mentioned
on each line. So far, the information about “Relay Parameter Section” and “Additional Information” for
the overcurrent function is provided simply and briefly. Also, the structure of “XRio Converter” is
completely covered. Now, whether
these blocks are enabled should be determined. / /
WRITING FORMULA FOR THE “XRIO CONVERTER” 3 So far, “Relay Parameter Section” and “Additional
Information” for an Overcurrent function have been explained simply and briefly; also we have completely
covered the structure of “XRio Converter”
menu. Now we should talk about determining whether these blocks and parameters are enabled. / Enabling
and disabling blocks: “50/51” block is located under the subcategory of “Setting Group”. To associate
the enabling of “50/51” block
to the parameter measure of “50/51” in the “Device Config” block, double-click on “50/51” block and
select “Formula” in “Enabled” section. Then, click on “…” icon to open “XRio Formula Editor” window. The
parameter with which the enabling
of “50/51” block is associated should be entered in “References” section. / To enter the intended
parameter, click on “+” to open “Add Ref.Param” window. From the box at the top of the page, select
“50/51” parameter from the tree diagram
of “XRio Converter” file in the “Device Config” block. After selecting this parameter, by clicking on
“Add RefParam”, “50/51” parameter is added to the “References” in the “Ref.Params” section.
“Enumerations” of this parameter are listed
at the bottom of the page in the form of a tree diagram. Select your intended “Enumeration” and click on
“Add RefEnum” to add the enumeration to “Ref. Enums” section. “Enumeration=Disabled” with “ID=TXT_1_101”
is selected here. After closing
this window, you can view the path to each parameter in the “Path” column. Paths are displayed by using
the “ID” of each block. For example, “50/51” parameter with “ID=OC_101” is located along the path of
“CUSTOM”, “SETTING” and “ID” blocks.
Also, for writing the formula, “ID” of these parameters is used. / / / In the right box, it is specified
that if there is a parameter with “ID=OC_101” and “Enumeration=Disabled”, “50/51” block should be
enabled. This formula is written
as “NOT OC_101=TXT_1_101”. After clicking on “Test”, if a message saying “Test was successful” is
displayed, the formula is correct and there is no problem. If a tiny change is made to the formula, for
example the “ID” is changed, by clicking
on “Test” a message saying that there is no parameter with “ID=TXT_2_101” will be displayed. Then, by
clicking on “OK” two more messages will be displayed saying that the displayed formula is not correct
and the last message says “Test
was not successful”. By correcting the formula and closing the “XRio Formula Editor” window, you can see
that the status of the block is “False” and this block, displayed with an “X” sign, is disabled. If the
measure of “50/51” parameter
is changed in the “Device Config” block, Value=Definite Time, the “50/51” block is enabled and the “X”
mark is removed. / / / Likewise, it is possible to associate enabling or disabling of other blocks with
one or several parameters. Like
the previous situation, a formula should be written for “50” block. By repeating the previous stages and
selecting “50/51” parameter and “Enumeration=Disabled” with “ID=TXT_1_101”, a formula should be written
for the activeness of this
parameter on the “XRio Formula Editor”. This formula is written as “NOT OC_101=TXT_1_101”. So, whenever
“50/51” block is enable, this block should be enable as well. Click on “Test” to validate the written
formula and in the end click
on “OK”. / For enabling of “51” block, double-click on it and select “Formula”. After opening the “Add
Ref.Param” window, select “50/51 parameter and “Enumerations” of “Disabled” and “Definite Time”. In
fact, “51” block is enabled when
enumerations of “Disabled” and “Definite Time” are not selected. Then, the formula is written as “NOT
OC_101=TXT_1_101_ AND NOT OC_101=TXT_2_101”. Click on “Test” to validate the formula and finally click
on “OK”. If “Definite Time” is
selected as the value of “50/51” parameter in the “Device Config” block, “50/51” and “50” blocks are
enabled while “51” block is disabled. If “Time Overcurrent” is selected as the value of “50/51”
parameter, all three blocks are enabled.
/ / Enabling and disabling parameters: In each block, it is possible to associate Enabling of parameters
with another parameter. For example, in “51” block, “IEC Curve” parameter is enable when “Time
Overcurrent” is selected as the value
of “50/51” parameter. To do this, double-click on “State” column and select “Formula” from the “Enabled”
section. By clicking on “…”icon in the “XRio Formula Editor” window like the previous example, in the
“Add Ref.Param” window “50/51”
parameter and “Enumeration=Time Overcurrent” with “ID=TXT_3_101” are selected and added to the
“References” section. The formula is written as “OC_101=TXT_3_101” at the right side and by clicking on
“Test” the validity of the formula is
examined and the “OK” is selected. If in “Device Config” block, “Time Overcurrent” is selected as the
value of “50/51” parameter, “IEC Curve” parameter is enabled while if “Definite Time” is selected, “IEC
Curve” parameter is disabled.
/ /
WRITING FORMULA FOR “XRIO CONVERTER”4 After completing the information regarding “Relay Parameter
Section” and “Additional Information” sections, it is necessary to-you should- complete information of
the “Rio” section as well. In “Rio” section,
by double-clicking on any block, a window, which includes information about parameters of that block,
opens; this information is also available in the tree diagram of that block. For example, parameters
like “Device Name”, “Manufacturer”,
etc. are located in “Name Plate” block. It is possible to assign a value to these parameters directly or
associate them with parameters from “Custom” section by using formulas. In this video, necessary
parameters for an overcurrent function
are linked to values from the “Custom” section. Note that in writing a formula, the “ID” of each
parameter is used. / Linking parameters of “Rio” section: In this video –the target- our goal is to
complete the information regarding the
“51” function. “In”, “I prim”, etc. parameters are located at the “Nominal Values” section. To link
values of the “In” parameter with the values of “XRio”, it is necessary to define a formula for this
parameter. To do so, after double-clicking
on “State” column, in “Rio Parameter Viewer” window from “Value Properties” section, click on “…” icon
in the “Formula” field to open “XRio Formula Editor” window. On this window, first the intended
parameter CT Secondary should be entered.
To do this, click on “+” and in “Add Ref.Param” window, select “CT Secondary” parameter from the “XRio”
tree diagram. Then, select “Enumeration=1A” and “ID=TXT_1_201” from the box at the bottom of the page to
add them to the “References”
section. -For The “In” parameter when the “CT Secondary” parameter’s “Enumeration=1A” ,the value of the
parameter “In=1A”; otherwise, it should be “5A”. To write this formula, the “If” command is used in a
way that the final formula is
“IIfCT_SEC=TXT_1_201,1,5”. Then, click on “Test” to validate the formula. In the “Result” section,
“Result Value=1A”. Finally, click on “OK” to save the settings. / / / You can see that the color of
“Value” cell of “In” parameter is turned
into purple which means that its value is associated with another parameter based on the formula in the
“Formula” column. Also, by clicking on “Reference map”, you can see that the value of this parameter is
linked to another parameter.
By double-clicking on the box of the parameter, the given address for this parameter CT Secondary is
displayed. If the value of this parameter is changed to “5A”, the value of “In” parameter changes
accordingly. The value of “I prim” parameter
is linked to the value of “CT Primary” parameter in the same way. By following the mentioned steps, “CT
Primary” parameter is added to the “References” section. Because this parameter is of the “Real” type
and lacks “Enumeration”, to write
the formula, only the phrase “CT_PRIMARY” is entered. The written formula means that the “I prim”
parameter will have the same value as the “CT Primary” parameter. / / / / “Overcurrent” block: After
completing “Device” block, information
of the “Overcurrent” block should be completed. By double-clicking on this block, you can see that there
is a series of parameters in “Relay Parameters” and “Elements” tabs which are also available from the
“Overcurrent” tree diagram separately.
Also, in the “General” block, parameters such as “Time Tolerance Relative”, “Time Tolerance Absolute”,
Current Tolerance Relative” and “Current Tolerance Minimum” are available. The information regarding
these parameters is available from
“Relay Information” block in “Custom” section. These parameters should be used in the “Rio” section as
well. It should be noted that the value of “Reference Current” parameter is, by default, linked to the
value of “INOM” parameter in
the “Nominal Values” block. Double-click on the “State” column in “Time Tolerance Relative” parameter
and on “Rio Parameter Viewer” window, click on “…” option. On the “XRio Formula Editor” window in the
“References” section, after clicking
on “+”, “t-Tolerance rel” parameter is added to the “References” section from the “XRio” tree diagram.
Then, the formula is written in form of “TTOLREL”. Next, click on “TEST” and after “Test was successful”
message is displayed, click
on “OK”. A “5%” value is displayed in the “Result Value” section. Likewise, the value of “Time Tolerance
Absolute” and “Current Tolerance Relative” parameters are linked to and associated with the values of
“t-Tolerance abs” and “I-Tolerance
rel” parameters. In the manual of the relay, “Current Tolerance Minimum” parameter is stated as that
there is at least “10mA" and “50mA" current error in “1A” and “5A” nominal currents respectively. To
state this parameter in the software,
the formula should be written as “0.01*Inom”. First, it should be determined whether the nominal current
is “1A” or “5A”. Because the “Current Tolerance Minimum” parameter is stated in accordance with “IREF”,
to write the formula, “CT
Secondary” and “Reference Current” parameters and “Enumeration=1A” with “ID=TXT_1_201” are should be
selected and added to “References” section. Finally, the formula is written as
“0.01*ifCT_SEC=TXT_1_201,1,5/IREF”. / / / / Note that in
the “CT” block, the values of “IPrim” and “ISec” parameters are, by default, linked to the values of
“IPRIM” and “INOM” parameters in “Nominal Values” section. Moreover, the parameters of “VT”, “Neutral
CT” and “Residual VT” blocks are,
by default, linked to the values of “XRio Converter”. The “Timed Overcurrent Element” subcategory in the
“Overcurrent Elements” block gives us information about “50/51” function like “Pickup” current and
operation time. As mentioned before,
in this video, our goal is to complete the information of “51” function. To activate “51” block,
double-click on “OverCurrent” block. Then, in the “Element” tab double click on “Tripping
Characteristic” column and select “IEC Normal Inverse”
curve from the “Manage / Select characteristic” window and then click on “OK”. Then, in the “Operating
Curves” block, you can see that the “51” curve is defined as an “IEC Normal Inverse” and the information
about this curve is displayed
as well. / / /
WRITING FORMULA FOR “XRIO CONVERTER”5 In the previous video, the information regarding “Device”
block and some parts of “Overcurrent” block such as “General”, “CT” and “VT” were completely covered. As
mentioned before, under the “Elements”
tab by double-clicking on “Overcurrent” block, “Normal Inverse” curve is selected for “51” function; the
information related to this curve is located in “Overcurrent Elements” block. Now we are going to
complete the “Overcurrent Elements”
block information. / Enabling a characteristic curve: As you can see, activeness or inactiveness of the
characteristic curves is determined in “Active” column. To link the value of this parameter which is
located in the “Timed Overcurrent
Element” block, by following the mentioned steps in previous videos, in “Add Ref.Param” window in
“Device Config” block, “50/51” parameter with “Enumeration=Time Overcurrent IEC” and “ID=TXT_3_101” is
selected and in “51” block, “IEC Curve”
parameter with “Enumeration=Normal Inverse” with “ID=TXT_1_51” is selected and added to “References”
section. Then, the formula is written as “OC_101=TXT_3_101 AND CURVE_51=TXT_1_51”. To validate the
written formula, click on “Test” and
finally click on “OK”. / / Determining the value of lpickuup.nom: The parameters related to “Ipickup”
current and its tolerances are located in “Pick up Current” block. To link the current value of
“Ipickup” whose value is a coefficient
of “IREF”, double click on “State” column and by clicking on icon “…” in “Value Properties” section,
click on “+” on “XRio Formula Editor” window and select parameter “Pickup 51” from “51” block and
“Reference Current” parameter from “General”
block on the “XRio” tree diagram to add them to “References” section. Then, using the “ID” of added
parameters, the formula is written in the box at the right side as “PICKUP_51/IREF”. The formula is
validated by clicking on “Test”. The
value of “Ipickup.nom” parameter is calculated in accordance with that the value of “Pickup 51=1A” in
“51” block and the value of “CT Secondary=1A” in “CT’S” block. / / / Determining the current tolerances:
To link the value of “Tolerance
Absolute Positive” parameter with “Current Tolerance Minimum” parameter, by following the mentioned
steps from the “XRio” tree diagram, in the “General” and “Overcurrent” blocks from the “Rio” section,
the “Current Tolerance Minimum” parameter
is added to “References” section and the formula is written as “CURRENTTOLABS” in the box at the right
side and then the formula is validated. / Likewise, the values of “Tolerance Absolute Negative",
“Tolerance Relative Positive” and “Tolerance
Relative Negative” parameters are linked with parameters with “ID=CURRENTTOLABS”, “ID=CURRENTTOLREL” and
“ID=CURRENTTOLREL” respectively. The “Tolerance Actual Positive” parameter selects the highest amount of
positive tolerance from “Tolerance
Absolute Positive” and “Tolerance Relative Positive” and based on a percentage of “IREF” puts it in its
“Value” field. So, by following the previous steps and adding “Ref.Params”, the formula is written as
“MaxTOLABSPOS,TOLRELPOS*NOMVAL/100”
and validated. / / “Tolerance Actual Negative” parameter is almost the same as the previous parameter.
The only difference is that it calculates the highest amount of negative tolerance and its formula is
written as “MaxTOLABSNEG,TOLRELNEG*NOMVAL/100”.
Also, for “Test Positive” parameter, the formula is written as “NOMVAL+TOLACTPOS+NOMVAL*TESTTOL/100”.
This parameter shows the maximum total error of the test which may occur because of measurement error of
current transformers, test device,
noise, etc. in “Test Negative” parameter, the formula is written as “NOMVAL – TOLACTNEG –NOMVAL *
TESTTOL / 100” which shows the minimum total error of the test. / Determining trip time and the range of
relay performance: After determining
current tolerances, the information related to “Time Multiplier/Trip Time” block should be completed. In
this block, by following the mentioned steps, the value of “Nom.Time Multiplier” parameter should be
linked with “Time Dial 51” parameter
which is located in “51” block. / According to “IEC” standard, the “Ipickup” current value of relays can
range from “1.1” times to “1.3” times of the nominal current. Based on the manual of this relay, “1.1”
is selected for this relay
which means that the relay must not “Pickup” less than the determined current. This parameter is located
in “Min Operate Current” block with the name of “Nom.Min.Op.Curr” and its value should be linked with
“1.1” times of the nominal current.
So, the formula is written as “1.1*NOMVAL”. According to “IEC” standard, if the injected current is
bigger than “20” times of the nominal current, the relay should give a trip at a “Definite” time. This
parameter is located in “Max Operate
Current” block with the name of “Nom.Max.Op.Curr” but in this video, we skipped entering the information
of this parameter. It should be noted that the activeness of “Range Limits” value should be linked with
another parameter in “Device
Config” block. This parameter is located in “Timed Overcurrent Element” block with the name of “Use
Range Limits”. By repeating the mentioned steps for linking and selecting the “50/51” parameter and
“Enumeration=Time Overcurrent IEC”
with “ID=TXT_3_101”, the formula is written as “OC_101=TXT_3_101” and after testing, the “OK” option is
selected. You can find this parameter in “Elements” tab of “Overcurrent” block. If this option is
enabled, the relay must not “Pickup”
in current values less than “lmin”. / / / Final review: The information regarding the curve is mentioned
in the tree diagram of “Operating Curves” and “Standard Curve” blocks. / You can view the changes made
by double-clicking on “Overcurrent”
block. Under the “Relay Parameters” tab, the tolerance values are derived from the determined formula
and its cell color is turned purple. Also, under the “Elements” tab, the parameters for which a formula
is determined are turned purple.
Then, click on “Ok” so save the settings. You can see that the “Normal Inverse” curve is displayed on
“Overcurrent Characteristic” window. / / / To further examine the validity of written “XRio” file, some
cases are tested as a sample.
To do this, “Disabled” is selected in “Device Config” block and then by double-clicking on “Overcurrent”
block, you can see that the curve has been disabled. Also, by clicking on “Ok”, no curve is displayed on
“Overcurrent Characteristic”
window. / / As another example, the value of “Time Overcurrent IEC” is selected in “Device Config” block
and in “51” block, “Pickup 51=4A" is determined as the current value while “Time Dial 51=0.5” is
determined as time. In the “Overcurrent”
block it is observed that the same changes are made. For example, the minimum current value is
“Ipickup=4.4A”. After clicking on “OK”, the changes are made to “Overcurrent Characteristic” window. / /
/
COMPLEMENTARY EXPLANATIONS OF “DEVICE” SECTION Before talking about the “AMT-Sequencer” room and its
features, because there are items that are related to the “Device Setting” information, it is necessary
to provide some additional information
about this section. At the left of this page, the general information about the relay is entered. This
information includes name of the manufacturer, type of the relay, serial number, installation location
etc. As the type of information
in this section indicates, this information is used merely as report and does not affect the test or its
results. But the information at the right which is partly derived from the relay settings can be used as
a reference for determining
the voltage and current output of the device. / In “Nominal Values” section the information related to
nominal frequency and turn ratio of PT and CT are entered. From the information of this section, the PT
secondary voltage is known as
nominal voltage while the CT secondary voltage is known as nominal current. Note that in “Vprimary” and
“Vsecondary” section, it is possible to enter the ratio of transformation in line to line or phase. In
“Residual Voltage/Current Factor”
section, the coefficients of residual voltage and current for relays where the residual voltage and
current are separated from the input voltage and current are mentioned. These coefficients are used to
calculate VE and IE. In “Limits”
section, the range of maximum output voltage and current of the device are specified and the user can,
according to the type of wiring specified in “Hardware Configuration” section, determine the maximum
output voltage and current of the
device. / In the “Debounce Time” field In “Debounce/Deglitch Filter” section, it is specified that every
3 milliseconds, the device examines the signal transmission from the relay. In “Deglitch Time” section,
it is specified that the transferred
signal from the relay should be retained for 400 microseconds until the reception of signal is detected.
Note that both of these values can range from 200 to 1.5 microseconds. / By using “Save to template”
option, the information entered
in this section is saved in the software as a template and it is possible to load this template by using
the “Load Template” option. The “Import” option is used when the user wishes to use the settings of this
section on another computer
or to be able to recover the settings after cleaning the cache of the software. /
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE SEQUENCER ROOM After getting familiar with “Hardware Configuration” and “Test
Object” pages which are used for configuring the device and entering the relay characteristics, now it
is time to get familiar with the "AMT-Sequencer"
room. As mentioned in previous videos, “AMT-Seque ncer”, is the main room of the software and it is
possible to design, run and evaluate all tests of the relays and equipment from this room. To design any
test, first, it is necessary to
become familiar with the pages as well as features of this room. This room includes all windows,
diagrams and options that a user needs for doing a test. / “Table View” window: different states of
injected signal, analog and digital inputs
and outputs of the device for performing a test are created in this window as tables named “state”. /
“Detail View” window: details related to each “State”, including the type of “State”, status of “Binary
Outputs”, status of all “States”
etc. are located in this window. / “Signal View” window: the overall waveform of the output signal of
the device and “Binaries/Analog”s of inputs and outputs of the device during a test are displayed in
diagrams of this window in accordance
with the settings of every “State”. / “Vector View” window: injected signals of the device in form of
vectors, differentiating between imaginary and real values, main harmonic etc. are displayed on this
window. This window and “Signal
View” window are used to analyze the performance of the relay as well as resolving issues. /
“Measurement View” window: this window is used for time and value assessment of the results of the
performed tests. It is possible to set the
settings of this page before or after performing the test and evaluate the performance of the relay and
the tested equipment. / “Star-condition Repetition” window: this window has three main tabs where it is
possible to specify the conditions
to start the test, repetition time of every test and settings related to the test counter. / “Harmonic
Restraint View” and “Impedance View” windows: these two windows are used to view the impedance,
differential trajectory and “Power Swing”
test. /
“TABLE VIEW” WINDOW The first step in designing a test is to make different states of the test in
“Table View” window. This means that to simulate fault state, it is necessary to inject signal several
stage and receive feedback. Every stage
of the test is showed on this window in form of a table named “state” and each “state” is made of
several components. / To open the “Table View” window, it is possible to use “View” menu or the toolbar
at the top of the page. In the first
part of every “state”, RMS value, phase and frequency of the outputs of the device, which are selected
in “Hardware Configuration” part, are specified. In the first column of this part, the RMS value of the
outputs of the device is specified.
The maximum allowed value is determined in “Limits” section in “Test Object” page. In the second column,
the phase of the output signals of the device is specified which can be between 0 to 360 degrees. Also,
in the third column the frequency
of the output signals of the device are specified which can be between 0 to 1.5 kHz. If DC signal is
needed, the frequency should be specified as 0. / / / / In the “Bin. Out” section, the open/close state
of “Binary Outputs” of the device
is determined in accordance with the user’s wish. In the “Trigger” section, the conditions of “state”
completion are determined which can be based on time, by pressing “space” button by the user and, also,
based on receiving a specified
signal from the relay or a combination of all three of these conditions. It is necessary to consider
these two points: The first point is that in this section, it is possible to activate the related
condition by double-clicking on any
of the icons. To adjust the settings related to the “Inputs” you can do so from “Detail View” window or
simply by checking “Trigger Condition” option. / The second point: these conditions have “OR” logic with
each other. This means that
if several conditions are met, if one of them is true, the current “state” ends. In the next section the
type of “state” is determined which can be selected from the available drop-down list. Note that each of
these types is described
in “Detail View” section. In “Bin. Input” section, the momentarily receival state of signal on every
activated binary inputs is specified. In the “Comment” section, any important note about each “state” is
recorded by the user. Note that
entering information in this section is only possible in “Detail View” page. / Right-click on “Table
View” window RMS value column By right-clicking on any column of the “Table View” window, a list
containing several options opens. Each
of these options is designed for a specific purpose. After right-clicking on the column related to “RMS”
value, by selecting “Nominal Value”, the amount of current and voltage in each cell is changed to
specified nominal values in “Device”
block in “Test Object” page. By selecting “Zero” it is possible to set the cell value to zero. If the
user wishes the voltage or current in all three phases to be equal to the selected cell value, they can
select the “Equal Magnitudes”
option. Also by checking “Link Magnitude” option, the values of all three phases will be linked
together. It should be noted that if two groups of voltage or current are activated from “Hardware
Configuration”, you can see that the three
phases of group A are linked together while the three phases of Group B are linked together. To better
understand this, enter 2amps as the current for one of the phases of group A and enter 4amps as the
current for one of the phases of
group B. / / The “100% Load” option is used for changing the current to nominal value. The “50% Load”
option is used for changing the current to half of the nominal value and the “Unloaded” option is used
for changing the current to zero.
Note that by selecting any of these options, the voltage is changed to the nominal value. If the user
copies the values of voltage and current by right-clicking in “Vector View” window and selecting “Copy
to Clipboard”, by selecting “Paste
From Vector View Clipboard” in “Table View” window they can paste these values in their intended
“state”. Also, by clicking on “L1L2L3-L3L1L2” option, the rotation of the phases as well as their values
will change. / / “Link to XRio” option
enables the user to relate the value of voltage, current, phase or frequency to any desired parameter in
“XRio”. By selecting this option, “Link to XRio” window opens where the desired parameter can be
selected. For example, in the “XRio”
tree diagram in “Rio” section, in “Nominal Value” branch in “Device” block, the “In” parameter is
selected. Also, it is possible to multiply the selected parameter by a specific value or add it to a
specific value which is, finally, displayed
in the box at the bottom. On the top right of this window it is possible to search a parameter. By
checking “Filter by Sender Unit” on the left, all “XRio” parameters which have the same “unit” with the
selected parameter in “Sequencer”
are marked. / After linking the intended voltage, you can see that the selected cell is turned purple
which indicates that this cell is linked with a value from the “XRio”. By selecting “Go to Linked
Value”, it is possible to view that
the selected parameter in “Sequencer” is linked with which parameter in “XRio”. If the user does not
wish the parameter to be linked with “XRio”, it is possible to remove the link by selecting “Remove
Link” option. / Phase column / By
right-clicking on this column and selecting “Line Angle”, the angles of the selected voltage or current
will equal with angle value of transmission line. It is possible to view and adjust this value in
“Distance” block in “Test Object”
page. By selecting “Zero”, it is possible to set the selected voltage or current to zero. If the user
wishes to have the minimum amount of received current in the beginning of voltage injection, by
selecting "90°" option, the phase of
the injected voltage is set to 90 degrees. Balance Angle” option is selected for each cell, the related
signal is selected as the reference signal and other phases are set at a degree with a 120 degrees,
degree of difference with the reference
signal. The “Reverse Rotation” option does the same in counterclockwise. This means that if this option
is selected for a cell, regardless of its phase value, -120 degrees is Added to the next phase,
respectively. By clicking on “Link
angles Equals”, the angles of all three phases are equated and if one of them is changed, the others
change accordingly. Also, the “Link angles Balance” option causes that if one of the phases is changed,
the others change with a 120 degree
difference. “Frequency” Column By selecting the “Nominal Value” from the options available for this
column, the frequency value in each cell is changed to its nominal value in the “Device” block in the
“Test Object” page. By selecting
“DC”, the frequency is changed to zero and it is possible to produce “DC” signal. / If the user wishes
all the frequency values to be equal, the “Equal Frequency” option can be used. By selecting this option
for any cell, the frequency
of other signals is set equal to the selected cell."Link Frequency" links all values of the frequencies
with each other. This means that if one of the frequencies is changed, the other frequencies change the
same amount as well and all
the signals will always have the same frequency. If you need signals with different frequencies, you
should uncheck this option. Decaying signal If you wish to create “DC” decaying signal, after setting
the frequency to zero, it is possible
to enter the time constant in the phase column. As you know, the relation of a decaying signal is
written as “A*e^-t*T”. In this relation “A” is amplitude while “T” is the opposite of time constant.
This means that the number you enter
is the “T”. / /.
THE SEPARATE TOOLBAR OF “TABLE VIEW” WINDOW By double-clicking on any window in the software it is
possible to maximize it and by repeating the double-click it is possible to restore the previous state.
The separate toolbar of the “Table View”
window is located in the second row at the top of the “Vebko AMPro” software in the “Sequencer” room. By
using the “New State” option, it is possible to create a new “State”. This “State” will be placed after
the last created “State”.
This is equal to the “Append” option available by right-clicking anywhere at the top of any “State”.
When there are multiple “States”, it is possible to make the intended “State” smaller by double-clicking
on it or clicking on the cog
icon and selecting “Small Mode”. / / / / By using the “Delete State” option, it is possible to delete a
“State”. This option contains “Selected State” and “Unselected State”. As you can see, there is a small
square at the top of every
“State”. By checking this square, you can select this “State”. If when deleting a “State”, “Selected
State” option is selected, all of the states whose “Square” has been checked will be deleted. If
“Unselected State” is selected, all “States”
whose square has not been checked will be deleted. You can view this option by right-clicking on the
ribbon at the top of any “State” and selecting the “Delete” option. Moreover, by selecting a “State” and
right-clicking on it and then
selecting “Delete” or “Delete State” option from the toolbar, it is possible to delete that “State”. / /
/ If the user wishes to add a “State” and place this new “State” in a specific order, they can use
“Insert Before” and “Insert After”
options. In this case, the user clicks on a “State” and then selects “Insert Before” to add a new
“State” with similar information before the current “State”. By clicking on a “State” for the second
time, the user can place the new “State”
after the current “State” by selecting “Insert After”. It is, also, possible to view these options by
right-clicking on any “State”. To create an impedance shot in the “Sequencer” room, “Insert Z Shot”
option can be used. By selecting
this option, a window named “Insert Impedance Shot” opens where you can adjust the value of the
parameters. In “Line Parameters” section, impedance of the line as well as its angle can be specified.
To change these values, you should go
to the “TestObject” page in the “Distance” block. In “Fault Parameters”, the error information is
specified. The type of the error, the location of the error in form of a relation of length of the line
and the error current are specified
in “Fault Type” section, “Location” and “Itest” section respectively. / / In “Time Setting” section, the
time related to “Prefault”, “Maxfault” and “Postfault” “States” and also the delay time of the circuit
breaker operation is specified.
This value should be adjusted from the “CBConfiguration” block in “TestOject” page. In
“Trigger/Measurement” section, the reception contact of “Trip” signal is specified and in the slide bar
of that section, the active binaries of the
device are displayed. You can see that only the binary number one is active here. Also, in “Tnom”,
“Tdev+” and “Tdev-“section, it is possible to adjust the nominal time for reception of “Trip” with the
values of positive and negative tolerance
for evaluation of the test in the “Measurement View” window. By selecting the "Insert Z Shot" option,
three "States" are created consecutively after the current "State” with the names of "Prefault",
"Maxfault" or "L1L2L3, 100%" and "Postfault". This
can be done, also, by right-clicking on any of the “States” and selecting “Insert Z Shot”. / The
“Default State” option in the right-click menu of “States” returns all values of “States” to the default
settings in the “Device” block in
“TestObject” page. “Select File to Merge” option is used when the user wishes to import the information
of several “States” to his page from a saves test file. By selecting this option, the corresponding
window opens and in “Select File”
section, by selecting “Browse”, you can select your intended file. By doing so, the “States” existent in
the intended file are displayed. By checking any of these “States”, you can select that “State” to
import its information to the current
page. Then, in the section related to “Insert Information”, the intended location for importing the
“State” is specified. In “Location” section, it is specified that the “State” should be added before or
after the current “State” and in
“Current State” section, it is possible to determine the current “State”. Finally, by selecting “Add”
you can import the information. / / The next option is “Copy & Paste of State” and by selecting it, the
corresponding window opens. In
“States List For Copy” section of this window, the list of currently available “States” opens and by
checking any of them, it is possible to select the information of that “State” for copying and in the
“Options For Paste” section, just
like the previous part, the location for pasting the “State” is specified. Also, in “Repetition”
section, you can specify how many times this copying procedure is to be repeated. You can do this by
using the options available in the right-click
menu or any “State”. By clicking on “Paste State”, you can paste the copied “State” information to the
current “State”. If the user has changed the name of “States” and wishes to restore the default name of
the “States”, the “Correct Names
of States” option can be used. / The last part has two options which are related to displaying the
signal of “States” in the “Signal View” window. By selecting “All States”, it is possible to view the
voltage and current signals of all
“States” in “Signal View” but if “Current State” is selected, it is only possible to view the signals of
the current “State” in the “Signal View”. At the left of the toolbar, the number of “States” and “State”
numbers are displayed. In
this section, it is possible to move to after and before the current “State” as well as the last and
first “State” by using “Next State”, “Previous State”, “Last State” and “First State” respectively. / /
/
“DETAIL VIEW” TAB / After creating different “States” for the test in “Table View” window, it is
necessary to specify the details of each “State” separately in “Detail View” window. To open this
window, click on “Detail View” from the “View”
menu or click on “Detail View” icon from the toolbar at the top of the page. you can Also keep “Alt” key
and press left click or press mouse scroller to open “Detail View” as “Pop up” Style. / / “Analog Out”
tab: Generally, in the “Analog
Out” tab, the details related to each “State” including output voltage and currents of the device, the
type of “State”, the state of input and output binaries of the device, the ending conditions of each
“State” and some other settings
are mentioned. / “Binary Out” tab: In this tab, the settings related to opening and closing the active
output binaries of the device and their connection with each other are adjusted. / “Trigger” tab: In
“Trigger” tab, the ending conditions
of each “State” and some settings related to the “Overcurrent” errors of the device are adjusted.
Moreover, the comments of the testing person are recorded in the comment box of this section. / “Serial”
tab: This tab is used to send a
series of hardware codes in form of a “Packet” from the “AMT105” to an external instrument. / “Report
Setting” tab: This tab is used for the report settings of every “State”. It is possible to add or remove
the characteristics of the selected
“State” to or from the report. In future videos, every introduced section along with its details will be
explained separately. /.
ANALOG OUT TAB In the beginning of this video, we close the “Measurement View” window and change the
size of other windows. In “State Type” section, the type of “State” is selected from the “State Type”
dropdown field and in the “State Name”
field a name Vebko is selected for the “State”. / In “Set Mode and Fault Type” section, the outputs of
the device are specified according to parameters and types of faults. For example, in “Direct” mode, the
output voltage and current
of the device are determined directly but in “Line-Line” mode, the user specifies values of the line
voltage and the zero sequence voltage, and the device produces the output voltage and current values in
accordance with those other values.
It should be noted that in this video, the instruction is done in “Direct” mode and descriptions about
different “Set Modes” will be provided in future videos. / In “Binary Outputs” box, the state of binary
Outputs of the device are specified
where the user can enable or disable any binary according to the condition of the test. Moreover, from
the “Binary Out” tab the user can adjust the settings related to binary Outputs in more details. / In
“Binary Inputs” section, the state
of active binaries of the device and the reception time of contact is specified. “Trigger setting”
section: In “Comment” field, the user can add a note about the current “State”. This note is, also,
viewable from the “Table View” window,
“Comment” field. In “State Termination” section, the user determines the conditions for termination of
the current “State” and initiation of the next “State”. In “Timeout” field, the signal injection time is
determined by the user and
after that the test ends or goes to the next “State”. / / / If the user wishes to specify conditions to
terminate the current “State” according to reception of “Pickup” and “Trip” signals from the relay, they
need to use the “Use binary
trigger condition as specified below” option. To do this, first, the needed binaries should be enabled
from the “Hardware Configuration” page. Then, in “Binary Trigger Condition” section, the condition of
each binary for terminating the
current “State” is specified. The conditions that the user can use are mentioned in the slide bar in
front of each contact. Condition “0”, no contact has been received by the binary. Condition “1”, the
binary, has received “Pick Up” or
“Trip” contact. Condition “0 - 1”, the binary is first in “0” condition no contact received and then
“Pick up” or “Trip” contact is received. In this condition, it is necessary for the binary to detect “0”
to “1” signal. Condition “1 -
0”, the binary is, at first, in condition “1” contact received and then the contact is removed from the
binary. In this condition, it is necessary for the binary to detect “1” to “0” signal. Condition “1 -
0”. “0 - 1”, if the binary detects
any of the conditions “0 - 1” or “1 - 0”, the termination command of “State” is made. Condition “X”
means there is no condition determined for “State” termination of this binary. It should be noted that
if more than one condition is determined
for “State” termination, the user needs to choose one logic from “AND” and “OR” logics from the “Trigger
Logic” section to apply to the determined conditions. By using the “AND” logic, to terminate the “State”
all conditions should be
met while by using “OR” logic, if any of the conditions is met, the “State” is terminated. It should be
noted that all this setting can be adjusted in “Binary Inputs” box by checking “Trigger Condition”. In
this section in “Detail View”
window, by checking “Show Time from this State” option, the contact reception time origin since the
current “State” started is specified. Also, if you wish only for the last binaries state change to be
displayed, check “Show only last
change” and select one from among “1”, “0” and “0&1” radio-buttons in accordance with your needs. “0&1”
option displays the last state of zero and one. It should be reminded that in the default mode of the
software, if the binary is open
circuited, it means that no contact is received and when the two ends of the binary are short circuited
it means that contact has been received. This setting can be adjusted by changing the value of each
binary from “True” to “False” in
“Reverse” column of the “Hardware Configuration” page. / / For example, from the “Hardware
Configuration” window and “Binary / Analog Input”, 6 binaries are selected with specific active
“Targets”. Then, in “Trigger” section, the conditions
of the binary are set at "0"، "1"،"1 ˃˗ 0"، 0 ˃˗ 1، 0 ˃˗ 1 . 1 ˃˗ 0 and X and “OR” is selected as the
logic between them. In this case, by fulfilling any of condition, the current state is terminated but if
“AND” logic is selected, all
conditions must be fulfilled for the “State” to be terminated. Note that in “State Termination” section,
between “Time Out”, “Space Key Press” and “Use Binary trigger condition as specified below” there is an
“OR” logic and if they are
selected simultaneously, if any of the conditions is fulfilled , the current “State” is terminated. By
using “Trigger Logic Minimum Time”, the user specifies that how long the determined condition should
last for the “State” to be terminated.
It should be noted that this feature only works on conditions “1” and “0”. In the field related to
“Delay after Binary Trigger”, the user makes a delay time between when the condition is fulfilled and
when the “State” is terminated. For
example, to simulate key performance delay, if 50 milliseconds is entered in this field, the current
“State” is terminated after a 50 milliseconds delay and the key cutoff time is simulated. View videos of
“Synchronizer Room” to see how
“Synchronizer Mode” works. In “Other Setting” section, by checking “Disable Error Other”, errors of
“Other” type are disabled in the current “State”. Also, by checking “Disable Error Overvoltage of
Binary”, the “Overvoltage” errors of
the analog binary inputs of the device are disabled in the current “State”. / In the "Error/Trigger
Overcurrent" box a condition for the software overcurrent error or the termination of the state in case
high current extraction is specified.
By selecting "Overcurrent trigger" if the current extracted is more than 2A from the device, current
state terminate. Therefore the software applies the next "state" and if it’s the last "state" the test
ends without giving any error message.
/ In “Overcurrent” section, the user adjusts the settings related to “Overcurrent” error of the outputs
of the voltage outputs. Note that the maximum current of each output is 400 milliamps and 2amps in
transient state. In the field related
to “Percent Error Overcurrent”, the maximum voltage output current is specified in percent and in the
field related to “Threshold Error Overcurrent”, the maximum output current is specified as a number for
the “Overcurrent” error. For
example, if in the “Percent Error Overcurrent” field 90 percent is entered, if the output current of the
device reaches to 90 percent of the voltage output current, which is 1.8 amps, the device errors. Also,
if in the “Threshold Error
Overcurrent” field, 1 amps is entered, as soon as the current drawn from the voltage outputs exceeds 1
amps, the “Overcurrent” error is displayed and the test stops. “Disable Relay” section: Generally, the
device works in a way that there
are relays embedded behind all current and voltage outputs of the device. Before the test, all
amplifiers of the device are off and all relays are open. By “Running” the test, the amplifiers turn on
in 20 milliseconds, then, for 20 milliseconds
the device produces a 60 volts voltage and 5 amps current and then examines that there is no
“Self-calibration” error. After that, for 20 milliseconds, zero current and voltage are produced behind
the current and voltage outputs. After
these steps, the relays close. Now, after 100 milliseconds, the voltage and current of the test are
created. By doing this before the test, the device is isolated from any outside voltage. Also, the
amplifiers are off and the device is
silent. By checking the box next to the title of every output in each “State”, the related relay opens
and no more voltage or current is sent to the outputs. For example, to test “Magnetic Balance” of the
transformer, it is necessary to
open circuit some wiring in some state which it is done by disabling the relay of the related phase in
the device.
QUICK TYPE because “State Type: Quick” is very useful, for this “State Type”, there is a “Layout”
named “Default Layout for Quick” designed for this “State Type” in “Window” menu. In this “Layout”,
“Detail View”, “Signal View”, “Impedance
View” and “Vector View” windows are located by default. / To describe this “State Type” and to view the
outputs, it is better to maximize only “Detail View” and “Signal View” windows. In this “State Type” it
is possible to, either manually
or automatically, adjust the voltage and current signal output of the device in form of an increasing or
decreasing ramp. In this “State Type” the user can create an increasing or decreasing ramp not only on
the amplitude of signals but
also on phase and frequency values. In “Analog Out” tab in “State Type” section, “Quick” is selected
from the slide bar and in the “State Name” field, a name is selected for the intended “State”.
Description about “State Type: Quick” is
provided in “General: Direct “mode. In this mode, the voltage and current signals are initialized
directly. To create an increasing or decreasing ramp on outputs of the device, information of “Analog
Output Channels” and “Step Values”
tables should be completed. “Analog Output Channels” table In this table the start value of signals is
entered which indicates the start point of the ramp. This start value can be entered for all three
parameters amplitude, phase and frequency
of current or voltage. It should be noted that it is possible to use ramp on both voltage and current
signals simultaneously. For example, the start values of voltage signals are “10”, “15”, and “20” volts
and “2”, “3” and “4” amps for
current signals. Other information related to “Analog Output Channels” has been described before. “Step
Values” table In this table, the value of “Step” to increase or decrease signals is entered. In this
table it is possible to enter
the “Step” value for all three parameters amplitude, phase and frequency. This means that it is possible
to increase or decrease all these parameters simultaneously with different or the same amplitudes. At
the top of this table, by checking
“Simple mode L1-L2-L3”, you will have the same steps for all three voltage or current phases. After
checking this option in “Voltage” and “Current” sections, the parameter on which we wish to create a
ramp is selected from the slide bar
in the “Ramp on” section. Then, the “Step” value is entered in “Step Value” field. After unchecking
“Simple modeL1-L2-L3”, in “Step Values” table, “1”, “2” and “3” volts are entered for voltage signals as
ramp values while for current
signals, “0.1”, “0.2” and “0.3” amps are entered as ramp values. By checking “Enable mouse wheel”
option, if the cursor is on “Step Values” table, by using the mouse wheel, it is possible to increase or
decrease the signal values and the
specified steps simultaneously. This can be during or even before running the test. It should be noted
that these changes are only possible if the ramp is set on “Manual” mode. “Quick Setting” section In
this section by checking “Show
Time from final step”, the time from the final step is displayed. One of the uses for this is in
measuring the trip time of the relay. By checking “Clear Test after Start Edit” after running the test,
if any changes are made to the test,
without using the Clear test option, Information and setting can be altered. By checking the "Enable
mouse wheel everywhere" option and holding the mouse pointer over the "Detail View" window, the values
of the signals will increase or
decrease with the specified steps if the mouse roller is rotated. If the mouse roller is turned upwards,
the ramp will be incremental, and if it is rotated downwards, the ramp will be decreasing. This option
is also used when the ramp
is changed manually. If you also check the "Enable mouse wheel on step Table" option, the output values
will change only by turning the mouse roller if the mouse pointer is on the "Step Values" table. By
checking “Show Only Final Trip”
option, the trip time is displayed by binary inputs of the last step. In “Time Out” field, the injection
time of “State” is specified which is by default in set on “999” seconds in “Quick” mode. In “Quick”
mode, the ramp is created either
automatically or manually. After running the test if the “Manual” option is selected, the ramp is
created manually and by clicking on “˄” and “˅” it is possible to create increasing or decreasing ramp.
If during the test “Auto” option
is selected, ramp is created automatically. In "∆t" field the time of each step is specified. By
selecting “Up”, the ramp increases automatically and by selecting “Down” it decreases automatically. In
“Enable Reset” field, it is possible
to specify the reset time of signal value in a way that after checking this option during the test, the
signal value is “Reset” for the specified period of time which is determined in “Reset” in “Reset
Values” table. In this “State Type”
it is possible to add information and results of the test to the output report by clicking on “Add to
report” option. After clicking on this option, by opening the “State and Comment of Report” page, the
settings related to the output
report are adjusted. In the “Title” field, a title is entered for the output report and in “Show in
Report” section from the “Quick” tree diagram, it is specified that what information are to be included
in the output report. In “Comment”
section, it is possible to add an additional comment or explanation for the report. In “Custom Image”
section, you can add an image to the report. In this report, it is the user who determines whether the
test was successful or not by
clicking on “Passed” option for success and “Failed” option for failure of the test. Then, the result is
included in the report which can be viewed in the “Report View” window. By clicking on
“Edit.Delete.Report” option, the “Delete from
Report” window opens where it is possible to edit or delete the added reports. It is done by selecting
the intended report and clicking on “Edit Selected Report” to edit the report and then clicking on
“Passed” or “Fail”. It is, also,
possible to delete a report by clicking on “Delete Selected Report”. In the row of every report there
are columns like “Trip Time”, “Detail View”, etc. which are added to the report if “True” is selected as
their value but “False” is selected,
they are removed from the output report. By clicking on “Swap” at the top of the page, “Quick Setting”
and “Ramp Termination” sections are swapped. This is done, according to the user's need, to show the
"Ramp Termination" section. In
“Ramp Termination” section, the conditions for terminating the “Ramp” are specified. The difference
between this section and “State Termination” is that here the signal injection is continued and only
step change of signals is terminated
but in “State Termination” after the condition is met, the “State” is terminated. The termination
conditions of “Ramp” are just like “Trigger Setting” which has been described in previous videos. By
selecting “Reset Value”, it is possible
to adjust the “Reset” value for voltage and current signals in “Reset Values” table so if “Apply Reset”
is selected during the test, the values of voltage and current signals change to the specified “Reset”
values. This feature is useful
in tests like “Minimum Voltage to Operate Circuit breaker. By clicking on “Apply Zero”, the values of
voltage and current signals are changed to zero. By clicking on “Hold Value”, the values of voltage and
current signals remain as they
are and do not change. The information related to "Trigger Setting" has been described in previous
videos. By selecting "Offset Value", it is possible to give an offset to the signal in the "Offset
Value" table. For example it is possible
to give a value of "DC=10" volts to "VLE-1" signal or even give a value of decaying "DC" to the initial
voltage. It is also possible to add a harmonic offset to the initial signal by changing the frequency.
After repeating the test, all
changes made along with their time are displayed in “Changes” section. “Disable Relay” section has been
described in previous videos.
STEP RAMP TYPE To better explain this “State Type”, other than “Detail View” window, “Signal View”
window is maximized too so you can view the outputs. In the “Signal View” window, the signal view type
is set on “RMS” mode, “Digital” signals
are disabled and, to have a better view of the signals, the signals are turned “Bold”. / / / In this
“State Type”, it is possible to set the voltage and current outputs of the device to increasing or
decreasing “Ramp. This “State Type”
is used when the user wishes to get a threshold for a parameter. It should be mentioned that it is
possible to apply this “Ramp” to amplitude, phase and frequency or a combination of these options for
voltage and current signals. / It
should be noted that, to better understand the concept of “Step Ramp”, only “General: Direct” mode is
explained. Creating a “Ramp” output requires three values: start value, step value and final value. /
“Start Values” table In this section,
the start value of “Ramp” is specified and it indicates that from what point the “Ramp” should start.
These values can be specified for the three parameters of amplitude, phase and frequency separately. For
example, values of voltage in
this section are set at 5, 10 and 15 volts. “Binary Output”, “Binary Input” and “Other Setting” sections
are explained in previous videos and will not be mentioned here. / “Step Values” section In “Step
Values” section, the value for every
“Step” is specified. These values can be specified for the three parameters of amplitude, phase and
frequency separately. For example, the value of “Step” for voltage is set at 1, 2 and 2 volts. / “Final
Values” section In this section,
the final value of the ramp signal is specified which indicates that at what point should the ramp
finish. These values can be specified for the three parameters of amplitude, phase and frequency
separately. The final value of voltage
in this section is 20, 25 and 30 volts. / You can see that the signal of all three voltage phases has
reached from the start value to the final value, according to the specified steps, in form of a “Ramp”.
In the “Time Setting” box in
“Step Ramp Setting” section, the time of each step is specified. This value is 500 milliseconds by
default. By checking the “Enable Reset” option, it is possible to allow the signals to “Reset” after a
specific time period. In “Reset Time”
section, the time of each “Reset” step is specified which is added to the “State” time. To set the value
and its parameter you should go to the bottom of the page in “Reset Values” section. This section and
“Disable Relay” section has
already been described in previous videos. / There are two options in the “Ramp Type” section where the
first option, which is “Step Values”, is active by default. By selecting this option, the settings are
as described before. As you
can see, for example in L1 phase, each “Step” is increased by 1 volt every 500 milliseconds but by
selecting “Rate Value per Second”, the number of steps specified in the “Step Values” table is
determined as value per second. For example,
L1 phase should increase by 1 volt every second. According to the specified “Step Time”, every second,
there will be two 500millivolts step. / In “Ramp Description Errors” section, steps of the “Ramp”, the
total time of the “State” and
the errors are described. By using the “Simple Mode” option, it is possible to specify the value of
steps of the “Ramp” and the final value of the “Ramp” more easily. By checking the “Simple Mode” option,
the settings of “Step Values”
and “Final Values” table are disabled and a new section including voltage and current sections are
opened. In these sections, first, the parameter is selected from the slider bar. This slider bar
includes amplitude, phase and frequency
options. After selecting the parameter, two options are displayed. In the “Step Value” and “Final Value”
fields, the step value of the “Ramp” and the final value of the “Ramp” are specified respectively. The
difference between this option
and the previous state is that in this state all three phases change simultaneously. / / An important
point in “Ramp” on frequency is that there will be signal jump. So, it is possible that while testing
the frequency relays, an appropriate
response is not received from the relay; while “Ramping” on a frequency, to keep the signal steady, it
is necessary to check the “Continuous in Frequency Step”. By specifying 2Hz as the start value of
frequency and 3Hz as the “Step Ramp”
and 50Hz as the final value, there will be a frequency jump in the output signal. To view this frequency
jump, first, the output signal must be set on “Inst”. As you can see, by checking “Continuous in
Frequency Step”, this frequency jump
disappears.
CONTINUOUS RAMP TYPE This “State Type” is similar to “Step Ramp”. The only difference is that in
“Step Ramp” the parameter changes step by step at user-defined time intervals but in “Continuous Ramp”,
the parameters increase or decrease continuously
with 400 microseconds time steps. / The parameters adjusted for “Continuous Ramp” include start value,
final value and total time and the start values are specified in “Start Values” table. Here, the values
for voltage signals are 5, 10
and 15 volts. “Binary Output”, “Binary Input” and “Other Setting” sections have been described before
and we can skip them. In “Final Values” table the final value of the parameters is specified. Here, the
values for voltage signals are
20, 25 and 30 volts. / / In “Total Time” field in the “Continuous Ramp Setting” section the total time
of the “State” is specified which is linked with the “Timeout” time in “State Termination” in “Trigger”
setting. “Trigger”, “Offset
Value”, “Error/Trigger Overcurrent” and “Disable Relay” sections have been described in previous videos
and more descriptions should not be necessary here. / Another important matter about “Ramp” is that, in
addition to put ramp on voltage
and current, in “Step Ramp” the user can put ramp on impedance by changing the “Set Mode”. Since the
hardware is only capable of recognizing voltage and current and cannot recognize the impedance
parameter, and because there are so many
impedance parameters, it is not possible to send these parameters to the hardware in every “Step”. So,
in “Step Ramp” firstly all values of impedance steps are sent to the software and then measured voltage
and current sent to the hardware
as an array every time “Step” in “Continuous Ramp” is 400 microseconds, the amount of calculations and
arrays is greatly increased and it is not possible for the results of the calculations and created
arrays to be sent to the hardware.
So, this “State Type” is always carried out in “General: Direct” mode. / /
HARMONIC STATE In order to better explain this "State Type", in addition to magnifying "Detail View"
window, the "Signal View" window is also magnified to observe outputs. As you are aware, based on the
Fourier series expansion, a periodic
signal can be expressed in terms of the sum of several sinusoidal waves with various coefficients and
frequencies. In "Harmonic" State Type, the user can inject voltage signals and harmonic current
by"AMT105" device. To this purpose, in
"Detail View" window, "Analog Out" tab and "State Type" part, the "Harmonic" State Type is selected from
dropdown field. As can be observed, in this"State Type", the user can create and inject a signal with
two desired harmonics. To this
purpose, first the signal data or main harmonic should be entered in "Analog Output Channels" and the
other two desired harmonics in "Free-Order Harmonic #1" and "Free-Order Harmonic #2". / / / / “Analog
Output Channels” Table As aforementioned,
the main harmonic data are entered in this table. These data include the amplitude, phase, and frequency
of each signal. It is noteworthy that the harmonic voltage and current signals can be simultaneously
injected by device. For example,
the data of three balanced voltage signals with an amplitude of "50" V and a frequency of "50" Hz, and
three balanced current signals with an amplitude of "500" milliampere mA and a frequency of "50" Hz are
entered. Other parts of this
section have been explained in previous films. / Analog Output Channels Table The data related to the
desired "nth" harmonic signal are entered in this table. These data include amplitude, phase, and
frequency, which are entered for voltage
and current signals. It is noteworthy that the maximum allowed value for frequency is "1500" Hz. For
example, the third harmonic data are entered in the table, including three voltage signals with an
amplitude of "10" V and a frequency
of "150" Hz and three current signals with an amplitude of "300" mA and a frequency of "150" Hz. After
data were entered, the waveform corresponding to this signal containing the main and third harmonics is
shown in "Signal View" window.
During the test, the output waveform and the actual value of harmonic injected by the device can be
observed in "Signal View". / / Free-Order Harmonic #1 Table The data related to the desired nth harmonic
signal are entered in this table.
These data include amplitude, phase, and frequency that are entered for voltage and current signals. It
should be noted that the maximum allowed value for frequency is "1500" Hz. For example, the fifth
harmonic data are entered into the
table, including three voltage signals with an amplitude of "5" V and a frequency of "250" Hz and three
current signals with an amplitude of "200" mA and a frequency of "250" Hz. After data was entered, the
waveform corresponding to this
signal containing the main third and fifth harmonics is shown in "Signal View" window. During the test,
the harmonic signal injected by the device can be observed in "Signal View". Please note that a decaying
DC offset value can be used
in this table instead of harmonic signal. / /
THE “TRANSIENT” STATE TYPE: As mentioned before, one of the features of Vebko device and software is
relay testing in transient state. To easily access the windows needed for this “State Type”, a “Layout”
named “Default Layout for Transient”
is designed specifically for this state which is located in the “Windows” menu. This layout includes
“Detail View”, “Signal View”, “Measurement View”, “Vector View” and “Impedance View” windows. Here, to
have a better view of the “Detail
View” window, all other windows is closed. When a fault occurs, the relay saves the fault information
and moments before the fault as a “Comtrade” file and provides the user with this file. By using this
information it is possible to view
impedance or differential trajectory or by injecting the same transient signal, simulate the fault
moment and test the relay performance again. / / Other than “Comtrade” file with “cfg” extension, there
is another file with “dat” extension.
These two files have the same name and for the “comtrade” file to be loaded in the software, both files
must be together. In “Transient Setting” section, the settings related to “comtrade” file are adjusted.
By selecting “Import Comtrade”,
the “comtrade” file exported from the relay is imported and loaded. Moreover, a list including several
“comtrade” files is located in the software. By selecting “Import Comtrade from List” option this list
opens and a file can be selected
and loaded. After loading a transient file, the data related to that file is loaded in the table of this
section. In “Signal” column, name of the output of the device is specified. To change the outputs of
this section, “Analog Out” tab
in the “Hardware Configuration” page can be used. In “Channel” column, current or voltage signals
allocated to output of the device are displayed. By opening the drop down field, it is possible to
change the allocated signal. / / In “Scale”
column, the user can determine a specific percentage of the Transient signal amplitude for injection. In
“Min” and “Max” columns, positive and negative amplitudes of signals of “Comtrade” file are specified.
In “Pirm.factor” and “sec.factor”
columns, the conversion ratio of “VT”s and “CT”s is specified in relation to the “Comtrade” file and it
is possible that values of these coefficients are not the some in some files. In that case, the user
needs to edit them. For example,
here “Prim.factor” is set at 1 kilovolt and by right-clicking on this column and selecting “Apply to all
Voltage”, this value is set for other voltages as well. / In “PS” column, it is specified that the
information of “Comtrade” is primary
or secondary side. If it is “Primary”, in “Min” and “Max” columns the secondary values are placed in
“Prim.factor” and “Sec.factor” in accordance with the given conversion ratio. If “Secondary” is
selected, in “Min” and “Max” columns,
the original values of the file are placed. To calculate the “RMS” value of the signals of “Comtrade”
file and displaying it in “Signal View”, first, “Calculate RMS, Phase and Other” option should be
checked and then in “Setting” tab,
in “Show Type” box, the “RMS” radio button is checked. After seeing signal's "RMS" value, "show type" is
get back to the instantaneous state. / / By checking “Select All Channel” in “Channel” column, it is
possible to select all voltage
and current signals existent in the “Comtrade” file for outputs of the device while if this option is
unchecked, in the list of every output, it is possible to only select signals from the same type of
output. For example, in “VL1-E” output,
only voltage signals of the “Comtrade” file are visible. The reason for the existence of this option is
that in some transient files, the unit of signals is not given in volt and ampere and the software is
not able to differentiate between
current and voltage and allocate it to the output of the device. So, it is necessary for the user to
manually introduce the voltage and current signals to outputs of the device. / / If the user wishes to
view the waveform of all voltage,
current and digital signals existent in the “Comtrade” file in “Signal View”, he should select “Current
State” from the toolbar. Then from the “Setting” tab in “Signal View”, he should select the signals that
he wishes to view. But in
“All State” state, it is only possible to view the waveform of the outputs of the device in each “State”
and not the waveform of all signals in “Single View”. To better analyze the transient signals in “Vector
View” window, it is possible
to open up to 5 “Vector Views” and, view the vector of different signals in different times.
Complementary description about “Vector View” window will be provided in the videos related to this
window. / / / / If the current and voltage
values allocated to the output of the device which are specified in “Max” and “Min” columns exceed the
allowed injection amount of the device, an error message is recorded in the “Errors” section. By
selecting the “Limit Voltage and Current
of Transient File to Setting”, the amplitude of these signals is limited to the injectable amount by the
device. The difference between this option and “Scale” is that by selecting this option, a part of the
signal amplitude which is exceeding
the allowed amount is cut but in “Scale”, only a coefficient is multiplied by signal amplitude and no
part of the signal is cut. The name of the “Comtrade” file is written in “File Name” section. / By
right-clicking on “Prim. Factor” column
or “Sec. Factor” and selecting “Fill Primary Secondary from Device” option, the “Prim. Factor” and
“Sec.factor” values are entered in the “Test Object” page from “Device” block and if “Fill Primary
Secondary from Comtrade File” is selected,
the values of this column are entered from the “Comtrade” file. In “Sampling Rate” section, the
information related to sampling frequency of the device and “Comtrade” file is specified. In “Original”
field, the original value of the signal
sampling frequency, in “Used” field, the value of used sampling frequency to be displayed in “Signal
View” window and in “Frequency” section, the test signal frequency is specified. / / / If the user
wishes to apply a part of the transient
waveform to the device, he can use the “Trim Time” section where its start time is specified in “Start
Time” section and the end time is specified in “End Time” section. In this section, when the “Comtrade”
file is loaded, the time value
is extracted from the “Comtrade” file. To inject a part of the transient signal by device, first, the
“Current State” option should be selected. Then, by activating “Cursor1” and “Cursor2” in “Setting” of
the “Signal View” window, the
beginning and end of the signal is specified. Finally by clicking on “Apply from trackbars” option, the
values of “Cursors” are entered automatically. Also by selecting “Reset Time” option, these times reset.
/ / / /
THE “TRANSIENT” STATE OBSERVING THE IMPEDANCE TRAJECTORY One of the applications of “State Type”
Transient” is that the impedance and differential trajectories of distance and differential relays could
be observed. The meaning of trajectory
is the route of the change of differential or impedance characteristic of differential and distance
relays in their characteristic curves based on the injected waves to the relay. For this purpose, at
first, from the “window” menu, the
“Default Layout for Transient” option will be selected so the arrangement of the windows would change.
In this arrangement, the “Detail View”, “Signal View”, “Vector View” and “Impedance View” windows are
positioned that is used for observing
the trajectory. / / In the following, the “Detail View” window will be selected from the “State Type”
drop down field of the “Transient” state. Then, the “current State” option will be selected from the
toolbar on the upper part of the
page. By doing this, the signals related to “State Type” in the “Signal View” and “Vector View” will be
displayed after entering the “Comtrade” file. / / Entering the relay data For observing the differential
or impedance trajectory, the
data related to relay must be loaded in the software so the characteristic curve of the relay would be
displayed in the “Impedance View”. In this video, the objective is to show the impedance trajectory of a
distance relay. / To do so,
the “Test Object” icon will be clicked so the “General Test Object” would be opened. On this page, by
having “XRio” ad “Rio” files of the relay, the data of the relay would be entered in two ways. In this
video, the data are loaded using
the “Rio”. To do so, we will click on the “Import from File” option, the file of “Rio” of the distance
relay will be selected and loaded, and the OK option will be clicked. After loading the relay data, the
impedance characteristic relay
will be displayed in the “Impedance View”. / / / Entering the “Comtrade” file After entering the relay
information, the transient state file that is extracted from the relay should be loaded in the software.
As you know, the “Comtrade”
output is two files with the format of “CFG” and “DAT”. If these two files are not located in a folder,
then, this file will not be loaded in the software. To do this, click on the “Import Comtrade” option
and then the intended file will
be selected and loaded. Note that if the “Rio” has the same name as the “Comtrade” file and is located
in a folder, by loading the “Comtrade” file, the data of the “Rio” file will be loaded automatically.
After loading the “Comtrade” file,
the voltage and current signals will be displayed in “Signal View” and the information of voltage and
the current signal will be displayed in the “Detail View” window. “Calculate RMS…” should be checked to
the software calculates the RMS
and phase of the voltage and current signals to trajectory display. After this, in the “Signal View”
window, the “Setting” tab, the “cursor” option will be checked. After activating the “Cursor”, the
impedance trajectory could be observed
online in the “Impedance View” by moving the “Cursor 1” in the time axis of “signal View” window. Note
that for the differential relays “Comtrade” files, six current phases and for distance relays “Comtrade”
files, three current phases
and three voltage phases should active. Also, you have to check that the assigned signals to each output
to be exactly according to the state that exists in the real state and in case of difference, it should
be manually modified. / /
/ / / / / The “Impedance View” window As mentioned in the “Impedance View” window, the impedance or
differential characteristic curve of the relays is displayed. By opening this window, the impedance
characteristic curve is displayed by
default. This curve displays the line impedance in terms of “R” and “X”. In the “Impedance View”, select
the “Differential” icon from the left-side icons for displaying the differential characteristic curve,
so the differential characteristic
curve of the differential relay would be displayed. This curve will be explained more in the
differential trajectory video. / / In the “Impedance View” window, by clicking on the “Undo” or “Redo”
icons, we can return to the previous or
next changes that are done on the characteristic curve. The “Zoom Model” icon places the mouse cursor in
the zoomed condition for magnifying a part of the characteristic curve. The “Optimize all” icon will
show the characteristic curve
shape as a complete curve. The “Zoom In” and “Zoom Out” icons are used for magnifying and zoom out the
characteristic curve. Using the “Pan Mode” icon, the characteristic curve could be displaced. By
clicking on the “Hide/ Show Toolbox”
the existing icons in the “Toolbox” could become hidden and shown again. Using the “Fault Type” icon the
fault display can be specified. By clicking on the “Export CSV” from the settings of the relay zones
that are checked, a “CSV” format
output could be saved. Please pay attention that one CSV file will be given for each zone. / / / / / / /
/ By clicking on the existing gear wheel in the below of this window, some options will be displayed for
a better trajectory. By checking
the “Between Orange, Green” option, the trajectory will be displayed as a line that its waves are
between the orange and green colors in the “signal View”. As a result, the trajectory will be displayed
between these two “cursors”. By checking
the “all Points” option, the trajectory will be displayed in all the points and at all the times of the
“Comtrade” file. In the “Circle.Ref” field, it will be specified that the trajectory will be
simultaneously displayed by displacing
which cursor on the “Signal View”. Here, by changing the “Cursor” to orange the trajectory changes could
be observed. The “ZL1E”, “ZL2E”, “ZL3E”, “ZL1L2”, “ZL2L3” and “ZL3L1” options show the impedance
trajectory in different faults. The
display of the trajectory of that fault can be deleted from the characteristic curve by unchecking each
of them. In the below of each of these options, the coordinates of the impedance point is displayed as
the “R” and “X” as online by
moving the “Cursor 1” in “Signal View”. / / For observing the amounts of voltage and current at each
moment, in the “Vector View” window of the “Type” field, the “Orange” option should be checked that is
related to orange-colored “Cursor”.
Then, the voltage and current values and also the trajectory variations could be observed online by
changing this “cursor”. /
THE "TRANSIENT" STATE OBSERVING THE DIFFERENTIAL TRAJECTORY As already said, one of the functions of
the "State Type: Transient" is to observe the impedance and differential trajectories of distance and
differential relays. The route trajectory
signifies the variation of differential or impedance characteristic curve in differential or distance
relays based on the injected wave shapes. To this purpose, at first, from the "Default Layout for
Transient" option is selected from
the "Window" menu, so the arrangement of windows change proportionally to this test run. In this
arrangement, the "Detail View", "Signal View", "Vector View" and "Impedance View" are located in a way
to observe the trajectory. / / Subsequently,
the "Transient" state is selected from the "Detail View" window from the "State Type" slider field.
Remember for "Comtrade" files of the differential relay six current phases, three current phases and
three voltage phases must be active
for "Comtrade" files of distance relay. Also, examine if the assigned signal to each output matches
exactly the real condition and in case of any differences you have to correct it manually. At first, six
current phases are activated in
the "Hardware Configuration" window and the voltage phases are deactivated. / / Simultaneous importing
of the "Comtrade" file and relay information In this video, the objective is to import the relay
information and "Comtrade" file simultaneously.
This case happens when the "Comtrade" and "Rio" files of the relay have an identical name and saved in
one folder. Then, click on the "Import Comtrade" option and the "Comtrade" file of the "7ut613"
differential relay is selected. After
that, the "Open Comtrade File" message is shown. This message signifies that a "Rio" file with the same
name as the "Comtrade" file exists. By clicking on "YES", the "Rio" and "Comtrade" files of the relay
are loaded simultaneously and
in case of selecting "NO", the "Rio" file won't be loaded and the relay information should be loaded
separately. In this video, after clicking on the "YES" option, the "Rio" and "Comtrade" files are loaded
simultaneously. After loading
the "Comtrade" file, the "Detail View" window should be checked to see if the assigned signals to the
current outputs accommodate the real condition or not. In this table, the "3I0" signal is imported
instead of the "IL1-M2" signal that
is not correct. Therefore, in the "Channel" column, the IL1 1 slider field is right-clicked and the
"IL1-M2" is selected. The "IL2-M2" and "IL3-M2" signals are assigned to fifth and sixth outputs,
respectively. Then, from the toolbar on
the top of the page, the “Current State" option is selected. By doing this, the signals related to
"State Type" is displayed in the "Signal View" and "Vector View" after importing the "Comtrade" file. /
/ / / Subsequently, click on the
"Differential" icon on the "Impedance View" window, so the characteristic curve of the differential
relay is displayed. This curve is based on "I bias" and "I diff" that are bias current and differential
current, respectively. Remember
by selecting the "Differential" curve, proportionally, the name of the window is changed to
"Differential Characteristic". After this, the "Cursor" option is checked in the "Setting" tab in the
"Signal View" window. Do not forget to check
“Calculate RMS…” option which displays the differential trajectory. After activating the "Cursor", by
moving the "Cursor 1" over the time axis in the "Signal View" window, the differential trajectory could
be observed instantly in the
"Differential Characteristic" window. By checking the "All Point" option, the differential trajectory is
displayed in all the time of the "Comtrade" file. Other options of the "Differential Characteristic"
window are similar to the "Impedance
View" window that has been explained in previous educational videos. /
“TRACKING” STATE In "State Type: Tracking", power swing test or "power swing blocking" of distance
relays is done. Power swing protection or "power swing blocking" is performed at the level of power
transmission network. In order to conduct
"Power Swing Blocking" test, after selecting "State Type: Tracking", the "Impedance View" window should
be opened to display the impedance characteristic of relay, because in vebko software, this test is
conducted by impedance characteristic.
/ / / The power swing blocking test is usually conducted in three-phase fault and "Z-I const." mode.
That is why in "Fault Type" field, the fault type has been selected to be "L1-L2-L3" by default. In "Z-I
const." mode, the test current
is constant and different voltages are generated to create fault impedance. "Analog Output Channels"
table data have been created based on this "Set mode". The values of voltage and output current from
these data are calculated by software
and displayed in "Table View" and adjusted by the device. It should be noted that in "State Type:
Tracking" state, the "Ananlog Output Channel" table is "Read Only" and no value can be changed to the
table. / Entering Relay Data At the
beginning of this test, data related to distance relay should be entered into the software so that their
impedance characteristic can be displayed in "Impedance View". To this purpose, click on "Test Object";
by selecting "Import from
list" icon, "XRio Converter" file for distance relay "P441" is loaded. / / / Then in "File" menu, select
"Load Relay Setting" option, and in the opened window of "XRio" file, select distance relay "P441". By
unchecking the options in "Matching
Algorithm" part, which was previously described, "XRio" file is loaded. Upon clicking on the "OK"
option, the relay impedance characteristic is displayed in the "Impedance View" window. / / Impedance
View Window The power swing blocking
test is conducted based on the impedance characteristic. In this test, the impedance observed by the
relay enters the tripping zone from a zone out of the characteristic curve No Tripping Zone and exits
rapidly; in this case, the relay
must "block" its trip. There is a table next to the impedance characteristic curve in "Impedance View".
This table can be used to enter power swing blocking test data. / In order to conduct this test, one
point outside the characteristic
curve, one point inside the characteristic curve, and again one point outside the characteristic curve
should be added. After the points are added in the characteristic curve, it is observed that a row has
been added to the right table
per point. In the "Num.Step" column of this table, the number of points are entered between the previous
point and the selected point and depicted in the impedance characteristic curve. / / In "t nom" column,
the total time of voltage
and current injection corresponding to these are entered. In"I test" column, the injection current of
these points are determined. Considering that the injection is in the form of constant current, the
current of all points is constant.
The real and imaginary values of the selected point have been entered in "R" and "X" columns,
respectively. . Once the table data of this test are completed, this test is ready to be executed and
upon clicking "Start" option, the test
is conducted. / / /
"SET MODE AND FAULT TYPE" : PART 1 Using options in "Set Mode" field in "Set Mode and Fault Type"
part, the user can introduce certain parameters to software to test in "Analog Output Channels" table
and produce the device voltage and the
current corresponding to them. The output values of device can be observed in "Table View" window. /
Considering test conditions, the "State Types" of "Continuous Ramp" and "Harmonic" are performed only in
"General: Direct" mode. Additionally,
considering "Power Swing" test conditions, " State Type :Tracking" is performed in "Distance: Z-I const"
mode. Note that since in "Transient Type", the values and type of data are extracted from "Comtrade"
file, "Set Mode and Fault Type"
part does not exist. / / / / The "Set Mode" filed can be put on different modes in the "State Types" of
"Step Ramp", "Quick", and "Normal"; in this film we refer to "General" modes. "Analog Output Channels"
table in "General" modes has
"Signal", "Amplitude", "Phase", and "Frequency" columns. / "General: Direct" Mode: In this mode, values
of voltage signals and the output current of the device are directly determined by adjusting the phase
values of voltage signals and
the values of current signal lines in "Analog Output Channels" table. In this mode, the frequency value
can be determined in "Analog Output Channels" table, but in other modes, the frequency value is obtained
from"Test Object". As it can
be observed, values of "Analog Output Channels" table have been directly entered in "Table View" window.
"General: Line-Line " Mode: In this mode, the output signals values of the device are determined by
adjusting the line to line values
of voltage and current signals, as well as the value of zero sequence voltage in "Analog Output
Channels" table. As it can be observed, the current values in "Analog Output Channels" table have been
directly entered into "Table View" window.
By changing the zero sequence voltage to 5V, the voltage value of each phase changes to 6 V in the first
phase and 4.583 V in other phases based on the defined relations. / "General: Symmetrical Components"
Mode In this mode, by adjusting
the value of voltage and positive, negative, and zero sequence current in "Analog Output Channels"
table, the values of device voltage and current signals corresponding to them are determined. In order
to observe these changes, the negative
sequence value changes to 5. According to mathematical relations, the value of the first phase and the
other two phases was calculated to be 11 V and 4 V, respectively. In addition, by changing the negative
sequence current to 2 Amperes,
the output values of current changes to 2.391, 3.973, and 1.581 Amperes, respectively. / / / "General:
Powers": Mode In this mode, the values of device voltage and output current signals are determined by
adjusting the phase value of voltage
signals, apparent power, active power, and reactive power in "Analog Output Channels" table. The fourth
to sixth rows of apparent power are related to each phase and the seventh row is the apparent row of
three phases whose magnitude is
determined in "Amplitude" column and their angle is determined in "Phase" column. Moreover, the eights
to tenth rows are related to the active and reactive power of each phase, and the eleventh row is
related to the active and reactive
power of three phases. The active power value is determined in "Amplitude" column and reactive power
value is determined in "Phase" column. / As it can be observed, the voltage values in"Analog Output
Channels" table are directly entered
into "Table View" window and by changing the value of apparent power of three phases to 50 volt-ampere
VA in" Analog Output Channels" table, the current values in the output change to 1.515 A in the first
phase and 4.167 A in the other
two phases. "General: Fault Values" Mode: In this mode, first the fault type is selected from the slider
bar of "Fault Type" field, then in "Analog Output Channels" table, the value of fault voltage, fault
current, and their angle are
entered and the values of device voltage signals and output current corresponding to them can be seen in
"Table View" window. As single phase to ground fault is selected here, the values of device voltage and
output current in that phase
are considered to be equal to the value of fault voltage and current in"Analog Output Channels" table. /
"SET MODE AND FAULT TYPE": PART 2 As mentioned before, using options in "Set Mode" field in "Set
Mode and Fault Type" part, the user can introduce certain parameters into software to test in "Analog
Output Channels" table and produce the device
voltage and the current corresponding to them. / "Distance: Z-I const" mode is used for impedance and
distance functions, in this mode, the user enters fault impedance and test current, and the device
injects the corresponding current
and voltages to it. If user determines the fault impedance in terms of magnitude and angle, the software
calculates "R" and "X" values and displays them in the second row. For example, the impedance value of 1
ohm Ω has been entered with
a 45º angle, and the "R" and "X" values are shown in the second row. If the fault impedance is also
adjusted in terms of "R" and "X", the software calculates the impedance and angle and shows it in the
first row. For example, the value
of "R" and "X" has been adjusted to be 100 milliohm mΩ and 50 mΩ, respectively, and the values of
impedance and fault angle are shown in the first row. In this case, the test current of 2 A is entered
for dual phase fault "L1-L2" and the
software calculates the voltage and test current values using mathematical relations and shows them in
"Table view". In "Distance: Z-V const" mode, by keeping voltage constant and adjusting it by user, and
by adjusting the fault impedance
value, the test current value is calculated using mathematical relations and displayed in "Table View".
Additionally, in"Distance: Z-Zs const" mode, the value of fault impedance and "SIR" parameter value,
which is the ratio of source impedance
to fault impedance, are adjusted and the values of current and test voltage are calculated using
mathematical relations and are displayed in "Table View". / / / Now if user wants to consider the fault
impedance in terms of a percentage
of a parameter, he can use three modes: "Distance: Z%-I const"، "Distance: Z%-V const", and"Distance:
Z%-Zs const. " in the "% of" part, it has been determined that fault impedance should be selected as a
percentage of line impedance.
In the "Z%" part, it is determined that what percentage of the selected value the fault impedance should
be, and in "phiZ" part, the impedance angle is adjusted. / In "Distance: Z%-I const" mode, the fault
current is constant and the software
calculates its corresponding voltage and current based on the fault type and impedance. In addition, the
value of fault voltage is constant in "Distance: Z%-V const", and when the user adjusts it, the test
current values are calculated
by software. Additionally, by adjusting "SIR" parameter in "Distance: Z%-V const" mode, the value of
current and test voltage is calculated in software. It should be noted that the current and test voltage
values are also calculated using
the above mentioned formulas with the difference that the impedance value is selected to be a percentage
of the line impedance. For example, in "Distance: Z%-Zs const" mode, the impedance test point is
selected to be 80% of the line impedance
with a 40° angle and "SIR" value is adjusted to be 10. Now the values of voltage and test current are
calculated using the above mentioned mathematical relations and displayed in "Table View". / If user
wants to conduct "OverCurrent" test
in this room, he should adjust "Set Mode" on "Overcurrent: ITest" and adjust current, current angle, and
voltage for directional functions in "Analog Output Channels" table. In "Table View" page, the values of
voltage and test current
are calculated based on the selected "Fault Type". For example, for two phase fault "L1-L2", the test
current of 1 A with a 40° angle and voltage of 5 V was adjusted and the values of current and test
voltage can be observed in "Table
View". / / Additionally, in order to test differential relays in this room, the user should open
"Hardware Configuration" window and disable the voltage outputs and enable all 6 current phases. Then in
"Detail View" window adjust the "Set
Mode" on "Differential: IBias, Idiff". By adjusting "IDiff" and"IBias" values to be 0.5 and 7 times of
the nominal current in "Analog Output Chnnels" table, the current of different phases is calculated for
differential function and displayed
in "Table View" window. Pay attention that these values are calculated based on the parameters adjusted
in "Differential" block of "Test Object" page, and the user is required to enter the specifications of
the protected equipment and
tested relay. / /
ADDITIONAL SETTINGS OF “DETAIL VIEW” “Continue Last State Amplitude” Option: This option appears in
the “States” after “State Type: Step Ramp” in “Detail View” window. By checking this option, the current
or voltage value of the current State
is injected from where the previous “State” is finished. This option is used to measure the relay trip
time or “Pickup Drop off” test in relays. For example, in “Pickup Drop off” test an increasing “Step
Ramp State” is created where three-phases
2amps to 4amps current increases with 0.2amp steps and “Trigger” condition for reception of “Pickup”
signal is specified. Note that “Binary Input 2” is specified for “Pickup” signal reception. / / / The
second “State” is a decreasing “Step
Ramp” where three-phases 4amps to 2amps current decreases with 0.2amp steps and “Trigger” condition of
“Dropping” the relay 1-0 is specified. After performing the test, you can see that after receiving the
“Pickup” contact, the second
“State” starts decreasing from 4amps until the relay “Drops”. But if you check the “Continue Last State
Amplitude” option in “State2” and perform the test, after receiving the “Pickup” signal, the current in
the second “State” starts decreasing
from where the relay performed the “Pickup” and keeps doing so until the relay performs the “Drop”. / /
/ / “Disable Get Actual” Option If you check the “Show Actual Value” option in “Hardware Configuration”
window, the “Disable Get Actual”
option appears in “Detail View” window. By checking this option, the actual current or voltage value
will not be displayed in that “State”. If there are two “States” and the injection time in a “State” is
too long and you do not want to
view the actual value, by checking the “Disable Get Actual” option in “Detail View” window, the actual
value will not be displayed in that “State”. / / “Disable Relay” option In the back of every voltage or
current output of the device
there are relays which separate the “Amplifier” section of the inside of the device from the front
panel. Before performing the test these relays must be connected and then the voltage or current is
injected from the outputs of the device.
In “Disable Relay” section in “Detail View” window, by checking any of the options available in the
list, it is possible to disable the relay related to that output and then after performing the test you
can see that the actual output
value of the intended port equals zero. This option is used in tests such as magnetic flux division in
transformer because by using this option, it is possible to create different modes of open circuit of
coils for the test automatically.
/ To perform tests such as transformer wiring resistance test which needs a long time to charge the
winding of the transformer, the current starts increasing from zero and during this time, because of the
difference between the specified
current and the actual current injected by the device, there is error Other. So to make the test
practical it is necessary to disable the error “Other” so that the test can continue. Also, in this
test, it is possible that huge voltage
peaks occur momentarily; therefore to avoid stopping the test, the “Overvoltage” error of the binary
needs to be disabled as well. The last option on this page is “Start Time Ref. From This State”. To
better understand the function of
this option, suppose that there are two “States” and the first one is “330” milliseconds while the
second is “35” milliseconds. Normally, the first “State” is followed by the second “State” and the
signal is continuous. In this example,
if you zoom on the border of the two “States” in “Signal View”, you can view the continuity of the
signal. In this case, the time reference to determine the phase of the signals is the first “State”.
This is why even though in the second
“State” the “Il1” current phase is zero, its signal does not begin from zero. Now, by checking “Start
Time Ref. From This State” option, you can see that the time reference of the second “State” is changed
and considered from the beginning
of this “State”.
"SIGNAL VIEW" WINDOW PART 1 / The "signal view" window is used in all test pages, including "AMT
Sequencer", "AMT Distance", "AMT Differential", AMT Overcurrent", etc. In order to open this window, one
can use the "view" menu, the "signal
view" option, or the tool bar, "signal view" icon. The output voltage and current signals as well as the
status of the device "binaries" are shown in this window. In "setting" tab, this window setting is
performed. / / / Right clicks of
"signal view" window In order to zoom in or out along horizontal axis, click on "zoom" option and use
Zoom In + and Zoom Out -, respectively. Here, “Plus” is used to Zoom In +. In addition, you can also use
the + and - keys on the keyboard
or the Scroller. In order to zoom along vertical axis, hold down Ctrl and roll the mouse wheel. By doing
this, you can zoom in on the voltage diagram of group "A" and along "y" axis. This can also be done by
holding down the Ctrl key of
the keyboard and using the + and - keys. Using "Optimize" option, the diagram display can be optimized.
If the user intends to optimize the curves along horizontal axis, the "Optimize X-Axis" option or the X
shortcut key of keyboard can
be used. If one intends to optimize the curves along vertical axis, they should use the "Optimize
Y-Axis" option, or the shortcut Y on the keyboard. If the "Optimize all" option is selected, the whole
curve is displayed within the specified
time, and the diagrams are optimized in terms of both "x" and "y" axes. In the "view" option, you can
zoom in on the given diagram along "Y" axis, for example the voltage diagram of "A" group is set
on"100". Additionally, some values have
been written beside the coefficients of this list that are used to apply changes using the keyboard
buttons. Here, for example, it is observed that this diagram is shown along "Y" axis twice magnified
using voltage "A" group diagram and
by pressing "2" on the keyboard. In "signals" option, the displayed signals are shown in the
corresponding diagram. From this part, the user can hide the signal curve in the selected diagram by
unchecking the desired signal. For example
here the "V L1-E" signal is hidden in the diagram. Additionally, the user can also hide or show that
signal in the diagram by holding down "shift" key on the keyboard by clicking on the desired signal
name. For example, by holding down
"shift" and clicking on the "VL1-E" signal name, this signal can be added to the diagram. The "bold"
option is used to make the signals displayed on the diagram thicker, for example here by checking "V
L2-E", it can be observed that its
signal become "bold"; moreover, the line next to the signal name becomes "bold". By holding down "Ctrl"
key and clicking on the desired signal name, it can be displayed in "bold" state or the user can leave
this state. For example, by
holding down the "Ctrl" and clicking on the "VL2-E"signal name, this signal leaves the bold state.
Remember the options "View", "Signals", and "Bold" act differently for each diagram, for example, by
right clicking on group "A" voltage
diagram and adjusting the "view" on 200%, it is observed that the height of relevant voltage diagram
increases by 200%, but the height of the current outputs of group "A" diagram remains unchanged.
Additionally, by right clicking on the
group "A" voltage diagram and by opening "signal" and "Bold" options, it can be seen that only group "A"
voltage signals are shown. So if you want to use the "View", "Signals", and "Bold" capabilities for
current outputs of "A" group,
you should right click on the current diagram of group "A" and apply the required changes. In the
"diagram" option, the list containing all signals exists and the given signal can be selected to be
displayed in "signal view". Please consider
that here the signals used in test and enabled from "Hardware Configuration" can be selected. The group
"A" voltage outputs, group "A" current outputs, and the device binaries have been selected by default to
be displayed in the "signal
view". For further explanation, first go to "Hardware Configuration" to enable all voltage and current
outputs of the device; now if the "Voltage all" option is selected, all voltage outputs of groups "A"
and "B" are shown in a diagram.
Moreover, if the "Current all" option is selected, all current outputs of groups "A" and "B" are shown
in a diagram. If the user wants to have each of the voltage and current outputs in a separate diagram,
that signal should be enabled
here by checking it. For example the "IL1" and "IL2" signals are checked. It is observed that each of
the "IL1" and "IL2" signals are displayed in separate diagrams. Additionally, if the user needs to
display the current outputs of group
"B" in a diagram, the "current Group B" should be selected from this part. Each signal can be added to
or removed from this window in this way. If the user has made any changes in the way of displaying
signal lines, hiding signal, adding
or reducing signal, etc., by clicking on "Default View" option, all settings in this window will be
restored to default and the applied changes are removed.
“SIGNAL VIEW” WINDOW, PART 2 The following items “signal view” right clicks menu “Signal
properties”: This item is used for setting the display and color of signals in “signal view”. When you
click on it, “signal properties” page opens. Also,
you can open this window by double clicking “signal view”. The display and color of analog signals can
be set by “analog signals” tab. You can select the signal from “signal” frame. Here, “V L3-E” is
selected as an example. The selected
signal can be observed in the field “Name”. The selected signal cannot be changed. In “Line style”, the
user can select a style for signal curve display. Solid is the default style. However, the user can
change that in the existing dropdown
menu. The line thickness is set by “line width” that has a maximum value of 15 point. By clicking
“color”, you can select a color for signal line. “Marker type” is used for inserting a special geometric
shape along the signal path; the
geometric shape can be selected out of the shapes in the list. Here, “square” is selected for “V L3-E”.
Before leaving this page, any change in the signals can be observed in “preview” field. In the field
“space between markers”, the space
between the selected “markers” on the signal line can be set based on “pixel”. For example, “10px” is
selected on the space. On “preview” field, you can see some circles created on the signal curve; the
space between these circles is “10px”.
/ / The display style and color of binary signals are set in the “binary signals” tab. The signal is
selected from the “signal” menu, and the name is observed in the “name” field .Here, “Bin. Out 1” is
selected. The signal color is selected
from menu “color”. Here, orange is selected as the signal color. The changes in the signal can be
observed in “preview”. By clicking “OK”, the settings are applied on the signals. Note that in order to
retrieve the default settings of
signal display, you can click “reset to default” in “signal properties” window. / You can open “selected
signal lissasous” by clicking on it. In this window, the user can select two signals from the fields
“horizontal axis” and “vertical
axis” and display them terms of one another. For example, here the two signals “V L1-E” and “V L2-E” are
selected and displayed in terms of one another after clicking “Zoom all”. In the left toolbar, there are
some tools for making changes
in the curve. These tools are respectively used for displaying and hiding the toolbar, selecting the
pointer icon, undo and redo, zooming the curve, zoom all, zoom in, zoom out, and selection of pan mode
for moving the curve. / Note that
the user can press the mouse scroll and move “signal view” curves on the diagram. The window “go to time
signal view” can be opened by “Ctrl + G” keys. If the user wants to observe the signal at a specific
time, the considered time should
be specified in the field “specific time”. Also, in order to determine the signal between two points,
the user should specify the times in the fields “from” and “to” in “In range” section. For example, 0.5
second is inserted in “from”
and 0.8 second is inserted in “to”. You will see that the signals of voltage group “A” are displayed in
the specified range. / If the user has inserted several curves in “signal view” window, these curves can
be observed by using the keys
“up” and “down”. For instance, some curves are activated and can be seen by using the up and down keys.
“SIGNAL VIEW” SETTING, PART 1 At the top bar of this tab, there is a list of enabled signals in the
device inputs or outputs being enabled in “Hardware Configuration” window. each of these signals in
“Signal View” window, it should be selected
in this bar; Note that “Show Actual Value” should be set to see “Binary Input”. For example, “ voltage
group B” is enabled in “Hardware Configuration” window. Then, by enabling “ Binary Input” “C3” on “Trip”
signal and setting its “Show
Actual Value”, these signals are added to the list of enabled signals in order to display in “Signal
View” settings that the relevant signal can observed by selecting each one. / Since the voltage and
current outputs of Group “A” are enabled
in “Hardware Configuration” window, all voltage and current signals of Group “A” can be observed by
selecting “Voltage GroupA” and “Current GroupA”.These options can be displayed in this way if “B”
voltage and current groups are enabled;
in addition we can also have a specific graph for each phase by selecting each one of the phases.
“Voltage All” and “Current All” options represnet the voltage and current output signals of groups “A”
and “B” in a graph. “Digital” option
represents the status of receiving or not receiving “Binary Input” and “Binary Output” signals in a
specific graph. Fot this purpose, set the “State” time to 5 seconds in “Detail View” and “Trigger” is
set to 1 “C3” binary. After performing
the test, this binary is short circaited and you can see that receving the signal is shown on “C3”
binary in “Digital” graph. / In “General Setting”, the settings related to the display of signals is
performed. In Radio Button, displaying
the signal will be effectiove by selecting “RMS” in button radio, and the signal display will be
instantaneous by selecting “Inst”. / Two options “Period Time” and “Num. Of Period” in this section for
the “Actuals” being received from
the device. “Period Time” is used for indicating the time of a period and the default value is set
according to frequency, but you should change this manually by changing the frequency.”Num. Of Period”
is used for calculating the “RMS”
value based on the average number of several periods. As the number groes up, the longer it will take,
while the accuracy increases and there will be less fluctuations. By selecting “Live Scroll”, you can
easily observe the voltage or
current signal changes at any moment of the injection and the instantaneous signal changes. In order to
see this, a test will run on the zoomed signal and you can always observe the moment of injecting the
signal. By selecting “Highlight
Current State”, a part of the signal related to the current “State” is specified. In order to see this,
if another State is added, a part of the signal related to the current State will be highlighted. “Show
Time On Binary” displays the
time related to disconencting or connecting the output and input binaries to “Digital” graph. For
observing it, run the test , on which the time is shown by connecting and disconencting the “C3” binary.
/ In “Show Table”, the settings
related to “Cursors” and “Data Table” are made. First, you should enable Cursor and Data Table by
selecting them at the top of the table. In this table, up to three “Cursors” can be enabled in “Cursor”
column and Data Table can be used
for analyzing the signals. Remember to show the data in each “Cursor” in “Data Table” the related “Data
Table” column should be checked. In addition, three other rows specific to the difference between “C1”,
“C2” and “C3” cursors can be
enabled or disabled in “Data Table” column. After enabling “Cursor” and “Data Table” at the top of the
table, you will see a table and two “Trackbars” added to “Signal View” window.”Time” column represents
the time when the “Cursor” is
on it. In “Signal” column, a signal is dedicated to “Cursor”. “Value” column represents the signal
value, “RMS” column represents the effective signal value, “ Phase “ column shows the signal angle and
in “ Frequency “column, the test
frequency is displayed. / In “Extra Setting”, “Cursor” attaches to the moment of receiviong the digital
signal and increases the reading accuracy by “Snap” while “Cursor” is enabled and by approaching
“Cursor” to the moment of recording
the digital signal. In “Extra Options” and “Num. Of Points” field, the number of sampling points from
the signal is specified and if you can reduce this value, you will see that displaying the signal will
leave the full sinusoidal state.
“Refresh All” refreshes all computational sections in “Signal View” window.
“SIGNAL VIEW” SETTING, PART 2 The “Operation” part is used when the user decides to conduct a
computational operation on the existing signals. At first, the number of the required “Operations” is
entered and clicking on “Initiate” creates
the “Operations”. Here the number 3 was entered. A separate section is opened for each “Operation” and
the given “Operation” can be deleted by clicking on the red Cross mark in the corner of the box. / In
the “Operation Mode” part, it
is found that with what kind of signal the “Operation” is performed, analog or “Dry”! If “By Dry Value”
is selected, the active “Binary Inputs” are shown in the table At first in “Hardware Configuration” page
binaries “C3” & “C4” are enabled
that by using this option you can see the binaries and determine a value for them, here value “5” is
assigned for each of them.For each operation A “Calculated” option is added above “Setting” bar per
“Operation”. By checking this option,
the “Calculated” signal is displayed in “Signal View”. In this diagram, the values of the contacts that
are connected are aggregated and displayed in the diagram; this is used to test capacitive banks. For
example, you can observe that
the values are added in staircase by receiving the contacts “C3” and “C4”. / In the “Number of Signal”
part, the number of signals used in “Operation” shows that 2 or 4 signals can be selected. In the
dropdown field related to “Singnal
1” and “Singnal 2”, the given signals are assigned to them, and by checking “Advanced” option, a section
is opened in which the signal information, such as the signal unit, can be determined. Additionally, by
entering a value in “Coef.”
field, the given signal is affected by a factor, and in the “Name” field, a name can be determined for
signal. In the “Operation”dropdown field, the user determines the type of mathematical operation to be
performed between signals. In
the “Advanced” part of this field, a name can be determined for this action. / After the “Operation” is
specified, the “Add Time” part is added which can determine time intervals on the signal diagram. In
order to make it clear, at first,
the time state is set at 10 seconds in “detail view”, and the same intervals are determined on the
signal by specifying a time of, for example, 2 seconds in “Auto Add Time” part. If the user intends to
determine non-identical time intervals,
by selecting “Add Time” a window with the same name is opened, and some rows are added by right-clicking
upon it. The first column determines the “Operations” to be used for calculation of the values of this
row. In “Time” column, the
given time is selected. In “Value” column, the value of “Operation” in the given time is calculated. The
“Slope” column is the gradient column. In “Sig1” and “Sig2” columns, the values of signals at the given
time are determined. / / In
the “Show Signals” part, all parameters corresponding to the voltage and current in test are determined.
This part includes some columns and at the beginning of each, the name of the relevant parameter is
written. Each column contains
some options. By selecting each option, the name of its box is added at the top of the “Setting” tab,
and then, by checking this option, the corresponding “RMS”valus is displayed in the “Signal View”. /
When “Show Actual Value” option
of “Binary Inputs” is set, two parts are added to “Setting” and “Signal View”, for example by checking
“Binary-Input Target” option in the “Hardware Configuration” page and the “Binary/Analog Input” tab, all
“Binary Inputs” are enabled.
Then “Show Actual Value” option of one of them is set to “AC” or DC state and the “Show Actual Value”
option of all enabled binaries is set at “AC” state upon right-clicking upon it and selecting “Set all
Binary like this” option. You
can observe that all “Binaries” have been added to the bar above “Setting”. By checking each of them,
the corresponding signal can be seen in “Signal View”. In the “Select Graph For Actual Binary” part, you
can select other signals in
the proprietary graphs of each “Binary Inputs” whose “Show Actual Value” is enabled to be displayed. In
addition to displaying their signals, the “Binary Inputs” are also shown in the graph. This way, a
comparison can be made between the
“Binary Input” signal and other signal. For example, here we determine that in addition to displaying
trip signal, Start” and “VL1-E” signals are also shown in “C1” signal diagram. Additionally, the signal
name can be changed. Then by
selecting the name on the bar above “Setting”, the signals can be observed. / In “Binary Analog
Transformer” part, the user can aggregate the signal with a constant value, multiply it by a factor, or
apply a phase shift to it. The user
may intend to introduce another parameter by applying these factors to the given parameter, for example,
if the voltage signal is obtained by multiplying the current signal by 2 and aggregating it with value
3, the introduced parameter
will be voltage parameter by selecting the “Voltage” option. /
”VECTOR VIEW” WINDOW, PART 1 To open this window, “Vector View” option from the “View” menu should
be used and it is possible to open up to five “Vector Views” of simultaneously. By clicking on the right
arrow of “Vector View” icon from the
toolbar desired number of windows can be opened. Here, the first “Vector View” is opened. To better
explain this window, first, we close “Detail View” and “Measurement” view windows. In summary, on this
window it is possible to view current
and voltage input and output values in different modes. / / / “Signal”, “Magnitude”, the first harmonic,
phase, real value, imaginary values are displayed in “Signal”, “Magnitude”, “Harmonic 1”, “Phase”,
“Real” and “Imaginary” columns
respectively. Also, the arrow of signals can be made hidden in the “Show Arrow” column while the color
of arrows can be selected from “Color” column. Moreover, to add the frequency column to this table, by
right clicking in this area and
selecting “Table” from “Show/Hide” option, the frequency column is added to display the frequency of
signals. For example, “V L1-E” signal with a 63.51 volt range and a first harmonic value of 63.51, phase
value of 0, frequency of 50,
real value of 63.51 and imaginary value of 0 is depicted with a blue arrow. / Now, by changing the
status of “Show Arrow” to “False”, you can see that the vector of this signal is made hidden in “Vector
View”. To optimize the display of
“Vector View” vectors, right click on this section and check “Optimize”. If you want to manually
optimize the display of vectors, first you need to uncheck “Optimize” option and then optimize the
display of vectors from the related fields
at the corners of this page. / Also, if you want to add a signal to be displayed in “Vector View”, by
right clicking on the vector section of this window, you should select or remove your intended mode to
be displayed from the “Show” option.
By default, only “Output Value” and “Actual” are selected and phase voltage and current values of the
device are displayed. By unchecking “Output Value” and selecting “Line-Neutral”, you can see that in
addition to phase voltage and current
values, voltage and current values of neutral point are displayed in table and vector as well. / Also,
if you want to display line-line values of output voltage of the device, you should select “Line-Line”
from this list and check this
option. Then you will see that the values of line-line voltage of the device are displayed in the above
table and the vector display of them is displayed in the below vector. If you wish to see the
symmetrical current and voltages, select
“Symmetrical” option and by doing so you can see that the zero, negative and positive sequence values of
voltage and current and their vector view are displayed in the below table. / By selecting any of the
“Power Sv”, “Power Sa” and “Power
Sc” options, the value of power is calculated in accordance with the current and voltage of the test as
well as different calculation methods and then displayed in the related rows. For example, by selecting
“Power Sv”, you can see that
S1, S2 and S3 quantities are displayed in three rows. In “Magnitude”, “Phase”, “Real” and “Imaginary”
columns, the apparent power value, angle, active power and reactive power are displayed respectively.
Now, since here “Power Sv” is selected,
the power value of “Sv” is displayed according to the formulas in the box and after being calculated
according to vector method,it is displayed in “Sv” row. Also, in “PFv” section, the coefficient value of
apparent power is displayed.
/ / Now, if the user selects “PowerSa”, the power value of “Sa” is calculated using the calculation
method and according to the formulas in the box and then displayed in “Sa” field. In “PFa” field, the
coefficient of power is first calculated
using the same method and then displayed. / If “Power Sc” is selected, the value and coefficient of
power are calculated using the algebraic method and the displayed formulas and then displayed in “Sc”
and “PFc” rows. You should keep it
in mind that S1, S2 and S3 quantities are the same in all three methods and displayed on the vector.
Also, when the load is unbalanced, “Power Sc” method works better than the others and VƩ and IƩ
parameters refer to algebraic sum of voltages
and algebraic sum of currents respectively. Also, V and I parameters refer to current and voltage of the
system which are calculated in a four-phase system using the displayed formulas. /
“VECTOR VIEW” WINDOW, PART 2 Here we are going to introduce the other sections of the “Vector View”
page. To view the values related to current and fault voltage, the “Set Mode” in “Detail View” window
must be set on “Fault Values” or other
types of faults available in this drop-down list. By selecting “Fault Value”, “VFault” and “IFault” rows
are added to the table. It is possible to directly determine the value of these rows in “Vector View”. /
The next option is “Fault
Impedance” which is activated by selecting “Set Mode: Distance” in “Detail View” window. By selecting
“Set Mode: Distance” in “Detail View” and “Fault Impedance” option in “Vector View”, a new row named
“ZFault” is added to “Vector View”
table. Note that when this row is added, it is no more possible to modify “VFault” and “IFault” and
impedance fault is directly entered in “ZFault” row. “Angle for directional” option shows the angle
between currents and line and neutral
voltages which is suitable for analyzing directional over current tests. For this information to be
displayed, it is necessary to set “Set Mode” on “Overcurrent: I Test” in “Detail View” window. The next
option is “Differential”. “HW”
in front of this option means that this option is disabled due to “Hardware Configuration”. To solve
this, go to “Hardware Configuration” and activate all 6 current phases. / “Overcurrent: I test Vdir”
option is used for showing the current,
line voltage and the angle between these two. Note that to display these values in “Vector View”, “Set
Mode: Overcurrent: I test” needs to be selected in “Detail View”. “Voltages” and “Currents” options show
output voltages and currents
of the device in terms of different parameters including symmetrical voltage and current, neutral etc. /
“Powers” option shows the apparent power obtained from different methods. If you want to only view the
“Residual” voltage and current
in “Vector View”, you can use “Residual” option while to view the “Actual” values, “Actual” option is to
be used. “Text of Circle” and “Text of Vector” options are used to view the angles of the circle with 90
degrees step by step and
the name of each vector in the circle vector respectively.
“VECTOR VIEW” WINDOW, PART 3 Next, we make an increasing “Ramp” “State”, from 10 to 60 volts with 2
volts paces and a 1 amp current. Then in “Signal View” window, “Data Table” and 1, 2, 3 cursors are
activated and “V L1-E”, “V L2-E” and “V
L3-E” signals are assigned to “Cursor 1”, “Cursor 2” and “Cursor 3” respectively. / There are 5 states
in “Type” field. In “Normal” state, values are displayed in the table while performing the test. By
selecting “Orange”, an orange “Cursor”
appears at the top of the widow which is linked with “Cursor 1” in “Signal View” window and by moving
this “Cursor”, the time is displayed in “Time” field. You can see that by moving this “Cursor” the
signal values of all parameters are
displayed in the table of “Vector View” window and as a vector in vector graph of this window. Because
this “Cursor” is linked with the “Cursor1” from “Signal View” window and “VL1-E” is selected for
“Cursor1” signal, instantaneous and
effective values of “VL1-E” signal are displayed in “RMS” and “Value” rows in “Signal View” table
respectively. / Now, if the user selects “Blue” from the “Types” available in this field, this “Cursor”
turns blue and is linked with the
blue cursor which is “Cursor 2” in “Signal View” window. By selecting “Green” as “Type”, this “Cursor”
turns green and is linked with “Cursor 3” in “Signal View” table. So, it should be noted that in all
three “Types” including “Orange”,
“Blue” and “Green”, the values displayed in “Vector View” table are similar and only the “Cursor” link
of this window changes along with the “Cursors” in “Signal View” window for viewing the instantaneous
and “RMS” values of the intended
signal. If “Time” is selected from the available “Types”, a field named “Time” appears at the top of the
page and by entering the intended time, values of signals’ parameters are displayed in “Vector View”
window and their vector is displayed
at the bottom of this page. / In “Reference Signal” field, it is possible to select a signal as the
reference in “Vector View” window. By default, this is set at “None”. This means that if the voltage of
phase 1 has a 60 degrees angle
and the other phases are symmetrical, no signal is considered as the reference and based on what
determined in “Detail View”, “V L1-E” and “IL 1” begin with 60 and 0 degrees angles respectively and the
other signals are displayed with
a 120 degrees phase difference. Now, if “Reference Signal” is set at “VL1-E”, you can see that “VL1-E”
signal begins with a 0 angle and the other signals are displayed in this window with a 120 degrees phase
difference. Since there is
a 60 degrees phase difference between current and voltage in “Table View”, currents are displayed here
with a 60 degrees phase difference. Also, if displaying the line is activated in the window, by checking
“Show VLL from zero” option,
you can see that the vector view of them is displayed from zero in the vector graph of this window. / If
you want to perform “Zoom In” or “Zoom Out” on “Vector View” window, after right-clicking on vector
section of this window, first
you need to uncheck “Optimize” option, then, “Zoom” option is activated and you can “Zoom In” or “Zoom
Out” by using this option. Moreover, if you wish to change the color of this page, by using “Colors”
option, you can change “Background”,
“Foreground” and “Helper Line” colors. For example, here, we change the “Background” color to blue,
“Foreground” color to black and “Helper line’ to green. To revert the settings to default, select
“Default Colors” from this section. /
“MEASUREMENT VIEW” WINDOW, PART1 In reletion the “sequencer” windows, the “Measurement View” window
would be explained in this video. This window is used to evaluatthe test results and some criteria
determineg for the “Pass” or “Fail” of the
test. Note that evaluation can be performed before or after the test then the results rvaluated. To
explain this section three “states” of “Prefault”, “Fault” and “Postfsult” are created in the
“TableView” that the followed voltages are
injected:” in “Prefault”, content voltage of 10 V for two seconds; in the “Fault” state, the voltage
will increase from 10 V to 15 V as “continuous Ramp” in 10 seconds and in “Postfault” the 0 V for one
second. / / “Time Assessment” tab
The “Measurement View” window has some tabs that each one evaluates a special item. In the “Time
Assessment” tab, an event time is evaluated in the test this event is received by a signal from “Trip”
or “Pick Up” from a relay or logic
with a combination of various conditions. In this tab, some rows is “added” and multiple time
evaluations can be performed. In the “Name” column, a name, for example, “Trip Time” can be inserted for
evaluation. Since it’s possible that
a “Trip” signal can be recorded in different times, in the “Ignore before” and “Ignore after” a General
range from the test “States” are selected so the time evaluation of these events are performed in this
range. For example, by selecting
the “State :Fault”, all the events before the “Fault” “state” would be ignored in the “Ignore before”
column. In the same way, by selecting the “State” in the “Ignore after” column, all the events after the
“Fault” “state” are ignored.
In the “Start” column, the time reference and in the “Stop” column, the event that is meant to be
evaluated is specified. Here, receiving the “start” signal are selected from binary 4 as the reference
and receiving the “Trip” contact as
the binary3 would be selected as the intended event for time evaluation. Note that, there exists an
option named as “Logic” in the “Start” and “Stop” columns that by right-clicking on it and selecting the
“View Custom Setting”, a logic
with the combination of various conditions for evaluation start time reference and final conditions of
evaluation time calculation would be specified. In the “TNom” column, the expected nominal time of
“Start” and “Stop” enters and in
the “TDev+” and “TDev-” columns, the positive and negative tolerances are entered that could be
different from each other. / Here, to evaluate the test, a nominal time of three seconds, a positive
tolerance of two seconds and a negative
tolerance of one second are entered. After running the test and recording the results in the table, the
real-time of the event is specified in the “TAct” column that is about 3.623 seconds and its deviation
from the “TNom” is recorded
as a percentage in the “TDev” column. In the “Assessment” column, the evaluation is performed that if
the “Tact” time is in the defined range of Tnom-TDev- to Tnom+TDev+, the evaluation is “Passed” and if
it is not in this range the evaluation
is “Failed”. Here, because the 3.623 seconds are located in the range of 2 to 5 seconds, the test is
passed. In the “user comment” column, you can enter your desired notes. / In the right-clicks of this
section, by selecting the “Copy”
option, the information of an evaluation row could be copied and by “Pasting” it, a new row with the
information is created. By selecting the “Add” option, a blank row is added to the evaluation table. By
selecting the “Insert before”
and “Insert After” a blank row is added before and after the selected row and other time evaluations can
be defined in these rows. The “Delete” will delete the selected row. / The last option in this section
is the “Show/ Hide” option
that is composed of two “Table” and “Report” options. There exists a list in the “Table” and “Report”
sections that are exactly the same as the evaluation table columns. By unchecking each of them, that
column would be deleted from the
“Table” in the “Measurement View” or the “Report” section.
“LEVEL ASSESSMENT” TAB One of the tool for evaluating the binary inputs that should be preserved
during the test is “level assessment”. In “level assessment” tab, the binary situation of the device
inputs can be assessed at the start of a
“state”. An example is provided for this process. / First three “states” are created in the window
“table view”. Then, the range of voltage signals are inserted as “30” v in “state1”. The value of “4”
seconds is inserted in the “trigger”
field. Then, the value of “10” v is inserted in “state2” and its time is set as “3” second. The value of
“30” v is inserted in “state3” and its time is set as “4” seconds. / In the following, by clicking
“hardware configuration” in the
tab “analog out”, current signals become deactivated. The binary inputs 3 and 4 can be activated in the
tab “binary/analog input” in “binary-input target”; then, they are assigned a name. Here, the type of
binary inputs is set as “dry”.
/ Then in the window “measurement view”, click on the tab “level assessment”. In this tab by clicking
“state name”, the names of the existing “states” are inserted in “table view”. This name is uneditable.
Note that in this tab, you cannot
add a line manually. In the “level assessment” tab, the right click tool is deactivated, and for every
“state” in the window “table view”, a line has been created in this tab. So, the number of assessments
in this section depends on the
number of “states” existing in the “table view” window. س / The result of assessment is presented in the
“assessment” column. The value of time tolerance for assessment of the zero or one level of the binary
input is entered into the column
“tolerance”. It can be simply stated that assessment of the level of each signal at the right and left
sides of the starting point of each state depends on the value of time tolerance specified in this part.
Suppose that the value of 30
ms is inserted as the tolerance of a binary input, the figure presents the schematic level assessment of
the signal of this binary input. As it is obvious, level assessment at the two sides of state2 is done
by a time tolerance of 30 ms
in order to check the condition specified for this assessment; for example the level of the binary input
should be equal to 1. As assumed, if the considered condition is that the level of Trip signal should be
equal to 1 for state2, the
result of assessment will be passed. / Specifying the binary levels In the “level assessment” tab, the
number of binaries defined in “hardware configuration”, column is added with the same name. In this
part, you can set the level one
or zero regardless of the binary level condition that is X. In this film, the goal is the assessment of
the level one of the binary 3 Trip in “state2”. Suppose that the level of binary 3 before and after the
second “state” is equal to
one for “40” ms and assessment result is pass. For this purpose, the value of “40” ms is inserted in
“state2” in the field “tolerance”, and the level one is inserted in the field “Trip” binary 3. A comment
about the assessment can be inserted
in “user comment” that is also used in the output report. Then run the test. After the test, assessment
is done and the result is presented in “assessment”. As seen in “signal view”, before and after the
“state2”, binary one has been preserved
for at least “40” ms. So, the result of assessment is “pass”. /
“RAMP ASSESSMENT” TAB The “Ramp Assessment” tab is used for evaluating a signal in case special
condition in the test. For example, if a relay picks up, the current amplitude is assessed and
evaluated. Note that this evaluation is used only
for the “States” of the “Ramp” type. For better explanation, three states are generated in such a way
that the first state is adjusted as “Normal” with the voltage of 5 V for two seconds, the second “State”
is adjusted as “Step Ramp” from
5 V to 20 V with 1 V steps and the third “State” is adjusted as “Step Ramp” from 30 V to 50 V with 2 V
steps. In addition, in the first column a name, for example, Ramp will be entered for evaluation. / In
the “Ramp State”, the intended
“State” is selected from the “states” of the “Ramp”. Note that because this evaluation is only for the
“Ramp” type “States”, the first “State” that is as “Normal” type is not shown in this field and from the
states of two and three, the
“State 2” will be selected for evaluation. In the “condition” column, a condition is specified for
evaluation that here, the intended condition is specified as receiving the “Trip” signal from one
binary. Also, in the “Signal” column,
the intended parameter for evaluation is selected. For example, the “VL1-E” is selected. It means that
the “VL1-E” voltage is evaluated when the trip signal is received. If you want to evaluate other signals
simultaneously, you have to
the right-click, select the “Add” option and create other columns and define another evaluation. Other
existing options in the right-click section has been explained in previous videos. In the “Signal Type”
column, you have to set the
evaluation to be performed on what parameter of the selected signal. Here, the “Amplitude” is selected.
In the “Nom” column, the intended value of the amplitude in the time of term happening is specified. For
example, this value is set
to be 40 V. in the “Dev+” and “Dev-“ columns, the positive and negative tolerances are entered in which
can be different from each other. Here, to observe the performance of this section, the positive and
negative tolerances of 2 V and
3 are, respectively. / By running the test, in the time of receiving the “trip 0-1” signal by third
binary of the device, the actual value of amplitude of the “VL1-E” signal is shown in the “Act” column
in which its deviation from the
nominal value in the “Dev” column is about 42 In the “Assessment column, the evaluation result specifies
that if the “Act” value is located in the allowable range i.e. Nom- Dev- to Nom+ Dev+, the assessment
result will be “Passed”, otherwise
it would be “Failed”. Here, because the value of 42 is in the range of 37 V to 42 V, this evaluation
will be “Passed”. In the “T Act” column, the “Trip” signal receiving time is specified and recorded by
the device that here, this time
is about 3.39 seconds. Also, in the “T Act Final Step” column, the receiving time of the “Trip” signal
is recorded from the last step of the “Ramp”, which here is about 399.2mili seconds. In addition, if you
want to define a “comment”
for your assessment, you can enter your intended comment in the “Use Comment” column. /
“VALUE ASSESSMENT” TAB: In this tab, you can evaluate a parameter from the intended signal in a
specified time first a “Step Ramp” with voltage from 55 V to 65 V with 1 v and 40msecond steps has been
created. In the “Name” column, you can
select a name, for example, “Voltage”, for assessment. you Also, have to select the “State” in the
“Reference State” column, and the intended signal in the “Signal” column for assessment, which “State 1”
and “VL3-E” will be selected, respectively.
/ In the “signal Type” column, you have to adjust which parameter should be evaluated. Here, this
parameter will be selected as “Amplitude” so the amplitude of the “V L3-E” signal in the assessment time
will be measured and evaluated.
Now, the specified time for assessment should be entered in the “Time” column that here, 200 ms will be
selected. In the “Nom” column, the expected value for the amplitude of the selected parameter is
specified, which here, the expected
value for the “V L3 E” phase voltage should be adjusted. For example, here, the voltage is set to be 60
V. in addition, in the “Dev+” and “Dev-” columns, the positive and negative tolerances are entered. Note
that these tolerances can
be different from each other. Therefore, the positive tolerance and negative tolerance are entered as 1
V and 0.5 V, respectively then "run" the test. / After completing the test, the actual value of the “V
L3 E” signal amplitude is shown
in the “Act” column. Also, its deviation from the expected value is specified in the “Dev” column in
percentage, which here is zero percent. In addition, the assessment result will be specified in the
“Assessment” section. If the “Act”
value is in the allowable range of tolerance, i.e. Nom – Dev- to Nom + Dev+, the assessment result is
passed. Otherwise, it is “failed”. You see that because the “Act” value is in the range of 60.5 V to 61
V, this assessment has been considered
as “Passed”. In addition, if you want to define a “comment” for your assessment, you can enter your
intended comment in the “Use Comment” column. /
“CALCULATED ASSESSMENT” TAB In the “Calculated Assessment” tab of the “Measurement View” window, the
mathematical operation can be performed between the assessments to create a new assessment and evaluate
the test. It means that in this tab,
a new parameter can be created in the specified mathematical operation that is performed for the
“Actual” values of the assessments, and the parameter can be evaluated by the “Act” values that are
selected from the “Ramp Assessment” and
“Value Assessment” tabs. After specifying the name for the assessment, the intended mathematical
operation in the “Calc” column will be selected. In the “X” and “Y” columns, one of the performed
assessments will be selected in the “Ramp
Assessment” and “Value Assessment”. Note that, the values that are positioned in the “X” and “Y” columns
are in fact, the “Act” value of the performed assessments entered in these columns. For simpler
separation of the evaluation names,
the two letters of “V” and “R” that represent the “Value Assessment” and “Ramp assessment” are used. /
In the “Nom” column, the expected nominal value and in the “Dev+” and “Dev-” the positive and negative
tolerances will be entered. The
true result of the selected mathematical operation in the “Calc” column will be shown in the “Act”
column and its deviation from the expected value will be shown in the “Dev” column and in percent. In
the “Assessment” column, the result
of the created assessment will be specified. If the “Act” value is in the allowable range, the result of
the assessment will be “Passed” with a green-colored sign. Otherwise, it will be “Failed” with a
red-colored cross. In the “User Comment”
column, you can enter your comment if you have any. In this test, in the “Ramp Assessment” tab, an
assessment with the name of “Voltage” is performed for the “V L1-E” voltage that will be entered in the
“X” column. In addition, in the
“Value Assessment,” an evaluation with the name of “Current” is performed for the “IL1” that will be
entered in the “Y” column. In the “Calc” column, the “X/Y” operation is selected. As you know, by
dividing the voltage to current, resistance
will be calculated. Therefore, the mane of this assessment is entered as “Resistance”. After specifying
the “X” and “Y” columns values, the “Act” value is shown. In the “Nom” column, the nominal values are
15.7 and the “Dev+” and “Dev-”
values are entered as 0.5. you can see that the “Act” is about 0.26 percent different from the nominal
value specified by the user and the assessment is “Passed”. /
"TRANSIENT ASSESSMENT" TAB The "Transient Assessment" section is used to assessing the "States" that
are designed for testing the "Transient". In this section, a received contact by the device from the
relay can be time-compared to the binary
signal in the "Comtrade" file. A sample of the application of this "Assessment" is to compare the
performance of the relay while applying the signals of transient file so the user would understand that
whether or not the relay has a similar
function while a fault occurs. / In the "Measurement View" window, the "Transient Assessment" tab, a
name is inserted for assessment in the "Name" field so better feedback is obtained from the specified
item. In the "Transient" field,
the intended "State" is selected. Remember only the name "States" which are "Transient" type are
displayed in this field. In the "signal" field, a binary signal is selected for comparison with the
reference signal from the "Comtrade" signal.
In this field, the list of all the binaries activated in the "Hardware Configuration" is displayed that
one of them should be selected. In the "Reference Signal" field, the reference signal is selected from
the "Comtrade" file. By clicking
on this field, all the existing binary signals in the loaded "Comtrade" file are displayed. In the "T
Dev. -" field, the negative time tolerance related to the digital signal edge is specified and imported
in the "Comtrade" file. In the
"T Dev. +" field, the positive time tolerance related to the digital signal edge is specified and
imported in the "Comtrade" file. The result of the assessment after running the test will be displayed
in the "Assessment" field. The green
color means the test is "Passed" and the red color meant that the test is "Failed". In the "User
Comment" field, a message can be written about the test, before and after the test which is used in the
output report. By right-clicking on
the "Transient Assessment" the tabs and options are displayed that are similar to right-clicking on the
"Time Assessment" tab, which was comprehensively explained in the previous educational videos Time
Assessment. The assessment in this
tab is defined according to the comparison of the signal with the reference signal. For assessment, if
both the signals are identical in the specified time period and have a similar status, then the
assessment will be "Passed". Otherwise,
the assessment is "Failed" showing that the relay didn’t have a similar performance while importing
error and had another status. // To do this at first, some adjustments should be performed in some
windows. In the following, an example
of the test will be discussed. At first, the "Transient" state will be selected in the "Detail View"
window and by clicking on the "Import Comtrade…" file, the transient state of the "Micom P441" relay is
loaded. Then, by clicking on the
"Current State" option from the toolbar, all the active and inactive binaries existing in the "Comtrade"
file and the voltage and current signals are displayed. In the following, by checking the "Calculate RMS
…", the software calculates
the effective values and the phases of the signals. // Subsequently, from the "Detail View" window and
"Binary out" tab, each of the existing signals in the "Comtrade" file that should be tested and assessed
should be ascribed to a "Binary
Output" and selected as the reference signal. In this video, two "ZONE1" and "ANY TRIP" signals are
ascribed to "binary out" 1 and "Binary Out" 2, respectively and the reception of trip signal from the
relay signal is compared to "ZONE1"
signal to be assess. / In the "Hardware Configuration" window, "Binary / Analog Input" tab, binary 1
with the name of “Trip" is connected to the relay trip contact for comparison with the active reference
signal. In the "Transient Assessment"
tab, in the "Name" field a name for example "trip1" is inserted for assessment. The "State1" that is a
transient state is selected in the "Transient State". In the "Reference Signal", the reference signal
that is selected in the "Binary
Output" is inserted ZONE1 and the "Trip" signal is selected in the "Signal" field for comparison. In the
"T Dev. -" and "T Dev. +" time tolerance "3" is inserted. In order to observe the "Binary Input" status,
the "All State" option are
selected from the toolbar and the test is executed so the fault is applied to the relay. Finally, in the
"Signal View" the relay has the same performance as the reference signal, which is defined as the
"Binary Output1", and the assessment
result is "Passed". / //
RUNNING THE TEST After designing the test in each room, run the test. Here, the "Pick up", "Drop
off" test is designed for the three-phase state in the "overcurrent" relay. In this test, the "CT"s
turns ratio is set to be 1/1000 and the "Pick
up" current of the relay is set to be 2 A. In addition, binary inputs 1 and 2 of the device are
activated to receive the "Trip" and "Pick up" signals of the relay. To perform the "Pick up" test, a
"State" with the name of "Pick up" and
as increasing "Ramp" type is designed, in such a way that the three-phased current increases from 800 mA
to 3 A each 500 ms with the 50 mA steps in the stepwise state. To end the "Pick up" test, in the
"Trigger" tab, the binary condition
of "C2:Start", "0-˃1" is adjusted. The intended "State" for the "Drop off" test is designed as a
decreasing "Ramp" type from 3 A to 800 mA in such a way that it decreases 50 mA each 500 ms in the
stepwise state. In this "State", the condition
for the test end is adjusted to be "C2:Start", "1-˃0" so if the relay "Drops" the test would end.
Remember that in the "Detail View" window from the state related to the "Drop off" test, you can check
the "Continue Last State Amplitude"
so immediately after the first state ends the current amplitude of the second state would start from the
previous value in the first state as "Ramp" type until the relay drops. By doing this, the test duration
decreases. // // / For this
test, in the "Measurement View" window, several assessments are designed for analyzing the actual values
of "pick up" and "Drop". In the first row, the actual value of the "Pick up" current related to the
first phase is evaluated. To do
this, in the "Ramp State", the " S1: Pick up" is selected, the intended condition for assessment is "C2:
Start 0-˃1", the intended signal is "I L1", and the parameter type for assessing this signal is selected
in the "Signal Type" as "Amplitude".
Now, because the "Pick up" current is 2 A, two is inserted in the "Nom" column that the relay should
pick up this current in ideal condition. In addition, the "Dev+" and "Dev-" columns the 100 mA
tolerances are selected for assessment.
The assessment of phase two and three picks up current is performed in the same way in the second and
third-row only with this difference that in the "Signal" column related to these two assessments the "I
L2" and "I L 3" signals are selected.
/ Also, in the fourth row, the actual "Drop" current of the phase one is assessed. For this reason, the
"Ramp State" is adjusted on "S2: Drop off" and in the "Condition" column, the "C2: Start 1-˃0"
condition, is selected for "I L1" signal.
For this assessment, the intended parameter in the "Signal Type" has been selected as "Amplitude". Now,
because the current amplitude of the relay "Drop" is 1.9 A, in the "Nom" column, the 1.9 A with 50 mA as
positive and negative tolerances
is adjusted. Remember that the current drop assessment in phases two and three are performed in the same
way with this difference that in the "Signal" column, the "I L2 " and "I L3" phases are selected. To run
the test, you have to click
on the "Start" icon in the "Toolbar" section of the software. You can then see that at first, the first
state that is designed for "Pick up" test is executed and after applying the trip signal and meeting the
specified condition in the
"Trigger" tab, the second state is executed and tested. Besides, you can use the "Test" menu or "F5" key
on the keyboard to run the test. In order to apply the changes in the designed states and also re-run
the test, you have to "Clear"
the previous test results using the "Clear Test" icon in the "Toolbar". Now, by clicking on the
red-colored cross icon you see that this test is "Cleared" and the icon related to "Start" is activated.
Furthermore, using the "F4" on the
keyboard the test can be "cleared". If you want some specified "States" to be executed from the designed
"States" in the "Table View", you have to check them in the "Table View" window or by clicking on the
right-side arrow of the "Start"
icon, by selecting the "Start Selected State", run the selected "States". By selecting the "Start
Unselected State" option the unselected "States" are executed. In addition, if you want to stop the test
while its performing, you have to
click on the "Stop Test" or press "F6". For example, by checking the second "State" by clicking on the
right-side arrow of the "Start" icon, the "Start Selected State" is selected and you see that only the
second "State" is executed. Now,
by clicking on the "Stop Test" icon, this "State" end and the current injection is halted before meeting
the specified conditions in the "Trigger" tab. / /
START-CONDITION-REPETITION" WINDOW By clicking on the "View" menu and selecting the
"Start-Condition-Repetition" option, or by clicking on its icon from the toolbar this window opens. In
the "Start Condition" tab, the test conditions can be
specified. If you want the test to be run immediately after clicking on the "Start" icon, you have to
select the "Immediately" radio button. After selecting this option in Status bar, the St. Cond. is set
on the "Immediately" and after
running it the test stars immediately there is no delays exist between clicking on "Start" and "Run".
Please remember that the software default is this option. / / If you want the test to be run after
receiving the contact by one of the
binaries, you have to select the "On Binary Input" option. By selecting this option, its right side
option is selected that you have to select the intended binary in it to start the test. In this field,
the activated binaries are shown
in the "Hardware Configuration". For example, the "C2: Start" is selected, now in the statusbar, the
"St. Cond." has been set on the BI.2-Start. After clicking on the "Start" icon, you see that because not
receiving the contact by the
"C2" binary, the test has not been executed, now by receiving the contact by this binary, the test runs.
The third method to start and run a test is the use of a "GPS" antenna. By selecting the "On GPS", a
test could run according to the
"GPS" clock. One of the applications of this option is in the longitudinal differential or "End to End"
tests. To run the test using this option, the socket of the "GPS" antenna should be connected to the
rear part of the "AMT105" device
and the antenna is located in open space. By clicking on the "Start Sync" option, the "sync" process of
the device with the satellite begin and in the "GPS Status:" field shown in the figure the "GPS" status
is shown. By "Syncing" of the
device and software in the "GPS Status:" field, the "GPS is Sync" term is shown. In addition, in status
bar, the St. Cond. is set on the GPS Sync. Also, in the status bar, GPS time error is displayed in the
"Time Error" section. Please
remember that this number should be less than 1000 ns. The tester time is displayed online in this
toolbar. In the "Satellite Signal Level History" section, the number of satellites and the strength of
each signal is shown. If the number
of satellites and the signal strength is proper, the phrase "Detected" is displayed in the "Time Pulse"
field and the device receives the "GPS" signals. Then, the device should be able to synchronize its time
with the received signals
from the "GPS". The date and time of the tester are specified in the "Date and Time Tester" section that
this time should be identical with the time of the "GPS" in the "Data and Time GPS" field. / / / In the
32 bits windows, if the tester
time is not the same as the time of your personal computer, you can use the Set Windows" "Time GPS Win
X86 so the time of your computer become identical with the "GPS" time. Using the "Next Full" and "Start
Time" options, how and when
the test run are selected. Using the "Next Full", after selecting this option, you have to specify the
time between the sequential tests for the "Shot test" from the drop down list. For example, if you have
several test points in the differential
test, by selecting the "10 Second", the GPS, by considering the injection time of the device, starts to
count down in 10 s cycles and in case of existence of untested point, when the inverse counter reaches
zero, the next point is tested.
Using this option, the start time for the "End to End" tests might not be the same. To solve this
problem, you have to start the test using the "Start Time". Remember this time is the time that the
device adjusts with the "GPS". Remember
in this method, only the first point is tested and the rest won’t. For these kinds of tests, the "Next
Full" and "Start Time" should be simultaneously checked so the first point start with the "GPS" clock
and the next points would run
with the "Next Full" method. For example, if in the differential room and for "End to End" test you have
got four test points and want to run the test at the same time with another point, you have to set the
"Start Time" on a special time,
for example, 17:47:30 and also, set the "Next Full" on 10 seconds. The first point is tested in the
specified time and the next points are tested during the specified time period in the "Next Full". You
also see that in the status bar,
the test time of each point and the remaining time until the next intended test point will be displayed
in the "Start" and "Left Time" sections, respectively. In the "Data" section, the data about the "GPS"
time, test location, etc. are
shown. In the "Data and Time GPS" field, the time and data received from "GPS" are displayed. In
addition, after that the "Sync" ends, the tester time is recorded in the "Date and Time Tester" field.
Remember this time should be identical
with the time recorded in the "Date and Time GPS". Also, the geographical width and length of the test
location are displayed in "Latitude" and "Longitude" fields, respectively and added to the test report
to be used, the exact location
of the test could be found on the map. In addition, in this section, in the "Altitude" section, the
"GPS" amplitude with respect to the base level are displayed. In the "Fix Mode", "PDOP" and "HDOP"
fields, various models of the location,
location precision and altitude precision are displayed. In the satellite field, the number of
satellites used for settings are displayed. If the device receives the sent pulses from the “GPS”, in
the "Time Pulse" field the word "Detected"
is displayed. But if these signals are not received, the word "Not Detected" is displayed. In addition,
in the "Satellite Signal Level" window, the signals receiving level from the "GPS" are displayed and in
the "Satellite Signal Level
History", the number of satellites and the signal strength related to various satellites are displayed.
"Repetition"Tab Since this tab is active only in the "AMT Sequencer" room and inactive in other rooms,
at first, the "AMT Sequencer"
room opens and the descriptions related to this section are presented in the "Start
Condition-Repetition" window. This tab is active only in the "AMT Sequencer" room and is inactive in
other rooms. This tab is used for repeating a test
for the desired number of times. The number of test repetitions are inserted in the "Number of
Repetition" field that the test can run for a maximum of 1000 times. For example, here, the number five
is inserted so the test would be repeated
five times. Also, if the user wants to make a delay between each test repetition, he can enter this time
as a delay in the "Time between Repetitions". For example, here, the 1 second is inserted and the test
"RUN". You see that the intended
test runs five times and with the time intervals of 1 second. /
“REPORT VIEW” WINDOW PART 1 After performing the test, the results of the test need to be saved in
form of an output file through “Report View” window. To open “Report View” window, you need to click on
“Report View” option from “View” menu
or click on the icon of this window from the toolbar. On this window, the report is viewable in two
forms of “HTML” and “PDF” and as default the report is displayed as “HTML”. / / / To view the report as
a “PDF” file, you should click
on “PDF” radio button. To export the output from this window you need to click on “Export Report” option
or save the report as a “PDF” file on your computer by clicking on “Export Report” from “File” menu.
Right-click options of “Report
View” window Using the “Export Report” option you can extract the report from the software as a “HTML”
or “Doc” file and save it in your desired directory. By clicking on “Report Setting” option, a window
with the same name opens. From
“AMProStateSequencer” tree diagram, you can specify what to be included in the “Report”. You can select
from “Short”, “Long” and “Custom” options for the mode of the report in the field at the top of the
window. / / In “Short” mode, the
software provides the user with a short output file containing the test parameters. For example, you can
see that in “Abstract” subcategory, only the results of the test and “Test Module” information which is
the test device information
are included in the “Report”. But in “Long” mode, the user is provided with a “Long” report of the test.
You can see that by selecting this mode in the “Abstract” subcategory, in addition to “Test State” and
“Test Module”, “Comment” and
“Tested By” options are checked which refer to the comment written in the “States” of the software and
the name of the performer of the test respectively. Also, if the user manually selects any of the
parameters to be included in the report,
they enter the “Custom” mode. In summary, in the “Abstract” subcategory, a summary of the information
regarding the “State” specified for the test including the result of the test, day, date and location of
the performed test, test device
information, comments and the name of the performer of the test which can be selected to be added to the
“Report”. Also, in “Test Object – General Data” subcategory, information regarding the “Device” section
and the parameters specified
in “CB Configuration” from the “Test Object” window are available to be selected. For example, you can
see that by checking “Other RIO Function” option, the values specified in “CB Configuration” section are
added to “Report” window. Also,
in “Test Object” subcategory the information related to the system including parameters of the system,
time tolerances and grounding factor from distance block as well as protective zones of distance block
settings etc. are available to
be selected. For example, by checking “System Setting”, you can see that system parameters, tolerances
and grounding factor specified in “Test Object” window, are added to the report.
“REPORT SETTING” WINDOW PART 2 In “Hardware Configuration” subcategory, name of the device, hardware
status of the device, binary and voltage output status, “Input” binaries status, “Output” binaries
status and “AUX DC” voltage status are
selected to be added to the “Report”. For example, by checking “Analog Outputs” option, you can see that
the wiring and activeness or inactiveness status of every voltage and current output is added to the
“Report”. By checking “Link XRIO
References” option, if the value of a parameter in a “State” is linked to a specific parameter in
“XRIO”, it is mentioned in the “Report”. “I L1” current is linked to “CT” secondary current in “Device”
section and then “Link XRIO References”
option is checked. You can see that its information is added to the “Report”. / / By opening “Test
Setting”, you can see that its three subcategories including “State Group”, “Type Details” and “Start
Test Condition” which are the settings
related to “States”, their types and test start conditions are located in this section. “State Group”
subcategory includes items related to “Detail View” window. If type of any of the “States” is something
other than “Normal”, in “Type
Detail” section it is possible to add their details to the “Report”. To do this, by opening any
subcategory of this section, for example “Ramp Detail”, you can select any section of “State Type”
settings to be displayed in the “Report”.
In “Start Test Condition” section, it is possible to select the specified start condition of the test to
be displayed in the “Report”. / In “Test Result” section, you can select the results of your test which
may include assessments, time
of the test, signal waveform status in “Signal View”, vector view of device voltages and currents in
“Vector View” etc. to be displayed in the “Report”. Note that in “All State” subcategory you can specify
the items you wish to be displayed
in the “Report” for all of the “States”. Before selecting the options available in “Current State”,
first you need to determine the intended “State” and then by going to this subcategory, select the items
of this “State” that you wish
them to be displayed in the “Report”. / If extra items such as “Operation” are specified for the test,
you can select them to be displayed in the “Report” from “Extra Test Result” section. In “Show
Calculated” subcategory, you can select
the items related to the “Operations” specified in “Signal View” settings to be displayed in the report.
If you have specified a lissajous diagram for the test, by selecting “Knee point” and “lissajous” and
its subcategories, you can add
them to the report. / /
ADVANCED SETTINGS OF “REPORT” PART 1 On “Report Setting” window, it is possible to change the view
type of “Report View” window by using “HTML” and “PDF” options. Also, by using the “Scroller” of this
section, it is possible to navigate through
different pages of the report and view the applied changes. Note that “Scroller” is only available in
“HTML” mode. / By clicking on “Advanced” button, the advanced settings page opens on the right side of
this page. By using “Export Settings”,
you can save an output “sqrs” file containing the settings and if necessary, it is possible to “Load”
the setting in the software by using “Import Settings” button and have an output report with the saved
settings. This feature is useful
when you intend to perform a “Clear Cache” on the software because by doing so, the current settings are
removed and “Reset” to default settings of the software. So, before clearing the “Cache”, you can export
your settings and after clearing
the cache import it to the software. / / By using “Save to Template” button, it is possible to save the
current settings as a “Template” in the software and when necessary “Load” it by using the “Load from
Template” button. Also, if any
changes have been made to the report, to reset the settings to default settings of the software, you
should click on “Reset to Default” button. In “General Setting” section, the general settings including
numbering headers, showing the
characteristics curve guidelines, framing of the texts in the report, showing tolerances, as well as
showing the binaries which have been set on condition “X” are adjusted. For example, you can see that by
checking “Show border”, a dotted
line border is added around the texts of the report in “Test State” and “Test Module” sections. / In
“Font Setting” section, the font sizes of “Header” and “Body” are adjusted in pixels. “Header” and
“Body” are, by default, set on 12 and
11 pixels here. In “Image Setting” section, it is possible to add size of the characteristics curve of
the test, size of “Signal View” picture diagrams and size of “Vector View” diagrams in “Characteristics”
field, “Signal” field and “Vector
View” field respectively. / / For example, here the picture size of “Signal View” is set on the half of
its default size which is 300 pixels. Now, you can see that the size of the picture is changed to half
of its previous size on this
window. Moreover, if you intend to change the format of the pictures added to the report, you can select
your intended format from the list available in “Image Type” section.
ADVANCED SETTINGS OF “REPORT” PART 2 In “Margin Setting” section, it is possible to set all four
margins of the text. In “Document Setting” section, by checking “Insert page number”, you can insert
page numbers on report pages. Also, by checking
“Insert page break before main heading”, every “HEADING” of the report is added to the beginning of
every new page. / / By selecting “Fit width to max length data” in “Page Size” section, size of the
tables in the report is adjusted according
to the page size while by selecting “Fix width”, the page size remains fixed. If size of the table is
larger than the page, some parts of the table goes beyond the page boundary. In “Header/Footer setting”,
by checking “Header”, “Header
text” field appears which enables you to enter your desired text. Also in “Header height” section, you
can specify your desired height for the “Header”. / By clicking on “Logo” and opening “Import logo for
report” window, you can insert
a picture or the logo of the company in the “Header” of the report. By checking “Footer”, “Footer text”
field appears which enables you to enter your desired text. Also in “Footer height” section, you can
specify your desired height for
the “Footer”. By checking “Show persons sign” and selecting “Setting”, “Persons sign” window opens where
you can add up to four signs to your report. By clicking on “Add persons sign” and clicking on
“Signature” and selecting “Signature”
you can add a “Signature” to your report. In “Title” and “Value” sections, title and name of the person
are entered respectively. / In “Title” of the “Setting” section, you can enter a general title for all
four signatures and add a box
for every signature by checking “Show border in report”. Also, in “Repeat mode” section, by selecting
“Show in all pages” the entered signatures are displayed in all pages. But, by selecting “Show in last
page”, these signatures are displayed
only in the last page. In “Extra setting” section and in “Tested by”, “Approved by”, “Company”, and
“Comment” fields, you can enter the name of the performer of the test, the supervisor, and the company
as well as comments respectively.
Note that to show these items in the output report, other than checking their options in this section,
you need to check their options in the tree diagram under abstract branch as well. / By selecting
“Browse custom”, you can display specific
information of the “Xrio” file in the report by checking their corresponding option. For example, to
display “Name plate” and “Location”, you should check these options from the “Test object” tree diagram
of the “Device” section in “Browse
custom” and “Xrio block report setting” page so that the intended information is specifically displayed
in the report. /
INTRODUCING “OVERCURRENT” ROOM This room and other test relay rooms which were introduced by the
name of “Medium” rooms before are used to test high current functions and “Over Load”. This room
includes three windows of “Test View”, “Over
Current Characteristic” and “Medium Detail View” which are used to enter the test points and display
them in the intended characteristic curve. / / / To test a relay, the first thing to do is to enter the
relay information and settings
in the software. To do this, first, select “Test Object” from the toolbar and from the tree diagram in
“Device” section enter “I primary” and “I secondary” information which are the “CT” turn ratio. Note
that any mismatch between the setting
of this section and the relay will lead to wrong responses in relay test. / Next, you need to enter the
relay setting from the tree diagram in “Over Current” block. By double-clicking on this block,
“Overcurrent Protection Parameters”
page opens which includes “Relay Parameters” and “Elements” tabs. In “Relay Parameters tab, in “Relay
Behavior” section, first you need to determine whether the relay is “Directional” or “Non-Directional”.
Then, in “Tolerance” section
and “Current”, “Time” and “Angle” sections, current and time tolerances and for “Directional” tests,
angular tolerance are entered. / / In “Elements” section, you need to determine the relay characteristic
curve and its characteristics.
To do so, first the type of intended current protection should be selected in “Selected Elements Type”.
Then, you need to specify the characteristic curve information in the table in this page and create the
relay “Curve”. / / / By using
“Add”, you can add more rows to the table and if there are multiple “Stages”, create another “Curve”.
Also, “Copy to” and “Remove” options are used to use the curve created in different protections and
remove the created row respectively.
“Move Up” and “Move Down” options are used to move a “stage” up or down respectively. / In “Define
Element Characteristic” tab and in “Characteristic” section, the type of characteristic curve and in
“Range Limits” section, current and
time ranges which are protected by the intended “Stage” should be specified. Also, if a characteristic
curve is specified for “Dropping” the relay, you can enter its setting in “Reset Characteristic”
section. The “Curve” of every “Stage”
is displayed separately in the diagram at the right side. In “View Resulting Characteristic” section,
you can view the characteristic curve resulted from specified “Stages”. / / If in “Relay Behavior” page,
the relay is specified as a
“Directional” one, another tab named “Define Element Directional Behavior” is added where the setting
related to the unit protected by the relay is entered. Moreover, a polar diagram is added in which the
angle protected by the relay is
specified schematically. / After entering the relay characteristic and confirming the changes, it is
possible to specify some points on the characteristic curve and run the test in “Test View” and “Over
Current Characteristic”. In future
videos, each of the mentioned sections will be explained in greater detail. By selecting any of the
“Element Versions” in the “Compatibility” section, the pickup current coefficients change for each
element. By selecting “Advanced Element”,
the coefficients for the specified characteristics is change into what can be seen in the picture. This
means that the pickup current determined for that characteristic is multiplied by the displayed
coefficient and “Fault Type” is applied
for it. As an example, if you determine an element in negative sequence and you wish to test this
element in “L1L2” mode, this characteristic can be tested by multiplying square root of 3 in pickup
current. These coefficients are extracted
from negative, positive and zero sequence matrix. One example is provided about how to calculate these
coefficients and other coefficients can be achieved by following the same procedure. / But in “Simple
Fault Loop” which is an algorithm
used by older relays, these coefficients are, as you can see, different. To facilitate analyzing the
effects of coefficients on characteristics, there is a section named “More Details” on “Test View” page
by double-clicking on which another
section opens where the information regarding the characteristics along with their coefficients are
displayed. The difference between “Advanced Element” and “Zero-Sensitive Elements” is in the “3I0”
characteristic coefficient; one of these
two should be selected in accordance with the relay algorithm.
RELAY SETTING IN OVERCURRENT ROOM, PART1 As mentioned before, to test a relay, the first step is to
enter the relay characteristic in the software. To do this, first how to enter the setting for a
“Non-directional” relay is going to be explained.
Enter “General Test Object” window and after changing the “CT” turns ratio to 500/1 in “Device” block,
by double-clicking on “Overcurrent” block, “Overcurrent protection parameters” page opens where you can
enter the relay setting. In
“Relay behavior” section, the setting related to relay protection, placement of “VT”s as well as wiring
of “CT”s are specified. Since here our relay is “Non-directional”, “Non-directional” should be selected
in this window. Note that the
setting related to “VT Connection” and “CT Connection” are only active in “Directional” mode and in
“Non-directional” relays, these options are disabled. / / / In “Directional” relays, current, time and
angular tolerances are set in “Tolerances”
section. To set current tolerance, you need to enter your intended tolerance as a percentage of the test
current in “Relative” field. You can see that this tolerance is set at 5 percent by default. Also, in
“Absolute” section, it is possible
to enter this tolerance as a coefficient of “CT” nominal current in this field and view its actual value
in the front field. Moreover, it is possible to enter the numerical value of tolerance and view its
related coefficient in the previous
field. For example, in this field 40 mA is entered as the tolerance. You can see that the coefficient
related to this current, changes in the corresponding field. Note that the software picks the maximum
tolerance between the two tolerances
specified for the characteristic curve. For example, if the test current is set at 1 amp, with a 5
percent tolerance, the current is calculated between 1.05 and 0.95 amp but if a 40 milliamp tolerance is
used, the pickup current is calculated
between 1.04 and 0.96 amp. The software picks the highest values which is between 1.05 and 0.95 amp. In
“Time” section, the time tolerances are specified in percentage and actual forms and the angular
tolerance is specified in “Angle”
section. / To specify the characteristic curve, you need to enter “Elements” tab. In “Element Name”
column, a title for the specified “Stages” is entered. For example, here “Stage1” is selected. In
“Tripping Characteristic” column it is
possible to specify the type of the characteristic curve which is set at “IEC Definite Time” by default.
To change the intended characteristic curve, double-click on “IEC Definite Time” or click on three dots
sign from “Characteristic”
section to open “Manage / Select Characteristic” window. In “Standard” section, you can view the
available characteristic curves in “IEC” standard and by selecting any of these you can view its formula
and coefficients in “Characteristic”
section. Note that it is necessary to select the same characteristic curve as the one specified for the
relay. / / If you cannot find the characteristic curve specified for the relay here or the coefficients
of the formulae are different,
by entering “Predefined” folder, you can find the relay characteristic curve from “Inverse”, “I2T”, IAC”
and “Reclosers” folders and then select it. Also, if you cannot find the relay formula in any of the
folders, in “Custom” folder,
by selecting “Custom Formula” it is possible to specify your intended formula according to the
coefficients specified in this section as well as the value of “Itest/Ipickup” and “Time dial” which are
indicated by “M” and “Td” respectively.
After doing so, you can save and use the formula. Moreover, if the relay characteristic curve is based
on the points table, you can add the characteristic curve point by point and view its curve by selecting
“Table Example 2” and using
the “Grabber” tool available in the software. This window will be fully explained in future videos. / /
/ If the characteristic curve formula is available in the software, but the used coefficients are not
the same as the ones in the relay’s
manual, you need to select the intended formula and by “Copying” and “Pasting” it in “User defined”
section, change its coefficients and use the formula according to the coefficients specified in the
relay’s manual. To facilitate doing
this, “Copy to user defined” option has been made available and you can use it. For example, here the
formula related to “Basler I2T-46N” curve is copied and pasted in “User defined” section. Now, by
selecting it, you should enter your
intended coefficients and by saving the new curve with the selected coefficients, it is saved in the
software and can be used. To continue the process, the “IEC Normal Inverse” curve is selected here. You
can see that in “Elements” tab,
an “Inverse Normal” “Stage” is entered. Now in “I Pick-up” column, you should set the pickup current of
the relay according to a coefficient of “CT” secondary nominal current which, here, is set at 1.1. Also,
it is possible to set the
pickup current from “I Pick-up” field at the bottom of this tab. After setting the pickup current, its
value is displayed in “Absolute” column. In “Time” column, “TMS” or “Time dial” of the relay is entered.
This value can also be entered
in “Time Index” field at the bottom of this tab and 0.5 is entered here. In “Reset Ratio” column, “Drop
Out” coefficient of the relay is entered which is set at 0.95 by default. Also, you can see that in
“Direction” column, the type of
this curve is set at “Non-Directional”. Um den Vorgang fortzusetzen, wird hier die Kurve „IEC Normal
Inverse“ ausgewählt. Sie können sehen, dass auf der Registerkarte „Elemente“ eine „Inverse Normale“
"BühneStufe" eingegeben wird. Sie
können sehen, dass auf der Registerkarte „Elemente“ eine BühneStufe „Inverse Normale“ eingegeben wird.
Nun sollten Sie in der Spalte „I Pick-up“ den Aufnahmestrom des Relais nach einem Koeffizienten des
Sekundärnennstroms „CT“ einstellen,
der hier auf 1.1 eingestellt ist. Außerdem ist es möglich, den Pickup-Strom im Feld „I Pick-up“ unten
auf dieser Registerkarte einzustellen. Nach dem Festlegen des Abholstroms wird sein Wert in der Spalte
„Absolute“ angezeigt. In der Spalte
„Time“ wird „TMS“ oder „Time dial“ des Relais eingegeben. Dieser Wert kann auch im Feld „Time Index“
unten auf dieser Registerkarte eingegeben werden, und hier wird 0.5 eingegeben. In der Spalte „Reset
Ratio“ wird der Koeffizient „Drop
out“ des Relais eingegeben, der standardmäßig auf 0.95 eingestellt ist. Außerdem können Sie sehen, dass
in der Spalte „Direction“ der Typ dieser Kurve auf „Non-Directional“ festgelegt ist. / / / / /
RELAY SETTING IN “OVERCURRENT” ROOM, PART 2 After specifying a “Stage” for the relay characteristic
curve, it is possible to specify the characteristic curve time and current range limits in “Range
limits” section. To do this, you need to
activate this section by checking “Active” option and enter the required ranges in according fields. For
example, here, “I min” equals 1.2 times “lref” and “l max”, 100 times “Iref” is entered. At the right
side of this window you can
see that the characteristic curve of the relay is specified to be between 1.2 and 100 times of the
reference current which is the same as “Iref” or “CT” secondary. Also, the minimum time is entered in “t
min” field and here “1.5” second
is entered. In “t max” field, on the other hand, the maximum time is entered which, here, is 40. Now you
can see the effect of these changes on the characteristic curve.Moreover, for relays that act in
“Definite Time” mode from currents
higher than a specific amount, “Limit t from I” option can be used. For example, for relays that act
from 1.1 time of the determined “Pickup” current and act in “Definite Time” mode from 20 times of the
“Pickup” current, the settings are
entered as can be seen. / / In “Reset Characteristic” section, you can specify the setting related to
“Drop out” characteristic curve of the relay which is set at “Off” by default. This means that as soon
as the fault current falls below
the relay “Drop” current, the pickup contact must be removed from the relay. By selecting “Definite
time”, “tr” field is activated and you can specify a time for “Drop out” of the relay. For example, if
1.5 second is entered here, when
the fault current falls below the specified value, the pickup contact must be removed from the relay
after 1.5 second. Also, by selecting “Inverse time”, “R” and “T” fields are opened and it is made
possible to specify an “Inverse” curve
for “Drop out” time of the relay according to the formula displayed in “Formula” section and by
specifying “R” and “T” values. Note that it is possible to manage “Reset Characteristic” and “Range
limits” sections from “manage / select
characteristic” page as well. / If the characteristic curve of the relay comprises of multiple “Stages”,
it is necessary to use “Add” button to specify the required number of “Stages” and by specifying their
parameters, test the intended
relay. For example, here, another “Stage” of “Time Definite” type is created and the pickup current is
set at 1.5 times “I ref” and its operation time is set at 200 milliseconds in “Time” column. You can see
that by clicking on any “Stage”,
its corresponding characteristic curve is displayed in the right side window. Now, in “View Resulting
Characteristic” tab, it is possible to view the final characteristic curve created. You can see that
this curve is the result of both
“Stages” specified in the table on this window. In “Color” column, a color is selected for each “Stage”.
In “Active” column, it is possible to activate or deactivate any intended “Stage” by using “Yes” and
“No” options. For example, here,
the second “Stage” is deactivated and removed from the characteristic curve. / By using “Save as
User-defined” option from “Manage / select characteristic” window, it is possible to add the
characteristic curve created in each “Stage”
in “User defined” folder and use when necessary. For example, here, the first “Stage” is selected and by
clicking on “Save as User-defined”, the “Manage / Select Characteristic” window opens. Then, by clicking
on “Ok” button and returning
to this window, you can see that this curve and its setting are added to this folder with the name of
IEC Normal Inverse2. /
RELAY SETTINGS IN “OVERCURRENT” ROOM, PART 3 As mentioned before if the relay characteristic curve
is provided as a table of points, the user needs to manually enter these points into the software. To do
so, first, “Table Example 2” is selected
from “Custom” folder in “Manage/Select Characteristic” window. You can see that, by default, a curve is
created in this section using the points table. / To specify a new curve, by clicking on “Copy to User
Define” option, this curve is
copied to “User Define” folder and after selecting this curve in “User Define” folder, by clicking on
“Grab” the window related to the “Grabber” opens. In this diagram the "X" axis is the current axis, and
the "Y" axis is the time axis.
In “Axes” section, to show the curve, the current range is specified in terms of “IPu” and the time
range is specified in terms of seconds. For example, here the current range is specified between 1 “IPu”
and 100 “IPu” and the current
axis is displayed between 1 and 100 “IPu”. “IPu” is the CT secondary nominal current. Also, by
unchecking the “Logarithmic” option, it is possible to change the diagram display from logarithmic to
regular. Also, by using “Open” and “Save”
options it is possible to save the created file in this section and open it again on this page and edit
or use it if necessary. / Now, from the toolbar click on “New” to open a new blank page for the new
curve. In “Point” section, enter
the current in “Current” field and time in “Time” field and then “Add” them to the points table of the
intended characteristic curve so that it is displayed in the diagram at the right side. Also, by
clicking on the related diagram and
selecting “Add” or by using the “Ctrl” key and clicking on the diagram, it is possible to create the
characteristic curve. By using “Add” and “Insert” buttons, it is possible to add the point entered in
“Point” section to the last row
of the table and before the selected row respectively. / / / If the user has a logarithmic image of the
relay characteristic curve, it is possible to “Load” it in this window by using “Load Image” option and
create the relay characteristic
curve for the test by adding the point on the entered curve. Now, here we enter an image of the “7UT63”
relay overcurrent characteristic. Then it is necessary to equalize the “Scales” of the diagram in this
page with the “Scales” of the
entered diagram. To do so, first, by using Alt+left click combination key the current and time axes of
the entered image are equalized with the current and time axes of the “Grabber” window. Then, the
“Start” and “End” values are specified
in “Current” section as 1.05Pu1 and 1.45 respectively. Also, the “Start” and “End” values are specified
in “Time” section as 0.05 and 200 seconds. You can see that both diagrams are completely overlapping.
Note that these numbers are different
for images with different sizes and they need to be specified by the user in a way that the two diagrams
overlap in terms of values and size. / / Now, by holding down the “Ctrl” key and clicking on the curve
with “Dial Setting=0.1”, this
characteristic curve is created and approved. If you wish to save this curve in the software for future
tests, you need to copy it using the “Copy” button and “Paste” it in “User Defined” folder. Now, by
selecting “Save”, the intended
characteristic curve is saved in this folder and is usable for next tests. / Note that if a later
version of the software is installed, this saved file is removed from the “User Defined” folder. So
before installing the new version of
the software, it is necessary to make an output “Xml” file by using the “Export” button from “Manage
Select Characteristic” page and then “Import” it to the new version. This characteristic curve is
displayed in the diagram at the right
side of the “Overcurrent Protection Parameters” window. Note that for the characteristic curves created
using this method, the time entered in “Time” column of the characteristic table of the characteristic
curve is a coefficient which
is multiplied by the times entered in the characteristic points table and as a result it influences the
characteristic curve time and relay operation time. /
RELAY SETTING IN “OVERCURRENT” ROOM, PART 4 To perform “Overcurrent Directional” test, first select
“Test Object” from the toolbar and then enter “I Primary” and “I Secondary” information which is the
Turns ratio of “CT” in the tree diagram
in “Device” section. Note that any mismatch between these two sections will result in incorrect
responses. / / After double-clicking on “Overcurrent” block in “Relay Parameters” page, select
“Directional” option in “Relay Behavior” section.
Then, specify the directions of “VT” and “CT Start Point” in “VT Connection” and “CT Start Point
Connection” respectively. Note that mismatch between this section and the relay setting will result in a
180 degree phase difference between
the device and relay settings. / After entering the intended “Stages” in “Element” section, whether the
protection direction of relay is “Forward” or “Reverse” should be entered in “Direction” field. Then,
enter “Maximum Torque Angle”
and “Sector Opening” of the relay in “Define Element Directional Behavior” tab. The calculation method
for these parameters will be explained in the videos related to protective functions test. In
“Directional” mode, a “Directional Plane”
is added to this page where you can view the range of relay protection. In “View Resulting
Characteristic” tab, you can view the general characteristic curve and “Directional Plane” diagram. Note
that if you have multiple directional “Stages”
with different “Pick Ups” and performance times, each “Stage” is depicted with a different color
specified in the table at the top. / To display the “Directional” characteristic curve or “Directional
Plane” and add test points, select
“Medium Detail View” from the toolbar and specify your test points on the curve. Another way to make a
characteristic curve is to use an “XRio” file. To do this, first, select “Test Object” from the toolbar
and check “Import from List”
option and specify the relay “Template” type in “Search” section. For example, here, “7UT” relay is
selected. Then, select “XRio” format from “File”, “Load Relay Setting”, “Relay Config Type” and import
your “XRio” file in “Config File
Path”. To make sure that the imported information is correct, you can review the entered parameters from
the tree diagram of this section. If necessary, you can examine the parameters effective on every other
parameters of the relay by
using “Reference Map” and modify it if there is any mismatch with the relay setting. /
“TEST VIEW” WINDOW As mentioned previously, one of the windows in “Overcurrent” room is “Test View”.
This window comprises of 5 tabs of “Shot Test”, “Pick Up-Drop Off”, “Setting”, “Trigger” and “Binary
Output”. Specifying the test points is
done in “Shot Test” and “Pick Up-Drop Off” tabs. / In “Shot Test” tab, you can select fault type and the
points for the test and after the test is performed, you can view the results of the evaluation. In this
tab, in “Test Point” section
the fault current and in “Fault Type” section the fault type are determined. In “Test Point” section,
the fault current and the angle between current and voltage are specified in “I Test” and “Angle” fields
respectively. Note that this
angle is only useful for performing “Directional” tests. !/ If you want to specify the fault current in
terms of a coefficient of “CT” nominal current or “Pick Up” current of one of the specified “Stages”,
you need to check “I Test Relative”
option and specify the coefficient in “Factor” field and then, from “Relative to” drop list select the
base current to specify the fault current. This base current can be a “Pick Up” current of one of the
“Stages” or “CT” secondary nominal
current. After specifying the test current, you need to select the fault type from the standard faults
available in “Fault Type” section. These faults include different types of phase to earth, two phase,
three phase, inconsistency, “3I0”
and “L1”, “L2” and “L3” faults. / To better understand “L1”, “L2” and “L3” faults, suppose that in a
line, there is a transformer with a delta connection on the first side. When a fault occurs in the
secondary side, the fault phase corresponding
current will flow in the first side and this fault current is provided by other phase or phases.
“Negative Sequence” or inconsistency faults test is available by selecting “I2”. Since relays detect
inconsistency fault by using the value
of negative sequence current, by selecting this type of “Fault Type”, the entered fault current will
merely be negative sequence current. “3I0” fault is useful for “Earth Fault” in “Summation” mode while
“L-E” fault is useful in “Measuring”
mode. / / By clicking on “Add”, the selected test point is added to the table in this window. Regarding
the test points, note that if you check the "I Test Relative to" option and make the test stream
dependent to a parameter and "Add"
that point, that test point is always dependent on the value of that parameter and by changing the value
of that parameter, the amount of the test current also changes. To clear the subject, check the "I Test
Relative to" option and the
test current is defined twice the rated current, and this point is added to the test table. Now if you
change the rated current to 5 amps you will see that the test current changes from 2 amps to 10 amps. By
selecting one of the rows and
clicking on “Insert” option, the selected row is repeated in the table and by clicking on “Remove”
option, the selected point is removed. Also, by selecting “Add to” option, it is possible to copy point
or points selected for one of the
“Fault Types” to another “Fault Type”. By clicking on “Remove All” option, all test points entered in
the table will be removed. / By clicking on “Sequence” option, “Sequence Test Points to” page opens
where it is possible to specify test
points with equal steps. In “Current Data” section, steps are created in direction of the range. By
selecting “Current” in “Sequence Type” field, current steps are directly entered in terms of ampere and
by selecting “Factor”, the current
is entered in terms of the parameter selected in “Relate to” field. / In “Start Value”, “End Value” and
“Step Size” fields start point of the current point, end point of the current point and steps are
specified respectively. For example,
“Factor”, “Pick Up” current of the first “Stage”, 2 times, 6 times and half of “Pick Up” current are
selected as values for “Sequence Type”, “Relate to”, “Start Value”, “End Value” and “Step Size”
respectively. You can see that “Step Count”
which is the number of current steps or test points equals 9. / Moreover, in “Angle data” section, the
information related to start angle, end angle and step size are entered in “Angle data”, “Start Value”,
“End Value” and “Step Size”
respectively. Here 30, 45 and 5 are entered as these values. In “Step Count” field, the number of
current steps are specified which is 4 points. In “Total Shot Count” field, the sum total of points is
calculated. This value shows that
each point in all 4 specified angle “Steps” enters test table with a specified current range. After
selecting the “Fault Type” of “L1-E” and “L2-E” and confirming them, you can see that these points are
added to the test point table. /
/ If the performed test has “Failed” points, by selecting “Clear All Failed Tests” option, it is
possible to clear all these points from the table of this section. In “Detail” section, the information
related to “Trip” nominal time, the
allowed operation time range, actual time and test point evaluation are entered in “t nom”, “t min” and
“t max” fields, “t act” and “Stage” field respectively. The test points are entered with detail in the
table at the bottom of the page.
The details include test evaluation, test current, test point angle, whether the test is “Relative” or
not; if it is “Relative”, the base coefficient and parameter, nominal time, operation time, fault
measure in terms of percentage and
seconds and the minimum and maximum operation times are entered. Also, if you wish to add a comment
about any of the test points, you can use the “User Comment” cell. At the end of this page, it is
possible to select test points table
from different “Fault Types”. /
“PICK UP-DROP OFF” WINDOW “Pick Up-Drop Off” test of the relay is performed In this tab. In “Test
Point” section, the settings related to test points is adjusted. If you wish to perform a “Pick Up-Drop
Off” test in a “Non-directional” relay,
you need to select “Current” from “Target type” section and for Angular “Pickup-Drop-off” test select
“Angle”. At first, “Current” is selected for “Non-directional” test. / In “Pickup” field, the “Pickup”
current of the relay is specified.
This means that ideally, the relay must “Pickup” at this current and here we enter 1amp for this field.
In “Reset Ratio” field, the ratio of “Drop” current to “Pickup” current is specified which here is set
at 0.95. Note that by specifying
a value for “Reset Ratio”, the software calculates the “Drop” current value and displays it in “Drop
Off” field. In “Angle” field, the angle of “Pickup” current is specified which is not useful for
“Non-directional” relays and depending
on the test type, the user can set it at their desired value. Now, since in “Pick Up-Drop Off” tests the
software uses increasing or decreasing ramps, the time interval between increasing and decreasing ramps
must be entered in “Pickup
∆t” and “Drop Off ∆t” respectively. By default, these values are set at 100 millisecond. In “∆I” field,
the values of each “Step” in each time ramp is specified. Here, this value is set at 20 milliamps. Then,
in “Pickup Start” field, the
ramp initial current value in test is specified. Here, this value is set at 800 milliamps. This means
that the ramp begins at 800 milliamps and increases. Moreover, it is necessary to specify the final
values of the ramp current as well.
These values are entered in “Pickup End” and “Drop Off End” fields for “Pickup” and “Drop Off”
respectively. For example, here, the final current values for “Pickup” and “Drop Off” are set at 1.2 amp
and 800 milliamps respectively. / Now,
according to the values set in “Test Point” section, the software applies an increasing ramp from 800
milliamps to 1.2 amp of current with 20 milliamps ramps and 100 milliseconds time interval and then
receives the “Pickup” signal. Then,
it applies a decreasing ramp with 20 milliamps ramp and 100 milliseconds time interval until the relay
“Drops”. In “Fault Type” section, as mentioned before, it is possible to determine the fault type. Now,
by using “Add” button, this
test line is added to the characteristic curve of the relay on “Overcurrent Characteristic” window.
Also, the related row is added to the table at the bottom of the “Pick Up-Drop Off” page. In “Detail”
section, after the test is finished,
the real “Pickup” current value of the relay and the relay “Drop Off” current value of the relay are
displayed in “Pickup act” and “Drop Off act” fields respectively. / / For each “Fault Type”, this test
is performed only in one point.
Immediately after receiving “Pickup” contact, the ramp starts decreasing from “Pickup-End” point. If you
wish the ramp to start decreasing from the same point as the relay “Pickup” point, you need to check
“Last state Amplitude” option.
/ For “Directional” tests, here the settings for a “Directional” relay is in a way that the “Direction”
is “Forward” and “Maximum torque angle” and “Sector opening” are set at -60 and 180 degrees
respectively. Then, open “Medium Detail
View”. In this window, the operation range of the relay is displayed in green and purple. You can see
that this range is set between -90+60 30 degrees and -60-90 -150 degrees. In “PickUp-DropOff Data”
section, the test lines selected from
the created test lines are displayed in the table at the left side. In the left sidebar of this window,
there are some tools used for diagrams which have been explained previously. / / Now, “Angle” is
selected from “Target type” and “States”
of the “Ramp” created by the software are put on the angle. In this mode, the value of the current and
the fault current angle are entered in “Current” and “Angle” fields respectively. Also, the amount of
angular changes in each ramp,
the amount of start angle value for ramp “State” and the final value of this angle are entered in "∆∅",
“Pickup Start” and “Pickup End” fields respectively. In “Drop Off End” field, the final angle value for
decreasing ramp “State” is
specified. / For example, here you should make two search lines in border points. The first search line
is set with a 1 amp “Pickup” current and a 30 degree angle. You can see that the fields related to this
test line are adjusted at the
right side by the software. Note that these values can be specified by the user. Also, in graphic
diagram of “Medium Detail View” window, the angular range of the intended test is turned pink. Now, we
add this test line to “Pick Up-Drop
off” test table. Now, to create the next test line, -150 is entered as the angle value in “Angle” field
and this lined is also added to the test lines. You can see that by selecting any of the created test
lines, its information is displayed
in “PickUp-DropOff Data” window. Note that in performing this test, in “Pickup” current, you should
perform the test once at the highest limit of the angle and once at the lowest limit of the angle. /
“OVERCURRENT” CHARACTERISTIC CURVE To continue explaining “Overcurrent” room, in this video we are
going to explain characteristic curve or “Overcurrent Characteristic”. In “Overcurrent Characteristic”,
the inverse current curve is displayed
in terms of time. This window is designed in a way that it is connected to other windows in this room
and it is possible to add points to the table and perform the test more quickly by using some
combination keys. / To add test points
to “Test View” table, you can click on the characteristic curve and select “Add” button to add points to
the table for test. Also, by holding “Ctrl” key and clicking on the curve, you can add your intended
points to the test table more
quickly. The third method for adding points to the test table is to enter “I test” current in “Test
Point” section and click on “Add” button. This method has been explained in previous videos. / After
adding test points to the table, by
clicking on “Start/Continue Test” from the toolbar, all test points are tested one after the other. But,
if you wish to test each point individually, you can either click on “Start Single Test” or right-click
on your intended row or then
click on “Apply & Start Test” to run the test. Also, if you wish to test a test point without adding it
to the test table, click on the intended test point on the characteristic curve and then click on “Start
Single Test”. / In “Overcurrent
Characteristic” window, it is possible to apply more settings for better analysis by clicking on the cog
at the bottom of the page. Each case is explained in the following. / “Zoom during Test” to zoom on the
characteristic curve “Optimize
All” for optimal display of the characteristic curve “Pan Mode” For moving the characteristic curve
“Horizontal Axis” to display horizontal axis of the characteristic curve in relative form “Show Row
Number” for showing number of the row
whose information is entered “Show All Tact Point” for displaying the operation time of the entire test
points on the characteristic curve If the selected test points are close to each other, you can use
“Show Selected Tact Point” for
better display of the operation time of each row. Note that if “Show All Tact Point” and “Show Selected
Tact Point” are selected simultaneously, the operation time of the entire test points on the
characteristic curve is displayed. If
you wish to add the test point exactly on current lines, you can use “Snap to Grid” option. Note that it
is, also, possible to activate “Pan Mode” by holding “Alt + Mouse Click”. If “Show Cursor Value” is
checked, by hovering the cursor
over any point, the current value and nominal time of that point is displayed. Also, if you wish to have
the information regarding every curve, you can check “Show Curve Information” option. / Moreover, there
are some features available
in the right-click menu of this page which are going to be explained. “Shot” option shows the
coordinates of the shot point. “Add shot” option shows the point added to the table and “Shot at” option
shows the coordinates of the point “Shot”
on the curve. If “Snap to Grid” is not checked, these two coordinates will be the same. / Explanations
of “Zoom Mode”, “All”, “In”, “Out” options are available in “Sequencer” section videos. “Characteristic”
and “Test Points” options show
Characteristic curve and range of shot points on the curve zoomed, respectively. In “Show” section,
“Curve”, “Test” and “Grid” options are used to display or hide tolerance, “Shot” points and
characteristic curve lines respectively. In
“Color” section, it is possible to change the background color, “Grid” color of the lines by using the
“Background” option. By using “Default Color” it is possible to change the colors to default settings.
“Other” Options are the same
as those available by clicking on the cog icon at the bottom of the page which were explained in the
beginning of this video. / / /
“SETTINGS” TAB OF “OVERCURRENT” MODULE, PART 1 To continue with explaining “Overcurrent” room, in
this video we are going to explain “Setting” tab. In this tab, you can adjust some of the test settings.
In “Fault Inception” section, the angle
in which the fault occurs is specified. But this angle is not the angle between current and voltage but
it equally shifts the current and voltage values. To better understand this, select “Signal View” from
the toolbar and check “Voltage
Group A” in “Setting”. Then, by changing the “Angle” value, you can see the current and voltage signals.
Note that to determine the angle between current and voltage, you need to use the “Angle” field in “Shot
test” tab. / “Voltage Output”
is used in “Directional” tests but if, for any reason, you wish to activate your voltages in a
“Non-Directional” test and see the influence of changing voltages on “Overcurrent” test, you can use
this section. In “Trigger On” field in
“Pick up Drop off Contact” section you can determine the “Contact” to be used for doing “Pick up Drop
Off” test. This option is used in cases where the relay does not have “Pick up” contact. In these
relays, by reducing the trip time to
zero, it is possible to find the approximate pickup current. / But if you do not wish to change the
relay settings, if the relay has “LED” or “Flag” pickup, you can manually issue a “Pick Up” or “Drop
Off” command by checking “Space Key
Press”. You can perform the test by pressing the “Space” button once at the time of “Pick up” and once
at the time of “Drop Off”. If you wish to create a transient state for the current waveform in “Add
Signal” and test the transient state
“Overcurrent”, you can do so by checking “Dc decay” decaying Dc and specifying the “Amplitude” value in
terms of percent and time coefficient in “1/T” and then you can view the changes resulted in the
waveform in “Signal View”. Now, if
you wish to add “Harmonic” to the transient state, you can do so by checking “Harmonic” and specifying
the order of the “Harmonic” in “Number” field and specifying the “Amplitude” in terms of percent and
phase angle. Note that by unchecking
the options in this section, the signal returns to “Normal” state. / /
“SETTINGS” TAB OF “OVERCURRENT” MODULE, PART 2 In “Time” section, first, the injection time before
fault in “PreFault Time” is entered. In tests such as “Directional” where by injecting voltage, “PTs”
draw inrush current, by checking “Ramp
in Prefault” you can create a “Ramp” voltage and prevent device errors. Note that checking this option
is only possible for “Directional” tests or in conditions determined in “Voltage Output” section. / In
“Max Fault Time”, the maximum
fault injection time is specified in the form of “Abs” or “Rel” which itself includes three sections.
Note that if the time specified in “Max Fault Time” is shorter than time of the “Trip” time of the shot
point, result of the evaluation
will be wrong. / If you are using “Max Fault Time Abs” field, you need to enter a time in terms of
seconds for the maximum fault signal injection time for all points. But, to increase the speed of the
test, you can use “Max Fault Time
Rel”. By checking this option, three other options appear. By entering a number in “Add%ofTnom”, the
fault signal injection time in each point equals the test point nominal time plus a percentage of the
nominal time entered in this field.
This means that if the test point nominal time is 10 seconds and 5 percent is entered in this field, the
maximum fault injection time 1.05 equals the test nominal time which is 10.5 seconds. But in “Add
Absolute” field, the fault injection
time is entered as a sum of the test point trip nominal time plus the time entered in this field. For
points which are in “No Trip” area, it is possible to enter a separate time in “No-Trip Time” field. If
you enter the time in these four
fields, the software will consider the longest time. / “Post Fault” time is entered in “Post Fault
Time”. “Delay After Trigger” is used for specifying the trigger time of the intended key and by
right-clicking on the related field and
selecting “Go To Linked Value”, you can see that it is linked to “CB Trip Time” and if necessary, by
selecting “Remove Link” you can enter your desired value instead. / By selecting “Fault Inception” in
“Time Reference”, the “Trip” time
from the fault injection time is calculated. But, by selecting “Starting”, the “Trip” time is calculated
from when the “Pick-up” contact is received from the relay. / In “Load Current Prefault Current”
section, it is possible to adjust
the settings related to “Prefault” phase and current. By selecting “Based on Current” radio button in
“Amplitude” section, the “Prefault” current is entered in ampere which is the same for all other test
points. But, by selecting “Based
on IFault”, the “Prefault” current is entered in fault current which is different for every “Shot”
point. You can use “Phase” section for the angle between current and voltage in “Prefault”. By selecting
the “Based on Degree” radio button,
it is possible to specify the voltage current angle in degrees which is the same for all other test
points. But, by selecting “Same as Fault Angle”, the angle between current and voltage in “Prefault”
will be the same with “Fault” which
is different for every “Shot” point. / In “Other Setting” section, by checking first run
"PickUp-DropOff", if you have multiple "PickUp-DropOff" and “Shot Test” points, first, the
"PickUp-DropOff" test is performed otherwise “Shot Test”
is performed first. By checking “Continue Last State Amplitude”, in "PickUp-DropOff" test, instead of
starting from “Pickup End” the decreasing ramp will start from where the relay performed the pick-up”. /
COMPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION OF “OVERCURRENT” MODULE To continue explaining “Overcurrent” room, here
are some additional explanations. By checking “Pause before Start” in “Pick Up-Drop Off” tab, by running
the test using the “Start/Continue Test”
method, before testing any point, a message appears and by pressing “Ok”, the software tests that point.
/ By selecting “Fault Inception” In “Time Reference”, the “Trip” time is calculated since the fault
injection time. This option is
used for testing the relays which do not have the “Pick Up” contact. But by selecting “Starting”, the
“Trip” time is calculated since when the “Pick Up” contact is received from the relay. This option helps
to increase the measurement
accuracy of the operation time in relays with “Pick Up” contact. / In fact, when you select “Fault
Inception”, it is like that you are putting the “trigger” on “Trip” signal. But if you select
“Starting”, first you need to make sure that
the relay gives a “Pick Up” signal. Selecting this option is like putting the “Trigger” on “Trip”, “Pick
Up” and “Trigger Logic” in “And” mode. / In “Binary Output” tab, if it is necessary for the relay to see
the key condition, by using
the “A” or “B” group voltages or “Aux DC” it is possible to take any needed voltage to the “Binary
Input” of the relay through “Binary Output” of the device. This tab has three “PreFault”, Fault” and
“Post Fault” modes and you can specify
the settings of each one separately. /
INTRODUCING “VI STARTING” ROOM “VI Starting” room is designed to test “51V” function. In this
function, the pickup of overcurrent unit depends on the voltage drop. In fact, “VI Starting” is a
current function whose “Pickup” is linked to voltage.
Note that in “51V” function test, evaluation of detecting or not detecting fault is performed based on
the test voltage and current amount which can be “Voltage-Controlled” or “Voltage-Restrained” and is
used as generator-differential
protection backup as well as for coordinating high-current relays in power systems. To explain the
difference between these two functions, characteristic curve and examples are used. If the “51V”
function is “Voltage-Controlled”, its characteristic
curve will look like what you can see in this picture. For a relay with this characteristic curve, the
relay performs the pickup in currents higher than “5A” and for currents lower than “4A” the relay does
not perform the pickup. But if
the current is between “4A” and “5A”, the relay performs the pickup only if the voltage is lower than
“50V”. In the settings of this function, “4A” and “5A” currents are specified as “I” and “I”
respectively. / In the second mode, if the
characteristic curve is “Voltage-Restrained”, like the previous mode, the relay detects a fault if the
current is higher than “5A” and in currents lower than “4A” it does not perform the pickup. The
difference is that between “4A” and
“5A”, the pickup voltage value has a linear increase. / In this function, it is possible to specify the
settings for phase to phase and phase to earth voltage faults separately. This is also considered in the
characteristic curve page
of this function so that if you add a shot on the characteristic curve in single-phase “Fault Type”, the
specified voltage is the voltage of the phase and if you select two-phase or three-phase “Fault Type”,
the specified voltage is line-to-line
voltage in which case the device produces the corresponding voltage to produce the line-to-line voltage.
/ / / “Test View” and “VI Starting Characteristic” are the two main windows of this room. In “Test View”
window, the three main tests
of this function are performed in “Shot Test”, “Check Test” and “Search Test” tabs which will be
explained in future videos. In “VI Starting Characteristic” window, the characteristic curve of the
function is displayed according to the
current and voltage. To specify the settings of this function, select “Test Object” from the toolbar and
double-click on “VI Starting” from the tree diagram and then enter your desired settings to be displayed
in “VI Starting Characteristic”
characteristic curve in “VI Starting Parameters” page. / Relay settings in “VI Starting” Room In VI
Starting Parameters page, you can enter the characteristic curve information in characteristic section.
In I and I fields, the lower and
upper limits of the pick-up current are entered. In this protection, for currents lower than I, the
function does not give a pick-up regardless of the voltage. Also, for current higher than I, this
function gives a pick-up regardless of
the voltage. The range between these two values is where the voltage value is influential for the
performance of the function. Voltage settings of this function is entered in VLN and VLL fields. As
mentioned before, this function needs
different settings for phase to earth and phase to phase faults. VLN is used for specifying phase to
earth faults settings; VLN I and VLN I are used for specifying the voltage value of lower and upper
limits respectively. VLL I and VLL
I have the same function for phase to phase faults. Note that for VI Starting-Controlled function, the
same value must be entered for the lower and upper limits of VLN and VLL. But for Restrained mode, the
lower limit must be lower than
the upper limit. Also, current and voltage tolerances of this function are entered in “Tolerances”
section.
“SHOT TEST” TAB As mentioned previously, one of the windows in “VI Starting” room is “Test View”.
This window has 6 tabs including “Shot Test”, “Check Test”, “Search Test”, “Setting”, “Trigger” and
“Binary Output”. Specifying the test points
is done in “Shot Test”, “Check Test” and “Search Test” tabs. / In “Shot Test” tab, you can select fault
type and the points for the test and after the test is performed, you can view the results of the
evaluation. In this tab, in “Test
Point” section the fault current and voltage and in “Fault Type” section the fault type are determined.
Voltage, fault current and the angle between voltage and current are entered in “Voltage”, “Current” and
“Phi” tabs respectively. After
specifying the current and voltage of the test, it is necessary to select the fault type from the
standard faults available in “Fault Type” section. These faults include different fault types of phase
to earth, two-phase and three-phase.
/ By clicking on “Add”, the selected test point is entered in the table in this window. By selecting one
of the rows and then selecting “Insert” option, the selected row is repeated in the table and by
clicking on “Remove”, the selected
point is removed. By selecting “Add to” option, it is possible to copy point or points selected for a
“Fault Type” to another “Fault Type”. By clicking on “Remove All”, all test points entered in the table
are removed. / By clicking on
“Sequence” option, “Sequence Test Points to” page opens where it is possible to create test points with
equal steps. In “Step” section, steps are created toward the range. By selecting “Angle” in “Step On”
field, angular steps are entered
directly in terms of degrees. This means that the test points are entered according to the origin point
specified in “Origin” section in a way that the required angles are resulted in accordance with the
horizon. For example, if 45 and
90 degrees are entered as start and end point with 5 degrees steps and 5 volts and 5 amps as origin
point, by confirming this settings and “Zooming All” you can see that there are some points added on the
“VI Characteristic”. For example,
the last point is selected. By doing the calculations mentioned in the picture you can see that the
resulted angle is 85 degrees and not 90 which is because the “Origin” point is considered as one of the
points as well and the last point
of this “Sequence” is removed. / But by selecting “Direction”, an angle is specified in “Angle” field
and in this angle from the “Origin” point, with the length entered in “Length” field and by steps
specified in “Step Size”, some points
are shot on the curve. Note that the length and the steps of the points are specified according to
nominal current which is the same as the “CT” secondary current entered in “Device” block on “Test
Object” page. For example, if 45 degree,
5 and 0.5 times the nominal current, 0 And 0 are entered as angle, length, step and origin point, by
confirming this setting and “Zooming All”, you can see that some points are created in 45 degrees in the
characteristic curve with 0 Volts
and 0 Amps as the point of origin. / If the performed test has “Failed” points, by selecting “Clear All
Failed Tests” option, these points are cleared from the table in this section. In “Detail” section, the
information related to “Tip”
nominal time, the allowed operation time range, the actual time and evaluation of test point are entered
in “T nom”, “T min” and “T Max”, “T act” and “State” fields respectively. In the table at the bottom of
the page, the test points
are entered with various details. The details include test evaluation, test voltage, test current, the
angle between voltage and current of the test point. Also, if you wish to enter a comment for any of the
points, you can select “User
Comment” from the cell. At the end of this page it is possible to select the test point table in
different “Fault Types”.
“CHECK TEST” TAB After performing the “Shot Test” in “VI Starting” room, it is time to perform
“Check Test” and “Search Test”. In “Check Test” the upper and lower tolerances of the relay that are
displayed as dotted lines in “VI Starting Characteristic”
are tested and evaluated. To perform the “Check Test”, first it is necessary to draw some lines named
“Check Line” in different sections of the diagram. To draw this line, first in “Origin” section from
“Check Line” section, the start
point of this line is specified. In “Voltage”, “Current”, “Phi” and “Angle” fields, origin point
voltage, origin point current, the angle between voltage and current and the movement angle of the
“Check Line” are specified respectively.
In “Length” section, the length of the “Check Line” is entered in the intended cell. / / Note that the
drawn “Check Lines” must cross at least one of the tolerance lines of the point characteristic curve.
Then click on “Add” option to
add the “Check Line” to “Check Test” lines table. Another way to draw a “Check Line” is to hold down
“Ctrl” button and left-click in “VI Starting Characteristic” window and then move the cursor in your
desired direction on the characteristic
curve. You can see that the information of the drawn “Check Line” is displayed in the “Check Test” lines
table. After drawing the “Check Line”, the software evaluates the crossing point of the “Check Line” and
the tolerance lines as a
“Shot” test in accordance with the performance of the relay. Here, after performing the test, the relay
performs a “PICK UP” in the lower tolerance and has no performance in the upper tolerance; so the test
is “Passed”. Other parts of
this section such as “Fault Type” and “Remove All”, “Sequencer” options etc. are similar to “Shot Test”
section which has been explained in previous videos. The only additional option in this section is “Copy
to Search”. By marking one
of the test lines and selecting this option, you can copy the selected line to “Search Test” and by
selecting “Add” in “Search Test”, this line is entered in the “Search Test” lines tables. / / After
“Check Test”, the last test performed
on the “VI Starting” characteristic curve is “Search Test”. The purpose of this test is to find the
characteristic curve line and drawing method of the “Search Line” is the same as the two previous
methods explained for “Check Line”. By
performing the test, the software starts interpolating the characteristic curve by testing some points
on the search line and determines the exact location of the characteristic curve. The number of points
on the “Search Line” which are
tested by the software is specified by the user in “Setting” tab in “Search Setting” section which is in
fact the resolution of the “Search Test”. There are three “Relative”, “Absolute” and “Max Point Number”
options in this section which
determine the ending condition of the “Search Test”. The first condition is “Relative” meaning if the
difference between the test point value and previous test point is less than the value specified in this
field, this point is the response
of the test. The second condition is “Absolute” meaning if the difference between the test point and
previous point is less than the value specified in this field, this point is the response of the test.
And the third condition is “Max
Point Number” meaning the test cannot be performed more than the number of points entered in this field
and the last point is the response of the test. / / “Ignore” field in “Search Interval” section is used
when you want to ignore the
characteristic curve specified for the intended search line. By entering a number in this section, some
points are added on the “Search” line with the specified value as the distance between them. For
example, by entering 0.4 in this field,
you can see that some lines are added on the “Search Line” with a 0.4 distance. If the test is
performed, the points added on the “Search Test” are tested one after the other so that the exact
location of the characteristic curve is determined.
This option is used when the characteristic curve that you have for the test seems wrong or you have no
characteristic curve at all. If you wish to do this for all of the test lines, you can use “Ignore
Nominal Characteristic” section
located in the “Setting” tab. To do this, by entering the value for “Search Interval” and selecting
“Apply to all”, you can apply this settings to all of the test lines and find the relay characteristic
curve. /
"VI STARTING" ROOM SETTING To continue with explaining “VI Starting” room, in this video we are
going to explain “Setting” tab. you can adjust some of the test settings. In this tab, In “Time”
section, first, the injection time before fault
in “PreFault Time” is entered. In “Max Fault Time”, the maximum fault injection time is specified in the
form of “Abs” or “Rel” which itself includes three sections. Note that if the time specified in “Max
Fault Time” is shorter than time
of the “Pick up” time of the shot point, result of the evaluation will be wrong. / If you are using “Max
Fault Time Abs” field, you need to enter a time in terms of seconds for the maximum fault signal
injection time for all points. But,
to increase the speed of the test, you can use “Max Fault Time Rel”. By checking this option, three
other options appear. By entering a number in “Add%ofTnom”, the fault signal injection time in each
point equals the test point nominal
time plus a percentage of the nominal time entered in this field. This means that if the test point
nominal time is 10 seconds and 5 percent is entered in this field, the maximum fault injection time 105
percent of the test nominal time
which is 10.5 seconds. But in “Add Absolute” field, the fault injection time is entered as a sum of the
test point trip nominal time plus the time entered in this field. For points which are in “No Trip”
area, it is possible to enter a
separate time in “No-Trip Time” field. If you enter the time in these four fields, the software will
consider the longest time. “Post Fault” time is entered in “Post Fault Time”. “Delay After Trigger” is
used for specifying the trigger
time of the intended key and by right-clicking on the related field and selecting “Go To Linked Value”,
you can see that it is linked to “CB Trip Time” and if necessary, by selecting “Remove Link” you can
enter your desired value instead.
In “Load Current PreFault Current” section, it is possible to adjust the settings related to “PreFault”
phase and current. By selecting “Based on Current” radio button in “Amplitude” section, the “PreFault”
current is entered in ampere
which is the same for all other test points. But, by selecting “Based on IFault”, the “PreFault” current
is entered in fault current which is different for every “Shot” point. You can use “Phase” section for
the angle between current and
voltage in “PreFault”. By selecting the “Based on Degree” radio button, it is possible to specify the
voltage current angle in degrees which is the same for all other test points. But, by selecting “Same as
Fault Angle”, the angle between
current and voltage in “PreFault” will be the same with “Fault” which is different for every “Shot”
point. / In “Search Setting” section, the settings related to “Search Test” are specified. As mentioned
before, “Search Test” gives a result
when one of these conditions are met. The first condition is “Relative” meaning if the difference
between the test point value and previous test point is less than the percentage specified in this
field, this point is the response of the
test. The second condition is “Absolute” meaning if the difference between the test point and previous
point is less than the value specified in this field, this point is the response of the test. And the
third condition is “Max Point
Number” meaning the test cannot be performed more than the number of points entered in this field and
the last point is the response of the test. But, if for any reasons, the nominal characteristic
specified for the test is not available,
you can use the “Ignore Nominal Characteristic” section. By doing so, the software ignores the current
characteristic. Then, according to the steps entered in “Search Interval”, shots are added to the
"Search" line. For example, in “Search
Test” section, a line is drawn. Then, 0.5 is entered in “Search Interval” and “Apply to all” is
selected. You can see that points with this step are shot on the “Search” line. By performing the test,
you can see that it starts from the
lowest point and when one of the three mentioned conditions is met, the test gives a result. If
necessary, it is possible to disable this option by selecting “Disable all”. In “Trigger” tab, you can
select your intended binary to receive
the “Pick up” signal, cutting the injection of current and voltage. The explanation and settings of this
section are the same as those for “Trigger” in “Sequencer” room. In “Binary Output” tab, if it is
necessary for the relay to see the
key condition, by using the “A” or “B” group voltages or “Aux DC” it is possible to take any needed
voltage to the “Binary Input” of the relay through “Binary Output” of the device. This tab has three
“PreFault”, Fault” and “Post Fault”
modes and you can specify the settings of each one separately. / /
INTRODUCING “DISTANCE” ROOM, PART 1 The relays impedance characteristic test is performed in “AMT
Distance” room. The most important use of this room is to test distance relays and “Under Excitation”.
Distance relays and “Under Excitation”
are used to protect the transmission lines and generators respectively. For example in this video two
“Mho” zones are drawn which are displayed in “Impedance View” window. Distance room consists of 4 main
windows including “Test View”,
“Impedance View”, “Z-T Diagram” and “Medium Detail View”. “Shot Test”, “Check Test” and “Search Test”
are performed in “Test-View” window. In “Impedance View” window the impedance characteristic of the
relay is displayed according to the
information entered in “Test Object” in terms of “X” and “R” and based on “CT” and “PT” secondary
values. This is why in this window the horizontal and vertical axes are named “Secondary R” and
“Secondary X”. To view the impedance characteristic
based on the primary you can select “Primary Values” from the toolbar. In “Z-T Diagram” the
time-impedance curve is displayed. If this window is open along with “Impedance View” and “Test View”
windows, by adding a shot on the curve or
selecting a point from the table, the location of that point is displayed on “ZT” curve. In “Medium
Detail View” window the characteristics of the shot point and protective zones are displayed. / As
mentioned before, to test the relay
first it is necessary to enter its information in “Test Object” window. Information such as nominal
information of the relay, serial number, operation location of the relay, “CT” and “PT” characteristics
are entered in “Device” block.
This section has been thoroughly explained in previous videos. But the main block in this room is
“Distance” by double-clicking on which, the “Distance Protection Parameters” window opens. Two tabs of
“System Settings” and “Zone Settings”
where the settings is entered are available in this window. / “System Settings” Tab The characteristics
of the power system are entered in “System Settings” tab. In “System Parameters” section, the length of
the line is entered in terms
of ohm in “Line Length” field while the angle of the line is entered in “Line Angle” field. In “PT
Connection” field, the installation method of the voltage transformer is selected from among “at line”
and “at Busbar” states. The installation
method of the PT Voltage transformer specifies whether the voltage exists in “PostFault” which refers to
the time after the fault. If “at Line” option is selected, after switching the circuit breaker, the
input voltage line of the relay
equals zero and the “AMT” device will not make any voltage into the relay in “PostFault”. But by
selecting “at Busbar” option, after switching the circuit breaker, the input voltage line of the relay
keeps its nominal value and consequently,
the “AMT” device injects the relay with nominal voltage in “PostFault”. / / In “CT StarPoint” field, the
direction of the connection is selected from among “Dir. Line” and “Dir.Busbar” states. If the
connection is “Dr. Line”, the current
flows from device to the relay. If the relay connection is “Dir. Busbar”, it is only enough that the
current angle is changed as much as 180 degrees. / / Then, in “Tolerance” section, time and impedance
tolerances are specified. In this
field, first the time tolerances are entered in terms of percentage and time in “Tol.T rel” and “Tol.T
abs” respectively. Then impedance tolerances are entered in “Tol.Z rel” and “Tol.Z abs” fields in terms
of percentage and ohm respectively.
/ “Grounding Factor” Section: In this section, the grounding factor for phase-to-ground fault is
specified. In phase-to-ground faults, specifying this number in accordance with the relay algorithm is
so important. If this factor is wrong,
the calculations of the phase-to-ground fault will be wrong as well. So, one of the methods mentioned is
this section should be selected in accordance with the algorithm used by the relay to calculate the
single phase-to-ground fault.
The output voltage and current fault of the device will change in accordance with the selected checkbox
in the “Mode” field. Any of these options should be selected considering the type of the relay being
tested. The used algorithms can
be divided into three groups of “Type A”, “Type B” and “Type C” in accordance with the different types
of relays and algorithms used to calculate the fault impedance. If none of the checkboxes is selected,
“Type A” is selected by default.
If you do not know the type of algorithm being used by the relay you are testing, it is better to use
trial and error method. / “Mode” Field There are various modes to enter the grounding factor values in
this section. It is only necessary
to select a mode and enter the values accordingly. By entering the grounding factor in this section, the
software calculates the impedance for phase-to-ground fault. If in the relay being tested, the grounding
factor is indicated by “KL”,
the “KL” value should be entered in “KL Magnitude” cell and its angle should be entered in “KL Angle”
cell. But if the grounding factor is indicated by “RE/RL” and “XE/XL”, you can select this mode and
enter the required values in “RE/RL”
and “XE/XL” fields. “RE” and “XE” stand for true and imaginary values of the ground impedance from to
the relay location to the fault and “RL” and “XL” stand for the true and imaginary values of line
impedance from the relay location to
the fault. If in the relay being tested the ground factor values is indicated by “Z0/Z1”, you can select
this mode and enter the “Z0/Z1” value and its angle in “Z0/Z1 Magnitude” and “Z0/Z1 Angle” fields
respectively. “Z0” indicates the
zero sequence impedance while “Z1” is indicator of the positive sequence impedance of the faulty line. /
/ / “Calc. With RE/RL and XE/XL” Option If this option is checked, “Type B” formulae are used to
calculate the ground factor and its
effect on the current and voltage produced by the device. In these relays, to calculate the impedance in
phase-to-ground fault, “Kr” and “Kx” factors are used which are “Kr=RE/RL” and “Kx=XE/XL”. / “Separate
Arc Resistance” Option / “Impedance
in Primary Values” Option In some relays, the characteristic is based on the primary values. But since
it is necessary to enter the characteristics in the software based on secondary values so that the
device can apply the voltage and
current in accordance with the relay characteristic, you should enter the primary values in the software
and check “Impedance in Primary Values” option. By doing so, the values are multiplied by the turns
ratio of current and voltage transformers.
/ “LL Fault Group Exclude L1L2L3 Fault Type” Option This option is used to separate two-phase fault from
three-phase fault. Generally, because of “Grounding Factor” in relays, there is difference between the
characteristic curves of “L-E”
and “LL” faults. But it is possible that in some relays there is also difference between two-phase and
three-phase faults in which case, this option should be used. By checking this option, it is necessary
to specify the three-phase fault
zones in “Fault Loop” column. More explanation on this section will be provided in future videos.
“Impedance Correction 1A/1nom” option is used when the relay’s “CT” is “5 amps” but in the calculations
a “1 amp” “CT” is used for it. By
checking this option, you can use the new turns ratio. /
INTRODUCING “DISTANCE” ROOM, PART 2 In “Zone Setting” tab and in “Zones” section, the information is
entered to each “Zone”. By using the “New” option, it is possible to add a row or “Zone” to the table of
this section and to repeat a zone,
delete a zone or enter the characteristics of each “Zone” you can use “Add Duplicate”, “Delete” and
“Edit” options respectively. / To enter the characteristics of a “Zone”, by clicking on “Add” add one or
several rows and specify your
zone. Using this table, you can draw the desired characteristics. For polygon characteristics you need
to use several “Lines” and enter the characteristics of each of the sides. For each line, “R”, “X”,
“Angle angle of the line” and “Inside
the inside area” should be specified which includes “Left” for the area of the left side and above the
line for horizontal lines and “Right” and below the line for horizontal lines. In using “Line polar”,
the line characteristics are specified
with its impedance magnitude and angle which means “Z” and “Phi”. If you wish to draw radial
characteristics, you need to use “Arc”. In “Arc” mode, you need to enter the center of the circle, the
radius of the circle, the start angle of
the curve and the end angle of the curve in “R” and “X”, “Radius”, “Start angle” and “End angle”
respectively. Moreover, you can select the rotation direction of the curve from among “Clockwise” and
“Counter clockwise” options. If you
are using “Arc Polar”, instead of “R” and “X”, you need to enter impedance and angle. / As an example,
we are going to show you how to draw a “Quad” characteristic and in future videos we will provide you
with explanations for other characteristics.
Before starting to design the zones, it is important to note that intersection of successive lines with
each other, meaning the intersection of the first and second lines, second and third lines, and third
and fourth lines so one. make
the zone. Finally, if you check “Auto Close” option, the intersections of the first and last lines will
be considered as well and the zone will close automatically. / To begin an element, “Add” “Line
Cartesian” and set its “R” and “X”
at “0” and “-0.1” respectively with a “0” angle. By adding the next line, the intersection point of
these two lines determines the zone area. “R” and “X” of the second line are “1” and “0” with a “65”
angle. Since “Left” has been selected,
the inside area of the left side is selected. By selecting “Right”, you can see that the right side of
the line from the intersection point is considered as a part of the zone. To specify the line above the
characteristic, a line with
“0” as “R” and “1” as “X” with a “0” angle and “Right” to select below the line is entered. In the final
step, a line with “65” as its angle and “-1” and “0” as its “R” and “X” are entered. / As another
example, if you wish to make a radial
zone, you need to use “Arc Cartesian”. If you just want to make a circular zone with a specified center
and radius, you need to enter the center of the circle and its radius in “R” and “X” and “Radius” fields
respectively. Here, as an
example, “1”, “0” and “1” are entered as the center and radius. “Start Angle”, “End Angle” and
“Direction” fields have no effect in this mode. In “Inside” field, by selecting “Left” or “Right” you
can select inside or outside the circle
as the zone respectively. If you wish to specify a part of the circle as the zone, first you need to
specify a line and then a circle. If you enter “15” degrees as the angle of the first line, and set the
rotation direction of the circle
at “Counter Clockwise”, the software starts moving in counter clockwise direction and picks the first
intersection of the line and the circle which is close to the “Start Angle” as the start angle and picks
another intersection which is
close to the “End Angle” and the end angle. To complement the explanation, another line is added. This
line determines the end angle and the first line of the start angle. Like before, the rule is that the
intersection which is close to
the “End Angle” is considered as the end angle. For example, “25” degrees is entered. According to the
provided explanations, if you wish to select a part of the circle as the zone, you need to specify the
circular element between the
two line where the first line is the start angle and the second line is the end angle. /
INTRODUCING “DISTANCE” ROOM, PART 3 To simplify drawing the zones you can use “Predefined Shapes”.
In this section, some patterns are predefined for three types of characteristics. Circle is used to draw
“MHO” characteristic curves. In “Forward
Reach” field, the maximum forward protective area is specified which is in “R” positive direction. If
the characteristic is in a way that covers a part of the back of the relay, by using the “Offset” field,
you can apply this item as well.
About the mentioned subject, note that applying offset does not cause “Forward Reach” to change.
Moreover, it is also possible to apply negative offset, which causes the characteristic to distance from
the origin of the coordinates. By
entering the angle in the “Angle” field, the center of the circle moves in counter clockwise direction
as much as the value mentioned in this field. For example, if “5” and “1” are entered as “Forward Reach”
and “Offset” respectively,
in “0” degree you can see that “R=-1 to “R=5” is the area that is covered. Now, if “45” is entered as
the angle, you see that the center of the circle rotates as much as “45” degrees. In this case, the
radius and center of the circle can
be obtained using “r=forward Reach + Offset/2"And “M=forward Reach + Offset/2”formula respectively.
“Polygon” characteristic are made of four line Cartesians. To change any of the sides, first you need to
select the intended line and enter
the characteristics. Explanations for this matter are the same as the explanations provided for line
Cartesian. / The last characteristic is “Lens/Tomato”. The use of “Forward Reach”, “Offset” and “Angle”
fields is the same as “MHO” characteristic.
Parameters “A” and “B” stand for “Width” and “Forward Reach” respectively and in “A/B” field the
proportion of these two is entered. If “A/B” is bigger than “1”, smaller than “1” or equalls “1”, the
characteristic will be in tomato form,
lens form and MHO form respectively. If “A/B” is selected in the “Type” field, by changing the “Forward
Reach”, the proportion of “A/B” remains the same and the “Width” changes. For example you can see that
if “A/B” equals “0.5”, by changing
“Forward Reach” the value of “Width” changes. However, if “Width” is selected as “Type”, by changing
“Forward Reach”, you see that the “Width” remains the same and “A/B” changes. / Practically this
characteristic curve is made of “2” circles
and the radius of these circles is shown as the “R” formula, the center of the first circle is shown as
“M1”, and the center of the second circle is in the form of “M2” where “α”, “β” and “ϕ” are as
illustrated. / / In the end, some points
about this section is mentioned: By selecting any element, any information entered earlier will be
deleted. By checking “Invert all” option, the selected area inverses. This means that if this option is
checked and “1” second is entered
as the trip time, on the test page you can see that inside the curve is “NO TRIP” while outside the
curve is “Tripping” area. / By clicking on “Clear” on this page, all information will be deleted. /
After specifying the zone, the type
of the zone should be specified in “Type” field. If “Tripping” is selected, its trip time and time and
impedance tolerances should be entered in “Zone Details” and for changing any tolerance, its checkbox
should be checked and then the
changes can be made. Generally, starting zones are very big, which contain tripping zones, and the
condition which the relay performs a trip is that the fault impedance is located not only in the
tripping area but also inside the starting
area. “Extended” zones are those that are activated by receiving a specific signal from the network and
usually cause the zone cover a bigger part of the line. / In “Fault Loop” field you can specify the type
of faults that the defined
zone can be used for. To specify that a zone is to be used only for two-phase faults you need to select
“LL” in “Fault Loop” field and check “LL Fault Group Exclude L1L2L3 fault Type” in “System Setting”. You
can use “Active” column to
activate or deactivate a zone. / “Up” and “Down” options at the top of the table are used to move the
defined zones. At the bottom of the page there is a box including grounding factor by which makes it
possible to specify a different
single-phase grounding factor for each zone. However, this section is in progress and is not ready for
use yet. /
INTRODUCING “TEST VIEW” WINDOW IN “DISTANCE” ROOM, PART 1 As mentioned before, one of the windows of
“Distance” room is “Test View”. This window consists of 6 tabs of “Shot Test”, “Check Test”, “Search
Test”, “Setting”, “Trigger” and “Binary
Output”. In “Shot Test” tab, it is possible to specify fault type and test point and after performing
the test, you can view the results of the evaluation. In “Test Point” section in this tab, the test
point can be specified using two
methods: first, the impedance magnitude is entered in “lZl” field in terms of ohm and in “Phi” field the
impedance angle is entered in terms of degree. Then, by clicking on “Add” the values are entered and the
software displays the real
and imaginary values of this impedance in “R” and “X” fields respectively. In the second method, it is
possible to directly enter the real and imaginary values in “R” and “X” fields and by selecting “Add”
select your intended point. If
you wish to enter your test points in terms of a percentage of length of the line, you should use “%”
field. / By checking “Z Relative” option, the test point is made dependent on the length of the line and
recorded in the table. By changing
the length of the line from 1 to 3 ohms, in “Test Object” section, in “Distance Parameters” window in
“System Settings”, the entered impedance value is changed in accordance with the length of the line.
But, if this option is not checked,
by changing the length of the line, the entered values in the table do not change. In fact, each test
point consists of three “States” which simulate “Prefault”, “Fault” and “Post Fault” states. By default,
in “Prefault”, “Fault” and “Post
Fault”, nominal voltage and 0current, 0 voltage and current and voltage and a current based on the test
point are injected respectively. To change “Prefault” and “Post Fault” states you should use “Setting”
tab and “Time” section. More
explanation about this section will be provided in “Setting” videos. Just note that if PT connection is
wired, as at busbar, in “Post Fault” the zero current and nominal voltage will be available. / The Fault
Type is specified in “Fault
Type” section. These Faults include phase to ground, two-phase and three-phase faults. Before specifying
the fault type and fault current, it is necessary to select the test model from among Constance test
current, Constance test voltage
and Constance source impedance. In Constance test current model the injection current is fixed and the
voltage changes in accordance with the test impedance. In Constance test voltage model, the test voltage
is fixed and the fault current
changes in accordance with the test impedance. In Constance source impedance method, the source
impedance includes the impedance from the origin to fault plus the impedance of ground to the fault
point, angle and the grounding factor.
/ By selecting “Add”, the selected test point is added to the table in this window. By selecting any of
the rows and clicking on “Insert” option, the selected row is repeated in the table and by clicking on
“Remove”, the selected point
is removed. By selecting “Add to” option, it is possible to copy the point or points selected for one of
the “Fault Types” to another “Fault Type”. By selecting “Remove All” option, it is possible to remove
all of the test points added
to the table. By clicking on “Sequence” option, “Sequence Test Points To” page opens where it is
possible to create test points with equal steps. By selecting “Angle” in “Step On” field in “Step”
section, the angular steps are directly
entered in terms of degrees. / This means that the test points are specified according to the “Origin”
point entered in “Origin” section in a way that the required angles resulted in proportion to the
horizon. For example if the start
and end angles equal “45” and “90” degrees with “5” degrees as their steps and the origin points are
entered for “Z” and “Phi” or “R” and “X”, after selecting “5” ohms as impedance and “36” degrees as the
origin and by applying this settings,
you can see that multiple points are added on the “Impedance View”. For example the last point is
selected; you can see that the resulted angle is “85” degrees not “90” degrees. This happens because the
“Origin” point is also considered
as one of the points. / But by selecting “Direction”, an “angle” is specified in “Angle” field where
from the “Origin” point with the length entered in “Length” field and with steps specified in “Step
Size”, some points are shot on the
characteristic curve. Note that the length and the steps of the points are in terms of ohm. For example
if the angle is “45” degrees, the length is “5”, the step size is “0.5” ohm and the origin point is “0”
ohm, by applying this settings
you can see that some points are created in “45” degrees with “0” origin in “Impedance View”. Note that
in both states of “Angle” and “Direction”, it is possible to make the origin dependent on the length of
the line and specify it in
form of a percentage of it in “Z Relative” section. / If the performed test has “Failed” points, by
selecting “Clear All Failed Tests” option, it is possible to clear the results of all these points. In
“Detail” section, the information
related to “Trip” nominal time, the allowed operation time range, actual time and test point evaluation
are entered in “T nom”, “T min” “T max”, “T act” and “State” fields respectively. The test points are
entered with detail in the table
at the bottom of the page. The details include test evaluation, test current, nominal time, operation
time, fault value in terms of percent and seconds and the minimum and maximum operation time. Also, if
you wish to add a comment about
any of the test points, you can use the “User Comment” cell. At the bottom of this page, it is possible
to select test points table from different “Fault Types”. To test, a point is shot in “L1-E” “Fault
Type”. By using “Add to” option,
this point is also added to “L1L2” and “L1L2L3” “Fault Types”. Note that if “L1-E” option remains
checked, the point added for the “L1-E” “Fault Type” will be repeated in this “Fault Type”. Then, open
the “Signal View” window and run the
test. You can see how the voltage and current signals are injected for every test point. After testing
each point, its evaluation is recorded in the table as well as the “Impedance View”. /
“CHECK TEST” TAB After performing “Shot Test” in “Distance” room, it is time to do “Check Test” and
“Search Test”. In “Check Test” the upper and lower tolerances of the relay which are displayed as dotted
line in “Impedance View” are tested
and evaluated. To perform a “Check Test”, first it is necessary to draw lines named “Check Line” in
different parts of the diagram. To draw this line first from “Check Line” section, the origin point of
this line is specified in “Origin”.
In “|Z|” field the test impedance value is entered as a number. Note that if a negative number , for
example -2.5 is entered, since there is no negative impedance, this negative value will influence the
angle; this means that it will be
subtracted from 180 degrees angle in “Phi” field. The impedance angle is entered within the range of
-180 to 180 in “Phi” field and if in this cell a number higher than this range is entered, automatically
that number will be displayed
in the specified range. For example if 455 degrees is entered in this field, 95 degrees will be
displayed. / In addition to using |Z| & "Phi" filed, you can specify origin impedance using "R" & "X"
fields. "R" & "X" are real and imaginary
of impedance. In fact the four fields of “|Z|”, “Phi”, “R” and “X” are linked and by changing the value
of one of them, the others change accordingly. In “Angle” field the angle of the “Check Line” and In the
cell of the “Length” section
the length of the “Check Line” is entered. In “%” field it is possible to specify the length of “Check
Line” in terms of a percentage of the length specified in “Test Object” by default. By enabling the
“Relative” option, you can make
the length of the line dependent on the parameter specified in “of” field. The value of the parameter
specified in “of” field is multiplied by the value of the “%” field and the length of the line is
formed. If “Relative” is checked, by
changing the value of the “of” parameter, the value of the “%” cell does not change and the new value of
the “Length” is calculated. If “Relative” checkbox is not enabled and the value of “of” parameter is
changed, the value of “Length”
field remains fixed and the value of the “%” changes. Note that the drawn “Check Lines” need to have an
intersection with at least one of the tolerance lines of the characteristic curve. Then, click on “Add”
option so that the “Check Line”
is added to the “Check Test” lines table. / Another method for drawing the “Check Line” is to hold down
the left-click and “Ctrl” key on “Impedance View” window and then move the cursor in the desired
direction on the characteristic curve.
You can see that the information of the drawn “Check Line” is displayed in “Check Test” lines table.
After drawing the “Check Line”, the software evaluates the crossing place of “Check Line” and tolerance
lines as “Shot” test in accordance
with the performance of the relay. Here, after performing the test, the relay does not perform in upper
tolerance and performs a trip in the lower tolerance so the result of the test is “Passed”. Other parts
of this section such as “Fault
Type” and “Remove All” and “Sequence” etc. options are the same at those of “Shot Test” section which
have been explained in previous videos. The only additional option in this section is “Copy to Search”.
By marking any of the test lines
and selecting this option, it is possible to copy the selected line in “Search Test” and by selecting
“Add” option in “Search Test”, add this line to the “Search Test” test lines table. /
“SEARCH TEST” TAB After performing “Shot Test” and “Check Test” in “Distance” room, it is time to do
“Search Test”. The purpose of this test is to find the Exact location of characteristic curve line .To
perform a “Search Test”, first it is
necessary to draw lines named “Search Line” in different parts of the diagram which is the same as the
method explained for “Check Line”. And all of mentioned notes for check line is true for search line
too. After drawing the “Search
Line”, the software evaluates the crossing place of “Search Line” and tolerance lines as “Shot” test in
accordance with the performance of the relay. By performing the test, the software interpolates the
characteristic curve by testing
some points on the search line to find the exact location of the characteristic curve. Other parts of
this section such as “Fault Type” and “Remove All” and “Sequence” etc. options are the same at those of
“Shot Test” section which have
been explained in previous videos. The ignore field in the “Search Interval” is used when defined
characteristic curve is not considered for the search line. / By entering a number in this section, some
points are added on the “Search”
line with the entered number as their distance. For example, by entering “150mΩ” in this field, you can
see that there are points added on the “Search Line” with as much as “150m“of distance. If the test is
performed, the points added
on the “Search Line” are tested one after the other so that the exact location of the relay is
specified. This option is used when there is no characteristic curve for the test or the current
characteristics seem to be wrong. If you want
to do this for all drawn test lines, you can use the “Setting” tab in “Ignore Nominal Characteristic”
section. To do so, by entering the value of “Search Interval” and selecting “Apply to all” option, you
can apply this settings to all
test lines and find the relay characteristic. /
“DISTANCE” ROOM SETTINGS, PART 1 In “Settings” tab it is possible for you to manage settings related
to “Shot Test”, “Check Test” and “Search Test”. In “Fault” section, the method of the test is specified.
In addition to the test method, the
amount of current or voltage of the test is specified as well. Generally, there are three methods to
calculate the test current and voltage and all of these methods are available in the drop-down list in
“Test Model”. The first method
is “Constant test current”. After specifying the fault impedance, the test voltage can be easily
calculated in a fixed current. Some of the parameters are set in accordance with the option selected in
this field about which more be discussed
later. / The amount of test current is specified in “I Test” field. As you can see this cell is in
Purple which means that its value is dependent on a parameter in “Test Object” and is calculated using
the relation defined for it. By right-clicking
on this option and selecting “Link to XRio” you can see that the amount of test current is resulted from
multiplying the nominal current by 2. You are allowed to change this number to any desired value. By
manually changing this value,
the cell turns pink if “XRio” file is loaded which means that the formula of calculating the test
current is disabled. You can also enter the test current value manually by right-clicking on this cell
and selecting “Remove Link” option.
/ “LL Same as LE” option enables the user to test either of phase to ground and phase to phase fault
types with different currents. If this option is checked, all phase to ground and phase to phase fault
types are tested with the same
current and if this option is unchecked, you can specify a test current for each of fault types. When
using the Constant test current test method, in “Maximum Fault Impedance” section, the maximum fault
impedance in phase to ground, two-phase
and three-phase “Fault Types” is calculated by using these formulae and are displayed. / If in constant
current, the test voltage is more than the nominal value of the relay a prompt saying “Out Of Range” is
displayed which means that
the selected point is out of the allowed range. By checking “Allow Reduction of I Test” option, the
software considers the voltage as the nominal value to calculate the intended impedance current and
voltage and decreases the current value
so that the shot point is placed in the injection range of the device. By checking “Allow Reduction of I
Test” option, “V Max L-L” field is displayed which is the same as the nominal line voltage. You can see
that this cell is in Purple
which means its value is related to another parameter. By right-clicking on this field and selecting “Go
to Linked Value”, you can see that this field is linked to “V nom” parameter and by changing this
parameter the value of this field
changes accordingly. Also, by right-clicking on this cell and selecting “Remove Link” option, you can
enter this value manually. For example, in “Shot Test” tab, a point with a “30” ohm impedance is added
to the points table. This point
is located in the “Out Of Range” area and by opening “Vector View” window, the voltage and current
values for this impedance are displayed. By checking “Allow Reduction of I Test” option, you can see
that the voltage value changes to nominal
voltage and the current value is reduced so that this point is placed in the injection range of the
device. Note that when you are testing a wide range of the zone, the injected current must be bigger
than the minimum “Pick up” current
of the relay. If the relay uses the voltage dependent on the inception current, make sure that the test
voltage is always smaller than the “Pick up” voltage set for the relay. / The second method is “Constant
test voltage”. By specifying
the fault impedance value and keeping the voltage fixed, the test current can easily be calculated. Some
of the parameters are set in accordance with the option selected in this section about which more is
going to be said. The test voltage
value is specified in “V Test” field and the value entered in this section is considered to be fixed
throughout the test. When you are using the Constant test voltage test method, in “Minimum Fault
Impedance” section, the minimum fault
impedance in phase to ground, two-phase and three-phase “Fault Types” is calculated using these formulae
and displayed. / / / The third method is “Constant Source Impedance”. In this method, it is possible to
specify the fault impedance
source so that the test current value is calculated by using a constant impedance. You can use various
modes available in “Mode” drop-down list to determine the fault Source type. By clicking on this field a
list opens where you can select
your impedance model and enter the value of the required parameters in “Source Type” table in accordance
with the selected model. / In “Zs and KS”, “ZS1 and ZS0”, “RS, Xs, RSE, XSE” and “SIR and KS” modes,
magnitude and angle of the source
impedance and the grounding factor of the impedance, magnitude and angle of the source impedance in zero
and positive sequence, real and imaginary sections of the source impedance as well as the relation of
mentioned real and imaginary
parameters, and magnitude and angle value of real and imaginary sections of the source impedance are
entered respectively. In fact, in this section, “SIR” is “ZS/ZL”. In “Ssc and X/R” and “Isc and X/R”
modes, the short circuit apparent
power for three-phase and phase to ground mode and the “X/R” parameter relation in single-phase mode,
and the short circuit current for three-phase and phase to ground and the “X/R” parameter relation in
single phase mode are entered in
“Source Type” table respectively. / If “KS=KL” option is checked, in the models mentioned in “Mode”
field numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 only the first two parameters are adjustable and the other two parameters
are disabled. This option is disabled
in modes 5 and 6. By setting the parameters of any of the selected models, the software calculates the
current or voltage value for the test which can be viewed in “Vector View” window. / In “Fault
Inception” section, the fault inception
angle can be determined in three ways. To better understand this, open “Signal View” window. If “Fixed
Angle” is selected from “Model” slide field, you can enter the desired fault inception angle value in
“Angle” field and view the angle
changes in “Signal View”. By entering this angle, current and voltage phases shift at the same amount.
By selecting “Maximum Offset” option, the software picks the maximum “DC Offset” value in the fault
inception moment for the current
waveform. The maximum positive “DC Offset” value occurs when the fault inception angle is equal to the
impedance angle ±90 degrees. By selecting “Zero offset” option, a zero “DC offset” is applied to the
current output. By checking “DC
offset” option, in “Fixed Angle” it is possible to specify a “DC offset” value for the current output in
the fault inception moment in any desired angle. / If for any reason you wish to use the group B voltage
output in “Distance” test,
you can do so by checking “Enable Voltage Output VB” in “Voltage Output” section and entering the
intended voltage and angle values. You can view the waveform related to this voltage output in “Signal
View” window. /
“DISTANCE” ROOM SETTINGS, PART 2 In “Time” section, first the injection time before the fault is
entered in “Prefault Time”. In cases where the “PTs” draw inrush current, by checking “Ramp in Prefault”
option, it is possible to increase the
waveform of the voltage signal in prefault in form of a ramp to prevent stop applying voltage because of
the drawn inrush current. In “Max Fault Time”, the maximum fault injection time is specified in form of
“Abs” or “Rel” which itself
consists of three parts. Note that if in a “Shot” point, the “Max Fault Time” is shorter than maximum
allowed “Trip” time, the result of the evaluation will be wrong. If you are using the “Max Fault Time
Abs” field, you need to enter a
time in seconds for the maximum fault injection time For all points; but to increase the test speed, you
can use “Max Fault Time Rel” option. / By checking this option three other options appear. By entering a
number in “Add %of Tnom”,
the fault injection time in every point equals the test point nominal time plus percentage of the
nominal time entered in this field. This means that if the test point nominal time is 10 seconds and 5
percent is entered in this field,
the maximum fault injection time equals 105 percent of the test nominal time which is 10.5 seconds. But
in “Add Absolute” field, the fault injection time is entered as the sum of test point nominal trip time
plus the time entered in this
field. If time is entered in these 3 fields, the software picks the highest value. For points that are
in “No Trip” zone, it is possible to enter a separate time in “No-Trip Time” field. / In “Post Fault
Time”, the injection time after
the fault is entered. “Delay after Trigger”, is used to enter the key trigger time. By right-clicking on
the related field and selecting “Go to Linked Value”, you can see that it is linked to “CB Trip Time”
and if necessary, you can replace
it with your desired value by selecting “Remove Link”. In “Time Reference”, by selecting “Fault
Inception”, the “Trip” time is calculated from when the fault is injected. But by selecting “Starting”,
the “Trip” is calculated from when
the “Pick-up” contact is received from the relay. In “Load Current PreFault Current” section you can
specify the settings for the phase and current related to “PreFault”. In “Amplitude” section, by
selecting “Based on Current” radio button,
the “PreFault” current is entered in terms of Ampere which is the same for all test points. But by
selecting “Based on IFault”, the “PreFault” current is entered according to the fault current which is
different for every “Shot” point.
In “Phase” section, by selecting “Based on Degree” radio button, the current angle in “Prefault” is
entered which is the same for all “Shot” point but by selecting “Same as Fault Angle” radio button, the
“Prefault current angle” is the
same as the fault current angle which is different for every “Shot” point. / In “Search Setting”
section, the settings related to “Search Test” are specified. As mentioned before, a “Search Test”
arrives at a conclusion only if one of
the three conditions of this section is met. The first condition is “Relative” which means that if the
difference between the test point value and the previous point is less than the percentage specified in
this field, this very point
is the result of the test. The second condition is “Absolute” which means that if the difference between
the test point and the previous point is less than the value specified in this field, this very point is
the result of the test. The
third condition is “Max point number” which means that the test is to be performed as many times as the
number of points entered in this field at max and the last point is the result of the test. But if for
any reason, the nominal characteristic
determined for the relay is not available, you can use “Ignore Nominal Characteristic” section. By doing
so, the software ignores the existing characteristic. Then, based on the step entered in “Search
Interval”, it adds shots on the “Search”
line. For example, a line is drawn in “Search Test” section. Then, "200mΩ" is entered as the value for
“Search Interval” and “Apply to all” is selected. You can see that some points with the same step are
added on the “Search” line. By
running the test, you can see that the test starts from the lowest point and once one of the three
mentioned conditions is met, the test comes to result. Also, if necessary, you can ignore this option by
selecting “Disable all”. / / By
selecting “Shot Passed Only Act in Main Zone” option, only if the performance time of the relay in the
shot point is located in the allowed range of the main zone the test “Passes”. For example, if this
option is checked and a shot is
added to tolerances of zone 2, the test “Passes” if the relay operates only in the time of zone 2 which
is “95” ms to “150” ms; otherwise, with any other performances by the relay, the test “Fails”. But if
this option is not checked, the
allowed performance time of the relay is “95ms” to “No Trip” and if the relay does not give a trip in
this point, the test “Passes”. “Test Passed Only Act in Zones” option is used for “Search”, “Check” and
“Shot” tests. By checking this
option, the test “Passes” when the relay performance in the tolerances, is only the time of one of the
two zones. For example, if this option is checked and a shot is added to zone 1 and zone 2 tolerance
area, if the relay operates in
“28.5” to “80” ms or “95” to “150” ms the test “Passes”; otherwise the test “Fails”. This can also be
done for “Check” and “Search” tests. / In “Trigger” tab you can specify the desired binary to receive
the “Pickup” and “Trip” signals
of the relay as well as stopping the current injection. The settings and explanation of this section are
exactly the same as mentioned for “Trigger” room and “Sequencer”. In “Binary Output” tab, if it is
necessary for the relay to view
the conditions of the key, it is possible to take any needed voltage to the “Binary Input” through
“Binary Output” of the device by voltages of “B” or “Aux Dc” groups. This tab has three modes of
“Prefault”, “Fault” and “Post Fault” and
it is possible to manage each of them separately. / /
IMPEDANCE VIEW WINDOW As mentioned before, one of the main windows of Distance room is “Impedance
View”. This window shows the relay characteristic curve based on the settings entered in “Test Object”
window. This window has some shared and
some unique features. The features available by right or left clicking on this window are common to all
rooms and it is not necessary to explain them here but at the bottom of this window there is a gear by
clicking on which some other
useful options are displayed. By clicking on “Zoom During Test”, if one or multiple “Search” lines are
drawn on the characteristic curve, by running the test you can see that the software zooms on the areas
where the test points are located
and shows the found zone line. / If you select “Optimize All” option, by changing the “Fault type”, the
characteristic curve display is “Optimized”. By using “Pan Mode” you can move the characteristic curve
diagram as desired. By using
“Show row number” you can view the row number of any test point or test line on the characteristic
curve. If you wish to see which “Zone” is the “Main Zone” of every point on the characteristic curve,
you can check “Show Zone Number” option.
By using “Show Zone number” the zone number of any test point or test line will be shown on the
characteristic curve. By using “Show all zone”, test zones of all “Search” points are marked with a
circle to find the characteristic curve
line. By selecting “Show selected zone”, only the points of the line selected from “Search line” table
are marked with a circle. / By clicking on “Show all t act point”, the operating time of the tested
points is shown. Since maybe the
points are close to each other and it is not possible to view the times clearly, you can use “Show
selected t act point” option which shows the time of the row selected from the test points table. “Show
all Z act Point” and “Show selected
Z act Point” options are used to show all result of “Search Test” and the points related to the row
selected from the “Search Test” table respectively. By selecting “Snap to grid” option, the points on
the characteristic curve that are
shot close to the grids snap to the grids of this page. By selecting “Snap to characteristic curve”
option, the points on the characteristic curve that are “Shot” close to the characteristic curve grid
snap to it. / About polygon or “Quad”
zones tolerances it should be noted that the rounding of the tolerances occurs where the zone lines
intersect. The reason for this is related to the definition of tolerance. Suppose a %5 tolerance; the
tolerance is the geometric location
of all points which have a %5 distance from the zone line. According to this definition, the tolerances
turns into a semicircle where the zone line ends. In sections where the tolerances of a zone overlap,
the union of tolerances are considered
as the tolerances of zone. Therefore, based on the angle of the two intersecting sides of the zone, a
part of the external tolerance zone turns into a curve. /
“ZT DIAGRAM” AND “MEDIUM DETAIL VIEW” WINDOWS Test points and their characteristics in “Medium
Detail View” To start first open “Medium Detail View” window from the toolbar and move it to an
appropriate location. Characteristics of every point
are displayed in “Medium Detail Window” with details. This window consists of two tables of “Shot data”
and “Zone data”. In “Shot data” table, the information related to time, impedance, test point as well as
current and voltage of the
test point are shown. “Zone data” table is composed of two main parts. In the first part, general
information related to relay zones along with the allowed operation time for each one is displayed and
it is the same for all selected points.
But the second part of this table changes according to the selected test point. / For example, if a
point in zone 2 is selected, the general information of the zones will be displayed in “Zone Data” table
without any change. But in “Is
in Zone” column in the second table, it is specified that in which zones the selected point is located.
In “Is in Tol” column it is specified whether the selected point is located in the tolerance zone or
not. In “Zone Index” column, the
main zone related to the selected test point is specified. If the point is located in only one zone,
that zone will be considered as the main zone but it should be noted that if the point is located in
multiple zones, the zone with the
shortest nominal time will be considered as the main zone. / “ZT Diagram” window and points related to
“Check Line” and “Search Line” To open “ZT Diagram” window, “View” menu or the toolbar should be used.
On this window the time diagram
based on impedance, according to the operation characteristic of the relay zones along a specific angle
is displayed which the most important application of this in the software is finding the test points for
“Search Test” and “Check Test”.
Note that the diagram on this window is linked with “Impedance View” and any point that is “shot” on one
of these two windows will be “shot” on the other window accordingly. In the curve of this window, the
vertical lines are the border
of zones and between the two vertical lines, the time-impedance characteristic of the zones in the angle
specified by the user is displayed. On this window, tolerances are displayed with dotted lines and
yellow zones. / Let us use an example
to explain how this diagram works. If “Test View” is on “Shot Test”, and 0.5 ohm and 65 degrees are
entered in “Z” and “Phi” fields in “ZT Diagram” window respectively, you can see that the point
corresponding to this “Shot” is displayed
on “Impedance View”. Note that in “Shot Test”, the values of “Angle” and “Phi” are the same because
“Angle” refers to the angle of the line drawn from the point specified in “Origin”, with “X-R” diagram
as its origin. By specifying it,
the variation of time – impedance curve in “Angle” is displayed in “ZT Diagram” window. This means that
if the “Angle” is 65 degrees, “ZT Diagram” shows the time variation based on the impedance in this
angle. In this angle, the impedance
moves from zone 1 with 30 ms to zone 2 with 100 ms and then moves from zone 2 up to “No Trip” zone. By
moving on this diagram and clicking on its different sections, you can see the movement of “Magnet
Cursor” in “Impedance View”. / To
make it clear, if in “ZT Diagram” window, the “Angle” is changed to 40 degrees, you can see that the “ZT
Diagram” changes because in 40 degrees angle, the impedance only changes from zone 1 to “No Trip”. In
fact, by changing the angle,
the “ZT” curve changes according to the zones available on its impedance course. In this diagram, you
can see two blue dotted lines which the left side line indicate the “|Z|=0” line which is the minimum
allowed impedance value. As you
already know, impedance cannot be smaller than zero. The right side line indicates the selected point. /
But in “Search Test” and “Check Test”, “Angle” is there angle of the drawn line “Phi” is the origin
impedance angle of “Search Line”
or “Check Line”, and values of them are different. For example, if in “Check Test” a “Check Line” is
drawn from zone 1 to “No Trip”, you can see the time based on impedance diagram in “ZT Diagram” window
in the angle where the line is
drawn. In this diagram you can see two blue dotted lines where the first line indicates the start point
and the second line indicates the end point of the “Check Line”. Note that in this state, the “|Z|=0”
line is the start or origin point
of the “Check Line” and the other blue line is the end point of the “Check Line” and the distance
between these lines is the length of the “Check Line”. / An important point for understanding the
concept of “Check Test” is that when a
“Check Line” is drawn, the software starts moving on the line and adding a “Shot” on places where the
tolerance is broken on the “ZT Diagram”. Here, as you can see, since there are three fractures along the
“Check Line” in “ZT Diagram”,
three “Shots” are added. In this case, the difference between “Search Test” and “Check Test” is that in
“Search Test” the software does not add a “Shot” on all tolerance fractures on the “Search Line” but
from the zone line towards both
ends, it only adds a “Shot” to the first tolerance fracture. / Another point is that if you draw a
“Search Line” or “Check Line” like this figure, you can see that in addition to adding “Shots” on places
where the tolerance is fractured
on the “ZT Diagram”, the software adds a “Shot” inside the zone and in the middle of the “ZT”
characteristic accordingly. To explain this, if the line drawn from within a zone crosses a zone with
different operation time but no point is
“Shot” from that zone, the software adds a “Shot” to a point on “Search Line” or “Check Line” in the
middle of its characteristic in “ZT Diagram” and “Impedance View”. /
RELAY SETTINGS IN “DIFFERENTIAL” ROOM, PART 1 In “AMT Differential” room, differential relays and
longitudinal differential “End to End” test is performed. Differential relays work by comparing the
currents in both sides of the equipment and
measure and compare the current in both sides of the protected equipment which is used to protect power
transformers, motors, generators and busbars. Note that to perform this test, both Current group A and B
are activated and if you intend
to use Neutrik cable for the test, you need to select “Current” as “Combination Cable” in “Preferences”
section in “Hardware” section. “Differential” room consists of two main windows of “Test View” and
“Differential Characteristic”. In
“Test View” window, “Shot”, “Check”, “Search” and “Stability” tests are performed. In “Differential
Characteristic” window, the relay characteristic curve is displayed according to the information entered
in “Test Object” based on “I bias”
and “I diff”. // / As mentioned before, to test a relay, first it is necessary to enter its information
in “Test Object” window. In “Device” block, information such as relay nominal characteristics, serial
number, location of the relay
as well as “CT” and “PT” characteristics of the relay are entered. This section has been thoroughly
explained in previous videos. “Differential” is the main block of this room by double-clicking on which,
“Differential Protection Parameters”
window opens. This window consists of “Protected Object”, “Protection Device”, “Characteristic
Definition” and “Harmonic” tabs where the settings of differential relay are entered. // “Protected
Object” tab In “Protected Object” tab, the
information related to the protected equipment is entered. In “Protected Object” field, first, the type
of the protected equipment is selected among transformer, generator, motor and busbar and here
transformer is selected. In “Vector
Group” section, the transformer vector group which is entered in “Nominal Values” section is displayed.
In “Number of Winding” section, the number of windings of the transformer is specified. If the
transformer has three windings, a column
named “Tertiary” appears in which the information of the third winding is entered. Here two-winding
transformer is selected. In “Nominal Values” section the nominal information of the transformer is
entered in “Primary”, “Secondary” and
“Tertiary” columns for primary, secondary and tertiary sides, but since here the transformer has two
windings, the “Tertiary” column is disabled. In “Winding/Leg Name” row, it is possible to enter an
English or Persian custom title for
the winding. In “Voltage”, “Power”, “Vector View” and “Connection Number” fields, the nominal voltage of
the two sides of the transformer, the nominal power of the transformer equal in both sides, connection
type of the two sides of the
transformer and vector group number of the transformer are entered respectively. If there is a null
point in the star direction of the transformer, select “Yes” in “Star Point Grounding” field. For
example, if the transformer vector group
is “YND11”, after specifying the transformer wiring type in “Vector Group” and its vector group number
in “Connection Number”, in “Star Point Grounding” field “Yes” is selected in the primary column. In
“Current” field, the nominal current
of the both sides is calculated by the software based on the entered voltage and power which is not
editable. In “Delta-Connected CT” field, if the “CTs” are wired in delta form “Yes” is selected
otherwise “No” is selected. Then, in “CT
Nominal Current” section, nominal information of the “CTs” in the both sides of the device are entered
separately. Note that for this section the differential and bias current calculations are done according
to the calculated current and
the entered turns ratio but if from “View” menu, “Primary” is selected as “Unit”, primary currents of
the both sides of the transformer in “Vector View” are displayed according to the “CT” turns ratio
entered in “Device” block. In “Star
Point Grounding” section the turns at which the null point of the “CTs” is located is specified. If the
null point is located at the protection equipment Transformer side “tow.Pro.Obj” is selected otherwise
“Toward Line” option is selected.
“Protection Device” Tab After entering the characteristics of the protected equipment in “Protected
Object” tab, it is necessary to enter the relay characteristics in “Protection Device” section. First,
“lbias” formula is entered from
“Ibias Calculation” field which consists of “seven” main formula. One of these formula should be
selected form the relay manual and “Factor K1” is entered based on the selected formula. Generally, the
characteristic curve is different
for single-phase and multiple-phase faults but by checking “No Combined Characteristic” option, the
differential characteristic curve will be the same in single-phase and multiple-phase faults mode. After
drawing the characteristic curve,
the complementary explanations are provided. / In “Reference Winding” field, the direction of the
reference winding is determined which is selected in accordance with the relay settings. By selecting
the reference winding direction, the
angle in that end is considered to be 0. Since differential and bias currents are calculated and
displayed based on the nominal current, it is necessary to select the nominal current of the relay among
“CT” and nominal current of the protected
equipment in “Reference Current”. For example, if “Current Protected Object Nominal” is selected for
“Reference Current”, and “Idiff=2In”, “In” is the nominal current of the equipment whose information is
displayed in “Protected Device”
tab, “Nominal Values” section and “Current” field. But, if “CT Nominal Current” is selected, “In” is
“CT” nominal current whose information is entered in “Protected Device” in “CT Nominal Values” section.
In “Zero Sequence Elimination”,
if the related relay supports zero sequence elimination in measurements, you can select the zero
sequence elimination type in “Elimination Type” field. This feature has been put in relays so that if
there is a phase to earth fault outside
the protective zone, the existence of zero sequence current does not stop the relay. However, this makes
the relay less sensitive to phase to earth fault. In “Test Time Setting/Transformer Model”, ”Test max”
and ”Delay Time” fields specify
maximum time of fault current injection and delay time after receiving ”Trip” contact, respectively. In
”Diff Current Setting”, ”Idiff” field is related to first stage and “Idiff” is related to second stage.
Note that for currents lower
than ”Idiff”, for Every bias current of the relay is stable and does not perform a trip. But currents
bigger than “Idiff” indicate a fault near the transformer wiring and the relay performs an immediate
trip without considering the bias
current. But, between “Idff” and “Idiff” currents, the relay operation is based on the characteristic
curve and there is no delay in the operation. In “Current Tolerances” you can enter the current
tolerance in two forms of “Relative”
and “Absolute”. Note that the software takes into account the highest value between these two. In “Diff
Time Setting”, “Tdiff” field is the allowed operation time of the operation zone between “Idff” and
“Idiff”, and “Tdiff” is the differential
currents bigger than “Idiff”. In “Time Tolerances” you can enter the current tolerance in two forms of
“Relative” and “Absolute”. Note that the software takes into account the highest value between these
two.
RELAY SETTINGS IN “DIFFERENTIAL” ROOM, PART 2 After entering the information in “Protected Object”
and “Protection Device” tabs, it is necessary to enter relay differential characteristic curve in
“Characteristic Definition” tab. In this tab
it is possible to enter the characteristic curve in two ways. / 1- By clicking on “Draw Custom” option,
“Draw Custom Characteristic” window opens where there are several “Template” of differential
characteristic curve for different relays
available. The relay type is specified in “Object” section. After selecting the relay type, the
information needed to draw the differential characteristic curve is displayed in “Data” section in
accordance with the relay settings. For
example, by selecting “Siemens 7UTX” relay, the information needed to draw the differential
characteristic curve is displayed. In “I” and “I”, “Slope1” and “Slope2”, and “Base point1” and “Base
point2” fields, the minimum and maximum differential
current specified in the relay, the slope of the first and second lines, and the crossing point of the
first and second lines with “I bias” curve are entered respectively. To better understand the parameters
of “Data” section, on the right
side of this window the characteristic curve shape of each relay is sourced from its corresponding
catalogue and the parameters are determined schematically. After entering this information, the
differential characteristic curve of the
intended relay is displayed in “Preview” section and in the box at the bottom, the start and end point
information are mentioned according to “I bias” and “I diff”. Also, the slope of the line is displayed
in “Slope” section. By clicking
on “Draw” option, the settings are saved and the differential characteristic curve is drawn using the
“Template” of the intended relay. / 2- The second method to enter the characteristic curve is using the
features available in “Characteristic
Definition” window and it is necessary to enter the information of every line of the characteristic
curve separately. First, the information of “I” and “I” fields are entered. By entering the information
of these two sections and closing
the “Test Object” window, the differential characteristic curve is displayed in “Differential
Characteristic” between the two entered numbers. After returning to “Characteristic Definition” tab in
“Differential” block, first, all lines
of the characteristic curve are removed by clicking on “Remove All” and then after entering the start
point and end point coordinates of the first line of the relay curve in “New Start Point” and “New End
Point” sections, “Add” option
is selected. The slope of the line is calculated by the software in “Slope” field. Note that the slope
of the differential line cannot be negative. Now the end point of the second line is entered and then
“Add” option is selected so that
the second line is added to the curve. Note that the end point of the second line is the same as the
start point of the first line and this is why the “Start Point” section is disabled for the second line.
By clicking on “Zoom All” option
after entering the characteristic curve information, the curve is displayed completely in the box on the
right side. In the box at the bottom of the page, the information of each section line of the
characteristic curve is displayed separately.
If you wish to remove a part of the characteristic curve, first, the part that you wish to remove is
selected from the table and then “Cut from Here” option is selected. In the end by clicking on “OK”, the
relay differential characteristic
curve is displayed in “Differential Characteristic” window. By checking the “Show Final Search” option,
if you have performed a “Search Test”, the result of the last “Search” will be displayed in the
differential characteristic curve shape.
For example, if you draw a line on the characteristic curve and perform a “Search Test”, and after
clearing, return to “Characteristic Definition” and check the “Show Final Search” option, you can see
that the result of the last “Search
Test” is displayed in the form of a green “+” plus sign on the curve. By completing the “Differential
Characteristic” tab, the “Harmonic” tab is completed as well. In this tab, the information related to
harmonic characteristic of the
relay for “Differential Harmonic” or “Inrush Blocking” test is entered. This test is performed in
“Diff.Harmonics” room so all parameters of this section are thoroughly explained in “Diff.Harmonics”
room. //
INTRODUCING “TEST VIEW” WINDOW IN “DIFFERENTIAL” ROOM, PART 1 As mentioned previously, one of the
windows in “Differential” room is “Test View”. This window consists of 7 tabs of “Shot Test”, “Check
Test”, “Search Test”, “Stability”, “Setting”,
“Trigger” and “Binary Output”. In “Shot Test” tab, you can select fault type and the points for the test
and after the test is performed, you can view the results of the evaluation. In this tab, in “Test
Point” section “Idiff” and “I bias”
currents and in “Fault Type” section the fault type are determined. After specifying the test current,
the fault type should be selected from among the standard faults available in “Fault Type” section.
These faults include different faults
of phase-to-earth, two-phase and three-phase. Before specifying the current and the fault type, you
should determine “Supply Direction” in “Setting” section. // By clicking on “Add”, the selected test
point is added to the table in this
window. By selecting one of the rows and clicking on “Insert” option, the selected row is repeated in
the table and by clicking on “Remove” option, the selected point is removed. Also, by selecting “Add to”
option, it is possible to copy
point or points selected for one of the “Fault Types” to another “Fault Type”. By clicking on “Remove
All” option, all test points entered in the table will be removed. By clicking on “Sequence” option,
“Sequence Test Points to” page opens
where it is possible to specify test points with equal steps. In “Step” section and in “Step On” field,
by selecting “Angle” it is possible to directly specify the angular steps in terms of angle. // This
means that the test points are
specified in accordance with the origin point and in “Origin” section, they are determined in a way that
the required angles are resulted in proportion with the horizon. For example, if the start and end
angles are “45” and “90” degrees
respectively with “5” degrees steps and origin point for Idiff and I bias equal 5 times In, by approving
this settings you can see that some points are added on the “Differential Characteristic”. For example,
the last point is selected;
by doing the mentioned calculation, in the picture you can see that the resulted angle is “85” and not
“90” degrees which is because the “Origin” point is considered as one of the points and the last point
of this “Sequence” is removed.
/ But by selecting “Direction”, an angle is specified in “Angle” field and in this angle from the
“Origin” point, with the length entered in “Length” field and with the steps specified in “Step Size”,
some points are shot on the characteristic
curve. Note that the length and steps of the points are based on nominal current. For example, if the
angle is “45” degrees and the length is “5” and the step is “0.5” times the nominal current and the
origin point is “0” amp, by approving
this settings you can see that some points are added to the characteristic curve at the angle of 45
degrees with the origin of “0” volt and “0” amp. // If the performed test has “Failed” points, by
selecting “Clear All Failed Tests” option,
it is possible to clear all these points from the table of this section. In “Detail” section, the
information related to “Trip” nominal time, the allowed operation time range, actual time and test point
evaluation are entered in “t nom”,
“t min” and “t max” fields, “t act” and “Stage” fields respectively. The test points are entered with
detail in the table at the bottom of the page. The details include test evaluation, test current,
nominal time, operation time, fault
value in terms of percent and seconds and the minimum and maximum operation time. Also, if you wish to
add a comment about any of the test points, you can use the “User Comment” cell. At the end of this
page, it is possible to select test
points table from different “Fault Types”. // After performing the “Shot Test”, “Check Test” and “Search
Test” are performed. In “Check Test” the upper and lower tolerances of the relay, which are displayed as
dotted lines in “Differential
Characteristic”, are tested and evaluated. To perform the “Check Test”, first it is necessary to draw
some lines named “Check Line” in different parts of the vector. To draw this line, first from “Origin”
section in “Check Line” section,
the start point of this line is specified. In “Idiff”, “I bias”, and “Angle” fields, 2In, 3In and -30
degrees are entered as origin differential current, origin bias current and the angle of the check line
respectively. Also, 1In is entered
as the length of the check line in the cell of the “Length” section. Note that the drawn “Check Lines”
must have at least one intersection with one of the characteristic curve tolerance lines. Then click on
“Add” option to add the “Check
Line” to the “Check Test” test lines table. / Another method for drawing the “Check Line” is to hold
down left-click and “Ctrl” key on “Differential Characteristic” window and then move the cursor in the
desired direction on the characteristic
curve. You can see that the information of the drawn “Check Line” is displayed in “Check Test” lines
table. After drawing the “Check Line”, the software evaluates the crossing place of “Check Line” and
tolerance lines as “Shot” test in
accordance with the performance of the relay. Here, after performing the test, the relay does not
perform in lower tolerance and performs a trip in the upper tolerance so the result of the test is
“Pass”. Other parts of this section such
as “Fault Type” and “Remove All” and “Sequence” etc. options are the same at those of “Shot Test”
section which have been explained in previous videos. The only additional option in this section is
“Copy to Search”. By marking any of the
test lines and selecting this option, it is possible to copy the selected line in “Search Test” and by
selecting “Add” option in “Search Test”, add this line to the “Search Test” test lines table.
INTRODUCING “TEST VIEW” WINDOW IN “DIFFERENTIAL” ROOM, PART 2 “Search Test” Tab After performing
“Shot Test” and “Check Test” in “Differential” room, it is necessary to perform “Search Test”. The
purpose of this test is to find the characteristic
curve line. To perform a “Search Test”, first some lines named search line should be drawn in different
parts of the vector. The method for drawing these lines is the same as the one explained for check line.
To draw this line, first the
start point of this line is specified in “Search Line” section, “Origin” section. In “Idiff”, “I bias”
and “Angle” fields, the origin differential current 2In, the origin bias current 3In and search line
angle -30 degrees are entered respectively.
The length of the check line 3In is entered in the cell of “Length” section. Then, click on “Add” option
to add the check line to “Check Test” test lines table. // Another method for drawing the search line is
to hold down left-click and
“Ctrl” key on “Differential Characteristic” window and then move the cursor in the desired direction on
the characteristic curve. You can see that the information of the drawn Search Line is displayed in
“Search Test” lines table. After
drawing the search line, the software evaluates the crossing place of search line and tolerance lines as
“Shot” test in accordance with the performance of the relay. By performing the test, the software
interpolates the characteristic
curve by testing some points on the search line to find the exact location of the characteristic curve.
“Ignore” field in “Search Interval” section is used when you wish to ignore the characteristic curve
specified for the search line.
By entering a number in this section, some points are added on the “Search” line with the entered number
as their distance. For example, by entering 0.4 in this field, you can see that there are points added
on the “Search Line” with as
much as 0.4 of distance. If the test is performed, the points added on the “Search Test” are tested one
after the other so that the exact location of the relay is specified. This option is used when there is
no characteristic curve for
the test or the current characteristics seem to be wrong. If you want to do this for all drawn test
lines, you can use the “Setting” tab in “Ignore Nominal Characteristic” section. To do so, by entering
the value of “Search Interval” and
selecting “Apply to all” option, you can apply this settings to all test lines and find the relay
characteristic. “Stability” Tab: “Stability” test is performed in this tab. In “Stability” test, for
zero “I diff” differential current,
for every “I bias” the relay must not perform a trip. If you hold down the “Ctrl” key and click on the
characteristic curve, you can see that the shot points are located at the bottom of the characteristic
curve and on the zero differential
current line. In fact, in “Shot Test” you can select different bias currents by zero differential
current and perform a stability test. The other explanations for this page are the same as those for
“Shot Test” tab and you can watch the
video related to that section. /
“DIFFERENTIAL” ROOM SETTINGS In this tab you can manage some of the settings related to performing
the tests. In “Supply Direction” section, you can specify the injection and fault direction at the two
sides of the protective device. By opening
“Medium Detail View” window, you can see that on which side the fault point is located and by changing
the “Supply Direction” type you can view that changes. Also, in this section it is possible to view the
current amount, fault supplement
direction etc. in “Fault Inception” section, the angle where the fault occurs is specified and the
currents of the both sides are equally shifted. To better understand this, select “Signal View” from the
toolbar and check “Voltage group
A” from “Setting” and by changing the value of “Angle”, view the voltage and current signal changes. In
differential test, if for any reason you wish to activate your voltages, you can use “Voltage Output”.
// In “Time” section, first,
the injection time before the fault is entered in “PreFault Time”. In “Max Fault Time” the maximum fault
injection time is specified in two forms of “Abs” or “Rel” which consist of three parts themselves.
About this time note that if in
a “Shot” point the “Max Fault Time” is shorter than “Pick up” time, the result of the evaluation is
wrong. If you are using the “Max Fault TimeAbs” field, you need to enter a time in terms of seconds for
the maximum fault signal injection
time for all of the points but to accelerate the test, you can use the “Max Fault TimeAbs” option. By
checking this option, three other options appear. By entering a number in “Add %of Tnom”, the fault
signal injection time in any point,
equals the test point nominal time plus a percentage of the nominal time entered in this field. This
means that if the test point nominal time is 10 seconds and 5 percent is entered in this field, the
maximum fault injection time is 105
percent of the test nominal time which is 10.5 seconds. But in “Add Absolute” field, the fault injection
time equals the sum of the nominal time of the test point trip plus the time entered in this field. If
all these three fields are
filled, the software picks the longest time entered. For points that are located at the “No Trip” zone,
it is possible to enter a separate time in “No-Trip Time” field. In “Post Fault Time”, the injection
time after the fault is entered.
“Delay after Trigger”, is used to enter the CB trigger time. By right-clicking on the related field and
selecting “Go to Linked Value”, you can see that it is linked to “CB Trip Time” and if necessary, you
can replace it with your desired
value by selecting “Remove Link”. In “Time Reference”, by selecting “Fault Inception”, the “Trip” time
is calculated from when the fault is injected. But by selecting “Starting”, the “Trip” is calculated
from when the “Pickup” contact
is received from the relay. In “Load Current PreFault Current” you can specify the settings for the
phase and current related to “PreFault”. In “Amplitude” section, by selecting “Based on Current” radio
button, the “PreFault” current is
entered in terms of Ampere which is the same for all test points. But by selecting “Based on IFault”,
the “PreFault” current is entered according to the fault current which is different for every “Shot”
point. In “Search Setting” section,
the settings related to “Search Test” are specified. As mentioned before, a “Search Test” arrives at a
conclusion only if one of the three conditions of this section is met. The first condition is “Relative”
which means that if the difference
between the test point value and the previous point is less than the percentage specified in this field,
this very point is the result of the test. The second condition is “Absolute” which means that if the
difference between the test
point and the previous point is less than the value specified in this field, this very point is the
result of the test. The third condition is “Max point number” which means that the test is to be
performed as many times as the number
of points entered in this field at max and the last point is the result of the test. But if for any
reason, the nominal characteristic determined for the relay is not available, you can use “Ignore
Nominal Characteristic” section. By doing
so, the software ignores the existing characteristic. Then, based on the step entered in “Search
Interval”, it adds shots on the “Search” line. For example, a line is drawn in “Search Test” section.
Then, 0.5 is entered as the value for
“Search Interval” and “Apply to All” is selected. You can see that some points with the same step are
added on the “Search” line. By running the test, you can see that the test starts from the lowest point
and once one of the three mentioned
conditions is met, the test arrives at a result. Also, if necessary, you can ignore this option by
selecting “Disable all”. / By selecting “Shot Passed Only Act In Main Zone” in “Other Setting” section,
the test is passed only if the relay
performance time in the shot point is somewhere in the allowed range of the main zone. This means that
if this option is checked and a shot is added in the tolerance zone of the bottom of the characteristic
curve and the relay gives a
trip, the test fails because after checking this option, the relay performance is accepted only if it is
at the upper zone of the characteristic curve. “Search Passed Only Act in Zone” is for “Search Test” and
by checking this option,
the “Search Test” is passed only if the relay trip is in the “Tripping” zone of the nominal
characteristic curve of the relay. In “Passed Setting” section, by checking “Pass if Get Any Trip”
option, regardless of the relay performance
time, if the relay operates in the “Tripping” zone, the test passes. In “Trigger” tab you can specify
the desired binary to receive the “Pickup” and “Trip” signals of the relay as well as stopping the
current injection. The settings and
explanation of this section are exactly the same as mentioned for “Trigger” room and “Sequencer”. In
“Binary Output” tab, if it is necessary for the relay to view the conditions of the circuit breaker, it
is possible to take any needed
voltage to the “Binary Input” through “Binary Output” of the device by voltages of “A”, “B” or “Aux Dc”
groups. This tab has three modes "PreFault","Fault", "Post fault" and you can configure each section
separately.
“DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC” WINDOW As mentioned before, one of the main windows of differential
room is “Differential Characteristic”. This window shows the relay differential characteristic curve
based on the settings entered in “Test Object”
window. The top of the characteristic curve is called “Tripping” area while the bottom is called “Not
trip” area. This means that if the test point is located at the top of the curve, the relay gives a trip
otherwise it does not. This
window has some shared and some unique features. The features available by right or left clicking on
this window are common to all rooms and it is not necessary to explain them here but at the bottom of
this window there is a gear by clicking
on which some other useful options are displayed. By clicking on “Zoom during test”, if one or multiple
“Search” lines are drawn on the characteristic curve, by running the test you can see that the software
zooms on the areas where the
test points are located and shows the found zone line. // / / If you select “Optimize All” option, by
changing the “Fault type”, the characteristic curve display is “Optimized”. By using “Pan Mode” you can
move the characteristic curve
diagram as desired. By using “Show row number” you can view the row number of any test point or test
line on the characteristic curve. By selecting “Show all zone”, test zones of all “Search” points are
marked with a circle to find the
characteristic curve line. By selecting “Show selected zone”, only the points of the line selected from
“Search line” table are marked with a circle. By clicking on “Show all t act point”, the operating time
of the tested points is showed.
Since maybe the points are close to each other and it is not possible to view the times clearly, you can
use “Show selected t act point” option which shows the time of the row selected from the test points
table. “Show all Id & Ib Act”
and “Show selected t act point” options are used to show all tested “Search Test” points and the points
related to the row selected from the “Search Test” table respectively. By selecting “Snap to grid”
option, the points on the characteristic
curve that are shot close to the grids snap to the grids of this page. By selecting “Snap to
characteristic curve” option, the points on the characteristic curve that are “Shot” close to the
characteristic curve grid snap to it. / “Show
Other Point” option: by selecting this option in single-phase faults such as “L1-E”, in addition to the
shot points, another point is displayed on the “Differential characteristic” window in the form of a
delta which in fact is the indicator
of differential and bias current of the two other phases. This option is used in cases where the
single-phase fault characteristic curve is different from the phase-to-phase fault. The reason for this
difference is that in some areas,
the relay does not perform a trip because of the differential and bias current of the phase being tested
L1-E, but because of the differential and bias current of the two other phases. This means that if you
have brought a general trip
to the device to test single-phase fault such as “L1-E” and checked “NO COMBINED CHARACTERISSTIC”
option, in some of the areas close to the characteristic curve the relay performs a trip for the “L1-E”
fault but this trip is not the trip
of the “L1” phase but it is related to current of the two other phases which can be also observed by
using the characteristic of the delta point on the curve. If in same condition the “NO COMBINED
CHARACTERISTIC” option is unchecked, you
can see that this point is located at the “TRIPPING” zone.
INTRODUCING “AMT DIFF. HARMONICS” ROOM “Differential Harmonic” test or “Inrush Blocking” test is
performed in “AMT Diff. Harmonics” room. This room opens by clicking on “AMT Diff Harmonics” option. At
the moment of initiation, power transformer
draws a great deal of inrush current named “Inrush”. If the transformer is not completely
“Demagnetized”, and has some residue, it makes it to draw a great deal of inrush current which can
damage the transformer. One of the ways for detecting
this inrush current at the moment of transformer initiation is to compare the secondary harmonic current
with the main harmonic. / “AMT Diff Harmonics” room consists of two main windows of “Test View” and
“Harmonic Restraint View”. “Shot”,
“Check” and “Search” test are performed in “Test View” window and in “Harmonic Restraint View” the
harmonic differential characteristic curve is displayed. This diagram is based on a percentage of the
harmonic current of the “n”th level
and “Idiff”. Note that in this window it is possible to manage the settings up to 20th harmonic and
inject it into the relay. In this room, three current outputs of the device are used to perform the
injection into the relay because the
transformer turns via, three phases. / / Relay settings in “AMT Diff. Harmonics” Room As mentioned
before, before testing the relay, its information must be entered in “Test Object” window. In “Device”
block, information such as nominal
characteristics of the relay, serial number, location of the relay and “CT” and “PT” characteristics of
the relay are entered. This section has been thoroughly explained in previous videos. But the main block
of this room is “Differential”
by double-clicking on which “Differential Protection Parameters” window opens. This window consists of
four tabs of “Protected Object”, “Protection Device”, “Characteristic Definition” and “Harmonic” where
the differential relay settings
is entered. / “Protected Object” Tab In this tab the information of the transformer on which the “Inrush
Blocking” protection is done is entered. Frist, from “Protected Object” section, the “Transformer”
option is selected. Other information
of this tab such as the number of coils of the transformer, nominal voltage, nominal power, vector group
characteristics and “CTs” characteristic should be entered at the two sides of the relay. This
information is the same as that of
the “AMT Differential” room and has been explained in previous videos. / “Protection Device” Tab After
entering the transformer information, the information and differential relay characteristics are entered
in “Protection Device” tab.
This information includes determining the calculation formula of “I bias” or “I Restraint” current by
the relay, determining the reference winding, specifying the maximum fault injection time and delay time
after the “Trip”, entering the
minimum and maximum differential current in the relay characteristic curve, entering the nominal relay
operation time and specifying the current and time tolerances of the relay which are the same as “AMT
Differential” room and have been
thoroughly explained in previous videos. / “Characteristic Definition” Tab In this tab the information
related to the differential characteristic curve is entered. This section is similar to “AMT
Differential” room which has been thoroughly
explained in previous videos. However, in this room, it is not necessary to enter the differential
characteristic curve because in this room only the harmonic characteristic is displayed and “Inrush
Blocking” test is performed. This information
is mentioned here so that the “Xrio” file is correctly “Loaded”. / “Harmonic” Tab The information
related to the harmonic differential characteristic curve of the relay is of entered in this tab. In
“Harmonic” field, the harmonic level
is specified and it is possible to specify the information second to 20th harmonic and inject it by the
device. Note that, “n/a” in front of any harmonic level means that the settings related to that harmonic
is not specified. In “Ixf/Idiff”
field, which is disabled, the proportion of the “nth” harmonic to the differential current is displayed.
In “Tol. Relative” and “Tol. Absolute” fields, the relay tolerances are entered in terms of a percentage
of the nominal value or as
“Abs” respectively and the software picks the highest tolerance amount as the reference. Next, the
differential characteristic curve is entered based on the relay parameters. 20 percent and 45 percent
are set on the level 2 and level 5
harmonic current relays. First click on “Remove All” to remove all previous lines. Then, after entering
the start point coordination in “New Start Point” section and then end point coordination in “New End
Point” section in terms of “Idiff”
and “Ixf/Idiff” click on “Add” to display the information of this line in the table at the bottom of the
page and display the characteristic curve in the diagram at the right side. Note that it is also
possible to edit the start and end
points from the box at the bottom of the page. To enter the fifth harmonic information, select 5 in
“Harmonic” field and enter the start point and end point coordinates in the table at the bottom of the
page. Then click on “Ok” and close
“Test Object”. You can see that the second harmonic differential characteristic curve is displayed by
default. /
“TEST VIEW” WINDOW As mentioned before, one of the windows of “AMT Diff Harmonic” room is “Test
View”. This window consists of 6 tabs of “Shot Test”, “Check Test”, “Search Test”, “Setting”, “Trigger”
and “Binary Output” where in addition to
performing “Shot”, “Check” and “Search” tests, respectively, some other test settings are managed. /
“Shot Test” Tab In this tab, first in “Harmonic Order” field in “Test Point” section, the harmonic level
that you wish to test is entered.
Meanwhile, you can see that its characteristic curve is displayed in “Harmonic Restraint View” window
whose setting are entered in Test Object. Differential current and the proportion of the second harmonic
current to the differential
current are entered in terms of percentage in “Idiff” and “Ixf/Idiff” fields respectively. In “Angle
Ixf/Idiff” field, it is possible to specify an angle for the harmonic current. In “Fault Type” section,
the fault type is selected from
among single-phase to earth and three-phase faults because the transformers are either single-phase or
three-phase and only these modes are tested. In “Details” section, the nominal “Trip” time and the
maximum and minimum allowed tolerances
are displayed. After performing the test, the relay performance time is displayed in “t act” field. By
selecting “Add” option, the information of this “Shot” is added to the “Shot Test” table along with its
details. The details include
test evaluation, differential and harmonic current, test angle, nominal time, performance time, fault
value in terms of percentage and seconds and the minimum and maximum performance time. Also, if you wish
to add a comment about any of
the test points, you can use “User Comment” cell. Also, at the end of this page, it is possible to
select test points table in different “Fault Types”. / / By marking one of the rows and selecting
“Insert” option, the marked row is repeated
in the table and by selecting “Remove option, the marked point is removed. By selecting “Add to” option,
it is possible to copy the point or points selected from one of the “Fault Types” to another “Fault
Type”. By selecting “Remove All”
option, all of the test points added to the table are removed. By clicking on “Sequence” option,
“Sequence Test Points to” page opens where it is possible to create test points with the same steps. By
selecting “Angle” in “Step On” field
in “Step” section, the angular steps are directly added in terms of degrees. / This means that the test
points are specified in accordance with the origin point and in “Origin” section in a way that the
required angles are resulted in
proportion with the horizon. For example, if the start and end angles are “45” and “90” degrees
respectively with “5” degrees steps and 0.3 and 2 origin points for Idiff and I bias with 0 angle, by
approving this settings you can see that
some points are added on the “Harmonic Restraint View”. For example, the last point is selected; by
doing the mentioned calculation, in the picture you can see that the resulted angle is “85” and not “90”
degrees which is because the “Origin”
point is considered as one of the points and the last point of this “Sequence” is removed. / / But by
selecting “Direction”, an angle is specified in “Angle” field and in this angle from the “Origin” point,
with the length entered in “Length”
field and with the steps specified in “Step Size”, some points are shot on the characteristic curve.
Note that the length and steps of the points are based on nominal current. For example, if the angle is
“45” degrees and the length is
“2” and the step is “0.1” times the nominal current and the origin point current and the second harmonic
are “0”, by approving this settings you can see that some points are added to the characteristic curve
at the angle of 45 degrees
with the origin of “0”. After removing all of the points by using “Remove All” option and adding three
new “Shots” to the table, the test runs and the relay performance is analyzed. If the performed test has
“Failed” points, by selecting
“Clear All Failed Tests” option, the results of these points are “Cleared” from the table and you can
test the point again by right-clicking on its row and selecting “Apply Test”. / “Check Test” Tab After
performing the “Shot Test”, “Check
Test” and “Search Test” are performed. In “Check Test” the upper and lower tolerances of the relay,
which are displayed as dotted lines in “Harmonic Restraint View”, are tested and evaluated. To perform
the “Check Test”, first it is necessary
to draw some lines named “Check Line” in different parts of the vector. To draw this line, first from
“Origin” section in “Check Line” section, the start point of this line is specified. In “Idiff”,
“Ixf/Idiff”, “Angle Ixf/Idiff” and “Angle”
fields, 1In, 17 percent, 0 degree and 0 degree are entered as origin differential current, the
proportion of the “nth” harmonic current to the differential current, the angle of the “nth” harmonic
current and the angle of the “Check Line”
respectively. Also, 5In is entered as the length of the check line in the cell of the “Length” section.
In “Harmonic Order” field, the harmonic level is selected so that its curve is displayed. Note that the
drawn “Check Lines” must have
at least one intersection with one of the characteristic curve tolerance lines. Then click on “Add”
option to add the “Check Line” to the “Check Test” line table. / / Another method for drawing the “Check
Line” is to hold down left-click
and “Ctrl” key on “Harmonic Restraint View” window and then move the cursor in the desired direction on
the characteristic curve. You can see that the information of the drawn “Check Line” is displayed in
“Check Test” lines table. After
drawing the “Check Line”, the software evaluates the crossing place of “Check Line” and tolerance lines
as “Shot” test in accordance with the performance of the relay. Here, after performing the test, the
relay does not perform in lower
tolerance and performs a trip in the upper tolerance so the result of the test is “Pass”. Other parts of
this section such as “Fault Type” and “Remove All” and “Sequence” etc. options are the same at those of
“Shot Test” section which
have been explained in previous videos. The only additional option in this section is “Copy to Search”.
By marking any of the test lines and selecting this option, it is possible to copy the selected line in
“Search Test” and by selecting
“Add” option in “Search Test”, add this line to the “Search Test” test lines table. “Search Test” Tab
After performing “Shot Test” and “Check Test” in “AMT Diff. Harmonics” room, it is necessary to perform
“Search Test”. The purpose of
this test is to find the characteristic curve line. To perform a “Search Test”, first some lines named
“Search Line” should be drawn in different parts of the vector. The method for drawing these lines is
the same as the one explained
for “Check Line”. To draw this line, first the start point of this line is specified in “Search Line”
section, “Origin” section. For example, in “Idiff”, “Ixf/Idiff”, “Angle Ixf/Idiff” and “Angle” fields,
1In, 17 percent, 0 degree and
0 degree are entered as origin differential current, the proportion of the “nth” harmonic current to the
differential current, the angle of the “nth” harmonic current and the angle of the “Search Line”
respectively. Also, 6In is entered
as the length of the check line in the cell of the “Length” section. In “Harmonic Order” field, the
harmonic level is selected so that its curve is displayed. Then click on “Add” option to add the “Search
Line” to the “Search Test” test
lines table. After drawing the “Search Line”, the software tests the intersection location of the
“Search Line” and tolerance lines as “Shot” and evaluates them based on the relay performance. Upon
running the test, by testing some points
on the search line the software starts interpolating the characteristic curve and determines its exact
location. / “Ignore” field in “Search Interval” section is used when you want the intended “Search” line
to ignore the specified characteristic
curve. By entering a number in this section, some points are added on the “Search” line with this number
as the distance between them. For example, by specifying “2In” in this field, you can see that some
points are added on the “Search
Line” with “2In” distance from each other. By clicking on “Add” option, this “Search Line” is added to
the “Search Test” lines table. If the test runs, the points added on the “Search Test” are tested one
after the other until the exact
location of the relay characteristic curve is determined. This option is used when there is no
characteristic to test or the characteristic that you have seems wrong. If you wish to do the same for
all of the tested lines, you can use
“Setting” tab in “Ignore Nominal Characteristic” section. To do this, by entering the value in “Search
Interval” and selecting “Apply to All” option, you can apply this setting to all test lines and find the
relay characteristic. /
“SETTING” TAB In this tab it is possible to manage some settings related to running the tests. In
“Supply Direction” section, it is possible to determine the direction of injection and fault at the two
sides of the protective device for the
test. To better understand this, open “Vector View”; here you can see that if
“Fault_Primary_Supply_Secondary” is selected, three primary currents of the transformer are displayed in
“Vector View while by selecting “Fault_Secondary_Supply_Primary”,
three secondary currents of the transformer are displayed. Note that for “Inrush Blocking” test, three
primary currents need to be injected. / In “Fault Inception” section, the angle where the fault occurs
is specified that this angle
shiftes currents of the both sides equally. To better understand this, select “Signal View” from the
toolbar and check “Voltage group A” from “Setting” and by changing the value of “Angle”, view the
voltage and current signal changes.
If for any reason you wish to enable the voltages, you can do so by checking “Enable Voltage Output”
from “Voltage Output” section and then you can enter the value of the voltage in the intended field. In
“Coefficient for Fault” section
it is possible to specify a coefficient for fault current values. “For Single Phase Factor” and “For
three Phase Factor” fields are the fault current coefficients for single-phase and three-phase faults.
By changing the fault current coefficient,
it is possible to view the changes in “Vector View”. / In “Time” section, first, the injection time
before the fault is entered in “PreFault Time”. In “Max Fault Time” the maximum fault injection time is
specified in two forms of “Abs”
or “Rel” which consist of three parts themselves. About this time note that if in a “Shot” point the
“Max Fault Time” is shorter than “Pick up” time, the result of the evaluation will be wrong. If you are
using the “Max Fault Time Abs”
field, you need to enter a time in terms of seconds for the maximum fault signal injection time for all
of the points but to accelerate the test, you can use the “Max Fault Time Rel” option. By checking this
option, three other options
appear. By entering a number in “Add %of Tnom”, the fault signal injection time in any point, equals the
test point nominal time plus a percentage of the nominal time entered in this field. This means that if
the test point nominal time
is 10 seconds and 5 percent is entered in this field, the maximum fault injection time is 105 percent of
the test nominal time which is 10.5 seconds. But in “Add Absolute” field, the fault injection time
equals the sum of the nominal time
of the test point trip plus the time entered in this field. If all these three fields are filled, the
software picks the longest time entered. For points that are located at the “No Trip” zone, it is
possible to enter a separate time in
“No-Trip Time” field. In "Post Fault time" the injection time is entered in the post-error mode. The
"Delay After Trigger" field is used to calculate the key operation time. We can access it by
right-clicking on the relevant field and
selecting "Go To Linked Value“. There is a link to "CB Trip Time". Then, you can select "Remove Link"
and enter the value you want instead. In "Time Reference" by selecting "Fault Inception", the "Trip"
time is calculated from the time
the error was injected. However, by selecting "Starting", the "Trip" time is calculated from the time
the "Pick-up" contact is received from the relay. In the "Load Current Prefault Current" section you can
make the phase and current settings
related to "Prefault". In the "Amplitude" section the current range in "Prefault" mode is entered
according to the coefficient of the rated current and in the "Phase" section, the current angle is set
to "Prefault" mode. / In “Search Setting”
section, related to “Search Test” are specified. As mentioned before, a “Search Test” arrives at a
conclusion only if one of the three conditions of this section is met. The first condition is “Relative”
which means that if the difference
between the test point value and the previous point is less than the percentage specified in this field,
this very point is the result of the test. The second condition is “Absolute” which means that if the
difference between the test
point and the previous point is less than the value specified in this field, this very point is the
result of the test. The third condition is “Max point number” which means that the test is to be
performed as many times as the number
of points entered in this field at maximum and the last point is the result of the test. But if for any
reason, the relay nominal characteristic is not available, you can use “Ignore Nominal Characteristic”
section. By doing so, the software
ignores the existing characteristic. Then, based on the step entered in “Search Interval”, it adds shots
on the “Search” line. For example, a line is drawn in “Search Test” section. Then, 0.5 is entered as the
value for “Search Interval”
and “Apply to all” is selected. You can see that some points with the same step are added on the
“Search” line. By running the test, you can see that the test starts from the lowest point and once one
of the three mentioned conditions
is met, the test arrives at a result. Also, if necessary, you can ignore this option by selecting
“Disable all”. / By selecting “Shot Passed Only Act In Main Zone” in “Other Setting” section, the test
is passed only if the relay performance
time in the shot point is somewhere in the allowed range of the main zone. This means that if this
option is checked and a shot is added in the tolerance zone of the bottom of the characteristic curve
and the relay does not give a trip,
the test passes but if the relay gives a “Trip” the test fails. If the “Shot Passed Only Act In Main
Zone” option is not checked, the performance time is between “20” milliseconds and “No Trip” and if the
relay gives a “Trip” this point
passes. By selecting the "Test Passed Only Act In Main Zone" option, the "Shot", "Check" and "Search"
tests will "Pass", only after the relay operation time is defined only in the allowed range; for example
if the relay operation rated
time is "0" to "30" milliseconds and between the operating zone and "No Trip" a point in the tolerance
zone is selected, if „Test Passed Only Act In Main“ option is checked, that time test will „pass“ which
relay function is set in one
of each ranges. Therefore, If the relay time is, for example, "40" milliseconds, the test result will be
"Fail". If this option is not checked, the test result will be "Pass". In the "Passed Setting" section,
by checking "Pass If You Get
Any Trip", regardless of the time of operation of the relay, if the relay works in the "Tripping" area,
the test will "Pass" test. In “Trigger” tab you can specify the desired binary to receive the “Pick up”
and “Trip” signals of the relay
as well as stopping the current injection. The settings and explanation of this section are exactly the
same as mentioned for “Trigger” room and “Sequencer”. In “Binary Output” tab, if it is necessary for the
relay to view the conditions
of the circuit breaker, it is possible to take any needed voltage to the “Binary Input” through “Binary
Output” of the device by voltages of “A”, “B” or “Aux Dc” groups. This tab has three modes of
“Prefault”, “Fault” and “Post Fault”
and it is possible to manage each of them separately. / /
“HARMONIC RESTRAINT VIEW” WINDOW As mentioned before, one of the main windows of diff Harmonics room
is “Harmonic Restraint View”. This window shows the relay harmonic characteristic curve based on the
settings entered in “Test Object” window.
The top of the characteristic curve is called “Tripping” area while the bottom is called “No trip” area.
This means that if the test point is located at the top of the curve, the relay gives a trip otherwise
it does not. This window has
some shared and some unique features. The feature available by right or left clicking on this window are
common to all rooms and it is not necessary to explain them here but at the bottom of this window there
is a gear by clicking on which
some other useful options are displayed. By clicking on “Zoom during test”, if one or multiple “Shot” or
“Search” lines are drawn on the characteristic curve, by running the test you can see that the software
zooms on the areas where the
test points are located and shows the found zone line. / / If you select “Optimize AllChange Fault Type”
option, by changing the “Fault type”, the characteristic curve display is “Optimized”. By using “Pan
Modealt+mouse+click” you can
move the characteristic curve diagram as desired. By using “Show row number” you can view the row number
of any test point or test line on the characteristic curve. By selecting “Show zonesAll Search Lines”,
test zones of all “Search”
are marked with a circle to find the characteristic curve line. By selecting “Show zonesSelected Search
Line”, only the points of the line selected from “Search line” table are marked with a circle. By
clicking on “Show all t act point”,
the operation time of the tested points is showed. If the points are close to each other and it is not
possible to view the times clearly, you can use “Show selected t act point” option which shows the time
of the row selected from the
test points table. “Show all Id & Ih Act” and “Show selected Id & Ih Act point” options are used to show
all tested “Search Test” and the points related to the row selected from the “Search Test” table
respectively. By selecting “Snap
to grid” option, the points on the characteristic curve that are shot close to the grids snap to the
grids of this page. By selecting “Snap to Line” option, the points on the characteristic curve that are
“Shot” close to the characteristic
curve grid snap to it. /
“OFFLOAD” TEST OF THE METER PART 1 To test Energy Meters, AMT Transducer & Meter room can be used.
On “Start” page, the “AMT Transducer & Meter” room software is opened. This room is comprised of the two
main windows of “Test View” and “Transducer
Characteristic”; in “Test View” window, it is possible to perform a “Shot Test” for various quantities
and compare the results with the meter characteristic. / / To begin the test, after completing the
information in “Device” in “General
Test Object” window, double click on “Transducer” option. On “Transducer Properties” page, it is
possible to view a set of functions. To test the meter, two functions of “Wh” and “Varh” are used; here,
“Wh” is selected. By selecting “Injection”
option in “Input” section, it is possible to perform the “Offload” test of the meter by injection from
the device. The other option is “Read from Binary” which is used to perform an “On Load” test of the
meter. By selecting this option,
it is necessary to enter the values into the inputs of the device using the clamps and interface cables.
/ / / In “Output” section, it is possible to specify the type of the output received from the meter. To
test transducers and their
corresponding outputs, by selecting “Current” or “Voltage” options, it is possible to take the output
current and voltage values to the inputs 9 and 10 for measurement. To test the meter, if only the output
values are being displayed on
the screen, “Open Loop” option can be used. Here, “Pulse” option is used so that using the light sensor
which comes with the device, the number of the output pulses of the meter is recorded. / / In „CT Star
point Connection“ section, the
connection related to the current transformers are specified. Usually and since the active power flows
from the busbar toward the line, "Toward Line” option is selected. Selecting “Toward Line” is in
accordance with the injection of the
active power from the device to the equipment. If “Toward Busbar” is selected, 180 degrees are added to
the angle of the current. / In “Full Scale Error Reference” section it is possible to specify the error
recording reference which can
be selected from a range of zero to the maximum or negative to the positive maximum. If the
characteristic is asymmetrical the range is from zero to the maximum while if the characteristic is
symmetrical, it is possible to select both
options for error measurement. As for error measurement, suppose that for a transducer with a
characteristic with the maximum input of 1 amp and output of 33 milliamperes, for a 0/5 amp current, the
output of the transducer equals 16 milliamperes.
In such a case, the error percentage is calculated as follows. / / This means that ideally, for a 480
milliamperes input, the output equals 16 milliamperes. Therefore, the absolute error value equals 20
milliamperes and the error percentage
equals -4 percent: / Also, the “Full-Scale” error value of the transducer equals -2 percent. / This
method is used for cases where “Full Scale Error Reference” is set at “0…+max”. If the characteristic is
“Symmetrical”, the error calculation
method should be selected from among “0..+max” and “-max…+max”. For the previous example, if the
characteristic was symmetrical and “-max..+max” was selected, the following relation is used for “Full
Scale Error” calculation. / In "Tolerance”
section, it is possible to enter the error value as an absolute or a relative value; the default values
are 1 milli pulse and 0/25 percent. Finally, a comparison is made between these two values and the
larger value is selected as the
allowed error value. In “Number of phases” section, it is possible to specify whether the meter is
single-phase or three-phase. / / The test characteristic is specified in "Characteristic Definition”
section. Since the meter characteristic
is linear, “Linear” option is selected as the “Characteristic Type” and it is uneditable. / To specify
the energy “Import” and “Export” values, it is possible to check the “Symmetrical” option so that there
is a Symmetrical characteristic
in both sides available. The “Minimum Value”, “Knee Point” and “Saturation range” fields are disabled
for meter test but in “Maximum Value” section, it is possible to enter the amount of power and the
number of pulses received in exchange
for that amount of power. Usually, the meter factor or “c/r” is entered in this section. For example,
the factor for a edmi mk6e meter equals 5000 Wh per pulse. / / Note that by using “Primary” and
“Secondary” options at the top of the
screen, it is possible to enter the values as primary or secondary in accordance with the meter type
which needs to be done considering the CT and PT conversion ratios. / "Relative” and “Absolute” options
are used for displaying the absolute
or relative amount of the values. After entering the values, “Ok” is selected to continue with the test.
After completing the information in "Transducer Properties” section, the “Hardware Configuration”
settings need to be examined. By
opening this window, you can see that the current and voltage outputs are set by default. / In
"Binary/Analog Input” tab, you see that the Binary number 8 is selected to record the pulses of the
meter by default. However, it is possible
for the user to use any other binary if necessary. By clicking on “Ok”, the applied changes are saved. /
To perform a test, a point on the characteristic must be selected which can be done using two methods:
1- Entering the values in the
fields of “Test Point” section which means entering the related parameters including Wh value, number of
pulses, test performance time and frequency. Then, by selecting “Add”, this point is added to the test
table. / 2- Holding down the
“CTRL” key and then clicking on the meter characteristic curve. / / On “Test View” page, by clicking on
“Advanced View”, a page opens where it is possible to enter the voltage, current and their angle as well
as the cos ∅ to be injected
by the device. Moreover, in “Waveform” section it is possible to add phase shift and DC offset to the
harmonic specified signals. After specifying these values, apparent, active and reactive powers are
separately calculated for every phase
and displayed in the box at the bottom of this section; if necessary it is possible to make changes from
this section as well. / / / After adding the intended points, the test can be started and after the time
specified in accordance with
the pulses and Wh elapsed, the results are displayed. In performing this test, some points must be
considered: 1- If a test point is specified in Wh mode, zero is entered as the value for reactive power
by default and to change this, first
the current angle needs to be changed from “Angle” field. / / 2- The time entered in “Time” field by the
user changes in accordance with the characteristic curve of the meter. This change is in a way that the
number of pulses changes to
integer. / 3- Being “Out of Range” for the points in this test depends on the required time for
performing the test. Since the maximum injection time of the device is 4000 seconds, if a test point
needs more time for the test, that point
becomes “Out of Range”; to change the state of this point, more voltage or current can be entered in
“Advanced View” section. / 4- If a too large value is entered in “Wh” field, this value is recorded as
“na” and by selecting “Add”, this
point becomes “Out of Range”. /
“OFFLOAD” TEST OF THE METER PART 2 In addition to the tests that the user can perform by specifying
different points on the energy meter characteristic, in the offload section, 5 other tests available in
this section are as follows: -Load
Test -Mechanism Test -Injection Test -No-Load Test -Creep Test As mentioned in the first part, before
performing any of the tests, we enter the information about the energy meter in the Test Object section.
First, enter the CT and PT conversion
ratio data, and then, in the Transducer Properties section, enter the meter constant. After confirming
the entered information, select the test from the Test Mode to be performed and after adding the points,
run the test. Load Test In
this section, the voltage injection and current for a specific time is set to evaluate the number of
pulses. Finally, the overall energy performance of the meter can be checked. The purpose of this test is
to evaluate the error rate for
measuring different elements in the meter. To execute the test, first go to the Advanced View section,
here we need to adjust the active power in the supported range of energy meter. Then, we add three
points with 5, 10, 15 pulses to run
the test, and we run the test. As you can see in the Test Point section, information about watt-hour,
pulses, test duration and time and its frequency can be set. Mechanism Test In this section, the
injection of rated current and rated
voltage is done for a certain period of time to evaluate the amount of transmission energy. The purpose
of this test, in addition to evaluating the error rate in the overall measurement, is to evaluate the
error rate of the device in measuring
various elements. Since the number of pulses is not important, points can be entered for testing based
on watt-hour and time elements. The evaluation conditions of this test are based on the use of the Open
Loop feature so that at the
end of the test, the user can enter the measured value manually. Injection test In this test, voltage
and current are continuously injected to ensure the accuracy of the wiring as well as the initial
function of the meter. Adjustable elements
in the Test Point section for this test are: watt-hour, pulses, test duration and time, and frequency.
To perform the test, add a dot and run the test. No-Load Test The focus of this test is injecting 150%
of the rated voltage and zero
current; to check the performance or non-performance of the meter. The relationship between the minimum
test duration is specified as follows: / In this test, to achieve 150% of the rated voltage, the voltage
limit should be changed from
the Test Object section, if necessary. Then, the test should be performed by setting the voltage to 150%
of the rated voltage. As you can see, there is no current injection in this section. Creep Test
Injecting 0.5% of the rated current
with the rated voltage is performed in this section to check the performance or non-performance of the
meter. In this section, you can also add points to perform the test based on the amount of watt-hour,
pulse or duration. After each
test, you can view the results in the Report window by selecting the Report View option.
“ONLOAD” TEST OF THE METER An introduction to Edmi Mk63 meter About “Edmi Mk63” that is the piece of
equipment that we are going to test, this should be noted that this meter is basically an energy meter
that measures varh, Wh and Vah basic
values. Also, it is possible to measure a wide range of values instantaneously. In the picture of the
cover of this meter depicted below, terminal blocks for measuring the current and voltage as well as the
connectors for the pulse input
and output optionally can be seen. / / Possible diagrams for meter terminals / The position of “Config”
jumper in “MK6E” meter is displayed in this picture. This jumper is located on the right edge near the
“Select” button. This jumper
has two states of “Config” and “Secure”. To change the settings, the plastic jumper is taken out and
placed on another set of pins. Connecting the upper and center pins puts the jumper in the “Secure”
state while connecting the lower and
center pins puts it in the “Config” state. / All current meters have “CT” to “VT” links between “TB1”
terminals and ends number 1,2,4,5,8,9,12 and 13. Also, there is a static link between 12 and 14. To
perform some tests, it is necessary
for these links to be removed. / Position of CT to VT links / Power supply, voltage and current wiring
in 3-wire and 4-wire structures The voltage nominal input differs in accordance with the type of the
meter. Also, the current range
is in accordance with the meter current range and should be limited to “Imax”. In 4-wire mode, the
maximum line-to-neutral and the maximum line-to-line voltages are 290 and 500 volts, respectively. In
3-wire mode, the maximum line-to-line
voltage equals 290 volts. In higher voltages, the meter cannot function appropriately and might get
damaged. “TB1-1” and “TB1-11” are the two inputs considered for the side power supply voltage. “TB1-11”
needs to be considered as the negative
input in DC systems and as neutral in AC systems. The voltage input of the side power supply equals 110
VAC/VDC plus-minus 20 percent. Generally, it is possible to consider the following four combinations for
the power supply: • Type I
– VT power supply: used for most metering applications, especially in Low Voltage sites where when all
the VTs are disconnected, the meter turns off. • Type II – LCD 24 volts side power supply with the local
power supply: used in cases
where it is necessary to read the meter even if the main power supply is not available. In such cases, a
24-volt battery power supply will be used to read the meter.• Type III – side power supply: for
switchyard uses where the meter needs
to be always on and there is enough space for the side power supply of the system. If for any reason,
this side power supply is disconnected, the meter turns off. • VT Priority – along with the High Voltage
auxiliary power supply with
200 to 240 volts range: in this state, naturally, the meter receives the necessary power from the VT
circuits. When all of the VTs are disconnected, the changeover board activates and auxiliary terminals
are used. • VT Priority – along
with the Low Voltage auxiliary power supply with 57 to 120 volts range: in this state, naturally, the
meter receives the necessary power from the VT circuits. When all of the VTs are disconnected, the
changeover board activates and auxiliary
terminals are used.This structure is most useful in cases where the VT burden is not problematic but the
power supply is always available for protective systems. Default display screen / "The structure of the
digits and symbols displayed
on the screen from the top left are as follows: The two first characters of the first row of the screen
stand for the direction of the var and var, respectively. “+” sign refers to positive energy / output /
delivered and “-“ sign refers
to negative energy / input / received. If the slot for these characters is empty, it means that the
amount of energy equals zero. The third character that resembles a beating heart indicates that the
meter is active and the display screen
is up to date. The fourth, fifth, and sixth characters show the active rate for W, var and VA values,
respectively, in form of numbers from 1 to 8. The seventh character indicates the state of the battery
and means that that the battery
is empty or unrecognized when turning on. If the Daylight Saving feature that refers to the daylight
saving time is active, the letter D is displayed as the eighth character. The current time is displayed
on the right side of the screen.
The initial three characters at the bottom of the screen show the alarm status. The fifth, sixth and
seventh characters at the bottom of the screen show the login state. L means login through the optical
port Local, M means through the
modem port and S means login through SCAD port. In the end, we can see the current date on the right
side of the bottom. / Power direction graph In the above figure: Refers to voltage impedance angle in
relation to the current and equals
current admittance angle in relation to the voltage. Pulse outputs:The pulse outputs are capable of
doing more than only showing the power usage. MK6E has a maximum number of 6 outputs that are directly
located inside the meter. At the
bottom of the LCD, there are two LEDs located on the meter that are used to assess the pulses produced
in the accuracy test. These LEDs are connected to outputs number 1 and 2. The state of these LEDs is
directly reflected on the TB3 outputs.
The picture below indicates the state of EDMI MK6E terminals. In fact, TB5, TB4, TB3 and TB6 are the
terminals in which the outputs are located. All of the outputs are voltageless contacts. These outputs
are completely isolated from the
other circuits and in some cases, have common terminals. BOSFET drivers are set at 110 nominal volts. /
/ / An important point is that for Active and Inactive times, the exact time is one percent shorter than
the specified value. This
amount will be even shorter if the system frequency is more than the nominal value. Therefore, the
output will be lower as much as the same amount. Under normal conditions, these factors will not have
any noticeable effect on the length
of the pulse. It should be noted that this will only change the pulse time duration and the minimum
off-time of the LED but not the rate of the pulse. If during inactive times, the rate of the pulse is
zero or less than zero, the output
will remain active. If the rate of the pulse decreases, the pulses will be recognizable one more time.
If this time is too short, the pulses will not be backed up and will merge into one another. Therefore,
to avoid missing the pulses
in high load conditions, selecting the appropriate parameter is of great importance. Using the LED
output to test the accuracy of the delivered Wh is a necessity. A 0.01 Wh/p pulse rate will be needed in
the meter terminals. The light
pulse must be 90ms long with a minimum interval of 50ms between the pulses so that the sensor can
appropriately recognize the current process. The settings and combinations required for the test are as
follows: No Inversion, 90ms active
time, 50ms inactive time, parameter 0.01, All channels, W, Export + It should be noted that the EziView
software has a built-in calculator for connecting to this meter that can help the user in adjusting the
parameters for the pulse output.
This tool can be used by clicking on the calculator when configuring the output in form of Pulsing. This
calculator enables the user to specify the system characteristic line-to-line voltage or line-to-neutral
voltage, current and the
amount of load and determine the pulse output rate. / Using the pulse outputs for the test: The easiest
way to test the accuracy of the meter is to use the LED pulse or output pulse. This test is similar to
performing a test for meters
with spinning disc. Pulse outputs are configured using the EzView software. To achieve the best results,
the pulse rate must never exceed 10 pulses per second. Also, the test must be at least 10 seconds long.
Testing the meter and the
software settings: To test “Energy Meters” or meters in online mode or under load, “AMR Transducer &
Meter” room can be used. As mentioned before, this room is composed of “Test View” and “Transducer
Characteristic” main windows. Since
the function of each of these options has been explained before, repeating them does not seem necessary.
To begin the test, the user needs to double click on “Transducer” option after completing the
information in “Device”, in “General
Test Object” window. There is a set of “Functions” available on “Transducer Properties” page. To test a
meter, two functions of “Wh watt-hour” and “Varh var-hour” can be used and here “Wh” is selected. To
perform an “Onload” test, the
user needs to select the “Read from Binary” option in “Input” section. By selecting this option, the
values are entered into the “Inputs” of the device using the clamps and interface cables. The output
type of the meter can be specified
in the “Output” section. To test the meter, if only the output values of the meter are being displayed
on the screen, the “Open Loop” option can be used. Here the “Pulse” option is used so that by using the
light sensor that comes with
the device, the number of output pulses of the device is recorded. The connection related to the current
transformers needs to be specified in “CT Star point connection” section. Since normally the active
power flows from the busbar toward
the line, “Toward Line” option is selected. In “Tolerance” section, it is possible to enter the fault
value in two forms of absolute and relative and the default values are 1 millipulse and 0/25 percent.
Also, in „Number of phases“ section,
it is possible to select from among single-phase or three-phase in accordance with the meter type. The
test characteristic is specified in „Characteristic Definition“ section. Since the meter characterisic
is linear, the „Characteristic
Type“ is set at „Linear“ and cannot be changed. “Saturation Range”, “Knee Point” and “Minimum Value”
fields are deactivated for the meter test but in “Maximum Value” section, it is possible to specify the
amount of power and the number
of pulses received in return. Usually, the meter factor or “c/r” value is entered in this section. For
example, the factor for an edmi mk6e meter equals 5000 watt-hour per pulse. After completing the
informatioin in „Transducer Properties“
section, the settings in „Hardware Configuration“ need to be examined. By opening this window, the user
can see that the current and voltage outputs are configured by default. Also, in „Binary/Analog Input“
tab, the user can see that binary
number 8 is selected to record the meter pulses by default. However, it is possible to use a custom
„Binary“ of the device as well. " The only difference between onload and offload tests of the meter is
that the inputs need to be prepared
to record the values measured using the measurement equipment clamps. To do this, the user only needs to
click on “Test Hardware Configuration” option in the “Binary Input Calibration” section and assign the
available binaries to record
the values of current and voltage in accordance with the meter characteristic or that it is either
single-phase or three-phase. By default, binaries number 2, 1, and 3 are assigned to record the voltage
while binaries number 5, 6, and
7 are assigned to record the current values measuring using the clamp. Using the “Sum”, “Mul”, and “Deg”
parameters, it is possible to edit the measured values in different conditions in accordance with the
measurement equipment being
used. For example, if a clamp shows 1 volt in the output in return for 10 amps, by measuring a 15 amps
current, our binary will receive 1.5 volt. Therefore, by entering factor “10” in “Mul” section, this
value can be edited. As another
example, if our clamp has a 0.5 degree phase measurement error, this item can be edited through “Deg”
section. In “Sum” section it is possible to perform a “DC” shift that is not of use in this test. By
selecting the option in “Analog
Output” section in “Test Hardware Configuration” window and entering the values of current and voltage,
it is possible to calibrate the binary inputs. To perform the test, the user only needs to specify the
inputs of the intended binary
and then, begin the process of measuring the elements of current and voltage to compare with the meter
characteristic. It should be noted that in “Online Values” section, the power, voltage, current and
other elements related to the meter
are displayed and updated instantly.
TRANSDUCER TEST To perform a transducer test, AMT Transducer & Meter room can be used. This room
consists of two main windows of “Test View” and “Transducer Characteristic”. In this section, it is
possible to test single-phase and three-phase
transducers with symmetric performance characteristics such as active and reactive power characteristics
or asymmetrical ones. To begin the test, the user needs to double-click on „Transducer“ option after
completeing the data in „Device“
section in „General Test Object“ window. On “Transducer Properties” page, it is possible to view a set
of “Functions”. For a transducer test, the user can select from among functions such as active power,
reactive power, apparent power,
frequency, current, voltage, power factor, load factor, phase in degrees, mean current, DC current, DC
voltage, DC power and line to line voltage. Some of these parameters can be measured in single-phase
state, some in three-phase state
while some can be measured in both states. In accordance with the transducer type and its manufacturer
company, this equipment can have different inputs and even in some cases, several inputs simultaneously.
Finally, these inputs will
be converted into analog signals. On the other side, the transducers can also have binary outputs which
are activated as soon as the specified characteristic goes past a certain limit. In some other cases, it
is possible to use the output
binary signals as a counter that produces a pulse based on the measured energy. The type of output
received from the transducer is specified in “Output” section. To test transducers and in accordance
with their output, it is possible to
take their output current and DC voltage to the inputs of the device for measurement by selecting
“Current” or “Voltage” option. Otherwise, “Pulse” option can be selected so that the number of pulses
are recorded. “Open Loop” option makes
it possible to record the values in transducers that only display the output on the screen that is
located in front of the user. So a window asking the user to enter the values manually appears. The
connection related to the current transformers
is specified in “CT Starpoint Connection” section. since normally active power flows from the busbar
toward the line, “Toward Line” option is selected. Selecting “Toward Line” is in accordance with the
injection of active power from the
device into the equipment. If “Toward Busbar” is selected, 180 degrees are added to the current angle. /
Connection of a sample transducer to CT and PT In “Full scale error reference” section, it is possible
to specify the reference for
recording the error which is specified as a range from zero to maximum or from negative to positive
maximum. If the characteristic is asymmetrical, the range is from zero to maximum and if it is
symmetric, both options can be selected
for error calculation. Before this, in the video related to offload test of the meter a complete
explanation about error calculation has been provided. In “Tolerance” section, the error value can be
entered in form of an absolute or a
relative value and the default values are 1 millipulse and 0/25 percent. In the end, a comparison is
made between these two values and the greater value is selected as the allowed error value. About
transducers, before anything, the accuracy
class for different characteristics of power, current, voltage to frequency must be specified. This
factor is obtained using the calculations and relations that are available in the manual of the
transducer. In „Number of phases“ section,
it is specified whether the transducer is single-phase or three-phase. The test characteristic is
specified in „Characteristic Definition“ section. Since the transducer characteristic can be either
linear or non-linear, symmetric and asymmetric
options are available for „Characteristic Type“. Moreover, it is possible to select the appropriate
option in accordance with the features of the transducer from „Linear“, „Compound“, and „Quadratic“. To
specify energy “Import” and “Export”
values, “Symmetrical” option can be checked so that a different characteristic from both sides is
available. The minimum value for the input and output of the transducer is specified in “Minimum Value”
field. If the compound performance
characteristic option is selected, Knee Point needs to be specified as well. In fact, this point divides
the characteristic into two parts with different ranges. The maximum value for the input and output of
the transducer is specified
in “Maximum Value” field. Also, the range of the performance characteristic is specified in “Saturation
Range” field. It should be noted that by using „Primary“ and „Secondary“ options at the top of the page,
it is possible to enter the
values in form of primary or secondary in accordance with the type of the meter which should be done
considering the CT and PT turns ratio. „Relative“ and „Absolute“ options are used to display the
relative or absolute value of the elements.
After entering the values, „OK“ is selected to continue with the test. "After completing the information
in “Transducer Properties” section, “Hardware Configuration” needs to be examined. By opening this
window, the user can see that the
current and voltage outputs are adjusted by default. Also, in “Binary/Analog Input” tab it can be seen
that binary #9 is considered for measuring the output milliampere by default. However, if necessary, it
is possible to use any other
binaries of the device. After applying the changes, by clicking on “Ok”, the changes are saved. To
perform the test, the user only needs to specify the intended binary inputs and then begin the process
of measuring the voltage and current
elements in order to compare them with the transducer characteristic. Here we are going to perform the
sample test on a transducer. The transducer is of the S3-WRD series which is a sample for
reactive/active power measurement or watt/var.
This transducer has a 0.2 percent accuracy for the output rate. The S3-WRD series is available in three
different models of S3-WRD-1, S3-WRD-3 and S3-WRD-3A. Their difference is in how they are used in
single-phase and three-phase systems
as well as three-wire and four-wire systems.. Also, it is possible to use these transducers with 1 and 5
amps input currents as well as a vast variety of voltage inputs. The model we are analyzing is S3-WRD-3
and a picture of its wiring
can be seen in the following. / For example, for a 230 watt var output, this transducer gives a 4
milliampere output with 1 amp of input current and 132 volts of input voltage. If the output power is
zero we will have 12 milliamperes and
if it is 230 watts, we will have 20 milliamperes in the output. Considering these values and the linear
characteristic of the transducer, it is time to test this equipment. In the first step, by running the
AMPro software, we enter the
AMT Transducer & Meter environment. Before anything, by clicking on “Test Object Parameters”, the
information related to the transducer is entered in “Device” section. This information includes the
title/explanation for the transducer,
the manufacturer company, type of the device, installation location of the equipment and the serial
number. In “Nominal Values” section, values related to CT secondary and PT are entered in accordance
with how the test is performed. Now,
after accepting these items, by double-clicking on “Transducer”, the user enters the “Transducer
Properties” window. By selecting the intended function which here is active power, the output is set at
Current. By enabling the “Symmetrical”
option, it is made possible to also evaluate the negative values. In “Minimum Value” section, 230 watts
is entered as the input value and its corresponding output which equals 4 milliamperes is entered. In
“Maximum Value” section, 230
watts is entered in secondary form as the value and the corresponding current for this output is
specified to be 20 milliamperes. After accepting these, it is time to add the points on the
characteristic and perform the test. A simple
approach is to click on “Sequence” and specify the upper and lower limits of power and the number of
test points so that the points are added in certain distances. By performing the test, it can be
observed that the output values are recorded
in accordance with the applied input. By enabling the display of Actual Value for binary #9, it is
possible to view the waveform of the measured values in “Signal View” window in the software.After the
test is finished, the intended elements
are selected and the report is prepared.
AN INTRODUCTION TO AMT SYNCHRONIZER To test synchronizer relays, “AMT-Synchronizer” room can be
used. The synchronizer is a piece of equipment that is used to connect the generator to the grid that is
being used and uses the voltage of both
sides to examine the state of frequency and voltage and if the difference between the generator voltage
range and frequency, and the grid is less than the specified limit, the connect command is issued. If
the mentioned difference is more
than the specified limit, the relay will not issue the command for the connection. In this case, the
relay examines the generator frequency and voltage state compared to the grid. If any of these two
parameters is lower or higher than
the specified limit, the relay synchs the two systems by giving the command for an increase or decrease
in the “AVR” and the governor. The synchronizer room has several pages and exclusive windows. The two
main windows of this room are
“Test View” and “Synchronizer Characteristic”. The “Shot Test” and “Synchronizer” tests are done in the
“Test View” window. To perform a “Shot test” in this room, like the other rooms, the user only needs to
specify a test point and perform
the test. Also, the performance of the relay in synchronizing the two systems is tested in the
“Synchronizer” tab. The synchronizer characteristic is displayed in the “Synchronizer Characteristic” in
accordance with the information entered
in the “Test Object” of this room. The tools available by right-clicking or left-clicking in this window
and the cog at the bottom are common in all rooms. To enter the relay information for the test, the
first thing is to enter the nominal
information of the relay in “Device”. In this section, it is necessary to enter characteristics such as
“PT” turns ratio and frequency. In the next step, the relay characteristics are entered after
double-clicking on “Synchronizer”. Since
these relays use voltage, in “Protection Device” tab, it is necessary to select the sequence of phases
and the phases that are connected to the relay in “Rotation sense” and “Connected Voltages” for systems
1 and 2. Note that system number
one is an infinite bus and system number two is a generator that needs to be connected to the grid. An
important point is that when the system phases are wired as ACB, it is necessary to select L1-L3-L2
radiobutton. Also, if “Connected
Voltage” on any of the phase-to-ground states is selected, the voltages of systems one and two are
displayed in “Test View” in form of phase-to-ground. The key performance time is entered in the
“Setting” section of this part and in the
“CB Closing time” field and the phase shift that can come from intermediate equipment or a coupling
transformer is specified in the “Transformer Group Phase Shift”. The nominal voltage of the system
number two is entered in “VNom L-LSecondary”
field and if this value is different from that of system number one, it needs to be specified. By
specifying this value, the voltage difference that is resulted from the test will be in relation to
nominal voltage of system number two
and not the voltage of system number one. This means that if the nominal voltage of system number one is
110 volts and the nominal voltage of system number two is 100 volts and the allowed difference of these
systems is specified to be
2 volts, the minimum and maximum voltage of system number two must be 98 and 102 volts, respectively.
When the PT secondary turns ratio of the grid and the generator are the same, “Use Ratio of System 1” is
to be used. For example, if
the PT turns ratio of the grid is 400KV/110V and the turns ratio of the generator is 15.75KV/100V, since
the secondary turns ratio of the two systems is not the same, the user needs to enter the PT secondary
voltage of the generator or
system number two in the “VNom L-LSecondary” field. The characteristic related to the relay is entered
in “Synchronizing Window”. The characteristic entered in this section needs to be in accordance with the
relay settings. The upper and
lower limits of voltage difference and the upper and lower limits of frequency difference are entered in
deltaV, deltaV, “deltaF” and “deltaF” fields, respectively. The relays mostly tend to issue a connect
command in the “Dead Zone” range
that is located between “deltaFmin” and “deltaFmax” parameters. The allowed angle difference of the
system number 2 is entered in “deltaPhi” Nom field and is entered in delta Phi. For example, if the
nominal angle of system number 2 is
30 degrees and the allowed difference is 20 degrees, by going to Vector View window, the user can see
that the allowed connection range is determined to be between 10 to 50 degrees. Also, the allowed
tolerances for different parameters
and the minimum allowed connection time are entered in the fields on the right side. About the voltage
that is being used for the test, it should be noted that the relays measure the applied voltage and if
the nominal voltage is as much
as 110 or 100, the user only needs to apply “VL1-E” and “VL2-E” for systems number 1 and 2 with the same
value to the relay and this can be viewed in the “Hardware Configuration”. For example, if in the
“Protection Device” in the “Connected
Configuration” tab the two systems are set at “L1-L2” mode, by going to the “Hardware Configuration”
window and in the “Analog Output” section, it can be seen that considering the selected mode, two
sources are specified for the voltage
that is being used for the test and that in fact, VL1_E plays the same role as “VL1-L2” of system number
one and “VL2-E” plays the same role as “VL1-L2” of system number two. To better understand this, suppose
that a 110 volts line-to-line
voltage is used for system number 1 and for system number two, a 63.5 volts “VL1-E” phase voltage is
used. To enter the information of such a system, it is necessary to enter “L1-L2” and “L1-E” as the
Connected Voltage for systems number
one and two, respectively. Also, 63.5*√ 3 or 110 volts is entered as the “Vnom L-L” for system number
two. Now, by opening the “Test View” and “Vector View” pages, it can be seen that 63.5 and 110 volts are
entered as the nominal voltage
for systems number two and one, respectively. The next point is that only for system number one it is
possible to select a three-phase voltage because only the Voltage groupA of the device is three-phase
and as for system number two it
is only possible to select a single-phase or line-to-line voltage.
TEST VIEW WINDOW IN SYNCHRONIZER ROOM “Shot test” is the first test that can be performed on
“Synchronizer”. To perform this test, first you need to enter the system 1 characteristics which is a
simulator of the infinite bus and the system
2 characteristics which is a simulator of the generator. The amount of voltage difference, frequency and
angle of systems 1 and 2 are entered in “DeltaVL-L”, “delta F” and “delta Phi” respectively. The amounts
of voltage, frequency and
angle are specified in the column at the right side of this box. Note that it is possible to directly
specify the voltage, frequency and phase values of the system 2 in which case the amount of difference
between the specified values with
their nominal values is displayed in the column on the left side of this box. In performing this test,
the characteristics of system 1 is fixed and for every test point, the characteristics of system 2
change. Other methods to add test
points include clicking on the characteristic curve and selecting “Add” or holding the ctrl key and
clicking on the intended point on the characteristic curve. Finally, after specifying the test point,
the test is performed and in accordance
with that whether the test point is inside the characteristic or outside it, the relay issues connect or
disconnect command. The test point assessment is done in accordance with synchrony or non-synchrony of
“Nom” and “Act” columns in
“Assessment” section in the test point table. The characteristics of system 2 / the test point is
specified in “System2” section. Other options of this section are the same as those of the other
previously mentioned rooms. As an example,
a point inside the connection zone and another point outside this zone are selected. By performing the
test you will see that the relay gives a close command inside the zone and does not connect outside this
zone. The second and the most
important performable test is “Synchronizer”. To perform this test you need 5 outputs from the relay. In
fact, this relay has 5 main outputs and by giving the raiser or lower command for voltage and frequency,
the act of “Synchronizing”
and connecting the unit to the network is done. These outputs, which should be connected to the device
for the test, include “V”, “VM”, “F”, “F” which are used to raise voltage, lower voltage, raise
frequency and lower frequency respectively.
In “Trigger” tab in “Binary Setting” section, the settings of related “Inputs” can be specified. In this
section, to receive the commands such as receive voltage raise command, receive voltage lower command,
receive frequency raise command
and receive frequency lower command, “B1:V”, “B2:V”, “B3:F” and “B3:F” are used respectively. Also
“Close Command” is used to receive the close command from the relay. In performing this test, the inputs
are simulators of governor and
“AVR” which are commanded by the relay. This test in this tab is done in the way that when you select a
test point and run the test, the relay enters the voltage and frequency of system 2 to the closing zone
by giving the voltage and frequency
change commands and finally, gives the close command. About performing this test it should be noted that
it is necessary to enter “Generator Model” in accordance with the system characteristics because the
changes in voltage and frequency
are done in accordance with the pulses sent from the relay and the settings entered in this section. For
example, if “0.1” is entered as “delta V/delta t”, if one one-second pulse is sent from the relay to
decrease the voltage, the voltage
decreases by 100 millivolts. But if a 500-milliseconds pulse is sent, the voltage decreases by
500millivolts. As an example, here a test point is selected and “1v/s” and “100mHz/s” are entered as
“delta V/delta t” and “delta F/delta t”
respectively. By running the test you can see that based on the signals received by the inputs from the
relay, the characteristic enters the connection zone from the outside. As the final point, it is
necessary to know that the time of
each of the tests is specified in “Fault Time” section in “Setting” which, if necessary, can be changed.
AMT VCC ROOM This room is designed to test different relays in the shortest possible time and in the
form of using standard scenarios based on periodic testing regulation of Iranian power grid protection
systems. You will see two windows by
entering to the AMT VCC room. VCC Panel, which is actually the main window for selecting functions and
test management. VCC Report View, will show you the relay test report. In the first step, simply upload
the default template to the
desired relay. This will be done by selecting an icon with the letter L. These templates are available
in two categories for each relay. In the Fast Test section, you will see a limited number of tests. For
example, in quick tests, there
is no transient test. However, by selecting the other option, there will be a complete set of tests in
front of you. As you can see, by loading the template, a variety set of tests for different functions
will be in front of you. In the
Nodes section, you'll see available subcategories to test each function. In the Summary column, a
summary of the test status and whether it is successful or unsuccessful will be displayed. The three
options of Inheriet Xrio, Inherit Hardware
Config and Inherit Report Settings by being active, respectively, will make the user's chosen function
inherit all settings from Xrio, hardware settings and report settings. However, by disabling them, you
can apply the settings to each
one and manually as you wish. The Open UI option will also allow you to manage the opening of the
related window to each test. If you select Advanced View from the above section, more elements such as
test window status, reporting status,
test progress rate, and more will be observed. In the Root subset, the Xrio file is located first. By
selecting this option and clicking the Open option, you can upload the Xrio received from the relay,
which actually fits the active functions
set. You can access the details by clicking on any other option and selecting Open. For example, by
clicking HardwareConfigFile you can view and edit the default hardware configuration for current and
voltage injection, as well as inputs
and outputs of the test device. The Start Note option, which is located before testing each function,
also provides the user with explanations to guide the test further. In this section you can enter the
information that test man guide
during the test. For example, you can place a note in the overcurrent protection function that indicates
the overcurrent protection in your relay is an emergency type and can only be activated by blocking
distance protection and can be
tested. In the top part of the page, you can add or remove tests by clicking Add Item or Remove. For
example, here we remove Switch Onto Fault, Recloser and VTS tests due to the inactivity of these
functions in our relay as well as the
shortening of the testing process. In addition, you can make it possible to change settings or points by
disabling Inheriet Xrio. For example, for overcurrent protection, we applied settings manually and
placed different points on the
characteristic curve than those designed in accordance with XRIO. In the first stage of testing, Wiring
Test is designed to check the current and voltage values injected from the device on the relay to ensure
the correct wiring. Electrical
Test is another option that, with three state including PreFault, Fault and PostFault, checks the relay
conditions in different situations and ensures registering the trip when a fault occurs. As mentioned
above, a set of tests for different
functions is designed in the default template but it is possible to remove, add and manage the tests
accurately for the user. In this way, you can determine the priority of performing different tests,
disable some tests, and even more
precisely, specify which tests to do with what values and in what range. You can check how the test is
designed by clicking on each test and selecting Open. For example, you can view or edit points on the
characteristic by selecting Zone
Reaches for the Distance function. By running the test, you can check different functions. Finally, by
right-clicking on the VccReportView window, you can have a complete management of the items that are
going to be displayed in the report.
For example, here we will perform the Micom P444 relay test in AMT VCC room. In the Configuration
section, you can see the active or inactive status of the functions. In the subset group 1 of settings,
you can also see details about each
function's settings and values. In the PSL relay section, we also configured the inputs, outputs and
leds for different functions. Now it's time to save the XRIO settings file. In the next step, we
re-enter the AMT VCC room and first load
the template related to the P444 relay. Now we prepare different function tests using the XRIO file that
we took from the relay in the previous step. By running the test, you can control the test of different
functions step by step.
INTRODUCING “CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT” ROOM One of the instrument which can be tested by “AMT105” is
current transformer or “CT”. “CTs” are very useful for converting the high current of an electrical
system to a current measurable by relays
and measurement devices. Generally, there are two types of “CTs” including “Measuring” and “Protection”.
The difference between these two types is in their ratio accuracy or accuracy class as well as
saturation level. Since “Measuring”
“CT”s are used in measurement devices, when there is a fault, if the current entered this equipment
increases too much, the equipment might be damaged. But “Protection” “CTs” are used in relays and since
the performance of a relay is in
accordance with the amount of fault current, these “CTs” should be able to move the fault current of the
network to the secondary with the least possible error. In drawing the equivalent circuit of this
transformer, the “CT” turns ratio
is “1:N”. “Rp” and “Xp” equal the “CT” transformed to the secondary while “Xs” and “Rs” indicate the
resistance and “CT” secondary leakage flux. In parallel branch, “Re” and “Rh” are indicators of losses
of eddy current and the hysteresis
respectively and “L” indicates the magnetization inductance or “CT” secondary self-inductance. In the
equivalent “CT” circuit, unlike normal transformers, the parallel branch is located in the secondary
side and this very branch is the
reason for core saturation in high currents. Since the primary resistance and leakage flux in “CT” is
insignificant, “RP”, “XP” and “Xs” can be ignored. By clicking on “Current Transformer CT” on the start
page of the software, the “CT”
test room opens. In tests performable by the “AMT 105”, RCT, saturation curve and the turn’s ratio are
achieved with two methods of voltage or current. Moreover, measurement test of the burden connected to
the “CT” secondary is performable
by this device as well. “Test Object” and “Megger” tabs are used to enter the nominal information of
“CT” and the results of “Megger” test respectively. / “Test Object” Tab: Any module to be able to
perform a test needs some information
about the equipment. This information is entered in “Test Object” section. The general information about
“CT” which should be recorded in the report is entered in “General Information” section. The company’s
title, the country, name and
the address of the substation and installation place of “CT”, title of the manufacturer of “CT”, “Type”
of “CT”, serial number of “CT”, title of the feeder on which “CT” is installed, phase number, “IEC”
standard number written on the
plaque of “CT”, number of cores of “CT”, number of taps of “CT” and additional information are entered
in “Company”, “CT Serial Number”, “Feeder/Bay”, “Phase”, “IEC-ID”, “Core Number”, Tap” and “Additional
Information” fields respectively
to be added to the report. In “Extra Data” section, the test date in A.D., the information of the
performer of the test and the information of the supervisor are entered in “Date”, “Tested By” and
“Approved By” fields respectively. / By
checking “Easy Mode” option in “Accessories” section, the wiring of the tests changes. This wiring is
based on the board designed by Vebko Company for the “CT” test. The mentioned board is located on the
front panel of the device and there
are some relays placed on it which automatically manage the wirings of the front panel of the device
which makes performing the test easier. The main information of the “CT” which has influence on the
calculations of knee point and evaluation
of the tests are entered in “Test Setting” section. The CT core type is selected from among “Measuring”
and “Protection” in “Core Type” field. The accuracy class of the “CT” is specified in “Class” field. If
the type of “CT” is “Measuring”,
the accuracy classes available in drop-down field such as “0.5s” mean that in 100 to 120 percent of the
nominal current crossing the primary “CT”, there may be measurement fault up to this percentage max. If
the “CT” is “Protection” there
are different accuracy classes one of which is selected according to the “CT” type and the information
required for every “CT” is displayed in “Nominal Values” section. / For example, if “10P or 10Pr” is
selected as accuracy class, based
on “ALF” in “CT”, there may be up to 10 percent error in “ALF” times the primary nominal current. This
means that if the “ALF” for a “CT” with an accuracy class of “10P” is “20”, in 20 times of the nominal
current in the “CT” primary,
if the nominal “Burden” is connected to its secondary, there may be up to 10 percent measurement
deviation. In “Applied Standard” field, the standard used for the “CT” is determined. In “Class
Multiplier” field, a factor is entered between
“0.2” and “1” to be multiplied by accuracy class. This factor makes the “CT” accuracy class harder in
turns ratio test. This means that if the “CT” accuracy class equals “10P” and its accuracy factor equals
“0.8”, the maximum “CT” error
in “ALF” times the primary nominal current is 8 percent. / In “Nominal Values” section, the nominal
values are entered according to the type and class of the “CT”. Primary current, secondary current,
nominal frequency, apparent power and
secondary resistance in the temperature specified on its plaque usually 75 degrees are entered in their
related fields. “Fs” or “Security Factor” indicates the measuring “CT” security factor and is defined as
the ratio of instrument limit
primary current to the rated primary current. Note that the actual “Fs” value is dependent on the burden
of the “CT”. If the burden connected to the “CT” is lower than its nominal burden, the “Fs” value is
increased and the “CT” is saturated
in higher current. For example, when the “Fs” of a “CT” is “5”, this “CT” is saturated in 5 times the
nominal current. / “ALF” or “Accuracy Limit Factor” is defined as the proportion of accuracy limit of
the primary current to the nominal
current. The value of actual “ALF” is dependent to the burden connected to the protective “CT” secondary
and its value decreases as the value of the connected “Burden” increases. “CT” Power factor, apparent
power of the actual burden connected
to the “CT” and the ambient temperature which equals 25C are entered in “Cos phi”, “Actual Burden” and
“Ambient Temperature” fields respectively. If the “CT” accuracy level is “X or PX”, “PXR”, “TPX”, “TPY”
and “TPZ”, options such as “Exciting
Current Ie”, “Kssc”, “Rb”, etc. are added to “Nominal Values” section which should be entered from the
“CT” plaque. This information is used to estimate the knee point for excitation test. To view how these
parameters work you can go to
“Excitation Test” tab and by holding the “Mouse” pointer on the estimated knee voltage, view its
relation. / / In “Winding Material” field in “Temperature Correction” section, the material used in the
coils is selected from among “Copper”
and “Aluminum”. In “Winding Temp” field, the current temperature of the “CT” coil is entered. Also, in
“Reference Temp.” field, the reference temperature is entered to measure the resistance value of the
coils so it can be used to correct
the values measured in different temperatures. Normally, the reference temperature is written on the
“CT” plaque in front of the secondary coil resistance which usually equals 75 degrees. In “Correction
Factor” field, the temperature correction
factor is calculated in accordance with the ambient temperature, reference temperature as well as the
material of the coil which is not editable. In some cases, in the “Test Sheet” which comes with the
“CT”, the coil resistance is measured
in a temperature other than the one mentioned on the plaque. If you wish to enter the value of this
resistance, by checking “R Man.Ref.Temp.” option, you can enter the resistance. In this case, this
resistance and its temperature are considered
as the reference and are added to the results table in the “R Man.Ref.Temp.” column in “Resistance Test”
tab that the temperature which is measured by the manufacturer is based on the resistance and is
measured and showed in this test.
/ The number entered in “RMS Accuracy” box in “Number of Period” field, shows the number of cycles used
for calculation. By default, this number is set at “1”. As the number of cycle’s increases, the software
uses more cycles in “AC” mode
and more time in “DC” mode for calculations. By doing so, the number of calculations increases and the
software speed is decreased but the result of the test will be more precise. / By clicking “Add to
Report” option at the bottom of the
page, this information is added to the report and then a message saying “The Report was added to the
list” is displayed. By selecting “Report” window from the right side strip, it is possible to view the
report. By clicking on “Delete
Report”, the report added from “Report” window is removed from “Delete from Report” window. If “Set as
default” option is selected, the entered information is saved and set as default and by opening “Current
Transformer CT” room, this
information is displayed. For the instructional videos of this section, a 10P10 protective CT with 500/1
as turns ratio, 50 Hz as frequency and 15 VA as Burden is going to be tested. /
“SECONDARY BURDEN” TEST In this test, the “Burden” connected to the secondary “CT” is measured. In
this test, by injecting the AC” current, and measuring “AC” voltage by using the “Binary/Analog Input”
and dividing voltage by current, the
value of “Z” and impedance angle and consequently “R” and “X” of the secondary route are achieved. To
perform this test, the time and current of the test are entered in “State setting” section, in “I test”
and “State Time” fields respectively.
The specified current limitation for this field is “32” amps but a “5” amps current for “5”amp “CTs” and
a maximum “1” amp current for “1”amp “CTs” would be enough. After entering the “State Setting”
information, the wiring should be done
in accordance with the illustration shown. Note that by double-clicking on the picture you can maximize
it. To perform this test, first, you need to disconnect the “CT” from all parts that connect the current
to measurement equipment.
In this wiring, you should short circuit “Ia1” and “Ib1” current output phases and connect “Ia2” and
“Ib2” phases to the route through which the “CT” current is transferred. / / / / / / / Also, to measure
the “AC” voltage, you should connect
the “Binary/Analog input”1 to the test route and further than the current injection connectors. Note
that before performing the test it is necessary to press “Init Test” so that the device is configured
automatically. By clicking on this
option, the current and time settings of the test as well as the hardware settings related to “Hardware
Configuration” including the device outputs and “Binary/Analog Inputs” are configured by the software
automatically. In “Analog Output”
tab in “Hardware Configuration” section, you can see that the wiring of the device is set at “32A” with
the maximum “Burden” of “400VA” and the “Binary/Analog” inputs 1 is activated for measuring the voltage.
To better analyze the test,
“Table View”, “Detail View” and “Signal View” windows can be used. After opening “Table View” window you
can see that a “State” with the frequency of “50Hz” and in accordance with the entered information is
made in “State Setting” section.
If you wish to view a more complete set of information of “Table View”, you need to use “Detail View”
window. / / / / / / / / / / Performing the test and analyzing the results After doing the wirings, here,
“1” amp and “2” seconds are
entered as the current and time of the test respectively and after pressing “Init Test” the test will
run. In “Signal View”, it is possible to view the actual current waveform and the voltage measured by
“Binary Input”. By using the “Actual”
values waveforms and the voltages recorded in “Signal View” it is possible to check the connections of
the connectors. The results of the test can be viewed in “Result” section after the test is finished.
The results include “linj”, the
amount of injected current, “Vmeas”, the measured voltage, the impedance of the route, angle of the
impedance and finally the values of “R” and “X” are displayed using “Z Cos phi” and “Z Sin phi”
relations. In “Actual Burden” field, the
amount of power which can be provided by the “CT” secondary in nominal current is measured and the
result is displayed in this field by the software. In the end, after the test is finished, it is
necessary to add the results of the evaluation
to the report, which is done by selecting “Add to Report” in equipment test. / / / / Also, if you wish
to add specific parts of the evaluation to the report or edit the report, you need to use “Add to
Report” cog. By clicking on this cog,
the items that can be added to the “Report” are displayed and you can simply uncheck whichever you wish
to remove from the report. Note that after each test, the results are not added to the report
automatically and it is necessary to
add the results of the performed test to the output report by selecting “Add to Report” after each test
and before clearing the Test. Note that if the “Burden” of the route is low and you wish to have a more
precise measurement or the
“Binary Inputs” number 1 and 2 are faulty, it is necessary to change the specified “Binary/Analog
Input”. To do this, first press “Init Test”, then check “Don’t Change Hardware Setting” option and go to
“Hardware Configuration” window,
specify a different binary for the measurement in “Binary/Analog Input” tab. Here, as an example “Input”
number 10 is selected and after adjusting the required settings, the test is performed and the results
are viewed. If you wish to
select one of the binaries “1” to “8”, it is necessary to enter their “Binary Input Target” in
accordance with the number of the intended binary. For example, to use the binary number “7”, “Bin7”
should be selected as “Binary Input Target”
while for binary number “5”, “Bin5” should be selected. / / / / / / Two notable points in performing a
test are that “Error Other” means that there is a problem in the connection of the wirings or the
resistance of the current route is
too high that the device is not able to provide the “Burden” needed to inject the current. Therefore, in
case of facing this error, check the “Actual” value of the current from “Signal View”. If the current is
injected from the device
“Actual Current” but difference with the specified current is too high, the indicator of high resistance
of the route and that the “Actual Current” equals zero indicates that the current injection route is
open. If the route resistance
is too high, the test current should be decreased and if the “Actual Current” equals zero, the
connectors’ connection should be checked. The other point is that the voltage read by the binaries of
the device need to have similar cycles.
If the read values have a too high or zero tolerance, this means that the connectors are not connected
correctly. /
WINDING RESISTANCE TEST Winding resistance test is performed in “Resistance Test” tab. In this test
by injecting “DC” current into “CT” secondary and measuring the voltage through “Binary Input” and
dividing the voltage by current, the “DC”
resistance or “Rmeas” is calculated. Note that in the software there is a row by default. If the “CT”
has more taps, by right-clicking and selecting “Add” you can make as many taps as the rows and test each
tap. To perform this test you
need to enter the current and time in “State Setting” section in “I test” and “State Time” fields
respectively. The current limitation is “32” amps but a “5” amps current for “5”amp “CTs” and a “1” amp
current for “1” amp “CTs” would be
enough. / After entering the information, you need to set the wiring according to the figure. Note that
by double-clicking on the picture you can maximize it. In this wiring, first short circuit “Ia1” and
“Ib1” then parallel “Ia2” and
“Ib2” with the capacitor box and here you need to connect “Ia2” to “S1” of the “CT” and connect “Ib2” to
“S2” after. The reason for using the capacitor box is to compensate the self-inductor effect of the
“CT”. There are 3 “1000” microfarad
capacitors in this box and the red port is the positive polarity while the black port negative polarity
of the capacitor. To measure the “DC” voltage, you should connect the “Input1” to the “CT” and further
from the current connectors.
Then, connect the output current which has been paralleled with the capacitor to the “CT”. Note that to
perform the test you should to right-click on one of the rows and select “Apply Test”. By doing this,
the current and time settings
as well as the hardware settings related to the “Hardware Configuration” including the outputs and
“Binary/Analog Inputs” are adjusted automatically. In “Analog Output” tab in “Hardware Configuration”
section you can see that the wiring
settings is set at “32A” with a “400” Volt-amperes burden and the “Binary/Analog Input1” is activated to
measure the voltage. To better analyze the test you can use “Table View”, “Detail View” and “Signal
View”. After opening “Table View”,
you can see that two zero frequency states are made by the information of “State Setting”. The first
state is used so that the “CT” current exits the transient state and turns constant. The second state is
used to measure the current and
voltage and to measure the resistance. Now if you wish to view more information, use “Detail View”
window. / / / Performing the Test and Analyzing the Results After wiring, “1” amp and “2” seconds are
entered as test current and time and
10 RMS Accuracy is selected as time period and by right-clicking on one of the rows and selecting “Apply
Test” the test is initiated. Note that in “Signal View”, the waveform of the actual current and the
voltage measured by “Binary Input”
is viewable. By using “Signal View” and the recorded current and voltage waveforms, it is possible to
analyze the test and by using the “Actual” values and the recorded voltages, examine the connection of
the connectors. / After the test
is finished, by selecting the row in “Result”, it is easily possible to view the test results. The
results include “Vdc”, the injected current, “Rnom” or “Max Rct”, the resistance measured in the current
temperature, the resistance measured
in the reference temperature and “Rdev” of the difference between “Rcorr” and “Rnom” in terms of
percent. In “Correction Factor”, the current ambient temperature and the reference temperature as well
as the material of the coil calculate
correction factor. The information of this temperature is entered in “Reference Winding” field in “Test
Object” and “Rcorr” is calculated by multiplying the “Rmeas” value by the “Correction Factor”. /
Sometimes it is possible that in the
CT test sheet, the resistance is measured in a temperature other than the one mentioned in the plate. If
you wish to enter this resistance, you need to check “R Man. Ref. Temp.”. By doing so, this resistance
and its temperature are considered
as the reference. By doing this, in “Resistance Test” tab, “Temp. Manufacturer” column is added to the
results table. In this column the temperature measured by the factory is calculated. In the end, after
performing the test, if “Rcorr”
is smaller than “Rnom”, the “Assessment” is passed, in otherwise it fails. After the assessment, you
should add the results to the report via “Add to Report” in equipment test. / Also if you wish to add
some specific parts to the report
or delete and edit the report, you can use the “Add to Report” cog. By clicking on it, you can check the
items that should be added to the report or if you don’t need them you can uncheck them. Note that after
performing each test, the
results are not automatically added to the report and it is necessary to add the results to the output
report by selecting “Add to Report” after each test and before clearing the test. / In performing the
test, note that in “Voltage Measurement
Mode”, you need to select one of the radio-buttons in accordance with the maximum resistance specified
in “Max Resistance” column. If during the test in the default mode an over voltage error appears, select
“Bin01” with a maximum of “8”
volts. If the measured resistance is less than the maximum resistance of the “Bin10”, use the “Input” 10
for more accuracy. Also, if you wish to use a different wiring for the current, select “Apply Test” at
least one time before. Then
check “Don’t Change Hardware Setting” and select your desired wiring in “Hardware Configuration” and
then select “Apply Test” again. / / Two notable points are that “Error Other” shows that there is a
problem in the wirings or resistance
is too high that the device is not able to provide the “Burden” to inject the current. Therefore, if
this error appeared, examine the actual value of the current in the “Signal View”. If the current is
injected “Actual Current” but its
difference with the set current is too much, the wiring resistance is too high and if “Actual Current”
is zero, the route is open. If the resistance is too high, the current should be decreased and if the
“Actual Current” equals zero,
you need to examine the connections. The other point is that if the measured voltage is zero or has too
high tolerances, it means that the connectors are not connected correctly. / /
“EXCITATION TEST” TAB, PART 1 Transformer Saturation: Before talking about the Excitation test, it
is necessary to review some important subjects related to analyzing behavior of transformers including
equivalent circuit and some electric
and electromagnetic analyses. You can see a transformer equivalent circuit in the figure. In this
circuit, “RP” and “RS” refer to the primary and secondary coils resistance respectively which occur as
heat loss and increase in the temperature
of the coil. “XP” and “XS”, on the other hand, indicate a part of the flux whose path is through air and
is known as “leakage Flux”. / In the parallel branch, “Rc” is the indicator of core loss including eddy
current and Hysteresis losses
which occur as increase in the temperature of the core. The reason for parallelism of “RC” is that the
losses caused by it are in accordance with the square of the input voltage. “Xm” indicates magnetizing
inductance of the wires wrapped
around the core of the transformer. / Transformer Loading and Its Effect on Transformer Saturation When
the transformer is put “on-load”, it causes the secondary current to increase. When it happens, the flux
caused by the secondary coil
increases as well. Also, after the secondary current increases, the primary current increases as well
which leads to an increase in the flux of the primary side. But since the changes in the secondary side
current are bigger, the flux
of the secondary side will be more than the primary side. Because of the influence of the opposite side
of these two in the equivalent flux of the transformer core, the flux of the transformer decreases. / As
a result, while the load drawn
from the terminals of the power transformer increases, the core recedes from the saturation area.
Therefore, in full-load it is possible to use a small core for the transformer, but since transformer is
not always used in nominal load,
by reducing the core, the decrease in the load, leads to the saturation of transformer. Therefore, to
avoid transformer saturation in light load and change the waveform from sine wave, it is necessary to
extend the transformer core. CT
Saturation Curve As mentioned before, the power transformer recedes from saturation by increasing the
current whereas CT gets closer to the saturation area. The reason for this is related to the voltage of
parallel branch where, in the
power transformer by increasing the current, voltage of the parallel branch decrease. However, in “CT”,
by increasing the current, the voltage of the parallel branch in the secondary side increases and the
“CT” saturates. / “CT” saturation
in a power system is caused by increase in the primary current because of occurrence of a fault, which
disables the “CT” to move the fault current to the secondary with the correct ratio. Since the
saturation point of “CT” is related to
voltage and parallel branch current, while doing this test, the secondary voltage increases and the
point where by increasing the voltage by 10 percent, the drawn current increases by 50 percent is
considered as the saturation point. In
future videos the ways to enter the values and do the test for different “CT”s will be provided. / /
“EXCITATION TEST” TAB, PART 2 To perform this test, the first parameter to be entered is the “CT”
secondary resistance. This resistance is used to estimate the knee point and is selected from “Max RCT”
field by default. But if the resistance
test has already been done, this resistance is selected from “Rmeas”. Note that, since some users skip
the resistance test and try to directly perform this test, this field can be edited manually. / In the
"Efs" field, the knee point is
estimated using the formula. The importance of this number is in calculating "Vend" to determine the
final voltage of test evaluation. The assessment of this test is based on the finding of the knee point,
so that if the knee point is
found, the test is "Passed" and otherwise "Failed". Once the resistance value has been specified, the
test settings is entered in "State Setting". If "Demagnetize" option is ticked, before performing the
test evaluation, the software once
demagnetizes the "CT" with "AC" voltage and current. so that the residual flux caused by theresistance
test is removed. In this section, you must enter the time "Demagnetize" and voltage in a percentage of
"Vend". / In the next step if
“Calc. from Test Object” is checked, the software calculates the frequency and final voltage of the test
by using the information entered in “Test Object”. If you wish to enter this manually, you should
uncheck this option. In “Excitation
Time Test” field, the test time is entered. Note that, it is possible to show the saturation curve with
less fluctuation by increasing the test time. In “Choose Current Measurement Mode” section, it is
possible to specify the maximum current
from among “Low Current” with maximum 500 milliamps and “High Current” with maximum 800milliamps. Note
that by selecting any of these options, the wiring changes. / Performing the Test and Analyzing the
Results In this test, the test information
is entered is this page in accordance with the information entered in “Test Object” and the performed
resistance test. Also, the wiring is done according to the CT specifications which are different for
different models of “CTs”. Note
that in this wiring, output voltages is connected to the capacitor positive output and it is necessary
that the two negative polarities of the capacitors are connected to each other. Then the positive
polarity of the second capacitor is
attached to the "S1" "CT" and the "S2" is connected to the device. It should also be noted that series
capacitors are used to filter the “DC” voltage of the device. By pressing “Init Test”, the needed
“States” are created in “Table View”
and the necessary changes are automatically applied in “Signal View”. Note that the voltage is displayed
in “Signal View” in form of “RMS” and it is possible to change the view to sine by selecting
“Instantaneous” option. After performing
the test, in “Signal View” you can see that first the “CT” is demagnetized and then the excitation test
begins. In “Lissajous” tab, the saturation curve can be viewed in terms of voltage and current. In this
curve the linear area between
the two plus signs is depicted in pink. After finishing the test, the knee point and the saturation
point are depicted with green and the results and the evaluation are recorded in “Excitation Result”
section. Since in performing this
test the saturation curve points are of significance too, by selecting “Add to Report” option, the
points used for the test are added to the report. / Another important point in an excitation test is the
current which passes the primary
of “CT” and causes the saturation. Since this current is related to the CT connected resistance, in
“Calculation of Iprimary” section, the connected resistance should be entered in “RL” field and then
view the current that causes the CT
saturation in “Iprim” field. Here you can see the formula used to calculate this current. / If you wish
to set the wiring in a way other than the suggested way, after clicking on “Init Test”, check “Don’t
Change Hardware Setting”, then
make your desired changes and initiate the test. Note that if before finding the saturation and knee
points, an “Overcurrent” error is displayed, the wiring needs to be changed from “Low Current” to “High
Current” and then initiate the
test after pressing “Init Test”. If again before finding the knee point the device is displaying an
overcurrent error, this means that the knee point current is higher than the Range of the device and it
is not possible to find the knee
point using this device. /
CT “EXCITATION TEST”, PART 3 Saturation phenomenon and non-linear behavior in transformer As you
know, inductor is a linear element but if its voltage exceeds a specific limit, the inductor is
saturated and enters the non-linear area. What
we mean by saturation of the inductor is the saturation of its core. In fact, when the voltage exceeds
the threshold, the core loses its ability to pass more flux and so it is saturated and the inductor
turns non-linear. But by drawing
the saturation curve of a “CT”, you can see that there is also a non-linear area in the lower voltages.
Up to now we have said that in higher voltages the inductor becomes excited and turns non-linear. To
explain non-linear area in a lower
voltage, the parallel circuit of a “CT” is drawn. In this parallel circuit, the turns ratio of the “CT”
which is a transformer is “1:N”. “Rs” indicate the resistance of the “CT”. In the parallel branch,
“Reddy” and “Rh” stand for Foucault
and hysteresis losses of the coil and L stands for the magnetizing inductance of the “CT” secondary. To
perform the excitation test, secondary of the “CT” is fed by voltage and check to see what non-linear
element is causing the “CT” to
show a non-linear behavior even in lower voltages. / / As mentioned before, the losses of core include
Foucault and hysteresis. Therefore, to analyze the non-linear behavior of the transformer, we need to
examine the Foucault and hysteresis
losses. Foucault losses are caused by Eddy Current which occurs in the core segment because of
time-varying flux in the core and voltage induction. Since the flux is directly dependent on the
voltage, we can say that the Foucault losses
are the result of a pure resistance. The relation of the Foucault losses is achieved through an
empirical method and is as you can see: / In this relation, “B” is the flux density which equals “V/f”.
By substituting this relation, Foucault
losses can be rewritten as Pf= V2/Re. / From this relation it can be deduced that the Foucault losses
are caused by a fixed resistance that are not dependent on voltage and cannot be the reason for the
non-linear behavior of the transformer
in lower voltages. So, it is only possible that the hysteresis losses are the reason for the non-linear
behavior in the “CT”. Hysteresis losses occur in the core due to the residual magnetism. This means that
passing of the magnetic flux
through the metal core in a direction causes the core to be magnetized and turn into a weak magnet; so
in the next half-cycle, a small amount of energy is lost to remove the magnetic effect of the previous
half-cycle and this is being
constantly repeated. The empirical relation of hysteresis is as you can see: / / The value of “x”
depends on the material of the core and can vary from 1.5 to 2.5. Also, in this relation, “B” is the
flux density which equals “V/f” and
by substituting it, the Hysteresis losses can be rewritten as you can see: / From the resulted relation,
it is obvious that the hysteresis resistance is non-linear and dependent on the its voltage / The effect
of this resistance in the
total equivalent resistance of the “CT” in the lower voltages is significant. But from a specific
voltage upwards, the effect of this resistance decreases and causes the “CT” current and voltage
relation to approach linearity. This causes
the relation between voltage and current to be non-linear in a specific range in the lower voltages. /
CT EXCITATION TEST, PART 4 Saturation Point and Frequency Variation As mentioned earlier, the core
losses include eddy current and hysteresis and its model is as you can see here: Pf= Ke V2 Ph=Kh* Vx
/fx-1= Ph= Kh * f1-x * Vx-2 * V2 Pc= Pe
+ Ph = Ke V2 + Kh * f1-x * Vx-2 * V2 By using this relation, we can obtain the Foucault and hysteresis
resistance models which Foucault resistance model is linear and independent from the voltage while
hysteresis resistance model is non-linear
and dependent on the voltage. Re=1/Ke Rh= 1/ Kh * f1-x * Vx-2 If voltage is fed from the secondary side,
since Rct and the current drawn from the source is clear, the voltage of the parallel branch is
calculated using: E= Vterminal –RCT
* I After calculating E, the core losses are calculated using: Pc= E*I *Cos phi By having the core
losses value and its extended formula Pc= Ke V2 + Kh * f1-x * Vx-2 * V2 It is possible to calculate Ke,
Kh and X by solving the three equations
in the three variables system. To solve these equations, it is possible to apply three different
voltages. But if the frequency is the same, its determinant turns zero and no answer can be obtained for
the variables. Therefore, it is better
to apply one of the voltages with a different frequency. In the first step of solving these equations
with V1 and f1 as voltage and frequency, Ke and Kh*f1-x parameters can be obtained using a two equations
in the two variables system.
Pc1= Ke V12 + Kh * f11-x * V1x-2 * V12 Pc2= Ke V22 + Kh * f11-x * V2x-2 * V22 Now, if one of the
voltages is applied along with f2 as the frequency, “x” is obtained and by substituting it in Kh*f1-x,
Kh obtained achieved as well. By specifying
these parameters, the resistance of Foucault and Hysteresis obtained. Pc2= Ke V22 + Kh * f11-x * V2x-2 *
V22 Pc3= Ke V2^2 + Kh * f21-x * V2x-2 * V22 Due to voltage application limit for CTs with a very high
saturation point, it is possible
to find the saturation point in the nominal frequency by decreasing the voltage and frequency with the
same proportion. Because the relation of the according flux is V/f. But does not changing the frequency
change the CT system? To explain
this subject, we need to examine those components of the CT that are affected if the frequency and
voltage are changed. According to previous analyses, Rct is dependent on the material of the wire and
Reddy to the material of the coil.
In Xm branch, due to the proportional change of V and f and the stability of the flux, this branch
remains unchanged as well. Therefore, the only parameter affected by the voltage and frequency is
hysteresis resistance which was obtained.
Rh= 1/ Kh * f1-x * Vx-2 Now suppose that to obtain the saturation point, the fed voltage and frequency
are split in two. Is it possible to obtain the saturation point in the nominal frequency by multiplying
the voltage and current by two?
This will be clarified later. Suppose that the CT knee point is obtained by decreasing the frequency to
25 Hz with 500 volts of voltage and 15 milliamps of current. The voltage of the parallel branch is
obtained using: EExc = Vterminal
- Rct IExc Since now we have Ke، Kh and x, by dividing EExc by Reddy and Rh, Ia and Ih currents are
calculated. By subtracting these two from IExc, the self-inductor current is obtained. According to this
relation, Phi=L* I when the flux
is fixed, the self-inductor current is fixed as well. Therefore, by doubling the voltage of the parallel
branch, this current remains fixed. After doubling the voltage and frequency, as it is shoawn in this
formula. Ieddy=2 Exct /Reddy
Ih= 2 EExc /1/ Kh * f1-x * Vhx-2 = 2 EExc * Kh * 501-x * 2EExc x-2 Ie= 2 EExc * Ke The Foucault and
hysteresis currents are calculated and added by self-inductor current to achieve lExc using this
relation. Then, the voltage of the parallel
branch which is 25Exc is added to Rct* lExc and the terminal voltage is obtained. Decreasing the
Frequency and Performing the Test: As you know, the maximum output voltage of a device in one-phase mode
is “450” volts. Usually, to avoid
damaging the measuring equipment, measuring CTs go to saturation in low voltages. But the saturation
voltage of some protection CTs such as “TPX”, “TPY” and “TPZ” is too high and usually this saturation
point voltage is beyond the ability
of the device. To test these CTs, it is possible to increase the voltage until the CT goes to saturation
but some scientific references suggest that high voltages must not be fed into CTs because high voltages
can damage the insulation
resistance of the equipment. Another method for excitation test in CTs with too high saturation voltage
is to decrease the frequency. This method is also mentioned in the standard CT excitation test, which
can be performed with an “AMT105”
device. As you saw, the knee point of a 5P10 protection CT in 50 Hz frequency was measured to be about
159 volts. If you wish to specify the value of the final voltage and injected frequency manually, you
need to uncheck “Calc. from Test
Object” option and fill “Frequency” and “V end” fields. For example, “25 Hz” and “186 volts” are entered
as frequency and final voltage respectively which means “372 volts” in “50 Hz” frequency. Note that by
changing the voltage, it is
so much probable that the wirings change as well. In this method, “Demagnetize” option is checked by
default so that the magnetic residue is removed and the aforementioned calculations are done. / / After
adjusting this settings and specifying
the test time, click on “Init Test” to initiate the test. As you can see in the “Signal View”, by
decreasing the frequency and equating, the knee point is almost equal with what was measured in 50 Hz
frequency. Therefore, in cases where
the CT saturation point voltage is beyond the limit of the device, by decreasing the frequency, you can
measure the knee point and its saturation. /
OTHER TESTS PERFORMABLE IN “EXCITATION TEST” TAB By checking “Extra Data”, the additional
information obtained from the excitation test is displayed. In the table of this section, the drawn
current is displayed in EFS with 110 percent. Moreover,
in “Custom” row it is possible to enter the voltage and view the current drawn in that voltage. For
example, the current drawn in a 50 volt is … amps. “Ratio Table” In fact, this table is the standard
turns ratio table which is completed
by the software during the excitation test. Note that this table is completed using voltage turns ratio
and in different burdens. Let us use a numerical example to explain how this section works. To begin the
calculations, suppose that
“Burden= 15 VA”, Current equals 0.5ln, power factor equals 0.8 and CT resistance equals 2 ohms. To
create the nominal burden in CT nominal current, we can suppose that a 12 ohm resistance is connected to
the two ends of the terminal. 15VA
* 0.8 = 12 VA = 1* 12 According to the equivalent circuit, in 0.5ln or 0.5 amp current, voltage of the
parallel branch is achieved from EExc = Rct+RL * I = 2+12*0.5= 7 V According to the equivalent circuit,
using the relation, voltage
of the primary side is achieved as 7*1/500 =14mV. This number is the voltage which is in half of the
nominal current to be measured in the primary. Therefore, to fill the 1.5ln and 15VA cells, the software
needs to create the 7volt in
the the parallel secondary branch and measure its equivalent in the primary and finally, compare the
measured value with the applied value. To create a 7 volt in the parallel branch, the device and the
software need to apply "Vterminal"
voltage to the CT in accordance with the displayed relation. Vterminal= EEXC+Rct* I= Vterminal = 7+ 2*I
Since the current loaded from the device can be viewed at any moment, the voltage of the device to
create the 7 volt parallel branch
is obtained. The mentioned process is repeated for all cells of this table and the turns ratio error,
phase displacement, composite error and “ALF” are calculated for different burdens. To perform this
test, after doing the wiring for
excitation test, it is necessary to connect the CT primary to inputs 1 and 10 and run the test after
pressing “Init Test”. You will see that after the test is finished, the turns ratio obtained from “Ratio
Table” is displayed in “N Turn”.
Other than this “Pol.Check”, the tables related to this section are completed and the those cells that
have error values beyond the allowed range are highlighted in red and displayed in “Error List” section.
In the last table, “ALF” is
calculated and displayed in different burdens. Resistance Measurement By checking “Rdc”, the winding
resistance is measured using the voltage application and current measurement method. For this test, the
capacitors are “Bypassed” using
the binary output 1 and DC voltage is applied to the CT. Afterwards, input 5 is connected to the “CT”
using binary output 3 and the actual voltage of the CT are measured. As you saw, during the process of
resistance measurement, Binary
outputs are closed. In the end, the resistance is measured.
CT RATIO AND POLARITY TEST WITH CURRENT METHOD To perform a ratio and polarity test you should use
“Ratio and Polarity Test With Current” tab. In this tab, turns ratio, polarity and phase deviation
between “CT” primary and secondary is performed
where “AC” current is injected and the secondary current is measured through “Input9”. To perform this
test, you need to enter the current and time of the test in “State Setting”, in “I test” and “State
Time” fields respectively. Before
initiating the test some points must be considered. / The first point is that the current limit is “128”
amps while the “Binary/Analog Input9” limit is “500” milliamps. But since in sometimes the “CT”
secondary current exceeds “500” milliamps
which damages the “Input9”, “Icalc” is limited to “450” milliamps. This means that you can increase the
primary as much as that “Icalc” does not exceed “450” milliamps. The second point is that if the route
resistance is too high and the
device is not able to provide the needed “Burden”, to perform the test you should decrease the
resistance. To do so, you can parallel “4” pieces of wire. The third point is that if even by using “4”
pieces of wire the problem is not solved,
you need to decrease the current. Note that the test current must be based on the standard because the
software uses that to assess the test. The table made in this section is the basic standard for test
assessment where the allowed turns
ratio error and phase deviation are specified in percent and “minute” for classes of protection and
measurements “CTs”. In turns ratio section, the allowed error for different percentages of nominal
current and in the “phase” section allowed
error is specified in minute. For example, for a “Measuring CT” with the class of “0.5”, in “5” percent
of the nominal current, “1.5” percent turns ratio and “90” minutes of phase deviation error are allowed.
But in “Protection” mode,
the maximum error is determined independently from the primary current. For example, for a “Protection
CT” with the accuracy class of “10P10”, the maximum allowed turns ratio error is “3” percent and there
is no limitation mentioned for
phase deviation. / After entering the information in “State Setting”, you should set the wiring
according to the picture. In this wiring ,short circuit “Ia1”, “Ib1”, “Ia2” and “Ib2” together and
“Ia3”, “Ib3”, “Ia4” and “Ib4” together and
then according to the picture, connect a wire to “Ia1” and “Ib4” phases after passing it through the
“CT”. To measure the secondary current, connect “Input9” to “S1” and “S2”. After wiring, for “CT
Protection 500/1”, “10” percent of the
nominal current which equals “50” amps and “1” seconds as time are entered and the test runs after “Init
Test” is pressed. You can view the “States” created by the software in “Table View”. If “At Calibration
State” is checked, in the
first state with zero current, the secondary is measured and is deducted from the final result. The
second state is the same as the specified test current. Note that if “At Calibration State” is not
checked, the noise is not removed from
the response. In “Signal View” section, the waveform of the specified current along with its “Actual”
values and the current measured by “Input9” can be viewed. After the test is finished, the results can
be viewed in “Turns Ratio Results”.
“Icalc” is the secondary current calculated by the software in accordance with the turns ratio entered
in “Test Object” and the “Itest”. “Iactual” is the actual value of the injected current, “Imeas” is the
measured current and “Turns
Ratio Nom” is the “CT” nominal turns ratio. “Turns Ratio Act” is measured by comparing “Imeas” and
“Iactual” and finally, the assessment is recorded in “Assessment” field in accordance with the
difference between “Turns Ratio Act” and
“Turns Ratio Nom”; if “Deviation act.” is less than the value specified in the standard, the test
“Passes” otherwise it fails. Here, since the fault percentage is less than the value specified in the
standard, the test is “Passed”. / In
“Phase” section, In “Phase Nom” and “Phase Act” the nominal phase deviation and the measured phase
deviation are specified respectively. In “Phase Dev”, by comparing “Phase act” and “Phase nom”, the
error in terms of minutes is calculated
and the assessment is specified in “Assessment” field. In “Polarity” section, “Pol.Check” field assesses
the validity of the polarity. And in the end, after the test is performed, it is necessary to add the
results of the assessment to
the report which is done by selecting “Add to Report”. / If to perform the test in higher currents or to
have more valid results, you wish to perform the test “Manually”, you should set “Choose Measurement
Mode” at “Manual” mode and according
to the picture, use an ammeter. After checking “Manual”, “Imeas” is editable and you can manually change
its number. By entering this value, the software calculates the error and displays it. Note that in
“Manual” mode it is only possible
to perform the turns ratio test. After selecting “Manual” mode, connect the connectors of the “CT” to
the ammeter and set the test time at “5” seconds. Then press “Init Test” to perform the test. After the
test is finished, enter the number
read by the ammeter in “Imeas” field so that the device can assess the test based on this value. In the
end, after the test is finished, if you need to add the test results to the report, you can do that by
selecting “Add to Report”. /
Two notable points are that first, “Error Other” means that there is a problem in the connections or the
route resistance is too high that the device is not able to provide the “Burden” need for current.
Therefore, if you faced this error
you should check the “Actual” value from “Signal View”. If the current is injected “Actual Current” but
its difference with the specified current is too much, this means that the resistance is too high and if
the “Actual Current” is zero,
it means that the current injection route is open. If the route resistance is too high, the test current
should be decreased or using several parallel routes and if the “Actual Current” is zero, the
connections should be examined. The
next point is that the current read by the device needs to have similar cycles. If the read values have
too high tolerances or the tolerance is zero, it means that the connectors are not connected correctly.
CT RATIO AND POLARITY TEST WITH VOLTAGE To perform ratio test you can use the “Ratio and Polarity
Test With Voltage” tab too. In this tab, tests including turns ratio, polarity and phase movement
between “CT” primary and secondary with voltage
are performed. In performing these tests, “AC” voltage is applied to “CT” secondary and the primary
voltage is measured through “Analog Input”. To perform this test, you need to enter test voltage and
time in “Vtest” and “State Time” fields
in “State Setting” respectively. Note that this test must be performed after excitation test because the
applied voltage must be in the “CT” linear areas. Before starting the test, some points must be taken
into account. First: in this
test, the voltage is applied form the secondary and measured from the primary. Two: if you wish to
remove the noise from the result, check “At Calibration State” option. By checking this option in a
“State” before the test, the “Input”
voltage is measured and deducted from the result. / Generally, in “Table View” you can view the “States”
that are created by the software. As you can see 5 “States” are created. In the first “State” 30 volts
is applied, the “Actual” is
measured and calibration factor is obtained from the difference between these two so that the test
voltage is more accurate during the test. Note that while applying this voltage, the switches are open
and no voltage is applied to the
“CT”. The second “State” is related to “At Calibration State”. The fourth “State” is the specified test
voltage and the third and fifth “States” are half and double the test voltage respectively which are
created to measure the best state
of the primary voltage. Note that this is why the maximum voltage limit is 220 volts. In “Voltage
Measurement Mode”, the “Input” specified to measure the voltage. Note that this item changes
automatically according to the test voltage
and the turns ratio specified in “Test Object”. / / After entering the “State Setting” information, you
need to do the wiring according to the picture. Note that by double-clicking on it you can maximize it.
In this wiring, “Va1” must
be connected to “S1” while “N” must be connected to “S2” and then a wire must be connected to “Input10”
for measurement after passing through the “CT”. After doing the wiring, 50 volts and 1 second are
entered as test voltage and test
time for “CT Protection 500/1” and after pressing “Init Test”, the test starts. In “Signal View”, the
waveform of the voltage along with its “Actual” value and the measured voltage can be viewed. After the
test is finished, the results
can be viewed in “Turns Ratio Result”. “Vactual”, “Vmeas” and “Turns Ratio Nom” are the actual value of
the fed voltage, the measured voltage and the “CT” nominal turns ratio respectively. Also, “Turns Ratio
Act” is measured by comparing
“Vmeas” and “Vacutal” and finally, the assessment is recorded in assessment field in accordance with the
difference between “Turns Ratio Act” and “Turns Ratio Nom”. If the difference is less than the allowed
value in the standard, the
test passes otherwise it fails. Here, since the error percentage is less than the specified value in the
standard, the test is passed. This test is assessed in the way that when you specify a test voltage, the
current is measured according
to the “Burden” entered in “Test Object” and after performing the test and measuring the turns ratio
error percentage, the result is compared with the current standards table and assessed. / / In “Phase
Nom” field in “Phase” section, the
phase and in “Phase Act”, the measured phase are specified. In “Phase Dev” by comparing “Phase act” and
“Phase nom”, the error is calculated in minute and the assessment is specified in “Assessment” field.
“Pol.Check” field in “Polarity”
section checks the correctness of the polarity. Finally, after the test is performed, it is necessary to
add the assessment to the report which is done by pressing “Add to Report”. Also, if you wish to add
some specified parts to the report
or delete the report you can use “Add to Report” cog. Note that if the test has been performed using
inputs and outputs other than the default settings, first you need to click on “Init Test” and then
check “Don’t Change Hardware Setting”
and by going to “Hardware Configuration”, in “Analog Output”, activate phases of the intended voltage
group and deactivate the rest and perform the test using the intended voltage group. Here voltage group
A is deactivated and voltage
group B is activated and instead of “Input 10”, “Input 8” is selected and the necessary settings is
adjusted. / / Megger tab No test is performed in “Megger” tab. This section is designed so that you can
enter “Megger” test result and
gather all results in one report. You can enter the number of rows and columns that you need in “Rows”
and “Column” fields respectively and by clicking on “Insert”, make your intended table and the results
are added to the inserted fields.
Also, in “Title” field you can enter a title for your test. / Finally, after all the tests are performed
and the results are added to the report, in “Report View” it is possible to view the report as a whole.
By right-clicking and selecting
“Reorder Reports”, it is possible to change the arrangement of different test results. To do this, you
need to select your intended report and by using “Up” and “Down” keys move the report or by using
“Delete”, delete it. Furthermore,
if you wish to delete the added report, or edit the entered information, you can use the blue option
named “Edit & Delete Report”. / /
INTRODUCING “CIRCUIT BREAKERCB” ROOM One of the Instrument which can be tested by an “AMT105” is
“Circuit Breaker CB” with a maximum excitation current of “2.5” amps which is used to connect and
disconnect lines and other high-voltage equipment.
When a fault occurs in the equipment and lines, the CB automatically stops the faulty system. When there
is a fault, the CB must be able to react with certainty and command automatically. The “AMT105” is
capable of testing “Medium Voltage”
CB with a maximum supply voltage of “210V” and “2.5amps” of “Coil Current”. By clicking on “Circuit
BreakerCB” on the “Start” page, the “CB” test room opens. In this room, by adjusting the required
settings, it is possible to perform “CB
Time Test”, contact resistance and minimum voltage to operate test. “Test Object” and “Megger” tabs are
used to enter the nominal information of “CB” and the results of “Megger” test respectively. / “Test
Object” tab: Every room, to perform
the test, needs some information about the equipment to be entered in “Test Object” tab. In “General
Information” tab, information about the “CB” which should be added to the report is entered. In “Serial
Number”, “Type”, “Station”, “Feeder/Bay”,
“Phase” and “Manufacturer” fields, the serial number, type, name and address of the substation, feeder’s
name, phase number and the name of the manufacturer are entered. / In “Operating Time” section, the
minimum and maximum allowed times
in different modes are entered. Since open command is sent to the “Breaker” bobbin, up to the moment the
CB poles are detached is called “Opening Time” while since the “Close” command is sent, up to the moment
the CB poles are closed is
called “Closing Time” whose minimum and maximum allowed time should be entered in the related field.
“Tmin” and “Tmax” fields in front of “Opening Sync” and “Closing Sync” determine the maximum allowed
time difference between the opening
of 3 poles and closing of 3 poles of the CB respectively. / Since the “open” command is sent to the
breaker, up to the moment the CB poles are closed again after opening once, is known as “Open-Close
Time” and its minimum and maximum allowed
times are entered in the related field. In “Open Close Voltage Setting” section, the amount of the open
and close voltage of CB bobbins is selected from among “AC & DC”. Also, in “Supply Voltage” and
“Threshold” the amount of supply voltage
and the threshold voltage to begin the measurement of the CB operation time are entered respectively.
About “Threshold”, note that, when the voltage of the binary 7 or 8 goes below the value specified in
this field, the device starts measuring
the time. In “Resistance Contact” field, the ideal resistance of the CB poles are specified and the
minimum and maximum allowed are entered in front of it. All the information of “Test Object” tab is
entered from “Test Sheet” or the results
of the previous tests. / / In “Extra Data” section, in “Date”, “Tested By” and “Approved By” fields,
date of the test, information of the test man, and information of the supervisor are entered
respectively. By checking “Easy Mode” option
in “Accessories” section, the wiring format of the tests changes. This wiring is in accordance with the
board designed for “CB” test by VEBKO company; this board is connect on the front panel and there are
relays placed on it that can
manage the wiring automatically which makes the test easier. The number entered in “Averaging” field
indicates the number of cycles which are used for doing the calculations. This number is set at 1 by
default. The more the number of cycles,
the more cycles and time are considered for calculations by the software in “AC” and “DC” modes
respectively. Doing this increases the calculations which leads to a more accurate test result. / By
checking “Add to Report” option at the
bottom of the page, this information is added to the report and the message “The report was added to the
list” is displayed. It is possible to view the report by selecting “Report” from the strip at the right.
By clicking on “Delete Report”
in “Delete from Report” window, the report added is deleted. If “Set as default” is checked, the entered
information is saved as default and by opening the “Circuit BreakerCB” room at any time, this
information is displayed. /
CB “TIMING TEST” One of the most important tests performed in CB is “Timing Test”. To perform a
“Timing Test” it is necessary to specify three main important sections including 1- Supplement method of
bobbins, 2- Wiring type of “Binary Outputs”
and 3- type of “Binary inputs”. / The supplement method of bobbins is specified in “Power Supply”
section which is set at “AMT105” by default and its value is taken from “Test Object”. To control the
voltage applied to “Open” and “Close”
bobbins, “Binary Outputs” of the device are used. In “Binary Output” section it is specified that which
“Binary Outputs” are to be used to control “Close” and “Open” commands which is set at “Series” by
default. In this mode, huge voltages
which occur during opening and closing are divided between the two relays which prevents damage to the
device. But if one of the “Binary Outputs” is not available, by selecting other options, it is possible
to use only two “Binaries”.
For example, by selecting “Bin1” and “Bin4” you can only use the “Binaries” 1 and 4. In this
instruction, “Series” mode is used. / “Binary Input” is used to sense when the CB is closed or open.
Since there is noise in substations, “Binary
Inputs” are set at “Wet” by default so noise is removed from the “Binary Inputs”. But if there is no
noise in the test environment you can set the type of “Binary Inputs” at “Dry” and by changing the
“Binary” type, the wiring changes as
well. / Next you need to select the test type from among “Open—Close—Open Close--…” By selecting any of
them, you need to enter the time in the specified box. For example, in “Open” test, you need to enter
“three” times in the designed
fields; the first “time” is related to before command, the second “time” is related to the Duration
which the command is kept on the bobbin and the third time is related to after command. In this example,
the bobbin is supplied by the
device and “Binary Output” and “Binary Input” are set at “Series” and “Wet” respectively. For “Open”
test, the default time values are considered as the time values. Then, you need to set the wiring
according to the specified picture.
Note that by double-clicking on the picture, it is possible to magnify it. In this wiring, the specified
connections must be set, those points that have the same name must be connected to each other, Close and
Open bobbins must be connected
to the lower end of “Binary Outputs” number 3 and 4 and finally, the connections of “Binary Input” must
be set to receive the key contacts. After setting the wiring, open “Signal View” and initiate the test
by selecting “Init Test”. In
“Signal View” window, it is possible to view the voltage and current loaded from the device as well as
the CB opening time. “Vc1+” and “Vc2+” indicate the status of the “Close” command control “Binary
Outputs” while “Vo1+” and “Vo2+” are
indicators of the status of the “Open” command control “Binary Outputs”. “L1”, “L2” and “L3” indicate
the status of the CB contacts: / / Three colored lines mean that the CB contacts are closed while no
lines suggest the opposite. “AUX
Open” and “AUX Close” signals are used to determine the origin time for measuring the performance time.
As mentioned before, the CB performance is measured since when the voltage of the “Binaries” 7 and 8
exceeds the “Threshold” specified
in “Test Object”. Moreover, the test results are available in “Summary of Result” section. In this
section, the peak current and “Steady State” current and in the “Open” table the opening time of each
contact is provided separately. Note
that the evaluation of these times is done in accordance with the “Opening Time” and “Opening Sync”
specified in “Test Object”. If the operating time is somewhere within the range specified in “Test
Object” the test “Passes”, otherwise
it “Fails”. For adding the results to the report, you can do so by pressing “Add to Report”. Also, if
you wish to add some specific parts to the report, or delete and edit the report, you need to use the
“Add to Report” cog. By clicking
on this cog, you can view the items that can be added to the report. If you do not need each of them,
you can unselect by unchecking them. Note that after performing a test the results are not automatically
added to the report and it is
necessary to add the results to the report by “Add To Report” before “Clearing” the test. / / In the
following, some points about the test are provided: The first point is that if you wish to use only one
voltage group, first you need
to press “Init Test” and then check “Don’t Change Hardware Setting” and by going to the “Hardware
Configuration”, activate your intended voltage phases and deactivate the others in the “Analog Output”
tab and perform the test using only
the voltages of the intended group. For example, here voltage group “A” is activated and voltage group
“B” is deactivated. / The second point is that when you enter “150” milliseconds as the command time,
this means that the command voltage
is kept on the bobbin for “150” milliseconds. If you check “Command Termination Trigger” option and
enter “10” milliamps as the “Minimum Time”, the command is removed from the CB, “10” milliseconds after
its operation. To view this item,
“Close” test is selected. To initiate the test, “Init” is pressed and test starts. After that, you can
see that because of checking this option, unlike the previous case, “10” milliseconds after the CB
operation the command is removed.
/ The third point is that if the current needed to exciting the bobbin is more than “2.5” amps, it is
necessary to use an external source. In this case, check the “External” option and set the new wiring
and start the test after pressing
“Init Test”. If you are using an external source to provide the voltage of the bobbins, to better
protect the bobbins, put a glass relay with the “Binary Outputs” in series so that if something
unexpected happened to the “Binary Outputs”
which made them no longer able to disconnect the voltage applied to the bobbins, the CB is not damaged
and in this way you can have more control on connecting and disconnecting the supply applied to them. In
using a glass relay, since
the voltage of the binaries number 7 and 8 is used as the time origin, delay of the glass relay has no
effect on the test result and this delay is deleted by the software. / Also, when testing the CB time
test, it is necessary to know
the current loaded by the CB. A “100” milliohm resistance is considered for this and when the current
flow, a voltage is measured by the “Binary Input” 10 and by dividing the voltage by the resistance,
“Coil Current” is calculated by the
software and displayed in “Coil Current” section in “Signal View”. / / The third point is that “Error
Other” while performing a test means that there is an issue with the connections or the high current
loaded by the bobbins in a way that
the device is unable to provide needed current. Therefore, in case of encountering this error, check the
“Actual Current” value in “Signal View”. If the “Actual Current” reaches “2.5” amps and then the test is
stopped, it means that the
device is not capable of injecting that current and an external source should be used. If the time
recorded in the table is “-1ks”, this means that the CB has been “Open” before performing the test or it
has been closed for the “Close”
test of the CB. In this case, other than the wiring, you need to check whether the CB is closed or open.
“CONTACT RESISTANCE” TAB In this tab, ohm resistance test of CB contacts is performed. The test
settings include “I Test” and “State Time” is specified in “Test Setting”. As you know, the method used
by “AMT105” to measure the resistance is
dividing the measured voltage by the injected current. In “Voltage Measurement Mode” section, you can
select from among inputs “1” and “10” for the measurement in accordance with the voltage level and the
maximum CB contact resistance.
As you can see, “Bin 01” has two voltage levels for the measurement. The first level is “4.5” volts on
“Wet4.5” while the second level is on “Wet30” but since the device current resources can only produce up
to “8” volts, this item is
limited to “8” volts. / In “Result” section, the ohm resistance measurement result of each contact is
displayed. To perform this test, first, you need to add as many rows as the contacts by right-clicking
and clicking “Add”. Then, set
the wirings in accordance with the specified picture. Note that by double-clicking on this picture you
can magnify it. In this wiring, you need to “Jumper “la1”, “lb1”, “la2” and “lb2” together and “la3”,
“lb3”, “la4” and “lb4” together
and connect “la1” and “la4” phases to the CB contact in accordance with the picture. To measure the
voltage, the selected “Binary Input” should be connected to the CB contact and further from the current
connectors. Note that to perform
the test using a clamp and injecting high currents, multiple parallel wires should be used and they
should be connected to the side where there are three pins while the voltage measuring wire should be
connected to the side where there
is only one pin. To perform the test, right-click on the phase related to that row and select “Apply
Test”. In “Signal View” section, the waveform of the current along with its “Actual” values and the
measured voltage can be viewed. Also,
in “Table View”, you can see that two “States” are created in accordance with the settings specified in
“Test Setting” and the test is performed. Note that, to test each contact, you need to add the related
row in “Result” section and
test each contact separately by setting the specified wiring. / / / In this table, custom name, name of
the phase, the measured voltage, the actual injected current, the measured resistance and the result of
the assessment are entered
in “Name”, “Phase”, “V DC”, ‘I DC”, “Rmeas” and “Assessment” fields respectively. Note that the test
assessment is done by comparing the resistance entered in “Test Object” and the measured resistance. /
In the end, after the test is performed,
the results should be added to the report which is done by clicking on “Add to Report”. Also, if you
wish to add specific parts of the test to the report delete or edit it, you can use the “Add to Report”
cog. By clicking on this cog,
you can see that the items that can be added to the “Report” are checked and if you do not wish any of
these items to be added to the report, you can simply uncheck your intended item. Also note that the
test results are not automatically
added to the report after performing a test and it is necessary to add the results to the report by
selecting “Add to Report” before “Clearing the test”. / In performing this test, it is imperative to
note the following: First: “Error
Other” in performing the test means that there is a problem in connections or the current route
resistance is too high that the device is not able to provide the “Burden” needed to inject the current.
Therefore, in this case, check the
“Actual current” from “Signal View”. If the current is injected “Actual Current” but the difference with
the specified current is too large, this indicates the high route resistance and if the “Actual Current”
equals zero, this means that
the current injection route is open. In the cases where the route resistance is high, the test current
must be decreased and if the “Actual Current” equals zero, the connections must be examined. make sure
the CB is closed. / Second: the
measured voltage must have similar cycles. A high tolerance or a zero voltage means that the connectors
are not connected correctly. Third: in cases of facing “Error: Over Voltage”, you need to select the
“Input” with the bigger “Max Voltage”
from “Voltage Measurement Mode” section. / Fourth: if you wish to modify wiring or use binaries other
than “1” and “10”, first you need to check “Don’t Change Hardware Setting” and then apply the desired
hardware modifications. / Fifth:
“at Calibration State” option is used to remove the ambient noise effect from the voltage of the
binaries. If this option is checked, in the first “State” the voltage is measured and deducted from the
final result. /
CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION MINIMUM VOLTAGE TEST: One of the most important tests that can be
performed on circuit breakers is the “Circuit breaker operation minimum voltage test” or “Minimum
Voltage” which is performed in “Minimum Voltage to
Operate Circuit Breaker” tab. In this test, it is possible to find the minimum voltage which can cause
the circuit breaker to operate by gradually increasing the voltage applied to the two ends of “Open” or
“Close” bobbin. / In the first
step of this test, the equipment to be used in the test is selected from among “New Device” and “AMT105”
which is set at “AMT105” by default and here we proceed without changing it. Then you need to specify
that whether you are going to
perform a “Close” test or an “Open” test. Note that since some circuit breakers have two “Open” and two
“Close” bobbins, there are “Open1” and “Open2” as well as “Close1” and “Close2”. In this video we are
going to perform the minimum
voltage test once for “Close” mode and once more for “Open” mode. / As the next step, you need to
specify that whether the device is to detect the circuit breaker operation based on the contact
reception or current drop; in this video
we are using the former which is a more accurate and reliable method. In this method you can also
specify that whether the test is to be performed in three-phase or single phase mode; here three-phase
is selected. “Wet” is selected as
the contact type so that noises cannot cause any dysfunction in the process. Note that by selecting any
of the options in this section, the wiring changes. For example, if single phase or “Dry” are selected,
you can see the change in the
wiring. / In this test two methods are available to apply voltage to stimulate the bobbin. Using the
“Manual” method, you specify a particular voltage and after pressing “Init Test”, apply that to the
circuit breaker. But in “Pulse Ramping”
method you can increase the voltage gradually and find the minimum voltage which can cause the circuit
breaker to operate. By selecting “Pulse Ramping”, a graphic figure is displayed whose different
parameters must be specified. Let us
explain this with an example. / / In this example the voltage is increased from 35 to 80 volts with 0.5
volt steps and each step takes 0.5 second. The value for “Reset” voltage is 5 volts and its application
time is considered to be 0.5
second. After specifying these factors, the wiring is done according to the guide available in the
picture. In this wiring, first, the two voltage sources are paralleled in order to use the maximum
current of the device, and then they
are connected to the control coil to apply the fed voltage. Afterward, in accordance with the number of
contacts selected, 3 is selected in this test L1, L2 and L3 contacts are connected to Binary Inputs to
record the operation of the
circuit breaker. After selecting “Coil Close1” and adjusting the wiring, “Init Test” is selected and the
test runs. By opening the “Signal View” window you can view the applied voltage as well as the injected
current. After the circuit
breaker operates, the minimum operation voltage along with the amount of current drawn during the
operation is displayed in “Result” section. By selecting “Add to Report” the test result is added to the
output report. To test the “Open”
bobbin of the circuit breaker, “Coil Open1” is selected and after pressing ‘Init Test” the test is
reruned and the results are added to the output report. / In using the “Coil current” method the wiring
is changed and the circuit breaker
operation is detected based on the current drawn from the resource. You need to specify the minimum
current which is drawn from the device when the circuit breaker operates in “Min Coil Current” field.
Here 1.5 amp is selected. For “Pulse
Ramping” the same settings used in the previous example are used. After adjusting the wiring and
pressing “Init Test” the test runs. In “Signal View” you can see that for every “Pulse”, current is
drawn from the device and in current ….
And voltage ….. the test result is achieved and the results are recorded in “Result”. The results of
this test are added to the report by selecting “Add to Report”. / / / / / / / / Post “DC” resource test:
it is possible to perform the
post “DC” resource test in “Check DC Ground” section. In posts whose potential difference is provided by
two resources, it is possible to examine the parallelism of the two. For example, if the post uses a
positive 100 volts and a negative
100 volts resource to provide 200 volts of “DC” potential difference, by performing this test, it is
possible to examine that how much is each of these two potentials deflected from the intended 100 volts.
To do this test, you need to
specify the nominal voltage and maximum allowed tolerance after checking “Check DC Ground”. Here “100
volts” and “%10” are entered as the required values and then the wiring is adjusted in accordance with
the figure. After pressing “Init
Test” and running the test, in “Plus Voltage” and “Plus Voltage dev”, the positive potential difference
and its difference with “Nominal Voltage”, “Negative Voltage” and “Negative Voltage dev” as well as the
negative potential and its
difference with “Nominal Voltage” are displayed. / / “Check Corresponding”: since in some electrical
installations multiple voltage resources are used to supply different equipment, it may be necessary to
test the positive and negative
potential of the existing cables so that no mistake occurs in terms of positive and negative potentials.
For this test, the maximum voltage allowed between the two poles of the two resources is entered in
“Voltage Drop” field. To be precise,
suppose that two resources of “A” and “B” are being used to supply the equipment. Normally there should
not be any potential difference between the positive “A” and negative “B” sides of the resources. If
there is any potential difference
between these two it means that they both belong to the same resource and can be used to supply the
equipment. / “Check Short Circuit”: by doing this test you can test the health of a bobbin. To do so you
need to specify a voltage and
a reference resistance in “Voltage” and “Rref” fields respectively. After doing the wiring and running
the test, the drawn current is measured and then the applied voltage is divided by the drawn current and
the self-resistance is calculated.
If this resistance is smaller than the reference resistance specified in “Rref” field, it means that the
self is short circuited. / / / Since it may happen that some users have also performed “Megger” test for
this equipment and they wish
to have the results in a report, in this tab they can create their intended table by selecting their
desired row and column and then “Insert”; after entering the test results and selecting “Add to Report”,
the information will be added
to the output report. Other options include “Delete Report” which is used to delete the information of
this page from the report as well as “Export” and “Import” options which are used to export the
information of this page or import them
if necessary. Also, if you wish to set the characteristics entered for the created row and column as the
default for this section of the room you can use “Set as Default” option. / /
CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Voltage transformers are composed of a core, two windings, and
insulation. VTs convert the high voltage of the primary side to low voltage on their secondary winding
with the turn ratio written on their plate.
/ Because of the internal casualties such as copper and iron casualties, the vector of the secondary
voltage is different from the primary voltage. Moreover, the connected burden is capable of affecting
the turn ratio error and phase displacement.
If the actual amplitude of the secondary voltage is lower than nominal secondary voltage, the amplitude
error is negative. Also, if the secondary vector is lagging in relation to the primary vector, the phase
error is negative. / / To
compensate for the turn ratio error, sometimes manufacturers adjust the number of primary or secondary
turns. Nowadays, most of the VTs that are used in the industry are either inductive VTs or capacitive
VTs which are called “CVT”. /
CVTs are composed of an inductive VT, a high-voltage capacitive divider and a compensator reactor. In
the IEC standard, the title CVT is used for this equipment but in the ANSI standard, this equipment is
called CCVT. The compensator rector
is designed in a way that it can compensate for the phase displacement caused by the capacitive divider.
/ All CVTs can be used for measurement purposes but only certain types of this equipment are suitable
for protection purposes. Dual-purpose
CVTs measurement and protection must be in accordance with all of the considered descriptions and the
current standards. / According to the maximum allowed error percentage, the accuracy class of the
protection CVTs is considered to be
from 5 percent of the nominal voltage to a coefficient of the nominal voltage Rated Voltage Factor and
after its value, the letter P is used. 3P and 6P are the standard accuracy classes for protection CVTs.
For example, 3P accuracy class
means that the maximum allowed error is 3 percent. Moreover, in IEC standard, three classes of T1, T2
and T3 are considered for the function of CVT in transient state. For example, 3PT2 class indicates that
the function of the 3P class
is for protection purposes and T2 class is for transient states. / Classes related to the transient
response are defined in the following table: / In the above relation, Us t is the response for the
transient secondary voltage. For example,
for the 3PT2 class, the relation of the transient voltage to the nominal voltage peak from 10 ms to 90
ms after the beginning of the transient state, It should decreas and be in the range of less than 25
times to 0.2. In this regard, it
is necessary to pay attention to several points: CVTs need a damping piece of equipment for the 6PT3 and
3PT3 transient response classes. By agreement between the manufacturer company and the customer, it is
possible to consider different
values for the turn ratio and Ts time. Selecting the transient response class depends on the
characteristics of the protection relays. / About Measuring CVTs, the accuracy class is defined based on
the highest allowed error percentage
in the nominal voltage with the nominal burden. The standard accuracy classes for single-phase Measuring
CVTs are considered to be 0.2, 0.5, 1.0 and 3.0. / Test Object tab To perform a test, every module needs
a set of information about
the equipment which is entered in “Test Object”. In this tab, the general characteristics of the “CVT”
and its information for performing the test and adding to the report are specified. In “Data” section,
information such as serial number,
model, the manufacturer company and the installation location of the “CVT” are entered to be added to
the report. / In “Winding Material” field in “Temperature Correction” section, the conductor type of the
windings is selected from among
“Copper” and “Aluminum”. In “Winding Temp.” field the current temperature of the windings and in
“Reference Temp.” field, the reference temperature for measuring the resistance of the windings are
entered so that they can be used to correct
the values measured in different temperatures. Usually, the reference temperature which is 75 degrees is
written in front of the secondary winding resistance on the plate of the “CVT”. In “Correction Factor”
field which is uneditable,
the temperature correction factor is calculated by the software in accordance with the current ambient
temperature as well as the reference temperature and the winding material. It is possible to view the
relation used for calculating
this factor, by holding the cursor on its field. / The „RMS“ value of every parameter is calculated
based on the average of several time periods. As the number of these time periods increases, it takes
longer to make the calculations but
also the accuracy increases and there will be fewer fluctuations. The number of these time periods is
entered in „Averaging“ field in „Noise Suppression“ section. This field is the same as „No. of period“
field in „Setting“ in „Signal
View“ window. / In “Date” field in “Extra Data” section, the date of performing the test is entered in
AD and the information about the performer of the test is entered in “Tested By” field. Also, the
information about the supervisor is
entered in “Approved By” field. In “Data Table”, the characteristics of every core and tap are entered
in every row in accordance with the characteristics plate. The core number and the tap number are
entered in “Core Number” and “Tap
Number” fields, respectively. The primary parameters are entered in “Vprimary” and “Primary Factor”
fields while the secondary characteristics are entered in “Vsecondary” and “Secondary Factor” fields.
The burden is specified in “VA” field
and in “CLP” and “CLM” fields, the Protection Core and Measuring of the transformer are entered,
respectively. Likewise, the information related to the two other taps of the CVT that are being used is
specified. Also, if the characteristics
of the “VT resistance” are available, it is possible to check “Show Resistance Column” option to add the
related column to the table. By checking this option, some changes are made in the “DC Resistance” test
table which will be thoroughly
explained in its related video. / Also, by pressing the „Add to Report“ option in the box at the bottom,
this information is added to the output report and a message stating „The Report was added to the list“
is displayed. It is possible
to view the report by selecting „Report“ window from the bar at the right. By clicking on „Delete
Report“ option in „Delete From Repor“ window, the added report is removed. If „Set as default“ option is
checked, the entered information
is saved as default and every time, by opening the „Capacitor Voltage TransformerCVT“ room this
information is displayed. /
SECONDARY BURDEN TEST In this test, the “Burden” connected to the “CVT” secondary is measured. In
this test, by injecting “AC” current and measuring the “AC” voltage by “Binary/Analog Input” and
dividing voltage by current, “Z” and its angle
and consequently “R” and “X” values are obtained. To do this test, after going to “State Setting”
section, the current and time of the test must be entered in “I test” and “State Time” fields,
respectively. The current limitation specified
for this field is “32” amperes. After entering the “State Setting” information, the wiring must be done
in accordance with the instructions picture. It should be noted that by double-clicking on the picture,
it is possible to magnify it.
To perform this test, in the first step, the “CVT” must be separated from all elements that are used for
transferring voltage to measurement devices. In this wiring “Jumper” “la1” and “lb1” current outputs and
connect “la2” and “lb2” to
the “CVT” voltage transmission path. / / / / Also, to measure the “AC” voltage, “Binary/Analog Input1”
must be connected to the test path a little further from the current injection connectors. This should
be noted that before performing
the test, it is necessary to press “Init Test” so that the device is automatically “Configured”. By
selecting this option, the settings including current and test time as well as hardware settings related
to “Hardware Configuration” including
the outputs of the device and “Binary/Analog Inputs” are adjusted by the device automatically. In
“Analog Output” tab in “Hardware Configuration” section, we can see that the wiring of the device is set
at “32A” with the maximum “Burden”
of 400 Volts ampere and the “Binary/Analog Input1” is activated for voltage measurement. To better
analyze the test, “Table View”, ”Detail View” and “Signal View” windows can be used. After opening
“Table View” window, you can see that
a “State” with the “50Hz” frequency and in accordance with the entered information in “State Setting”
section is created. If you wish to view the information more thoroughly, use “Detail View” window
instead. / / / / / / Performing the
test and analyzing the results After adjusting the wiring, here, 5 amps and 5 seconds are entered as
test current and test time, respectively, and after pressing “Init Test”, the test starts. In “Signal
View” it is possible to view the
waveform of “Actual” and the voltage measured by “Binary/Analog Input”. Also, in “Signal View” by using
the waveforms of “Actual” and the voltages recorded in “Signal View” it is possible to examine the
connection of the connectors. In
“Result” section, the user can view the results after the test is finished. The results include “linj”,
the amount of injected current, “Vmeas”, the measured voltage, impedance, “impedance Angle” and finally
the values of “R” and “X” are
displayed using the “Z Cosphi” and “Z Sinphi” relations, respectively. In “Actual Burden” field, the
amount of burden that the “CT” secondary can supply in the nominal current is calculated and the result
is entered in this field by the
software. In the end, after the test is finished, it is necessary to add the test results to the report
which, in equipment test, is done by pressing “Add to Report”. / Also, if you wish to add certain parts
of the evaluation to the report
or to edit the report, use “Add to Report” cog. By clicking on this cog, the elements that can be added
to the “Report” are displayed by checked checkboxes and you can uncheck any undesired elements. Note
that after any test, the results
are not automatically added to the report and it is necessary to add the results of the performed test
to the output report by pressing “Add To Report” before “Clearing the test”. It should also be noted
that if the “Burden” of the path
is low and the user wishes to have a more accurate measurement or “Binary/Analog Input1” is damaged, it
is necessary to change the specified “Binary Input”. To do this, after pressing “Init Test” and checking
“Don’t Change Hardware Setting”
option, the user must enter “Hardware Configuration” window and specify a new input in “Binary/Analog
Input” tab. Here, as an example, “Input10” is selected and after adjusting the necessary settings, the
test is performed and the results
are viewed. If you wish to select a binary between binaries “1” to “8”, you have to enter the “Binary
Input Target” in accordance with the default binary number. For example, to use “Input7”, “Bin1” must be
selected as the “Binary Input
Target”. For this, it is suggested to right-click on “Input1” row and “Cut” the information and “Paste”
it in the intended row. To change the current wiring, it should be noted that the “Output Target” of the
selected wiring must be “lL1”.
/ / / / / Two more notable points in performing the test are that first, “Error Other” in a test
indicates that there is a problem in the connection of wirings of the current path or resistance is too
high that the device is unable to
provide the “Burden” needed for current injection. Therefore, in cases of facing this error, you can go
to “Signal View” and examine the “Actual” value of the current. If the current is injected by the device
“Actual Current” but its difference
with the specified current is high, this means that the path resistance is high and if the “Actual
Current” is zero, it means that the current injection path is open. Where the path resistance is high,
the test current must be decreased
and in cases of a zero “Actual Current”, the connection of connectors needs to be examined. The second
point is that the voltage measured by the inputs of the device needs to have similar cycles. If the
measured values have too big tolerances
or they are zero it means that the connectors are not correctly connected. / /
SHORT-CIRCUIT IMPEDANCE TAB To perform a short-circuit impedance test, as can be seen in the
picture, the primary winding is short-circuited. AC current injection is done through the secondary coil
and the voltage difference that happens on
the terminals, is measured through the inputs of the device. This measurement must be repeated for the
other secondary coils. The obtained impedance called Zsc_x is a combination of primary and secondary
stray losses. / / Where RP”, Xp”
and x stand for the resistance of the primary winding which is transferred to the secondary side, the
leakage reactance of the primary winding which is referred to the secondary side, and the indicator
which is considered for the secondary
winding or in other words for where the current is injected from, respectively. CVT Equivalent circuit /
Performing the test and anlyizng the results To perform this test, first, 1 is entered as the amount of
the injected current in I
test field and 1 is entered as the test time in State Time. By pressing Insert Rows button, it is
possible to create other rows for testing other coils. After adjusting these settings, the wiring must
be done according to this picture.
In this picture, first phase of current groups A and B are made series so that the maximum Burden of the
device is used. Then, the outputs of the device are connected to the CVT. To measure the caused voltage
difference, input number 1
must be used. It should be noted that, in this wiring the voltage connectors are connected ahead of the
connectors of current injection. Finally, to perform the test, by right-clicking on any of the rows in
Table section and selecting
Apply Test, the test runs and the resistance value of the intended coil is measured. / / / / / / After
the test is finished, to add the results to the report “Add to Report” button can be used. Also, by
using the cog next to this button,
you can remove the items they do not wish to be added to the report before selecting “Add to Report”
option. if, for any reason, wish to modify the wiring of the device, first they need to apply the test
once and then check “Don’t Change
Hardware Setting” option and select a different output from “Hardware Configuration” window and then set
the Output Target at “IL1-E” and run the test after changing the wiring. To select other inputs, it
should be noted that the selected
Binary Input Target must be in accordance with the default “Binary Input Target”. For this, it is
suggested to right-click on “Input1” row and “Cut” the information and “Paste” it in the intended row. /
/ / / /
WINDING RESISTANCE TEST Winding resistance test is done in “Resistance Test” tab. In this test, by
injecting “DC” current into “CVT” secondary and measuring voltage through the “Input” and dividing
voltage by current, “DC” resistance or “Rmeas”
is calculated. It should be noted that in the software, there is only one row in the test table by
default. If the “CVT” has more than one taps or cores, by pressing “Insert Rows” it is possible to add
as many rows as necessary and test
any of them. To perform this test, the test current and time must be entered in “I test” and “State
Time” fields in “State Setting” section, respectively. The current limitation specified for this field
is “32” amps but “1” amp of current
is usually enough for this test. About rows of the “Result” table, it should be noted that if “Show
Resistance Column” option in “Test Object” is checked, three more columns including “Rnom”, “Rdev” and
“Assessment” are added to the table
where “Rnom” and “Rdev” refer to the nominal resistance and the difference between “Rnom” and “Rcorr”,
respectively. If “Rcorr” is lower than “Rnom”, the “Assessment” is “Passed”, otherwise it is “Failed”. /
/ / After entering the information,
the wiring needs to be done in accordance with the picture. It should be noted that it is possible to
magnify the picture by double-clicking on it. In this wiring, first the „la1“ and „lb1“ current output
phases are Jumpered and „la2“
and „lb2“ phases are paralleled with the capacitor box. Here, „la2“ is connected after connecting it to
the positive end of the capacitor and to the "S1"ِ CVT and „lb2“ is connected after connecting it to the
negative polarity of the capacitor
and to the „S2“. The reason for using a capacitor box is to compensate „CVT“ inductance. In this
capacitor box, there are three „1000“ microfarad capacitors and the red and black ends of the capacitor
box are the positive and negative
polarity, respectively. / / To measure the “DC” voltage, input1 should be connected to the “CVT” and a
little further from the current connectors. Then, the source of the current which was paralleled with
the capacitor is connected to
the “CVT” terminals. It should be noted that to perform the test, it is necessary to right-click on one
of the rows of the table and select “Apply Test”. By doing this, the device settings related to the
current and the test time as well
as the hardware settings related to “Hardware Configuration” including the outputs and “Binary/Analog
Inputs” of the device are automatically adjusted. To analyze the test it is possible to use “Table
View”, “Detail View” and “Signal View”.
After opening “Table View” window, two “States” with zero frequency and in accordance with the
information entered in “State Setting” section can be seen. The function of the first “State” is to
change the “CT” current from transient to
steady state while the function of the second “State” is to measure the current and voltage and
calculate the resistance. If the user wishes to have access to a more thorough source of information
than the “Table View”, they can use “Detail
View” window. / / / / Performing the test and analyzing the results After adjusting the wiring, 1 amp
and 5 seconds are entered as the test current and test time, respectively, and by right-clicking on any
of the rows and pressing “Apply
Test”, the test begins. It should be noted that in “Signal View” section, it is possible to view the
actual waveform of the current and the voltage measured by the “Input”. By using “Signal View” and the
recorded voltage and current waveforms,
it is possible to analyze the test using the “Actual” values and the recorded voltages, Check if the
connectors are connected correctly. / After the test is finished, by selecting the row in “Result”
section, the test results can easily
be viewed. The results include “VDC”, “IDC”, “Rnom”, “Rcorr” and “Rdev” which refer to the measured
voltage, the injected current, the resistance measured in the current temperature, the resistance
measured in the reference temperature
and the difference between “Rcorr” and “Rnom” in terms of percent, respectively. In “Correction Factor”
field, the temperature correction factor is calculated in accordance with the current ambient
temperature, the reference temperature
and the material of the winding. The information of this temperature is entered in “Temperature
Correction” field in “Test Object” and the “Rcorr” is obtained by multiplying “Rmeas” by the “Correction
Factor”. / / In the end, after performing
the test, if “Rcorr” is lower than “Rnom”, the result of the assessment is “Passed” in “Assessment”,
otherwise it is “Failed”. After the assessment, it is necessary to add the results to the report which
in equipment test is done by pressing
“Add to Report”. / Also, if you wish to add specific parts of the test to the report or edit or delete
the report, “Add to Report” cog. By clicking on this cog, the elements that can be added to the report
are indicated by checked checkboxes
and before pressing “Add to Report” the user can uncheck any of them that they do not wish to be added
to the report. It should be noted that after every test the test results are not added to the report
automatically and after every test,
it is necessary to add the results of the performed test to the report by pressing “Add to Report”
before clearing the test. If you wish to use a different wiring for current injection, you need to have
pressed “Apply Test” at least once.
Then, check “Don’t change Hardware Setting” and select their intended wiring in “Hardware Configuration”
and press “Apply Test” one more time. To select a different “Input”, it should be noted that the
selected “Binary Input Target” must
be similar to the default “Binary Input Target”. For this, it is suggested to right-click on “Input1”
row and cut the information and “Paste” it in the intended row. To change the current wiring, it is
important to set the “Output Target”
of the selected wiring at “IL1”. / / / There are two more notable points; the first one is that „Error
Other“ indicates that either there is a problem with the wirings or the resistance is too high that the
device is not able to provide
the „Burden“ needed for current injection. Therefore, in cases of facing this error, the user needs to
examine the „Actual“ value of the current from „Signal View“. If the current is injected from the device
„Actual Current“ but its difference
with the specified current is high, the wiring resistance is too high and if the „Actual Current“ is
zero, it means that the current injection path is open. In cases where the resistance is too high, it is
necessary to decrease the current
and when the „Actual Current“ equals zero, the connection of the connectors needs to be checked. The
second point is that if the measured voltage has a too high tolerance or equals zero, this means that
the connectors are not connected
correctly. / /
EXCITATION TAB In fact, “Excitation” or saturation test, analyzes the characteristic of the core. In
this test, by decreasing the frequency, a method is used to keep the voltage at a safe level. The core
flux is in accordance with the relation
between the voltage and the frequency and by using this relation and to prevent high voltages in CVT
primary, it is possible to use a lower voltage for the test by decreasing the frequency. It should be
noted that the software calculates
and displays the saturation point in the nominal frequency. Moreover, decreasing the frequency helps to
remove the effects caused by the stray capacity of the primary side. / Since the CVT damping circuit is
used to stop the Ferro resonance
effects, before performing the saturation test, it is necessary to isolate its circuit from CVT.
Moreover, to perform coil resistance, secondary short-circuit impedance and saturation tests, it is
necessary to detach the PLC/NHF terminal
from the ground so that the high voltage does not cause any problem. Doing the wiring in accordance with
the picture and applying AC voltage to the secondary coil, the saturation curve is obtained. In this
process, the voltage of the secondary
terminal, excitation current and the phase angle between the excitation voltage and current are
measured. In this room, first, it is necessary for the amount of voltage intended for the test,
frequency and test duration to be entered in
“State Setting” section. In this section, in fact, “Vtest” is “Vend” and, in this field, the test
voltage increases from zero to the specified voltage. / In “Demagnetize” section, before performing the
saturation test, the software demagnetizes
the “CVT” by AC voltage so that the residue flux caused by the “DC” resistance test is eliminated. In
this section it is necessary to enter the “Demagnetization” time and the voltage in terms of a
percentage of the “Vend”. / In “Choose
Current Measurement Mode” section, it is possible to specify the current measurement mode so that the
proper algorithm is applied in accordance with the current range. In this case, it should be noted that
if the load current is low, it
is better to use “Low current” mode because in this mode, the accuracy of load current measurement is
higher. / Performing the test and analyzing the results To perform this test, as an example, 20 volts,
10 Hz, 15s, and “High Current”
are entered as “Vtest”, frequency, and test time and test mode. On this page a warning can be seen which
says that in this test the primary side voltage will reach 36000 volts. Therefore, while performing this
test, observing safety points
is required. After specifying the settings, the wiring should be done in accordance with the picture. In
this wiring, the voltage of the first phase of the device is connected to the positive polarity of the
capacitor and after connecting
two negative polarity of the capacitors, the positive polarity of the second capacitor is connected to
the positive polarity of the “CVT” and the other polarity of the “CVT” is connected to the null of the
device. The reason for using
the connections of capacitors in the path of applying voltage to the “CVT” is to filter the “DC” offset
which is caused by the linear amplifier of the device. / / / / After doing the wiring, “Signal View”
window is opened so that the signals
of the load voltage and current and also the saturation curve can be viewed during the test. After
completing these steps it is necessary to click on “Init Test” every time before performing the test so
that the settings needed for the
test are adjusted automatically. By running the test, it can be seen that first, the “CVT” is
“Demagnetized” and then the saturation test is performed. After the test is finished, the test voltage
and current are displayed on the diagram
in “Excitation Result” box. After the test is finished, to add the test results to the report, click on
“Add to Report”. Also, by using the cog next to this option, before selecting “Add to Report”, uncheck
any item that you do not wish
to be added to the report. / / / If for any reason, you wish to use a voltage other than the voltage of
the first phase, first, press “Init Test” and then check “Don’t Change Hardware Setting” option and then
select a different output
from “Hardware Configuration” window and set its “Output Target” at “VL1-E” and after changing the
wiring, run the test. / / Note that if the device displays an “Overcurrent” error before finding the
knee and saturation points, the wiring
needs to be changed to “High Current” and the test can run after pressing “Init Test”. If again, the
device displays an “Overcurrent” error before finding the saturation point, this means that the
saturation point current is higher than
the “limits” of the device and it is not possible to find the knee point using this device.
RATIO TAB In this tab, CVT turn ratio test is performed where the voltage is given to the CVT
primary and measured from the secondary. By dividing the primary and secondary values, turn ratio is
obtained and the obtained value can be compared
with the nominal value on the plate. For medium and high-voltage CVTs it is possible to perform this
test by applying a low voltage or approximately 400 volts to the primary. If there are multiple
measuring and protection secondary, it
is necessary to measure voltages of all secondaries and obtain all their turn ratios. / According to the
IEC 60044-2 standard, the allowed error percentage is set in accordance with the accuracy class of the
CVT. The first column of this
accuracy class table and the turn ratio error percentage accuracy column are also available. In the
following table, the mentioned error percentages are for cases where the voltage is higher than 2
percent of the nominal voltage. In accordance
with the table related to protection CVTs, for example, if the accuracy class is 3P, its allowed error
percentage in 2 percent of the nominal voltage is 6 percent and in 100 percent of the nominal voltage is
3 percent. / To perform this
test, first, fields of “State Settings“ section are introduced. In “V test“, “V actual“, “State Time“
and “Analog Input“ fields, the amount of test voltage, the actual applied voltage, the duration of the
test and the input intended for
transformer secondary voltage measurement are specified, respectively. It should be mentioned that
inputs number 1 to 8 and input10 are used for voltage measurement. / / In noisy environments, there is
some voltage on the inputs of the
device and to increase accuracy, by selecting “At calibration state“ option, at the beginning of the
test,another state with zero as its value is created and in the end, this measured voltage will be
reduced from the final result. In “Turns
Ratio Result”, the results of turn ratio test of every core are displayed after performing the test. In
“V calc” field, the secondary voltage is calculated by the software in accordance with the values
entered in “Test Object” and in “V
test” field. In “V meas”, “Ratio Nom.” and “Ratio Act.”, the voltage measured by the input, the nominal
turn ratio and the actual turn ratio are calculated by the software, respectively. / The insertion
position of the cores is specified
in “Insert Mode” in a way that by selecting “All Core”, all cores are added to the “Result” table based
on the selection between “Up” or “Down”. Also, by selecting “Specific core”, a specific core is added to
the table in accordance with
the choice of the user. / In “Phase” section, in “Phase Nom” field, the amount of applied voltage to the
CVT and in “Phase Act” the phase difference between the two sides of the transformer are displayed. In
“Phase Dev” the deviation of
the measured phase in relation to the applied phase is recorded in terms of minutes one degree equals 60
minutes. Finally, the results of the evaluation are determined in accordance with the type of the core
which can be protection, measurement
or protection/measurement and also in accordance with what the user selects in “Assessment”. / The
insertion position of the cores in the table is specified by selecting the options available in “Insert
Position”. Tables can be added by
pressing “Insert Rows” button. / / PERFORMING THE TEST AND ANALYZING THE RESULTS To perform the test, as
an example, 100 volts and 300 milliseconds are entered as the test voltage and State time, respectively.
The CVT is Protection type
and only Core1 is going to be tested as an example. After pressing “Insert Rows”, since there are 3
cores, 9 rows are inserted which in accordance with the test voltage and the CVT turn ratio / to/, the
nominal turn ratio value and Vcalc
are 181.8 and 550mV respectively. / To perform the test, the voltage of group A is connected to the CVT
primary and the Input1 is connected to the CVT secondary to measure the voltage. To view the primary and
secondary voltages during
the test, Signal view is used. In the end, the intended row is selected and after right-clicking on it,
Apply Test is selected. After the test, it can be seen that the test results are recorded in the table
and since the angle fault and
the turn ratio are within the range allowed in the standard, the test is passed. Other cores and phases
are tested following the same procedure. / / / / / After the test is finished, to add the results to the
report “Add to Report” option
can be used. Also, by using the cog next to this option, you can remove the items that do not wish to be
added to the report before selecting “Add to Report” option. / If, for any reason, wish to modify the
wiring of the device, first
they need to apply the test once and then check “Don’t Change Hardware Setting” option and select a
different output from “Hardware Configuration” window and then set the Output Target at “VL1-E” and run
the test after changing the wiring.
To select other inputs, it should be noted that the selected Binary Input Target must be in accordance
with the default “Binary Input Target”. For this, it is suggested to right-click on “Input1” row and
“Cut” the information and “Paste”
it in the intended row. / / / / / Since it is possible that some users have also performed a “Megger”
test for this equipment and they wish to have its results in a report, in “Megger Test Report” tab, they
can select their intended row
and column and by pressing “Insert”, created their required table and after inserting the test results
and selecting “Add to Report”, add the information to the output report. Other options such as “Delete
Report” are used to delete information
of this page from the report. Also, “Export” and “Import” options are used to export the information of
this page as an output file and import it if necessary. If the user wishes to set the characteristics of
the created row and column
as default for this section of the room, they can use “Set as Default” option. / /
INTRODUCING “TRANSFORMER” ROOM Power transformer tests are performed in “Transformer” room. This
room comprises of nine tabs. In “Test Object” tab, information and the nominal characteristics of the
transformer are entered from the “Name Plate”.
In any of the “Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load”, “Magnetic Balance”, “Winding Resistance”,
“Continuity Tap Changer”, “Leakage Reactance” and “Demagnetize” tabs, one of the tests of the
transformer are performed. Also, in “Megger
Test Report” tab it is possible to enter the insulation resistance test or “Megger”. Also, In “Vector
Group Check” it is possible to test the transformers vector group independently. / “Test Object” Tab
“Test Object” tab: as mentioned
earlier, the nominal characteristics of the transformer being tested are entered in this tab. In
“Transformer Data” section, a group of information including serial number, name of the manufacturer and
name of the manufacturing country
of the transformer as well as the location on which the transformer is used and the type of the cooling
system of the transformer are entered. In “Extra Data” section, the date of performing the test in AD,
the information regarding the
person who is performing the test and the information regarding the supervisor are entered in “Date”,
“Tested by” and “Approved by” fields respectively. / / By checking “Easy Mode” option in “Accessories”
section, the wiring type of tests
changes. This wiring is in accordance with the board which is designed by Vebko Company to test the
transformer. This board is located on the front panel of the device and on it there are relays to do the
wirings of the front panel of
the device automatically which makes performing the test easier. / In “Winding Configuration” section,
the vector group of the transformer as well as the type of wiring of its two ends are selected. The
wiring type of the primary and secondary
windings are entered in “Primary H” and “SecondaryX” fields and if there is a third winding, its wiring
type is entered in “TertiaryY” field. If the transformer has three windings, by checking “Three Winding”
option, the third winding
is added while if the transformer is single-phase, “1phase” option should be checked. In “Rating”
section, the nominal value of voltages and the apparent power of the transformer are specified. Also, in
“Voltage Rating” field, the primary
and secondary nominal voltages as well as the third one, in case of its existence, are entered. In
“Power Rating” field, the nominal power of the transformer as well as its impedance are entered in the
corresponding fields in terms of
KVA and percent, respectively. / / / / / The information regarding the tap changer of the transformer
needs to be entered in “Tap Changer” section. The tap changer type is selected from among “OLTC On-Load
Tap Changer” and “DETC De-Energized
Tap Changer” in “Type” field. In “Winding” field, it is required to specify that at which side of the
transformer winding is the tap changer located. In “No. of Taps” field, the number of taps of the tap
changer are entered while in “Start
Tap No.” it is specified that from what number the transformer taps to begin are. In the next step it is
necessary to enter the voltage of every tap which can be done in multiple ways. / / In the first method
if the distance between the
taps of the transformer is equal, the first, middle and last voltages are entered in “First Voltage”,
“Middle Voltage” and “Last Voltage” fields, respectively, so that the software can calculate the voltage
in other taps. In some “Name
Plates” of transformer, it may happen that only the middle tap voltage and the difference between the
tap voltages are mentioned in percentage. In this case, the “Middle” option is selected and the middle
tap deviation percentage as well
as its voltage are entered in “Deviation” and “Middle Voltage” fields, respectively, and the software
calculates the voltage of other taps automatically. If the difference between the taps is equal and
voltages of the first and second
taps are mentioned on the transformer plate, this option is selected and the voltage of “First Voltage”
and “Second Voltage” fields are entered. In all of the mentioned cases the voltage of the taps are
calculated and displayed in “Voltage
Value” table. If the distance between the taps is not equal or the user wishes to enter the tap voltages
manually, “Custom” option can be used. By selecting this option, “Voltage Value” table appears and you
can manually enter the voltage
for each tap. / / / / The tap changer type is specified in “Tap Control Setting” section. If you wish to
control the taps manually you should select “Manual” option; otherwise, select “Automatic Tap Control”
so that the taps are controlled
automatically. If “Automatic Tap Control” is selected, “Tap Changing Setting” and “State Termination”
sections are displayed. In “Tap Changing Setting” section, the settings related to tap changing is
specified. In “Impulse” field the
time during which the pulse is sent by the device binary to change the tap is specified. In fact,
“Raise” or “Low” command is issued by the device to change the tap for 1 second. In “Time” field the
stop time for each tap is specified
which is a 10-second delay after the tap change command is issued during which the tap changes. In
“State Termination” section, the ending style of every state to inject the voltage to the next tap is
specified. If “By Time” is selected,
the voltage injected in every tap is specified in accordance with the time selected in “Tap Changing
Setting” section and after the time is passed, a pulse is sent to change the tap. By selecting “By
Inprogress Contact” and using a contact
and connecting it to the binary inputs of the device, by changing the binary input mode, “AMT105” device
recognizes the tap change and regardless of the time entered for tap change, a pulse is sent to change
the tap. In “No. of Analog
Input” field, number of the binary used to detect the tap change is specified while in “Reverse” field,
the primary state of the binary input is specified. By selecting “Wet”, inprogress contact is determined
to be of the wet type and
its voltage level is entered in front of it. By selecting “Dry” option, the contact is determined to be
of the dry type. / / / The amount of allowed measurement tolerance to detect “Pass” and “Fail” of the
test is entered in “Tolerance”
section. In “Ratio dev.” Field, the allowed tolerance value for the measured phases is specified in
terms of degree. In “Winding Material” field in “Temperature Correction” section, the material used in
the windings is selected from among
“Copper” and “Aluminum”. The current temperature of the winding of the transformer and the reference
temperature for measuring the winding resistance are entered in “Winding Temp”, “Reference Temp.”
fields, respectively, so that the resistance
values measured are corrected in different temperatures. “Correction Factor” field is related to
transformer correction factor K Factor and by changing “Winding Material”, “Winding Temp.” and
“Reference Temp.” sections, this section changes
automatically. / / Also, by pressing “Add to Report” option in the box at the bottom of the screen, this
information is added to the output report and a message stating “The Report was added to the list” is
displayed. It is possible to
view the output report by selecting “Report” window from the box at the right side. By clicking on
“Delete Report” option in “Delete from Report” window, it is possible to delete the added report from
the “Report” window. If “Set as default”
option is selected, the entered values will be saved as default and every time, by opening the
“Transformer ” room this information is displayed. / / / /
“VECTOR GROUP, TURNS RATIO AND NO LOAD” TAB In the device and the software provided by Vebko
Company, turns ratio, vector group and no load current tests are performed simultaneously. To perform
this test, the voltage is applied from high
voltage side and the voltage of low voltage side is measured using binary inputs. In measuring the LV
side, the voltage and its angle are measured at the same time. Also, to measure no load current, actual
current of voltage outputs are
used. To perform this test, first, the test method must be selected from among “LL” and “LN” from “Test
Setting” section in field “Test Method”. In fact these methods determine the type of voltage applied to
the primary; in “LL” the voltage
applied is three phase while in “LN” the voltage is applied in form of phase to null or coil to coil.
Note that in both of these methods, the secondary voltage measurement is done in coil to coil form. In
“Direction” section, the direction
of the conversion ratio test is specified; the conversion ratio test direction for a three-coil
transformer is “Primary to Secondary” for a conversion ratio test between primary and secondary while it
is “Primary to Tertiary” for a conversion
ratio test between primary and tertiary. The test voltage is specified in “VLL” field while its
corresponding phase voltage is specified in “VLE” field. In “Stage Time” section, the time of voltage
application is specified; this time for
“LL” method is the time of test while for “LN” method, this time equals the time of voltage application
to each of the coils. / / / / / You can see two options of “Just Result” and “All Table” in “Add to
Report” drop-down field. By selecting
“Just Result”, only those parts of the table whose test has been performed are added to the report. But
if “All Table” is selected, the whole test table is added to the report. / In “Read Input Voltage”
field, the measurement method for
the actual voltage applied from the device is specified which can be selected from among “Actual
Voltage” and “Binary Input” of the device. In “Insert Mode” section, the settings related to inserting
the number of “Taps” are adjusted.
If you wish to insert all of the taps, you need to select “All Tap” and in “Sort Direction” field,
specify that whether the taps are to be inserted from top to down or down to top by selecting “Up” or
“Down”. If you wish to test a specific
tap, you need to select “Specific Tap” and then enter the number of your intended tap. Also, if you wish
to insert a specific number of taps, you need to select “In Range” and then specify your intended range.
After specifying the mentioned
information, by selecting “Insert Rows”, rows are inserted in the test table in accordance with the
number of taps of the transformer. If you wish to insert a number of taps in a specific position in the
table, you can use “Insert Position”
section. For example, here taps number one and two are inserted above tap number one. / / / Performing a
test for a transformer with off-load tap changer: to make a test file for a “Dyn11” transformer with
three taps and “Offload” tap
changer, “LL” should be selected as the “Test Method” and 50 volts line to line should be selected as
the test voltage and “Up” should be selected as the “Sort Direction” for the taps. Then, by selecting
“Insert Rows”, the test table is
created. To perform the test, first, you need to adjust the wiring in accordance with the picture. In
this wiring, the voltage resources are connected to the primary side of the transformer and to measure
the voltage, the secondary of
the transformer is connected to the inputs of the device according to the picture. Next, “Apply Test”
must be selected after selecting the intended row in the software. Here, all three rows of a “Tap” are
selected and then by pressing
“Apply Test” the test is performed and the results are recorded. The results of this test are recorded
in “I Prim. Meas.”, “V Sec. Meas.”, “TTR Act.”, “TTR Dev.”, “Phase Meas.” and “Phase Dev.” columns
respectively. The mentioned parameters
stand for no load current, the measured secondary voltage, the measured actual conversion ratio, the
diversion of the conversion ratio from the specified value, the measured phase and its diversion from
the actual value respectively. After
performing the test, the results of the test are assessed in “Assessment” column based on the factors
entered in “Tolerance” section. Considering these factors, the maximum allowed conversion ratio fault is
0.5 percent and the maximum
allowed phase diversion is 5 degrees; since the conversion ratio fault of phase number two is above the
specified amount, the assessment of this row fails and the two other phases pass. It is possible to view
the result for any of the
phases categorized as “Turn Ratio Result”, “Vector Group Result” and “Current” by selecting its
corresponding row. / / / / / / / / / Also in “Plot” section, the results of the test as well as the
changes of the parameters measured in different
taps are displayed in form of diagrams. In this section, “TTR”, “Ratio dev”, “V phase”, “Phase dev” and
“No load Current” diagrams are displayed for every phase and it is possible to remove the diagram by
unchecking it. / Performing the
test for a transformer with “On Load” tap changer: There are three methods to perform a test for a
transformer with “On Load” tap changer. “Manual” method: in this method, it is possible to select all
rows of the table and then “Apply
the Test”. After the test is finished for every tap, a message stating that “To Continue the Test, Press
the Space Button” appears. In this case, you need to change the transformer tap manually and then
continue the test by pressing the
space button. This procedure continues until the last tap is tested. / “Automatic Tap Control, By time”
method: in this method which has its own wiring, from the “Tap Changer” command panel, you should take
two contacts of “Raise” and
“Lower” to the binary out of the device in accordance with what can be seen in the wiring so that after
testing every “Tap”, the command is applied to “Tap Changer” as long as the value specified in “Impulse”
field and the “Tap” change
operation begins. By applying the “Tap” change command, after the time specified in “Time” field, the
next “Tap” test begins. This time is allocated for waiting for the “Tap Changer” to settle on the next
“Tap” of the transformer. This
procedure continues until the last “Tap” test is performed. In performing this test, just like the
“Manual” method, “Apply Test” is selected after selecting all of the rows. After applying, the test
begins automatically. / / “Automatic
Tap Control, By Inprogress” method: this method has one more step of wiring than the previous method and
in addition to time, it has the condition of contact reception. This means that, from the command panel,
two contacts that indicate
the state of “Tap Changer” should be brought to the input number 8 of the device so that if the “Tap”
change occurs before the specified time, the next “Tap” test begins. In performing this test, like other
methods, “Apply Test” is selected
after selecting all of the rows. After applying the test, it begins automatically. / / /
“MAGNETIC BALANCE” TAB The transformer magnetic flux test is performed in this tab. In this test,
the voltage is applied to a voltage transformer coil and the voltage of other coils is measured and the
flux division ratio between the two other
coils is analyzed. Two important points for this test are that firstly magnetic balance test is not
performed for single-phase transformers and secondly, this test can be performed on three-phase
transformers only in the side where there
is a grounded neutral. / Flux division test has three steps for every phase. In the first step, voltage
is applied to coil #1 and voltages of the two other coils are measured. In the second step the second
coil is short circuited and voltage
is applied to the coil of phase #1 and voltages of the two ends of the third coil are measured. In the
third step, the third coil is short circuited and by applying voltage to phase #1, voltages of the two
ends of coil #2 are measured.
These steps are repeated for the two other phases. Note that the voltage of the short circuited coil is
zero and during all three steps, sum of the measured voltages of the two coils must equal the voltage
applied to the first coil. If
“Dev.” option is checked, the total difference between the two measured phases and the phase to which
the voltage is applied is calculated and is displayed in “Dev%” field in terms of a percentage of the
applied voltage. Also, if you wish
to measure the voltage that occurs to the secondary side of the transformer during the test, you can use
“W2” option. Note that if this option is checked, you need to do another step of wiring. / / / In “Test
Setting” section, the settings
related to the test is entered. Also, in “VLE Test” and “State Time”, the amount of voltage of the test
and the test performance time of the test are entered, respectively. In “Display Values” it is specified
that the test results are
to be displayed as numerical values in terms of volt or as a percentage of the voltage of the test. If
“Absolute” is selected, the applied voltage and the measured voltages of different taps are displayed in
terms of volt while if “Relative”
is selected, these voltages are displayed in terms of a percentage of the test voltage. / / The use of
"Insert Mode" and "Insert Position" sections are exactly the same as those explained in conversion ratio
test video. In “Magnetic Balance
Result”, the results of the flux division test are displayed. This section is designed to help better
analyze the test results. In this section, the voltage is injected from a phase and the voltage induced
to the two ends of the coil is
read by the inputs and displayed in this section. By checking “Insert Rows”, a row is added to the test
table in accordance with the settings adjusted in “Total Result” and all the results of the test are
displayed in a row. / / Performing
the test and analyzing the results: “15” volts is specified to perform the test and after selecting
“Insert Rows” and inserting the transformer “Taps”, the wiring needs to be done in accordance with the
picture. In this wiring, you only
need to connect the voltage outputs of the device to the transformer and the inputs of the device. To
measure the voltage, open signal view before beginning the test so that you can view the voltage signal,
“Actual Current” and the voltage
measured by the binary inputs of the device during the test. By selecting the related row and pressing
“Apply Test”, the necessary hardware and software changes are applied automatically and the test starts.
Note that if “Start Test” option
is selected instead of “Apply Test”, the test will not begin. / / / In the end after the test is
finished, it is necessary to add the results of the evaluation to the report, which is done by selecting
“Add to Report”. In addition, if
you wish to add specific parts of the evaluation to the report, edit, or delete the report, you can use
“Add to Report” cog. By clicking on this cog, you can see that the elements, which can be added to the
report, are displayed with a
checkmark and it is possible to uncheck any of them that you do not need in your report. Note that after
finishing every test, the results are not added to the report automatically and it is a necessity to add
the test results to the output
report by pressing “Add to Report” before “Clearing the Test” and after performing a test. / In
perfuming this test, it is vital to consider some points: the first point is that “Error Other” in
performing the test means that there is
a problem in connection of the wirings and the null point of the device is connected to its phase. The
second point is that if “Error Power” appears during performing a test, it means that too much current
is drawn from the voltage phases
and you need to decrease the test voltage to resolve this issue. / / / /
“WINDING RESISTANCE” TAB *One of the most common and important tests of transformers is the winding
resistance test. In this test the amount of “DC” resistance or “Rmeas” is calculated by dividing the
voltage measured through the binary inputs
by the injected current. To perform this test, first, you need to specify the primary or secondary side
among “HV” and “LV” in “Side” field. Note that, if the transformer has three windings, “TV” is added to
the two mentioned options.
Then, you need to specify the test time and current in “I Test” and “State Time” fields in “State
Setting” section, respectively. Since transformers have a big self-inductance and core, in the beginning
of DC injection, there is a huge
difference between the actual current and the specified current and after some time, the actual current
is equal to the specified time. This time is entered in the “Initiated Time” field. Due to the
fluctuation in voltage and DC current
during this time, the measured resistance has a lot of fluctuations. Since resistance measurement must
happen in a situation with the least voltage and DC current fluctuations, the maximum allowed
fluctuations of the impedance and the
shortest time during which the measured impedance needs to fluctuate below the “Nominal Stability” value
are specified in “Nominal Stability” and “Stable Time” fields, respectively. The current measurement
mode is specified in “Current
Measurement Mode” section and if the current is below 0.6 amps, “Analog Input” should be selected while
if it is higher than 0.6 amps, “Actual Current” should be selected. / / / / *The voltage measurement
mode is specified in “Voltage
Measurement Mode”. Since the resistance measurement method divides voltage by the current, voltage Range
of the binary inputs affects the measurement accuracy. Therefore, it is necessary to select one of the
inputs of this section for
measurement based on the winding resistance and the maximum resistance specified to each binary input.
If the resistance is bigger than the specified range, the device shows an “Overvoltage” error, in which
case, you need to either decrease
the current or increase the resistance measurement range. Also, if you are facing an “Error Other” of
the current outputs, you need to decrease the current. / / *The order and the position of the “Taps” of
the transformers are specified
in “Insert Mode” and “Insert Position” section. The mentioned section has already been explained in the
video related to the test. Another one of the most important options of the software, which helps a lot
in accelerating the test, is
“Sort Mode”. Generally, for tap changer transformers it is suggested that this option is set at “Phase”;
by doing so, it is possible to test all taps of a phase and then go to the next phase. But if “Tap No.”
is selected, first you need
to measure the resistance of all three phases and then change the tap. For example, suppose that your
transformer has 21 taps. By setting “Sort Mode” at Phase and selecting “Insert Rows” you can see that
the rows are arranged according
to the selected phase which helps a lot to increase the speed of the test. After creating the table, you
need to select the intended row and then adjust the wiring according to the guide picture and then run
the test by pressing “Apply
Test”. / / Running the Test and Analyzing the Results *To perform this test, for example, the “HV” side
with three “Offload” taps and 0.5 amps of current is tested for all three taps. The settings related to
time is left at its default
and “Sort by” is set at “Phase” and then by pressing “Insert Rows”, the test table is created. The
“Signal View” window is opened so that it is possible to view the current changes of the read voltage.
To perform the test, the first row
is selected, the wiring is adjusted in accordance with the guide picture. Then the first row is selected
and test runs by pressing “Apply Test”. By running the test, the changes of the measured voltage as well
as the injected current can
be viewed. You can see that by changing the voltage and the current, the value of “Stability” changes as
well and the test goes on until these changes reach below 1 percent. After the time test is finished,
the actual voltage and current,
“Stability” and the measured and corrected resistance according to the reference temperature are
inserted in “Test Object”. To continue the test, two other rows are selected and the test is applied.
Then, the wiring is adjusted for the
next phase according to the guide picture and three rows are selected and the test is applied. After the
test is finished, in “Plot” tab, the curve resistance change in different “Taps” and phases can be
viewed. In the end, by pressing
“Add to Report”, the results are added to the report. / / / / / / / / / **Some Points about Winding
Resistance Test *Since these transformers have a huge self-inductance, injecting “DC” current causes
huge voltage “Spikes” and the more
the injected current, the bigger the created voltage. This voltage causes two problems: the first
problem is “Error Overvoltage” of the inputs of the device; as you know, if the voltage of the input is
more than 0.1 second bigger than
the value specified for it, the device displays an error. Therefore, if the caused voltage “Spikes” have
too long durations, the device may display an error. Another problem is the voltage that occurs to the
“Mosfets” of the device. In
case of injecting too big currents, this voltage damages the device. Therefore, we suggest to consider
these points while injecting the current.
“LEAKAGE REACTANCE“ TAB This tab is used to calculate the transformer leakage reactance value. In
fact, the short circuit voltage is the voltage applied to the primary coil while the secondary coil is
short-circuited. In the short circuit
voltage, the nominal current is established on both sides of the transformer. The active power absorbed
in the short circuit voltage is the same as the transformer losses. The purpose of obtaining the value
of the short circuit voltage
is to calculate the transformer losses. As the load current increases, the short circuit voltage
increases linearly. The short circuit voltage is obtained using the following equation. / In this
formula, Ucc, Uccm, Ir, and Im are the values
of the short circuit voltage in the Ir nominal current, the value of the short circuit voltage in the Im
measuring current, the nominal current and the measured current, respectively. Now, to calculate UK%,
the short circuit voltage calculated
in the above formula is used in the following equations. / In the above equation, Ur is the transformer
nominal voltage while ԑccm=UK%. It is necessary to observe some points in this test. To short circuit
the secondary side, the cable
size is calculated. Cable size or short circuit busbar on the secondary side are obtained using an
example. Suppose There is a transformer with 7.5 MVA of nominal power, 33 to 11 KV conversion ratio with
Dyn11 vector group and a %10 short-circuit
voltage. The primary and secondary nominal current equal 131 Amp and 393 Amp, respectively. The CT turns
ratio equals 800 to 5 amp on the secondary side and 150 to 50 amp on the primary side. Considering the
conversion ratio on the primary
side, the UK% value of the transformer equals 10 percent. Therefore, the short-circuit voltage is
obtained to be 3300 volts which means that if 3300 volts are applied to the primary of the transformer,
while the secondary is short-circuited,
the nominal currents pass through the primary and secondary of the transformer. Assuming a 400 volts of
voltage being applied to the primary of the passing currents, the primary and secondary are obtained
using the following equation.
/ Taking into account the current value obtained in the secondary side, the cable cross section is
selected in accordance with the passing of this current. If CT is present in the transformer, to avoid
CT excitation, the secondary terminals
are short-circuited. Also, this test is performed in the nominal tap and then the highest and lowest
taps. It should be noted that to avoid sudden increase of the current during the test, the voltage is
increased gradually. To do so, first,
a “Continuous Ramp” state is created to avoid inrush current in the transformer. The measurement current
must not be smaller than the nominal current but if this is not feasible, according to the IEEE Std
C57.152™-2013 Revision of IEEE
Std 62TM-1995, as much as 50 percent of the nominal current can be used instead. It should only be noted
that if the secondary winding of a transformer is yn, the secondary neutral should not be connected to
the other phases. In “State
Settings”, the test voltage value and the test time are specified. If the transformer has several taps,
“Insert Mode’ you can specify in which taps and in what order to add them to the test table. In “All
Tap”, you can specify how the
taps are arranged, from top to bottom or from bottom to top. In “Specific Tap”, you can select a
specific tap; And in “In Range”, you can specify from one tap to a specific tap. “Insert Position” also
specifies where the newly added test
row should be above the selected row, below it, or after the last row. After performing the wiring shown
in the figure, by clicking on “Insert Rows” for each phase, a new row is added, in front of each of
which, the name of the phase and
Uk and the nominal power of the transformer are written. These values come from the “Test Object” tab in
“Power Ratings” section by default, but they can also be changed from inside the table. After performing
the test, by clicking on
the row of each phase, either in “Result Selected” section or inside the same row, the test results are
displayed. In the fields “Iact”, “V meas” and “V phase” the amount of current drawn from the specified
voltage phases, the actual value
of the injected voltage and the injection voltage phase is specified, respectively. The short-circuit
voltage and its deviation from the specified value which are displayed on the transformer plate are also
specified in “Uk calc” and “Uk
dev” fields. To execute this test, a transformer with Dyn11 vector group and a UK%=3.3% is used. First,
the values are entered in Test Object and after configuring the wiring, by right-clicking on the table
and clicking on Apply Test the
test is executed and the test results for each phase can be viewed. Also, the waveform of the voltage
injection and the current drawn from the transformer is displayed in Signal View.
“DEMAGNITIZE” TAB To eliminate the residual flux of a transformer, the demagnetize tab is used. For
example, after executing a DC resistance test, it is generated in the transformer. Demagnetizing is done
in such a way that a DC current is
injected in steps and decrements in direct and reverse directions to each phase of the transformer. /
The amount of injection current is entered in “I Test” field. / In “Test Method”, the test method is
determined as single-phase or three-phase.
By changing this section, the wiring changes as shown on the right of the page. / / It’s specified in
“Side” field to perform the test on the transformer. By changing this section, the wiring changes as
shown on the right. / / In “Phase”,
each of the phases A, B and C can be specified for testing. By changing this section, the wiring changes
as shown on the right of the page. / / In “State Time”, the time of each state to change the current is
specified. / After configuring
the wiring in accordance with the picture, to execute the test, first press “Init Test” button, then run
the test. In “Signal View”, the injected current and the actual current value are displayed; this
current value turns zero as soon
as the demagnetization is completed. / /
OVERCURRENT QUICK TEST ROOM On the Start page of the software, by clicking on „Overcurrent Quick
Test“ from „Special Test“ subcategory,enter an environment that is used for overcurrent quick test.
Generally, in this room it is possible to
test the overcurrent elements in the shortest time possible by entering the essential settings yet this
section is exclusively used to test relays that need a high burden such as electromechanical and disc
relays whose pickup and drop-off
is measured in accordance with the disc movement. wiring for this test can be viewed on the right side
of the page. By default, it is possible to access „Report“, Signal View“, „Detail View“ and „Measurement
View“ windows from the bar
on the right side of the room; also, if necessary, it is possible to access the other windows by using
the main menu of the software. After specifying the phase in „Inputs“ section, the amount of the current
setting and the time are entered
and the performance curve type is specified. Here CDG11 relay of GEC brand with 0.1 amp as the setting,
0.2 as the performance time and normal inverse as the time characteristic is being tested. If the
„Instantaneous“ unit of the relay
is active, it is necessary to enter its amount of the current setting and performance time in Ins
section. In ΔI it is possible to enter the start value of the injected current as well as the increase
or decrease step of the current for
Pickup and Drop-off tests. In this test, 95 milliamperes is specified as the start value for the
injected current and 1 milliampere is entered as the increase step of the injection current. The reason
behind designing this room is enabling
the users to use shortcuts to manage and enhance test speed. By opening the Table View window, it is
possible to view the created states. It should be noted that it is possible to adjust the change step of
the current using – or + keys
during the test. If the Up arrow key is pressed, the amount of the injected current increases in
accordance with the specified step. By pressing ctrl+↑ combination key, it is possible to reset the
amount of the injected current. In the
end, by pressing Enter key, the obtained values are saved. Now view the actual value of the injected
current in „Actual Current“ section. Also, in the result section, pickup and drop-off current values,
tripping time in 2 and 4 times the
pickup current and the instantaneous performance time along with the error value are recorded. Finally,
after doing the test, it is necessary to add the results of the evaluation to the report which is done
by selecting “Add to Report”.
Also, if you wish to add specific parts of the evaluation to the report or delete or edit the report,
you need to use “Add to Report” cog. By clicking on this cog, the items that can be added to the
“Report” are displayed as checked checkboxes
and if you wish any of them not to be added to the report, simply uncheck the intended checkbox. It
should be noted that after doing the tests, the results are not automatically added to the report and
after doing every test, it is necessary
to manually add the results of the performed test to the report by pressing “Add to Report” before
Clearing the test.
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST ROOM On the start page of the software, by clicking on "Under Over Voltage
Test“ from „Special Test“ subcategory, enter the environment related to testing numbers 27 and 59
voltage functions. This room is designed to
simplify testing the mentioned functions and create various states automatically. „Under Over Voltage
Test“ room is composed of six main windows of „Instrument Test“, „Detail View“, „Signal View“, „Table
View“, Report“ and „Measurement
View“ and for a better analysis and examination, it is possible to add other windows such as „Vector
View“ from the menu at the top. To begin, different information such as relay type, serial number,
station name, feeder/be number and
the name of the device manufacturer must be entered in „Test Object“ section. The date of performing the
test in AD, the information of the performer of the test and the information of the supervisor of the
test are entered in „Date“,
„Tested by“ and „Approved by“ fields, respectively. This information will be used in the final report.
In ‚Test Settings“ section, the intended function is selected from among „OV“ and „UV“ in „Function
Type“ field. Also, the secondary
nominal voltage and the operation mode are selected from among OR and AND in „Vnom sec“ and „Operation
mode“ fields, respectively. If the mentioned functions need a current value to operate, such as „Minimum
Current“ element, it is possible
to check „Enable Current“ option and select the necessary current value. If the intended connection of
the user is open delta connection, they can check “Open Delta” option. Every time „Insert Row“ is
pressed a row in „Data Table“ is created
in accordance with the number of voltage stages entered in the relay to enter the information of every
Stage. In the created row, the stage number is entered in „Stage No“ and in „V setting“ section, the
amount of the voltage setting for
the mentioned functions is entered. In „Voltage Type“ section, the voltage calculation algorithm is
specified which can be in form of phase to earth or phase to phase. Also, the time settings are entered
in „Time Setting“ section. „Reset
Ratio“ is the reference considered for measuring the amount of reset voltage, „Tol.Time“ is the amount
of the accepted time error in form of percentage and „Tol.Voltage“ determines the amount of the accepted
voltage error in the result
of the test. The settings related to „States“, „Binaries“, Pickup“ and „Dropoff“ are entered in
„Testing“ tab. Also, it is possible to specify the voltage change condition from among „Continuous Ramp“
and „Step Ramp“ in „State Type“ section.
In „State Pickup/Drop Out Termination“ section, the condition for ending the pickup and dropoff is
selected in form of a separate contact such as C2 or pressing Space key at the same time as the LED
turns on or the Trip contact. The conditions
for recording the Trip is specified in „State Trip Termination“ section. Also, it is possible to
consider a different binary input for recording pickup-dropoff or trip in „Hardware Configuration“
section. By pressing „Add Row“ key in „Test
Plan“ section, new rows are added for the test in accordance with the stages created in „Test Object“.
If „Continous Ramp“ option is checked in „State Type“ section, the settings are as follows: In „Stage
No“ section, it is possible to
specify the stage number of the function operation. In „Fault Type“ section, the fault type for every
phase or a combination of phases is selected. In „Time Test“ section, it is specified that whether the
user wishes the voltage function
operation time to be estimated or not. In „Vtest“ section, the voltage in which the relay operation time
is going to be examined is entered. In „PU Test“ and „ DOU Test“ sections it is specified that whether
the user wishes to perform
these two tests or not. In „PU Val. Assess“ section, the evaluated value from the pickup voltage is
entered and in „PU Start“ section, the start point of the voltage test is specified. „PU End“ and „DOU
End“ stand for the final voltage
value in the pickup and dropoff, respectively. In „Total“ section, the time duration considered for
every pickup or out dropoff state is entered. The longer this time, the more continuos paces. If „Step
Ramp“ option is selected in „State
Type“ section, instead of „Total“ column, „dt PU“ which is the time duration considered for every
voltage change pace in pickup states, „duDOU“ which is the time duration considered for every voltage
change pace in dropoff states and „dv“
which is the amount of the voltage change paces are specified. After entering the mentioned values, by
clicking on „Init Test“, the user can view the states that are created in „Table View“, and in
„Measurement View“, in „Time Assessmet“
and „Ramp Assessment“ windows, see that the values are entered as the test result evaluation. It should
be noted that by selecting any State and pressing the middle button of the mouse, the user can view the
details related to that state.
Running the test and analyzing the results As an example, here an overvoltage function with 76 volts as
the setting, and 4 seconds as the time setting in Micom P141 relay is tested. After applying the
necessary settings in the relay, the
configuration is specified as it can be seen. For this purpose, LEDs 1 and 4 of the relay are configured
to show the pickup and the trip of this function, respectively. In the output contacts section, R4 is
specified as the contact for
recording the pickup. Moreover, R6 output contact in the relay is configured as a trip contact. To run
the test, by opening a new window in „Over/Unver Voltage“ room and after entering the primary
information such as the relay type, serial
number, station name, feeder/be name and the manufacturer company, as an example, function OV is
selected and the secondary voltage is set at 110 volts and OR is selected as the operation mode so that
the results are recorded with pickup
or trip of any of the phases. Since here there is no need for current injection, Enable Current option
is not enabled. Also, since here open delta connection is not the case, Open Delta option is not
selected either. In Data Table, stage
1 is selected and the voltage setting is set at 76 volts the value specified in the relay and LN is
selected in Voltage Type section. The time setting of the relay is 4 seconds which is entered in Time
Setting section. Now by going to
the State Setting in Testing section, Continuous Ramp option is selected. Here binary C2 and C1 are
selected to record the pickup and drop and record the trip, respectively. Since the purpose of the
overvoltage element test is to test
all three phases, Fault Type option is set at L1E L2E L3E. 80 volts is entered In Vtest section which is
bigger than the voltage specified in the relay settings and the relay must give a trip in this voltage.
Also, by selecting Yes in
“PU Test” and “DOU Test” section, pickup test and drop out will be done. In PU Val.Assess section, the
approximate estimation of the value expected for the pickup which is 75.5 is entered. The test voltage
start value and the final voltage
value for the pickup test are specified in PU Start and PU End sections, respectively. DOU End is the
final voltage value for ending the dropout test. The total time is entered in Total section. Now Init
test button is pressed so that
the states are created in „Table View“ in accordance with the entered information. After running the
test, the results of the evaluation can be viewed in „Measurement View“ window, „Time Assessment“ and
„Ramp Assessment“ tabs. In the end,
after runing the test it is necesary to add the results to the report which is done by pressing „Add to
Report“. Also, if you wish to add specific parts of the test to the report or delete or edit the report,
you need to use “Add to Report”
cog. By clicking on this cog, the items that can be added to the “Report” are displayed as checked
checkboxes and if you wish any of them not to be added to the report, uncheck the intended checkbox. It
should be noted that after doing
the tests, the results are not automatically added to the report and after doing every test, it is
necessary to manually add the results of the performed test to the output report by pressing “Add to
Report” before Clearing the test.
AMT AR ROOM Various studies have shown that around 70 to 90 percent of the faults in overhead power
lines are transient. At lower-level voltages such as distribution, there are fewer and about 80 percent
transient faults while in higher-level
voltages such as transmission, this value is about 90 percent. Thunder is one of the most common reasons
for a fault to occur. The swinging of the wires or short-circuit of the grid with sundry objects is
another cause for the occurrence
of transient faults. Most faults can be solved by correctly using the trip process or reconnection so
that the grid disconnection time reaches a minimum. To test any type of reclosers, its exclusive room
which is AMT AR can be used. The
main window of this room is Instrument AR. Also, it is possible to access other windows from the View
menu or the bar on the right side of this page. To begin the test, first, the user needs to insert the
functions that need the reconnection
process to be examined for them into the Data Table. Therefore, it is possible to examine and assess the
action or inaction of the AR for different functions. By clicking on “Add Cycle”, the next rows are
added so that the reconnection
is examined after the selected functions. After selecting the title of the function, the user only needs
to enter the performance characteristic and its settings for the delay and instantaneous units. After
that, the amount of the injected
current and the fault angle are entered so that the time duration for different states is determined in
accordance with the selected Curve. Dead Time and Reclaim Time are two other options that are used to
speed up making the states. Finally,
in the Expected section, the user needs to specify their expectation from the success or failure of the
recloser after the action of the specified function. In the next step, the user needs to specify the
necessary Binary Inputs and Binary
Outputs in accordance with the elements required for the recloser test. It should be noted that for the
convenience of the users, the important signals are available in the drop-down list by default. In this
section, by selecting Add Row
and Delete Row options, it is possible to add a row to add the binaries and delete the selected row,
respectively. Considering the two types of the reclose test including laboratory testing simulation of
the binary of the outputs by the
test device and receiving the binaries by the device and testing in power stations receiving binary of
the inputs by the device and presence of the binary outputs through the wiring post, some of the titles
are common between the two lists
of inputs and outputs. After selecting the number of the binary input and signal, it is possible to
specify its influence on the current states including PreFault, Fault, Deadtime and Reclaim time. In
other words, the condition for ending
every state is determined by the binary inputs. In the next step, after selecting the number of the
binary output and its signal, the user only needs to specify its condition for every state. This is most
useful in cases where, for example,
signals such as CB Ready or Close and Open are needed and testing the relay in the laboratory is
intended. After adjusting the settings, by clicking on Init Test option, the states are created. These
states can be viewed from Table View
section. Also, it is possible to compare the different settings and elements of every state with more
details in Detail View section. In this video, the AR function test for the MiCOM P139 relay is going to
be performed. In this test,
the recloser function is activated after the occurrence of the earth fault. To begin, the user needs to
go to the settings section of the relay and set the parameters related to the functions. Here, in the
subcategory number one of parameters,
function DTOC is assigned to SEF protection. In IDMT1 section, the protections of OC and EF are of the
delay type while in IDMT2 section, the protections of OC and EF are set at the instantaneous type. Now,
by going to the ARC section,
the settings related to the auto-recloser are adjusted. Here, the TDR option refers to recloser with
time delay; Dead Time and Reclaim Time are set at 4 and 20 seconds, respectively, but it is also
possible to activate the HSR which is
the high-speed recloser. Next, the outputs are configured. Moreover, in INP section, the inputs needed
for the assessment and the test are configured. By referring to the relay manual, it is possible to view
an outline of the behavior
of the P131 recloser function. In certain situations such as cases where there is a manual close,
external signal, ARC function deactivation, and manual trip and protection deactivation, the recloser
will be blocked. It is possible for
the user to examine these signals in the AR room of the AMPro software. The user can begin the test
after ensuring that the necessary conditions for the recloser to perform are met; these conditions
include activating the protection, not
blocking the ARC function, and being able to open and close the breaker and have the close state of the
key. To adjust the relay wiring, the user can use the connection diagram from the manual. The user needs
to go to the AMT AR room one
more time and add the two functions of earth fault and overcurrent. It should be noted that in the first
step, reconnection is tested for the earth fault function. This step must be passed successfully and
receiving the close signal or
the connection needs to happen as well. After specifying the settings related to this function in the
first row, single-phase fault to earth is selected and Dead Time and Reclaim Time values are entered.
Also, in the Expected section,
the expectation from the act of reconnection is set at successful. In the next row, OC function is
added. Similarly, the settings related to the delay and instantaneous stages as well as the fault
current value, fault type, Deadtime value
and Reclaim Time value are entered. In this section, we expect the act of reconnection to be
unsuccessful. Now it is time to configure the input binaries. In this section, connection trip and pulse
are selected from the list in this exact
order. Here, trip is selected as the finisher element for the Fault state. It is also possible to select
Close Pulse or Reclosure Successful as the finisher element for the Deadtime state. This should be noted
that the “PreFault” state
time is automatically longer than the “Reset Time” or “Reclaim Time”. In the binary outputs section,
three signals of CB Close, CB Open and CB Healthy or AR Ready are added. Here it is possible to specify
the status of every signal for
different states ranging from “PreFault” to “Fault”, Dead Time”, and “Reclaim Time”. Finally, the
“States” are created by clicking on “Init Test” option. The user can view the created states by opening
the Table View window. After creating
the states, it is possible to adjust the necessary settings for the assessment in the “Assessment”
section. Also, after performing the test, it is possible to assess the performance of the recloser for
these two functions. In the end,
by clicking on “Add to Report” option, the test result is added to the created report.
RESISTANCE TEST By clicking on “Resistance” on the “Start” page of the software, ohm resistance test
room opens. In this room it is possible to measure ohm resistance of various equipment in the
“Resistance Test” tab. “Test Object” and “Megger
Test Report” tabs are used to enter the nominal information of the equipment and the results of the
“Megger” test, respectively. / / / “Test Object” tab: To perform a test, every module needs information
about the equipment. This information
is entered in “Test Object”. In “Resistance Data” section, the general information about the piece of
equipment which is to be recorded in the output report is entered. The name of the equipment, serial
number, name of manufacturer, type,
name of company, name of country and the address to the location and the power station where the
equipment is installed are entered in “Name of Device”, “Serial Number”, “Manufacturer”, “Type”,
“Company”, “Country” and “Station” fields,
respectively, to be added to the report. / In “Resistance” section, the temperature and ohm range of the
equipment are entered. The ambient temperature is entered in “Ambient Temperature” field while the
temperature correction factor in
accordance with the current ambient temperature and the reference temperature, and also the coil
material, the amount of ohm resistance, and Dev+ and Dev- of the resistance tolerance are entered in
“Temperature Correction Factor” field.
/ In “Extra Data” section, the date of testing in Gregorian calendar, the information of the performer
of the test, and the information of the supervisor are entered in “Date”, “Tested By” and “Approved By”
fields, respectively. / The
RMS value of each parameter is calculated based on the average of several time periods. The bigger
number of time periods, the longer the calculation takes which consequently leads to higher accuracy and
less fluctuations. The number of
time periods is eneterd in Averaging field in Noise Suppression section. This field is the same as No.
of Period field in Setting in Signal View window. / By clicking “Add to Report” option at the box at the
bottom of the screen, this
information is added to the report and a message saying “Report was added to the list” is displayed. It
is possible to view the report by selecting “Report” window from the right toolbar. By clicking on
“Delete Report” in the “Delete from
Report” window, the added report is removed from the “Report” window. If “Set as Default” is selected,
the entered information is set as default and displayed every time the “Resistance” room is opened. / /
/ / / “Resistance Test” tab
To perform this test, it is necessary to enter the test current, time and the intended input for
measuring the voltage in “State Setting” section in “I test”, “State Time” and “Analog Input Target”
fields, respectively. Also, if the resistance
of the equipment is low and you wish to have a more accurate measurement, it is recommended to select
“Input 10”. In the next step, the connection type is to be selected from among “D-3ph, Y-3ph and
Yn-3ph/1ph” in “Object Type” section.
/ R=V/I If the single-phase or three-phase equipment which is to be tested is star point grounded, the
first radio button should be selected and the wiring should be adjusted in accordance with the range of
the injected current as well
as the voltage level as can be seen in the figure. The equivalent circuit for this type of wiring is
displayed as follows and the ohm resistance is calculated using the following relation: R=V/I / 2R=V/I
For a three-phase equipment without
a null point the second radio button should be selected and the wiring should be adjusted in accordance
with the range of the injected current as well as the voltage level seen in the figure. The equivalent
circuit for this type of wiring
is displayed as follows and the ohm resistance is calculated using the following relation: 2R=V/I / In
D-3ph method, the wiring is adjusted in accordance with the range of the injected current and the
voltage level as can be seen in the
figure. The equivalent circuit for this type of wiring is displayed as follows and the ohm resistance is
calculated using the following relation: 2/3R=V/I / The voltage measurement mode is specified in
“Voltage Measurement Mode”. Since
the method used to measure the resistance is dividing the voltage difference by the current, “Range” of
the “Inputs” voltage is effective in measuring the accuracy of resistance. Therefore, for measuring the
resistance, one of the inputs
of this section should be selected in accordance with the coil resistance and the maximum resistance
specified for every “Input”. If the resistance is greater than the selected “Range”, the device shows an
“Overvoltage” error. In this
case, either the current must be decreased or the resistance measurement “Range” must be increased. In
case of facing an “Error Other” of the current outputs, the current needs to be decreased. / Running the
test and analyzing the results
To begin the test, first in Test Object 200 milli ohm, 50 milil ohm, 10 amps, 1 second are specified as
ohm resistance, upper and lower tolerance, current and test duration, respectively; also Input2 is
selected “Analog Input Target”.
Then, Object Type is set at “Yn-3ph/1ph” and“VoltageMeasurement Mode” is set at Up to 28V and since the
approximate resistance is smaller than 200 milli ohm, Max Voltage is set at Up to 4.5V and then wiring
is adjusted according to the
figure. It should be noted that it is possible to magnify the figure by double-clicking on it. In this
wiring, “lA1” and “lB1” current output phases are “Jumpered” and “lA2” and “lB2” phases are directly
connected to the equipment. / /
/ / / / To measure the voltage difference, it is necessary to connect “Input2” to the test and further
ahead of current injection connectors. It should be noted that before running the test it is necessary
to click on “Init Test” so that
the device “config” is adjusted automatically. By selecting this option, the settings related to current
and test time as well as the hardware configurations related to “Hardware Configuration” including
outputs of the device and “Binary/Analog
Inputs” are adjusted automatically by the software. In “Analog Output” tab in “Hardware Configuration”
section, you can see that the wiring of the device is set at “32A” with the maximum “Burden” of 400
milli amps and “Binary/Analog Input”
#2 are activated to measure the voltage. After performing the test, in “Signal View” it is possible to
view the current waveform along with its “Actual” values and the measured voltage and also examine the
connections of the connectors.
/ / / After the test is finished, the test results can be viewed in “Result” section. The results
include “linj”, “Vmeas”, “Rmeas*C.F” and “Rdev” which refer to the amount of injected current, the
measured voltage, the measured impedance
and the difference between the nominal resistance and the resistance specified in “Rmeas*C.F” field,
respectively. It should be noted that by holding the cursor on either of these two fields, the relations
related to them are displayed.
In the end, after the test is finished, it is necessary to add the evaluation results to the report
which is done by selecting “Add To Report” in equipment test. / Also, if the user wishes to add specific
parts of the evaluation to the
report or edit the report, they need to use “Add to Report” cog. By clicking on this cog, the items that
can be added to the “Report” are checked and the user can simply uncheck any of them which they do not
need. It should be noted that
the results are not automatically added to the report after each test when a test is performed it is
necessary to add the test results to the output report by selecting “Add to Report” before “Clearing the
Test”. Also, if one of the “Analog
Outs” is faulty, the specified “Binary Out” should be changed; to do this, you must first click on "Init
Test", then tick "Don't Change Hardware Setting" option and by going to the "Hardware Configuration"
window, in the "Analog Out" tab,
"Output Target" change the selected wiring according to the wiring. / / / Two notable points about
performing this test are that „Error Other“ during a test indicates that there is a problem in
connection of the wirings or the resistance
is too high that the device unable to provide the required „Burden“ for current injection. Therefore, in
cases of facing this error, examine the „Actual“ current value in „Signal View“. If the current is
injected from the device „Actual
Current“ but its difference with the specified current is too big it means that the resistance is too
high while if the „Actual Current“ is zero, this means that the route current injection is open. In
cases where the resistance is too
high, the test current needs to be decreased while if the „Actual Current“ is zero, the connection of
the connectors needs to be examined. The second important point is that the voltage read by the binaries
of the device must have similar
cycles. If the read values have a too big or zero tolerance, this means that the connectors are not
properly connected. / / Since some users perform a “Megger” test for this equipment and they may need
the results in a report, it is possible
for them to enter their intended line and column in “Megger Test Report” tab and by selecting “Insert”,
create their needed table and after inserting the test results and selecting “Add to Report”, add the
information to the output report.
Other options such as “Delete Report”, “Export” and “Import” are used to remove the information of this
page from the report, exporting the output file only from the information of this page and importing it
if necessary, respectively.
Also, if the user wishes to set the characteristics of the created line and column as default for this
section of the room, they can use “Set as Default” option. /
THE COMPLETE MAIN SWITCHING The complete Main Switching, which is installed on switching number two,
is the main part of the switching device. On this board, we have several modules including LAN-GPS, Wifi
Module, Micro Module, Command Module,
Fan Controller Module and Power Supply PS Module. In some cases, we face some problems where we have to
replace one of these modules. Here we are going to explain how to replace a module. / If Wi-Fi
connection has issue or more specifically
we cannot connect to the device using the Wi-Fi and we have already performed all the tests and did not
get any result, we need to replace the Wi-Fi module. When we substitute the Main Switching of two
devices, we leave the Wi-Fi module
as it is so that we do not have to reset the Wi-Fi settings. This part is what is meant by Wi-Fi module.
This means that if we have a problem with the Wi-Fi and we want to swap the Wi-Fi of the two devices, we
open this screw and swap
only this module. This module is called Wi-Fi. / If there is a problem with the GPS module, in other
words if we have a problem connect to the GPS or the LAN connection we can conclude the LAN-GPS module
is not functioning properly, and
we need to swap this module. To swap this module, first we need to open this spacer, then open this
screw and then the LAN-GPS module is released. So, this is the Wi-Fi module and this is the LAN-GPS
module. / / The micro module is the
heart of the device. When we are performing different tests, there are some issues where we may conclude
that the microprocessor of the device is not functioning properly and we need to swap it. There is no
screw on the micro and it is
connected to the board only by some pins. To detach the module, we release it from one side and then
completely release it from the other side. This is how the micro module is detached. Reinstalling this
module is as easy as it was to
detach it. There are three pins at the bottom and five pins at the top, first we need to adjust them and
then the pins with a higher number are installed. This is how this module is installed. / / Next is the
“command” module in which
we have the Overcurrent error of board number two. Whenever we face the Overcurrent error of the board
number two, first we replace the “command” of the complete Main Switching side with the other side. The
screw is opened like this and
the module is detached and replaced with the command of the other side. After the replacement, we turn
the device on using a series lamps. Then connect the relays of the device and connect to the device. If
the Overcurrent error of board
number two is eliminated, this means that the problem was with this “command” and it must be corrected.
If the Overcurrent error of board two still remains, we need to examine the other parts which will be
explained later. / / Fan controller
module, in fact there are four fans in the device, two fans in the back panel, one fan on the heat sink
and another one on the amplifier module which will be explained later. If any of these fans be it the
heat sink fan or the fan on the
back panel which is on the same side as the switching is not working, and there is no problem with the
fan, then our conclusion is that the fan controller module is causing the problem and it needs to be
replaced. The module is opened
like this and then swapped with the other fan controller module and the problem is solved. / PS module,
in fact the 12 volt power of the modules is provided from here. When the device is turned on and
electricity enter the switching, there
is no problem but the fans not working means that power is not reaching the micro and it has no reaction
and only the power button is turned. In such cases, the problem may be with the PS module and it needs
to be replaced. This module
has four screws, two on the top side and two on the bottom side that are opened like this. / If the
problem is caused by this module or in other words you do not have the 12-volt power, a test must be
performed to see if the problem is
with the upper Minmax or the lower one. Then, the faulty one is replaced with the spare module. This is
one of the modules that are located on the Main switching and its function, how to move it and how to
replace it have been already
explained. Another point about PS module is that this module provides our switching set with two 12
volts DC and 5 volts DC Minmaxes. If we want to test to see whether this module is providing us with the
12 volt Minmax or the 5 volt Minmax,
there is a set of Pin Headers using which we can check these values. / These six upper Pin Header are 12
volts positive and these four lower pins are 5 volts positive and these eight pins in the middle with
GND phrase written on them.
This means that between measuring the voltage between GND and 12 volt we can make sure that the 12 volts
is healthy and between GND and 5 volts we can check to see if the circuit is provided with the 5 volt
voltage or not. If we do not
have any of these, one of the 12 volt or 5 volt Minmaxes is definitely damaged. / /
MAIN SWITCHING ERROR OVERCURRENT BOARD In the incomplete Main Switching, there are two problems that
can avoid the device from turning on and functioning. Sometimes the NTCs of these two parts and also
their diodes burn out. However, these
NTCs have been totally removed from the latest boards. In the old boards that have this part, if there
is any problem with it, it can be easily replaced with a piece of wire it should be short-circuited.
When this part burns out, the device
will not turn on because it has no power and it either becomes open-circuited or explodes. Normally,
this part has 11 ohm resistance which is a small amount. When this part burns out, its signs are totally
obvious. This part must be detached
as you can see and replaced with a piece of wire. This way the problem with the device is solved and we
will not have the problem of the device not turning on. / / / / / Another topic is three pairs of
diodes. In fact, these diodes are
located between the earth and phase, earth and null and phase and null. Whenever the earth of the system
we are using is electrified or its null and phase become one, one of these three pairs of diodes burns
out. In this case if the earth
of the device is connected and the device is turned on, the fuse of the device will definitely burn out
or the fuse of the place from which the electricity is taken will trip. In such case, you can only use
the device if the earth is not
connected to the device and it works without earth. To solve this problem, the diodes must be replaced.
It is so simple to test these diodes. First, remove the diode from the circuit and test it like this.
The diode is open from one side
and Overload from the other and all of the diodes are tested like this. Any of the diodes which is
burned out, needs to be replaced with a similar diode with the similar voltage. And this topic which was
about the earthing problem of the
device ends here. In cases where the earth has a problem, these diodes are damaged and need to be
repaired. / / There is one more notable point about overcurrent error of the board where if the problem
is with the command, the command
is opened like this and replaced with the command of the other side. Now, using a series lamp which will
be explained later, we turn the device on. If the device is turned on and the switching of side one is
activated and its relays are
connected, if the problem is with the command and we have replaced it, then the overcurrent error of the
board must be eliminated. / / / If the overcurrent error of the board number one still remains, the
problem is not with the command
and we have to move to the next stage.
OVERCURRENT ERROR OF BOARD 2 PART 1 Now we are going to examine this error. The first point is to
examine the “command” problem. By replacing the “command”, it is possible to find out if the “command”
is healthy or not. We replace the “command”
of this side with the “command” of the other side which we have detached before, take a test and turn
the device on. If the overcurrent error of board 2 still remains, it means that the “command” is healthy
and we need to check other possibilities;
if the error is eliminated, the overcurrent error of board 2 is eliminated, it means that its command is
damaged. Lets suppose that the overcurrent error of board 2 still remains as the command has be
replaced. To do this need to open
the Main Switching. Open the Main switching, open the two screws at the top, three in the middle and two
screws on the end of the board. Then detach the Main switching. To test these items, test the diodes
that are on the switching module.
/ The first diode is the one that is located on the transformer and to test this diode, It needs to be
released it from one side because it is connected to the both sides of the transformer and if a diode
test is performed it will show
short-circuit and it won’t be able to find out whether the diode is healthy or not. Here there are three
diodes to test. There are ten diodes here and two other diodes that are located at the voltage and
current output. First, following
the instructions that were given earlier, we detach one of the sides of the diode that is located on the
two sides of the transformer. The diode test of this diode must show overload in the both sides this is
a two-way diode and the result
must be overload in the both sides. If the route of the voltage is displayed in one side, this diode is
probably damaged. If the diode is overload in the both sides, it is healthy. If the diode is damaged,
remove the diode from the circuit
like this. Take the diode completely out of the circuit and if it is possible, replace it but if there
isn’t a diode, we can just remove this damaged diode from the circuit and the device will be fine. / / /
The next diodes that need to
be tested are these three diodes. The first diode must show overload from one side and a value as big as
0/8 from the other side. The second and third diodes are tested in the same way. If any of these diodes
is damaged, we can just remove
them from the circuit like we did with the diode that was on the both sides of the transformer and this
will not cause any problem for the device. If we have a spare diode, we can replace it with the damaged
part. The next diodes that
need to be tested are these ten diodes that are located here. These diodes pass the current from one
side and their other side is a closed route. z/ / / / / One notable point is that this diode belongs to
the DC voltage output. If this
diode is burned out, it shows us that this other two diodes are burned out. In the first stage, we need
to remove this diode from the circuit and then test these two diodes. Usually these two are shown to be
healthy. This means that this
diode’s burning out causes the other two diodes to be showed as burned out. But when this diode is
removed from the circuit, there is no sign of damage in these two diodes and they are healthy and this
problem is solved by removing from
the circuit. / These two here are the next diodes. We need to release them from one side like this and
then perform a diode test like this. They should be overload from both sides; if they let the current
pass from one side or show short-circuit
then that diode is burned out and must be removed or replaced with a spare part if possible. /
OVERCURRENT ERROR BOARD 2 PART2 IGBTs’ burning out can be another reason for an Overcurrent error of
board number two. / Here there are four IGBTs which are numbered as IGBT1, 2, 3, and 4 and they are
connected to each other two by two. IGBT
1 is connected to IGBT 3 and IGBT 2 is connected to IGBT 4. In testing them if IGBT 1 is burned out,
IGBT 3 will definitely be shown as burned out as well. In this case, it is possible that both of them
are burned out or maybe only one
of them is burned out. To detect the burned-out part, we need to remove one of the IGBTs from the
circuit and test it outside the circuit. If it is healthy then the other one is burned out. But if the
one outside the circuit is burned
out, we test the other IGBT on the board and if it is healthy there is no problem but if it is not
healthy then both IGBTs are burned out and need to be replaced. To test an IGBT, we need to test its
three pins including gate, drain and
source. Between drain and source, a diode test should be connected on one side and Overload from the
other side. Diode test between gate and source pins and between gate and drain pins should be Overload
on the both sides and if there
is a short-circuit or a value, the IGBT has been damaged. Now we test the IGBT. First between drain the
middle pin and source the right-side pin which is open from one side. The negative probe is connected to
drain pin while the positive
probe is connected to source pin. There is 0/48 value from one side and Overload from the other. Now we
take gate with drain and source, they should be both Overload and the results does not change if the
probes are swapped. There must
no plan to any other pins from drain. This test is the same for all pins. / Now we suppose that one of
these IGBTs is damaged which means that we have an Overcurrent problem of board number two. We tested
the diodes and they are all healthy.
So, our conclusion is that the problem must be with IGBTs. We tested the IGBTs and IGBT one and three
have signs of being burned out. Now we need to find out which one is burned out and explain how to
replace it. There is a holder on IGBTs
one which has five screws. This holder attaches all IGBTs to the heat sink applying the same amount of
pressure. To open it we need to open these five screws, and then the holder is released. Now we want to
remove IGBT number one from
the circuit. To do this we need a tool named desoldering suction. This too, in fact, removes the tin
from the circuit so that we can easily release the pins. Now we hold the soldering iron on the first pin
of the IGBT until the tin is
completely melted, then using the desoldering suction, we remove the tin. We repeat this for the rest of
the pins. If the tin is not completely removed, we can add some more tin and try removing the tin again.
We turn the module upside
down; by moving the IGBT we can easily remove it from the circuit. / / We test the IGBT one more time
outside the circuit. The pins of the IGBT are gate, drain and source. There is a connection between
drain and source from one side and
the diode test shows a number but from the other side, when we swap the probes, it shows Overload.
Between gate and drain and also gate and source there should be Overload. This means that there must not
be any route between gate and drain,
and gate and source. We test again, the drain middle pin and source show Overload from one side and a
number from the other side. Also, gate and drain, and gate and source are also Overload. / Now, this
IGBT is healthy; supposing that
there is a problem with the device, if this is healthy then definitely IGBT number three is damaged and
if we take a diode test, it must prove this theory. Since now all IGBTs are healthy, it is not possible
to show this., Suppose that
IGBT 1 was damaged and we replaced it and now we want to put it back in its place. Now we need to remove
the extra tin on its pins using a soldering iron because extra tin does not let the pins cross inside
the pads. There is an insulation
named mica on every heat sink and beneath every IGBT. In fact, this insulation is used to prevent any
connection between the body of this MOSFET and this heat sink which is located on the switching. / /
Before putting the IGBT back in
its place we need to check its pads and make sure that there is no tin left so that we can easily
install the IGBT. If there is any tin left inside the pads, we need to remove it using the desoldering
suction. The holes are opened like
this and this is how we put the IGBT back in its place. , Then we put the insulation back in its place
meticulously. It is necessary for the height of these IGBTs to be the same because to close the holder,
they all must be at the same
level and with the same amount of pressure. When the IGBT is adjusted, we put tin on one of the pins
like this and make sure that it is flat. Now we put tin on the other pins to stabilize them. The tin
must thoroughly cover the pins. The
crack you can see here needs to be evenly filled with tin. / / / When the IGBTs are removed, there is
metallized in these pads. After we remove the part, this metallized is damaged and rendered useless. In
fact, the metallized is the connection
between the upper and lower layer of the board. To solve this problem, we should tin-plate these pins
from above. We put the tin here so that the connection between the upper pins and the upper pads is
completely established, like this.
After we ensure their connection, it is time to close the holder. To close the holder, we begin by
fastening the middle screw. Then we put the holder back in its place and fasten the screw as long as it
is reached its end but not completely
fastened. Then we put the holder in a straight angle and fasten the other screws. The screws must be
fastened following this exact order so that the pressure applied to the IGBTs to attach them to the heat
sink is evenly distributed. /
/ Now we want to make sure that there is no body connection between the IGBT and heat sink. We set the
multimeter at ohm mode. We take an IGBT test from the middle pin of IGBT and the heat sink should be
Overload. Then we test all IGBTs
following the same procedure to ensure that there is no connection. So here the replacement of the IGBT
ends and now we can close the Main Switching and take a test to see whether the problem has been solved
or not. /
SWITCHING TROUBLESHOOTING Switching is composed of two parts switching one and switching two. This
part on which the microprocessor is located on is in fact switching number two. Both sides have a Main
Switching. The side which has a microprocessor
is the Main Switching while the other side which has fewer modules is the incomplete Main Switching. / /
/ Now, let’s look at the Overcurrent error of board number one. The first thing we face in the
Overcurrent error of board number one
is “command”. After the Minmax burns out, the “command” is damaged which cause an Overcurrent error of
the board number one. The easiest way to test it, is to replace the “command” of the complete wide with
the one of the incomplete side
and see if it is healthy or not. The next things that we can check are the IGBTs that are located on the
switching. There are four IGBTs on which a diode test has to be performed to see if they are healthy
This will be more explained later.
Next are the diodes on the switching module that are located under the Main; since these diodes can
cause an Overcurrent error of board number one, they need to be tested as well. To access these diodes,
the Main of the incomplete Switching
needs to be opened which is done by unscrewing seven screws. After unscrewing the screws, the Main is
easily detached. There are some diodes on the Main which should be tested to examine the reason for the
Overcurrent error of board number
one. A diode has a transformer on each side. To test this diode, it is necessary that one of its ends is
detached from the circuit because this diode is located at the two ends of the Trans and if we perform
the test in this state, a short-circuit
is displayed. Therefore, one of its ends must be detached. / / / / / / There are two diodes on this side
and eight on the other side. Also, there are two diodes at the end of the voltage output of the
currents. To perform the test one
of the ends of these two diodes must be detached. The first two-end transformers is tested. First, one
side of the diode is detached using a soldering iron and the multimeter is set at diode test mode. After
testing the diode it can be
see that the diode is on Overload diode from both sides. / Now it is time to test the next two diodes.
Overload must be displayed from one of the sides and the value 0/7 must be displayed from the other
side. In this case the diode is
healthy and there is no need for replacing it. There are 8 other diodes showing 0/3 on one side and
overload on the other. All diodes are tested in the same way. In the end, these two diodes located on
each ends of the currents voltage
Used for Supplying the current Mosfet are detached like this. One side is detached These diodes need to
be overloaded from both sides. What is meant by both sides is that by moving the end of the probes in
any side, it must have the Overload
value. this way, the diode test ends. Now, if any of these diodes has a problem, the faulty part must be
replaced with a one in accordance with its Part Number. But, the absence of some of these diodes do not
cause any problem. This means
that if this diode is not available, it is ok to detach it from the circuit. Such as the two-end
transformer diode and these two diodes. But it is necessary for these eight diodes to be present in the
circuit. Also, it is ok for these
two diodes not to be present.
OC BOARD IGBT TEST The next element that we are going to examine is the IGBT. It was mentioned
earlier that there are four IGBTs. A diode test must be performed for the pins of these IGBTs. Every
IGBT has three pins of gate, drain and source.
The diode test is first performed between drain and source. If you look at the IGBT from this angle, the
middle pin is drain and the right pin is source. The diode test between these pins is performed from
positive to negative or from
negative to positive. When the negative probe of the multimeter is placed on the drain pin and the
positive side is placed on the source pin, the multimeter shows 4/8. If the probes are swapped, Overload
must be displayed. The rest of
the IGBTs are tested following the same procedure. In the first place, this indicates the health of the
IGBT. Next, the gate pins are to be tested with drain and source which refer to the left side pin and
the side pins, respectively.
/ In this state, we should have the Overload value between every one of the pins. In fact, there should
not be any connection between the gate and drain and source pins. If there is a short-circuit between
these pins, the IGBT is definitely
burned out. These IGBTs are shared two by two. If we number the IGBTs as 1, 2 , 3 and 4, then IGBT 1 and
3 and IGBT 3 and 4 are connected. When these IGBTs are damaged, if it is assumed that the first IGBT is
burned out, if the third IGBT
is tested it is displayed as burned out as well. This means that their pins are short-circuited. There
are two cases here where one of the IGBTs is burned out and the other is being displayed as burned out.
In this case, one of them is
tested by being detached from the circuit. Or maybe both of them are burned out. It is the same for the
second and fourth IGBTs. If they both display signs of being burned out in the diode test, one of them
is detached from the circuit
how to detach an IGBT is explained in the following and the test is performed. If this IGBT is healthy,
then the other one is burned out, otherwise the other IGBT is tested as well. / To open the IGBT, first
we need to open this holder.
The holder has five screws. The middle screw, the two side screws and then the other screws are
unscrewed respectively and the holder is opened. Now, as an example, IGBT number one is removed from the
board. To do this, we need a desoldering
suction to remove the tin from the pins of the IGBT. Then we heat the pin and after the tin is
completely melted, we remove it using the desoldering suction. We can do this as many times as needed
for every pin until the tin is completely
removed. If the tin is not completely removed, we can add some tin and then melt all of the tin on the
pin and remove it again. The IGBT is removed from the board simply by giving it a shake. Now we test the
IGBT outside the circuit. We
repeat the pins, gain, drain and source. Between drain and source we should have 4/8 from one side, 4/8
inside the circuit and 4/5 outside the circuit. But between gate, drain and gate, the source must always
have the Overload value. This
IGBT here is healthy. / / / / To reinstall the IGBT, there is insulation beneath every IGBT just like
this. In fact, this insulation prevents the MOSFET body and heat sink from touching each other. This
insulation must be exactly beneath
the IGBT and silicon paste is used beneath the insulation. We put the insulation beneath the IGBT like
this and then put the IGBT on the heat sink and then remove its pins from the pads. But before this,
first the IGBT pads must be emptied
from any tin. To do this, we put some tin on the pads to melt all of the tin inside. Then we remove the
tin using a desoldering suction. / We repeat this for the next pads. Then, we remove the tin on the
basses of the IGBTs. First we need
to clean the tip of the soldering iron and put some flux on the pins and collect the additional tin. We
repeat this for the other pins. We put the insulation talc and then install the IGBT on its extra. We
put the pins of the IGBT in the
pads as much as it is at the same level as the others. / / Adjust the IGBT and the talc beneath it, so
there must not be any connection between the heat sync and MOSFET. After installing the IGBT, correctly
fill the middle pin with tin
so that the connection is established. Then we repeat this for the other pins. Another important point
when replacing the IGBT is that when remove the IGBT from the board, the pads may be damaged. In fact,
the metalized that is inside
these pads is separated. For this, put the tin on the pin from the top so that the connection with the
board is thoroughly established. / / Then close the holder. To do so, first, fasten the middle screw
because a piece of metal is putting
pressure on the IGBTs and the screws must be fastened in a specific order so that this pressure is
uniformly applied to all of the IGBTs. This is why you don’t completely fasten the screws. Only fasten
them at the end. If you are using
a torque wrench for fastening the screws, set the pressure on 2.5 newtons on meter and then fasten the
screw. If you are using a screwdriver, keep fastening until you feel that the screw is tight enough. / /
After closing the holder, to
ensure that there is no connection, put the multimeter in the ohm mode and check the middle pin of every
IGBT with the body of the heat sink. It must be Overload in all states. So replacing the IGBT ends here.
/
INTRODUCING THE INTERNAL MODULES PART1 In this part, we are going to introduce internal modules of
the Vebko relay tester device, the possible problems and how to solve them. After watching the video
tutorial on how to open the device, you
must have noticed that the device has three main modules, including the switching module, the amplifier
module and the front panel of the device. First we are going to get familiar with the switching module
which provides the second module
or amplifier with the main power supply. After opening the device, to prevent facing any problems during
the test, you can use a lamp series that we have placed in the route of the input electricity. The
phoenix that you are seeing is
placed after the series lamp and is connected to the input section of the switching module. The
switching module has a main module that is located in the middle and has two complete and incomplete
sides. The complete side is the side where
there are more modules on the Main while the incomplete side has, in fact, more protective elements.
There are four pins in the incomplete side two of which are located on the left side of the phase and
the other two are located at the
right side of the null. / / / We connect this phoenix to the two pins at the middle of these four pins
which includes phase and null. When the input electricity enters the incomplete side it crosses a set of
protective elements including
varistor, line filter and protective diodes two of which are located between phase and null, two between
phase and earth and two more between null and earth. The incomplete side has two outputs. This means
that the electricity enters the
two phase and null outputs after crossing the protective elements which is connected to the two sides of
the main input of the device by two cables. Therefore, the two complete and incomplete sides must be
electrified. This part of the
output electricity is connected to the incomplete side and this cable is connected to the complete side.
/ / / Note that as soon as the electricity of the complete side is connected, the black header enters
the Main Switching through this
pin. When 220 volt electricity enters this section, it enters the PS or the input power supply through
this phoenix. As soon as we electrify the two sides of the switching the middle module does not get
electrified at all. When the connection
command of the switch number one and two appear in the software, the middle module gets electrified.
This means that the middle module is never electrified at the first moment and the electricity only
enters the PS from this section. This
PS has 12 and 5 volts DC outputs. Through this PS, the electricity enters other modules including fan
controller, micro module and LAN-GPS module. After the electricity enters the PS, its outputs that are
12 and 5 volts DC electrify the
above modules. These 5 volts enters the micro and by this IC changes into 3/3 volts which provides the
power supply of the micro. / / / / / After that we can apply the commands of the main parts of the
device by the micro. One of these
commands is the command to connect switch one and two in the software. So let us emphasize that after
the input electricity crosses the protective circuits that are embedded into the incomplete side of the
switching, the two sides of the
output are electrified by its outputs which enters the complete side from here and the incomplete side
from here. The main commands are issued by the micro. The input electricity enters from this part and
the PS is electrified. Then its
output reaches the above modules. So, we provided the power supply of the incomplete side from this part
but the connection of the commands of the incomplete side micro establishes the connection between the
complete and the incomplete
switching sides by a flat cable that is embedded in this part. /
INTRODUCEING INTERNAL MODULES PART2 When the device is electrified in this state, after the
electricity passes the lamp series, it enters the incomplete Main Switching through this phoenix and
crosses these protective elements. In the end,
this Main has two 220-volt outputs and one of the outputs enters the complete switching side from this
way and the other output enters the incomplete switching side through this phoenix. When the electricity
reaches this part, it enters
the PS through this black pin header. This PS receives the 220 volts AC and converts it to 5 volts and
12 volts DC and provides the upper modules with power supply. These 5 volts enters the micro and is
converted to 3/3 volts by this IC;
using this 3/3 volts electricity micro LPC1788 which is the main micro of the device starts working. In
this part where the phoenixes are electrified, the middle part of the device is not electrified yet and
only the digital part of the
device is electrified. Then it is ready to command the middle part of the switching by the micro. Above
the phoenix there is a glass relay which belongs to the complete switching side and is known as switch
number two in the software.
On this side, this glass relay is the relay which activates by connecting switch number one in the
software and electrifies this part of the switching. Here there is a series lamp in the circuit. When
the switches activate, the lamp turns
on for a moment and then it turns off. It is better that there is a series lamp series in the circuit
because if current is drawn from a part of the circuit, this lamp is turned on. As soon as the device is
electrified the digital part
enters the micro by 5-volt and 12-volt PS and prepares the micro module for issuing the command. In this
part, we enter the settings of the software and connect to the device by entering the IP. , In Hardware
tab there are two sections
of Enable Switch 1 and Enable Switch 2 and these are the relays that were explained.
INTRODUCING INTERNAL MODULES PART3 In the settings section of the software, after entering the IP
and connecting to the device, there are two sections of Enable Switch 1 and Enable Switch 2 in Hardware
tab. By activating Switch number one
and selecting Apply, this section which is related to the switching of the device activates. This glass
relay here is connected and the input electricity which is connected to the phoenix through a cable,
electrifies this part of the switching.
By activating switching number two, this relay is connected and electrifies the middle part of the
switching. Whenever there is a problem in the switching module, if you have a series lamp, it remains on
the whole time and you can find
the source of the problem by disconnecting the key. Note that if you do not have a series lamp, other
parts of the device might get damaged in which case an Overcurrent error is displayed. In the output
phoenixes section of the switching
module, we can have the desired voltage for powering the amplifier module by connecting this relay. The
notable point is that the command module is the upper voltage section, specially these pins that are out
of it. There is no problem
before the switches are connected, in other words, it does not have any dangerous voltage. But when the
switch is connected, be sure not to touch the command module with bare hands. The other modules are safe
to touch. Up to this point,
after switches one and two are connected, we must have the desired voltages in the device. Generally,
the two sides of the switching module are similar to each other. Here there are two 8-pin phoenixes and
one 4-pin phoenix. 8-pin phoenixes
are the outputs that power the current phases of the amplifier. Later more will be said about the
amplifier module. The phoenix that is located on the outside section on the board must have 12 to 13
volts in relation to the 4-pin phoenix
while the phoenix on the inside of the board must have -12 to -13 volts in relation to the 4-pin
phoenix. When switches one and two are active, set the multi-meter at DC mode and in measurement, you
can even measure these two 8-pin phoenixes
in relation to each other and the multi-meter must show a value from 22 to 24 volts. After activating
switches number one and two in the software, you must measure the output voltages of the switching
module. All pins of this 8-pin that
is located on the outside section of the switching module are connected to each other and it must show
12 volts of value in relation to this middle phoenix which is the earth. This 8-pin which is located on
the inside section of the switching
module, must should -12 volts of value in relation to this phoenix in the middle. If we measure two
8-pin phoenixes in relation to each other, 22 to 24 volts of value must be displayed. This phoenix is
the output of voltage. In general,
the switching module has two outputs one of which is the output of these phoenixes and has 12 and 12
volts of voltage. The output of this section of the module powers the amplifier. This phoenix is the
second output whose output voltage
is 300 and 300 volts. Next, we measure its value by using a cable. In this phoenix the earth middle pin
and the side pins are 300 and 300 volts. These outputs that were just explained belong to the incomplete
switching side. Also, in the
complete switching side, this phoenix that is located on the outside of the switching, just like the
incomplete switching, must have 12 volts of voltage in relation to the middle phoenix. This phoenix
which is inside the switching has
a 12 volt output in relation to the middle phoenix. In this part we measure two 8-pins in relation to
each other and an approximate value of 23/3 volts is displayed. Therefore, the output of the switching
module is correct and we only
need to check some other items on the module. We turn the device off and introduce modules of the
complete switching side one more time. The PS module that is responsible for powering other modules has
12 volt and 5 volt outputs. This
is the fan controller module which is also on the board of the amplifier and when temperature of the
device rises, it increases or decreases the speed of the fans. This is the command module and this is
the micro module which is responsible
for the commands of different parts of the device. LAN-GPS and Wi-Fi modules are located at the top
which are used to establish the connection between the software and the device through LAN, Wifi and
GPS. After the device is turned on,
we first connect to the device. By connecting the switches, for the complete switching side, 220-volt
electricity enters the switching and passes through Diode Bridge and eventually generates 310 volts DC.
At the same time, using the command,
the micro generates 4 high-frequency pulses whose outputs are located in this section and enters the
switching module through a set of pins located at the back of the Main. These high-frequency pulses are
connected to the gates of these
IGBTs while 300 volts of DC voltage is connected to the drain of these IGBTs. Finally, a high-frequency
pulse with a DC amplitude of 300 volts, which is the output of these IGBTs, is taken from the sources
and connected to the input of
the transformer. So, the input of the transformer is a high-frequency pulse with a 300-volt range which
comes from the input electricity and is converted to DC by the diode bridge. Considering the coil of a
transformer, it produces the
expected output voltage of the switching module in several 12-volt and 12-volt, 75-amp, 300-volt, and
300-volt windings that do not have much current. The desired voltages are generated after passing
through the rectifier diodes in DC.
The intended voltages are converted to DC after passing through rectifier diodes. The input electricity
of these two sides enters this section through this cable and the connection command of the relay of the
incomplete switching side
and its connections are adjusted from the complete side through this cable. If this cable is removed
from its place or its connection with this part is not completely established, when the switching number
one is connected, an Overcurrent
error of board one is displayed which is not eliminated by Clearing it. Just the relay disconnects and
reconnects so that this flat is correctly placed in its location. Another point is that the relays
receive the command from here through
the pin header of this section and then it enters the relay to stimulate its bobbin. It is the same in
these parts. If this upper pin header is not correctly installed, the relay will not connect and to know
when these relays connect,
by activating the switches in the software you can hear a sound to ensure that the relays are connected
and ultimately have the output voltage from the switching module.
SWITCHING MODULE we are going to see how to work with the switching module. If in the switching
module we have an Overcurrent error of the board one or board two, we have to open the board of the
switching to find its problem. First, we disconnect
the connection between the two sides of the switch, which is this flat, and then the input power cables
that enter the two sides of the switch from the protection circuit. Then, we open the screws that are
attaching the two sides of the
Main to the Spacer. Every one of these modules, except for the micro module, is attached to the Main by
these screws. The micro module is attached to the Main by its own pins. / / / You can easily detach PS,
Fan Controller, Command and
Micro modules from the Main by applying little pressure to the outside. To detach LAN-GPS, first, the
above screws are opened and the Wi-Fi module is detached. Then, by opening this spacer and a screw in
this part the LAN-GPS module is
detached. There is one screw in the end which is in the back of the PS module and two more screws at the
bottom of the module. After all side screws are opened, the Main can be easily detached. / / / / / / On
the Incomplete Main Switching,
other than these protective elements, there is a command which, just like the complete switching side,
generates high-frequency pulses and the output of this module is 4 pulses. We can detach the Incomplete
Main Switching by opening the
screws around it. Also, it was already mentioned that in addition to the protective modules, there is a
command module as well. The command used in the Complete Switching Side is no different from the one
used in the Incomplete Switching
Side. This was mentioned to note that when we have an Overcurrent error on a Switching side, before
opening the Mains, we should swap the commands of the two sides to make sure that the problem is with
the command module. If the error
is eliminated the problem is with the command otherwise there is a problem in other parts. / / After
opening the switching module, it is a little hard to differentiate between the complete and incomplete
side. In the complete switching
module side you can see a double pin header. The electricity is AC that reaches the PS module. Then the
PS is electrified so that the other modules are electrified. There is no such pin header in the
incomplete switching side. Only there
is a 3-pin pin header which issues the connection command of the relay of the incomplete side or switch
number one. In the complete side, we have the same triple pin-header which is used for the complete side
switch or switch number two.
Also, we have the phase and null that electrifies the PS. Therefore, the side where this double pin
header is located is the AC electricity and because of this, we know that this is the complete side of
the device. When there is an Overcurrent
error of board two or board one, as mentioned before, first we swap the command modules of the two
sides. If the problem is solved, the command module is causing the error, otherwise, we need to open the
Main as already mentioned and then
move the faulty side up to this level like this. Here you can check some items to see what part is
causing the Overcurrent error. / / /
POSSIBLE ERRORS IN THE SWITCHING MODULE Overcurrent error of board one and two is one of the most
common errors in the switching module. After making sure that the command module is healthy, in the
switching module, we need to find the problem
in accordance with the error that we are having on a side. As mentioned earlier, the input electricity
enters from this section. When switch number two is connected, it is converted to DC by the diode bridge
and 300 volts DC enters these
two lines. It enters the IGBT from here. If you pay careful attention to the complete Main Switching,
you can see that these female pin headers are connected to this part. These connections enter the
command module from here. / / / / /
This means that the command pulses enter this part from here and then go to the IGBTs. Each of these
pins is connected to one of these IGBT pins. Some of the problems that some users might face are that
when the IGBTs are placed on the
board, while installing them in this section, the pads may be detached, or if the tin of these bases is
weak, the connection between this IGBT base and the pin header may not be established. So the first step
is to examine the command
and after making sure that the command is healthy, we enter the switching module. First we perform the
IGBTs’ test. We set the multimeter at diode test mode. The second and third bases from the top for every
IGBT are drain and source bases.
We connect the negative and positive probes of the multimeter to the second and third bases,
respectively, and the approximate value of 0/4 must be displayed and in the opposite state is Overload.
We perform the test for every one of these
IGBTs. / / / / So examining the command is the first step and then we need to test the IGBTs to see if
one of them is burned out. If drain and source has a 0/4 value and its opposite state is open or is not
Overload and if gate and source
bases are open, that IGBT is burned out. So far we know that the IGBTs are healthy. We set the
multi-meter at Buzzer mode and check the connection between these IGBTs and these pin that connect the
command and the switching module. From
the top, the gate and source of the first IGBT must be connected to pins number one and two,
respectively. The connection between this pin and here is a track from inside the switching module. When
the IGBT is changed, it is possible that
this track is disconnected or it does not have any tin and the connection is not properly established. /
/ Then, the second IGBT and its source are connected to pin number 3 and pin number 4, respectively. The
source of the third IGBT
is connected to the last three pins and for the fourth IGBT, the second base which is its gate and its
source is connected to the last three pins. If all of the connections are correct, the IGBTs and their
connection to the command module
are completely healthy. In the end, we precede one more step and if we still are not able to eradicate
the Overcurrent error, there is one more thing that we can do which will be explained in the following.
There is a set of protection
diodes in the input and output of the transformer so that they can neutralize any sudden voltage and
also there are two protection diodes in the current output. We can examine these diodes by a diode test.
This diode that is located at
the two ends of this transformer, since it is located at the two ends of a coil and normally, these two
ends are connected to each other, by testing it we can see that the two ends are connected so the only
way to test this diode is to
remove one diode base from the circuit and then test it. / / / / /
CHECKING THE PARTS,IN SWITCHING MODULE ERRORS PART1 To test this diode, first, we need to detach one
of its bases from the board and perform a diode test on it. In this test, the diode must be Overload on
both sides. Then we test the other
three diodes. This diode which is in a vertical position, if positive and negative probes are connected
to its top and bottom, 0/4 is displayed and by reversing the probes, it must be Overload. This does not
mean that these diodes are
usually like this. All diodes are similar and do not allow anything to pass from any direction. It is
because of the elements with which they are made parallel or series that these values are displayed. In
fact, the correct value is 0/7
that you can see and its opposite is Overload. It is the same for the next diode. We can test these two
diodes by detaching one of the bases. The top side of these two diodes must be Overload as well. In the
end to eradicate the Main Switching
error, if the problem is not with the command, IGBTs and the connections with the pins, then it can be
said that the problem is with the diodes. This error can have several reasons at the same time; for
example, maybe the IGBT and diode
are both burned out. In the first step, we replace the IGBT but the error still persists. It is better
to test all elements and then turn the device on. Another solution is to check these rectifier diodes
located at the transformer output.
Ten rectifier diodes are located in the output of the transformer on the complete switching side. It is
possible that these diodes are faulty and we are going to test them. So you can easily determine that
which part of the switching is
not functioning properly. Here there is a track and by removing the tin on this track, its connection is
severed. By disconnecting this track, the connection between the input of the transformer which is these
IGBTs in the bottom side
and the top side of the switching is severed. Then we connect the switch to see whether the error is
gone or not. If this track is severed, only the bottom side of the switching is active and the top side
is completely disconnected. If
you are facing this error again, it is obvious that the problem is not with the top side of the circuit
and IGBTs, command and the connections of pins must be tested. More on the Overcurrent error First, we
connect the electricity while
the series lamp is in the track of the input electricity. It was mentioned that there are some
protection diodes in the input and output of the transformer. We simulated the input of the transformer
and our assumption is that the protection
diode is burned out. Then we short-circuit it and by connecting switch number two, the lamp series which
is located in the track of the input electricity stays on and disconnects the system completely. This is
a sign of the Overcurrent
error of board number two and we need to find the problem which is the diode that we short-circuited.
You can see that when the switch is connected, the lamp series turns on and disconnects the electricity.
By disconnecting the series
lamp in the track of the electricity and by connecting the switch, you can see the Overcurrent error of
board number two. When the device is assembled, there is no lamp series in the electricity track and we
see Overcurrent error of boards
one and two. If the device is open and if the lamp series is in the circuit, we can easily find the
problem at any stage.
CHECKING THE PARTS,IN SWITCHING MODULE ERRORS PART2 Now, to solve the Overcurrent error that we
caused on purpose, using a short piece of wire, we short-circuit the diode which is located in the input
of the transformer and suppose that the
diode is burned out and we are not aware of this problem. In the first step, we replace the command of
the incomplete switching side with the command of the complete switching side. But the error still
persists. So, it is not the command
that is causing the problem. Therefore, as previously mentioned, we open the screws of the Main
Switching. We completely detach the main from the module, and then examine the IGBTs and their
connections with the pins that are connected
to the command. Finally, we get to the test of protection diodes. We cannot test this protection diode
which is located in the input of the transformer, while it is still connected to the switching module
because it is located on the two
ends of a coil while that coil is short-circuited as well. Therefore, we need to detach one of its bases
from the circuit and test it. We replace this wire here which is the burned out diode and is causing the
error with a healthy diode.
Then we connect to the software and the error must be gone. We have explained how to test these diodes
before. To test any of them, first, we detach one of the bases and then test the diode. It is the same
for these rectifier diodes. Every
one of them must show 0/3 or 0/4 as value for one side, and Overcurrent for the opposite side. Note that
to test these diodes; it is necessary for one of the bases of the above diodes to be detached because if
this diode is short-circuited,
when connected, we may see them as burned out while they are in fact healthy. We install the healthy
protection diode in the input of the transformer again. Then, we connect the complete and incomplete
Main Switching’s, connection flat
of the complete side to the incomplete side and the input electricity of the modules. Finally, we
connect the input electricity of the incomplete switching side and the commands. After replacing the
diode of the input of the transformer
and adding a lamp series to the circuit, we connect to the software and connect switch number two whose
diode we just changed. Now we can see that the lamp series are turned on for a moment and turned off.
All items are healthy and the
output voltage is flowing. Suppose that we have an Overcurrent error problem of board number one. In
this case, first, we replace the command of the incomplete side with the command of the complete side.
If the problem still persists,
we need to detach the Main Switching of the incomplete side. First, we disconnect the electricity cables
from the two sides and the connection flat; after opening the screws, we remove the Main from its place.
Then we perform a test for
IGBTs and their connection with these pins. Next, we test the protection diodes as well as these two
diodes and the rectifier diodes, just like how we tested the other side.
CHECKING THE PARTS,IN SWITCHING MODULE ERRORS PART3 In the switching module, when switch number two
is connected, we get an Overcurrent error of board two. According to our previous explanations, we need
to proceed step by step to find the
problem. In the first step, we replace the command module with the command of the incomplete side to see
whether the command is causing the problem or not. Before doing this, we need to turn the device off.
Then we replace the modules.
Since we have already connected switch number two, it does not really matter if we connect the command
of the incomplete side because we cannot activate switch number one. Then we turn the device on and
connect to it. You can see that
even by replacing the commands, the error still persists. We turn the device off again and open the Main
Switching of the complete side. As mentioned before, we open all screws of the modules and then Main and
completely detach the Main
from the module. Then we test the IGBTs. To do this, we set the multimeter at diode test mode and test
the IGBTs one by one, as explained before. Bases two and three must show the value of 0/4 in one side in
the diode test and it must
be Overloaded in the other side. Most probably the IGBTs are damaged because all of the four IGBTs are
damaged in the test and to make sure of this, we need to remove the IGBTs from the circuit and repeat
the test. To remove these IGBTs,
we detach the Incomplete Main Switching so that the switching module is easily put on the desk. These
IGBTs must be tested one by one. On these IGBTs, there is a holder that is tightened on the body of the
heat sink by five screws. Before
melting the tin of the bases of the IGBT, we need to open these screws and detach the heat sink a little
and put these insulations that are located between the IGBT and the heat sink on the body of the heat
sink. Then, by adding the extra
tin on the bases of the IGBT and holding the soldering iron at this point, remove the IGBT from the
module. Then we test it and we can see that this IGBT is short-circuited. Then we test the next IGBT on
the board and this one is short-circuited
as well. So we remove it and test it again which does not change the result and it is still
short-circuited. Usually, in over voltages that are applied, it is possible that all of the IGBTs get
damaged, and here only the IGBT number four
is healthy and the rest are damaged. Then we assembled the healthy IGBTs on the board. When we removed
the IGBTs from the circuit, inside the pads got filled with tin. Using a desoldering suction, we remove
the tin inside them so that
we can easily install the parts. By holding the soldering iron on the pad, its tin melts down and then
we can easily remove it using the desoldering suction. Then, after removing the tin, we install the
healthy IGBT until the last part
like this and then we fix it by adding some tin. Following the same procedure, we remove the tin from
the pad of the next IGBT and install the part in its place. After replacing the damaged IGBTs, as you
can see, we emptied the pads, installed
the IGBTs and then filled the bases with tin. In the end, we fix the holder that is placed over the
IGBTs. After fixing the holder, we need to take a IGBTs connection test drain base with the body of the
heat sink which is the same as
the ohm test where none of them has body connection. Finally, we put the incomplete Main Switching and
along with its command module and the complete Main Switching in their places. Then we connect the
connection flats and electricity
cable of every part. By turning the device on and activating switch number two and clearing the error,
the series lamp turns on for a moment and then turns off which means that there is no problem. After
that, we check the output voltage
of the side that had an issue. Then we take a test between the eight-pin external phoenix and the
eight-pin internal phoenix which should give 23 to 24 volts as the result. So the problem with this
module was that three of the IGBTs on
the switching module were burned out and by replacing them, the problem was solved and the output
voltage is correct.
THE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE SWITCHING MODULE AND THE AMPLIFIER In the beginning, it was mentioned
that the switching module is responsible for supplying power for the amplifier module. Two flats are
used to establish the connection between
the command of the micro and the amplifier module. In this section, the connection between the complete
Main Switching and the front panel is established through this IDC. First, we explain the connections
between the switching module
and the amplifier. The switching module must supply the amplifier module with power through the output
voltages. In this section of the switching module, the external eight-pin phoenix has 12 volts, the
phoenix in the middle of the GND
and the next phoenix have -12 volts that in these cables, blue is -12, black is earth and red is 12
volts. These cables are responsible for supplying current phases of the amplifier with power. Before
connecting it, we need to explain
the amplifier module. The amplifier module, just like the switching module, consists of a middle section
and two sides called incomplete and complete sides. There are differences between the complete and
incomplete sides of the amplifier
module. On the complete side, every one of these modules which is called controller, is related to a
current or voltage phase and this controller at the top is related to the VL1 phase and the other is
related to VL2 while the one at the
bottom is related to VL3. By looking at the front panel, you can see that VL1, VL2 and VL3 are in
accordance with the GND. The current phases are in this section. lA1, lA2 and lA3 that are connected to
lA1, lA2 and lA3 front panel through
phoenixes and cables in relation to earth. In the incomplete side of the amplifier, there are five
phases. This is the DC output voltage which is located here in the front panel. This section is the
output voltage of group B. here lB1,
lB2 and lB3 in the front panel are connected to lB1, lB2 and lB3 in relation to earth. There is a
difference between the incomplete and complete sides. As you can see, there are six phases in this
section including three voltage phases
and three current phases which have been explained before. On the incomplete side, there are five phases
including one voltage phase of group B and one DC phase and three current phases of group B. Another
difference is that on the complete
side there is a fan controller module amplifier while there is no such thing on the incomplete side of
this module. On the whole amplifier module, in addition to the main module which is the middle amplifier
module, there are two mains
on the two sides just like the switching module where the incomplete and complete sides are separated.
In the amplifier module, after opening these screws we can separate these two mains and solve the
problems of the module. Also, there
are three sensors on every side of the module that are located on the output of the current phases. If
we connect to the software, we can see the temperature of lA1, lA2 and lA3 sensors as well as lB1, lB2
and lB3 sensors which is the
same temperature as the room temperature. By drawing current from current phases, the temperature of
these sensors rises. As soon as the temperature of the first sensor reaches 60 degrees, we get a Thermal
error of the amplifier in the
software. Now we connect the electricity that is being taken from the switching module side to the
amplifier. If you place the amplifier in front of yourself like this, there are two phoenixes on the
right side that are responsible for
supplying VL1, VL2 and VL3 voltages and there are five phoenixes on the left side that are responsible
for supplying lA1, lA2 and lA3 current phases. This black wire which comes from the power of the phoenix
in the middle is connected
to the phoenix number one on the left side at the top. Two red wires that carry a 12 volts DC, are
connected to this section. Also, the blue wire carrying -12 volts is connected to these phoenixes. So,
now we have connected the power of
lA1, lA2 and lA3 current phases to the amplifier through the switching. In the next part, we connect the
power of VL1, VL2 and VL3 voltage phases. As mentioned before, this phoenix here, the wire at the center
of the GND and the left side
of the red 300-volt wire and at the right side which is the blue -300-volt wire goes through
resistances. We connect these two phoenixes to the power of the voltage phases. When we connect the
switch, we must have 600 volts between the
two ends of these phoenixes. So, in the first step, we took the power of current and voltage phases from
the switching and connected it to the amplifier. As soon as switch number one is connected, the output
of the voltages reaches here
and enters the amplifier module through these cables. Also, from this part, a flat is connected to the
amplifier module to connect the command of the micro and the SPI signals. Each of these two IDC Latches
that are located on the right
and left sides of the Main Switching module is related to one side of the amplifier module. If we
connect this cable to this part, the commands will not be executed correctly. If by initializing the
VL1, a Self Calibration error will appear.
The electricity for the complete side of the amplifier must be taken from the right side of the Main
Switching. By injecting voltage into this side of the module and testing it, we need to take the flat
from the left side of the switching
module. When the device is assembled, both sides of the device are electrified simultaneously and we
connect the flat. Just note that the flat that is connected to the complete side of the amplifier must
come from the right side of the
Main Switching. So far, have connected power to current and voltage phases as well as the flat that
establishes the connections. We turn the device on. Each of these controllers has a series of boot
loaders that are put on the STM32 IC
and when they are functioning properly, their LED blinks like this. When we connect to the software,
usually we can see this earth error which appears if the related wire is not connected. We connect the
earth wire and by clearing the
error it disappears. Now, this part is electrified and the electricity reaches the amplifier module
through these cables. By looking at the monitor, you can see four temperatures including Sensor
Ia1=24˚c, Sensor Ia2=25˚c, Sensor Ia3=25˚c
and Heatsink1 =25˚c. By detaching one of these sensors, for example, la1, an error is displayed in the
software which can be cleared by selecting Clear Error. The sensor we just detached displays zero-degree
temperature. By reconnecting
the sensor, 24 degrees is displayed in the software again. To view the heat sink sensor, we first need
to turn off the device. It was mentioned that there are three sensors on every side of the module which
are related to the currents
and two sensors are related to the heat sink. This part is the heat sink and the sensor is located in
this part of the heat sink and is connected to the Main by this pin header. lb1, lb2 and lb3 and the
sensor related to the heat sink
number two are located in this part and connected to the Main by this pin header and its value is read
by this Max1202 and displayed in the software. So, there are three sensors in this part and one sensor
at the bottom and four more sensors
in this part that are read by this Max. If current is drawn from any of these phases, these temperatures
increase and as soon as the first temperature reaches 60 degrees a Thermal error of the amplifier will
be displayed. Sometimes, any
of these LN35s may have a problem in reading or this connection cable is damaged. This temperature
displays, for example, Ia1 300 degrees as soon as the device is connected. This means that when the
device is connected to the software,
it displays an error because it has a temperature above 60 degrees and this error does not go away no
matter how many times you clear the error unless the Thermal error is disabled in the software. But,
even by doing this, some other problems
may be caused. So, as soon as you notice this unusual temperature, you need to start looking for a
solution to solve this problem. We connect the flat cable that transfers the commands. As you can see,
the temperatures are as follows:
Temperature Sensor Ia1=25˚c, Temperature Sensor Ia2=25˚c, Temperature Sensor Ia1=25˚c and Temperature
Heatsink1 =25˚c. Also, Temperature Sensor Ib1=0˚c, Temperature Sensor Ib2=0˚c, Temperature Sensor
Ib3=0˚c and Temperature Heatsink2 =0˚c
which are related to this side and since the flat is not connected to this section yet, zero is
displayed as their temperature. Now we turn the device off and connect the flat of the side of the
incomplete temperature to check them. When
we want to check the incomplete side of the amplifier module, we need to connect the left side of the
flat from the switching. Then, we turn the device on and this time temperatures of lb1, lb2, lb3 and
Heatsink2 must be displayed. So,
if any of these temperatures is unusual and there is a Thermal error of the amplifier, we need to solve
the problem considering the faulty sensor. Sometimes, temperatures of sensors one, two, three and four
are all wrong. The tin of this
IC which is related to reading temperatures may have a problem or the IC itself may be damaged. But if
only one of the temperatures is being displayed wrongly, probably this IC is healthy and it is possible
that the LV35 senor which can
be seen easier by opening the modules, has a problem; also, it is possible that this cable which is
connected from LN35 bases to this pin header has a problem. We turn the device off and turn the module
toward the complete side. If you
enter the amplifier in any current or voltage phase, every phase of Va1, Va2 and Va3 voltages has two
MOSFET, N and P. Also, current phases l1a, la2 and la3, just like current voltages, have two MOSFET, N
and P.
GOOSE MESSAGING TESTING The new power systems, specifically power substations, are designed in such
a way that protection and control schemes of IEC 61850 Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event or GOOSE
are used in them. GOOSE messaging
can be considered as a virtual connection replacing wiring and hardware connection. Hardware systems are
physically checked and tested. -While GOOSE systems can be virtually checked. Improved GOOSE systems
development needs enough information
about VLAN Virtual Local-area networks, MAC address filtering and Logical Nodes. Moreover, it needs
Ethernet traffic analysis or switch setting inspection. Testing devices can play a major role here to
make GOOSE messaging testing and
inspection easier. In AMT 105 devices, testing can be easily performed using SCD files in relays and
network setting. GOOSE setting can be accessed through hardware configuration window. In this window, by
selecting Import SCL option,
you can import a created GOOSE configuration file. By choosing Clear SCL option entered data can be
deleted so you can add another file. After importing the file, a list of GOOSE reference information,
ID, MAC address, etc. are shown.
By expanding each directory, you can see a series of GOOSE. If your selected option is put in relay's
output list, while you want it in input list, you can simply choose Binary In option. Contrariwise, if
the tester is supposed to excite
the input of the relay, you can select Binary Out, after choosing the desired option. By choosing each
option, related virtual Binary Input or Output will appear. After clicking on each binary, you will be
directed to that page under Binary/Analog
Input or Binary Output tab. Then you will be able to change the desired configurations. Therefore, the
created virtual binaries will act like the real binaries of the device and will be considered in the
test. Here is an example of the
Goose testing for the Siemens 7SA522 relay with the IEC61850 protocol and the RJ45 port with the EN100
card is done. Note that the selected IPs for the laptop network, tester and relay must be in the same
range. The IP of the test device
here is 192.168.1.57 and the IP of the computer network is set to 192.168.1.2. Now it is time to
register an IP for the relay in the same range in Digsi 4 software. Here “192.168.1.4” is set as an
example. Keep in mind that by having an
MLFB relay, all you need to do is to create an IEC 61850 Station by registering the IP and initializing
it. By right-clicking on the relay title and checking the Communication Parameters section, you can make
sure that the VD address,
Mirror VD, IP address and Subnet Mask are correct. Here in IED name, the title DIS stands for Distance.
By opening the IEC61850 System Configurator, you can select the desired items from the Source Catalog
and Destination Catalog sections
and transfer them to the Goose Application section to perform Goose test. In this video, two protection
items, Trip Zone 1 and Trip Zone 2, have been selected from the reference section. From the destination
section, the Double position
breaker item that was previously created in the Masking I / O relay is selected. Now all you need to do
is to save the created file with an SCD extension. In the next step, open the AMT Sequencer room and
Click on Hardware Configuration
to go to the Goose Setting section and import the file saved in the previous step. As you can see, there
are three items with subcategories in the Goose Control Reference section. By opening the subcategories,
the function of zone 1 is
set to Binary Input 11 and the function of zone 2 is set to Binary Input 12. In order to change the
position of breaker in using a tester, Binary Output 5 is selected. The C1 binary is also wired to be
used as a reference for comparing
the time between trip zones 1 and 2. In the next step, you need to set the configurations for Binary
Inputs. Here, Trip A and Trip B are selected to record the relay performance against Trip Zones 1 and 2,
respectively. Then, it is time
for Binary Output to be configured. Clicking OK will save the settings. Now it is time to do the test.
As you can see, for trips in Zone 1 and Zone 2, in addition to the physically-wired contact C1, the trip
is also recorded through contacts
C11 and C12. You can also send a “change status” command to the relay, by enabling or disabling Binary
Output. There are different ways to check the information transference through Goose. For example, you
can use Goose Inspector, IEC
Browser or a software like Wireshark.
GUIDE TO TRUSTING VEBKOSTABLE-TEST SOFTWARE IN BITDEFENDER ANTIVIRUS To trust Vebko software, after
installing the software, you need to apply operations in Bitdefender antivirus: First, enter the
Protection section, then the Antivirus section
and select Manage Exceptions option: / Select the All exceptions tab and select Add an exception option:
And in the Exceptions Options window, click on the Browse icon: / / In the Select a file or folder to
except window, specify the path
to install Vebko software on the computer and select the software folder to be trusted: / / The default
path where the Vebko software is installed is displayed as follows: C:\Program Files x86\Vebko In this
section, by selecting vebko
folder and selecting ok option as well as selecting Add Exception option, the declared path is recorded.
After this step, you should do one of the following steps to trust the software version compared to the
version you have installed
stable/test on your system. By selecting the vebko_stable folder is shown in the path, proceed to trust
stable version, it should be noted that the AppData folder is in Hidden mode by default and you should
display it by selecting the
Hidden Items option in the View tab. C:\Users\*\AppData\Roaming\Vebko_stable Instead of *, you should
select the name of your Windows account and finally by doing these steps, the software will run as
trusted and antivirus will not prevent
its activity. / / Also, to trust the Test version, you can select the vebko_test folder in the path
shown, it should be noted that the AppData folder is in Hidden mode by default and you should display it
by selecting the Hidden Items
option in the View tab. This step is the same as the one mentioned in the trust stable version.
C:\Users\*\AppData\Roaming\Vebko_test Instead of *, you should select the name of your Windows account.
GUIDE TO TRUSTING VEBKOSTABLE-TEST SOFTWARE IN NOD32 ANTIVIRUS To trust Vebko software, after
installing the software, you need to apply operations in ESET NOD32 antivirus: First, enter setup
section and then the antivirus Advanced setup option:
/ / Then, in the Detection Engine tab, select Edit option related to Performance exclusions: / In the
Performance exclusions window, click Add option: / In the Add exclusion window, click on Browse option:
/ Then specify the path of installing
Vebko software on the computer and select the software folder to be trusted: / The default path where
the Vebko software is installed is displayed as follows: C:\Program Files x86\Vebko In this section, by
selecting vebko folder and selecting
OK option, the declared path is recorded. After this step, you should do one of the following steps to
trust the software version compared to the version you have installed stable/test on your system. By
selecting the vebko_stable folder
is shown in the path, proceed to trust stable version, it should be noted that the AppData folder is in
Hidden mode by default and you should display it by selecting the Hidden Items option in the View tab.
Instead of *, you should select
the name of your Windows account and finally by doing these steps, the software will run as trusted and
antivirus will not prevent its activity. / / Also, to trust the Test version, you can select the
vebko_test folder in the path shown,
it should be noted that the AppData folder is in Hidden mode by default and you should display it by
selecting the Hidden Items option in the View tab. This step is the same as the one mentioned in the
trust stable version. C:\Users\*\AppData\Roaming\Vebko_test
Instead of *, you should select the name of your Windows account / /
GUIDE TO TRUSTING VEBKOSTABLE-TEST SOFTWARE IN KASPERSKY ANTIVIRUS To trust Vebko software, after
installing the software, you need to apply operations in Kaspersky antivirus: First, enter the Antivirus
Setting section: / Then, in the Threats
and Exclusions tab, select Manage exclusions: / And in the Exclusions window, select add option / In the
Add new exclusion window, click on Browse option: / The default path where the Vebko software is
installed is displayed as follows:
C:\Program Files x86\Vebko By selecting the vebko folder and selecting the Select option, in the Add new
exclusion window, by selecting the All components option and finally by clicking on the Add option, the
declared path is recorded.
After this step, you should do one of the following steps to trust the software version compared to the
version you have installed stable/test on your system. It should be noted that the AppData folder is in
Hidden mode by default and
you should display it by selecting the Hidden Items option in the View tab. By selecting the
vebko_stable folder shown in the path: C:\Users\*\AppData\Roaming\Vebko_stable then click on Select
option, in the Add new exclusion window, by
selecting all components option and finally click on add option, to trust stable version. Instead of *,
you should select the name of your Windows account It should be noted that the AppData folder is in
Hidden mode by default and you
should display it by selecting the Hidden Items option in the View tab., which is the same as the part
mentioned in the trust stable version. By Selecting the vebko_test folder shown in the path:
C:\Users\*\AppData\Roaming\Vebko_test Click
on select option, in the Add new exclusion window, by selecting all components option and finally click
on add option, to trust the test version. Instead of *, you should select the name of your Windows
account.
END-TO-END TEST One of the most essential tests to be performed on the lines that are protected by
relays on both sides is an “End to End test”. To perform this test, both devices on the sides of the
line must be synchronized and inject the
required signals into the relays simultaneously. The first step is the stability test. There are two
things to consider for this test: first, the transformation ratio of CTs and second, the polarity of
CTs. For example, suppose that the
transformation ratio of CT in post A is 1000/1 and in substation B is 800/1 and the polarity of both
substations is toward object. If the current in the line is assumed to be 1000 amps, then the current of
the relays of the substation
A and substation B will be 1 and 1.25 amperes respectively. Also because the polarity of both CTs is
toward object, there will be a 180 degree phase difference in the corresponding phases. The "AMT
Sequencer" room is used for performing
the stability test. In this room, 6 current phases must be activated. To do this, go to the "Hardware
Configuration" page and deactivate the voltage phases. Then all the 6 current phases will be activated
in the "Current Output Signal"
section. Considering what was said in the preceding example, 3 balanced 1 amp phase current and three
balanced 1/25 amp phase which have a 180 degree phase difference with their corresponding phase toward
each other, will be entered in
the "Table View" tab. / / / Injecting these currents into the relays will take 100 seconds. During this
time, the "Idiff" of the relay, visible on the measurement panel in front of the relay, must be zero. /
The second step is the characteristic
curve test. In this room, first, the 'XRio" file of the differential relay which is being tested will be
imported. To do this, go to the "Test Object" page and click on the "Import from list" option to open
the "Template" list of the relays.
For example, "7sd" is searched and its "Template" is selected. Then from the "File" menu, click on "Load
Relay Setting" and the "XRio" of the relay of the post A which is exported from the "DIGSI" software is
entered. A very important
point to note in this section is that, also, the post B relay settings should be entered in the "XRio"
of the post A relay. Because the curve of the differential of this relay is related to the settings of
both relays, it is necessary
that the settings of both relays are available in one file so that the curve is created correctly. To do
this, open "XRio" from the subdirectory of "7sd" and then open "Additional Information". After that,
select "Relay Parameter Section
Remote Relay”. / / / / / In this section, in order to enter the information of the other side, the
information on the parameters that are green in the "State" column, must be entered in the "XRio" of the
relay. This information can be
entered in two ways: if the file of the relay is available in the "DIGSI" software, the information is
imported from the software. Otherwise, the other person in the post B should read this information from
the relay and announce it. After
entering the information, the characteristics of the curve of the relay will be created in the post A.
The same steps are taken from the "Import from list" point to the end in the post B and in the
"Additional information" section, the
relay information of the Post A must be entered so that the curve is created in the Post B too. By
double-clicking on the "Line Differential" option, the "Differential Protection Parameters" page opens.
The point to note on this page is
to enter the post A relay information in both posts A and B of the "Primary" Column and enter relay
information of the post B in the "Secondary" column. It should also be noted that the information of
"Protection Device" tab, "Idiff" section
and also "Characteristic Definition" tab must be exactly the same on both sides. After the relay curve
is made, the person on the side of the relay A must flow the 3 upper phases and short circuit the lower
3 phases. Meanwhile, the person
on the side of the relay B must flow the 3 lower phases and short circuit the 3 upper phases of the
current. Once the curve is made and it has been made sure that everything is the same on both sides,
such as the transformer's differential
test and "Check" test, then the "Shot" and "Search" are performed. The point is that every test and
"Fault Type" which is added to the test table on one side, must be exactly repeated, with the same
values, on the other side in the "Fault
Type". To perform this test, it is necessary to perform the test simultaneously on both sides. For this
purpose, it is essential to connect the "GPS" antenna to the back of both devices first. Then go to the
"Start-Condition Repetition"
page and select "On GPS" option in the "Start Condition" tab. On this page, by activating the "Start
Time" option, both devices show a specific time in the time field on their front. By doing this, both
devices will, at the specified time,
simultaneously start injecting the flow to run the test and recording the results.
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION FUNCTION TEST IN MICOM P141 RELAY “AMT Sequencer” is a module where all kinds
of tests can be performed. It’s an ideal option for testing functions such as overvoltage and
undervoltage by giving the user freedom to enter
information related to various parameters, accurately and finally, creating the output in the way he
wants. / With this introduction, in the following and in this module, the two foregoing functions are
tested as an example in the MiCOM
P141 relay by creating different states. Before starting, it’s helpful to mention a few points in order
to advance the testing process properly: In the first step, it’s necessary to read the related settings
of functions 59 and 27 from
the relay. They’re maybe set in two or more stages. Also, a logic of the relay operation should be
determined to specify as an example whether the relay operation is single-phase or more phases are
involved in the measurement and, finally,
the performance of the functions!? / In the next step, it’s not that bad to take a look at the relay
configuration to determine what options are available to the user in order to display the Pickup-Dropoff
and trips related to the mentioned
functions. The record of the mentioned cases may be done through LED or contact. / In addition, elements
that may block functions 59 and 27 are examined. For example, a “VTS” Voltage Transformer Supervision
signal, or even a breaker status,
can block voltage functions. Finally, keep in mind that elements such as “Current Supervision” can also
affect the performance of voltage functions to include current values in these functions. All three can
be displayed in the relay settings
or its config file. To get started, just click on the “AMT Sequencer” on the software home screen to
enter the test module. / Explanations of this module have already been presented in separate videos.
Testing Overvoltage in “AMT Sequencer”
The overvoltage protection function, as its title implies, checks the increase in voltage amplitude
relative to the relay settings. Now imagine that in the relay, OR logic is used for this function so
that if any of the phases become overvoltage,
finally the opration signal appears and you can see the trip or hear alarm. Assuming a single-phase
setting of 76 volts with a time of 4 seconds for the MiCOM P141 relay, the test preparation process
begins. For these two parts, the settings
and configuration of the relay can be displayed so that the user knows from which part these items are
extracted. Note that the current group settings can be disabled in the "Hardware Configuration" section
due to the “Current Supervision”
function not being active and therefore no need to inject current into this relay. / Now name state 1
“Prefault” to associate the natural state of the system. All you have to do is right-click on one of the
cells containing the voltage
value and select “Nominal Value” to retrieve the values from the “Test Object Parameters” already
entered. In the next step, equalize the three voltage values. Use the "Normal" mode, since in this
state, stable conditions are created and
there is no change in the values of the injected voltage. You can specify the completion condition of
this state on a time or by selecting the “Space Key Press” option, you can manage the test run time. /
Now make the next state to create
the pickup conditions of phase A. Since phase A pickup is considered in this state, it is recommended to
use one of the two state types “Continuous Ramp” or “Step Ramp” to increase the voltage value of this
phase. The difference between
them has already been explained in previous videos, but briefly it can be said that in “Continuous Ramp”
the values are constantly increasing or decreasing, but in “Step Ramp” the values are increased or
decreased with the steps specified
by the user. / “Step Ramp” is selected here. Double-clicking on “Detail View” tab brings you full-size
windows in front. In “Start value”, a start voltage values of the state remains by default. Since the
time characteristic is constant
in this relay, it takes 4 seconds to show its performance, after each change of value, you need to wait
even more. Therefore, "Step Time" is set to a time of more than 4 seconds, for example 4.5 seconds.
Another solution is to change the
time in the relay from 4 to 0 in order to test fast. This way, you can set “Step Time” to a less value,
such as 200 milliseconds. / / In “Step Values”, an increasing step value of the voltage is specified.
The smaller steps, the more accurate
of pickup value, but the test takes long time. Since only the pickup of phase A is considered, an
increasing step value is entered only for this phase. / In "Final Values", the final value is specified.
Since the relay settings are 76
volts, this value is set to a larger number, for example, 80 volts. / Keep in mind that by entering the
number 80, you face a voltage limit error. So, just go to “Test Object” and increase the “Vmax” value in
the “Device Settings” section.
/ / The “Triger” tab specifies under what conditions this state ends. If a definite LED is specified to
record the relay pickup, you can select the “Space Key Press” option and press the space key while the
LED is on. / By referring to
PSL relay of the MiCOM P141, an LED is defined using a timer to turn on and off at the same time as pick
up and drop off. If a particular contact is defined for the relay pick up, select “Use Binary Trigger
Condition as Specified Below”
to, for example, record the pick-up time by connecting the output of the relay contact to the default
binary input C1. Here you can select the binary 0 to 1 as the end element of the state. / By referring
to the PSL of a MiCOM P141 relay,
a contact is assigned to the relay pickup. In the next step, perform the “Drop Off” process in the same
way, but with a decreasing voltage. “Step Ramp” is selected here. A higher value set than the setting
value in relay, for example,
80 volts. Since this process is instantaneous, you can set “Step Time” to a low value such as 200
milliseconds. In “Step Value”, enter the value of 200 mV, and in "Final Step, the nominal value remains
the same. / / In "Triger", you can
press space key as a drop off and the end of a state when the binary changes from 1 to 0. / The same
pick-up and drop-down process on phase A can be followed for other phases, or a combination of two
phases and three phases, depending
on the mode of relay operation. The next step is recording the operation time. To do this, it is
recommended first create the Prefault state to return the condition to normal again. The trigger of this
state can be a specific time or pressing
the space key as the user desires. Now in the final state, to measure the operating time, the “State
Type” is used for phase A, with a voltage above the operating voltage. The state trigger can also be the
trip contact of the relay, which
is assigned to one of the binary inputs by default, or it can be recorded by pressing space key when it
sees the relay LED. However, it is advised to use binary status change due to high accuracy. It is
desirable that you create a prefault
state after this state to complete the test. / At the end of the test, it is time to apply the settings
to record values in the “Measurement View” window. First the name, ramp status, condition for ending the
state, a checked signal, signal
type, nominal value and tolerance are entered for the state in which the pick-up is recorded, i.e.,
state 2. If the values are entered correctly, you see the recorded voltage value for the Phase A pickup
in the “Act” column. Also, in the
“Dev” the amount of error is recorded and a green circle is seen to confirm the test result or a red
cross to fail in the “Assessment”. Follow this procedure for the state in which the drop off is set
down. / Now you can record opration
time assessments in “Time Assessment” tab. Enter here the states name, the conditions which are ignored
in this test, the start and end conditions, the nominal value and the tolerance limit. In this tab, if
all items are entered correctly,
in the “T Act” column, you can see the execution time. Although, in the “T Dev”, the error value is
specified, and in the “Assessment”, you make sure of the correct operation. / After this step, by
selecting the Parameters menu and then
clicking on Reports, you can select the changes you want from the Report Settings section and have the
output as a file. / /
UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION FUNCTION TEST IN MICOM P141 RELAY Voltage collapse occurs for various
reasons such as increasing network load, decrease in phase voltage due to fault in the network, complete
loss of bus voltage and similar cases. So,
protection 27 is intended for different equipment. Suppose that in the MiCOM P141 relay, there is AND
logic, through which the relay measures the phase-to-ground voltage and has a three-phase operation
logic. The test preparation process
will begin, provided that the setting at 51V phase to ground with a time of 4 seconds is provided for
the relay. / First of all, take a look at the relay configuration during AMPro settings to be aware of
the conditions that may have blocked
an operation of the undervoltage function. For example, as you can see here, opening the breaker or
disconnector blocks the undervoltage. / As another example, with online monitoring using “Monitor DDB
Signals” feature, you also find that
VTS blocks function 27 with AND logic when only one of the voltage phases is off. / Note that if no
conditions has prevented its operation, by default, a tripping command is issued by it and therefore the
tripping contact is active. For
this reason, it is necessary to create state 1 by default with nominal values to get the relay out of it
and ready to test. / Since the “Current Supervision” function is not active, there is no need to inject
current in the relay, therefore
deactivate the current outputs in “Hardware Configuration”. You can specify the end condition of this
state on a time or pressing space key in order to manage time duration. Create the next state to make
pickup conditions in three phases.
Here you can select “Continuous Ramp” or “Step Ramp” in “State Type” to reduce three-phase voltage
simultaneously. The difference between these two state types has already been explained in the following
videos, but briefly it can be said
that the values are steadily decreasing in “Continuous Ramp” and they decrease with the specific steps
by the user in “Step Ramp”. The “Step Ramp” is selected here. / In “Start Value”, start voltage values
of the state remain by default,
but in order to speed up the test, you can select a value close to the operation settings. Since the
constant time characteristic requires 4 seconds to display its performance, it is needed to make it and
even a little more after each
voltage change. Therefore, “Step Time” is set to more than 4 seconds, for example 4.5 seconds. Another
solution is to change the amount of time in the relay from 4 seconds to 0 and perform the test faster.
So, you can set the “Step Time”
to a little value, such as 200 milliseconds. / / In “Step Values”, specify the value of the voltage
reduction step. The smaller the steps, the more accurate the pickup value obtained, but it takes a long
time. / Finally, the final value
is specified in “Final Values”. Because the voltage is set to 50 volts in the relay setting, this value
is set to a less value, for example, 45 volts. / Afterwards in “Trigger”, you should specify under what
conditions this state ends.
If a specific LED is determined to record the relay pickup, you can select “Space Key Press” option and
press the space key while the LED is on. / By referring to the MiCOM relay PSL, it’s defined LED 1 with
any start input to turn on
if any element is picked up. At this stage, this option can be used to detect pickups. / Dealing with
it, you can assign a contact to the relay pickup. In this case, you can select the “Use binary trigger
condition as specified below”
option in “Trigger”, for example, record the pickup time by connecting the output of the relay contact
to the default binary input C1. In the next step, form the drop off process in the same way but with the
process of increasing the voltage.
The “Step Ramp” is also selected here. The start value is lower than the setting value, for example, 45
volts. Keep in mind that depending on the moment of the drop off process, you can set “Step Time” to a
low value such as 500 milliseconds.
In “Step Value”, enter the value of 200 millivolt and in the “Final Step” section, the nominal value
remains in force. / In “Trigger”, you can select the space key or changing a binary from 1 to 0 as a
state termination of drop off state.
Finally, the operating time is recorded. It is highly recommended to first create a state for prefault
to return the condition to normal again. The state trigger is a “Time” or “Space Key Press” as you wish.
Now in the final state, to
measure the operating time, set the “State Type” to “Normal” mode with a voltage below the operating
limit for three-phase. / This state trigger can also be the relay tripping contact, which is assigned to
one of the binary inputs by default,
or it can be recorded by pressing space when it sees the relay LED. However, due to the high accuracy,
it is recommended to use binary status change. / At the end of the test, it’s time to apply the settings
to record the values in the
“Measurement View”. First enter the name, ramp status, state completion condition, signal to be checked,
signal type, nominal value and tolerance for the state in which the pickup is registered, i.e., state 2.
If the values are entered
correctly, you will see the amount of voltage recorded for the three-phase pickup in the “Act” column.
Also, in “Dev” the recorded error and in the “Assessment” section the green confirms the test result.
Follow this for the state in which
the drop off is recorded. / You can now record the operating time assessments in “Time Assessment”. Here
you also enter the state name, states or conditions that should be ignored in this review, start and end
conditions, nominal value
and tolerance limit. In this section, if all the items are entered correctly, you can see the operating
time in “T Act” column. Also, the error is specified in “T Dev” and you can make sure of the correct
operation in the “Assessmen”.
/ After this step, by selecting “Parameters” and then clicking on “Reports”, you can select the elements
that you want to display in “Report Settings” and have the output as a file. /
DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION FUNCTION TEST IN MICOM P141 RELAY If a fault current is able to
rotate on both sides in the relay protection zone, the directional overcurrent DOC is required to detect
the direction, allowing it to trip
or block depending on the situation. For this purpose, the relay uses a comparison of phase angle and
fault current with reference values. In addition, RCA Relay Characteristic Angle is used to provide
maximum sensitivity to performance
in the relay protection zone. In the MiCOM P141 relay, the RCA value is in the range of -95 to +95
degrees using the “I Char Angle” parameter. In general, the following formula is established in the
mentioned relay: Directional forward
-90° angleI - angleV - RCA 90° Directional reverse -90° angleI - angleV - RCA 90° The DOC function
function 67 test is performed based on the settings of the first stage in setting group number 1. In
“Setting” section and in the “Group
1 Overcurrent” subset, the forward element is activated with a current of 1 amp and a time setting of
250 milliseconds. Other current stages are disabled. It is possible to use the voltage transformer
supervision VTS, to block DOC element.
This is done in “IBlocking” cell so that if it’s set to 1, the VTS blocks the DOC function and if it’s
set to zero, the stage becomes a non-directional function if the VTS function operates. Finally, it’s
important to pay attention to
the 45-degree characteristic in the current section. For example, to test the operation of phase A in
the 1-amp mode, if element 35.24, the first stage of the directional overcurrent, is set to “Directional
Fwd”, the current should flow
out of terminal C2 but into C2 if set to “Directional Rev”. Note that terminals C3 and C2 are used for
the 1-amp mode of phase A test and terminals C1 and C2 are used for the 5-amp mode of phase A test. If
cell 35.52 V Deo OC Status isn’t
in Disabled mode, there is an overcurrent function for operation mode with voltage control, or if the
element of cell 3502, the first stage of overcurrent, is in “Directional Fwd” or “Directional Rev” mode,
voltage input is required. For
example, directional overcurrent testing on phase A, a nominal voltage is injected into terminals C20
and C21. Before considering each case, it is checked which output and LED are used for the DOC
protection function. Thus, Programmable
Scheme Logic PSL is used. It’s possible that a specific contact is provided for the operation of each
phase. Activating trigger which records error, is also checked for these two functions. If you want to
manually test the overcurrent
function without using “XRIO” or “CSV” files, just double-click on the “Overcurrent” block in “General
Test Object” and select the directional in “Relay Parameters” tab, the relay’s setting is written in
“Elements” tab. The characteristic
angle is entered in “Define Element Directional Behavior” section. Note that RCA is in relay and to
convert it to Maximum Torque Angle MTA, you need a 90 degree clockwise shift. In the first step of the
test, at the best characteristic
angle inject a current, twice as many as the current value is in cell 3503 into the relay and compare
the operating time with what the software predicted. Continue this operation by injecting the quadruple
current. You can also select
the shot points to ensure that the relay doesn’t work in the blocking zone and follow this test at the
angular boundaries of the directional characteristic. Note that for fixed and reverse time
characteristics, a delay of 0.02 to 0.08
seconds must be considered for the acceptable relay operating range, respectively. If you run the test
on fault type L1, L2 and L3, the setting current should not act in a way that its reversal from the
other two phases causes tripping.
The next step is to enter the current and angle settings in “PickUp-DropOff”. You can use “Medium Detail
View” to display the characteristic curve completely. By making settings in the “Trigger” tab, you can
select contacts or other elements
to record test results.
DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT DEF PROTECTION FUNCTION TEST IN MICOM P141 RELAY If the earth fault current
in the protected zone is able to rotate from both sides, it is necessary to use the DEF function so that
the fault direction is specified.
One of the common systems that require such protection is parallel feeders or ring networks. For earth
fault standard protections, there are two options available for polarization including zero sequence or
residual voltage and negative
sequence. Here, zero sequence is used. Since at the creation time of earth fault, residual voltage is
created, it is possible to use this element to polarize directional elements. This process is called
zero sequence polarization, residual
voltage polarization or Neutral Displacement Voltage Polarization. Since under normal conditions due to
reasons such as imbalance, low precision of VT or equipment error, there may be small amounts of
residual voltage, there is an option
to specify the threshold for this element which can be seen as INVNPol set in relay settings. P141 relay
receives this voltage from Residual Voltage input which is provided by open triangle connection or VT.
Using IN2Char Angle parameter,
the RCA value in MiCOM P141 relay is set at -95 to +95 degrees range. Generally, the following relation
is established in the mentioned relay: Directional forward: -90° angleIN - angleVN + 180° - RCA 90°
Directional reverse: -90° angleIN
- angleVN + 180° - RCA 90° Directional earth fault function test or 67N function is executed based on
the settings of the first stage in the number 1 settings group. Note that EF1 and EF2 functions can be
activated in MiCOM P141 relays.
In EF1, the measured current is used directly; also, current transformers or Residual Connection are
used as well. In EF2 the residual current calculated from the sum of the three-phase currents is used.
This is why EF2 is used. In Settings
section, the activation state of this element is indicated by Standard Inverse curve in forward
direction while the 200 mA setting is indicated by a 0/275 TMS. Also, a -60 degree performance angle is
considered. In the end, the polarization
voltage threshold is recorded to be 5 volts. It is possible to use the Voltage Transformer Supervision
element VTS to block the performance of directional residual current element. This is done in
IN2Blocking cell; if number 1 is selected,
the VTS blocks the performance of directional residual current and if number zero is selected, in case
of VTS performance, stage turns into a non-directional factor. Before considering any case, it is
examined to see which output and LED
are used for the performance of directional residual current protection. To do so, PSL or Programmable
Scheme Logic is used. It is possible that a separate contact is considered for the performance of each
phase. Also, fault trigger record
activation is checked for this factor as well. If the user wishes to test a directional residual current
function manually and without using XRIO or CSV files, they only need to double-click on Overcurrent
element in General Test Object
window and by selecting the directional element in Relay Parameters tab, enter the setting values in
Elements tab. Residual section is used for this purpose. Also, in Define Element Directional Behavior
section the operation angle is entered.
Here, this angle is set at -60 degrees. In the first step of the test, a current twice the one specified
in the settings section is injected into the relay in the best operation angle which is -60 degrees, and
the operation time is compared
to the time predicted by the software. This process can be continued by injecting 4 times the specified
current. Also, some shots can be set to ensure inactivity of the relay in the blocking area and the test
can be continued at the border
of operation angles by adding new points. The next step is to enter the current setting and the angle in
pickup and drop off section. To do this, Medium Detail View window can be used which gives a complete
indication of the characteristic.
The process of specifying Pickup and Drop off can be completed first for the current value and then the
angle values. By specifying the settings in setting and trigger tabs, other contacts or elements can be
selected to specify the test
results.
NEW END-TO-END TEST / End to End test is an approach used for protective schemes that consist of two
or more relays that are in connection to exchange information related to trip and blocking. These
schemes are used for more accurate detection
of faults and faster isolation of the system. This test can be used to thoroughly analyze the protective
scheme and make sure of its proper performance. In End to End tests, two or more test devices are used
on each side to simulate the
fault. To successfully perform an End to End test, the following elements are needed: - A test device on
each side - A hardware piece to synchronize the two devices, like a GPS satellites. -A file that is
exported from the relay software
to be used in the test device. This file can be of CSV, XRIO, TEXT or other formats. A communication
equipment such as a phone or a two-way radio to communicate with the other post With this introduction,
we are going to analyze the software
and hardware aspects of a longitudinal differential test on End to End platform. Hardware Preparation In
hardware section, two test devices are needed for performing an End to End test. Each of these devices
needs to be equipped with a
GPS antenna. After examining the maps and isolating the piece of equipment for the test, the required
inputs and outputs should be specified. For example, binary inputs AMT105 can be used to specify the
pickup contact and trip. Binary
outputs can be used in cases such as Circuit Breaker status simulation. In the next step, the test
device voltage and current injection cables should be connected to the relay or test block to replace CT
and PT for injecting the desired
amounts. The GPS antenna is connected to the back of the device to use the GPS time as the base time. In
End to End test, it is also possible to use other bases such as IRIG. To make sure that the breaker
contact position is properly simulated
by the test device, put the breakers in the right position. It should be noted that if other groups are
working on the Circuit Breaker simultaneously, it is necessary to use the test plug to make sure that no
trip is going to go on the
Circuit Breaker. Software Preparation In software section, before anything, it is necessary to connect
to the relay and save the setting and config files as well as the records submitted for event and
disturbance somewhere safe so that
if there is a problem, they can be used as a backup.In the next step, export the file needed to enter
the test device from the relay. As mentioned before, this file can be of different formats such as CSV,
TEXT, XRIO, etc. An example for
End to End test to analyze longitudinal differential protection Old longitudinal differential relays
used the ratio of differential current to restrain current and if this ratio was higher than the
specified settings, the trip was issued
while in modern differential protective relays, a characteristic named alfa plain is used. In this
design, the vector ratio of remote current to local for every current phase and negative and zero
sequence currents are used. Here, to better
present the End to End test method, a longitudinal differential protective test is performed on 7sd610
relays of Siemens Company. In this test, 7SD61 relays of Siemens with MLFB: 7SD61014BB990BJ0 and version
4.77 frameware is used. In
the first step, we are going to review the prerequisites for performing the test described above. After
making sure that everything is ready, first Vebko AMPro software is run and after ensuring that the
laptop is connected to the amp105,
the device IP is entered and the connection is made. Before beginning the test, it is suggested to
ensure that the wiring is appropriate by injecting a current as big as 10 percent of the nominal current
and reading the injected values
from the relay. This can be done by simply clicking on “Test Hardware Congif” option. Then, the intended
current must be specified in “Current Output” section, current injection channels are specified and the
injection duration is selected.
By clicking on the triangle at the top of the screen, the injection will keep going as long as the
specified duration. The first part of the End to End test is related to ensuring stability or in other
words, that if equal currents are
injected from the two sides or in an external fault state, a trip is not issued. To test this state,
“Sequencer” room is opened. At this point, the user needs to prepare the conditions for injecting values
from both sides. It is possible
to do so by selecting “Hardware Configuration” and specifying the two current groups in “Current Output
Signal” section. Here, the first set is indicated by “IL1”, “IL2” and “IL3” which are located in front
of X3, X1 and X2 elements, respectively.
Now, the second set is activated in front of Y3, Y1 and Y2. To avoid confusion, it is better to change
the values in front of X3, X1 and X2 to “Not Used” in “Voltage Output Signal” section. The intended
inputs are activated in “Binary/Analog
Input” header. By default, binary input 1 is set on the trip. For example, we set binary 2 for start and
type “Start” phrase in front of “Label”. If the user wishes to adjust the output signal, for reasons
such as specifying the state
of the key, they can do so by using the binary output header. ”Save last actual data” option in “Extra
Settings” section can be used to save the last injection data. Since longitudinal differential test,
especially in “Search” section,
needs a long time and this can lead to overheating of the device, it is possible to activate “Maximum
fan during test” option so that the fan works at its maximum speed during current injection and avoids
overheating of the device and
stopping the test. By clicking on “Test Object Parameters” and then clicking on “Device”, it is possible
to enter information about the test such as the title of the test, the manufacturer company, the relay
type, the primary and secondary
voltages and some other information that are needed in the report. It should be noted that it is
possible to add the information related to the rows at the left side of this window after performing the
test but the information related
to the rows on the right side must be specified before initiating the test. In the next step, the
current value is to be entered in accordance with the differential settings as well as the turns ratio
and CT polarity of the sides. For
example, suppose that the line current is 100 amps and the CT conversion ratio of the primary side is
600 to 1 while the turns ratio of the other side is 800 to 1 and the polarity is set at “Toward Line”
for both sides. It is possible
to perform mathematical operations in all cells of the Vebko software without the need to use a
calculator. By entering a value in a cell and right-clicking on it and then selecting “Equal Magnitudes”
option, it is possible to enter the
same value in all cells of a current injection side. Then the same process can be repeated for the other
side. Now, since during a stability test the currents on both sides need to be equal in accordance with
the CT turns ratio and have
a 180 degree difference, the currents from one side are taken as the basis and a 180 degree difference
is considered for currents from the other side. To do so, the current angle of one of the cells is
entered and “Balance angle” option
is used to apply the angle difference for the other phases. It is possible to view the amount and
direction of the current values in “Vector View” window. By default, the currents are considered
momentary but it is possible to select average
values by selecting “Setting” header and then “RMS” option. If the stability test is only applied for
one phase, it is possible to mark the checkbox for the corresponding phase so that only the signals
related to that phase are displayed.
In the next step, the test start conditions are adjusted. In this section, by selecting “Start Condition
Repetition” option, a new page opens. In “Start Test Condition” section, the third option is related to
the coordination of GPS for
initiating the test. “Start Time” and “Next Full” options are related to the start time of the test and
the duration of pause before every injection, respectively. If “Next full” option is unchecked, the
injections will be done repeatedly
and without any pause. In this section, a time should be specified as the test start time in
coordination with the other side which is remote post. Before anything, it is necessary to ensure that
the device and the GPS are synchronized
by clicking on “Start Sync” option. If the user is using a 32-bit windows, clicking on “Set Windows Time
with GPS” option, will cause the computer clock to be synchronized with the GPS. In “Data” section it is
possible to view the information
including the GPS time and latitude and longitude. Also, in “Satellite signal level” and “Satellite
signal level history” section, it is possible to view other information related to the power and
intensity of the signals received from
the GPS. After applying the settings, by clicking on “Start” the test beings at the specified time. By
applying these settings, it is possible to start current injection and ensure the stability of the
condition. In the end, the file is
saved and by selecting “Parameters” menu and then clicking on “Report”, after selecting the elements
that are going to be added to the report, “Ok” option is selected. This will open the “Report” header so
that by using the “Export Report”
option or pressing “CTRL+P” keys, the report can be printed or saved as a file. It is worth mentioning
that if the user is using a PDF management software, it is better for them to use “CTRL+P” shortcut so
that the gap between the pages
is removed and the report looks more well-organized. In the next step, “AMT Differential” room is used
to perform the main test. Here, “Hardware Configuration” page is opened and the currents of the remote
side or the other post are set
at “Not Used” in “Output Target” section. It is also possible to save this combination of current
channels by clicking on “Export” option at the bottom of the screen to use it in future tests. Now, by
clicking on “Test Object Parameters”
option, “Import from list” option from the “File” menu or the icon labeled “L” letter is selected. In
this section, by entering the relay name in “Search” box, it is possible to select the XRIO or RIO
corresponding to that relay and the
software version. Here “7SD61” is entered. By double-clicking on the related “XRIO”, “File” menu and
then “Load Relay Setting” is selected. In “Relay Config Type” section, the configuration type received
from the relay is selected which
is different for every brand. In “Config File Path” section, the path of this file is given to the
software. Here, we are receiving the XRIO file using DIGSI 4 software of Siemens Company. By clicking on
“Ok”, it is necessary to ensure
that the relay parameters are entered correctly by viewing the number located in front of “Parameter
Values Imported”. By clicking on “Ok” and closing the windows, the graph will be entered to the
differential characteristic window. Before
beginning the test, the “Test Object Parameters” window is opened again and “7SD61” subcategory is
opened by clicking on the plus sign. In “Relay Parameter Section Local Relay” it is possible to view the
information related to the local
relay or the current post in different subcategories. In subcategory “Setting Group A”, it is possible
to view the settings of different functions. By going to subcategory “87 DIFF PROT”, it is possible to
examine the activity status of
this parameter, time and current settings of pickup and trip, the inrush settings and the parameter
related to the charge of the line. In “Relay parameter section Remote relay” section, it is possible to
view the information related to
the relay of the opposite post. Here, parameters with a green check mark in “State” section in front of
them are the elements that are active in the relay of the opposite side. In this section, it is possible
to receive the information
about the relay of the opposite side from the setting file, xml file or even orally from the operator of
the remote post and enter it into the “Value” field. Now, once more, “Test Object Parameter” is selected
and “Line Differential” block
is opened by double-clicking on it. The important point here is that the values entered for primary and
secondary in “Protected Object” section must be the same in both local and remote posts. Also, these
values need to be reviewed especially
in “CT Nominal Values” section to ensure that the turn’s ratios are correct. Also, it is possible to
view the test status graphically along with the parameters on it by opening “Medium Detail View” window
from the “View” menu. After finishing
this stage, it is time to perform different tests. To start, “On GPS” option is selected after selecting
“Start Condition Repetition”. In this section, by clicking on “Start sync”, the satellite signals are
detected and the time synchronization
is done which may take up to few minutes. Keep in mind that normally, Shot Test and Search Test are
performed in this Room. The first test examines the performance and non-performance in the Trip and No
Trip area, respectively, and the
second test examines the boundary between the TRIPPING and NO TRIP area. Specify the points by
interpolating to measure the curve drawn in this environment and the actual performance of the relay. In
the next step, after coordinating with
the opposite side, some points are put on the differential characteristic and after adding them to the
test table, it is possible to compare their coordination which is a combination of “ibias” and “idff” to
ensure that the conditions
are the same. By clicking on the cog icon at the bottom of the differential characteristic window, it is
possible to use the features that help the user to better supervise the test Now, by returning to “Start
Condition” tab, in “On GPS”
section, a time is considered as the start time after coordination with the opposite side and then by
unchecking “Next full” option whose function has been explained before, the test is initiated. To
perform the "Search Test", you must
first draw lines called "Search Line" in different parts of the chart. To drag the "Search Line" in the
"Differential Characteristic" window, hold down "Ctrl" and left-click the mouse. Draw the direction you
want on the characteristic
curve. You will see that the "Search Line" information drawn is displayed in the "Search Test" line
table. After drawing these lines, the information of these lines should be given to the opposite side so
that the lines drawn on both sides
are exactly the same and their order is the same. After dragging the "Search Line" and making
adjustments in the Start-Condition window By testing a few points on the search line, it interpolates
the characteristic curve and determines
the exact location of the characteristic curve. At the end of the test and saving the file, it is enough
to open the report setting window by selecting the parameters Have the result as an output file.
DRAWING THE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND PRACTICAL EXAMPLE OF DRAWING THE QUAD CHARACTERISTIC IN
SIEMENS 7SA522 RELAY Protection relays with Distance function are used to protect lines against faults
in the network. In order to test this function,
we must first draw its characteristic. Using Rio or Xrio is a simple solution to transfer settings and
configure this function from relay and simulation of the distance characteristic in the test device.
Using digital relays such as Import
Rio and Xrio to draw protection characteristic will surely simplify the process of testing functions,
including Distance. However, in the case of older relays such as static samples, in some cases, we still
have to use step-by-step drawing
and manual impedance characteristic. In addition, in some cases, we may not be able to get relay output
in the form of files such as Xrio, CSV and Text for reasons such as software restrictions. In these
cases, it is enough to open the
Distance block from the Test Object Parameters section and use the Zone Settings header to draw the
distance characteristic. At the top of the table, the New, Edit, Delete and Add duplicate options allow
creating new zones, editing zones,
deleting zones, and overwriting the zone, respectively. You can also have complete management over each
zone using navigation options. In zone Details, you can also see details about trip time, impedance and
values related to the duration
of the operation and see the tolerance value. To get started, simply click on the New option to create a
new zone. By default, this zone is marked as the tripe area for all fault loops. By selecting each zone
and clicking on edit option,
you can have a complete management of the type of distance element or specify the Trip and No Trip area.
Impedance characteristics can be adjusted in the form of Quad and Mho type or lens in the relay. You can
also use the default shapes
for these three characteristics. Any added element can be a line or arc. Each element can be drawn by
entering a point and angle. In the case of the Mho characteristic, the circle drawing is performed using
the central point, radius and
angle. After adding zones using different elements, you can specify the number, label, zone type and
loop fault for it. Keep in mind that four different type can be specified for zones as follows:
Tripping: It is used for zones that based
on the relay settings, points inside trips. Starting: Used for zones that only lead to pickup of
distance function. This pickup can lead to tripe after a certain time. Extended: This zone is only
activated under certain conditions for
example enabling recloser or teleprotection schemes Non-Tripping: In these zones, the relay will not
issue trip command. It is also possible to disable the zones created in this list. After drawing the
zones, trip time and related faults
can be entered for each zone. Drawing the distance characteristic zone 1 forward direction in siemens
7SA522 relay For example, we will review drawing the Quad characteristic of a Siemens 7SA522 relay
sample here. Keep in mind that by
going to the Setting Group section in Digsi 4 software and choosing Distance Protection and then,
General Settings you can view the distance characteristic of the relay by selecting the Graph option. In
the Distance Zones section, you
can see the values related to different parameters of the Distance characteristic in different zones.
Here, zones 1 to 3 in forward direction, zone 4 in reverse direction and finally zone 5, is
non-directional. Considering the overall
characteristic of distance for this relay, which is as follows, as well as the directional
characteristic in page R and X, it is necessary to pay attention to the following points: - In general,
six independent zones and one extra control
zone are defined for each impedance fault loop in this relay. - The process of defining lines is based
on the parameters R, X and φDist. - It is possible to include a cut area to define Load Encroachment. -
Reach element R value can be
defined separately for phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground faults so that we can see wider coverage of
faults for ground faults. - For zone 1, another angle α can also be defined to avoid overreach caused by
changing angles or more. This
angle is not applicable to other zones. - φDist, defined in the relay address 1211 and referred to as
Distance Angle or Distance angle, shows the rotation angle in the Distance component. This element is
used for both Quad and MHO characteristics
and can be adjusted to the same value as the line angle element 1105. Now it's time to drawing the
distance characteristic. By revisiting the Zone Settings section and clicking on the New option, we
select the Quad characteristic for the
relay. Here, the value R moves the center of the line over the horizontal axis and the X value moves the
center of the line over the vertical axis. The specified angle is also cause the line to rotate. The
first line, while passing through
the R axis with the value R1, that is, the resistance of zone 1 passes., has a φDist angle, which here
is equal to the load angle of 82 degrees. In this way, we enter the value R equal to 24.899, X value
equal to 0 and the angle value
is 82 degrees. The second line is the horizontal line taking alpha equal to zero degrees with the
specifications R=0, the value X is 6.211 and the angle is 180 degrees. The third line that passes
through the source is also draw by the
specifications R=0, X=0 and the angle derived from the manual, that is 300 degrees. The fourth line that
passes through the source has a 22-degree angle in according to the manual. For this purpose, we enter
the value R=0, X=0 and the
angle at 338 degrees. The fifth line is draw by considering the value R equal to zero, X equal to -6.211
and the angle equal to zero. By entering the above coordinates, zone 1 is created as Forward. Creating
characteristics for reverse
and non-directional zones also follows this process. By drawing the distance characteristic, it is
possible to start the Shot Test and Search Test process in order to ensure the accuracy of the graphical
characteristic.
DRAWING THE LOAD ENCROACHMENT CHARACTERISTIC A region may be defined as Load Encroachment, along
with the graphical distance characteristic. The Load Encroachment scheme prevents the impedance area
from entering the distance characteristic
and finally prevents unwanted trip. This area usually overlaps with the trip area and is often activated
only for three-phase fault loops. For this purpose, after adding the protection zones, add two more
zones to be used as Load Encroachment
Blinder. We place these zones on “Non tripping” and fault loop on L1-L2-L3. This characteristic requires
three elements that can be Line Cartesian, Arc Cartesian or Arc Polar type. For each element, just hit
add Element and select its
type. For example, in the Siemens 7SA522 relay, we drawing the specifications of Load Encroachment by
using elements 1241, 1242, 1243 and 1244. For this purpose, we need three “Line Cartesian” components.
The first component is a line
that extends through the source, with coordinates R=65.36, X=58.85 and an angle of 42+180=222 degrees.
The second component with R=65.36 and X=0 has an angle of 270 degrees, perpendicular to the horizontal
axis. The third component of
the Cartesian have coordinates R=65.36, X=-58.85 and -42 degree angle. You can create the final
characteristic by disabling the Auto Close option. In order to draw the Load Encroachment characteristic
on the left side of the Distance characteristic,
we create three Cartesian components with specifications R=-65.36, X=-58.85 with an angle of 42 degrees,
R=-65.36, X=0 with an angle of 90 degrees, and finally, R=-65.36, X=58.85 with an angle of 138 degrees.
As mentioned above, during
the test, we will not see trip issued in this area.
DRAWING THE MHO CHARACTERISTIC IN GEC PYTC RELAY For example, we consider the PYTC relay to manually
draw the distance characteristic. PYTC is actually a model of the PYTS relay used to protect systems
including underground cables, as well
as systems consisting of cable and airlines combination. The Mho characteristic in this relay makes the
Distance function available to protect these systems. / The modules on this relay allow adjusting the
protection zones based on different
parameters. assume the different element settings of the modules in this relay as follows: In this case,
considering the angle of the line is equal to 66 degrees, we add three Mho zones. The first zone
features a forward with a reach of
5.1 ohms and an angle of 66 degrees. The second zone haves a forward characteristic of 7.65 ohms reach
and an angle of 66 degrees, and finally the third zone 16.78 ohms reach with the same angle. After this,
you can also manually enter
the trip time for each zone.
SYNCHRONIZER FUNCTION TEST IN SIPROTEC SIEMENS 7SD82 RELAY In AMT Synchronizer, we're going to test
the synchronous check function in Siemens' 7SD82 relay. This function can be used to synchronize the
line and busbar, two busbars with coupling
or a generator and busbar. This function, which is located in circuit breaker function group, can be
used in different modes such as checking the synchronous of two systems, switching synchronous power
systems, switching asynchronous power
systems and switching the busbar line. For this purpose, different stages can be used in the form of
Synchrocheck Stage with two stages or Synchronous/Asynchronous Stage with six stages. This function uses
two voltages to check the connecting
conditions. The reference voltage of the first side which is called V1 and the reference voltage of the
second side which is V2. Choosing voltages to synchronize depends on the system connection on the
primary side. In this test, a 4-input
voltage connection is used, which includes a single-phase voltage and a three-phase combination. In this
case, the voltage attached to the single-phase Measuring Point is the decisive reference. / The measured
values related to this performance
are displayed on the relay as primary, secondary and percentage. When the function is activated, the
values of Delta V, Delta F and Delta Alpha are checked to connect the synchronous of the two systems.
The settings on the relay are as
follow: Sync. operating mode = on _:5071:122 Max. voltage diff. V2V1 = 5.0 V _:5071:123 Max. voltage
diff. V2V1 = 5.0 V _:5071:117 Max. frequency diff. f2f1 = 0.10 Hz _:5071:118 Max. frequency diff. f2f1 =
0.10 Hz _:5071:124 Max. angle
diff. α2α1 = 10o _:5071:125 Max. angle diff. α2α1 = 10o If we want to differentiate between synchronous
and asynchronous conditions, we should use synchronous/Asynchronous stage, whose voltage-frequency
diagram is as followed: / By opening
the AMT Synchronizer room to enter the relay information for testing, the first task is to enter the
relay nominal information in "Device". In this section, related settings for CT and VT conversion ratio
are entered. Keep in mind that
if there is a different VT conversion ratio between the two systems, a virtual VT should be used,
according to the manual relay recipe, use a coefficient to match the conversion ratio. / In the Hardware
Configuration section, 5 Input binaries
are defined by default to transfer relay outputs to the test device to adjust the voltage and frequency
and issue the connecting command. Considering that in this test, alarms about voltage and frequency
values are read from the relay,
we only configure the binary related to the command connected by the relay. Next, in the Synchronizing
Parameters window the relay settings are entered. By specifying the phase sequence, connected voltages,
breaker connection settings,
and secondary voltage in the Protection Device tab, it is time to reach the Synchronizing Window tab. In
this section, the minimum and maximum values for voltage and frequency parameters are entered, followed
by the allowed tolerances
for the Phi, V and f parameters. Keep in mind that for this relay, Dead Zone is not defined as an area
where no output is exported from the relay. When the settings are confirmed, it is time to do the test.
In this section, system settings
1 and 2 can be seen in the relevant tables. In addition to the possibility of manually entering
specifications for two systems, it is possible to monitor the delta value of voltage, frequency and
angle elements. In the next step, simply
add points to the attribute and run the test. It is also possible to create points on either side of the
characteristic boundary line using the Quick Test option. With the completion of the test, the selected
items and elements can be
viewed in the Report View window.
51V FUNCTION TEST IN SIEMENS 7SD82 RELAY In Siemens 7SD82 relay, this function can be used in
function groups with three-phase voltage and current, and two inverse time stages depending on voltage
and constant time with specific undervoltage
conditions are considered by default. In this test, the first stage of both categories is used. Note
that in the "51V" function test, the fault detection or non-detection is done according to the voltage
and current level of the test,
which is "Voltage-Controlled" and "Voltage-Restrained", used as a generator differential protection
support and in power systems to coordinate high current relays. In this test, as if is seen the
characteristic curve is Voltage-Restrained.
/ In the V/Vrated range between 0.25 and 1, the diagram is linear, which the pickup current value is
directly proportional to the voltage increase. In this regard, V is the phase-to-phase voltage measured,
Vrated, rated voltage, PU sett
setting of pickup threshold and PUV pickup threshold applied, according to voltage. The control voltage
for each current phase is according to the table: / The settings in the 7SD82 relay for this protection
stage are performed according
to the image: / If harmonics is to be included in the measurements related to this stage, select RMS
Value option in the Method of Measurement section. Otherwise, in order to skip harmonics and transient
conditions, select Fundamental
Com, which is Siemens' suggested option. The 1.5amp current setting value is also a good option for most
applications. The current threshold parameter for lines is up to 10% and for transformers and engines up
to about 20% higher than
the maximum of the expected load, adjusted. In the characteristic section, select the curve according to
the IEC and ANSI standards. Here the 1amp setting is used. to reset parameter, you can also select the
instant reset option or reset
by modeling the movement of disk relays. The Time Dial option also allows moving the characteristic in
the direction of the time axis. The next stage in considering the undervoltage function conditions is
also set as follow so that if
there are sufficient voltage conditions, the activation of the function is seen. / After applying the
settings on the relay and specifying the required contacts in the configuration section, it is time to
test the function. Keep in mind
that due to curve performance, either use the pickup contact or consider the time required in the Max
Fault Time section for the 51V function performance. In the AMT VIStarting room, to test the relay,
first enter its information in the
"Test Object" window. In the "Device" block, information such as the relay's name, serial number, relay
operation location, "CT" and "PT" specifications are entered. Also, to enter the settings of this
function, you need to double-click
on the "VI Starting" block from the tree chart, and in the "VI Starting Parameters" page, enter the
settings needed to display in the "VI Starting Characteristic" characteristic curve. In the Tolerances
section, you can also enter the
percentage of acceptable fault to perform the test. By confirming the entered settings, it is time to
perform Shot Test, Check Test and Search Test. in the "Shot Test" tab you select the type of fault and
points to test and after the test
is perform, you can see the evaluation results. In "Check Test", the upper and lower tolerances of the
relay displayed as dashes in "VI Starting Characteristic" are tested and evaluated. Note that the
plotted "Check Line" should have cross
at least one of the tolerance lines of the characteristic curve. Search Test is the last test performed
on the "VI Starting" characteristic curve. The purpose of this test is to find the characteristic curve
line. The "Search Line" method
is the same as "Check Line". By performing the test, the software by testing several points on the
search line to the characteristic curve interpolation and determine the exact location of the
characteristic curve. Keep in mind that due
to the required voltage level, by referring to the test object Parameters and then the Device block. you
may need to increase the final voltage limit or V max When the test ends and saves the file, simply
select parameters to open the
report setting window to get the result as an output file by selecting the parameters that need to be
entered in the final report.
NON-DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular
relay of Vebko company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and
software environment of this relay have already
been presented in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay
at first, simply load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read
Hardware from Relay option. The
default password is 123456 to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal,
which if confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current hardware
signals used in the VFC section
are deleted. It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current
transformers are determined in the related card. Here the ratio of current card conversion is 200A to
1A. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned
earlier in the AMR software, config of some of the most widely used functions as are placed in the
software as sample the user can send new settings to the relay by selecting each of them and applying
the desired changes. For this purpose,
a set of functions can be seen in the Relay VFC tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be
noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the blocks in the VFC are removed. Here the non-directional
overcurrent function displayed
under the name OC 50/51 is selected. In configuring this function, an OC Inverse block and two OC
Definite blocks are used. They have different settings and the signals of a current card are assigned to
their input from a measuring point.
Finally, output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks. To
change the settings, simply right-click on each block to access a set of options. Finally, the changes
are sent to the relay. In this video,
by double-clicking on blocks that contain constant time stages for non-directional overcurrent function,
disables them and define the 1A and TMS current settings equal to 0.1 by double-clicking on the first
stage, which is defined as reverse
time. By making these changes, simply select Send Config and Setting to Relay from the Device menu
again. In this way, the settings and configuration applied are moved to the relay. In the next step, by
running AMPro software and opening
the AMT Overcurrent room, it is enough to go to the Object Parameters test section and create the test
characteristic after entering the information. Here, a reverse time characteristic is created by 1A and
TMS=0.1 current settings. Keep
in mind that it is also possible to test this characteristic using the Xrio file. In order to evaluate
the performance of non-directional overcurrent function, two Trip Time and Pickup-Drop Off tests are
performed. The purpose of Trip
Time is to detect and evaluate the accuracy of the performance time of this function and the purpose of
pickup-drop off test is to detect and evaluate the accuracy of the actual current of the performance
threshold and of reset threshold
of this function. Trip Test Three states including PreFault, Fault and PostFault are required to perform
this test. PreFault time is suitable for 500 milliseconds, fault time should be greater than the maximum
trip time, and Post Fault
time is at least 500 milliseconds. PostFault time should be increased if the drop-off is not an
instantaneous. The suggested points for reduced time functions are 1.5 times, 2 times and 4 times the
regulatory current, and for constant
time curves, 1.5 and 2 times the regulatory current. To detect the regulatory current of the second
unit, two points can be added to the amount of 90 and 110 percent of the regulatory current of the
second unit. By adding points, perform
the test to check the performance of this function from the point of view of time accuracy.
Pickup/Drop-off Test In order to perform this test, first determine how the diagnosis of pickup and
drop-off is performed. This process can be
done through a separate contact, namely Start, Relay LED viewing, or changing the setting for
instantaneous function and using the trip contact. Here we used the Contact Pickup Relay. You can also
put the current fault value in the desired
range. Here the fault value is considered 5% by default. The performance range of overcurrent curves in
the AMR relay starts from 1.1 regulatory current in the relay. Therefore, first, by enabling the Active
Range Limits option in the
Overcurrent Protection Parameters window, the Imin value is set to 1.1 Iref. In the next step, the
current setting value for the pickup is placed on 1.1*1=1.1 amps. as it is shown By adding points, it is
enough to perform the test and
add the necessary elements to the report when it is finished.
UNDER VOLTAGE PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular relay of Vebko
company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and software environment
of this relay have already been presented
in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay at first, simply
load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read Hardware from Relay
option. The default password
is 123456 to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal, which if
confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current hardware signals
used in the VFC section are deleted.
It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current transformers are
determined in the related card. Here, the current card conversion ratio is 200A to 1A and the voltage
card conversion ratio is 63000
to 100V. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned earlier in AMR software, the config of some of the most
widely used functions, as an example, are placed in the software as samples; and the user can select any
of them apply the desired
changes and send the new settings to the relay. For this purpose, a set of functions can be seen in the
Relay VFC tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp
Function, the available blocks in the
VFC are removed. Here the Under Voltage function displayed with the name UV 27 is selected. In the
configure of this function, to calculate the line-by-line voltages, first the relay voltage card signals
are assigned to the Voltage Quantities
block inputs and then assigned to the Undervoltage block. Also, current card signals connected to the
current transformers CT of the same feeder are assigned to the Undervoltage block for current
monitoring. Finally, undervoltage block
output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks. The purpose is to
test the Undervoltage function with AND logic, so the sample of line-by-line voltages are used. By
double-clicking on the Undervoltage
block, two stages are defined here. The first stage with a 50V setting and a performance time of 1.5
seconds and a second stage with a 45V setting and a performance time of 1 second. The Drop Ratio value
is also 1.2 for both stages by
default. Since there is no need for Current Supervision, option I superv. is disabled. After this, the
pickup signals of both stages are removed from the unit with current monitoring and the necessary
signals are added to the normal units
without current monitoring. In the final step, these changes are applied to the relay to be prepared for
testing. In the next step, by running AMPro software and opening the AMT Under/Over Voltage Test, simply
go to the Test Object Parameters
section and enter the basic information. Testing this function can also be performed in AMT sequencer
room, but in order to make the states and test management more comfortable, this process is performed in
the AMT Under/Over Voltage Test.
First, the information is entered in the General Information section. This information can include relay
type, serial number and other information such as post name and feeder/b number. In the Test Setting
section, the UV 27 option is
selected. Here Vnom sec, 100 volts is selected. Also, the performance mode is located on AND logic to
reduce the voltage of all three phases of the specified value to provide the test. In order to evaluate
the performaning of Under Voltage
protection, two time tests Trip time and Voltage Performance Test pickup/drop-off are performed.
Assuming there are two performance stages for Under Voltage protection, regulatory voltage value,
voltage type, performance time and more
are entered in the Data Table section for both stages of operation. After this, in order to be more
accurate in testing, continuous ramp option is selected in state setting section, C1 and C2 contacts are
considered for detection of trip
and pickup/drop-off, respectively. In addition to contact, the relay pickup status can be recorded with
LED or even adjusted to instantaneous Under Voltage protection. By entering the necessary settings in
the Test Plan section, schedule
the test in a way that both time test and voltage performance testing are performed. In the Fault Type
section, by selecting the L1L2L3 option, states are created for the function test based on the Under
Voltage of all three phases. By
enabling Time Test, the state related to the performance time check is created. Vtest is the voltage
value that the performance of the function in each stage is guaranteed. By selecting yes for PU Test and
DOU Test elements, it is confirmed
to perform pickup drop-off tests. In the PU Val. Assessment section, the evaluation of the pickup value
of the function, in the PU Start section, the initial voltage of the pickup process, in the PU end
section, the final voltage limit
for the pickup test, and in the DOU End section, the final value for the drop-off test is entered. In
the Total section, the total duration of the test is entered. By Clicking on the Init Test option,
creating states will be done based
on user-imported settings. These states can be seen in the Table View window. This way, the test can be
performed to evaluate the necessary items. In the Measurement View section, in Assessment ramp tab you
can see the assessment of the
pickup drop-off and in the Time Assessment tab, you can see the performance time assessments of each
stage can be seen. Keep in mind that when the test reaches the second stage assessment section, a
message appears to the user to disable
the first stage in order to provide non-interference conditions. This can be done by removing elements
related to the first stage from the blocks associated with pickup and trip. Another solution is to
equalize the setting of two stages.
For this purpose, once again refer to AMR software and set the first stage settings equal to the second
stage settings the settings are then to be sent to the relay. In the end, the results are added to the
report by clicking on the Add
to Report option. These results are visible in the Report window.
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular relay of Vebko
company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and software environment
of this relay have already been presented
in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay at first, simply
load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read Hardware from Relay
option. The default password
is 123456 to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal, which if
confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current hardware signals
used in the VFC section are deleted.
It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current transformers are
determined in the related card. Here, the ratio of the current card conversion is 200A to 1A and the
voltage card conversion ratio is
63,000 to 100V. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned earlier in the AMR software, configuring some of
the most widely used functions are placed in the software as samples. The user can send new settings to
the relay by selecting each
of them and applying the desired changes. For this purpose, a set of functions can be seen in the Relay
VFC tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the
blocks in the VFC are removed.
Here the overvoltage function displayed with the name OV 59 is selected. In the config of this function,
to calculate the line-by-line voltages, First the relay voltage card signals are assigned to the Voltage
Quantities block inputs and
then assigned to the Overvoltage block. Finally, overvoltage output signals are assigned to Binary
Output and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks. Since the purpose is to test the overvoltage function
with OR logic, analog signals related
to the voltage sample must be applied directly to the overvoltage block to increase the voltage of each
phase, the relay function should occur. By double-clicking the Overvoltage block, two stages will be
defined here. The first stage
with a 65V set, performance time of 2 seconds and a second stage with a 70V set and a performance time
of 4 seconds. In addition, Operation Quantity is placed on Vphn/V1/V2 to include single-phase
performance. Finally, the changes are
sent to the relay. In the next step, by running AMPro software and opening the AMT Under/Over Voltage
Test, simply go to the Object Parameters test section and enter the basic information. Testing this
function can also be performed in
AMT sequencer room, but in order to make the states and test management more comfortable, this process
is performed in the AMT Under/Over Voltage Test. Firstly, the information is entered in the General
Information section. This information
can include relay type, serial number and other information such as post name and feeder/b number. In
the Test Setting section, the OV 59 option is selected. Here Vnom sec, 100 volts is selected. Also, the
performance mode is located on
the OR logic to increase the voltage of each phase from the specified value to provide the test. In
order to evaluate the performance of overvoltage protection, two time tests Trip time and Voltage
Performance Test pickup/drop-off are
performed. Assuming two performance stages for overvoltage protection, regulatory voltage value, voltage
type, performance time and more are entered in the Data Table section for both stages of operation.
After this, to be more accurate
in testing, continuous ramp option is selected in state setting section; then C1 and C2 contacts are
considered for trip diagnosis and pickup/drop-off, respectively. The status of the relay pickup can be
recorded with LED in addition to
contact, or even adjusting to instantaneous over-voltage protection. By entering the necessary settings
in the Test Plan section, schedule the test in a way that both time test and voltage performance testing
are performed. In fault type,
by selecting L1E, L2E and L3E, states are created to test the function based on the voltage increase of
each phase independently. By enabling Time Test, the state related to the performance time check is
created. Vtest is the voltage value
at which the performance of the function in each stage is guaranteed. By selecting yes for PU Test and
DOU Test elements, it will be confirmed to perform pickup drop-off tests. In the PU Val. Assessment
section, the evaluation of the pickup
value of the function, in the PU Start section, the initial voltage of the pickup process, in the PU end
section, the final voltage limit for the pickup test, and in the DOU End section, the final value for
the drop-off test is entered.
In the Total section, the total duration of the test is entered. By Clicking on the Init Test option,
states are created based on user-imported settings. These states can be seen in the Table View window.
This way, the test can be performed
to evaluate the necessary items. In the Measurement View section, in Assessment ramp, the assessment of
the pickup drop-off can be seen. In the Time Assessment tab, the performance time assessments of each
stage can be observed. Keep in
mind that when the test reaches the second stage assessment section, a message has appeared to tell the
user to disable the first stage in order to provide the conditions for non-interference. This can be
done by removing elements related
to the first stage from the blocks associated with pickup and trip. Another solution is to equalize the
setting of two stages. For this purpose, once again refer to AMR software, set the first stage equal to
the second stage settings and
the settings are sent to the relay. In the end, the results are added to the report by clicking on the
Add to Report option. The results are visible in the Report window.
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular
relay of Vebko company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and
software environment of this relay have already
been presented in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay
at first, simply load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read
Hardware from Relay option. The
default password is 123456 to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal,
which if confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current hardware
signals used in the VFC section
are deleted. It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current
transformers are determined in the related card. Here, current card conversion ratio is 200A to 1A and
voltage card conversion ratio is 63,000
to 100V. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned earlier in the AMR software, configuring some of the
most widely used functions are placed in the software as samples the user can send new settings to the
relay by selecting each of them
and applying the desired changes. For this purpose, a set of functions can be seen in the Relay VFC tab
and in the Temp Functions section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the blocks
in the VFC are removed. Here
the negative sequence overcurrent function displayed with the name NS 46 is selected. In this template,
first, the signals of a current card are given to the Current Quantities block to create different
current sequences in its output.
In the default config of the Negative Sequence function, a block with different stages and signals of a
current card with negative sequence is assigned to its input. Finally, output signals are assigned to
Binary Outputs and relay LEDs
by Output and LED blocks. To change the settings, simply right-click on each block to access a set of
options. By double-clicking on the Negative Sequence block, the settings for its various stages are
visible. Here, the first stage with
normal Inverse setting characteristic has a current of 0.1 amps, the TMS equals 1, and the two constant
time stages with a current setting of 0.2 and 0.5A have a time setting of 1.5 and 0.5 seconds,
respectively. By making these changes,
simply select Send Config and Setting to Relay from the Device menu again. This way, the settings and
applied configuration are moved to the relay. Cut from this part until the overcurrent room opens. In
the next step, by running AMPro
software and opening the AMT Overcurrent room, it is enough to go to the Test Object Parameters section
and create the test characteristic after entering the information. The test characteristic is created in
the Elements tab in the Negative
Sequence section. Therefore, the default characteristic in this section is removed first. First, a
reverse time characteristic is created with a current setting of 0.1 amps and TMS=1. The next
characteristic is created by current setting
of 0.2 and a time of 1.5 seconds. Finally, the third characteristic is created by adjusting the current
setting of 0.5 and the time of 0.5 seconds. Keep in mind that it is also possible to test this function
using the Xrio file. In order
to evaluate the performance of negative sequence overcurrent function, two Trip Time and Pickup-Drop Off
tests are performed. The purpose of Trip Time is to detect and evaluate the accuracy of the performance
time of this function and
the purpose of pickup-drop off test is to detect and evaluate the accuracy of the actual current of the
performance threshold and the reset threshold of this function. Trip Test To perform this test three
states ones including PreFault,
Fault and PostFault are required. PreFault time is suitable for 500 milliseconds, fault time should be
greater than the maximum trip time, and Post Fault time is at least 500 milliseconds. PostFault time
should be increased if the drop-off
is not instantaneous. The suggested points for reduced time functions are 1.5 times, 2 times and 4 times
the regulatory current, and for constant time curves, 1.5 and 2 times the regulatory current. These
points are added to the fault
type 12 to prepare the test. Keep in mind that due to the existence of three different characteristic,
in some cases, the added points with the mentioned coefficients fall on the other characteristic. In
these cases, other points are manually
added on each characteristicto ensure accurate time performance. To detect the regulatory current of the
second and third units, two points can be added to 90 and 110 percent of the regulatory current of these
units in order to perform
a kind of pickup drop-off test for these characteristics. Once again, the Max Fault Time value is set
based on the highest number inserted in the t nom section. By adding points, perform the test to check
the performance of this function
from the point of view of time accuracy. Pickup/Drop-off Test In order to perform this test, it is first
to determine how the diagnosis of pickup and drop-off is performed. This process can be done through a
separate contact, like Start,
Relay LED viewing, or changing the setting for the instantaneous of the function and using the trip
contact. Here we used the relay pickup contact. You can also put the current fault value in the desired
range. Here the fault value is
considered 5% by default. The performance range of overcurrent curves in the AMR relay starts from 1.1
regulatory current in the relay. Therefore, first, by enabling the Active Range Limits option in the
Overcurrent Protection Parameters
window, Imin value are determined to be 1.1*0.1=0.11 Iref. In the next step, the current adjustment
value for the pickup is placed on 0.1*1.1=0.11 amps. By adding this point, it is enough to perform the
test and add the necessary elements
to the report when it is finished.
DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular relay
of Vebko company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and software
environment of this relay have already
been presented in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay
at first, simply load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read
Hardware from Relay option. The
default password is 123456 in order to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the
signal, which if confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current
hardware signals used in the
VFC section are deleted. It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and
current transformers are determined in the related card. Here the ratio of current card conversion is
200A to 1A. First, enter the VFC
page: As mentioned earlier in the AMR software, configuring some of the most widely used functions as
examples are placed in the software and the user can send new settings to the relay by selecting each of
them and applying the desired
changes. For this purpose, a set of functions can be seen in the Relay VFC tab and in the Temp Functions
section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the blocks in the VFC are removed.
Here the directional overcurrent
function displayed with the name OC 67 is selected. In Configuring, this function uses an OC Inverse
block and two OC Definite blocks that have different settings and the signals of a current card are
assigned to their input from a measuring
point. Finally, output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks.
To change the settings, simply right-click on each block to access a set of options. Finally, the
changes are sent to the relay. In
this video, by double-clicking on blocks that contain constant time stages for the directional
overcurrent function, disables them and define the 1A and TMS current settings equal to 0.1 by
double-clicking on the first stage, which is
defined as reverse time. By double-clicking on the Direction block, the elements related to the
directional function include rotation angle and ground polarization. After this, the changes will be
sent to the relay by selecting send config
and setting to relay option. In the next step, by running AMPro software and opening the AMT Overcurrent
room, it is enough to go to the Object Parameters test section and create the test characteristic after
entering the information.
Keep in mind that it is also possible to test this function using the Xrio file. Here, the current
setting value is equal to 1 amp, TMS is 0.1. In the overcurrent test, it is required to set two
parameters maximum torque angle and sector
operation. To do this from the Overcurrent window and the Relay Parameters tab, the directional option
is selected and from the Element tab, the Directional section is placed on forward. Then enter under the
Define Element Directional
Behavior tab and the maximum torque angle and Sector operation parameters are equal to -45 and 172
degrees, respectively. In directional overcurrent relays, In order to better performance of relay, in
orientation and reaching the MTA value
,the rotation of the reference voltage angle is used.. The performance area or forward area in this
relay is set from -131 degrees to +41 degrees. In order to investigate the directional overcurrent
function, in addition to the time of
operation and current, the angle of performance should also be investigated. For this purpose,
performance time tests are performed along with amplitude and phase tests. In the time test, the
accuracy of the performance time is investigated
and in the amplitude and phase test, the detection and evaluation of the accuracy of the actual current
and the actual angle of the performance threshold and reset threshold are considered. Cross Polarized
method is used in AMR Vebko relay,
i.e. using healthy phases to detect fault direction. For example, in case of faults in phase A, the
relay uses VBC reference voltage and IA current to detect the fault current direction. The Forward or
Reverse area means the part where
the relay must detect the fault will be determined by the start angle and end angle. Test Test In order
to test the DOC function, three states are considered. The first state for 500 milliseconds, normal
conditions this means that it will
inject a nominal voltage with zero current. In the second state, the fault conditions are applied and
the current is selected for all phases of L1E-L2E-L3E in the range of 2 to 4 times the nominal current.
The duration of this state should
be greater than the nominal time of the relay trip. The third state will also be activated as post-Fault
with zero voltage and current for 500 milliseconds. In order to see better performance of the function,
from the View menu, the Detail
View window opens. After adding double points and four times the regulatory current at the best possible
angle in terms of performance of the function i.e. -45 degrees for the L1E-L2E-L3E falt types, a point
in the No Trip area here at
an angle of 135 degrees is tested. Due to the nature of the two-phase fault, the currents in this fault
will have a phase difference of 180 degrees so that the 3I0 current is not created and the 67N function
is not activated. Pickup-Drop
off Test In order to perform the Pickup-Drop off test, you can also use a relay or LED contact and even
a setting change to instantaneous the function. For this purpose, three states are needed for example in
the first state, the normal
network conditions, applied, in the second state the pickup test and in the third state the drop-off
test is performed. In the second state, for pickup and drop-off test of angle, the current value will be
twice the regulatory current.
these states are performed in the Overcurrent room automatically by entering the settings by the user.
The performance range of overcurrent curves in the AMR relay starts from 1.1 regulatory current in the
relay. Therefore, first, by enabling
the Active Range Limits option in the Overcurrent Protection Parameters window, the Imin value is set to
1.1 Iref. In the next step, the current adjustment value for the pickup test of the current value is
placed on 1.1*1=1.1 amps. This
test is performed at the best possible angle in terms of relay performance i.e. -45 degrees. After the
current pick up-drop off, it is time to Pick up-drop off on the angle. For this purpose, as mentioned
above, the current value is applied
twice as much as the regulatory current, and once the trend is performed for the upper limit of the
angle, i.e. 41 degrees, and once for the lower limit of the angle, i.e. -131 degrees. By adding the
necessary tests and performing, you
can finally add favorites items to the report.
NON-DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular
relay of Vebko company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and
software environment of this relay have already
been presented in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay
at first, simply load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read
Hardware from Relay option. The
default password is 123456 to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal,
which if confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current hardware
signals used in the VFC section
are deleted. It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current
transformers are determined in the related card. Here the ratio of current card conversion is 200A to
1A. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned
earlier in the AMR software, config of some of the most widely used functions as are placed in the
software as sample the user can send new settings to the relay by selecting each of them and applying
the desired changes. For this purpose,
a set of functions can be seen in the Relay VFC tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be
noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the blocks in the VFC are removed. Here the non-directional
overcurrent function displayed
under the name OC 50/51 is selected. In configuring this function, an OC Inverse block and two OC
Definite blocks are used. They have different settings and the signals of a current card are assigned to
their input from a measuring point.
Finally, output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks. To
change the settings, simply right-click on each block to access a set of options. Finally, the changes
are sent to the relay. In this video,
by double-clicking on blocks that contain constant time stages for non-directional overcurrent function,
disables them and define the 1A and TMS current settings equal to 0.1 by double-clicking on the first
stage, which is defined as reverse
time. By making these changes, simply select Send Config and Setting to Relay from the Device menu
again. In this way, the settings and configuration applied are moved to the relay. In the next step, by
running AMPro software and opening
the AMT Overcurrent room, it is enough to go to the Object Parameters test section and create the test
characteristic after entering the information. Here, a reverse time characteristic is created by 1A and
TMS=0.1 current settings. Keep
in mind that it is also possible to test this characteristic using the Xrio file. In order to evaluate
the performance of non-directional overcurrent function, two Trip Time and Pickup-Drop Off tests are
performed. The purpose of Trip
Time is to detect and evaluate the accuracy of the performance time of this function and the purpose of
pickup-drop off test is to detect and evaluate the accuracy of the actual current of the performance
threshold and of reset threshold
of this function. Trip Test Three states including PreFault, Fault and PostFault are required to perform
this test. PreFault time is suitable for 500 milliseconds, fault time should be greater than the maximum
trip time, and Post Fault
time is at least 500 milliseconds. PostFault time should be increased if the drop-off is not an
instantaneous. The suggested points for reduced time functions are 1.5 times, 2 times and 4 times the
regulatory current, and for constant
time curves, 1.5 and 2 times the regulatory current. To detect the regulatory current of the second
unit, two points can be added to the amount of 90 and 110 percent of the regulatory current of the
second unit. By adding points, perform
the test to check the performance of this function from the point of view of time accuracy.
Pickup/Drop-off Test In order to perform this test, first determine how the diagnosis of pickup and
drop-off is performed. This process can be
done through a separate contact, namely Start, Relay LED viewing, or changing the setting for
instantaneous function and using the trip contact. Here we used the Contact Pickup Relay. You can also
put the current fault value in the desired
range. Here the fault value is considered 5% by default. The performance range of overcurrent curves in
the AMR relay starts from 1.1 regulatory current in the relay. Therefore, first, by enabling the Active
Range Limits option in the
Overcurrent Protection Parameters window, the Imin value is set to 1.1 Iref. In the next step, the
current setting value for the pickup is placed on 1.1*1=1.1 amps. as it is shown By adding points, it is
enough to perform the test and
add the necessary elements to the report when it is finished.
DISTANCE PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular relay of Vebko
supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and software environment of this
relay have already been presented in the
film related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay at first, simply load
the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read Hardware from Relay
option. The default password is 123456
in order to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal, which, if
confirmed, the current hardware signals used in the VFC section will be deleted, if the current hardware
is not the same as the relay hardware.
It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current transformers are
determined in the related card. Here, the ratio of the current card conversion is 200A to 1A and the
voltage card conversion ratio is
63,000 to 100V. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned earlier in the AMR software, configuring some of
the most widely used functions as examples are placed in the software and the user can send new settings
to the relay by selecting
each of them and applying the desired changes. For this purpose, a set of functions can be seen in the
Relay VFC tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp
Function, the blocks in the VFC are
removed. Here the Distance function displayed with the name Dist is selected. As can be seen in this
Temp Function, the signals of analog relay cards are assigned to the inputs of the Distance block, as
well as to calculate line-by-line
voltages, voltage card signals are given to the Voltage Systems block and then assigned to the Distance
Block. Finally, distance output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED
blocks. You can also access
the settings of this function by double-clicking on the Distance block. By scrolling on the signals of
each block, more signals are displayed if available. Also visible from the Signals tab, the set of
output signals assigned to the distance
block. After applying the desired changes, using the Ctrl+ E combination keys or by using the File menu
and selecting the Export XRio option, the XRio file is downloaded from the software as an output
containing the distance function settings.
Next, by running AMPro software and opening the AMT Distance room, simply upload the Xrio file you saved
in the software environment in the previous step. By loading the relay distance characteristic, conduct
the test based on the periodic
testing system of Iran's power transmission network protection systems. Firstly, shot test is performed,
which aims to evaluate the time of different tripe zones. The Pre Fault value is at least 1 second and
the Post Fault value is at
least 500 milliseconds. In order to perform this test, we place points on 80% of the value of each zone
in line with the real axis and also in line with the angle of the line. In line with the real axis, the
test will be performed for
all phase-to-ground characteristics in the A-N and phase-to-phase fault loops in the B-C and ABC fault
loops. In line angle, testing is performed for all phase-to-ground characteristics in the C-N and
phase-to-phase fault loops in A-B
and ABC fault loops. By performing the test, the performance time for the added points can be seen in
different zones. In the second step, the Test Check is performed to check the performance time and range
of the zones in the upper and
lower part of the Rich value by drawing the lines on the R, X axes and in line with the angle of the
line. Here, in order to avoid prolonging the test process, the check test is performed only for
three-phase fault type. By performing
of this test, the results of the studies will once again be visible. In the final step, search test is
performed with the aim of searching the curve, detecting and evaluating the real range of each distance
relay zones. For this purpose,
search line should be selected in line with the R, X, angle of the line and the location of the
collision of the sides. This test is performed in line with the real axis and in a way that passes
through all zones as a one-time repetition
for each search line, for all phase-to-ground characteristics in the A-N and phase-by-phase fault loops
in the B-C and ABC fault loops. Here, in order to avoid prolonging the test process, this test is only
performed for the ABC fault
loop. In line angle and so that we cross all zones again, once repetition is performed for each line and
for all phase-to-ground characteristics in the C-N and phase-by-phase fault loops in the A-B and ABC
fault loops. Finally, at the
collision site, a repeat is performed once for each search line for phase-to-ground characteristic in
the A-N fault loop and phase to phase in the B-C fault loop. As mentioned above, in order to prevent the
prolongation of the test process,
these tests are only performed for the ABC fault loop. When the test is finished, you can specify the
elements in the report and save the output in different formats such as PDF.
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR multi-function relay with
modular and expandable hardware structure enables the development of various functions. The AMR relay
has four regulatory groups and can save
Event log, Trip Log and Comtrade. The relay has also successfully passed tests of protection relays in
accordance with the IEC-60255 standard. In order to configure this relay, you can use AMR software. The
Relay Hardware software module
enables relay hardware configuration and Relay VFC module, allowing logic writing and implementation of
various functions from easiest to most complex configurations. Also, using the Signal Routing module,
functions can be implemented
in the fastest way. After adjusting the settings, it is possible to help the relay test more easier
through test devices by receiving the Xrio file as an output containing the functions settings. The AMR
software can be downloaded from
the website of The Vebko Company Vebko.org. First, the software connects to the relay using the LAN
cable and entering the relay IP in the Communication window. After connecting to the AMR relay at first,
simply load the hardware modules
and the default configuration of the device by selecting the Read Hardware from Relay option. The
default password is 123456 in order to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the
signal, which, if confirmed, the
current hardware signals used in the VFC section will be deleted, if the current hardware is not the
same as the relay hardware. It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and
current transformers are determined
in the related card. Here, the ratio of the current card conversion is 200A to 1A and the voltage card
conversion ratio is 63,000 to 100V. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned earlier in the AMR software,
configuring some of the most
widely used functions as examples are placed in the software and the user can send new settings to the
relay by selecting each of them and applying the desired changes. For this purpose, a set of functions
can be seen in the Relay VFC
tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the
blocks in the VFC are removed. Here the differential function displayed with the name Diff is selected.
In Config of this function, the
signals of the current cards are connected to the differential block input. Finally, differential block
output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks. You can access
the settings of this function
by double-clicking on the differential block. After applying the desired changes, using the Ctrl+ E
combination keys or by using the File menu and selecting the Export Xrio option, the Xrio file is
downloaded from the software as an output
containing differential function settings. Next, by running AMPro software and opening the AMT
Differential room, simply upload the Xrio file you saved in the software environment in the previous
step. By loading the differential characteristic
of the relay, conduct the test based on the periodic testing system of Iran's power transmission network
protection systems. Here we select PreFault and Postfault time 500 milliseconds and Fault time 200
milliseconds. Firstly, points should
be selected within blocking and Tripping areas. The relay performance time during testing must match the
time set in the differential relay. At each slope of the curve, test points should be established at
least in the characteristic breakpoints
and outside of the current tolerance and close to it and on either side of the yield curve. In the lower
parts of the characteristic, inactivity and in the upper parts of the characteristic, the moment
performance must be recorded. In
order to avoid prolonging the test time, fault types L1-E, L2-L3 and L1L2L3 are selected. In the second
step, the Check Test will be performed to calculate the performance and Inactivity on both sides of the
characteristic, based on the
time of the shots performed. This test is performed in fault types L1-E, L2-L3 and L1L2L3. In the next
step, by using Search Test, we evaluate the real curve of differential protection performance. According
to the system, in search test,
at least two search lines should be selected on the performance curve for each part of the curve slope,
one of these lines is better to be in the characteristic fracture area. This test is performed in fault
types L1-E, L2-L3 and L1L2L3.
Pickup-Drop Test As one of the functional tests, you can use pickup drop feature for differential
characteristic. The three options Primary Side, -Secondary Side and bias allow pickup drop for
differential component on the primary, secondary
side as well as bias current, respectively. For this purpose, just add points for different Fault Type
and run the test. Here, the drop-off pickup is evaluated for all types on primary and secondary sides.
Stability test Another function
test, is available from AMT Differential's Room Stability tab. In this section, considering Idiff=0, you
can specify the bias value as a coefficient against the nominal current to check the trans stability in
this case. This test is performed
in all fault types. When the test is finished, you can specify the elements in the report and save the
output in different formats such as PDF.
ASSEMBLY STAGES OF AMR RELAY The metallic main case of the “AMR” relay is designed and made of
Aluminium3105 by experts at Vebko company and different modules of relay are placed in the integrated
racks. To begin the assembly, the front panel
of “Main Case” is opened. / Preparation of “MidPlate” To prepare “MidPlate”, micro module is placed on
it and the front panel of “Mid Case” which has been opened before is placed on “MidPlate” module and its
screws are tightened. After
doing this, the front panel along with “MidPlate” is placed on “Main Case” module and its screws are
tightened. / Preparation of Power Supply Board Back panel of “PS” or power supply card is placed on “PS”
card and its screws are tightened.
Then, the “PS” card is placed inside the “main case” and the related screws are tightened. / Preparation
of “CPU” card or “Main Card” “MSD” module along with related spacer is placed on the micro module and
its bolts are tightened from
beneath. The micro module is placed on “Main Card” as the main “CPU”. Then, “LAN-WiFi” module is placed
in the related place on “Main Card” and is tightened from beneath using 2 screws and spring washer.
Also, the “GPS-RS485” module is
placed on the two spacers at the top of “LAN-WiFi” module and is tightened using 2 bolts and spring
washer and then, using a communication flat, “GPS” module is connected to “Main Card”. Next, “Back
Panel” of the “Main Card” is placed
on the card and, by using the related bolts, is tightened to the “GPS” antenna of the “Back Panel” along
with 4 spacers. Finally, the “Main Card” is placed inside the case and its screws are tightened. /
Preparation of “PT-BO” card To
prepare this card, “AD gain” module is placed in its related place on “PT-BO” card and is tightened from
beneath using screws and spring washer. Then, four “PT” modules are placed in their related place on
“PT-BO” card and its screws and
spring washer are tightened from beneath. At this stage, BO module Binary Output is placed on 41
millimeter spacers and its bolts and spring washer are tightened. Then, the communication flat between
“BO” and “PT-BO” is connected. After
that, the back panel of “PT-BO” card is connected to “PT-BO” card using 4 screws and then this card is
placed in its designated place in the case and then its screws are tightened. / Preparation of “CT-BI”
card In preparation of this card,
barrier connector is connected to the “Back Panel” of “CT-BI” card and this “Back Panel” is connected to
“CT-BI” card. At this stage, “AD Gain” module is placed on “CT-BI” card and tightened using screws and
spring washer. Now, four “CT”
modules are placed on “CT-BI” card and its screws and spring washer are tightened. Then, a 2.5 strand
wire is passed through “CT”s and is soldered after swinging to the barrier connector. Then, the
connections are covered using varnish
or shearing. At this stage, “BI” module Binary Input is placed on 43millimeter spacers and its 3 screws
and spring washer and the screws of its back panel are tightened. Next, its communication flat is
connected to “CT-BI” card. Finally,
the “CT-BI” card is placed in its integrated place in the case and its 4 screws are tightened. /
Preparation of “Front Panel” The first step in preparing “Front Panel” is opening the back panel of
“LCD-CASE”. Then, “LAN” module is placed
on “Front Panel” module and its screw and spring washer are tightened. Next, “MSD” module along with the
related spacer is placed on micro module and its bolts are tightened from beneath. In the end, the Micro
module is placed on “Front
Panel”. / After closing the back panel of “LCD-CASE” in the back of “Front Panel”, “RS232” module is
placed on “Front Panel” and its 3 screws and spring washer are tightened. Finally, “LCD” is placed on
“LCD” module and its related flat
is connected and then “LCD” module is placed on “Front Panel” module and its 4 screws and spring washer
are tightened. After preparing the “Front Panel” board, it is placed in the main case of “LCD-CASE” and
its screws are tightened to
the back panel. / At the final stage, the front panel of “LCD-CASE” is opened and a label is stuck on
it. Then, the flat label is connected to the related pin header on “LCD” module and the plate is placed
in its designated place and its
screws are tightened. Note that there are two spacers placed on “Front Panel” and the “Front Panel” is
connected to the relay main case using two 4*50 screws. /
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION To prepare the latest version of AMR software, go to www.vebko.org website and
in the software tab, download section of the latest version of relay software AMR, click on the download
option. After preparing the latest
version of the software, you should install it on your system. Note that you don’t need to uninstall the
old version on the system to install the new version, and this will be done automatically by the new
version. You can also manually
uninstall the existing version through control panel\Programs\Programs and Features on your system and
then install the new version. Run the AMR.exe file to install the software. In the opened page to
continue the installation process,
click on Next option. / In the next section, two Microsoft .NET Runtime 5 and Microsoft Windows Desktop
Runtime 5 programs that are prerequisites for the software is displayed, these programs must be
installed on the system before the
original software is installed, if these programs are available on the system, you can prevent them from
reinstalling by unticking them, otherwise they will be installed later. / Click on the Next option. In
the opened window, by clicking
on the Install microsoft .NET Runtime -5.0.7 x86 app is installed on the system and click on close
option after installation is finished. / Also, in the next opened window, by clicking on install the
Microsoft Windows Desktop Runtime -
5.0.7 x86 app is installed on the system and click on close option after installation is finished. /
After completing the installation of the prerequisite programs, the installation of the main software
begins. In the Setup requires section,
you can change the installation location of the software, then tick I agree to the license terms and
conditions option and click on Install. Note that installing the AMR software takes a few seconds. /
After the installation process is
finished, the AMR has been successfully installed message is displayed, by clicking on the Finish
option, the installation window is closed and a Shortcut file named AMR is created on the desktop. /
LOGIN TO THE MAIN ENVIRONMENT OF THE SOFTWARE To open the AMR software, you can double click on the
Created Shortcut file in the desktop, or directly click on the software icon in the Start menu by
searching for the name AMR, and then login
to the software environment. Home page of the software The home page of the software consists of three
parts: / Recent Projects Get Started Assembly Version The "Recent Projects" section includes projects
that are available in the system
and have recently been opened in software. By right-clicking on each project and selecting Open Project
Location, you can access the installation location of the software. To delete the project, by
right-clicking on the project and selecting
Delete Project Folder you can delete the project, or by selecting multiple projects and clicking on
Delete Projects, delete multiple projects. It should be noted that deleting the project in this section
generally removes the project from
the system. It is also possible to search between these files. In the "Assembly Version" section,
information about the software version is written. In the "Get Started" section, you can log in to the
software homepage by creating a new
project or by opening an existing project on the system. By selecting the open default directory option,
the default path for projects which are saved on the system opens. To open an existing project on the
system, click on Open project,
then in the opened window, select the project from its path and click on the Open option. To create a
new project, click on create a new project option, then in the opened window select the path to save the
project and click on Save option.
It should be noted that projects are saved by default with the name AMR Project along with the date and
time of their creation. After creating the project, the main software environment opens. Also, in the
main software environment, you
can use the File menu and select the New option to create a new project, the Open option to open a
project, and Recent to access recently opened projects. / Ctrl+N combination keys for creating new
project and Ctrl+O are also intended
to open a project. It should be noted that the software automatically saves a backup of the running
project every three seconds, if for any reason the software crashes, by re-running the software and
opening the same project, the Crash
Files window opens where the saved backup files are listed in order of the time, by selecting each of
these files, the project with the last minute changes opens. After the project opens, these Backup files
are deleted. /
CONNECT WITH RELAY To connect the relay with the software, the network cable must first be connected
to the LAN port behind the relay and the other side to the laptop. In order to connect, an IP range must
be defined for the system interface
according to the laptop operating system. These settings are checked for Windows 10: in the Start menu,
Control Panel is searched and opened, then in the opened window click on the Network and Internet icon.
/ Then click on network and
Sharing Center option. / Then on the left side of the window, click on change adapter settings option. /
In the opened window, double click on the Ethernet icon. / In this section, there might be a large
number of Ethernet or Local Area
Connection interfaces, to ensure that the correct interface is selected, the network cable can be
removed from the system once, in which case a red cross on the icon is placed and after reconnecting the
cable, the red cross is removed
from the desired icon. In the opened window, double click on Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP/IPv4
option. / In the opened window, select radio button use the following IP address and enter the range of
192.168.1.20 in the IP address section.
/ By adjusting this IP range, the 255.255.255.0 range is automatically placed in the Subnet mask
section. Finally, click on OK and also in the windows that have been opened before it, click on ok
option. Preferences window After connecting
the network cable and doing the required settings, the Preferences window should be opened by
double-clicking on the Connection Status icon, then the relay IP is entered in the IP section. This IP
is 192.168.1.199 by default, which can
be changed. / Checking connection To check the software and relay connection in the Local network, click
on the Ping entered IP option. If you are connecting the replay from 192.168.1.199: bytes=32 time1ms TTL
128 message is repeated and
in case of no connection, request timed out message is repeated. / / After checking the connection, by
clicking on connect option, the software connects to the relay and two green ticks are placed on the
Connection Status icon. If the
Connect Automatically option is ticked, the Connect command is automatically sent to the relay every 3
seconds if the connection is disconnected. To disconnect the software and relay, you can click on
disconnect option, in which case the
tick of the Connect Automatically option is also removed. Changing relay IP To change the relay IP,
while the software and relay connection is established, in the Preference window, the existing IP is
deleted and the desired IP is entered,
then by clicking on set to AMR option, this IP is set on the device. It should be noted that the entered
IP range should be legible with the IP range of the laptop and the Local network in which the relay
wants to be placed.
FIRMWARE RELAY UPDATE At the beginning of the installation the new version of the software, the
User can update the firmware relay so that the new hardware code on the microprocessor is send. First
double-click on Connection Status to Open
Preferences window and then click on Update Firmware while the software is connected to the relay. Then
by entering the password and clicking on ok option, the relay is placed in Bootloader Mode and the new
Firmware is received. / After
getting the new Firmware, Relay is turned on and off. / This can also be done by using the Firmware
Update option in the Device menu Relay modes Generally, the software identifies the relay with three
modes and displays in the Preferences
window: Main Mode: When the software is connected to the relay and the relay is fully raised, Main Mode
is displayed. Bootloader Mode: When the software is connected to the relay and the relay is ready to get
the new Firmware from the
software, bootloader Mode is displayed. Unknown: when the software is not connected to the relay or no
Packet is received from the relay, Unknown is displayed. Creating Bootloader Mode manually When the
relay doesn't come up for any reason
or Firmware has a problem, it is possible to manually place the relay in Bootloader Mode. To do this,
the relay must first be turned off; when it is turned on, the Boot button must be pressed on the CPU
card marked with the letter B and
kept for 3 seconds after the power is connected. This put the relay in Bootloader Mode and makes it
ready to get the new Firmware from the software; then click on the Firmware Update option in the
Preferences window to send the new Firmware
on the relay. /
RELAY HARDWARE MODULE In general, based on what functions the relay is used to implement, it taken
different hardware configuration determin at the time of ordering the relay. There is also the ability
to upgrade hardware after ordering if
you need to develop functions. To configure the relay, the relay hardware must first be implemented in
the Relay Hardware section. In this section, a view of the front panel of the relay and the cards behind
the relay are displayed. /
Hardware relay configuration is possible in two ways: Receiving settings from the relay Creating
hardware by working with units and cards Receiving hardware configuration from relay In general, the
Vebko relay is able to recognize the
type Card Type and serial number of the cards placed on the relay, but the cards placement should be
introduced to the relay by the software, if needed, this hardware configuration, which includes the
number of units, type and order of
the cards, can be obtained from the relay. It should be noted that in order to do this, the software
must be connected to the relay. To do this, you can receive these settings from the relay by clicking on
the Read Hardware icon in the
toolbar or selecting the Read Hardware from Relay option from the Device menu. Adding Units By
right-clicking on the upper part of each unit and selecting the Add Unit option, a unit that only has a
feeding card is added after the last
unit. This can also be done by clicking on the Add Unit icon in the upper part of each unit. / By
Right-clicking on each unit and selecting “Insert empty unit in left” one empty unit is added to its
left by selecting the insert empty unit
in right, an empty unit is added to its right. Removing a Unit To remove a unit right-click and select
the Remove Unit or click on Remove Unit icon on the upper part of the unit, it to remove an icon. / The
unit can also be removed by
selecting the desired unit and pressing the delete key on the keyboard. Note: Unit 0 cannot be deleted.
Note: When removing a unit, if its signals are used in VFC the user is first asked, if the user
confirms, the signals are also deleted
in the VFC and then the unit is deleted. Copying a Unit To copy a unit, the desired unit must first be
saved in memory by right-clicking on it and selecting the Copy Unit option, then by right-clicking on
each units and selecting the Paste
Unit option, a copy of the unit can be created on the right side of the selected unit. / / It is also
possible to use ctrl+X and ctrl+V combination keys instead of selecting Copy Unit and Paste Unit
options, respectively. note: A copy
of the unit can be added to the right by clicking on the Duplicate icon. To make copy operation easier,
you can create a copy of the unit in that section by pressing the ctrl key and dragging and dropping the
desired unit at the blue intervals
between the units. / Cutting a Unit To cut a unit, the desired unit must first be saved in memory by
right-clicking on it and selecting the Cut Unit option, then right-clicking on each units and selecting
the Paste Unit option the selected
unit can be pasted to its right. / / It is also possible to use combination keys ctrl+X and ctrl+V
instead of selecting Cut Unit and Paste Unit options. To make the job easier, you can paste the desired
unit by pressing the shift key,
drag and drop the desired unit at the blue intervals between the units, glue the desired unit in that
part. / Unit information By double-clicking or right-clicking on each unit and selecting the Unit
Property option, the Unit Properties
window opens and the unit information including labels, unit numbers and labels of its cards are
displayed. In this window, you can change the unit label in the Label field. Changes are saved by
clicking on the OK option. / The label can
be changed by clicking on the name of each unit in its upper part. Changing card type To add a new card
or to change the type of card right-click on the card and place the pointer on the Change Card Type
option, to see the list of cards
displayed, by clicking on any of them, the selected card is added in that part. / note: Each relay can
have only one CPU card. Also, each unit can have only one feeding card. Removing a Card To delete a
card, by right-clicking on the desired
card and selecting the Remove Card option it can be deleted. / The card can also be deleted by selecting
the desired card and pressing the delete key on the keyboard. Copying a Card To copy a card, the card
must first be saved in memory,
right-click on the each and select the Copy Card option, then by right-clicking on each cards and
selecting the Paste Card option, a copy of the card can be created there. / instead of selecting copy
card and Paste Card options, use the
combination keys like ctrl+C and ctrl+V, respectively. To make the job easier, you can simultaneously
press the ctrl key, drag and drop the desired card in the section related to other cards. This way a
copy of the selected card is created.
/ Cutting a Card To cut a card, it must first be saved in memory, right-click and select the Cut Card
option, then by right-clicking on each card and selecting the Paste Card option, the card can be pasted
in that section. / It is also
possible to use ctrl+X and ctrl+V combination keys instead of selecting Cut and Paste Card options,
respectively. To make the cut operation easier, you can paste the card in that section by pressing the
shift key, drag and drop the card
in the other card section. / Card information By double-clicking on each unit or right-clicking on it
and selecting the Card Property option, the Card Properties window is opened. so the card information
including unit number, card number,
label, number of signals, ID and serial card are displayed. Also, the signal information of this card is
available in this window. In this window, you can change the label in the card label field. By clicking
on save option the changes
are saved. / Note: In this window, you can also access other cards in other units. To do this, first, in
the Units field, the desired unit is selected and then the card is selected in the Unit Cards field. If
changes are made, the user
is asked if the current card settings are to be saved, if you want to save the settings, you should
click save.
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT TRANSFORMERS DATA Conversion ratio of voltage transformers By double-clicking on
the voltage card, the Card Properties window opens, in this window the signals of the card are given. In
the row of voltage signals starting
with the letters PT, the conversion ratio of the network voltage transformers is specified. In primary
column, the nominal voltage of the primary side and in the Secondary column, the nominal voltage of the
secondary side of voltage transformers
is selected. It should be noted that this conversion ratio should be adjusted separately for each
voltage input of the card. If the desired value is not available, a new value can be added to Primary or
Secondary by selecting the Add New
option. For example, here the value of 230,000 volts for the primary and the value of 110 volts for the
secondary are selected. By clicking on the Save option, the changes in this window are saved. /
Conversion ratio of current transformers
Similar to the previous case, the Card Properties window opens by double-clicking on the current card,
in this window in the row of current signals starting with the letters CT, the conversion ratio of the
network current transformers
is specified. In the Primary column, the nominal current of the primary side and in the Secondary
column, the nominal current of the secondary side of the current transformers is selected. If the
desired value is not available, a new value
can be added to Primary or Secondary by selecting the Add New option. For example, here the value of
1000 amps for the primary and the value of 1 amp for the secondary is selected. By clicking on the Save
option, the changes in this window
are saved. / Note: In this window, you can also access the other cards in the other units. To do this,
first, in the Units field, the desired unit is selected and then in the Unit Cards field the desired
card is selected. If changes are
made, first the user is asked if the current card settings are saved or no, if you want to save the
settings, you should click on save option.
UNDER VOLTAGE PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular relay of Vebko
company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and software environment
of this relay have already been presented
in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay at first, simply
load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read Hardware from Relay
option. The default password
is 123456 to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal, which if
confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current hardware signals
used in the VFC section are deleted.
It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current transformers are
determined in the related card. Here, the current card conversion ratio is 200A to 1A and the voltage
card conversion ratio is 63000
to 100V. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned earlier in AMR software, the config of some of the most
widely used functions, as an example, are placed in the software as samples; and the user can select any
of them apply the desired
changes and send the new settings to the relay. For this purpose, a set of functions can be seen in the
Relay VFC tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp
Function, the available blocks in the
VFC are removed. Here the Under Voltage function displayed with the name UV 27 is selected. In the
configure of this function, to calculate the line-by-line voltages, first the relay voltage card signals
are assigned to the Voltage Quantities
block inputs and then assigned to the Undervoltage block. Also, current card signals connected to the
current transformers CT of the same feeder are assigned to the Undervoltage block for current
monitoring. Finally, undervoltage block
output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks. The purpose is to
test the Undervoltage function with AND logic, so the sample of line-by-line voltages are used. By
double-clicking on the Undervoltage
block, two stages are defined here. The first stage with a 50V setting and a performance time of 1.5
seconds and a second stage with a 45V setting and a performance time of 1 second. The Drop Ratio value
is also 1.2 for both stages by
default. Since there is no need for Current Supervision, option I superv. is disabled. After this, the
pickup signals of both stages are removed from the unit with current monitoring and the necessary
signals are added to the normal units
without current monitoring. In the final step, these changes are applied to the relay to be prepared for
testing. In the next step, by running AMPro software and opening the AMT Under/Over Voltage Test, simply
go to the Test Object Parameters
section and enter the basic information. Testing this function can also be performed in AMT sequencer
room, but in order to make the states and test management more comfortable, this process is performed in
the AMT Under/Over Voltage Test.
First, the information is entered in the General Information section. This information can include relay
type, serial number and other information such as post name and feeder/b number. In the Test Setting
section, the UV 27 option is
selected. Here Vnom sec, 100 volts is selected. Also, the performance mode is located on AND logic to
reduce the voltage of all three phases of the specified value to provide the test. In order to evaluate
the performaning of Under Voltage
protection, two time tests Trip time and Voltage Performance Test pickup/drop-off are performed.
Assuming there are two performance stages for Under Voltage protection, regulatory voltage value,
voltage type, performance time and more
are entered in the Data Table section for both stages of operation. After this, in order to be more
accurate in testing, continuous ramp option is selected in state setting section, C1 and C2 contacts are
considered for detection of trip
and pickup/drop-off, respectively. In addition to contact, the relay pickup status can be recorded with
LED or even adjusted to instantaneous Under Voltage protection. By entering the necessary settings in
the Test Plan section, schedule
the test in a way that both time test and voltage performance testing are performed. In the Fault Type
section, by selecting the L1L2L3 option, states are created for the function test based on the Under
Voltage of all three phases. By
enabling Time Test, the state related to the performance time check is created. Vtest is the voltage
value that the performance of the function in each stage is guaranteed. By selecting yes for PU Test and
DOU Test elements, it is confirmed
to perform pickup drop-off tests. In the PU Val. Assessment section, the evaluation of the pickup value
of the function, in the PU Start section, the initial voltage of the pickup process, in the PU end
section, the final voltage limit
for the pickup test, and in the DOU End section, the final value for the drop-off test is entered. In
the Total section, the total duration of the test is entered. By Clicking on the Init Test option,
creating states will be done based
on user-imported settings. These states can be seen in the Table View window. This way, the test can be
performed to evaluate the necessary items. In the Measurement View section, in Assessment ramp tab you
can see the assessment of the
pickup drop-off and in the Time Assessment tab, you can see the performance time assessments of each
stage can be seen. Keep in mind that when the test reaches the second stage assessment section, a
message appears to the user to disable
the first stage in order to provide non-interference conditions. This can be done by removing elements
related to the first stage from the blocks associated with pickup and trip. Another solution is to
equalize the setting of two stages.
For this purpose, once again refer to AMR software and set the first stage settings equal to the second
stage settings the settings are then to be sent to the relay. In the end, the results are added to the
report by clicking on the Add
to Report option. These results are visible in the Report window.
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular relay of Vebko
company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and software environment
of this relay have already been presented
in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay at first, simply
load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read Hardware from Relay
option. The default password
is 123456 to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal, which if
confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current hardware signals
used in the VFC section are deleted.
It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current transformers are
determined in the related card. Here, the ratio of the current card conversion is 200A to 1A and the
voltage card conversion ratio is
63,000 to 100V. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned earlier in the AMR software, configuring some of
the most widely used functions are placed in the software as samples. The user can send new settings to
the relay by selecting each
of them and applying the desired changes. For this purpose, a set of functions can be seen in the Relay
VFC tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the
blocks in the VFC are removed.
Here the overvoltage function displayed with the name OV 59 is selected. In the config of this function,
to calculate the line-by-line voltages, First the relay voltage card signals are assigned to the Voltage
Quantities block inputs and
then assigned to the Overvoltage block. Finally, overvoltage output signals are assigned to Binary
Output and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks. Since the purpose is to test the overvoltage function
with OR logic, analog signals related
to the voltage sample must be applied directly to the overvoltage block to increase the voltage of each
phase, the relay function should occur. By double-clicking the Overvoltage block, two stages will be
defined here. The first stage
with a 65V set, performance time of 2 seconds and a second stage with a 70V set and a performance time
of 4 seconds. In addition, Operation Quantity is placed on Vphn/V1/V2 to include single-phase
performance. Finally, the changes are
sent to the relay. In the next step, by running AMPro software and opening the AMT Under/Over Voltage
Test, simply go to the Object Parameters test section and enter the basic information. Testing this
function can also be performed in
AMT sequencer room, but in order to make the states and test management more comfortable, this process
is performed in the AMT Under/Over Voltage Test. Firstly, the information is entered in the General
Information section. This information
can include relay type, serial number and other information such as post name and feeder/b number. In
the Test Setting section, the OV 59 option is selected. Here Vnom sec, 100 volts is selected. Also, the
performance mode is located on
the OR logic to increase the voltage of each phase from the specified value to provide the test. In
order to evaluate the performance of overvoltage protection, two time tests Trip time and Voltage
Performance Test pickup/drop-off are
performed. Assuming two performance stages for overvoltage protection, regulatory voltage value, voltage
type, performance time and more are entered in the Data Table section for both stages of operation.
After this, to be more accurate
in testing, continuous ramp option is selected in state setting section; then C1 and C2 contacts are
considered for trip diagnosis and pickup/drop-off, respectively. The status of the relay pickup can be
recorded with LED in addition to
contact, or even adjusting to instantaneous over-voltage protection. By entering the necessary settings
in the Test Plan section, schedule the test in a way that both time test and voltage performance testing
are performed. In fault type,
by selecting L1E, L2E and L3E, states are created to test the function based on the voltage increase of
each phase independently. By enabling Time Test, the state related to the performance time check is
created. Vtest is the voltage value
at which the performance of the function in each stage is guaranteed. By selecting yes for PU Test and
DOU Test elements, it will be confirmed to perform pickup drop-off tests. In the PU Val. Assessment
section, the evaluation of the pickup
value of the function, in the PU Start section, the initial voltage of the pickup process, in the PU end
section, the final voltage limit for the pickup test, and in the DOU End section, the final value for
the drop-off test is entered.
In the Total section, the total duration of the test is entered. By Clicking on the Init Test option,
states are created based on user-imported settings. These states can be seen in the Table View window.
This way, the test can be performed
to evaluate the necessary items. In the Measurement View section, in Assessment ramp, the assessment of
the pickup drop-off can be seen. In the Time Assessment tab, the performance time assessments of each
stage can be observed. Keep in
mind that when the test reaches the second stage assessment section, a message has appeared to tell the
user to disable the first stage in order to provide the conditions for non-interference. This can be
done by removing elements related
to the first stage from the blocks associated with pickup and trip. Another solution is to equalize the
setting of two stages. For this purpose, once again refer to AMR software, set the first stage equal to
the second stage settings and
the settings are sent to the relay. In the end, the results are added to the report by clicking on the
Add to Report option. The results are visible in the Report window.
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular
relay of Vebko company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and
software environment of this relay have already
been presented in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay
at first, simply load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read
Hardware from Relay option. The
default password is 123456 to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal,
which if confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current hardware
signals used in the VFC section
are deleted. It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current
transformers are determined in the related card. Here, current card conversion ratio is 200A to 1A and
voltage card conversion ratio is 63,000
to 100V. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned earlier in the AMR software, configuring some of the
most widely used functions are placed in the software as samples the user can send new settings to the
relay by selecting each of them
and applying the desired changes. For this purpose, a set of functions can be seen in the Relay VFC tab
and in the Temp Functions section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the blocks
in the VFC are removed. Here
the negative sequence overcurrent function displayed with the name NS 46 is selected. In this template,
first, the signals of a current card are given to the Current Quantities block to create different
current sequences in its output.
In the default config of the Negative Sequence function, a block with different stages and signals of a
current card with negative sequence is assigned to its input. Finally, output signals are assigned to
Binary Outputs and relay LEDs
by Output and LED blocks. To change the settings, simply right-click on each block to access a set of
options. By double-clicking on the Negative Sequence block, the settings for its various stages are
visible. Here, the first stage with
normal Inverse setting characteristic has a current of 0.1 amps, the TMS equals 1, and the two constant
time stages with a current setting of 0.2 and 0.5A have a time setting of 1.5 and 0.5 seconds,
respectively. By making these changes,
simply select Send Config and Setting to Relay from the Device menu again. This way, the settings and
applied configuration are moved to the relay. Cut from this part until the overcurrent room opens. In
the next step, by running AMPro
software and opening the AMT Overcurrent room, it is enough to go to the Test Object Parameters section
and create the test characteristic after entering the information. The test characteristic is created in
the Elements tab in the Negative
Sequence section. Therefore, the default characteristic in this section is removed first. First, a
reverse time characteristic is created with a current setting of 0.1 amps and TMS=1. The next
characteristic is created by current setting
of 0.2 and a time of 1.5 seconds. Finally, the third characteristic is created by adjusting the current
setting of 0.5 and the time of 0.5 seconds. Keep in mind that it is also possible to test this function
using the Xrio file. In order
to evaluate the performance of negative sequence overcurrent function, two Trip Time and Pickup-Drop Off
tests are performed. The purpose of Trip Time is to detect and evaluate the accuracy of the performance
time of this function and
the purpose of pickup-drop off test is to detect and evaluate the accuracy of the actual current of the
performance threshold and the reset threshold of this function. Trip Test To perform this test three
states ones including PreFault,
Fault and PostFault are required. PreFault time is suitable for 500 milliseconds, fault time should be
greater than the maximum trip time, and Post Fault time is at least 500 milliseconds. PostFault time
should be increased if the drop-off
is not instantaneous. The suggested points for reduced time functions are 1.5 times, 2 times and 4 times
the regulatory current, and for constant time curves, 1.5 and 2 times the regulatory current. These
points are added to the fault
type 12 to prepare the test. Keep in mind that due to the existence of three different characteristic,
in some cases, the added points with the mentioned coefficients fall on the other characteristic. In
these cases, other points are manually
added on each characteristicto ensure accurate time performance. To detect the regulatory current of the
second and third units, two points can be added to 90 and 110 percent of the regulatory current of these
units in order to perform
a kind of pickup drop-off test for these characteristics. Once again, the Max Fault Time value is set
based on the highest number inserted in the t nom section. By adding points, perform the test to check
the performance of this function
from the point of view of time accuracy. Pickup/Drop-off Test In order to perform this test, it is first
to determine how the diagnosis of pickup and drop-off is performed. This process can be done through a
separate contact, like Start,
Relay LED viewing, or changing the setting for the instantaneous of the function and using the trip
contact. Here we used the relay pickup contact. You can also put the current fault value in the desired
range. Here the fault value is
considered 5% by default. The performance range of overcurrent curves in the AMR relay starts from 1.1
regulatory current in the relay. Therefore, first, by enabling the Active Range Limits option in the
Overcurrent Protection Parameters
window, Imin value are determined to be 1.1*0.1=0.11 Iref. In the next step, the current adjustment
value for the pickup is placed on 0.1*1.1=0.11 amps. By adding this point, it is enough to perform the
test and add the necessary elements
to the report when it is finished.
DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular relay
of Vebko company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and software
environment of this relay have already
been presented in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay
at first, simply load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read
Hardware from Relay option. The
default password is 123456 in order to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the
signal, which if confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current
hardware signals used in the
VFC section are deleted. It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and
current transformers are determined in the related card. Here the ratio of current card conversion is
200A to 1A. First, enter the VFC
page: As mentioned earlier in the AMR software, configuring some of the most widely used functions as
examples are placed in the software and the user can send new settings to the relay by selecting each of
them and applying the desired
changes. For this purpose, a set of functions can be seen in the Relay VFC tab and in the Temp Functions
section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the blocks in the VFC are removed.
Here the directional overcurrent
function displayed with the name OC 67 is selected. In Configuring, this function uses an OC Inverse
block and two OC Definite blocks that have different settings and the signals of a current card are
assigned to their input from a measuring
point. Finally, output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks.
To change the settings, simply right-click on each block to access a set of options. Finally, the
changes are sent to the relay. In
this video, by double-clicking on blocks that contain constant time stages for the directional
overcurrent function, disables them and define the 1A and TMS current settings equal to 0.1 by
double-clicking on the first stage, which is
defined as reverse time. By double-clicking on the Direction block, the elements related to the
directional function include rotation angle and ground polarization. After this, the changes will be
sent to the relay by selecting send config
and setting to relay option. In the next step, by running AMPro software and opening the AMT Overcurrent
room, it is enough to go to the Object Parameters test section and create the test characteristic after
entering the information.
Keep in mind that it is also possible to test this function using the Xrio file. Here, the current
setting value is equal to 1 amp, TMS is 0.1. In the overcurrent test, it is required to set two
parameters maximum torque angle and sector
operation. To do this from the Overcurrent window and the Relay Parameters tab, the directional option
is selected and from the Element tab, the Directional section is placed on forward. Then enter under the
Define Element Directional
Behavior tab and the maximum torque angle and Sector operation parameters are equal to -45 and 172
degrees, respectively. In directional overcurrent relays, In order to better performance of relay, in
orientation and reaching the MTA value
,the rotation of the reference voltage angle is used.. The performance area or forward area in this
relay is set from -131 degrees to +41 degrees. In order to investigate the directional overcurrent
function, in addition to the time of
operation and current, the angle of performance should also be investigated. For this purpose,
performance time tests are performed along with amplitude and phase tests. In the time test, the
accuracy of the performance time is investigated
and in the amplitude and phase test, the detection and evaluation of the accuracy of the actual current
and the actual angle of the performance threshold and reset threshold are considered. Cross Polarized
method is used in AMR Vebko relay,
i.e. using healthy phases to detect fault direction. For example, in case of faults in phase A, the
relay uses VBC reference voltage and IA current to detect the fault current direction. The Forward or
Reverse area means the part where
the relay must detect the fault will be determined by the start angle and end angle. Test Test In order
to test the DOC function, three states are considered. The first state for 500 milliseconds, normal
conditions this means that it will
inject a nominal voltage with zero current. In the second state, the fault conditions are applied and
the current is selected for all phases of L1E-L2E-L3E in the range of 2 to 4 times the nominal current.
The duration of this state should
be greater than the nominal time of the relay trip. The third state will also be activated as post-Fault
with zero voltage and current for 500 milliseconds. In order to see better performance of the function,
from the View menu, the Detail
View window opens. After adding double points and four times the regulatory current at the best possible
angle in terms of performance of the function i.e. -45 degrees for the L1E-L2E-L3E falt types, a point
in the No Trip area here at
an angle of 135 degrees is tested. Due to the nature of the two-phase fault, the currents in this fault
will have a phase difference of 180 degrees so that the 3I0 current is not created and the 67N function
is not activated. Pickup-Drop
off Test In order to perform the Pickup-Drop off test, you can also use a relay or LED contact and even
a setting change to instantaneous the function. For this purpose, three states are needed for example in
the first state, the normal
network conditions, applied, in the second state the pickup test and in the third state the drop-off
test is performed. In the second state, for pickup and drop-off test of angle, the current value will be
twice the regulatory current.
these states are performed in the Overcurrent room automatically by entering the settings by the user.
The performance range of overcurrent curves in the AMR relay starts from 1.1 regulatory current in the
relay. Therefore, first, by enabling
the Active Range Limits option in the Overcurrent Protection Parameters window, the Imin value is set to
1.1 Iref. In the next step, the current adjustment value for the pickup test of the current value is
placed on 1.1*1=1.1 amps. This
test is performed at the best possible angle in terms of relay performance i.e. -45 degrees. After the
current pick up-drop off, it is time to Pick up-drop off on the angle. For this purpose, as mentioned
above, the current value is applied
twice as much as the regulatory current, and once the trend is performed for the upper limit of the
angle, i.e. 41 degrees, and once for the lower limit of the angle, i.e. -131 degrees. By adding the
necessary tests and performing, you
can finally add favorites items to the report.
NON-DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular
relay of Vebko company supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and
software environment of this relay have already
been presented in the video related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay
at first, simply load the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read
Hardware from Relay option. The
default password is 123456 to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal,
which if confirmed, if the current hardware is not the same as the relay hardware, the current hardware
signals used in the VFC section
are deleted. It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current
transformers are determined in the related card. Here the ratio of current card conversion is 200A to
1A. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned
earlier in the AMR software, config of some of the most widely used functions as are placed in the
software as sample the user can send new settings to the relay by selecting each of them and applying
the desired changes. For this purpose,
a set of functions can be seen in the Relay VFC tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be
noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the blocks in the VFC are removed. Here the non-directional
overcurrent function displayed
under the name OC 50/51 is selected. In configuring this function, an OC Inverse block and two OC
Definite blocks are used. They have different settings and the signals of a current card are assigned to
their input from a measuring point.
Finally, output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks. To
change the settings, simply right-click on each block to access a set of options. Finally, the changes
are sent to the relay. In this video,
by double-clicking on blocks that contain constant time stages for non-directional overcurrent function,
disables them and define the 1A and TMS current settings equal to 0.1 by double-clicking on the first
stage, which is defined as reverse
time. By making these changes, simply select Send Config and Setting to Relay from the Device menu
again. In this way, the settings and configuration applied are moved to the relay. In the next step, by
running AMPro software and opening
the AMT Overcurrent room, it is enough to go to the Object Parameters test section and create the test
characteristic after entering the information. Here, a reverse time characteristic is created by 1A and
TMS=0.1 current settings. Keep
in mind that it is also possible to test this characteristic using the Xrio file. In order to evaluate
the performance of non-directional overcurrent function, two Trip Time and Pickup-Drop Off tests are
performed. The purpose of Trip
Time is to detect and evaluate the accuracy of the performance time of this function and the purpose of
pickup-drop off test is to detect and evaluate the accuracy of the actual current of the performance
threshold and of reset threshold
of this function. Trip Test Three states including PreFault, Fault and PostFault are required to perform
this test. PreFault time is suitable for 500 milliseconds, fault time should be greater than the maximum
trip time, and Post Fault
time is at least 500 milliseconds. PostFault time should be increased if the drop-off is not an
instantaneous. The suggested points for reduced time functions are 1.5 times, 2 times and 4 times the
regulatory current, and for constant
time curves, 1.5 and 2 times the regulatory current. To detect the regulatory current of the second
unit, two points can be added to the amount of 90 and 110 percent of the regulatory current of the
second unit. By adding points, perform
the test to check the performance of this function from the point of view of time accuracy.
Pickup/Drop-off Test In order to perform this test, first determine how the diagnosis of pickup and
drop-off is performed. This process can be
done through a separate contact, namely Start, Relay LED viewing, or changing the setting for
instantaneous function and using the trip contact. Here we used the Contact Pickup Relay. You can also
put the current fault value in the desired
range. Here the fault value is considered 5% by default. The performance range of overcurrent curves in
the AMR relay starts from 1.1 regulatory current in the relay. Therefore, first, by enabling the Active
Range Limits option in the
Overcurrent Protection Parameters window, the Imin value is set to 1.1 Iref. In the next step, the
current setting value for the pickup is placed on 1.1*1=1.1 amps. as it is shown By adding points, it is
enough to perform the test and
add the necessary elements to the report when it is finished.
DISTANCE PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR modular relay of Vebko
supports various protection functions. Explanations of the capabilities and software environment of this
relay have already been presented in the
film related to differential protection test. After connecting to the AMR relay at first, simply load
the device's hardware configuration from the Device menu by selecting the Read Hardware from Relay
option. The default password is 123456
in order to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the signal, which, if
confirmed, the current hardware signals used in the VFC section will be deleted, if the current hardware
is not the same as the relay hardware.
It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and current transformers are
determined in the related card. Here, the ratio of the current card conversion is 200A to 1A and the
voltage card conversion ratio is
63,000 to 100V. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned earlier in the AMR software, configuring some of
the most widely used functions as examples are placed in the software and the user can send new settings
to the relay by selecting
each of them and applying the desired changes. For this purpose, a set of functions can be seen in the
Relay VFC tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp
Function, the blocks in the VFC are
removed. Here the Distance function displayed with the name Dist is selected. As can be seen in this
Temp Function, the signals of analog relay cards are assigned to the inputs of the Distance block, as
well as to calculate line-by-line
voltages, voltage card signals are given to the Voltage Systems block and then assigned to the Distance
Block. Finally, distance output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED
blocks. You can also access
the settings of this function by double-clicking on the Distance block. By scrolling on the signals of
each block, more signals are displayed if available. Also visible from the Signals tab, the set of
output signals assigned to the distance
block. After applying the desired changes, using the Ctrl+ E combination keys or by using the File menu
and selecting the Export XRio option, the XRio file is downloaded from the software as an output
containing the distance function settings.
Next, by running AMPro software and opening the AMT Distance room, simply upload the Xrio file you saved
in the software environment in the previous step. By loading the relay distance characteristic, conduct
the test based on the periodic
testing system of Iran's power transmission network protection systems. Firstly, shot test is performed,
which aims to evaluate the time of different tripe zones. The Pre Fault value is at least 1 second and
the Post Fault value is at
least 500 milliseconds. In order to perform this test, we place points on 80% of the value of each zone
in line with the real axis and also in line with the angle of the line. In line with the real axis, the
test will be performed for
all phase-to-ground characteristics in the A-N and phase-to-phase fault loops in the B-C and ABC fault
loops. In line angle, testing is performed for all phase-to-ground characteristics in the C-N and
phase-to-phase fault loops in A-B
and ABC fault loops. By performing the test, the performance time for the added points can be seen in
different zones. In the second step, the Test Check is performed to check the performance time and range
of the zones in the upper and
lower part of the Rich value by drawing the lines on the R, X axes and in line with the angle of the
line. Here, in order to avoid prolonging the test process, the check test is performed only for
three-phase fault type. By performing
of this test, the results of the studies will once again be visible. In the final step, search test is
performed with the aim of searching the curve, detecting and evaluating the real range of each distance
relay zones. For this purpose,
search line should be selected in line with the R, X, angle of the line and the location of the
collision of the sides. This test is performed in line with the real axis and in a way that passes
through all zones as a one-time repetition
for each search line, for all phase-to-ground characteristics in the A-N and phase-by-phase fault loops
in the B-C and ABC fault loops. Here, in order to avoid prolonging the test process, this test is only
performed for the ABC fault
loop. In line angle and so that we cross all zones again, once repetition is performed for each line and
for all phase-to-ground characteristics in the C-N and phase-by-phase fault loops in the A-B and ABC
fault loops. Finally, at the
collision site, a repeat is performed once for each search line for phase-to-ground characteristic in
the A-N fault loop and phase to phase in the B-C fault loop. As mentioned above, in order to prevent the
prolongation of the test process,
these tests are only performed for the ABC fault loop. When the test is finished, you can specify the
elements in the report and save the output in different formats such as PDF.
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION TEST IN AMR RELAY SIMPLE TEST USING TEMPLATES AMR multi-function relay with
modular and expandable hardware structure enables the development of various functions. The AMR relay
has four regulatory groups and can save
Event log, Trip Log and Comtrade. The relay has also successfully passed tests of protection relays in
accordance with the IEC-60255 standard. In order to configure this relay, you can use AMR software. The
Relay Hardware software module
enables relay hardware configuration and Relay VFC module, allowing logic writing and implementation of
various functions from easiest to most complex configurations. Also, using the Signal Routing module,
functions can be implemented
in the fastest way. After adjusting the settings, it is possible to help the relay test more easier
through test devices by receiving the Xrio file as an output containing the functions settings. The AMR
software can be downloaded from
the website of The Vebko Company Vebko.org. First, the software connects to the relay using the LAN
cable and entering the relay IP in the Communication window. After connecting to the AMR relay at first,
simply load the hardware modules
and the default configuration of the device by selecting the Read Hardware from Relay option. The
default password is 123456 in order to receive elements. At this point, a message is given to remove the
signal, which, if confirmed, the
current hardware signals used in the VFC section will be deleted, if the current hardware is not the
same as the relay hardware. It should be noted that the settings for the conversion ratio of voltage and
current transformers are determined
in the related card. Here, the ratio of the current card conversion is 200A to 1A and the voltage card
conversion ratio is 63,000 to 100V. First, enter the VFC page: As mentioned earlier in the AMR software,
configuring some of the most
widely used functions as examples are placed in the software and the user can send new settings to the
relay by selecting each of them and applying the desired changes. For this purpose, a set of functions
can be seen in the Relay VFC
tab and in the Temp Functions section. It should be noted that by selecting each Temp Function, the
blocks in the VFC are removed. Here the differential function displayed with the name Diff is selected.
In Config of this function, the
signals of the current cards are connected to the differential block input. Finally, differential block
output signals are assigned to Binary Outputs and relay LEDs by Output and LED blocks. You can access
the settings of this function
by double-clicking on the differential block. After applying the desired changes, using the Ctrl+ E
combination keys or by using the File menu and selecting the Export Xrio option, the Xrio file is
downloaded from the software as an output
containing differential function settings. Next, by running AMPro software and opening the AMT
Differential room, simply upload the Xrio file you saved in the software environment in the previous
step. By loading the differential characteristic
of the relay, conduct the test based on the periodic testing system of Iran's power transmission network
protection systems. Here we select PreFault and Postfault time 500 milliseconds and Fault time 200
milliseconds. Firstly, points should
be selected within blocking and Tripping areas. The relay performance time during testing must match the
time set in the differential relay. At each slope of the curve, test points should be established at
least in the characteristic breakpoints
and outside of the current tolerance and close to it and on either side of the yield curve. In the lower
parts of the characteristic, inactivity and in the upper parts of the characteristic, the moment
performance must be recorded. In
order to avoid prolonging the test time, fault types L1-E, L2-L3 and L1L2L3 are selected. In the second
step, the Check Test will be performed to calculate the performance and Inactivity on both sides of the
characteristic, based on the
time of the shots performed. This test is performed in fault types L1-E, L2-L3 and L1L2L3. In the next
step, by using Search Test, we evaluate the real curve of differential protection performance. According
to the system, in search test,
at least two search lines should be selected on the performance curve for each part of the curve slope,
one of these lines is better to be in the characteristic fracture area. This test is performed in fault
types L1-E, L2-L3 and L1L2L3.
Pickup-Drop Test As one of the functional tests, you can use pickup drop feature for differential
characteristic. The three options Primary Side, -Secondary Side and bias allow pickup drop for
differential component on the primary, secondary
side as well as bias current, respectively. For this purpose, just add points for different Fault Type
and run the test. Here, the drop-off pickup is evaluated for all types on primary and secondary sides.
Stability test Another function
test, is available from AMT Differential's Room Stability tab. In this section, considering Idiff=0, you
can specify the bias value as a coefficient against the nominal current to check the trans stability in
this case. This test is performed
in all fault types. When the test is finished, you can specify the elements in the report and save the
output in different formats such as PDF.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER23.09.14.01 “”From now on, you can perform the
leakage reactance test UK% using the new current wiring types.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT23.09.14.01 “”Additional information has been added to the
Test Object CVT room. The fields Year, Company, and Country have been added to the existing information.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB23.09.14.01 “”Addition of new
wiring types in the Timing Test.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT23.09.14.01 “”New
100-ampere wiring type were added for testing the current transformation ratio in the CT room.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER23.09.14.01 “”Adding a new wiring type 2*300
V for voltage outputs in the AMT205 device.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.02.22.01 “”By erasing all rows, the wiring
photo is erased with it, and again by tapping Insert Rows and creating new rows, the wiring photo is
also displayed. “”Max Resistance column values are corrected in voltage
measurement mode section. Also, in the Read Input Voltage field in the Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No
Load tap are created by switching from Actual Voltage to Analog Input and vice versa, and a warning
message is displayed to change
the wiring. “”The help text for testing is added to the Transformer's Room tabs, as well as changes made
to the buttons in terms of shape and position. “”The results box is added to the Continuty Tap Changer
tab. “”in the Vector Group,
Turns Ratio and No Load tap, after clicking on the gear in the Add to Report button, make adjustments to
the report.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT21.02.22.01 “”In CVT saturation, if you change the
frequency in the Test Object tab, the Vend value also changes.
INSTRUMENT TESTINSTRUMENT_TEST21.02.22.01 “”Generally, by enabling
Easy Mode, the wiring images of the boards that are installed on the Front Panel are displayed in each
test and by disabling this option, images of the wiring are displayed
in front panel without having to install these boards.
VCCVCC21.02.22.01 “”Communication in the Hardware menu of this module is
corrected. This option is used to send packet serial.
AMT SYNCHRONIZER AMT_SYNCHRONIZER___21.02.22.01 “”If you place
system 1 on L1L2L3 in the Synchronizer Propertise page, after going to the Hardware Configuration page,
you will see that the values in the Output Label column change in the Voltage
Output Signal section. It is also important to note that system 2 cannot be placed on L1L2L3.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METER AMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER___21.02.22.01 “”The
value of device error column in the table of points is corrected after the test is performed. If the
point evaluation is failed, the ‘na’ value is inserted in this column. “”Correcting
the field format in the Test Point section based on the selected functions in the Transducer Propertise
page. “”If you enable symmetrical option from transducer Propertise page, the current limit is set from
-200 to +200 mAh and for voltages
from -500 to +500 mV. Also, there have been writing modifications in some fields. “”The Pulse option in
the Transducer Propertise page is enabled when one of the Wh or Varh options is selected in the
Functions section.
AMT DISTANCE AMT_DISTANCE___21.02.22.01 “”In the past, negative Z was
recorded as zero for reverse zones causing its tolerance to be miscalculated in relative mode therefore
the results were miscalculated in Shot Test and Search Test, this
is now fixed.
AMT VI STARTINGAMT_VI_STARTING21.02.22.01 “”According to the new
formula for calculating two-phase faults in AMT VI Starting room, the Out of Range area is corrected.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.02.22.01 “”Correcting the chart
values format while using Graber. “”After testing, all options affecting the test result in the
Overcurrent Protection Propertise window are disabled. The same is done for AMT
Distance and AMT Differential.
AMT SEQUENCER AMT_SEQUENCER___21.02.22.01 “”The Goose Setting tab is
enabled in the Hardware Configuration page and you can import SCL-format files in the software. “”When
one of the current outputs or voltage is active and the Show Actual
is in True mode, by selecting and activating the other output, the Show Actual value is also in True
mode.
SETTINGSETTING21.02.22.01 “”The CHECK RAM section in the Setting page is
removed from the Hardware tab.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE21.02.22.01 “”By clicking on the version number of
sofware page, vebko website is opened and on which the existing version and past versions as well as
what's New videos related to each version can be download. Also, by clicking
on What's New, the Training page of vebko's website opens.
RESISTANCERESISTANCE21.02.23.01 “”By selecting any binary input other
than binary input 1, the correct shape of the chart is shown in Signal View.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.02.23.01 “”The
Quadratic chart is added to the Transducer Propertise window.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.02.23.01 “”The correct operation of cut
and paste option in the Binary / Analog Input tab of the Hardware Configuration page.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB21.02.25.01 “”Signals are
displayed correctly in Signal View during and after testing.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.02.25.01 “”At
the top of each tab, how to perform the test is displayed in a box.
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TESTUNDER_OVER_VOLTAGE_TEST21.02.25.01 “”In
testing tab, you can add up to 20 rows in the Test Plan section by tapping Add Row. This number is not
related to the rows created in the Data Table section of the Test Object
tab
OVERCURRENT QUICK TESTOVERCURRENT_QUICK_TEST21.02.25.01 “”The
problem of not running the program and the correct operation of the buttons are fixed.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.02.25.01 “”If you
open a saved file, all output and input values are displayed correctly. “”As you can see, the points
inside the tolerance failed, and that's because the tolerance values were
calculated based on Relative. In this version, both Relative and Absolute conditions are considered,
which by hitting the Recalculate Point option, the points inside the tolerance are recalculated and
passed. Also, the values of the points
are displayed correctly after activating the Show Row Number and Show AllAct Point options in the
Transducer Characteristic window.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.02.25.01 “”If you place Binary-Input Type
on Wet Max 188 V Disable Error and its Threshold on AC or DC, then inject more than this value, for
example, 200 volts into the binary, there is no error binary 1 OverVoltage.
“”If binary 9 and 10, especially binary 9, are not enabled in binary/ analog input tab, didn’t put its
threshold on AC or DC and apply the current to binary 9 or voltage to binary 10, Binary Error 9
OverCurrent and Binary Error 10 OverVoltage
faults don’t occur, respectively. For example, if only the first output of the A current group is
enabled and binary 9 is disabled, if you currrent by two wires to binary 9 through the output of 1 A
current group, an Error IA1 Other error
is displayed. “”If you put State Type on Step Ramp and then tick Enable Reset and select Rate Frequency,
by giving the value to the frequency in the Start Values table and going to the Hardware Configuration
page, if you assign some value
to the frequency column in step values and final values tables, the frequency waveform is disrupted,
this is now fixed.
HARDWAREHARDWARE21.03.07.01 “”The time difference between GPS and UTC in
the software is fixed.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.03.07.01 “”Calculations related to the Vector
Group Check tab have been corrected. To obtain the probable vector grouping, after specifying the values
in the requested fields and obtaining the result, Amplitude and
phase values in the primary and secondary side are carried out on a phase-by-phase basis. For example, a
file containing the results of this tab, calculated with previous versions, is uploaded. In this case,
because once with previous
versions of Vector Group Check calculations performed by using the Recalculate option in signal view
settings, the calculations written in this new version are applied, the results change as if can be
seen. “”The DY Wiring Image in the
Continuity Tap Changer tab has been corrected. “”Z and Zn wirings are added to the initial position. For
example, tests are made possible for Znyn11 vector grouping. “”In the Vector Group Check tab, photos are
added for testing. “”Many
hardware and software changes have been made to binaries. For this reason, in winding resistance test
when the Voltage Measurement Mode was changed from binary 1 to 10, the test stoped, now this is fixed.
CIRCUIT BREAKER CBCIRCUIT_BREAKER_CB21.03.07.01 “”A new option for
testing the time of keys powered by AC voltage is added to the Test object tab. This option is located
in the Open Close Voltage Setting section. When the AC option is selected,
while creating a warning to change the wiring, a section called Bin Out is created with the Delay field
in the Timing Test tab. In this field, you can consider between 0 and 10 milliseconds as a delay in
calculating the performance time.
Since threshold is not used to calculate the time, the latency of the relays behind binary outputs
should be considered. You can also use this option in the Minimum Voltage to Operate Circuit Breaker tab
to test the minimum voltage of
the key function. Two things should be then into accuracy can be put on Pulse Ramping and Manual. In
either case, you can increase your voltage to 450 volts if you have chosen AC in Test Object.
AMT DIFF HARMONICSAMT_DIFF_HARMONICS21.03.07.01 “”If you add points
while Harmonic Order is on the second harmonic, and then put Harmonic Order on the fifth harmonic, the
points are updated in differential Harmonic Characteristic as well as
in the points table.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.03.07.01 “”The guiding images for
selecting primary, secondary and tertiary CT's are placed in the Differential Protection Propertise
page. Images are also placed in Overcurrent Protection Propertise and
Transducer Propertise to select the direction of PT's and CT's. “”A new option is added to the Settings
tab that if this option is enabled on any of the Relay Test rooms, the test is stopped at any time if a
test failed and a message is
displayed to the user.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE21.03.07.01 “”The xrio file taken from P54x
relays could not be loaded correctly and the number of parameters was zero. This is now fixed.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.03.07.01 “”The PCM option tick is removed.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.03.17.01 “”In the Vector Group, Turns Ratio and
No Load tab, a column is added in the table %In that shows an unloaded current in terms of a percentage
of the nominal current. “”In Leakage Reactance, the "Consider
HV/LV is equal" option is created. After enabling this option, the amount of impedance calculated for
primary and secondary is specified in the Result section. Ideally half of it is for primary and the
other half is for secondary.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERCTCURRENT_TRANSFORMERCT21.03.17.01 “”If you
place Apply Standard on any of the standards and save, then open a file, you will see the selected
standard in the Test Object tab. “”After clicking on Init Test in the Excitation
Test tab, all charts are shown correctly. “”The problem of changing the status to Manual Passed saved
files that conversion ratio test of it is passed, is fixed. “”In the Turns ratio with Current test, if
the actual current value has a
20% difference with the current value entered in field I test, a message is displayed to the user that
by clicking the OK button, the test results will not be erased.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.03.17.01 “”Voltage
and current values, active, reactive power and energy for online meter testing are displayed online.
“”Run a Varh function test online correctly “”In some functions such as
Phase [V-V], Phase [I-I], DC Current, etc. The Number of Phases section should not be enabled. In the
past, if such functions were selected, this section would be activated by pressing the OK button and
going back to the Transducer Properties
page. “”By selecting the Phase [V-I] function, the field values in Advance View are displayed correctly
by selecting points. “”By enabling the L-L Voltage function, the Generator Setting section is corrected.
“”Power Factor correction
and negative gradient value is created for all functions even in Symmetrical mode. “”A new option is
created in Settings called Settle Time. The time of this option is at the beginning of fault and during
this time the voltage and current
are injected, but no calculation is done. “”If you select one of the functions of Wh or Varh from the
Transducer Properties page and put Input on Read from Binary mode, the test points are changed in the
Test Point section. “”In the Power
Factor test, advance view, Generator Settings and Power Factor Sign sections are corrected. In the
x-axis diagram, it represents the angle and this angle is obtained from the algebraic sum of voltage and
current angles. If it is pre-phase
Capacitive Circuit Leading Power Factor, the current waveform is ahead of the voltage, and if it is
after phase Inductive circuit Lagging Power Factor, the voltage waveform is ahead of the current.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.03.17.01 “”After you import the scl file,
the Min Repitation and Max Repitation columns are separated in the Goose Setting tab. “”When the actual
voltage and current values are enabled, if you open Vector View
and place type on Orange, the values in the Vector View section are updated in the report. “”When the
names of the state are changed, these changes can be seen in the Ignore before and Ignore after columns
in the Measurement View window.
“”By enabling the Trigger value and going from the Analog Output tab to Trigger and vice versa, the
value attributed to each binaries remains constant. “”By right-clicking on Vector View and selecting
Power and changing the Type to Orange
and moving cursor, the Real and Imaginary values in the table will change. “”For current group B, the
Symmetrical option is created in Vector View. “”Values of Link to Xrio, remove link, go to linked value
are corrected in Trigger logic
minimum time and Delay after binary trigger fields. “”After enabling binary outputs, the related options
are added in the Start and Stop columns. One of the applications of this option is in testing the key
performance time by AC voltage
method. There the user must enter the time of bin Out. Using these options can make time easier to
calculate. “”The 3V0 option in Measurement View is added in the Ramp Assessment tab. “”In Right-clicking
on some fields in Device Settings
new options are added. “”Change the binary outputs to tabular form in Detail View and Table View. “”In
all rooms, the device fan activation icon is placed in the toolbar. In the past, to activate the device
fan, you had to go to the Settings
page, the Hardware tab of fan mode section. If the fan is active, the color is red and if it is
inactive, it is blue. It should be noted that if you are not connected to the device, this icon is
disabled. “”This version of Service is removed
and a menu called Socket Status is created at the top of each page. For this purpose, in Setting and in
the Room tab, a field called Connected Port is created in the Communication Mode section. There is also
no longer AMProService in the
Services tab in the Windows Task Manager.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.03.23.01 “”If
points are added before changing the table of points, by changing the output in Transducer Properties
they are removed.
AMT DIFF HARMONICSAMT_DIFF_HARMONICS21.03.23.01 “”In three phases
fault mode two phases of current were injected, which is now fixed.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE21.03.23.01 “”In Shot Test by adding a point or
points and going to Test Object if you clicked on OK and changed the type of fault in Test View up on
returning, the zone in Impedance View was cleared. This problem is
fixed now.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.03.23.01 “”If binaries are used to design
the test, say two binaries are defined as X and the other binarys conditional, the test did not perform
the condition properly; this problem is now fixed.
CIRCUIT BREAKER CBCIRCUIT_BREAKER_CB21.03.31.01 “”After performing
the Contact Resistance test, the values weren’t displayed in the fields of the Selected section, this is
now corrected.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.03.31.01
“”Duplicate options in the reporting settings of all tests that no longer exist.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER21.03.31.01 “”To pass or fail shot
and synchronizer tests, the condition is also included. Also, by default, the fault time for the shot
test is changed to 25 seconds. This time change is due to the fact that
if the angle is not within the allowed range, it will have enough time to reach this range. In the past,
the allowed range in Vector View was not defined. To get this range, simply add or subtract the angle
written in the column ∆Phi from
the nominal angle of system 2.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.03.31.01 “”After
adding a few points and clicking on one of them and going to the Test Object window and clicking on OK,
by returning to the Test View window, magnetic cursor will remain on the
same spot selected in Transducer Characteristic. “”If Output is an Open Loop function, after testing, a
box is displayed for the user to take the read value from the user and after entering it, the test will
continue or end if there is
a point or points.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.03.31.01 “”In the Differential
Protection Parameters page, help images are added when the Protected Object field is on Motor or Busbar.
“”PickUp-DropOff test is enabled for differential protection in AMT
Differential.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.03.31.01 “”In the PickUp-DropOff
test, if the Target Type field was on The Current or Angle and you were saving the test file, the values
of the Target Type and Drop Off fields were incorrect when you reopened
the file, this is fixed now.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.03.31.01 “”By stop testing manually, you
can switch between the state's in Table View. “”To disable binary inputs or binary outputs created in
the Goose Settings tab, simply use disable Goose Settings by right-clicking
on any of the selected binaries. “”If you create a block and add a parameter in the General Test Object,
some characters cannot be written in column ID, and if you use lowercase letters or unauthorized
characters, a message is displayed
to the user and the software changes them to capital letters and characters allowed.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE21.03.31.01 “”By default, the help language is located in
the Default Language of Help section and the test date in the Date/Time section of the Room tab is set
in English. To see this change, clear cache Have the software
installed on your system.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCB CIRCUIT_BREAKERCB_21.04.07.01 “”By changing
Supply Voltage from DC to AC and vice versa, a message is displayed to the user showing in which tests
the wiring photo has been changed.
AMT SYNCHRONIZER AMT_SYNCHRONIZER_21.04.07.01 “”After completing the
test, the fields in Synchronizing Parameters were enabled, which is now fixed. “”There is no “Linked to
XRio” option for inactive fields. Also, Remove Link and Go to Linked
Value options are enabled for the fields on which the Linked to XRio option has already been applied.
“”The Optimize All Change Fault Type option is removed from the Signal View settings. Also, if you
select a point in Out of Range by
changing the frequency of system 1, the value is shown correctly in the Synchronizer Characteristic
especially for points where the frequency was higher than the nominal frequency. “”After changing tabs,
the trackbar time in Vector View
is updated.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METER AMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER_21.04.07.01 “”By
switching from primary to secondary and vice versa, this change does not affect the output in Signal
View. “”In the online test calibration of the meter by Clamp, the dc shift
value is token into account. For example, if values in Transducer Properties are selected as such, the
fields in the test Hardware Config for binary 5 are displayed correctly.
AMT DIFF HARMONICS AMT_DIFF_HARMONICS_21.04.07.01 “”Actual values
of search and check lines are displayed horizontally in the Signal View.
AMT SEQUENCER AMT_SEQUENCER_21.04.07.01 “”The dimensions of the Binary
Analog Transformer section in Signal View is corrected. when binaries 7 and 8 are enabled, you can see
it in this section.
AUTORECLOSUREAUTORECLOSURE21.04.11.01 “”Room is created to test the
Auto reclosure function. The steps to test this function are written in a box at the top of the page.
First, it is necessary to complete the Data Table section based on the
functions set on the relay, and then in the second step, introduce the trip status for binary inputs of
the device. The Binary Output section is key for simulation and its status is determined by the user in
four stages: Prefault, Fault,
Dead Time and Reclaim Time. In the Time Assessment section, according to what the observer and test the
man have considered based on the test conditions, the test assessment is determined.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.04.11.01 “”In the
online test of the meter, by changing the input status from Injection to Read from Binary, the points
added to the table are cleared.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES21.04.11.01 “”The duplicate options at
right-clicking on the table of points are removed.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE21.04.11.01 “”In the Setting window, a new tab called
Help is created. There have been a lot of changes in Help and Videos that you can make a variety of
settings in different parts of this tab. Additional explanations are
provided in the relevant videos.
HARDWAREHARDWARE21.04.17.01 “”The CPU version in Calibration is displayed
in micro CPU. This option is used to specify the type of micro zero represents micro LPC 80 and number 1
represents micro 7020. In the Panel section, you can see the
type of ADs used for binaries 1 to 10 in the front panel. Also, in the Amplifier section, the switching
type and new Amplifiers installed on the device are specified, indicating that the device is being
upgraded. The numbers shown along
with each of the fields indicate the date and model of the parts used in them, for Panel 1 represents
the AD model 1202 and since last year 2020 has not been used in new devices, number 2 indicates AD model
7606 and about 4 months ago
stopped using it in new devices. The number 3 represents the AD of the ADS model, which is used in new
devices from this date onwards. Also, the numbers 0, 1 and 2 in front of Amplifier indicate the changes
made to the amplifier and switching
module.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.04.17.01 “”The dimensions of the
More Details section box are corrected and placed in Collapse mode by default.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.04.17.01 “”When a field is linked to a
parameter in rio, if the same was done for another field with the same parameter attributed, the value
was zero, which is now fixed in this version. “”By placing Set Mode
on Overcurrent, sensitive option is removed from fault type list.
RGROUNDRGROUND21.04.21.01 “”A new Room is designed to measure ground
resistance, which testing stages are written at the top of the tab, respectively. It should be noted
that this Room is at the early stages of the design and in the form of
a Demo.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.04.21.01 “”The amount of current taken from
each voltage source outputs and in each of the trans test modes in the Magnetic Balance tab in the
columns H1_I0, H2_I0 and H3_I0 is displayed. This has been done to detect
loop connection fault in power transformers.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER21.04.21.01 “”After opening Vector
View, the performance area is shown in the Vector Diagram. The performance area between the two dashes
is green.
AMT DIFF HARMONICSAMT_DIFF_HARMONICS21.04.21.01 “”After loading a
rio file, you can change the value of the Ixf/Idiff column in the Differential Protection Parameters and
Harmonic tab, after returning to this page, you can see the changes
made.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.04.21.01 “”In Step Ramp mode, if you
change the offset values of the table values, they aren’t erased by going to Hardware Configuration and
making changes. “”Options are considered for displaying the actual values
in the Show Signals section for S, P, Q, Power Factor, Z, Current Differential, and Phase Power Factor.
INSTRUMENT TESTINSTRUMENT_TEST21.04.24.01 “”A new section called
Tests is added in the Test Object tab in the CT, CB, CVT and Transformer modules. Based on their test,
the user can activate the tab for each test using the options in this section.
VCCVCC21.04.28.01 “”A new option is created to load templates related to
different relays in the toolbar of this room. In each new version, this list is more complete.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.04.28.01 “”In Binary/Analog Input, if you
right-click on the binary that is Not Used, select set the same option, all binaries are Not Used. The
application of this option is to unify other binaries, similar to
the selected binary. “”By going to Hardware Configuration and making changes the software. does not
crash if in the Ramp Assessment for the Condition column, Logic had been chosen. “”In Tracking mode,
during and after testing the table
and icon characteristics are disabled in Impedance View and the time of this State Type is set to 2
milliseconds by default. “”Combination Cable Setting and VDC Setting options are available for neutrik
cable settings and DC voltage in
Hardware Configuration, respectively. These options are located in the Setting of the main page of the
software and in the Hardware tab.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.05.09.01 “”After clicking on “Report
Setting”, the two options “Show Grid Lines in Graphs” and “Show Tolerances Lines” activate by default in
General Setting. These two options are used to display grid lines and
tolerance when the “Impedance View” option is activated in “Report Setting”. “”In the “Setting” tab of
the “Signal View”, a new option “Live Scroll Actual” is created in the “Extra Setting” section. This
option is only active if at least
one of the actual value of voltage or current outputs is “True”. “”After changing the “Type” from
“Normal” to “Orange” or the other options, the track bar in “Vector View” crashes. This bug is fixed in
this version. “”After loading some
comtrade files, if the impedance is higher than a certain limit, the characteristic curve was displayed
as a straight line, which is solved in this version. “”In “Ramp Assessment” and “Value Assessment”, if
you set the “Signal” column
to “P1.Q1” or “P2.Q2” or “P3.Q3”, only the “Real” and “Imaginary” values are shown in the “Signal Type”
column.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERCTCURRENT_TRANSFORMERCT21.05.18.01 “”By
changing the frequency in Test Object, this value is entered in exitation test with dc and is effective
in the relevant calculations.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.05.18.01 “”In Vector View, by selecting DC
for binary inputs, binary input cells with Show actual value on DC are disabled in Harmonic 1, Phase,
Real and Imaginary columns. “”If you put the first state on Step
Ramp and the second state on Quick, the Continue Last State Amplitude option is removed.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.05.24.01 “”Several changes have been made in
the Test Object tab. single phased, three-phased, trans winding type, with two or three windings, which
are now in the transformer data section. In Test Object and in the
Impedance section, you can enter different values for the short circuit impedance. You can also enter
the type and standard of trans. “”By placing Type on single-phase mode, you can select coefficients 1/1
or 1/√3 different and according
to the values in the Tap changer table is updated. “”The frequency value can be entered in the
Transformer Data section. One of the applications of this method is in leakage reactance test.
AUTORECLOSUREAUTORECLOSURE21.05.25.01 “”In the Binary Input section
and in the Signal column, the Received Signal parameter for the DTT signal is added.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.05.25.01 “”The
test method is changed in the Ratio and Polarity with voltage tab. To perform the test in the new
method, first add rows by tapping Insert Rows, then right-click and select apply
test option to perform the test.
AUTORECLOSUREAUTORECLOSURE21.05.26.01 “”Two HSR and TDR modes are
added to the Type drop-down field. In TDR, 4 state Prefault, Fault, Dead Time, Reclaim Time, but in HSR,
there are 6 state Prefault, Fault, Dead Time, Fault, Dead Time, Reclaim
Time. HSR is also called Fast mode.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.05.26.01 “”In the new versions, if the
test isn’t performed, in Measurement view, there is no results in the Assessment column. “”In Step Ramp,
if there is an offset, save and load the file again, the offset values
aren’t change.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.06.05.01 “”The
test method is changed in secondary burden, ratio and Polarity with current tabs. In the new method,
first add rows by clicking on Insert Rows option and then by right-clicking
on the related row, select apply test option. “”In Ratio and Polarity with current, Ratio and Polarity
with voltage, a column called %In is added that shows what percentage of the injectable current is
nominal current. By placing the mouse
over this cell the related formula is display.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.06.05.01 “”The application of save last
actual data option, which is located in the Extra Setting tab of the Hardware Configuration page, is
that if this option is enabled, if the Actual column of voltage or current
groups is enabled, in the software, the saved data is coded and deleted after reaching a certain volume.
“”To create stable power oscillations, unstable power oscillations and create all kinds of faults, it is
enough to place the State
Type on Transient, enable the Simulation option and select the mode you want in the Simulation tab and
perform the injection.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE21.06.05.01 “”In the Hardware tab of the Setting page, a
new option called Continue after disconnect is added. This option is not enabled by default. If the
network cable test or the connection between the tester and the
laptop is interrupted, the test will continue, but the results aren’t recorded in the software.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.06.06.01 “”Open circuit test is presented in
the Open Circuit tab as demo. This test is used to determine the core losses in the trans and the
parameters of the shunt branch of the circuit equivalent to the trans.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
CVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMER_CVT21.06.06.01 “”Excitation test method is changed. In this method,
which is tabular, first the rows are added by tapping Insert Rows and then by right-clicking on the row,
perform
the test by clicking on apply test and finally report by tapping Add to Report.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.06.06.01 “”To enter the settings of
Toshiba relays in the software that is in the form of a csv file, act in the same way as before. For
this purpose, in the General Test Object page, select the Toshiba relay template
from import from list section, and then enter the csv file from the Load Relay Setting section.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.06.18.01 “”A no load current test is added on
the No Load tab. In this tab, you can only calculate the no load current of trans.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB21.06.18.01 “”In the Timing Test
tab, a new section called Other is added, as to used to change the status of the key contact from open
to closed or from closed to open. To perform it, first select one of
the options according to the status of the key, and then click on change position option. For example,
if the contact key is closed and you want to open it, first select close breaker before test option and
then click on Change Position.
After clicking on this option, a message is displayed to the user asking him to check the wire if the
winding is open or close, click on Yes and otherwise click on No. It should be noted that by performing
this option, results aren’t recorded
in the report.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.06.18.01 “”If More Detail section
does not display chart information for you, you must disable Beta: Use Unicode UTF-8 for worldwide
language support.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.06.18.01 “”In Transient and in the
Simulation tab, two stable power swing and Single line test modes are added. Also, in Unstable power
swing mode, a new field called Measuring Location is added for the user to
have the beginning and end of the line, current and voltage during the oscillation. “”The Default Color
option in Vector View performs correctly. Immediately after selecting this option, the color of the
color column cell and the vector
color in the graph are colored to the original color. “”After opening the Overcurrent block in AMT
Sequencer, it can be seen that the Sensitive as seperate fault option is disabled. “”In some cases,
intense instantaneous peaks occur during
testing which are not visible in Signal View. For this purpose, an option called Sensitive Signal View
is added in the Setting so that such peaks can be viewed in Zoom Out and Optimize all modes.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE21.06.18.01 “”In computers with multiple users, it is
recommended to right-click on the exe file of the software and from the very beginning select run this
program as an administrator option and perform the installation
process by running the exe file according to the past. “”In the Setting page, after connecting to the
device in the table in the Connection &hardware tab, can be seen the controller version, the front panel
of the device, and the micro
on the device.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.07.07.01 “”If a wiring is selected which in
none of the primary, secondary and tertiary coils have a star connection trans, magnetic balance, Vector
Group Check and Zero Sequence Impedance Demo tests cannot be performed
and these options are disabled in the Tests section. “”The zero trans sequence test is presented in the
Zero Sequence Impedance Demo tab in demo form. First, enter the initial values for calculation in the
Impedance section of the Test
Object tab, and then perform the test by adding the row in the Zero Sequence Impedance Demo tab by
right-clicking and selecting the Apply Test option. As you know, the Zero Sequence Impedance depends on
the current passing through the
coil, usually this value related to the nominal current IN is expressed, which means that the
measurement is done with the 3xIN test current, however, this is not always possible in process, because
to avoid the excessive temperature of
the metal parts used in the trans, the current must be limited. The Zero Sequence Impedance is measured
as a function of the test current and if necessary, the final result is obtained by extrapolation. Test
Result:
INSTRUMENT TESTINSTRUMENT_TEST21.07.07.01 “”If the Instrument View
window closes, you can reopen this window by using the Ctrl+Alt+N combination keys.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.07.07.01 “”In
Transducer Properties, a new section called Pulse Type is added. In this section, the user can specify
whether the pulse count is based on the upward or downward edge. “”Depending
on the meter, you can select 3-Phase 4 wire or 3-Phase 3 wire modes in Transducer Properties.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES21.07.07.01 “”A new option called Stop
test after each shot test is created in the Extra Setting tab. By enabling this option, after testing
each point in shot test, first the relays of the Analog Output section
in the tester is turned off and then the next point is tested. This option does not exist in AMT
Sequencer and is only in modules where Shot Test, Search Test and Check Test are available. For example,
this has been done for three points.
As you can see, when injecting the current for 10 seconds, for each point, the LEDs in the Current
Output A section are turned on and after the test of each point is finished, the LEDs are turned off.
That means the injections are not
performed and the relays are turned off. “”In Load Relay Setting, a new option called Add missing blocks
and parameters is added. This option can be used to create templates from CSV files taken from relays.
To do this, you first need
to create relay menus in the software. by using this method, blocks and parameters taken from the relay
are made automatically. There are two modes for transferring CSV-format files, or parameters have paths
or no paths are defined for
them. First, a CSV file is loaded from the Schneider relay, which is not defined a path to its blocks
and parameters. In this case, all parameters are created in a block called Missing Parameters. This
time, a CSV file is loaded from the
Toshiba relay, which is defined a path to its blocks and parameters. In this case, there is a path for
parameters, they are categorized according to the same default path. two important points, one is that
each block's ID is made according
to its name. Another point about parameters is that some IDs are not allowed, so IDs are checked and
converted to authorized IDs if they are unauthorized. For this reason, the ID of a parameter may be
different from its ID in the file,
but the created Foreign ID matches the file. Type all parameters are selected from string type because
they are not mentioned in the file. “”A new feature is created to disable testing of one or more points,
disable testing points in one
or more fault type, as well as disable testing in one or more tabs if a point or line is added. For
example, to disable testing one or more points is enough to select them first and then right-click on
them and Disable testing at those
points by using the Active option. You can also disable test execution in one or more tabs by activating
the created check box next to each tab.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.07.07.01 “”Changes have been made in the
Analog Output and Binary/ Analog Input tabs in Hardware Configuration. To enable or disable the actual
values in Analog Output, just in the Actual x1.2... column Enter a
coefficient of 1.2 one and two tenths milliseconds, and it will also be disabled by entering zero. In
Binary/Analog Input, to activate is enough to, in the Show Actual Type column, select AC or DC to
activate the Sampling Rate x 400us
column and enter a coefficient of 400 microseconds. “”If the names of ID are typed Persian in adding the
parameter in the General Test Object, a message is displayed to the user that the written characters are
not accepted and returns
to the default name. “”If Type is on any of the options, there will be a Default Color option in Vector
View. “”In the Binary/ Analog Input and Binary Output tabs to disable any of the used binaries, you can
use the N key and alt+N combination
key to disable all binaries. As you can see, the same can be done in the Binaries Output tab to disable
binary outputs. “”In Analog Output and the shown wirings 4x150V, 60VA @ 400mArms, 6x32A, 100VA @ 32A,
3Vrms, 5A and 12Vrms in the Other
section, Not Used button is added. “”In the Value Assessment tab, two columns called Ratio and
Assessment Settings are added. There are two options for Automatic and Manual in Assessment Settings. In
automatic mode, as before, calculations
are performed, but in Manual mode, the Act cell is activated to order the number entered by the user in
dev. calculation. The number entered in the Ratio column is a coefficient to multiply in the nominal
value to calculate Dev. These
options are made to test the meter.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB21.07.12.01 “”Always in the
Timing Test tab, the first package or opening of the key has been the criterion for assessment. In this
version, a new option is created in the Test Object of the Operating Time
section. The user can select their assessment based on the first or last package or key opening. “”To
calculate the current in the Timing Test tab, two fields Peak Current and Steady-State Current are used.
Sometimes the Steady-State Current
value turns negative. The calculation of this field is that it calculates three points together in a
row. In previous versions, only one condition was considered that if the value
〖Value〗_max-〖Value〗_min/〖Value〗_max, for example, was smaller
than 0.01, the Steady-State Current value would be determined. In the new version, another condition is
made by adding a new option to the Object Test. The value obtained from the formula is compared with the
value entered by the user
in the Min. Coil Current field, and if it is larger than this value, it will be considered as the
Steady-State Current field value, otherwise the Na value will be considered.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.07.12.01 “”After saving and
executing the file, the values of the Pickup Start, Pickup End and Drop Off End fields are displayed
correctly in test view and in Report View.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.07.16.01 “”To
create pulse manually, a new button is created in the Output Details section called Pulse Manual.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE21.07.16.01 “”A new option is created in AMT
Distance. After activating the |Z| relative option, there are new options in the relevant list. For
example, if 60% of Z2LL Z2-Z1LL Z1 selected option is selected, the impedance
value is calculated in this way by using the following formula. Z_2-Z_1 ×0.8+Z_1 ×number in "%" field
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES21.07.16.01 “”In Custom, if you create a
block with @Room specific name. This specific block is module and is not deleted by loading the new
xrio. Tip 1: The information on this block is saved along with other information
and is not included in the xrio file. But it is always displayed as the last block in Custom and can be
linked to it. Tip 2: In VCC when external xrio enters, inside that module this block still exists and is
displayed in xrio, but the
external xrio is not changed.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.07.17.01 “”In Ramp Assessment, when a
Signal characteristic, is selected it is correctly shown in the Act column.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.07.19.01 “”By enabling the ITest
Relative option and selecting one of the stages, the ITest field value is updated in the Test Point
section and the test points table.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES21.07.19.01 “”To load xrio files of the
xml type a new option is created in the software. For this purpose, first enter your relay template and
then in Load Relay Setting from the Relay Config Type list, Select
*. Xml and continue the rest of the steps as before. “”4 templates of Sprecher relays are added to the
software.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.07.23.01 “”In
offline meter test, 5 test modes are defined in Test View. “”Load: Injection of current and voltage for
a specified period of time to check the overall performance of meter. “”Mechanism:
Injection of nominal current and voltage for the specified amount of energy. “”"Mechanism": Dieser
Testmodus ermöglicht die Einspeisung einer bekannten Energiemenge in den Zähler für einen definierten
Zeitraum. “”Injection: Continuous
voltage and current injection to check connections. “”No-Load: Injection of nominal voltage and zero
current, to check the performance of Meter. In this section, there is also a time relation for the
minimum duration of the test. “”Creep:
Injection of 0.5% nominal current with nominal voltage to check start counting Meter.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.07.23.01 “”In Draw Custom
Characteristic, the chart gradient for the SEPAM S.80 87T relay is now corrected in single-phase mode.
Differential characteristics of some relays are located in this section.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.07.23.01 “”If State Type is on Quick and
Set Mode on Powers, by changing the Step Value, the output value wouldn’t have changed, which is now
corrected.
AUTORECLOSUREAUTORECLOSURE21.07.25.01 “”You can add DC Decay and
Harmonic to a fault signal.
AMT DIFF HARMONICAMT_DIFF_HARMONIC21.07.25.01 “”The formulas in this
section are corrected.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.07.25.01 “”To see the
PickUp-DropOff and Stability tests report, simply by right-clicking on Report View and select the Report
Setting option in the tree chart, check the PickUp-DropOff Test and Stability
Test options.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT21.08.02.01 “”In Secondary Burden, the Phase column is
added to the related table.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERCTCURRENT_TRANSFORMERCT21.08.02.01 “”In
Excitation, Ratio and Polarity with current, Ratio and Polarity with voltage and Excitation with DC, the
Core no., Tap no. and phase columns are now created. Also in secondary Burden,
the phase column is added to the related table.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.08.02.01 “”The
Reference Meter option is created in the Transducer Propertise input meter section. According to the
selection of reference meter energy, in function, based on the watt hour Wh
or var hour varh and the number of puls should be entered in the Ref in and Ref Out fields,
respectively. The puls received from reference meter are sent to binary 4 and the desired meter to
binary 8. It should be noted that reference
meters can be measured in every 4 quadrants of the power chart, usually measuring active and reactive
energy.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE21.08.02.01 “”In some files, after enabling or
disabling Show Tolerance lines in Report setting, some zones weren’t displayed in Report Setting, which
is now corrected in the new version.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERCTCURRENT_TRANSFORMERCT21.08.12.01 “”During
the test performance, the saturation curve in Excitation and Excitation with DC is updated and
optimized.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER21.08.12.01 “”In Test View, a new
button called Quick Test is available. After pressing this button, 8 test points are created on the
boundary areas in the synchronizer characteristic.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.08.12.01 “”If the wiring is on
the secondary side of z, the currents are calculated correctly.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.08.12.01 “”If the Space Key Press
options are enabled, you can stop testing PickUp-DropOff.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.08.12.01 “”In Signal View and in the
Setting tab, by clicking on the Export Comtrade... button, all signals are displayed in the Show Signals
section, as a list in Export Comtrade, the Check channels to export:
section. “”When loading some xrio files into *.xrio and *.xml formats, the conversion of quantity units
are done by default regardless of their unit e.g. kV or volt. “”Right-clicking on the first row of the
table in Tracking mode is disabled.
“”If in Table View, the number of states are more than 60, they are updated by moving scroll to the left
and right of the values in each state. “”A new tab is created in Measurement View called Tracking
Assessment. This tab is used in
testing the Power Swing function. Testing this function is important when the relay is blocking the
distance relay after passing the outer zone. To do this, you first need to list the points in
Characteristic View in the First Point Time
and End Point Time columns in this tab. The user selects the number of that shot and the selected number
will appear in Characteristic View. The time interval between the two points selected in the First Point
Time and End Point Time columns
are calculated and evaluated. “”By using the Default Color option, the color of each vector in Vector
View can be restored to default without the fault message appearing. “”In some xrio files after loading
in the software, for parameters
that were Enumeration type, the basis for comparing the ID parameter from the Value column is added.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.08.23.01 “”In the Magnetic Balance tab, after
clicking on Insert Rows and adding the table, the wiring photo was hidden under the Magnetic Balance
Result section, which is now corrected.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.08.23.01 “”The
Lm field calculations are updated in the Excitation with DC tab of the Knee point calculation section.
“”The wiring photo is shown in secondary burden test. “”From this version
onwards the saturation curve starts from the point 0,0. In the hysteresis curve, due to current
distortion in the test mode, the current method, didn’t display the correct shape. Calculations related
to saturated Inductance or Ls are also
added to the software. if Ls is negative or greater than 30 millihenry, na is displayed.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER21.08.23.01 “”Angle tolerance lines
are created in Vector View. These lines can be changed in "Phi Tolerances". “”In the “Synchronizer” tab,
the values of the column “When CB Close” were calculated incorrectly
after performing a test. Which is now corrected in the new version.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.08.23.01 “”Online
values of the meter are added in the table of points as well as in the report.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES21.08.23.01 “”By changing the binaries in
Hardware Config, the binaries used in the trigger section, theBinary Trigger Condition section, are
updated.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.08.23.01 “”A new section called
Calculations is added to the View menu. This section has been in the signal view window of the Setting
tab of the Operation section in the past, which has had problems such as not
renaming the signal, which is now fixed in the new version. There will also be new features added to the
Calculations window in the future.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.09.12.01 “”If Tap Control Settings is on
Manual, the result section values in Continuty Tap Changer are calculated correctly. “”If you change the
tap number or voltage value for one phase in the conversion ratio test,
the other two phases would change. “”In Magnetic Balance, if there is a connection to the ground on the
secondary side, the table names in Magnetic Balance Result and the report are corrected. “”In the Plot
tab, two check boxes are created
to view Ract and Phase comparison on the weak pressure side.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.09.12.01 “”In
Secondary Burden, a new column called I test nom is added. “”If you change the frequency value from the
Test Object tab, you will see the changes in vector View and the test result
in the test of conversion ratio to the current method, after selecting the Apply Test option. “”If you
change the frequency value from the Frequency field, you will see changes in the Vector View and the
test result in the test of conversion
ratio to voltage method, after selecting the Apply Test option. “”In the second stage of excitation with
dc test, the Method field is placed on a current by default. “”If the Init Test is clicked in the first
step after performing the
second stage of the Excitation with dc test, the software does not show crashed. “”After secondary
burden and Winding Resistance tests, the report is added by clicking add to report chart in Signal View.
AMT SYNCHRONIZER AMT_SYNCHRONIZER___21.09.12.01 “”In the Shot Test
tab, after adding points, the names Tripping and No-Tripping are changed to Closing and Non-Closing.
“”By changing "Reference Signal" in "Vector View", ∆∅ lines are replaced.
“”CB Closed and Close Cmd vectors are added to Vector View. These vectors are False by default. The pass
and fail conditions of the points are changed to the placement of the CB Closed vector within the
allowed area of the operation. “”After
changing the voltage value of system 2, its vector is optimized in vector view graph. “”If a point is
added in the Synchronizer tab by using the Add button, the system vector 2 should be moved by changing
the cursor in Vector View.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.09.12.01 “”The
Clear Actual Data option is created by right-clicking on the table of points. This option can be used to
remove the actual values of analog signals in the online meter test.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE21.09.12.01 “”In the System Parameters section,
a new field is created to allow the user to enter the line length in the Line Length section. Also, in
the Shot Test tab points table, a new column called Fault Location
is created that explains where the fault occurred on the load line. If points such as 1 and 2 are not on
the load line, they are moved to new coordinates on the load line.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.09.12.01 “”If there are points in a
fault of a particular element and then that element is removed, you can remove the points added in the
removed element fault through the Remove All button.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.09.12.01 “”In Time Assessment, two new
options called t_start and t_end are added in the Start and Stop columns. By using these two options,
the beginning or end of each state can be considered as the beginning
or end of the time assessment. “”It is acceptable to type the ID in capital letters “”If a number
greater than or equal to 24 is entered in the Start Time field, the value is changed. Also, after
running the test, the options in the ON
GPS field are disabled. “”When current outputs are in the form of used by right-clicking on the Actual x
1.2... column in the Voltage Output Signal section and selecting one of the options, the software
crashed, but this is now fixed.
“”In previous versions, if you attributed an output to another group from one current or voltage group,
there would be a problem creating ROCOF. For example, if you attributed the output of a current group B
to the output of a current
group A, this bug would appear. This is now fixed in the new version. “”If Value Assessment or any other
tab is selected in Measurement View, after opening the new file from the file menu, the Measurement View
window is placed on the Time
Assessment tab by default. “”If a file contains a value in Time Assessment, after erasing the results,
the software would have crashed in earlier versions. This problem is now fixed. “”After testing, you
cannot change the binary output
status in the Analog Output table. “”In Step Ramp, a new section called Step Ramp Display is created.
This section contains two options: Value and Rate d/dt. The Value option is the same as before. Rate
d/dt is used to test functions that
work by changing the values of two elements, such as Over-excitaion. In the Over-excitaion function, the
rate of voltage and frequency changes and their ratio to each other must be tested. One important point
is that the chart in the fixed
Step time, is the same as switching between options. “”After taking the comtrade file from the software,
if the related file lacks a digital signal, the 0D value for it will be recorded in the cfg file.
RESISTANCERESISTANCE21.09.17.01 “”In the Test Object tab, a field called
Reference Temperature is added. By entering the value of this field, the correction coefficient is
automatically calculated. Also, the Ract field in the Resistance Test
tab is added to the Result section.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.09.17.01 “”From now on it is
possible to add multiple charts to the differential characteristic. To do this, you must first create a
differential block in RIO as many as you want. To do this copy the main
block and paste it to the desired number in RIO. Drag the charts for the new blocks. Consider one of the
blocks as the main block using set as Active Function option. To see the other charts in Differential
Characteristic, select show
in Characteristic option by right-clicking on the blocks. You can change the color of the charts in the
line Item Setting window as you wish.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.09.17.01 “”In Export Comtrade, if sampling
rate is placed on 2 kHz, by opening the dat file from point 1001 onwards, the number recorded for time
in the Comtrade file should be increased by 500 microsecond steps.
“”By clicking on Import Comtrade while Set Mode is on Transient, the software crashed which is now fixed
in the new version. “”A new option called PID is created at the top of each Room. By using this option,
you can send information to
AMPro Test software. It is important to note that in order to send data, you must also enter port
information in the relevant software. To know the port information, you must go to the Room tab of
Communication Mode in Setting. For example,
in C# a program for this is written by Vebko developers. The amplitude, phase and frequency value for
the first output of voltage group A is written in this program and changes are visible in Vebko
software. “”If you changing the frequency
value in the Offset Value table in Step Ramp, the signal shape would not have been displayed correctly,
which is now fixed in the new version. “”From now on it is possible to load the xrio P142 and P342
relays in the Vebko software.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.09.23.01 “”A new
option is added on the right-click of the saturation chart in Signal View called Knee Point in the
saturation test. You can also see the changes in the report by enabling each
of the three options at the bottom of this window Aspect, Logarithm X and Logarithm Y and pressing the
Add to Report button.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.09.23.01 “”There were problems
with adding a few charts to the differential characteristic that are now fixed in the new version. For
example, if you changed the chart line type this way, the software used
to crashed.
AMT VI STARTINGAMT_VI_STARTING21.09.23.01 “”In VI Starting parameters,
two options rel and abs are created to change the numbers.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.09.23.01 “”In Signal View, when State Type
is placed on Transient. And you were on Current State and selected Magnitude Harmonic, by moving the
cursor in Vector View, the harmonic signal wasn’t displayed correctly.
In this version this has been fixed. “”This icon is designed to give the user faster access to
Calculations in the toolbar. “”After activating the Show Actual Type for each binary, Select Graph for
Actual Binary section is activated in
the Signal View. With the number of voltage and current outputs being activated in Analog Output, you
can select voltage and current output charts for each binary chart in this section, as well as the
charts of other binaries, and see
this in Signal View.
RESISTANCERESISTANCE21.10.21.01 “”The impedance Test tab is added to this
room.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.10.21.01 “”In single-phase mode, by adding rows
to the table, the software faults when changing tabs from "Table" to "Plot". This is now fixed in the
new version.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
CVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMER_CVT21.10.21.01 “”With removing the row in the data table in the test
object section the software crashed, it is now fixed.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB21.10.21.01 “”In the "Test
Object" tab, the "Operating Time" section, by adjusting the maximum time and minimum time, these values
are calculated in milliseconds, causing problems in the evaluation section
in the "Timing Resistance" section. This is now fixed in the new version.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.10.21.01 “”The
bugs and polarity test problems are fixed in the Excitation Test tab. “”After completing the first stage
of saturation test by DC method, the results of conversion ratio test for
the user are displayed in the CTR field. “”In previous versions, in the secondary Burden section, after
loading the test file, the nominal current wasn’t shown correctly, which is now fixed. “”In the Test
Setting section, by converting
the CT core type from Measuring to Protection, the standard test table image of the conversion ratio
couldn’t be updated, which is now fixed. “”In the Ratio and Polarity with current section, before the
test, the possibility of displaying
the percentage of injectable current to the nominal current is added. “”In previous versions, in the
Ratio and Polarity with voltage section, the percentage of the equivalent current ratio of the injected
voltage wasn’t calculated correctly,
which is now fixed in the new version. The Actual Rct to Ratio V field is also added in this section. If
its value is calculated in the Winding Resistance tab, this field will take its value from this tab.
Otherwise, the value is taken
from what is written on the test object tab. “”In the CT saturation test, when the wirings are not
properly connected or the saturation current is below one mAh or two saturation points are found a
message is displayed to the user.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.10.21.01 “”If there was a
direction on the third coil in the Supply Direction section, by changing the number of trans coils from
3 to 2, the software would have crashed, which is now fixed.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE21.10.21.01 “”By clicking on Medium Detail View,
the software crashed that this is now fixed. “”It is possible to see the information of each zone after
the test is created. “”The ground coefficient for each zone is
created both in AMT Distance and in AMT sequencer. In AMT Distance, grounding factor for phase to ground
fault option is considered, where the ground coefficient of different zones if activated is represented
by its value and mode. In
this section, there is always a General grounding factor option. This option related to the main ground
coefficient, which is determined in the Grounding Factor section. By selecting each option, the amount
of voltage and current for single-phase
fault changes to the ground. also in AMT Sequencer for when you want to see the impedance trajectory,
this option is the same as in the designed distance at the bottom of Impedance View.
AMT VI STARTINGAMT_VI_STARTING21.10.21.01 “”The PickUp-DropOff tab is
added in this room. “”In the PickUp-DropOff tab, draw Straghit Line option is added to VI Starting
Characteristic. By enabling this option, the user can only draw the right
line. You can also use the Q shortcut key. “”A marker is added to the lines drawn in the PickUp-DropOff
tab, which is moved by moving the cursor in Signal View.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES21.10.21.01 “”In all Medium modules with
PickUp-DropOff test, if it was changed in the Prefault time setting tab, it would not have been applied
to Signal View in the Pick up drop tab, this is now fixed in the new
version.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.10.21.01 “”Two new test cases are added in
the Simulation section called Double Fault and Parallel Line, bugs and other test case problems are
fixed as well. “”In Vector View, if any of the vectors in the Show
Arrow column were false, the true label would not change the status correctly, this is now fixed in the
new version. “”When State Type is on Harmonic, you can select the type interharmonic or Orders.
Interharmonic mode is the same as before.
Orders mode can only be used in one state. In this case, you can add different harmonics to the table by
using the Add New Row and Remove Selected Row buttons. Since the sampling speed of the AMT105 device for
actuals is 400 microseconds
and the speed of making the diagram is 10 microseconds, so in this case, for actuals, it does not
actually represent the exact of what was injected. The number of signals selected in Hardware
Configuration, Mag and Phase columns for each
signal in the Harmonic Order section are added.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE21.10.21.01 “”In the Report Generator section, the Merge
Report section is added. Here, you can merge the added reports. Three options, Continuous Page
Numbering, Table of Content and Delete Added Report Files are created
to continuously number the pages, tabling of report lists, and the absence of the report files are
created separate from each test file respectively. These options are enabled by default.
RESISTANCERESISTANCE21.10.24.01 “”Photo of The Resistance Test tab is
updated.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.10.24.01 “”Problems with the
PickUp-DroppOff tab are now fixed. For example, in the past, after loading the differential file,
currents were displayed in mA, which should have been expend as in be in. Another
problem is the displacement of Idiff and Ibias columns. Also, Idiff isn’t calculated correctly. “”In
Report Setting, the Stability Test table is ticked by default.
AMT VI STARTINGAMT_VI_STARTING21.10.24.01 “”PickUp-DropOff test is
performed as a ramp step.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.10.24.01 “”When "State Type" is on
"Transient", when loading the comtrade file, if there was a rio or xrio with the name cfg and dat by
opening the comtrade file, the xrio file would not be loaded correctly. This
is now fixed in the new version. “”In Report Setting, level assessment and Ramp Assessment options are
disabled and enabled by default, respectively.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.10.25.01 “”You can see Total Harmonic
Distortion THD when State Type is on Harmonic.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.10.28.01 “”During the test, If the user doesn’t
select the desired row by mistake and run the test by using the Run icon, a fault use to occur, this is
now fixed.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER21.10.29.01 “”If you change the
status of binaries in Hardware Configuration, you can stop or perform the test according to the new
changes. For example, if you move Bin 1 to Bin 6, the changes are applied correctly.
It is important to note that after changing binaries, the modified binary in the Binary must be
redefined Trigger tab.
OVERCURRENT QUICK TESTOVERCURRENT_QUICK_TEST21.11.13.01 “” From
now on, by clicking on "Add to Report", the software will not crash.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.11.13.01 “” Moreover, two new options - "Auto
Transformer with tertiary"and "Autotransformer without tertiary" - have been added to the "Type" section
for autotransformer testing. “” Additionally, by changing values
in “Rating voltage” section and specifying the number of transformer taps in “Tap Changer” section, the
voltage table values of “Tap Changer” section are updated.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB21.11.13.01 “” In "Test Object",
there were problems in the "Operating Time"section, which have been fixed.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERCTCURRENT_TRANSFORMERCT21.11.13.01 “” In
previous versions, when the R Man option was activated Ref. Temp., the software would crash. This has
been fixed in this version. “” Additionally, when activating the Don't Change
Hardware Setting option in Step 1: Core Information and pressing Init Test in Step 2: Rdc and
Excitation, the software crashed; this has also been fixed. “” In previous versions, when you copied and
pasted from some fields to other fields
inside the software or from software like "Notepad" to these fields, the software crashed. This problem
is fixed in this version.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER21.11.13.01 “” After running the
Shot Test, all the points had failed. This issue has been resolved in the latest version. For instance,
this file was tested in prior versions and if Recalculate was clicked,
it would be recalculated and any points that had been failed mistakenly would pass.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.11.13.01 “” Two
options, "I houre" and "V hour", have been added to the "Function" section. “” In the "Transducer
Properties"section, if Function is set to "Power Factor"and Characteristic Type
is set to "Quadratic", attempting to switch Function to "V hour" would cause the software to crash.
However, this bug has been rectified in this version.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.11.13.01 “” If you enable all
binary inputs and outputs, you can export "Export Comtrade" from your file. “” Select either "Motor" or
"Generator" mode in the "Protected Object", and when you put in a value
under Primary, the Secondary will automatically be adjusted accordingly. Additionally, this version of
the program has addressed an issue where "I diff" and "I bias" streams weren't calculated correctly.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE21.11.13.01 “” Going forward, the "Test Point"
section's details about impedance zones will be shown completely.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.11.13.01 “” If you open a file with
the "DOC" test, the color-coding of the safeguarded areas appear accurately. “” By changing the values
of "I Pick-up" and "Time", if the chart in "Tripping characteristic"
is changed, the values of the titled columns will not return to the default state. “” The values in the
"Active Range Limits" section were previously determined based on a reference current. However, thanks
to research conducted on "Siemens"
and "MiCOM" manuals, these values are now calculated using the pick-up current. “” Additionally, the
issue of not saving changes made in the "User Define" folder of the "Overcurrent" block has been
resolved.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.11.13.01 “” This version has resolved the
issues with bugs in the static output icon. “” The "Level Assessment" evaluation has been adjusted so
that if the Tolerance column is entered with 100 milliseconds and
20 milliseconds for states 2 and 3, respectively, and 1 and 0 for states 2 and 3 in the "Start" column,
the evaluation disregards the final 100 milliseconds of state 1 and the initial 100 milliseconds of
state 2, as well as the initial
20 milliseconds of state 3 and the last 20 milliseconds of state 2. After this, the evaluation is
completed based on the values entered. “” Previously, when edits were made to the "Hardware
Configuration" binaries, the numbers C1, C2,
etc. would not appear correctly in the Comment and "Trigger Condition" columns of the "Table View" page.
This issue has been resolved in this version. “” If you enable any binary in "Hardware Configuration",
the column containing the number
of states created appear in "Level Assessment". “” In previous versions, the "Level Assessment" would
display the assessment result before running a test with changes to parameters, like changing the range
value. This issue has been corrected
in this version. “” A new simulation test case involving three parallel lines has been added. “” After
enabling "Show Actual Type" for binaries 9 and 10, the "Binary Analog Transformer" is updated. “” After
changing the name of the operation,
the name of this signal is updated in the "Setting" of the "Signal View" window. “” If you had saved a
file in the Stable version while the "Signal View" window was open, when you tried to open the same file
on the Test version, the signal
wouldn't show up in the "Signal View" window. However, this bug has been fixed in this new version. “”
Once the file with THD has been uploaded, the details for it are shown in the related table. “” You can
copy and paste the data from
a single row in the "Ramp Assessment" tab.
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST UNDER_OVER_VOLTAGE_TEST_21.11.14.01 “”
The software crashed once the "Init test" was pressed which is now fixed.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.11.14.01 “” In the "Winding Resistance"
section, if you test "HV" after "LV", the strong pressure side resistance values are displayed in the
table.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.11.14.01 “” Once
the "Int Test" was pressed, the "Calc.knee.P" and "Show Point" options were not enabled; this problem
has been fixed in the new version.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.11.14.01 “” In "Simulation", the Fault tab
is added to create a power fluctuation error in the corresponding test case.
HARDWAREHARDWARE21.11.15.01 “”There was little difference in the actual
value of current groups. This bug has been solved in the new versions.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.11.22.01 “”It is possible to view and control
the primary, secondary and tertiary graphs in Winding Resistance. “”There are more comprehensive reports
from the Test Object tab in this section.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB21.11.22.01 “”By entering a
decimal number in the Operating Time section, its value displayed as zero, by changing the amount of
time in the Number of Decimal Places Settings window, the number is displayed
correctly in this section.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERCTCURRENT_TRANSFORMERCT21.11.22.01 “”In the
“Excitation with DC” tab, if you apply “Init Test” in the second stage, the wiring of the first stage
was also activated. This bug has been fixed in the new version. “”In the Excitation
test with DC, after completing the first step of the test, pressing the Clear Test button does not erase
the results. Also, no message is displayed to save this information. “”In the “Excitation with DC”,
after completing the first stage
of the test, by clicking on the “Clear Test”, the results are not deleted. Also, the warning message for
asking to save this result is not displayed anymore.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.11.22.01 “”If Test
Mode is selected as Mechanism or Output is set on the Open Loop in the Shot Test section, there will be
no problem to change the Time field.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.11.22.01 “”Once you enabled the Static
Output and run the test, by stopping the test even by deleting the results in Signal View, the test time
were displayed as 4000 seconds. This case has been resolved. “”If
the result of multiplying the Order column in the Frequency column is more than 2 kHz, the value of the
Phase and Magnitude columns will be zero for all current outputs. “”If you enable Frequency in Signal
view, In the Step Ramp mode,
and set the Step Ramp Display to Rate d / dt, by changing the Step Value, the signal was not displayed
correctly, which is now resolved.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT21.11.23.01 “”In the Secondary Burden section, problems
concerning reports have been fixed.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.11.23.01 “”Tap
No. and Core No. Columns in the Report section of the Winding Resistance, Ratio with Voltage and Ratio
with Current are displayed correctly.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.11.23.01 “”New math functions have been
added to the Calculated Assessment. “”By opening saved files with Ramp Assessment, the Act column is
displayed correctly. “”New fields have been created in Calculations.
In previous versions, these fields were located in the Setting tab of the Signal View window.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.11.30.01 “”In Turns Ratio and No Load tab, the
Vector Group, the locations of the V phase nom, V phase act, V sec meas and TTR act fields have been
changed.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER21.11.30.01 “”When
the Input Meter is on Read from Binary and in the Output, the Open Loop option is selected, the
calculations for the online meter test have been updated.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.11.30.01 “”In directional test and
in two-phase fault types, the name of the Angle field has been changed to Angle VLL, If. The angle
entered in this case represents the line-by-line voltage to the fault current.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.11.30.01 “”If the items related to the
Step Values table are entered in decimal and in milliamperes, because the accuracy of the numbers
entered in this table is one milliampere, the software will round up those
numbers. “”Saving and retrieving some files would cause an error exception, which has been fixed in the
new version.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE21.11.30.01 “”After connecting to the device, if the word
VIVADO is listed in the Version of Micro column, new option called Update Bootloader is created. After
activating this option and clicking on the Update Firmware button
again, the program will be updated, an alert screen will then appear to update the bootloader. It is
important to make sure that the power supply to the device is not interrupted before doing so. If the
device is shut down while doing
this, you can no longer use it and you have to send the device to the company. This takes a long time,
about 2 minutes, therefore, it is better to do all the steps with a LAN cable. On the alert page, by
clicking Yes, the bootloader packets
are sent to the 7020 micro and updated. After doing this step, the color of this option as well as its
name will change from Update Bootloader to Force Update Bootloader. The Force Update Bootloader option
is used when you want to be sure
to update the bootloader again.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.12.07.01 “”All power parameters measured
with Binary Inputs are displayed in Signal View.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.12.19.01 “”In Test Object, new tables named
DETC Tap Changer and OLTC Tap Changer have been created to add on information separately on Load Tap
Changer and Deenergized Tap Changer. “”In the Winding Resistance section,
if there was no line, the software would crash once clicked on the table, this problem has been fixed in
the new version. “”In the Leakage Reactance UK% section, from now on voltage and current measurements
are made based on 1st harmonic
instead of Amplitude.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.12.19.01 “”By
opening the CT test file based on the CT type and its class, only some fields related to it are
displayed. “”In Excitation with DC, when you changed the graph from Lissajous RMSDC
to Lissajous HysteresisDC and vice versa in Calculation, the graph was not displayed correctly in Signal
View, this has been fixed. “”In situations where the resistance information on the CT plate is not
available, it is possible to disable
Max Rct. “”In Secondary Burden, calculations related to carrying CT did not use actual current. This
problem is fixed in the new version. “”In the Ratio and Polarity with current section, after opening the
saved test file, the wiring image
is displayed correctly. “”In Ratio and Polarity with voltage, to determine the angle of the input
voltage, instead of the nominal value of 90 degrees, the value of the actual voltage angle is
calculated.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER21.12.19.01 “”If you select
Connected Voltage system 1 in three-phase mode, you can see the vector displacement by moving the cursor
in the Vector View.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL21.12.19.01 “”In the PickUp-DropOff
section, in some fault types, there were problems in displaying the result which is now fixed in the new
version.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT21.12.19.01 “”By adding the diagram in
residual mode, different fault types were not displayed correctly nor added, this problem has been fixed
in the new version.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.12.19.01 “”It is possible to display and
read the frequency in the range of 25 to 250 Hz by Binary Inputs. “”If you set the signal frequency
below 25 Hz in harmonic mode, the software would crash by selecting Orders
in Harmonic Type; this has been fixed in the new version. “”Binary inputs graph in Signal view was not
displayed correctly during the test, this problem has been fixed in the new version. “”Differential and
Overcurrent characteristics
were not displayed in the report section which has been corrected.
OVERCURRENT QUICK TESTOVERCURRENT_QUICK_TEST21.12.27.01 “”After
clicking the Add to Report button, the software crashed. This problem has been fixed in the new version.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.12.27.01 “”In Winding Resistance, if you set
the side field on LV, it was not possible to add a row; this has been fixed in the new version.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.12.27.01 “”If
the first line of information is deleted after performing the test in the Winding Resistance tab, the
information in the Actual RCT to Test Estimation field in the Excitation tab
is removed from the Max Rct field in the Test Object tab.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES21.12.27.01 “”In Overcurrent and Diff
Harmonic, by clicking on Export to CSV, in , in Overcurrent View and Differential view texts are not
displayed.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER21.12.31.01 “”In the Plot section, some
checkboxes, except for Ratio and No load Current, have been disabled. “”In Winding Resistance, when you
click on Add to report, two tables are created based on phase and tap in
the report. Now you can add them to the report or delete each one separately in the Report Setting.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB21.12.31.01 “”In the Timing
section, the evaluation of the key state change from close to open in phase A was shown incorrectly.
This bug has been fixed in the new version.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT21.12.31.01 “”In
Ratio and Polarity with voltage, a new field named I test has been created. In this field, when you
enter the voltage value, the current value is displayed as a percentage of the
nominal current. “”Calculations for the I Prime field have been modified. “”In Excitation, by activating
Extra Data, the corresponding table is added to the report.
INSTRUMENT TESTINSTRUMENT_TEST21.12.31.01 “”In Report view, the title
for Name was displayed incorrectly for the corresponding module.
VCCVCC21.12.31.01 “”Issues related to Export comtrade have been fixed.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER21.12.31.01 “”If you activated the
Statistical Output mode, after stopping the test and clearing the result, the software crashed. This
problem is fixed in the new version. “”In Detail View, sometimes in the Binary
Inputs section, the labels and values for each binary were wrong. This bug has been fixed in the new
version.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.01.04.01 “”When you select a three-winding
transformer or an autotrans with a tertiary winding in the Type field, and set the tap changer to the
secondary side, there were problems in displaying the plot, which is
now fixed. “”In Magnetic Balance, when you clicked on Add to Report, two tables w1 and w2 were created
in the report. Now you can add them to the report or delete each one separately in the Report Setting.
“”In Winding Resistance, when
you test the primary, secondary and tertiary resistance together, by clicking Add to Report, the
relevant information of HV, LV and MV tables are displayed separately in the report.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.01.04.01 “”Problems in
PickUp-DropOff calculations and display of indicators have been fixed. “”Once selecting Orange in Vector
View in PickUp-DropOff and moving the cursor in this window or in Signal View,
you can see the values of differential and bias currents for all points of the selected line in
Differential Characteristic.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.01.04.01 “”From now on, you can look for
the xrio or rio file name in capital letters in the Search box of the Load XRio and Rio file.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.01.14.01 “”You can see the changes in the
Report View by activating the Temperature Correction option and clicking the Add to Report button.
“”After performing the Magnetic Balance test, saving and reopening this file,
the W1 currents are displayed correctly.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.01.14.01 “”After clearing the
results and re-doing the test, the First and Last columns in the Summary of Result section are updated
based on the new results. “”After selecting AC in Supply Voltage, the
header image is updated in Timing.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.01.14.01 “”During the test, in
PickUp-DropOff, you can see the movement of the points on the characteristic and the pass or fail status
of the points. Also, after completing the test, by setting the Vector
View to Orange or Blue and moving the cursor, you can see the movement of the points on the Differential
Characteristic. “”In PickUp-DropOff, you can set the test so that the pickup is done, but the drop off
isn’t. You can also select
different modes from the Target Type field.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT22.01.14.01 “”By activating the Active
Range Limit option and making changes in its fields, you can see the desired results in Directional Plan
and Overcurrent Characteristic.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES22.01.14.01 “”If group B current is
selected instead of group A current in Hardware Configuration, the activated items in Hardware
Configuration are displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the Test View window
on the left side.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.01.14.01 “”By default, Next Full and Start
Time options are disabled before selecting the On GPS.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE22.01.14.01 “”After activating the Record Period field
and clicking on Apply, if the entered value was greater than 9 seconds, the software crashed, but in the
new version, you cannot enter a value greater than 9 seconds.
AUTORECLOSUREAUTORECLOSURE22.01.18.01 “”In AutoReclosure, by pressing
the Init Test button, all parts of the assessmet are updated.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.01.18.01 “”Before, the time
between opening and closing in the open-close test was when the open command was issued to open the key.
But now is the time when the key is open to close. This time is about
28 to 30 milliseconds. “”In the o-co test, a new section has been added in the Summary of Result called
O-t-Co total time. In this section, the tie recorded is the time when the open command is issued so as
the key finally opens.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT22.01.18.01 In
Secondary Burden, when you click on the Add to Report, the Phase column is added to the report.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.01.18.01 “”In Table View, when the tables
are reduced, you can change the time of each state and the status of binary outputs and view them
simultaneously in Detail View. “”The quality of the images in the reports
have been improved so that users do not have the problems in zooming and printing as in the past. The
problems that existed in the display of Signal View, Vector View, Characteristic View and ZT Diagram in
the reports are now fixed in
the new version.
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TESTUNDER_OVER_VOLTAGE_TEST22.02.02.01 “”A
new option called State pausereset termination has been added. This option is used to determine the
condition for changing the state between Time Test and PickUp-DropOff. The condition
can be time, pressing the key space or the OR logic between the two. “”After clicking the Init Test
button, the tables in the Measurement View are updated correctly.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.02.02.01 “”From now on, 4 states are created
for the Winding Resistance test of each phase after clicking on Apply Test. Since at the end of the test
Error Other occured, by default, Disable Error is active for the
4th State for 5 seconds.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT22.02.02.01 “”The Voltage Measurement Mode section has
been added to the Winding Resistance tab.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.02.02.01 “”Whether the Based on
Ibias option is enabled or disabled, it has no effect on the PickUp-DropOff test. Enabling this option,
allows you to inject some current in tests of shot, check and search
in the prefault.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT22.02.02.01 “”If you add and test
several points using the Add to button, when you add a point using the Add button in the PickUp-DropOff
tab, the desired point is added to the last tested fault type.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES22.02.02.01 “”If you right-clicked on the
inactive Generator Differential Start Curve block in a template containing this block such as 7UM62x in
a ROM other than AMT Differential, the software crashed. This has
been fixed in the new version.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.02.02.01 “”Sequences related to group B
flow were missing in the Calculations section and Show Signals section which are added to the new
version. It was also possible to assign the signals selected in the Show
Signals section to cursors in the Data Table. For example, if you enable signals zero sequence I2, I0
negative sequence in the Show Signals section, their value are shown correctly. “”From now on, by
clicking on Insert Z shot, the voltage
angles in all three states are equal to zero, -120 and 120. “”After selecting Stable Power Swing, you
can add a simultaneous error with stable power swing. “”In the System Frequency field, you can enter the
desired frequency value in all
test cases.
INSTRUMENT TESTINSTRUMENT_TEST22.02.09.01 “”The basis of evaluation
in Leakage Reactance tests in trans as well as Ratio and Polarity and Excitation in CVT has been changed
based on binary inputs. The users, also, can recalculate the results
by choosing real voltage values as an evaluation after performing these tests.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.02.09.01 “”Calculations related to the
Zero sequence illusion is now fixed in the Symmetrical Component. “”By default, after clicking on Insert
Z Shot, the voltage angles in the three states prefault, fault, post
fault are zero, -120 and 120 degrees, respectively. The current angles in the fault state L1-L2-L3, 100%
are calculated by working out the difference between the voltage angle and the line angle.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.02.23.01 “”After selecting Automatic Tap
Control, you can change the way the taps are moved up or down from the Preparation section before
performing the test. “”Column I Prim. Angle has been added in No load and TTR
tests. The column shows the no-load current angle. “”By placing the tap changer on the low pressure side
and performing the TTR test, the relevant calculations were done incorrectly which is now resolved.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT22.02.23.01 “”By changing the assessment in Assessment,
the test result change. “”To read the primary voltage from Bin 5, you must select Analog Input in the
Primary Meas field.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT22.03.08.01 “” In the "Ratio and Polarity" tab, a new
field called "Use voltage booster" has been added. By choosing "Other" and if you have a transformer up
to 2 kV, you can
perform this test according to the specified coefficients.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.03.08.01 “” A new tab called
"DRMDemo " has been created. In this tab, the dynamic resistance test of the key is presented in demo
form. “” After clicking on "Init Test" in "Timing", the "Show Actual" related
to binaries, either being " Wet" or " Dry", would become " True". That is, the reference base is based
on the voltage value, which is 2 volts in " Dry" mode. In this case, whenever the voltage is less than 1
volt, 1 is considered. In "
Wet" mode, if it is greater than the value set by the user in "Threshold", it is considered 1.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT22.03.08.01 “” The
"Ratio and Polarity with Voltage" test method has changed. In the new method, any voltage value entered
in the "V test" field, the same value is applied after the test is executed.
Also, if the actual value of the injected voltage is greater than 188 V, the binaries are in series with
each other. “” After loading some files in "Ratio and Polarity with Current" test, by changing the value
of "I meas". which was read
using an ammeter, the software crashed, this problem has been solved in the new version. “” The problems
related to the "At Calibration State Option" have been fixed in the new version. “” The image of the
assembling in "Ratio and Polarity
with Voltage" has changed.
INSTRUMENT TESTINSTRUMENT_TEST22.03.08.01 “” The problem of polarity
in the test of the "Ratio and Polarity" using the voltage method in the CT and also the test of the
conversion ratio in the CVT has been solved.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.03.08.01 “” Problems related to
"PickUp-DropOff" test regarding some lines in the I bias test mode have been fixed. “”“ "Supply
Direction" in "Setting" is changed based on "Reference Winding" and a message
is displayed for the user to solve the differential function test problems in "Ge" relay.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE22.03.08.01 “” Problems related to loading
"xrio" or "rios" containing Lens/Tomato and Mho features have been fixed.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.03.08.01 “” Problems related to
copying/pasting a line in "Ramp Assessment" have been fixed.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE22.03.08.01 “” A new section called "GPS Tuner" has been
added in "Setting". In the past, to sync AMT105 with GPS and other devices, there were problems due to
the time difference. You can enter this time difference in the
"GPS Tuning Time" field so that such problems do not arise in the end-to-end test. “” The problems with
the options related to the "Output" section in the "PDF Report Creator" window have been fixed.
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TESTUNDER_OVER_VOLTAGE_TEST22.03.13.01 “”
Problems appeared after clicking on the "Init Test" which are now fixed.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT22.03.13.01 “” In the DOC test and in
the "PickUp-DropOff" tab, when the "Target Type" was on "Angle", after clicking "Apply & Start Test",
the values were displayed first in amps and then in angles in the table,
which is resolved in the new version.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERCTCURRENT_TRANSFORMERCT22.03.16.01 “” Once
you press the Settings icon of the "Add to Report" button, its list of options are displayed.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT22.03.26.01 “” The
many changes made to this room are discussed the upcoming educational videos.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.03.26.01 “” Calculations related
to all fault type have been improved once you choose the "Busbar" in the "Protected Object".
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.03.26.01 “” The "Long Time Record" option
has made it possible for the user to view values in "Signal View" for a longer period. The minimum value
you can consider for the "Sample Time" field is 100 milliseconds.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.03.29.01 “” A new column called
"Selectivity" has been added. If the measured voltage value is not clear and, for example, it is higher
than the selected mode, after the specified time in this, it changes to the
next mode so that the correct value of the read voltage is displayed in "Signal view". “” If your micro
device is Vivado7020, you can display the phase and binary inputs frequency for long time in "Signal
View".
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.04.01.01 “” In "Winding Resistance", the time
associated with the "State Time" field was not running properly and the test would stopp after the
duration written in "Initiated Time". This has been fixed in the new
version.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.04.01.01 “” After loading some
files, "the Last Time" was wrongly displayed in some cases; this is now corrected. “” "Signal View" in
"O-CO 2" the second test was not displayed correctly which is now resolved.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.04.03.01 “” Once you enable
the "Fast Sampling" in the "Timing Test" tab and click on the "Init Test" button, this option is also
activated in the "Extra Setting" tab.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.04.03.01 “” In all Rooms, after running
the test, when "Actual" is active, its time is inserted at the bottom of the screen, inside the
parentheses. “” From now on, "Live Scroll" and "Live Scroll Actual" options
cannot be active at the same time. You can also use "Live Scroll Actual" option for binaries.
VCCVCC22.04.04.01 “” The function of the Ctrl+O shortcut key has been modified.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.04.04.01 “” When "Save Last Actual Data"
was enabled, the RMS value was zero in some places. This item has been modified in the new version.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.04.07.01 “” In "Timing Test"
and "Minimum Pickup", a new method called "Wet by Current Source" has been added.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.04.07.01 “” Calculations related
to I bias for Protecta relay has been added.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.04.08.01 “” Since some users
do not have the required auxiliary relay and the shunt resistance available in "Timing test" while using
"External Power Supply", two options "With Auxiliary relay" and "Shunt"
have been added. If these options are enabled, the header image will be changed and the flowchart will
be displayed to the user. “” In "Minimum Pickup", when you set "State Termination" to 1 pole, the number
of active binaries are updated
and reduced to one.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT22.04.08.01 “” In
Excitation with dc, the photo of the assembeling has been changed and a new section called Ratio and
Polarity has been added to Step 1.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.04.08.01 “” If a transformer has
three windings and the "Reference Winding" is on "Primary", "Secondary" or "Tertiary"by changing the
"Supply Direction", the calculations related to all fault types are calculated
correctly.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.04.10.01 “” If the "Disable Get Actual"
option was enabled in one of the states and disabled in the other by moving the cursor in the "Signal
View", the RMS value in the Data Table would be displayed equal to "na".
This bug has been fixed in the new version.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.04.11.01 “” The photo of the
assembeling is modified after Shunt is enabled.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.04.11.01 “” By putting values in
"Primary Values" mode and clicking the "Export Comtrade", the information is displayed correctly.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.04.17.01 “” A new method has been added
according to the "IEC61378-1" standard in the conversion ratio test. “” In "Winding Resistance", while
being in three-phase mode, the default settings related to "Trigger" has
been modified. “” In "Magnetic Balance", when reloading the test file, the currents column was not
reloaded correctly which is now fixed.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT22.04.17.01 “” By clicking on "Insert Rows", only phase A
is added from now on, and the possibility of phase change to B and C has been created.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT22.04.17.01 “” From
now on, the binary input Bin. 5 is used in the first stage of the "Excitation test with dc ", when the
CT conversion ratio is low 15.5 or 30.5, reading the voltage from Bin. 10
is not possible and this is used instead
AMT VI STARTINGAMT_VI_STARTING22.04.17.01 “” Previously, once the
"Voltage References" was changed, the characteristic curve was displayed incorrectly in
"PickUp-DropOff"; this bug has been fixed in the new version.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.04.17.01 “” If you have selected a number
of signals to display in "Show Signals", these signals they would be disabled by opening and closing
"Hardware Configuration". This bug has been fixed in the new version.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.04.19.01 “” In some assembelings, "LL" method
was used. Therefore, by changing "Read Input Voltage" to "Analog Input", binary inputs 1 to 3 can be
used. “” When the "Winding Resistance" test is done in "LL" mode, the
results can be cleared from all the three rows using "Clear Result" results and "Remove". “” In previous
versions, when the "Zero Sequence Impedance" test was performed on the "LV" side, once a row was added
in this test, "HV" was inserted
by mistake on the Side column; this has also been resolved. “” If there is a row in the "Z0" section and
the vector group changes in the "Winding Configuration" section so that there is no neutral point
grounded star, this row is erased.
“” In "Winding Resistance", all rows can be put in order in "Down" mode from phase A to phase C.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.04.19.01 “” Once "Toward Line" on
the primary side of the direction were chosen, the calculations would not have been done correctly which
is now resolved.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES22.04.19.01 “” Generally, in the new
version of parameters that should not be normally in the output file in "Exports" are not taken in the
new version. For example, in AMT Overcurrent, after exporting "Xrio" in
standard mode and loading it in "Omicron" software, a parameter called "I sensetive" in "Test Universe"
software was not loaded properly; or in "AMT Distance", the "Line Length" parameter which was taken from
the user in kilometres, does
not exist in the standard mode.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.04.19.01 “” If there is an active binary
input before testing, the "Error Overvoltage of Binary" is by default and you cannot enable it during
testing.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.04.21.01 “” When testing three-winding
transformers, it is possible to drag Plot from the Territory to the Primary.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER22.04.21.01 “” The
possibility of testing the transducers with an output of 1 volt is created using Bin.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.04.21.01 “” After opening the old
files, the "Colour" and "Show arrow" columns could be changed for "IDiff" and "IBias" lines. This error
has been fixed. “” After writing the name "746" in the "Name" field
and selecting the "Busbar" option, a field named "Angle" is added to the "Test View" window. “” After
adding the value in the" %" field on the "Search Test" tab, the software crashed. This error has been
fixed in the new version.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.04.21.01 “” After opening the old files
containing "Time Assessment", due to the addition of "t_start" and "t_end" values, the values of this
section were not loaded correctly, which has been fixed in the new version.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.04.23.01 “” The relevant settings was not
displayed when "By In progress Contact" was selected; the problem is now fixed.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER22.04.23.01 “”
According to the values selected by the user from the “Minimum Value”, “Maximum Value”, and “Saturation
Range” fields, “Bin. 10” or “Bin. 1” are selected to measure the voltage. If
the maximum value of these three fields is greater than 200 mV, “Bin. 1” is used otherwise “Bin. 10” is
selected.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.04.24.01 “” When the "Read Input Voltage" field
was set to "Analogue Input" in Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load during the single-phase transistor
test and the input voltage was more than 130 V, it was not possible
to read this voltage value in binary, which is now possible in the new version. In addition, the photo
of the assembling changes according to the input voltage.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.04.24.01 “” If there are two states where
one of the states is "Continuous Ramp", where the first state has an offset and the second state is with
or without offset, an error occurred when activating the option
"Continue last state amplitude", which has now been fixed.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.04.26.01 “” Once the file containing a
test with two states, “Pickup” and “Drop-off” was opened and applied again, the amount of drop-off
errors in “Measurement View” would display the wrong “Assessment” column.
This value was not displayed correctly in the state of drop in “Table View”, yet this has been fixed.
VCCVCC22.04.28.01 “” After running the test file, the software crashed, which is
now fixed.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.05.07.01 “” There were some problems with the
"Custom" option that have been fixed in the new version. For example, if the taps were selected in the
mode you see after disabling and re-enabling the "OTLC TapChanger"
option, the voltage values in the table were zero.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.05.07.01 “” In "Motor
Current", clicking on the "Init Test" activated binary input 10 by default and assigned it a unit and a
coefficient. When clicking on the row in "Result" in "Contact Resistance" and
clicking on "Apply Test", the value of the "Mul" field and the "Unit" option in "Calculation" were not
updated correctly. This problem has been fixed in the new version.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT22.05.07.01 “” In
the "Ratio and Polarity With Voltage" section, the default settings are taken into account so that the
"%In" column reaches one hundred percent of the rated current without the
user having to change the applied voltage "V test nom".
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.05.07.01 “” Due to the chosen
formula and coefficient in "Ibias Calculation", the dashed error curve was not shifted correctly
according to the corresponding differential curve. This problem has been fixed.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT22.05.08.01 “”A After running the test,
the margin lines related to “PickUp Start” and “DropOff End” were not displayed on the characteristic
curve in the “Characteristic View” window; this has been fixed in the
upcoming version.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.05.08.01 “” There were problems in the
binary outputs which are fixed in this version. For example, if “Bin Out” 2 was selected, the device did
not function and a graph was not even seen in the “Signal View”.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT22.05.09.01 “” In the Test Object, a field to determine
the type of phase under test and three fields to determine the capacitance when CVT is selected, has
been added. If VT
is selected, these three capacitor fields are removed.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.05.24.01 “” Once the Power
Supply was set to External, it was not possible to change the Bin Input options by selecting another Bin
Output option. This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT22.05.24.01 “” In
DC saturation test, when the CT conversion ratio was small and the software used Bin 1 as Primary,
problems were seen in the calculations. This problem is fixed in the coming version.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT22.05.24.01 “” In the "PickUp-DropOff"
test, once the running test was stopped, the software crashed, this problem has been fixed in the new
version. “” The "Show Selected Z Act. Point" was displayed incorrectly
in the setting of the Characteristic View. The problem is fixed in the new version.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.05.24.01 “” When "Overcurrent" option in
"Set Mode" is selected then changed to one of the Distance options, the software crashed. This problem
has been solved in the new version. “” A new option called "Advance
View" has been added in "Detail View". Enabling this option provides more settings of the selected State
Type. “” If the State Type is on "Quick", activating the "Advanced View" option, "Quick Setting" was not
displayed; however, it has
been fixed in the upcoming version. “” If the "State Type" was on "Step Ramp", the "Ramp Description
Errors" section and the "Con.In Freq Step" option were not displayed. These problems have been fixed in
the new version. “” The inconsistency
between "Table View" and "Detail View" seen after naming the last State is now fixed.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.05.30.01 “” In "Transient", a new option
called "IE" has been added which is a combination of three currents used in functions to the earth
coefficient. By selecting "none", the IE flow is calculated from the sum
of IL1+IL2+IL3 and is used in functions. However, once other currents are selected it will be used as an
IE stream.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.07.06.01 “” If the assembling was "Yzn5", the
test results were calculated and displayed incorrectly when the "Read Input Voltage" was set to
"Analogue Input". This error has been fixed in the next version. “” After
changing the voltages on the Test Object tab and in custom mode, it was not possible to correctly add
the voltages in the Test Turns Ratio on the "Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load tab". This error has
been fixed in the next version.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.07.06.01 “” When the power
source "AC" was selected, in the open mode and in the third phase, the time was incorrectly calculated
and displayed in the "Supply Voltage". This error is corrected in the new
version. “” When the binary inputs were in "Dry" mode, the timing test calculated all time references
from the first binary value. Therefore, all times were displayed in the same way. This problem has been
fixed in the upcoming version.
“” In "Timing Test" and in the condition "O-CO" the evaluation in the close-open mode was not carried
out correctly. This error is corrected in the new version. “” In the "Timing Test", it was not possible
to change the binary inputs after
selecting "AC" under "Supply Voltage". This error is corrected in the new version.
INSTRUMENT TESTINSTRUMENT_TEST22.07.06.01 “” If you activate the
option "Don’t Change Hardware Settings" and click on "Init Test", the software usually crashes after the
test has been executed. This bug has been fixed in the next version.
“” After selecting the "Edit & Delete Report" option, the corresponding window was not displayed. This
problem is fixed in the new version.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER22.07.06.01 “” A new
option called "Voltage Method" has been added to the tension functions. This option measures the voltage
from actual voltages or binary values. The assembling illustration is
added to the "Setting" tab. “” When the voltage functions were tested for the first time, by updating
the file using New and retesting the voltage functions, all the points were out of range. This problem
is fixed in the new version. “”
If the "Symmetrical" option was activated, after testing the points in the negative area, the
symmetrical points were moved to the positive area. This error has been corrected in the new version. “”
If the "Symmetrical" option is not active,
when the value of Input was changed from negative to positive, the value of Input was displayed in red
in the "Test View" window. This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version. “” If you selected the
option "Symmetrical", when checking
the points in the negative range, the actual injection time differed from the displayed time, which is
now corrected.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT22.07.06.01 “” The "Setting" tab
creates a section called "Directional Algorithm". The options in this section can be used according to
the "Directional" test algorithm used in the relay to fully cover the power
range in two-point faults. “” The problems with angular tolerance in directional tests have been fixed.
“” The function used in the "7SA87 SIEMENS" relay has been included in this module.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.07.06.01 “” If you set "Type" to "Orange",
the status of the states in the diagram above was chaotic. This bug has been fixed in the new version.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER22.07.16.01 “” When the "DETC Tap Changer" option
was activated on the "Winding Resistance" tab, no diagram was shown in the "Plot" section; yet, it is
fixed. “” The calculations of the angle of no-load flow were changed
in the "VectorGroup, Turns Ratio, No load current" and "No load" tabs.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.07.16.01 “” In previous
versions it was not possible to change the binary inputs 7 and 8. This problem has been fixed in the new
version. It should be noted that the column for "Binary-Input Target" can
also be selected for other binary inputs such as binary inputs 7 and 8.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL22.07.16.01 “” Adding some items to
the "Stability" tab and changing the maximum disturbance in the"Setting" did not update the time
associated with the disturbance status. This problem has been fixed in the
upcoming version.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE22.07.16.01 “” In this version, calculations
related to the "Percent" column have been changed.
AMT VI STARTINGAMT_VI_STARTING22.07.16.01 “” In the past it was not
possible to see changes in the tolerance values on the characteristic curve. There was also no voltage
in the "Shot Test" tab in Prefault. These problems have been fixed in
the upcoming version.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT22.07.16.01 “” After
"PickUp-DropOff"-Tests, the chart in Signal View was not updated according to the test results. This
problem has been fixed in the upcoming version.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES22.07.16.01 “” The function of the
existing options when right-clicking on the test result line, the Show/Hide Report section, which was
faulty in some rooms are now improved. “” In this version, the temporal changes
in the time can be seen in Prefault after you have received Comtrade from the software in the
corresponding file.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.07.16.01 “” The calculations related to
RMS in the Harmonic Order table have been changed. “” A new option called "Disable Actual" has been
added. This option allows you to show or not show the voltage and current
outputs in the "Signal View".
INSTRUMENT TESTINSTRUMENT_TEST22.07.23.01 “” A new option called
"Show/Hide Assessment Columns" has been added to show/hide test results in the report. It is important
to note that after clicking on the Add to Report button, whether in previously
saved files or in files tested from this version onwards, this option is visible in the "Delete from
Report" window after a right click.
VCCVCC22.07.23.01 “” In the previous version there were problems opening the
executed and saved test file, which have been fixed in the new version.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT22.07.23.01 “” Two formulae relating to
the Overload function of Siemens relays were added to the attribute library in the "Test Object".
HARDWAREHARDWARE22.08.23.01 “”D Due to some changes in the Microprocessors
and the use of the third version of it, there were some problems in the hardware which have been fixed
in this version. It should also be noted that the microprocessors
used are the first version of LPC, the second version of 7020 and the third version of the 7020 family
A-Linx.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT22.08.23.01 “” The
problems related to the hysteresis curve have been fixed in this version.
INSTRUMENT TESTINSTRUMENT_TEST22.08.23.01 “” From now on, you can
show/hide the table columns on the "Test Object" tab of "CT" and "CVT" rooms in the report.
VCCVCC22.08.23.01 “” Problems such as changing the name of nodes and not being
able to copy and paste them have been fixed in this version.
AMT TRANSIENTAMT_TRANSIENT22.08.23.01 “” A new ROM called "AMT
Transient" has been added. The use and functions of this ROM will be explained in future instructional
videos.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.08.23.01 “” The distance between the 6
endpoints and the trajectory line was removed in this version. Also, by changing the value of "IE", the
existing problems with drawing these points and said line have been
fixed. As of this version, the first harmonic is used to draw lines and end points “” New options to
show/hide zones have been added in the "Characteristic View". “” To calculate the RMS of currents and
voltages, a field called "Calculate
RMS" has been created. This field contains the options "None", "FCW" and "HCW". If you open the old file
in this version and the option "RMS" was activated, this field is set to the option "FCW", otherwise to
the option "None".
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB22.09.01.01 “” In the "DRM" test,
"Binary-Input Type" is set to "wet 188" by default.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT22.09.01.01 “” All
the fields related to the "Calculation of Iprimary" section cannot be changed during the saturation
test.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.09.01.01 “” The fundamental frequency in
"Harmonic" has changed. By selecting "Orders", the maximum frequency value has increased to 2500 Hz.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE22.09.14.01 “” The calculations related to
"Ignore" in Search Test have been changed so as to find the border of the zones, the points that have
already been tested are not tested again.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.09.14.01 “” After changing the "Type" to
"Harmonic", the relevant tables were not updated in the "Detail View", which has been fixed in the
upcoming version.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT22.10.09.01 “” If
the compound error is 10% for measuring CTs, 5% for 5P protection CTs, and 10% for 10P protection CTs,
the relationship between CT parallel branch current and voltage is represented
by a line in the saturation diagram, and its intersection with the line hypothetically drawn after
determining the knee point shows FS or ALF.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT22.10.09.01 “” The problems related to
the "Active Range" option in directional mode have been fixed.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER22.10.09.01 “” The problems in "Signal View"
related to not displaying the graph calculate in RMS mode and also not displaying binary signals in
"Select Graph for Actual Binary" mode in a graph have been resolved.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER23.06.26.01 “”Henceforth, in this room, before
performing the relevant tests, it is better to complete the “Test Setting” section first, then the
“Hardware Config” section, and finally, the “Report Setting” section. In
addition, it should be noted that two fundamental changes have been made in this room “Transformer”. 1-
Adding a new option, “Wiring Type,” and removing the “Don’t change Hardware Configuration” option. 2-
The way of running the test has
changed. So, to run the test in upcoming versions, it is enough to click on the “Run” button after
completing the three mentioned steps. It is important to remember that for running the tests in which
the table was added, you must first
select the desired added rows, and finally, it is enough to either use the “Apply Test” option or the
“Run” button as before. “”The “Fill Excel File” and “Developer Mode” options are activated if you want
to create your reports in excel
files. “”Optimization of calculations related to Yd11 vector group.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT23.06.26.01 “”Henceforth, in this room, before performing
the relevant tests in the tabs “Secondary Burden”, “Winding Resistance” and “Short-Circuit Impedance”,
it is better to
complete the “Test Setting” section first, then the “Hardware Config” section, and finally, the “Report
Setting” section.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB23.06.26.01 “”The “Coil name”
field is created in the “Coil” section. The users can add their considering coil name to the report.
“”In the “O-CO2” the assessment of the sections “Close” and “O-t-CO total
time” are changed.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT23.06.26.01 “”When
you clicked on “Add to Report” in “Test Object”, the “Class” column had been inserted incorrectly. This
problem has been modified in the upcoming version. “”The list of the “Analog
Input” field was updated. Henceforth, just to read the voltage, you can choose one of the first 4 binary
inputs and run your test according to the changed picture. “”The “Fill Excel File” and “Developer Mode”
options are activated if you
want to create your reports in excel files. “”Since it is possible to test all three phases
simultaneously in one file, it is available to enter the serial number of all three phases in the “Test
Object.” “”In “Excitation,” by changing
the values of the columns “Core no.” or “Tap no.” or “Phase,” the value of the field “Rct” should be
changed. “”Henceforth, in this room, before performing the relevant test in the tabs “Secondary Burden”
and “Winding Resistance”, it is
better to complete the “Test Setting” section first, then the “Hardware Config” section, and finally,
the “Report Setting” section. “”In the “Excitation” and in the section “Current Measurement Mode”, if
the excitation current is less
than 5mA, the new option called “Slight Current” is created.
INSTRUMENT TESTINSTRUMENT_TEST23.06.26.01 “”In “RTD” and
“AutoReclosure,” when you clicked on the button “Init Test”, the software would crash. “”In “Test
Object”, the new section called “Device Type” is created. In this section, before performing
any test, set the tester device first.
VCCVCC23.06.26.01 “”The “Duplicate” is added on the mouse right click. “”By
holding the “Ctrl” and selecting any of the files, the new version of each of them is copied. “”On the
mouse right clicking, the new option “Comment” is added. This
option is used to create a tooltip. “”While performing each one of tests, you were separately able to
close the relevant window.
AMT DIFF HARMONICSAMT_DIFF_HARMONICS23.06.26.01 “”In the
“Characteristic View” settings, some options which weren’t displayed correctly are modified.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL23.06.26.01 “”After loading the
"Rio" file, the two fields' values of the "Diff Time Setting" section were loaded incorrectly. This bug
has been fixed in the new version.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE23.06.26.01 “”If you clicked on the “No” bottom
in the message box of the “AMTDistanceCharacteristicEditor,” the characteristic curve would be changed.
“”In the “Report Setting”, the new option “Show All Tact” is created
at the “Search Test”.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES23.06.26.01 “”In the “Sequence Test Points
to”, the options “All”, “LN” and “LL” are added to the section “Fault Types”.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER23.06.26.01 “”By selecting “L1L2” in the
“Insert Z Shot,” the phase value is set to 30, -150, and 90, respectively, in the pre-fault state. “”The
software crashed after selecting one of these fault types L1, L2, or
L3 and clicking on the “Insert After” option. “”Henceforth, the “Tracking Assessment” section is added
to the “Report View” and you can activate or deactivate it on the “Report Setting.” “”The problem of not
displaying of the “Harmonic
Setting” section in the “Signal View” is solved. “”In the previous versions, if the “State Type” was set
to the “Continuous Ramp,” by changing the curve on the “Characteristic View” and selecting the
overcurrent characteristic, the “Set
Mode” option would alter. “”By selecting the “Value” in the “Harmonic Setting” and moving the cursor,
the related graph was not displayed correctly. “”In “Transient”, the displaying of trajectory with the
true RMS values is added. “”In
the Hardware Config, another option called “Yes Abs” has been added to the “Show Result column.” By
selecting this option, the positive or negative sign of the value written in the Threshold column is not
important. For example, if you
set the “Threshold” to 50 volts, any voltage that is greater than positive 50 volts or less than
negative 50 volts will be considered as binary 1. “”You can switch the wiring type based on the tester
device. By selecting an option from
the "Hardware Configuration" window, the voltage and current group wirings will update accordingly.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE23.06.26.01 “”The new options called “New by template”,
“Open” and “Open multiple files” are added at the right click on every modules.
RESISTANCERESISTANCE23.08.25.01 “”In the Impedance tab, some of the
options under "Measuring By" have been removed. “”Im Impedanz-Tab wurden einige der Optionen unter
"Measuring By" entfernt. “”Correcting some of the images.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMERCVT23.08.25.01 “”The issue of images enlarging after
double-clicking on them has been resolved. “”The problem of adding reports after clicking the "Add to
Report" button and also
the issue of not displaying the available options in the report settings button has been fixed. “”
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB23.08.25.01 “”Changing the
voltage range for the "With Auxiliary Relay" option to up to 220 volts AC after enabling the AC option.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT23.08.25.01 “”The
option “Standard” is added in “Test Object”. “”In the voltage transformation test, the values of Primary
Voltmeter and Secondary Voltmeter were swapped. Additionally, there was
an issue in changing the tap settings with different selections of rows.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL23.08.25.01 “”In the PickUp test of
the differential, the possibility of specifying the nominal value of the pickup by the user was added.
If the test was based on the IBias current, this value should be determined
by the software.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER23.08.25.01 “”The points are not displayed in
the differential characteristic when the “State Type” is set to “Tracking”. “”In Device Settings, after
changing the frequency in f nom, the value of time in Period Time
did not change. This issue has been resolved in the upcoming version.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE23.08.25.01 “”From now on, you can specify the type of
device you want to test in the "Room" tab.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.03.14.02 “”Adding shortcuts such as
pressing Scroll Mouse or right-clicking +alt on each state to opening detail view as pop up. “”Adding
the ability to perform mathematical operations in fields where numerical
values are entered. For example, if you want to multiply sqrt2 by 10, simply enter the same operation in
the relevant field. “”Possibility of defining trigger condition in different parts of the software. This
is normally done in the trigger
setting section, which is also added to the table view window, and you can use the options that are
placed for different conditions. “”If you define a few states and need to make the states smaller, you
can do this to all states by right-clicking
on the gear and using small mode. “”If you have multiple active binaries in the measurement view
section, you can select the logic in start and stop conditions and by right-clicking the stop in the
view custom setting section to apply
and define the requirements. “”Adding the live scroll option to the Setting of signal View window. If
you tick the live scroll option, the software performs like an oscilloscope so the signal changes appear
live in the Signal View window.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE99.03.14.02 “”By entering "Setting" on the first page of
the software and going to the "Room" tab and selecting "Decimal Places", in the "Item Type" field by
selecting "Sequencer", the display of numbers can be changed to
8 decimal places. If the “Number of Decimal Places Setting” toolbar is selected and clicked on “Load
template”, these changes are visible in “Sequencer”. “”Correcting “Report generator” in “Room” tab. By
using report generator, you can
report it without having to open the test file.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES99.05.14.01 “”In all rooms, after opening
the old files, the threshold value or threshold voltage of binary inputs in Dry mode is set to 0.2
volts, which is corrected and replaced by 1volt in the new version. “”In
all modules, when you select the “Fill Excel File” in the “File” menu, after opening a file as an
import, the same file is set an export by default. “”In the Fill Excel File window, after selecting the
input and output files the path specified,
by closing this window, this path could not be saved which is fixed. “”In the “Fill Excel File”, after
entering essential information, by clicking the “Start to Fill”, you can edit the options in “Setting”
check box. In this version, these
options are as read only after selecting the “Start to Fill”. “”In the Fill Excel File problem for the
Sequencer room, the Synchronizer section is fixed. “”If a page called vebko is created in the Excel
file, you want to fill in items
on this page, after selecting the desired file, and clicking on the “Start to Fill” option in previous
versions, an error message appears.
VCCVCC99.05.14.01 “”The pause form problem is fixed in showing the link and a
link such as www.vebko.ir can be entered in this form.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.05.14.01 “”In the "PickUp-DropOff"
tab, by opening the "More Details" panel the graphical shape of the table is displayed correctly.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES99.05.14.01 “”In "Hardware Configuration"
by enabling the "Show Actual Value" option, after going to another tab and returning to "Hardware
Configuration", this option is disabled and the values is changed to "false",
which is now fixed. “”The possibility of determining "Threshold" for binary inputs in "Dry" mode is
added. By default, this number is placed "1", but the user can enter "0" to "2" of the dc volt in this
field. For example, the binary threshold
value "1" is set to "0.7". This means that if the binary "1" is applied at a voltage of less than 0.7,
the binary contact is closed. “”In all rooms, for example the "AMT Sequencer" room, when the module or a
form is out of "dock" mode
and converted to "Undock", The software isn’t crashed when changing "Scheme"
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER99.05.14.01 “”In the test, the ratio of column
conversion "VL-L" to "Vin" is changed. In this cell, the entered voltage is used to calculate the
conversion ratio. While in previous versions the voltage entered in the
column "V L-L" is selected by the user.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER99.05.14.01 “”In the "Trigger" tab
of the "Binary Setting" section, the icons next to the combo box fit the format displayed inside the
field. Real Value can be viewed in "Signal View" by ticking the Show Actual
Value option and adding a point and performing the test. “”In the Check Test tab, by enabling the Show
Actual Value option after performing the test and clearing the results, the values in Vector View are
displayed correctly. “”The conditions
of "Pass" and "Fail" tests are corrected and specified. “”In the "Shot Test", "check test" and
"Synchronizer" tabs, the "Relative" option is removed. “”After performing "Shot Test" and saving the
file and its results, after reopening the
file, the column icon "Assessment" is changed from "Pass" and "Fail" to "Out of Range", which is
corrected. ”In the "Shot Test" tab, the size of the "Act" column is corrected and the content inside is
displayed correctly. ”In the "Shot
Test" tab, when a value in the "User Comment" column and "Enter" key was clicked, the software crashed
which is now fixed. “”In the "Check Test" tab, the "Linear" group box is removed. “”In "Synchronizer
Characteristic" when the "Show
All tAct Point" option is enabled, the software isn’t crashed. “”In the toolbar, an icon is designed for
"Synchronizer Characteristic" separately. This window can also be accessed from the "View" menu of the
"Synchronizer View" option.
“”In the "Shot Test" and "Check Test" tabs, by right-clicking on the table of these tabs and selecting
the "Recalculate Point" option, the software crashed which is now fixed. “”After performing the
"Synchronizer" test and saving it, there
is no problem opening this file and loading properly. “”Also, after testing and going to the "General
Test Object" window and returning to the test page, the software isn’t crashed. “”After performing the
"synchronizer" test, by going
to the "Shot Test" and "Check Test" tabs, the points tested in "Synchronizer" are also observed in these
tabs, which are corrected. As you can see, after the "Synchronizer" test, the points selected for the
test aren’t added to other tabs.
You can also make a report of your test results in this module.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER99.05.14.01 “”In "AMT
Transducer" after adding a point, the "Device Error" column is uneditable. “”After performing the test
in Signal View, for the binaries 9 and 10 waveforms weren’t displayed
which is fixed and also the results are recorded in the table. “”In the "Shot Test" tab, the "Apply to"
fields and "Wave Form" box cannot be edited.
RTDRTD99.05.14.01 “”In "RTD", the "Test Object" tab of the history section is
added to the report.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT99.05.14.01 “”In
report of Current Transformer, to better display the report, some left and right edges weren’t observed
which is now fixed.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.05.14.01 “”In Table View, by
right-clicking on each voltage and current groups, link magnitude and Link Angles options for voltage
and current are separated. For example, if you select link Magnitude on a voltage
group, you'll see that only voltages are linked together. It is also created for both current groups A
and B. These options are also created in Detail View. For example, if you enable two current groups and
link one of the groups, the
other group is not linked. “”The Link Angles Equal option works in such a way that all three phases are
linked for the same value. For example, if the first phase enters at 45 degrees, all three phases are 45
degrees. Also, the performance
of the Link Angles Balance option when a value for each phase is entered, the other two phases are
balanced by a 120-degree difference. For example, if you enter zero for the middle phase, there is 120
degrees difference from other phases
to this. “”For all Test View tabs in medium rooms such as Distance, Differential and Overcurrent, link
to Xrio option is created and if needed, you can use this in tests.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL99.05.27.01 “”In 99/5/14 version of
the software by loading the XRio file, the unit of each quantity was displayed incorrectly so that units
such as MVA or KV were available in the XRIO file yet were recorded
in the wrong software. “”To check, clicking on the "Import from list" icon in the "Load XRio Converter
and Rio file from list" page and a "XRio Converter" file related to the MiCOM P632 relay is loaded. “”By
going to the File menu and
clicking on Load Relay Setting and loading the Xrio Relay file and then opening the "Differential"
block, you can see that the display of the units is corrected.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METER AMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER_99.06.14.01 “”If
you open a saved file that has results, the Absolute Error and Device Error columns are updated and
visible. “”By opening “Report view” the Transducer characteristic is visible
in the report. “”By using the “Communication” option, you can send a Packet to any device using a LAN
cable, serial port or wifi. in the “Communication” page, you can add as many ethernet and serial modules
as you want. Packet is sent
separately by pressing the Send button in each module. You can use the Start Send option to send all
packets. If the field next to this option is on Each in Term, all packets are sent in series, and if it
is on All together, you can send
all packets at the same time by having the number of LAN and Serial ports. there would be More details
in the upcoming training videos.
VCCVCC99.08.13.01 “”After performing the test in VCC, the test result was not
added in Report View which is now fixed.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE99.08.13.01 “”In the new version, the company's Persian
name is removed from the main page of the software.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER99.08.13.01 “”In AMT Synchronizer,
section related to the post fault is corrected for all points, so that if there is a close command in
fault, the signal of system 2 is in post fault according to the signal
of system 1. Otherwise the signal of system 2 have the same prefault value. “”The AMT Synchronizer
characteristic was not displayed in the report which is now fixed.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.08.13.01 “”In AMT Overcurrent, the
design of magnetic lines of the Overcurrent Characteristic window is changed in the PickUp-DropOff test
for both Current and Angle modes. “”In AMT overcurrent by going to
General Test Object, the Mange/ Select Characteristic window by changing the available values for each
curves in the User Defined folder, the curved shape displayed was not updated, which is now fixed.
MEDIUM MODULESMEDIUM_MODULES99.08.13.01 “”In medium rooms such as AMT
Distance, after connecting to the device, the start icon is initially disabled and enabled by adding
points to the table. “”In previous versions, it took a few moments to
perform the test after hitting the start icon, while in the new version the test performs as soon as you
click on this icon. “”Fixing the problems of single test in shot test, check test, search test, etc.
tabs “”All features of Impedance
View, Differential Characteristic, etc. Like Show all tact point, show z act point, etc. are corrected.
“”Also, in this section, the Out of Range Area option is added to display the area outside the injection
range of the device. “”In
the Characteristic View window, Short Keys such as A to display Tact points, Z to display zone numbers
for points, R to display the row number of points, O to display the area outside the device range, and P
to display the actual value
of impedance points are created instantaneously. “”Right-click options such as changing the background
color of Characteristic View are enabled on the characteristics. “”In all medium rooms, Link to Xrio,
Remove Link, go to linked value
options are added by right-clicking on any field.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.08.13.01 “”By writing a comment in the
Table View window, this field could not be updated in the Detail View window, which is now corrected.
“”At the top of the Signal View window, the text box related to test
status is removed. “”In the Vector View window, after performing the test and selecting type from Normal
to Orange mode by moving Cursor, the values related to Harmonic 1 column were miscalculated. “”It is
also possible to zoom in on the
track bar section in the Signal View and Vector View windows, which are linked together. “”By changing
the state name and the time in the "Detail View" window, the related fields in the "Table View" window
are updated in small mode. “”There
are problems in changing state type and updating tables related to that state, now are fixed. For
example, by selecting State Type in Step Ramp mode and placing Set Mode on ZI Constant, related tables
to this mode are displayed, be have
after changing the State Type to Harmonic mode, the tables were not displayed. “”Trigger is linked in
the Detail View and Table View windows. “”By enabling the Data Table in the Signal View window, and
selecting cursors on any signal,
these values are displayed in the Report. “”In Signal View, by enabling the Data Table, scroll down is
removed and its size is automatically adjusted. “”In the Detail View window, by selecting Step Ramp and
placing Set Mode on Powers,
if the reactive power value changes in the Step Values table, in the Signal View window, after enabling
the reactive power waveform in Setting, this waveform is displayed correctly. “”In the General Test
Object page, Show/Hide option tick
is removed by default. “”In the bottom panel of the Characteristic View window, two Extended Zone
options are created in Impedance View to display extended zones and the Horizontal Axis is Relative
checkbox in Overcurrent Characteristic
to display the horizontal axis in terms of nominal current. Also in overcurrent characteristic, pan mode
and snap to grid options are created. “”In Step Ramp mode for Distance and Differential Set Modes,
changes points can be seen in these
two modes for all fault types. In the Characteristic View window, for distance and differential
characteristics, differential and impedance currents can be seen in different fault types. “”By changing
the characteristic type, its icon
also changes in the toolbar. “”In the Signal View window, lines can be bolded by clicking on the Digital
chart. “”In Tracking mode and in Impedance View, by enabling Bold selected row in tracking, the added
points in each row of this window
are displayed on the characteristic curve.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.08.15.01 “”In Signal View, you the line
bold by clicking on the digital chart “”In sequencer, the problem with the link magnitudes option in the
step ramp mode is fixed. “”the filter by sender unit did not work
the problem is no solved. “”by double-clicking on any the blocks in Link to XRio window the software
used to crash now if is fixed. “”After linking to XRio of a field, the color of the field changes in the
selected and deselected mode.
HOME PAGEHOME_PAGE99.08.15.01 “”In Setting window many changes are made in
the Available Devices. After clicking on start search, displaying the device information, by
right-clicking on the row and selecting the Set a Static IP Address in
Windows option, you can directly configure the IP of the laptop in two ways Manually and Automaticly.
“”Also in this tab are other ways to change the IP the device by selecting the "Set IP to Device" option
and connecting directly to the
device without entering the IP, in connection & firmware tab. “”the stop search option in available
devices tab has been added so that the user can stop Search. Interface Adaptor Network is also next to
this option.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.08.18.01 “”In the Overcurrent room,
by changing the value I nomsecondary, the Absolute value is changed by changing the I Pick-up column.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.08.18.01 “”If you are in Current State
mode, by clicking All State, optimize all mode is created in the Signal View window. “”If a window
closes, by clicking on its icon reopens it. “”If a module is open, without
any changes to the previous module, the message box that saves the closed module information is not
displayed. “”If you have selected the Overcurrent icon in Normal mode in the Impedance View window, by
changing it to "Transient" while
the icon of the overcurrent is disabled in this window, distance is displayed by default. “”In Transient
mode, the characteristic curve is displayed by selecting a differential comtrade file and clicking on
the Differential icon in the
Characteristic View window. “”By clicking the combination keys of each window, the related window opens,
while in previous versions, the software return to thirty seconds by pressing the combination keys.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER99.08.20.01 “”In Transformer in Vecor group,
Leakage Reactance and Winding Resistance tests, in single-phase mode, only one row is added each time
you click on Insert Rows. “”By closing the software from launcher windows
not only the home page, but also any page from any of the rooms, are closed even when a change is
clicked.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL99.08.20.01 “”Fixing the problem of
add to in stability test
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE99.08.20.01 “”In all windows containing Search
and Check tests, if you add a line and then you want to clear it using the Delete key, the points on the
curve on the Tolerance lines is not erased and only that point
is removed from the Test view point table.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.08.20.01 “”In Overcurrent, to test
PickUp-DropOff if the row is not added, by selecting “Add to” the same value is added to other fault
types, and after performing, saving and even opening that file, the results
are corrected in the created Fault type. “”In PickUp-DropOff, if a line is added and selected, in the
Detail section, there is no values for the Pickup Act and Drop off Act fields before testing. “”In all
Medium rooms, by selecting the
row that results are recorded and then using the Add to option, the added point in the selected fault
type is displayed as Not Tested.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.08.20.01 “”the signal view high light for
state 1 is gone when current state is clicked. Removing the view option from right-click of the z-graph
at the bottom of the cursors. “”Removing the optimize y option from
right-click of z-graph and digital charts in signal view page “”If Signal View is closed by adding or
subtracting states, the trackbar is refreshed in the Vector View. “”saving and loading the xrio file is
fixed.
VCCVCC99.08.24.01 “”In VCC, Copy and Paste options are added in right click.
Also, after adding a new item, the added xrio doesn’t disappear.
AMT VI STARTINGAMT_VI_STARTING99.08.24.01 “”The Voltage References
section is created in the Settings tab of VI Starting Room for each Fault type and correcting the report
of this case. “”If there is no search line, the ignore nominal Characteristics
section, Disables in Settings tab.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.08.24.01 “”The word Link in Extra Setting
tab has been corrected in Hardware Configuration window.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER99.08.24.01 “”In
Transducer by going to Test Object in meter mode, it can be observed that saturation is removed.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER99.08.24.01 “”The dimensions of the table in the
Winding Resistance Trans test are changed because when the report was taken in doc format, the
dimensions of the cells were also changed.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER99.08.25.01 “”In
Transducer, a new option called WH/pulse Detection has been added in the Test Hardware Config. The
function of this option is that voltage and current are injected before testing
and at least two pulses must be read in order to read the value of watt hour, the last pulse and the
average value. “”Inside the Transducer Properties window in tolerance section, default value of the
Relative field is 0.25%. By changing
the secondary and primary values, it does not affect the output values and only affects the input
values.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.08.25.01 “”In Sequencer, if you're in a
state other than State 1, highlight for Current State doesn't disappear. “”If Communication Mode is in
Integrated System mode, by double-clicking on a file when we are connected
to the device, we stay in device connection mode in the opened window.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER99.08.26.01
“”Symmetrical option was added in Transducer for negative power injection in meter test.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.08.26.01 “”In Medium, as in "AMT
Overcurrent", by clicking on Add to button, the fault type tick has been removed.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.08.26.01 “”Immediately after testing, the
start button is deactivated. “”In Hardware Configuration and in the Analog Output tab, if one of the
values of voltage or current is initially “Not Used” in their tables
then the Show Actual Value is ticked, after activating the “not Used”, voltage or current is the value
changes from False to True. “”Correct performance of Test Hardware Configuration in Transducer and
especially Sequencer “”If a file
has a result, by reopening it and applying changes to the device, you can see the changes made by
reopening the same file.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE99.09.02.01 “”Adding “Update conf. files” button
in “Load XRio and Rio file from list”: In this page, after once clicking on this button and
double-clicking on the "Distance" block in the "General Test Object" page
and going to the "Distance Protection Parameters" page, there is a list of types of relays in the "Copy
from" field for different Kl coefficients in all relays. “”In Distance, by going to the Settings tab and
selecting Constant test voltage
and ticking the Allow Reduction of VTest option, the V MaxL-L field is not activated and this mode is
activated only by selecting constant test current and ticking the Allow Reduction of VTest option. “”The
number in Max Point Number must
be between 4 and 20, and if an invalid number is written, a fault message appears. Now it may be set to
a number in RIO, but it is out of range, and this time the user faces a fault message. But if it is
allowed in the range and then the
number is invalidated by changing the value of the number to which it is linked, the test doesn’t run.
“”In all medium rooms, after adding a point in the table of points, you can move between cells of each
point with the tab key and go
to the next row by finishing the cells of a row and see the changes at the same time on the
characteristic curve in Characteristic View.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL99.09.02.01 “”Solving the problem of
loading xrio of GE relay
CIRCUIT BREAKERCBCIRCUIT_BREAKERCB99.09.02.01 “”In the Timing Test
key, activate the P.S. A-N field by selecting External in the Power Supply section. “”In CB and in the
Minimum Voltage test by selecting New Device, State Termination is placed
on Coil Current and by re-selecting AMT105, State Termination is placed on Contact. “”Actual values are
displayed in all equipment rooms as bold in Signal View. However, in tests where injection is performed
in three-phase mode, the actual
values are shown in circles.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT99.09.02.01
“”Fixing the problem of adding excitation test states in secondary burden test after clicking on Init
Test.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.09.02.01 “”Graphic change of track bar in
Signal view. “”I2/I1 value is false in Vector View table, also this value lacks units no volts, no amps,
no ohms and no volt-amps And on the other hand, sometimes the size
of this vector became too large and off the chart, which has also been corrected. “”If the vector color
changes in Vector View, by right-clicking and selecting Default Color, the changed color returns to the
default color. “”Solving the
problem in transient table: By loading a comtrade file, the channel name of this file would have crash
the table. “”In loading comtrade files, the fault of all signals are displayed. “”From now on, none of
binary outputs are enabled by
default.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER99.09.02.01 “”The
minimum pulse displayed on the characteristic changed from 10 pulses to 100 pulses. “”To test the meter
in Transducer, for example, if the number of pulses is 100, watt hour is
500 kW, the ratio of CT conversion 2000 to 1 and the ratio of PT conversion is 400 kV to 110 selected,
then adding the point to the table is added to the desired value table and is not the same as previous
versions of Out of Range. “”In
Transducer and in advanced view section, changes have been made to voltage values in low powers
injection. “”The minimizing and maximizing problem in Transducer, causing no display or delay in the
Characteristic View display, is fixed.
“”Moving points in Transducer based on Input Act and Output Act values “”In Meter for inject mode, the
test time is added to 110% of the time of a pulse inside the Time field. “”In Meter, the shape of the
characteristic curve has been
corrected. “”In Meter and in the table, the calculation results related to fault of the meter is added
and the relative and absolute columns are removed. “”Remove fault types from settings tab in AMT
Transducer & Meter.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER99.09.03.01 “”In
Transducer, by opening Test Object and changing output to, for example, Current, the value of Tr-Output
changes to amps in the Maximum value field, and by re-opening this window
and going to Transducer Properties the changes applied to this field are the same.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.09.03.01 “”Changing the color of the
entire tolerance area in Characteristic View.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.09.03.01 “”high light of signal view for
state 1 disappears when you click on Current State. “”Without opening Report View window, you can use
Export Report option in File menu.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER99.09.05.01 “”In Trans or any Room that defines an
operation for Signal View, by going to Hardware Configuration and changing this page, the software
doesn’t crash. “”In any of the trans tests which has a table such as
TTR, Magnetic Balance, Winding Resistance, Leakage Reactance, if you change values in the Test Object
tab, a message is displayed, which if the user clicks No, the values return to the original state.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT99.09.05.01 “”The
photos of wiring in Resistance test and Excitation test in CT.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER99.09.05.01 In
Transducer, Signal View is updated by changing the output function. “”In Transducer, if the values of
the “Maximum value” field in “Tr-Output” column change, values don’t change when
you exit this window and return to it again.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.09.05.01 “”In Transient, if there is a
voltage fault by disabling voltages in Hardware Configuration, the fault isn’t displayed. “”Correcting
binary threshold values of Input 9 and 10. “”In Test Object and in Device,
all link to XRio fields can be changed. “”Added three items IE1, IE11 and I sensitive to output target
column in Current Output Signal section in Hardware Configuration: so that if all phases of current
group A are active and IE1 is selected
for the first phase of current group B, in fact, the sum of all currents in group A are shown in this
phase.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE99.09.05.01 “”In all medium rooms except AMT
Overcurrent, you can display the characteristic curve in zoomed mode in the report.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.09.05.01 “”In Overcurrent, after
testing the DC Decay and Harmonic options are disabled.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER99.09.06.01 “”Adding the possibility to change the
field number Start Taps No. On the Test Object tab and seeing the changes when pressing the Insert Row
button.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER99.09.06.01 “”After changing the
Generator Model in the Type column of the Synchronizer test points table, all fields will be updated in
the Generator Model section.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.09.06.01 “”Added min and max values for
threshold as well as false and true reverse values for binary inputs 9 and 10. “”By switching from All
State to Current State, the total state signal selected in Signal View
is highlighted.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER99.09.08.01 “”If you change the voltage taps
column in Custom mode, a warning is displayed to the user.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.09.08.01 “”In general, if the frequency in
any of the available tables in Detail View is zero, the angle is also zero. “”If the Rate Value per
Second option in Step Ramp is selected, the values in step values table
are be in seconds and would return to their original state by changing State Type to Quick Values.
“”Adding reset Values option in Quick mode.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER99.09.10.01 “”In Synchronizer, by
changing Connected Voltage in Test Object, the names of the respective fields in the Shot Test and
Synchronizer tabs also change. These changes are also visible in Hardware
Configuration. “”Two binary outputs called Start and Stop are added to the Synchronizer tab, so that
start in states 1 and 2 and Stop in post fault are short circuits, respectively. “”Larger values of
∆V⁄∆t and ∆F⁄∆t in Synchronizer “”Larger
text boxes in the Test Object chart section in Synchronizer “”possibility to view the movement of
voltage vectors of system 2 in Vector View during testing in Synchronizer “”Chart Correction in
Synchronizer Characteristic: Correction of
Lines Drawn in Synchronizer Test “”Report fixes in Synchronizer “”By right-clicking on the table and
selecting Recalculate Point lines if changed, they will be recalculated and corrected. “”Added Snap Shot
option to report settings in
Synchronizer “”By default, the Show Row Number option is enabled in Synchronizer Characteristic. “”In
Synchronizer in the direction where the line rotates, Show Row is displayed on the other side of the
line. “”The fault time for Synchronizer
field value is set to 50 seconds by default in Settings.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE99.09.10.01 “”In Distance and in check test, if
two lines with zero and 90 degree angles are added, by enabling and disabling the Zoom During Test
option, the result of the test points are not erased.
VCCVCC99.09.12.01 “”Modified Stop Update/Export and Close Selected Node.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT99.09.12.01 “”Fix
software crashing problem after using ctrl+c combination keys in empty fields in all equipment rooms.
“”Added Excitation Test with DC in Report Setting. “”After Init Testing, the
latest Hardware Configuration changes are preserved. “”Modify export getting from report to doc format.
AMT DIFF HARMONICAMT_DIFF_HARMONIC99.09.12.01 “”By selecting the
three-phase fault in AMT Differential Harmonic, all three phases are injected and displayed in Signal
View.
MT DIFFERENTIALMT_DIFFERENTIAL99.09.12.01 “”In Stability, by entering
the current from Test Settings, magnetic cursor is moved in Differential Characteristic View. Also, if
you zoom out first and then click Optimize all, the cursor will be
placed precisely on the Y axis.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER99.09.12.01 “”In Synchronizer, the
information entered in the Connected Voltage field affects system 1 and system 2 angles and is visible
in Signal View. “”Transformer Group Phase Shift field calculations were
considered. In this field, a phase change if any is specified, resulting from an optional block or
coupling transformer. This value is given in degrees from 360 degrees to minus 360 degrees. “”After
recalculate in synchronizer test, you
can tap New and open a new synchronizer page.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.09.12.01 “”If Characteristic View
window is closed, by clear resulting, all Tnoms will switch to the original state.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.09.12.01 “”In Step Ramp and in the Start
Values table, the frequency is Link to Frequency, by changing the frequency in the Step Values table, as
well as by right-clicking and changing DC and Nominal Values, the
frequency column values stay linked. “”Optimize calculations in Step Ramp if the Con. in Ferq Step
option is ticked. “”By selecting Overcurrent in Impedance View by clicking on the no trip area, magnetic
cursor will go to the top of the
characteristic view and will not fade. “”By changing the current value in the Analog Output Channels
section, magnetic cursor is moved on the current axis.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT99.09.25.01 “”In
the CT saturation test after passing the test by tapping Add to Report and saving the file and
re-opening the file, the pass test result will be shown and manual pass will not be
displayed.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.09.25.01 “”In PickUP-DropOff and in
Angle mode, if a point in the directional plan becomes Out of Range, points are also specified in the
test table. In this case, the added point in Medium Detail View is shown
in pink. “”By changing the Target Type column in the PickUP-DropOff test points table, from Current to
Angle mode and vice versa, available fields in the Test Point section will be updated. “”By holding the
ctrl button and right-clicking
the curve, points can be added to the test table in Medium Detail View. “”By erasing the characteristic
curved data, all options are disabled in the Overcurrent Protection Parameters. “”In the Settings tab
and in Add Signal for harmonic
current, the new unit % Ifault is used instead of the In unit, which collects a percentage of the fault
current with the main current. “”In angular PickUp-DropOff, the pickup start and Pickup End fields
values are adjusted from no trip
to tripping area, respectively. “”In overcurrent and in the Test Object window, the same names cannot be
selected for stages. By doing it, a fault message is displayed and the stages return to original state.
“”in the "Sequence Test Point
to" page, two new options called Advance and Simple 2x, 3x, 4x are added. In Advance mode, the previous
method is applied, but in Simple mode 2x, 3x, 4x you can create twice, triple or four times the
regulatory current of each fault type.
The same fault type is displayed according to the elements defined in the Test Object. For example, by
selecting an element in Zero Sequence, two-point faults are not shown in Sequence Test Point to. It has
also been added for directional.
In this case,the x°=End Angle-Start Angle/2 relationship is used to calculate the double, triple and
quadruer angles. “”Two options show test information and Show Time Information have been added in the
right click of Medium Detail View.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER99.09.25.01 “”If
Number of phases is selected single-phases, the default values for voltage and current are considered by
clicking advance view and selecting L1 L2 L3.
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER99.09.25.01 “”In Synchronizer, the
delay after trigger field value in the Settings tab is linked to the CB close time field value in the
CBConfiguration block. “”In synchronizer test, by changing values from
secondary to primary, in the Test View window table, the deltaV/deltaT column ,The volt unit per second
is converted to kilovolt per second.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.09.25.01 “”In the Hardware Configuration
page in the Binary/ Analog Input tab, of the description column is deleted by changing the Show Result
column from True to False. “”Step up and Down keys function in Quick
mode have been corrected when Set Mode is placed on Overcurrent or Differential mode. “”In Quick mode,
magnetic cursor is moved by clicking step up or step down in Characteristic View. “”Adding the Link
Magnitudes option to the available
options in the right click of the Magnitude column in Vector View. “”For rotation and movement in
phases, L1 L2 L3L3 L1 L2 option is added to the right clicks of Phase and Magnitude columns. This option
is also enabled when all voltage
and current outputs are active and of AC kind. “”By clicking on the Link Angles option Equals in the
Phase column, all phases will be the same and by clicking on link angles Balance, this option will be
disabled. “”If you have entered
the frequency at zero, clicking the Phase column will not display some options in Vector View and Table
View. Also, if the signal is DC, in Detail View by right-clicking on the Phase column, there are only
Link to XRio, Remove Link and
Go to Linked Value options. “”Added Go to Linked Value option in Vector View. “”Fix Show/Hide option in
Vector View. “”By tapping Copy to Clipboard, for example, in the Vector View window of AMT Differential
room, values are added to the
table using the Paste from Vector View Clipboard option in right-clicking the Table View in AMT
Sequencer. “”In Measurment View in all tabs, right click options are enabled. For each tab, the
Show/Hide option has been created exclusively.
“”When Set Mode is in Power mode, it is activated for the parameters of active power, reactive power and
The apparent power of link to magnitude and Equal to Magnitude options is enabled.. “”In Table View,
state can be removed by right-clicking
on each state, using the Delete option. Clicking on this option will erase the same state and by
clicking Marked State and Unmarked State, the selected or unselected states will be deleted. “”In Table
View, by selecting the Append option
on any state you are, that state will be added to the end of the state. There is another option called
Default State, which creates the last state with default values by selecting it. Also the icon of this
option has been added to the
toolbar. “”Default State has been added to the Insert Before and Insert After options available in
right-clicking states. “”If data table is enabled in Signal View, the unselected signal value will be
displayed by selecting one of the
signal drop-down field options not ticked in Settings by moving cursor or writing time in the table.
“”If State Type is on Harmonic mode, by enabling and disabling current or voltage groups, the zero value
for them #1 Free-Order Harmonic
tables and #2 Harmonic Free-Order in the table is considered by default. “”In Measurement View, Go to
Linked Value, Remove Linked and Linked to Xrio options have been removed from the right click of cells
that only take text. Also, Go
to Linked Value option has been added to the right click of other cells. In addition, right-clicks of
columns such as T Act., T Dev. and Assessment, which are valued after testing, have been disabled. “”The
Rate Frequency option is created
in Step Ramp mode by enabling Enable Reset option. This option is designed for ROCOF. For example, if
the frequency increases from 10 Hz to a nominal frequency with 0.1 Hz stairs, the signal shape changes
according to what you see in Signal
View. “”For some Set Modes such as Power or ZI Constant the frequency column has been disabled.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER99.09.27.01 “”Linking
values inside the test table with Available Values in Advance View including Test Phase with Test Phase
and Generator Setting sections in Advance View. In single-phase mode
and when meter functions are used, by adding multiple points in different phases and selecting each row,
the values are displayed in the Generator Settings section. “”After selecting Symmetrical inTransducer
Properties, you can add points
to the test table in the negative part of the curve. “”In Maximum value fields for values less than one,
the curve is displayed in Transducer Properties. All Absolute, Relative and Cycle Time units have been
corrected in watt hour and
var hour.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE99.09.27.01 “”In Search Test, if you have a
search line with the results, by dragging the new search line, a value will not be displayed in the
Reach column for this line, and the size of this column will be adjusted
according to the information written in it, and the added line can be removed by right-clicking on the
row.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.09.27.01 “”In Directional and to
calculate MTA, the MTA option is created in overcurren Protection Parameters. First, the user in the MTA
selects the related formula to the relay, then enters the RCA value
in the side field. After entering this information, other Trip Sector Definition fields will be
automatically completed. “”after right-clicking the PickUp-DropOff in PickUp-DropOff and selecting
another element, the PickUp-DropOff interval
changes, the dashed line, in the characteristic view is also moved and multiplied by the coefficient.
“”In the Overcurrent Characteristic settings, by enabling Show Curve Information, the attribute curve
information is displayed, and even
in directional mode, information about angles is shown in the chart. “”In Sequence Test Point to, you
can switch between fields and make changes by pressing the Tab key, and it is also possible for AMT
Distance, AMT Differential and other
parts.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.09.27.01 “”In Insert Z Shot, the current
value of the I test is based on the nominal current. If you change this value, in Table View and Detail
View, these values will be changed equally. “”All times sent by the
device are correct multiples of 400 microseconds in 1 millisecond. If the user enters a time of 1
millisecond, this number is divided into 400 and becomes the nearest number,2 milliseconds. “”If State
Type is on Tracking mode, you'll see
the correct show of binary outputs signal by zero and one binary outputs because the start time is set
to 2 milliseconds by default. “”By right-clicking on the Signal column in Vector View, two options copy
to Clipboard and Show/Hide are
displayed. “”All colors changed, especially in cells such as Table View, Detail View and Vector View.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.10.08.01 “”Added the MTA formula in
the Element section of the Report View window. “”Correcting ”Directional plan“ in “Medium detail view“
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.10.08.01 “”After selecting a signal in
“Show Signals” and ticking the related tick in “Settings”, chart will be displayed in Signal View. “”If
the signal is DC, after linking the value of the phase column of the
same signal with the parameter in XRio after tapping the Balance Angle in the other signal phase column,
the value of the DC signal phase column does not change. “”In all rooms, this window closes by pressing
the Esc key in the General
Test Object screen. “”Except AMT sequencer , In any other room, by pressing the combination keys
Ctrl+Shift+t, the related block for the same room opens on the General Test Object page. For example, if
you are in AMT Synchronizer, after
simultaneously tapping these keys, the Synchronizing Parameters window opens. Also, in all rooms, the
Device Settings window opens by tapping Ctrl+Shift+d.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER99.10.08.02 “”If any tick is removed from the
"Plot" tab, “Vector Group, Turns Ratio, No Load“ will not be displayed in the "Report View". “”For the
"Magnetic Balance" test of the transformer, its circuit is displayed
in all switching groups to which this test can be applied, and a message field is displayed for the
switching groups that this test is not applicable.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.10.08.02 “”In PickUp-DropOff, the
minimum value of PickUp Start, PickUp End and DropOff End fields is set at 1 mA. “”"Sensitive as a
separate fault" option is added to "Overcurrent Protection Parameters". Activating
this option adds a new element, namely "Sensitive", to the "Selected element type" field. It does not
affect other elements and acts independently. In addition, the current IL1 1 is activated and evaluated
via binary inputs 1 and 2.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT99.10.21.01 “”The
standard is added to the report by selecting the "IEC 61869-2" standard and clicking the "Add to Report"
button. “”A "Description" column is added to the report after enabling the
Ratio Table option and clicking the "Add to Report". “”After checking the "Ratio Table" option, if the
voltage exceeds 180 mV the value of the voltage is measured from binary input 1, and if it is less than
180mV, the value of the voltage
is measured from binary input 10.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.10.21.01 “”New wiring have been added in
the “Hardware Configuration“ and in the “Analog out“ tab. This way, if one of the main outputs is out of
order, the same voltage and current can be supplied from other channels
to perform the wirings. For example, there are three models of wirings an shown 1 * 150, 120VA @
800mArms, while previously only the output of 1 voltage group A was available for the user. However, if
for any reason this output is out
of order, outputs 2 and 3 of voltage group A can be used.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
CVTCAPACITOR_VOLTAGE_TRANSFORMER_CVT99.10.22.01 “”For the "Ratio" test, any value can be entered in the
"V Test" field; after right-clicking and selecting "Apply Test", the same value is displayed in the
corresponding
column in the table.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTCURRENT_TRANSFORMER_CT99.10.22.01 “”After
testing and pressing the „Clear Test“ button, if the results have not been added to the report, a
warning message will be displayed in the instrument module that no report has
been added since the last test. In the previous versions there were no such warnings. “”by changing
„Voltage Measurement Mode“ a message appears for the user, showing changes in wiring.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE99.10.22.01 “”After activating "Out of Range"
option the software speed is increased. Also, the software speed decreases after zooming on
specifications.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.10.22.01 “”In "Hardware Configuration" and
in "Binary / Analog Input" there is a section called "Virtual Binary Input" with three options "VBin1",
"VBin2" and "VBin3", and a section called "Virtual Binary Output"
with three options "VBout1", "VBout2" and "VBout3". After activating each of the relevant options in the
columns "Binary-Input Target", "Binary-Input Label", "Binary-Output Target" and "Binary-Output Label",
some options are added. For
example, after checking the option "VBin1", the options "VBin1-1" to "VBin1-32" appear in the columns.
These two parts are used in "GOOSE".
AMT SYNCHRONIZERAMT_SYNCHRONIZER99.10.22.02 “”After adding test
points to the given curve and by going to the "General Test Object" window, the values of all test
points will not be zero upon closing.
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL99.10.22.02 “”adding "Grabber" to
draw differential curves according to the picture.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.10.22.02 “”In "PickUp-Drop Off" tab,
changing the "Target Type" from "Current" to "Angle" deactivates the column value "Reset Ratio" in the
"Angle" mode.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.10.24.01 “”If you open a saved file
and the settings are on current, the settings will be on current by going to the PickUp-DropOff tab.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.10.27.01 “”By selecting “Select File to
Merge” you can merge two files of this room. After selecting the desired file and states, in the event
of deviations in “Hardware Configuration”, the user is asked for each
added states whether or not to apply the changes in Hardware configuration to the added states?! If the
user clicks “yes”, a state will be added to the file due to the existing changes in Hardware
Configuration. Clicking “No” does not
add a state.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE99.10.27.02 “”In “Characteristic View” and in
“Check Test” and “Search Test” tabs, Single Shot cannot be run with “Shift” key and the left mouse
button.
AMT DISTANCEAMT_DISTANCE99.10.30.01 “”In the ZT Diagram, the nominal
time of the points on the curve is displayed by pressing the “t” key.
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER99.11.01.01 “”In “Leakage Reactance” tab, the
voltage value display is changed and the "Base Voltage" and "Base Power" columns are added to the report
TRANSFORMERTRANSFORMER99.11.07.01 “”In the "Continuity Tap Changer" test
two voltage signals are added, the upper diagram shows the instantaneous value and the lower one the RMS
value. Two fields are also added to “State Settings” section,
"Dev. Show" and "Dev. Assessment". The "Dev. Show" is intended to show the percentage of signals error
and the value of this field cannot be more than "Dev. Assessment".
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.11.08.01 “”If you select all 6 current
outputs from the "Hardware Configuration", the "Phase" and "Frequency" columns are displayed in the
"Detail View" if "Set Mode" is "Overcurrent: ITest".
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.11.09.01 “”Setting Threshold value after
selecting the "Set all binary like this" option in the "Binary / Analog Input" tab. “”After selecting
"Apply VDC" in "Hardware Configuration" and performing the test, the
auxiliary DC AUX DC switches off when the test is finished.
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TESTUNDER_OVER_VOLTAGE_TEST99.11.09.02 “”In
this module, the number of states has been increased from 2 to 20. You can add up to 20 states by
selecting “Add”.
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.11.09.02 “”by clicking on the "Distance"
block in the "Test Object, you will go to “Distance Protection Parameters” page. There you can see a
picture that shows the connection of the current and voltage transformer
in "CT Start Point" and "PT Connection"
HARDWAREHARDWARE99.11.12.01 “”Correcting hardware code for binary input 9.
This binary input is used in ratio conversion test with current.
RESISTANCERESISTANCE99.11.12.01 “”Reform of the spelling of some fields
in “Resistance” room.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METERAMT_TRANSDUCER_&_METER99.11.12.01
“”correcting the area “Out of Range”
AMT DIFFERENTIALAMT_DIFFERENTIAL99.11.12.01 “”correcting report for
Stability test: the correct display of the test points in the report and fixing the size mismatch error
after points are added to the test table.
AMT OVERCURRENTAMT_OVERCURRENT99.11.12.01 “”If you select “from
protected object” in CT Starpoint connection, there will be correction in Pick-Up – Drop-Off test.
VCCVCC99.11.13.01 “”Increase the clear result speed in the VCC module
AMT SEQUENCERAMT_SEQUENCER99.11.13.01 “”If only one output of voltage
group A is active and the "Output Target" and "Output Label" of the other output are used, the current
of voltage group A is the same. If only the second output of voltage
group A is active and you select "VL1-E" for "Output Target" and "Output Label", the actual current of
voltage group A in microamps, will be the same as if only output 1 of the voltage group A is active.
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2024-02-20 24.02.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2024.02.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2024.02.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Ibias formula for the P3T32 relay has been added.
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2024-02-20 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2024.02.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2024.02.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the PickUp test of the differential, the possibility
of specifying the nominal value of the pickup by the user was added. If the test was based on the IBias
current, this value should be determined by the software. @DateVersion@2024-02-20
@Namefilestart@23.08.25.01@NamefileEnd@
@linkHrefStert@https://vebko.org/Downloads/Instructions/WhatsNew/Test-AMPro%2024.02.20.01/001_Test-AMPro%2024.02.19.01_001_mu.mp4@linkHrefEnd@
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After loading the "Rio" file, the two fields' values
of the "Diff Time Setting" section were loaded incorrectly. This bug has been fixed in the new version.
@DateVersion@2023-06-26 @Namefilestart@23.06.26.01@NamefileEnd@
@linkHrefStert@https://vebko.org/Downloads/Instructions/WhatsNew/Test-AMPro%2023.06.26.01/001_Test-AMPro%2023.06.26.01_001_mu.mp4@linkHrefEnd@
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Adding some items to the "Stability" tab and changing
the maximum disturbance in the"Setting" did not update the time associated with the disturbance status.
This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-05-07 22.05.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Due to the chosen formula and coefficient in "Ibias Calculation", the dashed error curve was not
shifted correctly according to the corresponding differential curve. This problem has been fixed. AMT
DIFFERENTIAL 2022-04-21 22.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After opening the old files, the "Colour" and "Show arrow" columns could be changed for "IDiff"
and "IBias" lines. This error has been fixed. “” After writing the name "746" in the "Name" field and
selecting the "Busbar" option, a field named "Angle" is added to the "Test View" window. “” After adding
the value in the" %" field on
the "Search Test" tab, the software crashed. This error has been fixed in the new version. AMT
DIFFERENTIAL 2022-04-19 22.04.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once "Toward Line" on the primary side of the direction were chosen, the calculations would not have
been done correctly which is now resolved. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-04-08 22.04.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If a transformer has three windings and the "Reference Winding" is on "Primary", "Secondary" or
"Tertiary"by changing the "Supply Direction", the calculations related to all fault types are calculated
correctly. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-04-07
22.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Calculations related to I bias for Protecta relay has been added. AMT DIFFERENTIAL
2022-03-26 22.03.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Calculations related to all fault type have been improved once you
choose the "Busbar" in the "Protected Object". AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems
related to "PickUp-DropOff" test regarding some lines in the I bias test mode have been fixed. “”“
"Supply Direction" in "Setting" is changed based on "Reference Winding" and a message is displayed for
the user to solve the differential
function test problems in "Ge" relay. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Whether the
Based on Ibias option is enabled or disabled, it has no effect on the PickUp-DropOff test. Enabling this
option, allows you to inject some current in tests of shot, check and search in the prefault. AMT
DIFFERENTIAL 2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”During the test, in PickUp-DropOff, you can see the movement of the points on the characteristic
and the pass or fail status of the points. Also, after completing the test, by setting the Vector View
to Orange or Blue and moving the cursor, you can see the movement of the points on the Differential
Characteristic. “”In PickUp-DropOff,
you can set the test so that the pickup is done, but the drop off isn’t. You can also select different
modes from the Target Type field. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-01-04 22.01.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Problems in PickUp-DropOff calculations and display of indicators have been fixed. “”Once selecting
Orange in Vector View in PickUp-DropOff and moving the cursor in this window or in Signal View, you can
see the values of differential
and bias currents for all points of the selected line in Differential Characteristic. AMT DIFFERENTIAL
2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the PickUp-DropOff section, in some fault types, there were problems in displaying the result which
is now fixed in the new version. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you enable all binary inputs and outputs, you can export "Export Comtrade" from your file. “”
Select either "Motor" or "Generator" mode in the "Protected Object", and when you put in a value under
Primary, the Secondary will automatically
be adjusted accordingly. Additionally, this version of the program has addressed an issue where "I diff"
and "I bias" streams weren't calculated correctly. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-10-24 21.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Problems with the PickUp-DroppOff tab are now fixed. For example, in the past, after loading the
differential file, currents were displayed in mA, which should have been expend as in be in. Another
problem is the displacement of Idiff
and Ibias columns. Also, Idiff isn’t calculated correctly. “”In Report Setting, the Stability Test table
is ticked by default. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If there was a direction on the third coil in the Supply Direction section, by changing the number of
trans coils from 3 to 2, the software would have crashed, which is now fixed. AMT DIFFERENTIAL
2021-09-23 21.09.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”There were problems with adding a few charts to the differential characteristic that are now fixed in
the new version. For example, if you changed the chart line type this way, the software used to crashed.
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-09-17
21.09.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From now on it is possible to add multiple charts to the differential characteristic.
To do this, you must first create a differential block in RIO as many as you want. To do this copy the
main block and paste it to the desired number in RIO. Drag the charts for the new blocks. Consider one
of the blocks as the main block
using set as Active Function option. To see the other charts in Differential Characteristic, select show
in Characteristic option by right-clicking on the blocks. You can change the color of the charts in the
line Item Setting window as
you wish. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the wiring is on the secondary side of
z, the currents are calculated correctly. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-07-25 21.07.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To see the
PickUp-DropOff and Stability tests report, simply by right-clicking on Report View and select the Report
Setting option in the tree chart, check the PickUp-DropOff Test and Stability Test options. AMT
DIFFERENTIAL 2021-07-23 21.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Draw Custom Characteristic, the chart gradient for the SEPAM S.80 87T relay is now corrected
in single-phase mode. Differential characteristics of some relays are located in this section. AMT
DIFFERENTIAL 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Differential Protection Parameters page, help images are added when the Protected Object field
is on Motor or Busbar. “”PickUp-DropOff test is enabled for differential protection in AMT Differential.
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-03-07
21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The guiding images for selecting primary, secondary and tertiary CT's are placed
in the Differential Protection Propertise page. Images are also placed in Overcurrent Protection
Propertise and Transducer Propertise to select the direction of PT's and CT's. “”A new option is added
to the Settings tab that if this option
is enabled on any of the Relay Test rooms, the test is stopped at any time if a test failed and a
message is displayed to the user. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2020-08-17 99.05.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In 99/5/14 version of the software by loading the XRio file, the unit of each quantity was displayed
incorrectly so that units such as MVA or KV were available in the XRIO file yet were recorded in the
wrong software. “”To check, clicking
on the "Import from list" icon in the "Load XRio Converter and Rio file from list" page and a "XRio
Converter" file related to the MiCOM P632 relay is loaded. “”By going to the File menu and clicking on
Load Relay Setting and loading the
Xrio Relay file and then opening the "Differential" block, you can see that the display of the units is
corrected. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2020-11-10 99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Fixing the problem of add to in stability test AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Solving
the problem of loading xrio of GE relay MT DIFFERENTIAL 2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Stability,
by entering the current from Test Settings, magnetic cursor is moved in Differential Characteristic
View. Also, if you zoom out first and then click Optimize all, the cursor will be placed precisely on
the Y axis. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-01-11
99.10.22.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”adding "Grabber" to draw differential curves according to the picture. AMT DIFFERENTIAL
2021-01-31 99.11.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”correcting report for Stability test: the correct display of the test
points in the report and fixing the size mismatch error after points are added to the test table.
AMT SEQUENCER 2024-02-20 24.02.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2024.02.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2024.02.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After running a test, the signal was displayed throughout
the entire time in the “Signal View” despite the binary input and the applied condition for test
termination. AMT SEQUENCER 2024-02-20 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2024.02.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2024.02.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The points are not displayed in the differential characteristic when the “State Type” is set to
“Tracking”. @DateVersion@2024-02-20 @Namefilestart@23.08.25.01@NamefileEnd@
@linkHrefStert@https://vebko.org/Downloads/Instructions/WhatsNew/Test-AMPro%2024.02.20.01/001_Test-AMPro%2024.02.19.01_001_mu.mp4@linkHrefEnd@
“” In Device Settings, after changing the frequency in f nom, the value of time in Period Time did not
change. This issue has been resolved in the upcoming version. AMT SEQUENCER 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting “L1L2” in the “Insert Z Shot,” the phase value is set to 30, -150, and 90, respectively,
in the pre-fault state. @DateVersion@2023-06-26 @Namefilestart@23.06.26.01@NamefileEnd@
@linkHrefStert@https://vebko.org/Downloads/Instructions/WhatsNew/Test-AMPro%2023.06.26.01/001_Test-AMPro%2023.06.26.01_001_mu.mp4@linkHrefEnd@
“”The software crashed after selecting one of these fault types L1, L2, or L3 and clicking on the
“Insert After” option. “”Henceforth, the “Tracking Assessment” section is added to the “Report View” and
you can activate or deactivate it
on the “Report Setting.” “”The problem of not displaying of the “Harmonic Setting” section in the
“Signal View” is solved. “”In the previous versions, if the “State Type” was set to the “Continuous
Ramp,” by changing the curve on the “Characteristic
View” and selecting the overcurrent characteristic, the “Set Mode” option would alter. “”By selecting
the “Value” in the “Harmonic Setting” and moving the cursor, the related graph was not displayed
correctly. “”In “Transient”, the displaying
of trajectory with the true RMS values is added. “”In the Hardware Config, another option called “Yes
Abs” has been added to the “Show Result column.” By selecting this option, the positive or negative sign
of the value written in the
Threshold column is not important. For example, if you set the “Threshold” to 50 volts, any voltage that
is greater than positive 50 volts or less than negative 50 volts will be considered as binary 1. “”You
can switch the wiring type
based on the tester device. By selecting an option from the "Hardware Configuration" window, the voltage
and current group wirings will update accordingly. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-10-09 22.10.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problems in "Signal View" related to not displaying the graph calculate in RMS mode and also not
displaying binary signals in "Select Graph for Actual Binary" mode in a graph have been resolved. AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-09-14 22.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After changing the "Type" to "Harmonic", the relevant tables were not updated in the "Detail
View", which has been fixed in the upcoming version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-09-01 22.09.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”
The fundamental frequency in "Harmonic" has changed. By selecting "Orders", the maximum frequency value
has increased to 2500 Hz. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The distance between the 6 endpoints and the trajectory line was removed in this version. Also, by
changing the value of "IE", the existing problems with drawing these points and said line have been
fixed. As of this version, the first
harmonic is used to draw lines and end points “” New options to show/hide zones have been added in the
"Characteristic View". “” To calculate the RMS of currents and voltages, a field called "Calculate RMS"
has been created. This field
contains the options "None", "FCW" and "HCW". If you open the old file in this version and the option
"RMS" was activated, this field is set to the option "FCW", otherwise to the option "None". AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The calculations related to RMS in the Harmonic Order table have been changed. “” A new option called
"Disable Actual" has been added. This option allows you to show or not show the voltage and current
outputs in the "Signal View".
AMT SEQUENCER 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you set "Type" to "Orange", the status of the states
in the diagram above was chaotic. This bug has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-05-30
22.05.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Transient", a new option called "IE" has been added which is a combination of three currents used
in functions to the earth coefficient. By selecting "none", the IE flow is calculated from the sum of
IL1+IL2+IL3 and is used in functions.
However, once other currents are selected it will be used as an IE stream. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-05-24
22.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When "Overcurrent" option in "Set Mode" is selected then changed to one of the Distance options, the
software crashed. This problem has been solved in the new version. “” A new option called "Advance View"
has been added in "Detail
View". Enabling this option provides more settings of the selected State Type. “” If the State Type is
on "Quick", activating the "Advanced View" option, "Quick Setting" was not displayed; however, it has
been fixed in the upcoming version.
“” If the "State Type" was on "Step Ramp", the "Ramp Description Errors" section and the "Con.In Freq
Step" option were not displayed. These problems have been fixed in the new version. “” The inconsistency
between "Table View" and "Detail
View" seen after naming the last State is now fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-05-08 22.05.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”
There were problems in the binary outputs which are fixed in this version. For example, if “Bin Out” 2
was selected, the device did not function and a graph was not even seen in the “Signal View”. AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-04-26 22.04.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once the file containing a test with two states, “Pickup” and “Drop-off” was opened and applied
again, the amount of drop-off errors in “Measurement View” would display the wrong “Assessment” column.
This value was not displayed correctly
in the state of drop in “Table View”, yet this has been fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-24 22.04.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If there are two states where one of the states is "Continuous Ramp", where the first state has an
offset and the second state is with or without offset, an error occurred when activating the option
"Continue last state amplitude",
which has now been fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-21 22.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After opening the old files
containing "Time Assessment", due to the addition of "t_start" and "t_end" values, the values of this
section were not loaded correctly, which has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-19
22.04.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If there is an active binary input before testing, the "Error Overvoltage of Binary" is by default
and you cannot enable it during testing. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you have selected a number of signals to display in "Show Signals", these signals they would be
disabled by opening and closing "Hardware Configuration". This bug has been fixed in the new version.
AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-11 22.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” By putting values in "Primary Values" mode and clicking the "Export Comtrade", the information
is displayed correctly. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-11 22.04.10.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.10.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.10.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If the "Disable Get Actual"
option was enabled in one of the states and disabled in the other by moving the cursor in the "Signal
View", the RMS value in the Data Table would be displayed equal to "na". This bug has been fixed in the
new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-04
22.04.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When "Save Last Actual Data" was enabled, the RMS value was zero in some places.
This item has been modified in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-04 22.04.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In all
Rooms, after running the test, when "Actual" is active, its time is inserted at the bottom of the
screen, inside the parentheses. “” From now on, "Live Scroll" and "Live Scroll Actual" options cannot be
active at the same time. You can
also use "Live Scroll Actual" option for binaries. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-03-29 22.03.29.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.29.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.29.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A
new column called "Selectivity" has been added. If the measured voltage value is not clear and, for
example, it is higher than the selected mode, after the specified time in this, it changes to the next
mode so that the correct value of
the read voltage is displayed in "Signal view". “” If your micro device is Vivado7020, you can display
the phase and binary inputs frequency for long time in "Signal View". AMT SEQUENCER 2022-03-26
22.03.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The "Long Time Record" option has made it possible for the user to view values in "Signal View" for a
longer period. The minimum value you can consider for the "Sample Time" field is 100 milliseconds. AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems related to copying/pasting a line in "Ramp Assessment" have been fixed. AMT SEQUENCER
2022-02-09 22.02.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Calculations related to the Zero sequence illusion is now fixed in
the Symmetrical Component. “”By default, after clicking on Insert Z Shot, the voltage angles in the
three states prefault, fault, post fault are zero, -120 and 120 degrees, respectively. The current
angles in the fault state L1-L2-L3,
100% are calculated by working out the difference between the voltage angle and the line angle. AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Sequences related to group B flow were missing in the Calculations section and Show Signals section
which are added to the new version. It was also possible to assign the signals selected in the Show
Signals section to cursors in the
Data Table. For example, if you enable signals zero sequence I2, I0 negative sequence in the Show
Signals section, their value are shown correctly. “”From now on, by clicking on Insert Z shot, the
voltage angles in all three states are
equal to zero, -120 and 120. “”After selecting Stable Power Swing, you can add a simultaneous error with
stable power swing. “”In the System Frequency field, you can enter the desired frequency value in all
test cases. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-01-18
22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Table View, when the tables are reduced, you can change the time of each state
and the status of binary outputs and view them simultaneously in Detail View. “”The quality of the
images in the reports have been improved so that users do not have the problems in zooming and printing
as in the past. The problems that
existed in the display of Signal View, Vector View, Characteristic View and ZT Diagram in the reports
are now fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By default, Next Full and Start Time options are disabled before selecting the On GPS. AMT SEQUENCER
2022-01-04 22.01.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From now on, you can look for the xrio or rio file name in capital letters in the Search box of the
Load XRio and Rio file. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you activated the Statistical Output mode, after stopping the test and clearing the result, the
software crashed. This problem is fixed in the new version. “”In Detail View, sometimes in the Binary
Inputs section, the labels and values
for each binary were wrong. This bug has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-12-19
21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”It is possible to display and read the frequency in the range of 25 to 250 Hz by Binary Inputs. “”If
you set the signal frequency below 25 Hz in harmonic mode, the software would crash by selecting Orders
in Harmonic Type; this has been
fixed in the new version. “”Binary inputs graph in Signal view was not displayed correctly during the
test, this problem has been fixed in the new version. “”Differential and Overcurrent characteristics
were not displayed in the report
section which has been corrected. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-12-07 21.12.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”All power parameters
measured with Binary Inputs are displayed in Signal View. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the items related to the Step Values table are entered in decimal and in milliamperes, because the
accuracy of the numbers entered in this table is one milliampere, the software will round up those
numbers. “”Saving and retrieving
some files would cause an error exception, which has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-11-30 21.11.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”New math functions have been added to the Calculated Assessment. “”By opening saved files with Ramp
Assessment, the Act column is displayed correctly. “”New fields have been created in Calculations. In
previous versions, these fields
were located in the Setting tab of the Signal View window. AMT SEQUENCER 21.11.22.01 21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Once you enabled the Static Output and run the test, by stopping the test even by deleting the results
in Signal View, the test time were displayed as 4000 seconds. This case has been resolved. “”If the
result of multiplying the Order
column in the Frequency column is more than 2 kHz, the value of the Phase and Magnitude columns will be
zero for all current outputs. “”If you enable Frequency in Signal view, In the Step Ramp mode, and set
the Step Ramp Display to Rate
d / dt, by changing the Step Value, the signal was not displayed correctly, which is now resolved. AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-11-14 21.11.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Simulation", the Fault tab is added to create a power fluctuation error in the corresponding test
case. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” This version has resolved the issues with bugs in the static output icon. “” The "Level Assessment"
evaluation has been adjusted so that if the Tolerance column is entered with 100 milliseconds and 20
milliseconds for states 2 and 3,
respectively, and 1 and 0 for states 2 and 3 in the "Start" column, the evaluation disregards the final
100 milliseconds of state 1 and the initial 100 milliseconds of state 2, as well as the initial 20
milliseconds of state 3 and the
last 20 milliseconds of state 2. After this, the evaluation is completed based on the values entered. “”
Previously, when edits were made to the "Hardware Configuration" binaries, the numbers C1, C2, etc.
would not appear correctly in
the Comment and "Trigger Condition" columns of the "Table View" page. This issue has been resolved in
this version. “” If you enable any binary in "Hardware Configuration", the column containing the number
of states created appear in "Level
Assessment". “” In previous versions, the "Level Assessment" would display the assessment result before
running a test with changes to parameters, like changing the range value. This issue has been corrected
in this version. “” A new simulation
test case involving three parallel lines has been added. “” After enabling "Show Actual Type" for
binaries 9 and 10, the "Binary Analog Transformer" is updated. “” After changing the name of the
operation, the name of this signal is updated
in the "Setting" of the "Signal View" window. “” If you had saved a file in the Stable version while the
"Signal View" window was open, when you tried to open the same file on the Test version, the signal
wouldn't show up in the "Signal
View" window. However, this bug has been fixed in this new version. “” Once the file with THD has been
uploaded, the details for it are shown in the related table. “” You can copy and paste the data from a
single row in the "Ramp Assessment"
tab. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-25 21.10.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”You can see Total Harmonic Distortion THD when State
Type is on Harmonic. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-24 21.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When "State Type" is on "Transient",
when loading the comtrade file, if there was a rio or xrio with the name cfg and dat by opening the
comtrade file, the xrio file would not be loaded correctly. This is now fixed in the new version. “”In
Report Setting, level assessment
and Ramp Assessment options are disabled and enabled by default, respectively. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-21
21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Two new test cases are added in the Simulation section called Double Fault and Parallel Line, bugs and
other test case problems are fixed as well. “”In Vector View, if any of the vectors in the Show Arrow
column were false, the true
label would not change the status correctly, this is now fixed in the new version. “”When State Type is
on Harmonic, you can select the type interharmonic or Orders. Interharmonic mode is the same as before.
Orders mode can only be used
in one state. In this case, you can add different harmonics to the table by using the Add New Row and
Remove Selected Row buttons. Since the sampling speed of the AMT105 device for actuals is 400
microseconds and the speed of making the
diagram is 10 microseconds, so in this case, for actuals, it does not actually represent the exact of
what was injected. The number of signals selected in Hardware Configuration, Mag and Phase columns for
each signal in the Harmonic Order
section are added. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-09-23 21.09.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Signal View, when State Type is
placed on Transient. And you were on Current State and selected Magnitude Harmonic, by moving the cursor
in Vector View, the harmonic signal wasn’t displayed correctly. In this version this has been fixed.
“”This icon is designed to give
the user faster access to Calculations in the toolbar. “”After activating the Show Actual Type for each
binary, Select Graph for Actual Binary section is activated in the Signal View. With the number of
voltage and current outputs being
activated in Analog Output, you can select voltage and current output charts for each binary chart in
this section, as well as the charts of other binaries, and see this in Signal View. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-09-17 21.09.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Export Comtrade, if sampling rate is placed on 2 kHz, by opening the dat file from point 1001
onwards, the number recorded for time in the Comtrade file should be increased by 500 microsecond steps.
“”By clicking on Import Comtrade
while Set Mode is on Transient, the software crashed which is now fixed in the new version. “”A new
option called PID is created at the top of each Room. By using this option, you can send information to
AMPro Test software. It is important
to note that in order to send data, you must also enter port information in the relevant software. To
know the port information, you must go to the Room tab of Communication Mode in Setting. For example, in
C# a program for this is written
by Vebko developers. The amplitude, phase and frequency value for the first output of voltage group A is
written in this program and changes are visible in Vebko software. “”If you changing the frequency value
in the Offset Value table
in Step Ramp, the signal shape would not have been displayed correctly, which is now fixed in the new
version. “”From now on it is possible to load the xrio P142 and P342 relays in the Vebko software. AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Time Assessment, two new options called t_start and t_end are added in the Start and Stop
columns. By using these two options, the beginning or end of each state can be considered as the
beginning or end of the time assessment. “”It is acceptable to type the ID in capital letters “”If a
number greater than or equal to 24 is
entered in the Start Time field, the value is changed. Also, after running the test, the options in the
ON GPS field are disabled. “”When current outputs are in the form of used by right-clicking on the
Actual x 1.2... column in the Voltage
Output Signal section and selecting one of the options, the software crashed, but this is now fixed.
“”In previous versions, if you attributed an output to another group from one current or voltage group,
there would be a problem creating
ROCOF. For example, if you attributed the output of a current group B to the output of a current group
A, this bug would appear. This is now fixed in the new version. “”If Value Assessment or any other tab
is selected in Measurement View,
after opening the new file from the file menu, the Measurement View window is placed on the Time
Assessment tab by default. “”If a file contains a value in Time Assessment, after erasing the results,
the software would have crashed in
earlier versions. This problem is now fixed. “”After testing, you cannot change the binary output status
in the Analog Output table. “”In Step Ramp, a new section called Step Ramp Display is created. This
section contains two options:
Value and Rate d/dt. The Value option is the same as before. Rate d/dt is used to test functions that
work by changing the values of two elements, such as Over-excitaion. In the Over-excitaion function, the
rate of voltage and frequency
changes and their ratio to each other must be tested. One important point is that the chart in the fixed
Step time, is the same as switching between options. “”After taking the comtrade file from the software,
if the related file lacks
a digital signal, the 0D value for it will be recorded in the cfg file. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-08-23
21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new section called Calculations is added to the View menu. This section has been in the signal view
window of the Setting tab of the Operation section in the past, which has had problems such as not
renaming the signal, which is now
fixed in the new version. There will also be new features added to the Calculations window in the
future. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Signal View and in the Setting tab, by clicking on the Export Comtrade... button, all signals are
displayed in the Show Signals section, as a list in Export Comtrade, the Check channels to export:
section. “”When loading some xrio
files into *.xrio and *.xml formats, the conversion of quantity units are done by default regardless of
their unit e.g. kV or volt. “”Right-clicking on the first row of the table in Tracking mode is disabled.
“”If in Table View, the number
of states are more than 60, they are updated by moving scroll to the left and right of the values in
each state. “”A new tab is created in Measurement View called Tracking Assessment. This tab is used in
testing the Power Swing function.
Testing this function is important when the relay is blocking the distance relay after passing the outer
zone. To do this, you first need to list the points in Characteristic View in the First Point Time and
End Point Time columns in this
tab. The user selects the number of that shot and the selected number will appear in Characteristic
View. The time interval between the two points selected in the First Point Time and End Point Time
columns are calculated and evaluated.
“”By using the Default Color option, the color of each vector in Vector View can be restored to default
without the fault message appearing. “”In some xrio files after loading in the software, for parameters
that were Enumeration type,
the basis for comparing the ID parameter from the Value column is added. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-07-23
21.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If State Type is on Quick and Set Mode on Powers, by changing the Step Value, the output value
wouldn’t have changed, which is now corrected. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-07-17 21.07.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Ramp Assessment, when a Signal characteristic, is selected it is correctly shown in the Act column.
AMT SEQUENCER 2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Changes have been made in the Analog Output and Binary/ Analog Input tabs in Hardware Configuration.
To enable or disable the actual values in Analog Output, just in the Actual x1.2... column Enter a
coefficient of 1.2 one and two tenths
milliseconds, and it will also be disabled by entering zero. In Binary/Analog Input, to activate is
enough to, in the Show Actual Type column, select AC or DC to activate the Sampling Rate x 400us column
and enter a coefficient of 400
microseconds. “”If the names of ID are typed Persian in adding the parameter in the General Test Object,
a message is displayed to the user that the written characters are not accepted and returns to the
default name. “”If Type is on any
of the options, there will be a Default Color option in Vector View. “”In the Binary/ Analog Input and
Binary Output tabs to disable any of the used binaries, you can use the N key and alt+N combination key
to disable all binaries. As
you can see, the same can be done in the Binaries Output tab to disable binary outputs. “”In Analog
Output and the shown wirings 4x150V, 60VA @ 400mArms, 6x32A, 100VA @ 32A, 3Vrms, 5A and 12Vrms in the
Other section, Not Used button is
added. “”In the Value Assessment tab, two columns called Ratio and Assessment Settings are added. There
are two options for Automatic and Manual in Assessment Settings. In automatic mode, as before,
calculations are performed, but in Manual
mode, the Act cell is activated to order the number entered by the user in dev. calculation. The number
entered in the Ratio column is a coefficient to multiply in the nominal value to calculate Dev. These
options are made to test the
meter. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transient and in the Simulation tab, two stable
power swing and Single line test modes are added. Also, in Unstable power swing mode, a new field called
Measuring Location is added for the user to have the beginning and end of the line, current and voltage
during the oscillation. “”The
Default Color option in Vector View performs correctly. Immediately after selecting this option, the
color of the color column cell and the vector color in the graph are colored to the original color.
“”After opening the Overcurrent block
in AMT Sequencer, it can be seen that the Sensitive as seperate fault option is disabled. “”In some
cases, intense instantaneous peaks occur during testing which are not visible in Signal View. For this
purpose, an option called Sensitive
Signal View is added in the Setting so that such peaks can be viewed in Zoom Out and Optimize all modes.
AMT SEQUENCER 2021-06-06 21.06.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To enter the settings of Toshiba relays in the software that is in the form of a csv file, act in the
same way as before. For this purpose, in the General Test Object page, select the Toshiba relay template
from import from list section,
and then enter the csv file from the Load Relay Setting section. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-06-05 21.06.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The application of save last actual data option, which is located in the Extra Setting tab of the
Hardware Configuration page, is that if this option is enabled, if the Actual column of voltage or
current groups is enabled, in the software,
the saved data is coded and deleted after reaching a certain volume. “”To create stable power
oscillations, unstable power oscillations and create all kinds of faults, it is enough to place the
State Type on Transient, enable the Simulation
option and select the mode you want in the Simulation tab and perform the injection. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-05-26 21.05.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the new versions, if the test isn’t performed, in Measurement view, there is no results in the
Assessment column. “”In Step Ramp, if there is an offset, save and load the file again, the offset
values aren’t change. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-05-18 21.05.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Vector View, by selecting DC for binary inputs, binary input cells
with Show actual value on DC are disabled in Harmonic 1, Phase, Real and Imaginary columns. “”If you put
the first state on Step Ramp and the second state on Quick, the Continue Last State Amplitude option is
removed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-05-09
21.05.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After clicking on “Report Setting”, the two options “Show Grid Lines in Graphs”
and “Show Tolerances Lines” activate by default in General Setting. These two options are used to
display grid lines and tolerance when the “Impedance View” option is activated in “Report Setting”. “”In
the “Setting” tab of the “Signal
View”, a new option “Live Scroll Actual” is created in the “Extra Setting” section. This option is only
active if at least one of the actual value of voltage or current outputs is “True”. “”After changing the
“Type” from “Normal” to “Orange”
or the other options, the track bar in “Vector View” crashes. This bug is fixed in this version. “”After
loading some comtrade files, if the impedance is higher than a certain limit, the characteristic curve
was displayed as a straight
line, which is solved in this version. “”In “Ramp Assessment” and “Value Assessment”, if you set the
“Signal” column to “P1.Q1” or “P2.Q2” or “P3.Q3”, only the “Real” and “Imaginary” values are shown in
the “Signal Type” column. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-04-28 21.04.28.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Binary/Analog Input, if you right-click on the binary that is Not
Used, select set the same option, all binaries are Not Used. The application of this option is to unify
other binaries, similar to the selected binary. “”By going to Hardware Configuration and making changes
the software. does not crash
if in the Ramp Assessment for the Condition column, Logic had been chosen. “”In Tracking mode, during
and after testing the table and icon characteristics are disabled in Impedance View and the time of this
State Type is set to 2 milliseconds
by default. “”Combination Cable Setting and VDC Setting options are available for neutrik cable settings
and DC voltage in Hardware Configuration, respectively. These options are located in the Setting of the
main page of the software
and in the Hardware tab. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-04-21 21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Step Ramp mode, if you change
the offset values of the table values, they aren’t erased by going to Hardware Configuration and making
changes. “”Options are considered for displaying the actual values in the Show Signals section for S, P,
Q, Power Factor, Z, Current
Differential, and Phase Power Factor. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-04-17 21.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When a field is
linked to a parameter in rio, if the same was done for another field with the same parameter attributed,
the value was zero, which is now fixed in this version. “”By placing Set Mode on Overcurrent, sensitive
option is removed from fault
type list. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The dimensions of the Binary Analog Transformer
section in Signal View is corrected. when binaries 7 and 8 are enabled, you can see it in this section.
AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By stop testing manually, you can switch between the state's in Table View. “”To disable binary inputs
or binary outputs created in the Goose Settings tab, simply use disable Goose Settings by right-clicking
on any of the selected binaries.
“”If you create a block and add a parameter in the General Test Object, some characters cannot be
written in column ID, and if you use lowercase letters or unauthorized characters, a message is
displayed to the user and the software changes
them to capital letters and characters allowed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-23 21.03.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If binaries
are used to design the test, say two binaries are defined as X and the other binarys conditional, the
test did not perform the condition properly; this problem is now fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-17
21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After you import the scl file, the Min Repitation and Max Repitation columns are separated in the
Goose Setting tab. “”When the actual voltage and current values are enabled, if you open Vector View and
place type on Orange, the values
in the Vector View section are updated in the report. “”When the names of the state are changed, these
changes can be seen in the Ignore before and Ignore after columns in the Measurement View window. “”By
enabling the Trigger value and
going from the Analog Output tab to Trigger and vice versa, the value attributed to each binaries
remains constant. “”By right-clicking on Vector View and selecting Power and changing the Type to Orange
and moving cursor, the Real and
Imaginary values in the table will change. “”For current group B, the Symmetrical option is created in
Vector View. “”Values of Link to Xrio, remove link, go to linked value are corrected in Trigger logic
minimum time and Delay after binary
trigger fields. “”After enabling binary outputs, the related options are added in the Start and Stop
columns. One of the applications of this option is in testing the key performance time by AC voltage
method. There the user must enter
the time of bin Out. Using these options can make time easier to calculate. “”The 3V0 option in
Measurement View is added in the Ramp Assessment tab. “”In Right-clicking on some fields in Device
Settings new options are added. “”Change
the binary outputs to tabular form in Detail View and Table View. “”In all rooms, the device fan
activation icon is placed in the toolbar. In the past, to activate the device fan, you had to go to the
Settings page, the Hardware tab of
fan mode section. If the fan is active, the color is red and if it is inactive, it is blue. It should be
noted that if you are not connected to the device, this icon is disabled. “”This version of Service is
removed and a menu called Socket
Status is created at the top of each page. For this purpose, in Setting and in the Room tab, a field
called Connected Port is created in the Communication Mode section. There is also no longer AMProService
in the Services tab in the Windows
Task Manager. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-07 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The PCM option tick is removed. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you place Binary-Input Type on Wet Max 188 V Disable Error and its
Threshold on AC or DC, then inject more than this value, for example, 200 volts into the binary, there
is no error binary 1 OverVoltage. “”If binary 9 and 10, especially binary 9, are not enabled in binary/
analog input tab, didn’t put
its threshold on AC or DC and apply the current to binary 9 or voltage to binary 10, Binary Error 9
OverCurrent and Binary Error 10 OverVoltage faults don’t occur, respectively. For example, if only the
first output of the A current group
is enabled and binary 9 is disabled, if you currrent by two wires to binary 9 through the output of 1 A
current group, an Error IA1 Other error is displayed. “”If you put State Type on Step Ramp and then tick
Enable Reset and select Rate
Frequency, by giving the value to the frequency in the Start Values table and going to the Hardware
Configuration page, if you assign some value to the frequency column in step values and final values
tables, the frequency waveform is
disrupted, this is now fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-02-23 21.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The correct operation of
cut and paste option in the Binary / Analog Input tab of the Hardware Configuration page. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Goose Setting tab is enabled in the Hardware Configuration page and you can import SCL-format
files in the software. “”When one of the current outputs or voltage is active and the Show Actual is in
True mode, by selecting and activating
the other output, the Show Actual value is also in True mode. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-06-03 99.03.14.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding shortcuts such as pressing Scroll Mouse or right-clicking +alt on each state to opening detail
view as pop up. “”Adding the ability to perform mathematical operations in fields where numerical values
are entered. For example,
if you want to multiply sqrt2 by 10, simply enter the same operation in the relevant field.
“”Possibility of defining trigger condition in different parts of the software. This is normally done in
the trigger setting section, which is
also added to the table view window, and you can use the options that are placed for different
conditions. “”If you define a few states and need to make the states smaller, you can do this to all
states by right-clicking on the gear and
using small mode. “”If you have multiple active binaries in the measurement view section, you can select
the logic in start and stop conditions and by right-clicking the stop in the view custom setting section
to apply and define the requirements.
“”Adding the live scroll option to the Setting of signal View window. If you tick the live scroll
option, the software performs like an oscilloscope so the signal changes appear live in the Signal View
window. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-08-04
99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Table View, by right-clicking on each voltage and current groups, link magnitude
and Link Angles options for voltage and current are separated. For example, if you select link Magnitude
on a voltage group, you'll see that only voltages are linked together. It is also created for both
current groups A and B. These options
are also created in Detail View. For example, if you enable two current groups and link one of the
groups, the other group is not linked. “”The Link Angles Equal option works in such a way that all three
phases are linked for the same
value. For example, if the first phase enters at 45 degrees, all three phases are 45 degrees. Also, the
performance of the Link Angles Balance option when a value for each phase is entered, the other two
phases are balanced by a 120-degree
difference. For example, if you enter zero for the middle phase, there is 120 degrees difference from
other phases to this. “”For all Test View tabs in medium rooms such as Distance, Differential and
Overcurrent, link to Xrio option is
created and if needed, you can use this in tests. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By
writing a comment in the Table View window, this field could not be updated in the Detail View window,
which is now corrected. “”At the top of the Signal View window, the text box related to test status is
removed. “”In the Vector View
window, after performing the test and selecting type from Normal to Orange mode by moving Cursor, the
values related to Harmonic 1 column were miscalculated. “”It is also possible to zoom in on the track
bar section in the Signal View
and Vector View windows, which are linked together. “”By changing the state name and the time in the
"Detail View" window, the related fields in the "Table View" window are updated in small mode. “”There
are problems in changing state
type and updating tables related to that state, now are fixed. For example, by selecting State Type in
Step Ramp mode and placing Set Mode on ZI Constant, related tables to this mode are displayed, be have
after changing the State Type
to Harmonic mode, the tables were not displayed. “”Trigger is linked in the Detail View and Table View
windows. “”By enabling the Data Table in the Signal View window, and selecting cursors on any signal,
these values are displayed in
the Report. “”In Signal View, by enabling the Data Table, scroll down is removed and its size is
automatically adjusted. “”In the Detail View window, by selecting Step Ramp and placing Set Mode on
Powers, if the reactive power value changes
in the Step Values table, in the Signal View window, after enabling the reactive power waveform in
Setting, this waveform is displayed correctly. “”In the General Test Object page, Show/Hide option tick
is removed by default. “”In the
bottom panel of the Characteristic View window, two Extended Zone options are created in Impedance View
to display extended zones and the Horizontal Axis is Relative checkbox in Overcurrent Characteristic to
display the horizontal axis
in terms of nominal current. Also in overcurrent characteristic, pan mode and snap to grid options are
created. “”In Step Ramp mode for Distance and Differential Set Modes, changes points can be seen in
these two modes for all fault types.
In the Characteristic View window, for distance and differential characteristics, differential and
impedance currents can be seen in different fault types. “”By changing the characteristic type, its icon
also changes in the toolbar. “”In
the Signal View window, lines can be bolded by clicking on the Digital chart. “”In Tracking mode and in
Impedance View, by enabling Bold selected row in tracking, the added points in each row of this window
are displayed on the characteristic
curve. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-05 99.08.15.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Signal View, you the line bold by clicking
on the digital chart “”In sequencer, the problem with the link magnitudes option in the step ramp mode
is fixed. “”the filter by sender unit did not work the problem is no solved. “”by double-clicking on any
the blocks in Link to XRio
window the software used to crash now if is fixed. “”After linking to XRio of a field, the color of the
field changes in the selected and deselected mode. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-08 99.08.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you are in Current State mode, by clicking All State, optimize all mode is created in the Signal
View window. “”If a window closes, by clicking on its icon reopens it. “”If a module is open, without
any changes to the previous module,
the message box that saves the closed module information is not displayed. “”If you have selected the
Overcurrent icon in Normal mode in the Impedance View window, by changing it to "Transient" while the
icon of the overcurrent is disabled
in this window, distance is displayed by default. “”In Transient mode, the characteristic curve is
displayed by selecting a differential comtrade file and clicking on the Differential icon in the
Characteristic View window. “”By clicking
the combination keys of each window, the related window opens, while in previous versions, the software
return to thirty seconds by pressing the combination keys. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-10 99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”the signal view high light for state 1 is gone when current state is clicked. Removing the view option
from right-click of the z-graph at the bottom of the cursors. “”Removing the optimize y option from
right-click of z-graph and digital
charts in signal view page “”If Signal View is closed by adding or subtracting states, the trackbar is
refreshed in the Vector View. “”saving and loading the xrio file is fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-14
99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The word Link in Extra Setting tab has been corrected in Hardware Configuration window. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-15 99.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Sequencer, if you're in a state other than State 1, highlight for Current State doesn't disappear.
“”If Communication Mode is in Integrated System mode, by double-clicking on a file when we are connected
to the device, we stay in
device connection mode in the opened window. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-16 99.08.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Immediately
after testing, the start button is deactivated. “”In Hardware Configuration and in the Analog Output
tab, if one of the values of voltage or current is initially “Not Used” in their tables then the Show
Actual Value is ticked, after activating
the “not Used”, voltage or current is the value changes from False to True. “”Correct performance of
Test Hardware Configuration in Transducer and especially Sequencer “”If a file has a result, by
reopening it and applying changes to the
device, you can see the changes made by reopening the same file. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Graphic change of track bar in Signal view. “”I2/I1 value is false in Vector View table, also this
value lacks units no volts, no amps, no ohms and no volt-amps And on the other hand, sometimes the size
of this vector became too large
and off the chart, which has also been corrected. “”If the vector color changes in Vector View, by
right-clicking and selecting Default Color, the changed color returns to the default color. “”Solving
the problem in transient table: By
loading a comtrade file, the channel name of this file would have crash the table. “”In loading comtrade
files, the fault of all signals are displayed. “”From now on, none of binary outputs are enabled by
default. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-23
99.09.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”high light of signal view for state 1 disappears when you click on Current State.
“”Without opening Report View window, you can use Export Report option in File menu. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transient, if there is a voltage fault by disabling voltages in Hardware Configuration, the fault
isn’t displayed. “”Correcting binary threshold values of Input 9 and 10. “”In Test Object and in Device,
all link to XRio fields can
be changed. “”Added three items IE1, IE11 and I sensitive to output target column in Current Output
Signal section in Hardware Configuration: so that if all phases of current group A are active and IE1 is
selected for the first phase of
current group B, in fact, the sum of all currents in group A are shown in this phase. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-26 99.09.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Added min and max values for threshold as well as false and true reverse values for binary inputs 9
and 10. “”By switching from All State to Current State, the total state signal selected in Signal View
is highlighted. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-28 99.09.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In general, if the frequency in any of the available tables in Detail
View is zero, the angle is also zero. “”If the Rate Value per Second option in Step Ramp is selected,
the values in step values table are be in seconds and would return to their original state by changing
State Type to Quick Values. “”Adding
reset Values option in Quick mode. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Step Ramp and in
the Start Values table, the frequency is Link to Frequency, by changing the frequency in the Step Values
table, as well as by right-clicking and changing DC and Nominal Values, the frequency column values stay
linked. “”Optimize calculations
in Step Ramp if the Con. in Ferq Step option is ticked. “”By selecting Overcurrent in Impedance View by
clicking on the no trip area, magnetic cursor will go to the top of the characteristic view and will not
fade. “”By changing the current
value in the Analog Output Channels section, magnetic cursor is moved on the current axis. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Hardware Configuration page in the Binary/ Analog Input tab, of the description column is
deleted by changing the Show Result column from True to False. “”Step up and Down keys function in Quick
mode have been corrected when Set
Mode is placed on Overcurrent or Differential mode. “”In Quick mode, magnetic cursor is moved by
clicking step up or step down in Characteristic View. “”Adding the Link Magnitudes option to the
available options in the right click of the
Magnitude column in Vector View. “”For rotation and movement in phases, L1 L2 L3L3 L1 L2 option is added
to the right clicks of Phase and Magnitude columns. This option is also enabled when all voltage and
current outputs are active and
of AC kind. “”By clicking on the Link Angles option Equals in the Phase column, all phases will be the
same and by clicking on link angles Balance, this option will be disabled. “”If you have entered the
frequency at zero, clicking the
Phase column will not display some options in Vector View and Table View. Also, if the signal is DC, in
Detail View by right-clicking on the Phase column, there are only Link to XRio, Remove Link and Go to
Linked Value options. “”Added
Go to Linked Value option in Vector View. “”Fix Show/Hide option in Vector View. “”By tapping Copy to
Clipboard, for example, in the Vector View window of AMT Differential room, values are added to the
table using the Paste from Vector
View Clipboard option in right-clicking the Table View in AMT Sequencer. “”In Measurment View in all
tabs, right click options are enabled. For each tab, the Show/Hide option has been created exclusively.
“”When Set Mode is in Power mode,
it is activated for the parameters of active power, reactive power and The apparent power of link to
magnitude and Equal to Magnitude options is enabled.. “”In Table View, state can be removed by
right-clicking on each state, using the
Delete option. Clicking on this option will erase the same state and by clicking Marked State and
Unmarked State, the selected or unselected states will be deleted. “”In Table View, by selecting the
Append option on any state you are,
that state will be added to the end of the state. There is another option called Default State, which
creates the last state with default values by selecting it. Also the icon of this option has been added
to the toolbar. “”Default State
has been added to the Insert Before and Insert After options available in right-clicking states. “”If
data table is enabled in Signal View, the unselected signal value will be displayed by selecting one of
the signal drop-down field options
not ticked in Settings by moving cursor or writing time in the table. “”If State Type is on Harmonic
mode, by enabling and disabling current or voltage groups, the zero value for them #1 Free-Order
Harmonic tables and #2 Harmonic Free-Order
in the table is considered by default. “”In Measurement View, Go to Linked Value, Remove Linked and
Linked to Xrio options have been removed from the right click of cells that only take text. Also, Go to
Linked Value option has been added
to the right click of other cells. In addition, right-clicks of columns such as T Act., T Dev. and
Assessment, which are valued after testing, have been disabled. “”The Rate Frequency option is created
in Step Ramp mode by enabling Enable
Reset option. This option is designed for ROCOF. For example, if the frequency increases from 10 Hz to a
nominal frequency with 0.1 Hz stairs, the signal shape changes according to what you see in Signal View.
“”For some Set Modes such
as Power or ZI Constant the frequency column has been disabled. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-17 99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Insert Z Shot, the current value of the I test is based on the nominal current. If you change this
value, in Table View and Detail View, these values will be changed equally. “”All times sent by the
device are correct multiples of
400 microseconds in 1 millisecond. If the user enters a time of 1 millisecond, this number is divided
into 400 and becomes the nearest number,2 milliseconds. “”If State Type is on Tracking mode, you'll see
the correct show of binary outputs
signal by zero and one binary outputs because the start time is set to 2 milliseconds by default. “”By
right-clicking on the Signal column in Vector View, two options copy to Clipboard and Show/Hide are
displayed. “”All colors changed,
especially in cells such as Table View, Detail View and Vector View. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-28
99.10.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After selecting a signal in “Show Signals” and ticking the related tick in “Settings”, chart will be
displayed in Signal View. “”If the signal is DC, after linking the value of the phase column of the same
signal with the parameter in
XRio after tapping the Balance Angle in the other signal phase column, the value of the DC signal phase
column does not change. “”In all rooms, this window closes by pressing the Esc key in the General Test
Object screen. “”Except AMT
sequencer , In any other room, by pressing the combination keys Ctrl+Shift+t, the related block for the
same room opens on the General Test Object page. For example, if you are in AMT Synchronizer, after
simultaneously tapping these keys,
the Synchronizing Parameters window opens. Also, in all rooms, the Device Settings window opens by
tapping Ctrl+Shift+d. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-10 99.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”New wiring have been added in the “Hardware Configuration“ and in the “Analog out“ tab. This way, if
one of the main outputs is out of order, the same voltage and current can be supplied from other
channels to perform the wirings. For
example, there are three models of wirings an shown 1 * 150, 120VA @ 800mArms, while previously only the
output of 1 voltage group A was available for the user. However, if for any reason this output is out of
order, outputs 2 and 3 of
voltage group A can be used. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-11 99.10.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "Hardware Configuration"
and in "Binary / Analog Input" there is a section called "Virtual Binary Input" with three options
"VBin1", "VBin2" and "VBin3", and a section called "Virtual Binary Output" with three options "VBout1",
"VBout2" and "VBout3". After activating
each of the relevant options in the columns "Binary-Input Target", "Binary-Input Label", "Binary-Output
Target" and "Binary-Output Label", some options are added. For example, after checking the option
"VBin1", the options "VBin1-1" to
"VBin1-32" appear in the columns. These two parts are used in "GOOSE". AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-16
99.10.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting “Select File to Merge” you can merge two files of this room. After selecting the desired
file and states, in the event of deviations in “Hardware Configuration”, the user is asked for each
added states whether or not to
apply the changes in Hardware configuration to the added states?! If the user clicks “yes”, a state will
be added to the file due to the existing changes in Hardware Configuration. Clicking “No” does not add a
state. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-27
99.11.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you select all 6 current outputs from the "Hardware Configuration", the "Phase"
and "Frequency" columns are displayed in the "Detail View" if "Set Mode" is "Overcurrent: ITest". AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-01-28 99.11.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Setting Threshold value after selecting the "Set all binary like this" option in the "Binary / Analog
Input" tab. “”After selecting "Apply VDC" in "Hardware Configuration" and performing the test, the
auxiliary DC AUX DC switches off
when the test is finished. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-28 99.11.09.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”by clicking on the "Distance"
block in the "Test Object, you will go to “Distance Protection Parameters” page. There you can see a
picture that shows the connection of the current and voltage transformer in "CT Start Point" and "PT
Connection" AMT SEQUENCER 2021-02-01
99.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If only one output of voltage group A is active and the "Output Target" and "Output
Label" of the other output are used, the current of voltage group A is the same. If only the second
output of voltage group A is active and you select "VL1-E" for "Output Target" and "Output Label", the
actual current of voltage group
A in microamps, will be the same as if only output 1 of the voltage group A is active.
AMT DIFF HARMONICS 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the “Characteristic View” settings, some options
which weren’t displayed correctly are modified. AMT DIFF HARMONIC 2021-07-25 21.07.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The
formulas in this section are corrected. AMT DIFF HARMONICS 2021-04-21 21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After loading
a rio file, you can change the value of the Ixf/Idiff column in the Differential Protection Parameters
and Harmonic tab, after returning to this page, you can see the changes made. AMT DIFF HARMONICS
2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Actual values of search and check lines are displayed horizontally in the Signal View. AMT DIFF
HARMONICS 2021-03-23 21.03.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In three phases fault mode two phases of current were injected, which is now fixed. AMT DIFF HARMONICS
2021-03-07 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you add points while Harmonic Order is on the second harmonic, and then put Harmonic Order on the
fifth harmonic, the points are updated in differential Harmonic Characteristic as well as in the points
table. AMT DIFF HARMONIC 2020-12-02
99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting the three-phase fault in AMT Differential Harmonic, all three phases
are injected and displayed in Signal View.
AMT DISTANCE 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you clicked on the “No” bottom in the message box of the
“AMTDistanceCharacteristicEditor,” the characteristic curve would be changed. “”In the “Report Setting”,
the new option “Show All Tact” is created at the “Search Test”. AMT DISTANCE 2022-09-14 22.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The calculations related to "Ignore" in Search Test have been changed so as to find the border of the
zones, the points that have already been tested are not tested again. AMT DISTANCE 2022-07-16
22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In this version, calculations related to the "Percent" column have been changed. AMT DISTANCE
2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems related to loading "xrio" or "rios" containing Lens/Tomato and Mho features have been fixed.
AMT DISTANCE 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Going forward, the "Test Point" section's details about impedance zones will be shown completely. AMT
DISTANCE 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By clicking on Medium Detail View, the software crashed that this is now fixed. “”It is possible to
see the information of each zone after the test is created. “”The ground coefficient for each zone is
created both in AMT Distance and
in AMT sequencer. In AMT Distance, grounding factor for phase to ground fault option is considered,
where the ground coefficient of different zones if activated is represented by its value and mode. In
this section, there is always a General
grounding factor option. This option related to the main ground coefficient, which is determined in the
Grounding Factor section. By selecting each option, the amount of voltage and current for single-phase
fault changes to the ground.
also in AMT Sequencer for when you want to see the impedance trajectory, this option is the same as in
the designed distance at the bottom of Impedance View. AMT DISTANCE 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the System Parameters section, a new field is created to allow the user to enter the line length in
the Line Length section. Also, in the Shot Test tab points table, a new column called Fault Location is
created that explains where
the fault occurred on the load line. If points such as 1 and 2 are not on the load line, they are moved
to new coordinates on the load line. AMT DISTANCE 2021-08-02 21.08.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In some files, after enabling or disabling Show Tolerance lines in Report setting, some zones weren’t
displayed in Report Setting, which is now corrected in the new version. AMT DISTANCE 2021-07-16
21.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option is created in AMT Distance. After activating the |Z| relative option, there are new
options in the relevant list. For example, if 60% of Z2LL Z2-Z1LL Z1 selected option is selected, the
impedance value is calculated in this
way by using the following formula. Z_2-Z_1 ×0.8+Z_1 ×number in "%" field AMT DISTANCE 2021-03-23
21.03.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Shot Test by adding a point or points and going to Test Object if you clicked on OK and changed the
type of fault in Test View up on returning, the zone in Impedance View was cleared. This problem is
fixed now. AMT DISTANCE 2021-03-07
21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The xrio file taken from P54x relays could not be loaded correctly and the number
of parameters was zero. This is now fixed. AMT DISTANCE 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the past,
negative Z was recorded as zero for reverse zones causing its tolerance to be miscalculated in relative
mode therefore the results were miscalculated in Shot Test and Search Test, this is now fixed. AMT
DISTANCE 2020-11-10 99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In all windows containing Search and Check tests, if you add a line and then you want to clear
it using the Delete key, the points on the curve on the Tolerance lines is not erased and only that
point is removed from the Test view point table. AMT DISTANCE 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding “Update conf. files” button in “Load XRio and Rio file from list”: In this page, after once
clicking on this button and double-clicking on the "Distance" block in the "General Test Object" page
and going to the "Distance Protection
Parameters" page, there is a list of types of relays in the "Copy from" field for different Kl
coefficients in all relays. “”In Distance, by going to the Settings tab and selecting Constant test
voltage and ticking the Allow Reduction
of VTest option, the V MaxL-L field is not activated and this mode is activated only by selecting
constant test current and ticking the Allow Reduction of VTest option. “”The number in Max Point Number
must be between 4 and 20, and if
an invalid number is written, a fault message appears. Now it may be set to a number in RIO, but it is
out of range, and this time the user faces a fault message. But if it is allowed in the range and then
the number is invalidated by
changing the value of the number to which it is linked, the test doesn’t run. “”In all medium rooms,
after adding a point in the table of points, you can move between cells of each point with the tab key
and go to the next row by finishing
the cells of a row and see the changes at the same time on the characteristic curve in Characteristic
View. AMT DISTANCE 2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In all medium rooms except AMT Overcurrent, you can display the characteristic curve in zoomed mode in
the report. AMT DISTANCE 2020-11-30 99.09.10.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.10.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.10.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Distance and in check test, if two lines with zero and 90 degree angles are added, by enabling and
disabling the Zoom During Test option, the result of the test points are not erased. AMT DISTANCE
2020-12-17 99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Search Test, if you have a search line with the results, by dragging the new search line, a value
will not be displayed in the Reach column for this line, and the size of this column will be adjusted
according to the information written
in it, and the added line can be removed by right-clicking on the row. AMT DISTANCE 2021-01-11
99.10.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After activating "Out of Range" option the software speed is increased. Also, the software speed
decreases after zooming on specifications. AMT DISTANCE 2021-01-16 99.10.27.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.27.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.27.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In “Characteristic View” and in “Check Test” and “Search Test” tabs, Single Shot cannot be run with
“Shift” key and the left mouse button. AMT DISTANCE 2021-01-19 99.10.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the ZT Diagram, the nominal time of the points on the curve is displayed by pressing the “t” key.
AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-10-09 22.10.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problems related to the "Active Range" option in directional
mode have been fixed. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-07-23 22.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Two formulae relating to the
Overload function of Siemens relays were added to the attribute library in the "Test Object". AMT
OVERCURRENT 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After "PickUp-DropOff"-Tests, the chart in Signal View was not updated according to the test results.
This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The "Setting" tab creates a section called "Directional Algorithm". The options in this section can
be used according to the "Directional" test algorithm used in the relay to fully cover the power range
in two-point faults. “” The problems
with angular tolerance in directional tests have been fixed. “” The function used in the "7SA87 SIEMENS"
relay has been included in this module. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-05-24 22.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "PickUp-DropOff" test, once the running test was stopped, the software crashed, this problem
has been fixed in the new version. “” The "Show Selected Z Act. Point" was displayed incorrectly in the
setting of the Characteristic
View. The problem is fixed in the new version. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-05-08 22.05.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A After
running the test, the margin lines related to “PickUp Start” and “DropOff End” were not displayed on the
characteristic curve in the “Characteristic View” window; this has been fixed in the upcoming version.
AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-03-13
22.03.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the DOC test and in the "PickUp-DropOff" tab, when the "Target Type" was on
"Angle", after clicking "Apply & Start Test", the values were displayed first in amps and then in angles
in the table, which is resolved in the new version. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you add and test several points using the Add to button, when you add a point using the Add button
in the PickUp-DropOff tab, the desired point is added to the last tested fault type. AMT OVERCURRENT
2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By activating the Active Range Limit option and making changes in its fields, you can see the desired
results in Directional Plan and Overcurrent Characteristic. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By adding the diagram in residual mode, different fault types were not displayed correctly nor added,
this problem has been fixed in the new version. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In directional test and in two-phase fault types, the name of the Angle field has been changed to
Angle VLL, If. The angle entered in this case represents the line-by-line voltage to the fault current.
AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you open a file with the "DOC" test, the color-coding of the safeguarded areas appear
accurately. “” By changing the values of "I Pick-up" and "Time", if the chart in "Tripping
characteristic" is changed, the values of the titled columns will not return to the default state. “”
The values in the "Active Range Limits" section
were previously determined based on a reference current. However, thanks to research conducted on
"Siemens" and "MiCOM" manuals, these values are now calculated using the pick-up current. “”
Additionally, the issue of not saving changes
made in the "User Define" folder of the "Overcurrent" block has been resolved. AMT OVERCURRENT
2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If there are points in a fault of a particular element and then that element is removed, you can
remove the points added in the removed element fault through the Remove All button. AMT OVERCURRENT
2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the Space Key Press options are enabled, you can stop testing PickUp-DropOff. AMT OVERCURRENT
2021-07-19 21.07.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By enabling the ITest Relative option and selecting one of the stages, the ITest field value is
updated in the Test Point section and the test points table. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-07-12 21.07.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After saving and executing the file, the values of the Pickup Start, Pickup End and Drop Off End
fields are displayed correctly in test view and in Report View. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If More Detail section does not display chart information for you, you must disable Beta: Use Unicode
UTF-8 for worldwide language support. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-04-17 21.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The dimensions of the More Details section box are corrected and placed in Collapse mode by default.
AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the PickUp-DropOff test, if the Target Type field was on The Current or Angle and you were saving
the test file, the values of the Target Type and Drop Off fields were incorrect when you reopened the
file, this is fixed now. AMT OVERCURRENT
2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Correcting the chart values format while using Graber. “”After testing,
all options affecting the test result in the Overcurrent Protection Propertise window are disabled. The
same is done for AMT Distance and AMT Differential. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the "PickUp-DropOff" tab, by opening the "More Details" panel the graphical shape of the table is
displayed correctly. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In AMT Overcurrent, the design of magnetic lines of the Overcurrent Characteristic window is changed
in the PickUp-DropOff test for both Current and Angle modes. “”In AMT overcurrent by going to General
Test Object, the Mange/ Select
Characteristic window by changing the available values for each curves in the User Defined folder, the
curved shape displayed was not updated, which is now fixed. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-11-08 99.08.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Overcurrent room, by changing the value I nomsecondary, the Absolute value is changed by
changing the I Pick-up column. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-11-10 99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Overcurrent, to test PickUp-DropOff if the row is not added, by selecting “Add to” the same value
is added to other fault types, and after performing, saving and even opening that file, the results are
corrected in the created Fault
type. “”In PickUp-DropOff, if a line is added and selected, in the Detail section, there is no values
for the Pickup Act and Drop off Act fields before testing. “”In all Medium rooms, by selecting the row
that results are recorded and
then using the Add to option, the added point in the selected fault type is displayed as Not Tested. AMT
OVERCURRENT 2020-11-16 99.08.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Medium, as in "AMT Overcurrent", by clicking on Add to button, the fault type tick has been
removed. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-11-23 99.09.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Changing the color of the entire tolerance area in Characteristic View. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-11-25
99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Overcurrent, after testing the DC Decay and Harmonic options are disabled. AMT OVERCURRENT
2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If Characteristic View window is closed, by clear resulting, all Tnoms will switch to the original
state. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In PickUP-DropOff and in Angle mode, if a point in the directional plan becomes Out of Range, points
are also specified in the test table. In this case, the added point in Medium Detail View is shown in
pink. “”By changing the Target
Type column in the PickUP-DropOff test points table, from Current to Angle mode and vice versa,
available fields in the Test Point section will be updated. “”By holding the ctrl button and
right-clicking the curve, points can be added
to the test table in Medium Detail View. “”By erasing the characteristic curved data, all options are
disabled in the Overcurrent Protection Parameters. “”In the Settings tab and in Add Signal for harmonic
current, the new unit % Ifault
is used instead of the In unit, which collects a percentage of the fault current with the main current.
“”In angular PickUp-DropOff, the pickup start and Pickup End fields values are adjusted from no trip to
tripping area, respectively.
“”In overcurrent and in the Test Object window, the same names cannot be selected for stages. By doing
it, a fault message is displayed and the stages return to original state. “”in the "Sequence Test Point
to" page, two new options called
Advance and Simple 2x, 3x, 4x are added. In Advance mode, the previous method is applied, but in Simple
mode 2x, 3x, 4x you can create twice, triple or four times the regulatory current of each fault type.
The same fault type is displayed
according to the elements defined in the Test Object. For example, by selecting an element in Zero
Sequence, two-point faults are not shown in Sequence Test Point to. It has also been added for
directional. In this case,the x°=End Angle-Start
Angle/2 relationship is used to calculate the double, triple and quadruer angles. “”Two options show
test information and Show Time Information have been added in the right click of Medium Detail View. AMT
OVERCURRENT 2020-12-17 99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Directional and to calculate MTA, the MTA option is created in overcurren Protection Parameters.
First, the user in the MTA selects the related formula to the relay, then enters the RCA value in the
side field. After entering this information, other Trip Sector Definition fields will be automatically
completed. “”after right-clicking
the PickUp-DropOff in PickUp-DropOff and selecting another element, the PickUp-DropOff interval changes,
the dashed line, in the characteristic view is also moved and multiplied by the coefficient. “”In the
Overcurrent Characteristic settings,
by enabling Show Curve Information, the attribute curve information is displayed, and even in
directional mode, information about angles is shown in the chart. “”In Sequence Test Point to, you can
switch between fields and make changes
by pressing the Tab key, and it is also possible for AMT Distance, AMT Differential and other parts. AMT
OVERCURRENT 2020-12-28 99.10.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Added the MTA formula in the Element section of the Report View window. “”Correcting ”Directional
plan“ in “Medium detail view“ AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-12-28 99.10.08.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In PickUp-DropOff, the minimum value of PickUp Start, PickUp End and DropOff End fields is set at 1
mA. “”"Sensitive as a separate fault" option is added to "Overcurrent Protection Parameters". Activating
this option adds a new element,
namely "Sensitive", to the "Selected element type" field. It does not affect other elements and acts
independently. In addition, the current IL1 1 is activated and evaluated via binary inputs 1 and 2. AMT
OVERCURRENT 2021-01-11 99.10.22.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "PickUp-Drop Off" tab, changing the "Target Type" from "Current" to "Angle" deactivates
the column value "Reset Ratio" in the "Angle" mode. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-01-13 99.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If
you open a saved file and the settings are on current, the settings will be on current by going to the
PickUp-DropOff tab. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-01-31 99.11.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you select “from protected object” in CT Starpoint connection, there will be correction in Pick-Up
– Drop-Off test.
AMT SEQUENCER 2023-09-14 23.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding a new wiring type 2*300 V for voltage outputs in the
AMT205 device. AMT SEQUENCER 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The points are not displayed in the differential
characteristic when the “State Type” is set to “Tracking”. “”In Device Settings, after changing the
frequency in f nom, the value of time in Period Time did not change. This issue has been resolved in the
upcoming version. AMT SEQUENCER
2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting “L1L2” in the “Insert Z Shot,” the phase value is set
to 30, -150, and 90, respectively, in the pre-fault state. “”The software crashed after selecting one of
these fault types L1, L2, or L3 and clicking on the “Insert After” option. “”Henceforth, the “Tracking
Assessment” section is added
to the “Report View” and you can activate or deactivate it on the “Report Setting.” “”The problem of not
displaying of the “Harmonic Setting” section in the “Signal View” is solved. “”In the previous versions,
if the “State Type” was set
to the “Continuous Ramp,” by changing the curve on the “Characteristic View” and selecting the
overcurrent characteristic, the “Set Mode” option would alter. “”By selecting the “Value” in the
“Harmonic Setting” and moving the cursor, the
related graph was not displayed correctly. “”In “Transient”, the displaying of trajectory with the true
RMS values is added. “”In the Hardware Config, another option called “Yes Abs” has been added to the
“Show Result column.” By selecting
this option, the positive or negative sign of the value written in the Threshold column is not
important. For example, if you set the “Threshold” to 50 volts, any voltage that is greater than
positive 50 volts or less than negative 50
volts will be considered as binary 1. “”You can switch the wiring type based on the tester device. By
selecting an option from the "Hardware Configuration" window, the voltage and current group wirings will
update accordingly. AMT SEQUENCER
2022-10-09 22.10.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problems in "Signal View" related to not displaying the graph
calculate in RMS mode and also not displaying binary signals in "Select Graph for Actual Binary" mode in
a graph have been resolved. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-09-14 22.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After changing the "Type" to "Harmonic", the relevant tables were not updated in the "Detail View",
which has been fixed in the upcoming version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-09-01 22.09.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The fundamental frequency in "Harmonic" has changed. By selecting "Orders", the maximum frequency
value has increased to 2500 Hz. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The distance between the 6 endpoints and the trajectory line was removed in this version. Also, by
changing the value of "IE", the existing problems with drawing these points and said line have been
fixed. As of this version, the first
harmonic is used to draw lines and end points “” New options to show/hide zones have been added in the
"Characteristic View". “” To calculate the RMS of currents and voltages, a field called "Calculate RMS"
has been created. This field
contains the options "None", "FCW" and "HCW". If you open the old file in this version and the option
"RMS" was activated, this field is set to the option "FCW", otherwise to the option "None". AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The calculations related to RMS in the Harmonic Order table have been changed. “” A new option called
"Disable Actual" has been added. This option allows you to show or not show the voltage and current
outputs in the "Signal View".
AMT SEQUENCER 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you set "Type" to "Orange", the status of the states
in the diagram above was chaotic. This bug has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-05-30
22.05.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Transient", a new option called "IE" has been added which is a combination of three currents used
in functions to the earth coefficient. By selecting "none", the IE flow is calculated from the sum of
IL1+IL2+IL3 and is used in functions.
However, once other currents are selected it will be used as an IE stream. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-05-24
22.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When "Overcurrent" option in "Set Mode" is selected then changed to one of the Distance options, the
software crashed. This problem has been solved in the new version. “” A new option called "Advance View"
has been added in "Detail
View". Enabling this option provides more settings of the selected State Type. “” If the State Type is
on "Quick", activating the "Advanced View" option, "Quick Setting" was not displayed; however, it has
been fixed in the upcoming version.
“” If the "State Type" was on "Step Ramp", the "Ramp Description Errors" section and the "Con.In Freq
Step" option were not displayed. These problems have been fixed in the new version. “” The inconsistency
between "Table View" and "Detail
View" seen after naming the last State is now fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-05-08 22.05.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”
There were problems in the binary outputs which are fixed in this version. For example, if “Bin Out” 2
was selected, the device did not function and a graph was not even seen in the “Signal View”. AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-04-26 22.04.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once the file containing a test with two states, “Pickup” and “Drop-off” was opened and applied
again, the amount of drop-off errors in “Measurement View” would display the wrong “Assessment” column.
This value was not displayed correctly
in the state of drop in “Table View”, yet this has been fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-24 22.04.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If there are two states where one of the states is "Continuous Ramp", where the first state has an
offset and the second state is with or without offset, an error occurred when activating the option
"Continue last state amplitude",
which has now been fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-21 22.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After opening the old files
containing "Time Assessment", due to the addition of "t_start" and "t_end" values, the values of this
section were not loaded correctly, which has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-19
22.04.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If there is an active binary input before testing, the "Error Overvoltage of Binary" is by default
and you cannot enable it during testing. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you have selected a number of signals to display in "Show Signals", these signals they would be
disabled by opening and closing "Hardware Configuration". This bug has been fixed in the new version.
AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-11 22.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” By putting values in "Primary Values" mode and clicking the "Export Comtrade", the information
is displayed correctly. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-11 22.04.10.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.10.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.10.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If the "Disable Get Actual"
option was enabled in one of the states and disabled in the other by moving the cursor in the "Signal
View", the RMS value in the Data Table would be displayed equal to "na". This bug has been fixed in the
new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-04
22.04.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When "Save Last Actual Data" was enabled, the RMS value was zero in some places.
This item has been modified in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-04 22.04.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In all
Rooms, after running the test, when "Actual" is active, its time is inserted at the bottom of the
screen, inside the parentheses. “” From now on, "Live Scroll" and "Live Scroll Actual" options cannot be
active at the same time. You can
also use "Live Scroll Actual" option for binaries. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-03-29 22.03.29.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.29.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.29.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A
new column called "Selectivity" has been added. If the measured voltage value is not clear and, for
example, it is higher than the selected mode, after the specified time in this, it changes to the next
mode so that the correct value of
the read voltage is displayed in "Signal view". “” If your micro device is Vivado7020, you can display
the phase and binary inputs frequency for long time in "Signal View". AMT SEQUENCER 2022-03-26
22.03.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The "Long Time Record" option has made it possible for the user to view values in "Signal View" for a
longer period. The minimum value you can consider for the "Sample Time" field is 100 milliseconds. AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems related to copying/pasting a line in "Ramp Assessment" have been fixed. AMT SEQUENCER
2022-02-09 22.02.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Calculations related to the Zero sequence illusion is now fixed in
the Symmetrical Component. “”By default, after clicking on Insert Z Shot, the voltage angles in the
three states prefault, fault, post fault are zero, -120 and 120 degrees, respectively. The current
angles in the fault state L1-L2-L3,
100% are calculated by working out the difference between the voltage angle and the line angle. AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Sequences related to group B flow were missing in the Calculations section and Show Signals section
which are added to the new version. It was also possible to assign the signals selected in the Show
Signals section to cursors in the
Data Table. For example, if you enable signals zero sequence I2, I0 negative sequence in the Show
Signals section, their value are shown correctly. “”From now on, by clicking on Insert Z shot, the
voltage angles in all three states are
equal to zero, -120 and 120. “”After selecting Stable Power Swing, you can add a simultaneous error with
stable power swing. “”In the System Frequency field, you can enter the desired frequency value in all
test cases. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-01-18
22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Table View, when the tables are reduced, you can change the time of each state
and the status of binary outputs and view them simultaneously in Detail View. “”The quality of the
images in the reports have been improved so that users do not have the problems in zooming and printing
as in the past. The problems that
existed in the display of Signal View, Vector View, Characteristic View and ZT Diagram in the reports
are now fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By default, Next Full and Start Time options are disabled before selecting the On GPS. AMT SEQUENCER
2022-01-04 22.01.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From now on, you can look for the xrio or rio file name in capital letters in the Search box of the
Load XRio and Rio file. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you activated the Statistical Output mode, after stopping the test and clearing the result, the
software crashed. This problem is fixed in the new version. “”In Detail View, sometimes in the Binary
Inputs section, the labels and values
for each binary were wrong. This bug has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-12-19
21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”It is possible to display and read the frequency in the range of 25 to 250 Hz by Binary Inputs. “”If
you set the signal frequency below 25 Hz in harmonic mode, the software would crash by selecting Orders
in Harmonic Type; this has been
fixed in the new version. “”Binary inputs graph in Signal view was not displayed correctly during the
test, this problem has been fixed in the new version. “”Differential and Overcurrent characteristics
were not displayed in the report
section which has been corrected. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-12-07 21.12.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”All power parameters
measured with Binary Inputs are displayed in Signal View. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the items related to the Step Values table are entered in decimal and in milliamperes, because the
accuracy of the numbers entered in this table is one milliampere, the software will round up those
numbers. “”Saving and retrieving
some files would cause an error exception, which has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-11-30 21.11.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”New math functions have been added to the Calculated Assessment. “”By opening saved files with Ramp
Assessment, the Act column is displayed correctly. “”New fields have been created in Calculations. In
previous versions, these fields
were located in the Setting tab of the Signal View window. AMT SEQUENCER 21.11.22.01 21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Once you enabled the Static Output and run the test, by stopping the test even by deleting the results
in Signal View, the test time were displayed as 4000 seconds. This case has been resolved. “”If the
result of multiplying the Order
column in the Frequency column is more than 2 kHz, the value of the Phase and Magnitude columns will be
zero for all current outputs. “”If you enable Frequency in Signal view, In the Step Ramp mode, and set
the Step Ramp Display to Rate
d / dt, by changing the Step Value, the signal was not displayed correctly, which is now resolved. AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-11-14 21.11.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Simulation", the Fault tab is added to create a power fluctuation error in the corresponding test
case. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” This version has resolved the issues with bugs in the static output icon. “” The "Level Assessment"
evaluation has been adjusted so that if the Tolerance column is entered with 100 milliseconds and 20
milliseconds for states 2 and 3,
respectively, and 1 and 0 for states 2 and 3 in the "Start" column, the evaluation disregards the final
100 milliseconds of state 1 and the initial 100 milliseconds of state 2, as well as the initial 20
milliseconds of state 3 and the
last 20 milliseconds of state 2. After this, the evaluation is completed based on the values entered. “”
Previously, when edits were made to the "Hardware Configuration" binaries, the numbers C1, C2, etc.
would not appear correctly in
the Comment and "Trigger Condition" columns of the "Table View" page. This issue has been resolved in
this version. “” If you enable any binary in "Hardware Configuration", the column containing the number
of states created appear in "Level
Assessment". “” In previous versions, the "Level Assessment" would display the assessment result before
running a test with changes to parameters, like changing the range value. This issue has been corrected
in this version. “” A new simulation
test case involving three parallel lines has been added. “” After enabling "Show Actual Type" for
binaries 9 and 10, the "Binary Analog Transformer" is updated. “” After changing the name of the
operation, the name of this signal is updated
in the "Setting" of the "Signal View" window. “” If you had saved a file in the Stable version while the
"Signal View" window was open, when you tried to open the same file on the Test version, the signal
wouldn't show up in the "Signal
View" window. However, this bug has been fixed in this new version. “” Once the file with THD has been
uploaded, the details for it are shown in the related table. “” You can copy and paste the data from a
single row in the "Ramp Assessment"
tab. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-25 21.10.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”You can see Total Harmonic Distortion THD when State
Type is on Harmonic. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-24 21.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When "State Type" is on "Transient",
when loading the comtrade file, if there was a rio or xrio with the name cfg and dat by opening the
comtrade file, the xrio file would not be loaded correctly. This is now fixed in the new version. “”In
Report Setting, level assessment
and Ramp Assessment options are disabled and enabled by default, respectively. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-21
21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Two new test cases are added in the Simulation section called Double Fault and Parallel Line, bugs and
other test case problems are fixed as well. “”In Vector View, if any of the vectors in the Show Arrow
column were false, the true
label would not change the status correctly, this is now fixed in the new version. “”When State Type is
on Harmonic, you can select the type interharmonic or Orders. Interharmonic mode is the same as before.
Orders mode can only be used
in one state. In this case, you can add different harmonics to the table by using the Add New Row and
Remove Selected Row buttons. Since the sampling speed of the AMT105 device for actuals is 400
microseconds and the speed of making the
diagram is 10 microseconds, so in this case, for actuals, it does not actually represent the exact of
what was injected. The number of signals selected in Hardware Configuration, Mag and Phase columns for
each signal in the Harmonic Order
section are added. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-09-23 21.09.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Signal View, when State Type is
placed on Transient. And you were on Current State and selected Magnitude Harmonic, by moving the cursor
in Vector View, the harmonic signal wasn’t displayed correctly. In this version this has been fixed.
“”This icon is designed to give
the user faster access to Calculations in the toolbar. “”After activating the Show Actual Type for each
binary, Select Graph for Actual Binary section is activated in the Signal View. With the number of
voltage and current outputs being
activated in Analog Output, you can select voltage and current output charts for each binary chart in
this section, as well as the charts of other binaries, and see this in Signal View. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-09-17 21.09.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Export Comtrade, if sampling rate is placed on 2 kHz, by opening the dat file from point 1001
onwards, the number recorded for time in the Comtrade file should be increased by 500 microsecond steps.
“”By clicking on Import Comtrade
while Set Mode is on Transient, the software crashed which is now fixed in the new version. “”A new
option called PID is created at the top of each Room. By using this option, you can send information to
AMPro Test software. It is important
to note that in order to send data, you must also enter port information in the relevant software. To
know the port information, you must go to the Room tab of Communication Mode in Setting. For example, in
C# a program for this is written
by Vebko developers. The amplitude, phase and frequency value for the first output of voltage group A is
written in this program and changes are visible in Vebko software. “”If you changing the frequency value
in the Offset Value table
in Step Ramp, the signal shape would not have been displayed correctly, which is now fixed in the new
version. “”From now on it is possible to load the xrio P142 and P342 relays in the Vebko software. AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Time Assessment, two new options called t_start and t_end are added in the Start and Stop
columns. By using these two options, the beginning or end of each state can be considered as the
beginning or end of the time assessment. “”It is acceptable to type the ID in capital letters “”If a
number greater than or equal to 24 is
entered in the Start Time field, the value is changed. Also, after running the test, the options in the
ON GPS field are disabled. “”When current outputs are in the form of used by right-clicking on the
Actual x 1.2... column in the Voltage
Output Signal section and selecting one of the options, the software crashed, but this is now fixed.
“”In previous versions, if you attributed an output to another group from one current or voltage group,
there would be a problem creating
ROCOF. For example, if you attributed the output of a current group B to the output of a current group
A, this bug would appear. This is now fixed in the new version. “”If Value Assessment or any other tab
is selected in Measurement View,
after opening the new file from the file menu, the Measurement View window is placed on the Time
Assessment tab by default. “”If a file contains a value in Time Assessment, after erasing the results,
the software would have crashed in
earlier versions. This problem is now fixed. “”After testing, you cannot change the binary output status
in the Analog Output table. “”In Step Ramp, a new section called Step Ramp Display is created. This
section contains two options:
Value and Rate d/dt. The Value option is the same as before. Rate d/dt is used to test functions that
work by changing the values of two elements, such as Over-excitaion. In the Over-excitaion function, the
rate of voltage and frequency
changes and their ratio to each other must be tested. One important point is that the chart in the fixed
Step time, is the same as switching between options. “”After taking the comtrade file from the software,
if the related file lacks
a digital signal, the 0D value for it will be recorded in the cfg file. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-08-23
21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new section called Calculations is added to the View menu. This section has been in the signal view
window of the Setting tab of the Operation section in the past, which has had problems such as not
renaming the signal, which is now
fixed in the new version. There will also be new features added to the Calculations window in the
future. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Signal View and in the Setting tab, by clicking on the Export Comtrade... button, all signals are
displayed in the Show Signals section, as a list in Export Comtrade, the Check channels to export:
section. “”When loading some xrio
files into *.xrio and *.xml formats, the conversion of quantity units are done by default regardless of
their unit e.g. kV or volt. “”Right-clicking on the first row of the table in Tracking mode is disabled.
“”If in Table View, the number
of states are more than 60, they are updated by moving scroll to the left and right of the values in
each state. “”A new tab is created in Measurement View called Tracking Assessment. This tab is used in
testing the Power Swing function.
Testing this function is important when the relay is blocking the distance relay after passing the outer
zone. To do this, you first need to list the points in Characteristic View in the First Point Time and
End Point Time columns in this
tab. The user selects the number of that shot and the selected number will appear in Characteristic
View. The time interval between the two points selected in the First Point Time and End Point Time
columns are calculated and evaluated.
“”By using the Default Color option, the color of each vector in Vector View can be restored to default
without the fault message appearing. “”In some xrio files after loading in the software, for parameters
that were Enumeration type,
the basis for comparing the ID parameter from the Value column is added. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-07-23
21.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If State Type is on Quick and Set Mode on Powers, by changing the Step Value, the output value
wouldn’t have changed, which is now corrected. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-07-17 21.07.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Ramp Assessment, when a Signal characteristic, is selected it is correctly shown in the Act column.
AMT SEQUENCER 2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Changes have been made in the Analog Output and Binary/ Analog Input tabs in Hardware Configuration.
To enable or disable the actual values in Analog Output, just in the Actual x1.2... column Enter a
coefficient of 1.2 one and two tenths
milliseconds, and it will also be disabled by entering zero. In Binary/Analog Input, to activate is
enough to, in the Show Actual Type column, select AC or DC to activate the Sampling Rate x 400us column
and enter a coefficient of 400
microseconds. “”If the names of ID are typed Persian in adding the parameter in the General Test Object,
a message is displayed to the user that the written characters are not accepted and returns to the
default name. “”If Type is on any
of the options, there will be a Default Color option in Vector View. “”In the Binary/ Analog Input and
Binary Output tabs to disable any of the used binaries, you can use the N key and alt+N combination key
to disable all binaries. As
you can see, the same can be done in the Binaries Output tab to disable binary outputs. “”In Analog
Output and the shown wirings 4x150V, 60VA @ 400mArms, 6x32A, 100VA @ 32A, 3Vrms, 5A and 12Vrms in the
Other section, Not Used button is
added. “”In the Value Assessment tab, two columns called Ratio and Assessment Settings are added. There
are two options for Automatic and Manual in Assessment Settings. In automatic mode, as before,
calculations are performed, but in Manual
mode, the Act cell is activated to order the number entered by the user in dev. calculation. The number
entered in the Ratio column is a coefficient to multiply in the nominal value to calculate Dev. These
options are made to test the
meter. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transient and in the Simulation tab, two stable
power swing and Single line test modes are added. Also, in Unstable power swing mode, a new field called
Measuring Location is added for the user to have the beginning and end of the line, current and voltage
during the oscillation. “”The
Default Color option in Vector View performs correctly. Immediately after selecting this option, the
color of the color column cell and the vector color in the graph are colored to the original color.
“”After opening the Overcurrent block
in AMT Sequencer, it can be seen that the Sensitive as seperate fault option is disabled. “”In some
cases, intense instantaneous peaks occur during testing which are not visible in Signal View. For this
purpose, an option called Sensitive
Signal View is added in the Setting so that such peaks can be viewed in Zoom Out and Optimize all modes.
AMT SEQUENCER 2021-06-06 21.06.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To enter the settings of Toshiba relays in the software that is in the form of a csv file, act in the
same way as before. For this purpose, in the General Test Object page, select the Toshiba relay template
from import from list section,
and then enter the csv file from the Load Relay Setting section. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-06-05 21.06.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The application of save last actual data option, which is located in the Extra Setting tab of the
Hardware Configuration page, is that if this option is enabled, if the Actual column of voltage or
current groups is enabled, in the software,
the saved data is coded and deleted after reaching a certain volume. “”To create stable power
oscillations, unstable power oscillations and create all kinds of faults, it is enough to place the
State Type on Transient, enable the Simulation
option and select the mode you want in the Simulation tab and perform the injection. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-05-26 21.05.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the new versions, if the test isn’t performed, in Measurement view, there is no results in the
Assessment column. “”In Step Ramp, if there is an offset, save and load the file again, the offset
values aren’t change. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-05-18 21.05.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Vector View, by selecting DC for binary inputs, binary input cells
with Show actual value on DC are disabled in Harmonic 1, Phase, Real and Imaginary columns. “”If you put
the first state on Step Ramp and the second state on Quick, the Continue Last State Amplitude option is
removed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-05-09
21.05.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After clicking on “Report Setting”, the two options “Show Grid Lines in Graphs”
and “Show Tolerances Lines” activate by default in General Setting. These two options are used to
display grid lines and tolerance when the “Impedance View” option is activated in “Report Setting”. “”In
the “Setting” tab of the “Signal
View”, a new option “Live Scroll Actual” is created in the “Extra Setting” section. This option is only
active if at least one of the actual value of voltage or current outputs is “True”. “”After changing the
“Type” from “Normal” to “Orange”
or the other options, the track bar in “Vector View” crashes. This bug is fixed in this version. “”After
loading some comtrade files, if the impedance is higher than a certain limit, the characteristic curve
was displayed as a straight
line, which is solved in this version. “”In “Ramp Assessment” and “Value Assessment”, if you set the
“Signal” column to “P1.Q1” or “P2.Q2” or “P3.Q3”, only the “Real” and “Imaginary” values are shown in
the “Signal Type” column. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-04-28 21.04.28.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Binary/Analog Input, if you right-click on the binary that is Not
Used, select set the same option, all binaries are Not Used. The application of this option is to unify
other binaries, similar to the selected binary. “”By going to Hardware Configuration and making changes
the software. does not crash
if in the Ramp Assessment for the Condition column, Logic had been chosen. “”In Tracking mode, during
and after testing the table and icon characteristics are disabled in Impedance View and the time of this
State Type is set to 2 milliseconds
by default. “”Combination Cable Setting and VDC Setting options are available for neutrik cable settings
and DC voltage in Hardware Configuration, respectively. These options are located in the Setting of the
main page of the software
and in the Hardware tab. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-04-21 21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Step Ramp mode, if you change
the offset values of the table values, they aren’t erased by going to Hardware Configuration and making
changes. “”Options are considered for displaying the actual values in the Show Signals section for S, P,
Q, Power Factor, Z, Current
Differential, and Phase Power Factor. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-04-17 21.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When a field is
linked to a parameter in rio, if the same was done for another field with the same parameter attributed,
the value was zero, which is now fixed in this version. “”By placing Set Mode on Overcurrent, sensitive
option is removed from fault
type list. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The dimensions of the Binary Analog Transformer
section in Signal View is corrected. when binaries 7 and 8 are enabled, you can see it in this section.
AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By stop testing manually, you can switch between the state's in Table View. “”To disable binary inputs
or binary outputs created in the Goose Settings tab, simply use disable Goose Settings by right-clicking
on any of the selected binaries.
“”If you create a block and add a parameter in the General Test Object, some characters cannot be
written in column ID, and if you use lowercase letters or unauthorized characters, a message is
displayed to the user and the software changes
them to capital letters and characters allowed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-23 21.03.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If binaries
are used to design the test, say two binaries are defined as X and the other binarys conditional, the
test did not perform the condition properly; this problem is now fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-17
21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After you import the scl file, the Min Repitation and Max Repitation columns are separated in the
Goose Setting tab. “”When the actual voltage and current values are enabled, if you open Vector View and
place type on Orange, the values
in the Vector View section are updated in the report. “”When the names of the state are changed, these
changes can be seen in the Ignore before and Ignore after columns in the Measurement View window. “”By
enabling the Trigger value and
going from the Analog Output tab to Trigger and vice versa, the value attributed to each binaries
remains constant. “”By right-clicking on Vector View and selecting Power and changing the Type to Orange
and moving cursor, the Real and
Imaginary values in the table will change. “”For current group B, the Symmetrical option is created in
Vector View. “”Values of Link to Xrio, remove link, go to linked value are corrected in Trigger logic
minimum time and Delay after binary
trigger fields. “”After enabling binary outputs, the related options are added in the Start and Stop
columns. One of the applications of this option is in testing the key performance time by AC voltage
method. There the user must enter
the time of bin Out. Using these options can make time easier to calculate. “”The 3V0 option in
Measurement View is added in the Ramp Assessment tab. “”In Right-clicking on some fields in Device
Settings new options are added. “”Change
the binary outputs to tabular form in Detail View and Table View. “”In all rooms, the device fan
activation icon is placed in the toolbar. In the past, to activate the device fan, you had to go to the
Settings page, the Hardware tab of
fan mode section. If the fan is active, the color is red and if it is inactive, it is blue. It should be
noted that if you are not connected to the device, this icon is disabled. “”This version of Service is
removed and a menu called Socket
Status is created at the top of each page. For this purpose, in Setting and in the Room tab, a field
called Connected Port is created in the Communication Mode section. There is also no longer AMProService
in the Services tab in the Windows
Task Manager. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-07 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The PCM option tick is removed. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you place Binary-Input Type on Wet Max 188 V Disable Error and its
Threshold on AC or DC, then inject more than this value, for example, 200 volts into the binary, there
is no error binary 1 OverVoltage. “”If binary 9 and 10, especially binary 9, are not enabled in binary/
analog input tab, didn’t put
its threshold on AC or DC and apply the current to binary 9 or voltage to binary 10, Binary Error 9
OverCurrent and Binary Error 10 OverVoltage faults don’t occur, respectively. For example, if only the
first output of the A current group
is enabled and binary 9 is disabled, if you currrent by two wires to binary 9 through the output of 1 A
current group, an Error IA1 Other error is displayed. “”If you put State Type on Step Ramp and then tick
Enable Reset and select Rate
Frequency, by giving the value to the frequency in the Start Values table and going to the Hardware
Configuration page, if you assign some value to the frequency column in step values and final values
tables, the frequency waveform is
disrupted, this is now fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-02-23 21.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The correct operation of
cut and paste option in the Binary / Analog Input tab of the Hardware Configuration page. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Goose Setting tab is enabled in the Hardware Configuration page and you can import SCL-format
files in the software. “”When one of the current outputs or voltage is active and the Show Actual is in
True mode, by selecting and activating
the other output, the Show Actual value is also in True mode. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-06-03 99.03.14.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding shortcuts such as pressing Scroll Mouse or right-clicking +alt on each state to opening detail
view as pop up. “”Adding the ability to perform mathematical operations in fields where numerical values
are entered. For example,
if you want to multiply sqrt2 by 10, simply enter the same operation in the relevant field.
“”Possibility of defining trigger condition in different parts of the software. This is normally done in
the trigger setting section, which is
also added to the table view window, and you can use the options that are placed for different
conditions. “”If you define a few states and need to make the states smaller, you can do this to all
states by right-clicking on the gear and
using small mode. “”If you have multiple active binaries in the measurement view section, you can select
the logic in start and stop conditions and by right-clicking the stop in the view custom setting section
to apply and define the requirements.
“”Adding the live scroll option to the Setting of signal View window. If you tick the live scroll
option, the software performs like an oscilloscope so the signal changes appear live in the Signal View
window. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-08-04
99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Table View, by right-clicking on each voltage and current groups, link magnitude
and Link Angles options for voltage and current are separated. For example, if you select link Magnitude
on a voltage group, you'll see that only voltages are linked together. It is also created for both
current groups A and B. These options
are also created in Detail View. For example, if you enable two current groups and link one of the
groups, the other group is not linked. “”The Link Angles Equal option works in such a way that all three
phases are linked for the same
value. For example, if the first phase enters at 45 degrees, all three phases are 45 degrees. Also, the
performance of the Link Angles Balance option when a value for each phase is entered, the other two
phases are balanced by a 120-degree
difference. For example, if you enter zero for the middle phase, there is 120 degrees difference from
other phases to this. “”For all Test View tabs in medium rooms such as Distance, Differential and
Overcurrent, link to Xrio option is
created and if needed, you can use this in tests. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By
writing a comment in the Table View window, this field could not be updated in the Detail View window,
which is now corrected. “”At the top of the Signal View window, the text box related to test status is
removed. “”In the Vector View
window, after performing the test and selecting type from Normal to Orange mode by moving Cursor, the
values related to Harmonic 1 column were miscalculated. “”It is also possible to zoom in on the track
bar section in the Signal View
and Vector View windows, which are linked together. “”By changing the state name and the time in the
"Detail View" window, the related fields in the "Table View" window are updated in small mode. “”There
are problems in changing state
type and updating tables related to that state, now are fixed. For example, by selecting State Type in
Step Ramp mode and placing Set Mode on ZI Constant, related tables to this mode are displayed, be have
after changing the State Type
to Harmonic mode, the tables were not displayed. “”Trigger is linked in the Detail View and Table View
windows. “”By enabling the Data Table in the Signal View window, and selecting cursors on any signal,
these values are displayed in
the Report. “”In Signal View, by enabling the Data Table, scroll down is removed and its size is
automatically adjusted. “”In the Detail View window, by selecting Step Ramp and placing Set Mode on
Powers, if the reactive power value changes
in the Step Values table, in the Signal View window, after enabling the reactive power waveform in
Setting, this waveform is displayed correctly. “”In the General Test Object page, Show/Hide option tick
is removed by default. “”In the
bottom panel of the Characteristic View window, two Extended Zone options are created in Impedance View
to display extended zones and the Horizontal Axis is Relative checkbox in Overcurrent Characteristic to
display the horizontal axis
in terms of nominal current. Also in overcurrent characteristic, pan mode and snap to grid options are
created. “”In Step Ramp mode for Distance and Differential Set Modes, changes points can be seen in
these two modes for all fault types.
In the Characteristic View window, for distance and differential characteristics, differential and
impedance currents can be seen in different fault types. “”By changing the characteristic type, its icon
also changes in the toolbar. “”In
the Signal View window, lines can be bolded by clicking on the Digital chart. “”In Tracking mode and in
Impedance View, by enabling Bold selected row in tracking, the added points in each row of this window
are displayed on the characteristic
curve. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-05 99.08.15.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Signal View, you the line bold by clicking
on the digital chart “”In sequencer, the problem with the link magnitudes option in the step ramp mode
is fixed. “”the filter by sender unit did not work the problem is no solved. “”by double-clicking on any
the blocks in Link to XRio
window the software used to crash now if is fixed. “”After linking to XRio of a field, the color of the
field changes in the selected and deselected mode. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-08 99.08.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you are in Current State mode, by clicking All State, optimize all mode is created in the Signal
View window. “”If a window closes, by clicking on its icon reopens it. “”If a module is open, without
any changes to the previous module,
the message box that saves the closed module information is not displayed. “”If you have selected the
Overcurrent icon in Normal mode in the Impedance View window, by changing it to "Transient" while the
icon of the overcurrent is disabled
in this window, distance is displayed by default. “”In Transient mode, the characteristic curve is
displayed by selecting a differential comtrade file and clicking on the Differential icon in the
Characteristic View window. “”By clicking
the combination keys of each window, the related window opens, while in previous versions, the software
return to thirty seconds by pressing the combination keys. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-10 99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”the signal view high light for state 1 is gone when current state is clicked. Removing the view option
from right-click of the z-graph at the bottom of the cursors. “”Removing the optimize y option from
right-click of z-graph and digital
charts in signal view page “”If Signal View is closed by adding or subtracting states, the trackbar is
refreshed in the Vector View. “”saving and loading the xrio file is fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-14
99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The word Link in Extra Setting tab has been corrected in Hardware Configuration window. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-15 99.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Sequencer, if you're in a state other than State 1, highlight for Current State doesn't disappear.
“”If Communication Mode is in Integrated System mode, by double-clicking on a file when we are connected
to the device, we stay in
device connection mode in the opened window. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-16 99.08.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Immediately
after testing, the start button is deactivated. “”In Hardware Configuration and in the Analog Output
tab, if one of the values of voltage or current is initially “Not Used” in their tables then the Show
Actual Value is ticked, after activating
the “not Used”, voltage or current is the value changes from False to True. “”Correct performance of
Test Hardware Configuration in Transducer and especially Sequencer “”If a file has a result, by
reopening it and applying changes to the
device, you can see the changes made by reopening the same file. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Graphic change of track bar in Signal view. “”I2/I1 value is false in Vector View table, also this
value lacks units no volts, no amps, no ohms and no volt-amps And on the other hand, sometimes the size
of this vector became too large
and off the chart, which has also been corrected. “”If the vector color changes in Vector View, by
right-clicking and selecting Default Color, the changed color returns to the default color. “”Solving
the problem in transient table: By
loading a comtrade file, the channel name of this file would have crash the table. “”In loading comtrade
files, the fault of all signals are displayed. “”From now on, none of binary outputs are enabled by
default. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-23
99.09.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”high light of signal view for state 1 disappears when you click on Current State.
“”Without opening Report View window, you can use Export Report option in File menu. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transient, if there is a voltage fault by disabling voltages in Hardware Configuration, the fault
isn’t displayed. “”Correcting binary threshold values of Input 9 and 10. “”In Test Object and in Device,
all link to XRio fields can
be changed. “”Added three items IE1, IE11 and I sensitive to output target column in Current Output
Signal section in Hardware Configuration: so that if all phases of current group A are active and IE1 is
selected for the first phase of
current group B, in fact, the sum of all currents in group A are shown in this phase. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-26 99.09.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Added min and max values for threshold as well as false and true reverse values for binary inputs 9
and 10. “”By switching from All State to Current State, the total state signal selected in Signal View
is highlighted. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-28 99.09.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In general, if the frequency in any of the available tables in Detail
View is zero, the angle is also zero. “”If the Rate Value per Second option in Step Ramp is selected,
the values in step values table are be in seconds and would return to their original state by changing
State Type to Quick Values. “”Adding
reset Values option in Quick mode. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Step Ramp and in
the Start Values table, the frequency is Link to Frequency, by changing the frequency in the Step Values
table, as well as by right-clicking and changing DC and Nominal Values, the frequency column values stay
linked. “”Optimize calculations
in Step Ramp if the Con. in Ferq Step option is ticked. “”By selecting Overcurrent in Impedance View by
clicking on the no trip area, magnetic cursor will go to the top of the characteristic view and will not
fade. “”By changing the current
value in the Analog Output Channels section, magnetic cursor is moved on the current axis. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Hardware Configuration page in the Binary/ Analog Input tab, of the description column is
deleted by changing the Show Result column from True to False. “”Step up and Down keys function in Quick
mode have been corrected when Set
Mode is placed on Overcurrent or Differential mode. “”In Quick mode, magnetic cursor is moved by
clicking step up or step down in Characteristic View. “”Adding the Link Magnitudes option to the
available options in the right click of the
Magnitude column in Vector View. “”For rotation and movement in phases, L1 L2 L3L3 L1 L2 option is added
to the right clicks of Phase and Magnitude columns. This option is also enabled when all voltage and
current outputs are active and
of AC kind. “”By clicking on the Link Angles option Equals in the Phase column, all phases will be the
same and by clicking on link angles Balance, this option will be disabled. “”If you have entered the
frequency at zero, clicking the
Phase column will not display some options in Vector View and Table View. Also, if the signal is DC, in
Detail View by right-clicking on the Phase column, there are only Link to XRio, Remove Link and Go to
Linked Value options. “”Added
Go to Linked Value option in Vector View. “”Fix Show/Hide option in Vector View. “”By tapping Copy to
Clipboard, for example, in the Vector View window of AMT Differential room, values are added to the
table using the Paste from Vector
View Clipboard option in right-clicking the Table View in AMT Sequencer. “”In Measurment View in all
tabs, right click options are enabled. For each tab, the Show/Hide option has been created exclusively.
“”When Set Mode is in Power mode,
it is activated for the parameters of active power, reactive power and The apparent power of link to
magnitude and Equal to Magnitude options is enabled.. “”In Table View, state can be removed by
right-clicking on each state, using the
Delete option. Clicking on this option will erase the same state and by clicking Marked State and
Unmarked State, the selected or unselected states will be deleted. “”In Table View, by selecting the
Append option on any state you are,
that state will be added to the end of the state. There is another option called Default State, which
creates the last state with default values by selecting it. Also the icon of this option has been added
to the toolbar. “”Default State
has been added to the Insert Before and Insert After options available in right-clicking states. “”If
data table is enabled in Signal View, the unselected signal value will be displayed by selecting one of
the signal drop-down field options
not ticked in Settings by moving cursor or writing time in the table. “”If State Type is on Harmonic
mode, by enabling and disabling current or voltage groups, the zero value for them #1 Free-Order
Harmonic tables and #2 Harmonic Free-Order
in the table is considered by default. “”In Measurement View, Go to Linked Value, Remove Linked and
Linked to Xrio options have been removed from the right click of cells that only take text. Also, Go to
Linked Value option has been added
to the right click of other cells. In addition, right-clicks of columns such as T Act., T Dev. and
Assessment, which are valued after testing, have been disabled. “”The Rate Frequency option is created
in Step Ramp mode by enabling Enable
Reset option. This option is designed for ROCOF. For example, if the frequency increases from 10 Hz to a
nominal frequency with 0.1 Hz stairs, the signal shape changes according to what you see in Signal View.
“”For some Set Modes such
as Power or ZI Constant the frequency column has been disabled. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-17 99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Insert Z Shot, the current value of the I test is based on the nominal current. If you change this
value, in Table View and Detail View, these values will be changed equally. “”All times sent by the
device are correct multiples of
400 microseconds in 1 millisecond. If the user enters a time of 1 millisecond, this number is divided
into 400 and becomes the nearest number,2 milliseconds. “”If State Type is on Tracking mode, you'll see
the correct show of binary outputs
signal by zero and one binary outputs because the start time is set to 2 milliseconds by default. “”By
right-clicking on the Signal column in Vector View, two options copy to Clipboard and Show/Hide are
displayed. “”All colors changed,
especially in cells such as Table View, Detail View and Vector View. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-28
99.10.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After selecting a signal in “Show Signals” and ticking the related tick in “Settings”, chart will be
displayed in Signal View. “”If the signal is DC, after linking the value of the phase column of the same
signal with the parameter in
XRio after tapping the Balance Angle in the other signal phase column, the value of the DC signal phase
column does not change. “”In all rooms, this window closes by pressing the Esc key in the General Test
Object screen. “”Except AMT
sequencer , In any other room, by pressing the combination keys Ctrl+Shift+t, the related block for the
same room opens on the General Test Object page. For example, if you are in AMT Synchronizer, after
simultaneously tapping these keys,
the Synchronizing Parameters window opens. Also, in all rooms, the Device Settings window opens by
tapping Ctrl+Shift+d. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-10 99.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”New wiring have been added in the “Hardware Configuration“ and in the “Analog out“ tab. This way, if
one of the main outputs is out of order, the same voltage and current can be supplied from other
channels to perform the wirings. For
example, there are three models of wirings an shown 1 * 150, 120VA @ 800mArms, while previously only the
output of 1 voltage group A was available for the user. However, if for any reason this output is out of
order, outputs 2 and 3 of
voltage group A can be used. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-11 99.10.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "Hardware Configuration"
and in "Binary / Analog Input" there is a section called "Virtual Binary Input" with three options
"VBin1", "VBin2" and "VBin3", and a section called "Virtual Binary Output" with three options "VBout1",
"VBout2" and "VBout3". After activating
each of the relevant options in the columns "Binary-Input Target", "Binary-Input Label", "Binary-Output
Target" and "Binary-Output Label", some options are added. For example, after checking the option
"VBin1", the options "VBin1-1" to
"VBin1-32" appear in the columns. These two parts are used in "GOOSE". AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-16
99.10.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting “Select File to Merge” you can merge two files of this room. After selecting the desired
file and states, in the event of deviations in “Hardware Configuration”, the user is asked for each
added states whether or not to
apply the changes in Hardware configuration to the added states?! If the user clicks “yes”, a state will
be added to the file due to the existing changes in Hardware Configuration. Clicking “No” does not add a
state. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-27
99.11.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you select all 6 current outputs from the "Hardware Configuration", the "Phase"
and "Frequency" columns are displayed in the "Detail View" if "Set Mode" is "Overcurrent: ITest". AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-01-28 99.11.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Setting Threshold value after selecting the "Set all binary like this" option in the "Binary / Analog
Input" tab. “”After selecting "Apply VDC" in "Hardware Configuration" and performing the test, the
auxiliary DC AUX DC switches off
when the test is finished. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-28 99.11.09.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”by clicking on the "Distance"
block in the "Test Object, you will go to “Distance Protection Parameters” page. There you can see a
picture that shows the connection of the current and voltage transformer in "CT Start Point" and "PT
Connection" AMT SEQUENCER 2021-02-01
99.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If only one output of voltage group A is active and the "Output Target" and "Output
Label" of the other output are used, the current of voltage group A is the same. If only the second
output of voltage group A is active and you select "VL1-E" for "Output Target" and "Output Label", the
actual current of voltage group
A in microamps, will be the same as if only output 1 of the voltage group A is active.
AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you select Connected Voltage system 1 in three-phase
mode, you can see the vector displacement by moving the cursor in the Vector View. AMT SYNCHRONIZER
2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After running the Shot Test, all the points had failed. This issue has been resolved in the latest
version. For instance, this file was tested in prior versions and if Recalculate was clicked, it would
be recalculated and any points
that had been failed mistakenly would pass. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-10-29 21.10.29.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.29.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.29.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you
change the status of binaries in Hardware Configuration, you can stop or perform the test according to
the new changes. For example, if you move Bin 1 to Bin 6, the changes are applied correctly. It is
important to note that after changing
binaries, the modified binary in the Binary must be redefined Trigger tab. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-09-12
21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Shot Test tab, after adding points, the names Tripping and No-Tripping are changed to Closing
and Non-Closing. “”By changing "Reference Signal" in "Vector View", ∆∅ lines are replaced. “”CB Closed
and Close Cmd vectors are added
to Vector View. These vectors are False by default. The pass and fail conditions of the points are
changed to the placement of the CB Closed vector within the allowed area of the operation. “”After
changing the voltage value of system
2, its vector is optimized in vector view graph. “”If a point is added in the Synchronizer tab by using
the Add button, the system vector 2 should be moved by changing the cursor in Vector View. AMT
SYNCHRONIZER 2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Angle tolerance lines are created in Vector View. These lines can be changed in "Phi Tolerances".
“”In the “Synchronizer” tab, the values of the column “When CB Close” were calculated incorrectly after
performing a test. Which is now corrected in the new version. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Test View, a new button called Quick Test is available. After pressing this button, 8 test points
are created on the boundary areas in the synchronizer characteristic. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-04-21
21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After opening Vector View, the performance area is shown in the Vector Diagram. The performance area
between the two dashes is green. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After completing the test, the fields in Synchronizing Parameters were enabled, which is now fixed.
“”There is no “Linked to XRio” option for inactive fields. Also, Remove Link and Go to Linked Value
options are enabled for the fields
on which the Linked to XRio option has already been applied. “”The Optimize All Change Fault Type option
is removed from the Signal View settings. Also, if you select a point in Out of Range by changing the
frequency of system 1, the value
is shown correctly in the Synchronizer Characteristic especially for points where the frequency was
higher than the nominal frequency. “”After changing tabs, the trackbar time in Vector View is updated.
AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To pass or fail shot and synchronizer tests, the condition is also included. Also, by default,
the fault time for the shot test is changed to 25 seconds. This time change is due to the fact that if
the angle is not within the allowed range, it will have enough time to reach this range. In the past,
the allowed range in Vector View
was not defined. To get this range, simply add or subtract the angle written in the column ∆Phi from the
nominal angle of system 2. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you place system 1 on L1L2L3 in the Synchronizer Propertise page, after going to the Hardware
Configuration page, you will see that the values in the Output Label column change in the Voltage Output
Signal section. It is also important
to note that system 2 cannot be placed on L1L2L3. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In
the "Trigger" tab of the "Binary Setting" section, the icons next to the combo box fit the format
displayed inside the field. Real Value can be viewed in "Signal View" by ticking the Show Actual Value
option and adding a point and performing
the test. “”In the Check Test tab, by enabling the Show Actual Value option after performing the test
and clearing the results, the values in Vector View are displayed correctly. “”The conditions of "Pass"
and "Fail" tests are corrected
and specified. “”In the "Shot Test", "check test" and "Synchronizer" tabs, the "Relative" option is
removed. “”After performing "Shot Test" and saving the file and its results, after reopening the file,
the column icon "Assessment" is
changed from "Pass" and "Fail" to "Out of Range", which is corrected. ”In the "Shot Test" tab, the size
of the "Act" column is corrected and the content inside is displayed correctly. ”In the "Shot Test" tab,
when a value in the "User
Comment" column and "Enter" key was clicked, the software crashed which is now fixed. “”In the "Check
Test" tab, the "Linear" group box is removed. “”In "Synchronizer Characteristic" when the "Show All tAct
Point" option is enabled, the
software isn’t crashed. “”In the toolbar, an icon is designed for "Synchronizer Characteristic"
separately. This window can also be accessed from the "View" menu of the "Synchronizer View" option.
“”In the "Shot Test" and "Check Test"
tabs, by right-clicking on the table of these tabs and selecting the "Recalculate Point" option, the
software crashed which is now fixed. “”After performing the "Synchronizer" test and saving it, there is
no problem opening this file and
loading properly. “”Also, after testing and going to the "General Test Object" window and returning to
the test page, the software isn’t crashed. “”After performing the "synchronizer" test, by going to the
"Shot Test" and "Check Test"
tabs, the points tested in "Synchronizer" are also observed in these tabs, which are corrected. As you
can see, after the "Synchronizer" test, the points selected for the test aren’t added to other tabs. You
can also make a report of your
test results in this module. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In AMT Synchronizer,
section related to the post fault is corrected for all points, so that if there is a close command in
fault, the signal of system 2 is in post fault according to the signal of system 1. Otherwise the signal
of system 2 have the same prefault
value. “”The AMT Synchronizer characteristic was not displayed in the report which is now fixed. AMT
SYNCHRONIZER 2020-11-26 99.09.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After changing the Generator Model in the Type column of the Synchronizer test points table, all
fields will be updated in the Generator Model section. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-11-30 99.09.10.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.10.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.10.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Synchronizer, by changing Connected Voltage in Test Object, the names of the respective fields in
the Shot Test and Synchronizer tabs also change. These changes are also visible in Hardware
Configuration. “”Two binary outputs called
Start and Stop are added to the Synchronizer tab, so that start in states 1 and 2 and Stop in post fault
are short circuits, respectively. “”Larger values of ∆V⁄∆t and ∆F⁄∆t in Synchronizer “”Larger text boxes
in the Test Object chart
section in Synchronizer “”possibility to view the movement of voltage vectors of system 2 in Vector View
during testing in Synchronizer “”Chart Correction in Synchronizer Characteristic: Correction of Lines
Drawn in Synchronizer Test “”Report
fixes in Synchronizer “”By right-clicking on the table and selecting Recalculate Point lines if changed,
they will be recalculated and corrected. “”Added Snap Shot option to report settings in Synchronizer
“”By default, the Show Row Number
option is enabled in Synchronizer Characteristic. “”In Synchronizer in the direction where the line
rotates, Show Row is displayed on the other side of the line. “”The fault time for Synchronizer field
value is set to 50 seconds by default
in Settings. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Synchronizer, the information entered
in the Connected Voltage field affects system 1 and system 2 angles and is visible in Signal View.
“”Transformer Group Phase Shift field calculations were considered. In this field, a phase change if any
is specified, resulting from an
optional block or coupling transformer. This value is given in degrees from 360 degrees to minus 360
degrees. “”After recalculate in synchronizer test, you can tap New and open a new synchronizer page. AMT
SYNCHRONIZER 2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Synchronizer, the delay after trigger field value in the Settings tab is linked to the
CB close time field value in the CBConfiguration block. “”In synchronizer test, by changing values from
secondary to primary, in the Test View window table, the deltaV/deltaT column ,The volt unit per second
is converted to kilovolt per
second. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-01-11 99.10.22.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After adding test points to the given curve
and by going to the "General Test Object" window, the values of all test points will not be zero upon
closing.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new option called "Voltage Method" has been added
to the tension functions. This option measures the voltage from actual voltages or binary values. The
assembling illustration is added to the "Setting" tab. “” When the voltage functions were tested for the
first time, by updating the
file using New and retesting the voltage functions, all the points were out of range. This problem is
fixed in the new version. “” If the "Symmetrical" option was activated, after testing the points in the
negative area, the symmetrical
points were moved to the positive area. This error has been corrected in the new version. “” If the
"Symmetrical" option is not active, when the value of Input was changed from negative to positive, the
value of Input was displayed in
red in the "Test View" window. This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version. “” If you selected
the option "Symmetrical", when checking the points in the negative range, the actual injection time
differed from the displayed time,
which is now corrected. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2022-04-23 22.04.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” According to the values
selected by the user from the “Minimum Value”, “Maximum Value”, and “Saturation Range” fields, “Bin. 10”
or “Bin. 1” are selected to measure the voltage. If the maximum value of these three fields is greater
than 200 mV, “Bin. 1” is used
otherwise “Bin. 10” is selected. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2022-04-21 22.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The possibility
of testing the transducers with an output of 1 volt is created using Bin. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER
2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When the Input Meter is on Read from Binary and in the Output, the Open Loop option is selected, the
calculations for the online meter test have been updated. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 21.11.22.01 21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If Test Mode is selected as Mechanism or Output is set on the Open Loop in the Shot Test section,
there will be no problem to change the Time field. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Two options, "I houre" and "V hour", have been added to the "Function" section. “” In the "Transducer
Properties"section, if Function is set to "Power Factor"and Characteristic Type is set to "Quadratic",
attempting to switch Function
to "V hour" would cause the software to crash. However, this bug has been rectified in this version. AMT
TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Clear Actual Data option is created by right-clicking on the table of points. This option can be
used to remove the actual values of analog signals in the online meter test. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER
2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Online values of the meter are added in the table of points as well as in the report. AMT TRANSDUCER &
METER 2021-08-02 21.08.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Reference Meter option is created in the Transducer Propertise input meter section. According to
the selection of reference meter energy, in function, based on the watt hour Wh or var hour varh and the
number of puls should be entered
in the Ref in and Ref Out fields, respectively. The puls received from reference meter are sent to
binary 4 and the desired meter to binary 8. It should be noted that reference meters can be measured in
every 4 quadrants of the power chart,
usually measuring active and reactive energy. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-07-23 21.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In offline meter test, 5 test modes are defined in Test View. “”Load: Injection of current and voltage
for a specified period of time to check the overall performance of meter. “”Mechanism: Injection of
nominal current and voltage for
the specified amount of energy. “”"Mechanism": Dieser Testmodus ermöglicht die Einspeisung einer
bekannten Energiemenge in den Zähler für einen definierten Zeitraum. “”Injection: Continuous voltage and
current injection to check connections.
“”No-Load: Injection of nominal voltage and zero current, to check the performance of Meter. In this
section, there is also a time relation for the minimum duration of the test. “”Creep: Injection of 0.5%
nominal current with nominal voltage
to check start counting Meter. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-07-16 21.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To create pulse
manually, a new button is created in the Output Details section called Pulse Manual. AMT TRANSDUCER &
METER 2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transducer Properties, a new section called Pulse Type is added. In this section, the user can
specify whether the pulse count is based on the upward or downward edge. “”Depending on the meter, you
can select 3-Phase 4 wire or 3-Phase
3 wire modes in Transducer Properties. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-04-11 21.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the
online test of the meter, by changing the input status from Injection to Read from Binary, the points
added to the table are cleared. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By switching from primary to secondary and vice versa, this change does not affect the output in
Signal View. “”In the online test calibration of the meter by Clamp, the dc shift value is token into
account. For example, if values in
Transducer Properties are selected as such, the fields in the test Hardware Config for binary 5 are
displayed correctly. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After adding a few points and clicking on one of them and going to the Test Object window and clicking
on OK, by returning to the Test View window, magnetic cursor will remain on the same spot selected in
Transducer Characteristic. “”If
Output is an Open Loop function, after testing, a box is displayed for the user to take the read value
from the user and after entering it, the test will continue or end if there is a point or points. AMT
TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-03-23
21.03.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If points are added before changing the table of points, by changing the output
in Transducer Properties they are removed. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-03-17 21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Voltage
and current values, active, reactive power and energy for online meter testing are displayed online.
“”Run a Varh function test online correctly “”In some functions such as Phase [V-V], Phase [I-I], DC
Current, etc. The Number of Phases
section should not be enabled. In the past, if such functions were selected, this section would be
activated by pressing the OK button and going back to the Transducer Properties page. “”By selecting the
Phase [V-I] function, the field
values in Advance View are displayed correctly by selecting points. “”By enabling the L-L Voltage
function, the Generator Setting section is corrected. “”Power Factor correction and negative gradient
value is created for all functions
even in Symmetrical mode. “”A new option is created in Settings called Settle Time. The time of this
option is at the beginning of fault and during this time the voltage and current are injected, but no
calculation is done. “”If you select
one of the functions of Wh or Varh from the Transducer Properties page and put Input on Read from Binary
mode, the test points are changed in the Test Point section. “”In the Power Factor test, advance view,
Generator Settings and Power
Factor Sign sections are corrected. In the x-axis diagram, it represents the angle and this angle is
obtained from the algebraic sum of voltage and current angles. If it is pre-phase Capacitive Circuit
Leading Power Factor, the current
waveform is ahead of the voltage, and if it is after phase Inductive circuit Lagging Power Factor, the
voltage waveform is ahead of the current. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you open a saved file, all output and input values are displayed correctly. “”As you can see, the
points inside the tolerance failed, and that's because the tolerance values were calculated based on
Relative. In this version, both
Relative and Absolute conditions are considered, which by hitting the Recalculate Point option, the
points inside the tolerance are recalculated and passed. Also, the values of the points are displayed
correctly after activating the Show
Row Number and Show AllAct Point options in the Transducer Characteristic window. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER
2021-02-23 21.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Quadratic chart is added to the Transducer Propertise window. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-02-22
21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The value of device error column in the table of points is corrected after the test is performed. If
the point evaluation is failed, the ‘na’ value is inserted in this column. “”Correcting the field format
in the Test Point section based
on the selected functions in the Transducer Propertise page. “”If you enable symmetrical option from
transducer Propertise page, the current limit is set from -200 to +200 mAh and for voltages from -500 to
+500 mV. Also, there have been
writing modifications in some fields. “”The Pulse option in the Transducer Propertise page is enabled
when one of the Wh or Varh options is selected in the Functions section. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER
2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "AMT Transducer" after adding a point, the "Device Error" column is uneditable. “”After performing
the test in Signal View, for the binaries 9 and 10 waveforms weren’t displayed which is fixed and also
the results are recorded in
the table. “”In the "Shot Test" tab, the "Apply to" fields and "Wave Form" box cannot be edited. AMT
TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-08-17 99.06.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you open a saved file that has results, the Absolute Error and Device Error columns are updated and
visible. “”By opening “Report view” the Transducer characteristic is visible in the report. “”By using
the “Communication” option,
you can send a Packet to any device using a LAN cable, serial port or wifi. in the “Communication” page,
you can add as many ethernet and serial modules as you want. Packet is sent separately by pressing the
Send button in each module.
You can use the Start Send option to send all packets. If the field next to this option is on Each in
Term, all packets are sent in series, and if it is on All together, you can send all packets at the same
time by having the number of
LAN and Serial ports. there would be More details in the upcoming training videos. AMT TRANSDUCER &
METER 2020-11-14 99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transducer by going to Test Object in meter mode, it can be observed that saturation is removed.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-11-15 99.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transducer, a new option called WH/pulse Detection has been added in the Test Hardware Config. The
function of this option is that voltage and current are injected before testing and at least two pulses
must be read in order to read
the value of watt hour, the last pulse and the average value. “”Inside the Transducer Properties window
in tolerance section, default value of the Relative field is 0.25%. By changing the secondary and
primary values, it does not affect
the output values and only affects the input values. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-11-16 99.08.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Symmetrical option was added in Transducer for negative power injection in meter test. AMT TRANSDUCER
& METER 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The minimum pulse displayed on the characteristic changed from 10 pulses to 100 pulses. “”To test the
meter in Transducer, for example, if the number of pulses is 100, watt hour is 500 kW, the ratio of CT
conversion 2000 to 1 and the
ratio of PT conversion is 400 kV to 110 selected, then adding the point to the table is added to the
desired value table and is not the same as previous versions of Out of Range. “”In Transducer and in
advanced view section, changes have
been made to voltage values in low powers injection. “”The minimizing and maximizing problem in
Transducer, causing no display or delay in the Characteristic View display, is fixed. “”Moving points in
Transducer based on Input Act and
Output Act values “”In Meter for inject mode, the test time is added to 110% of the time of a pulse
inside the Time field. “”In Meter, the shape of the characteristic curve has been corrected. “”In Meter
and in the table, the calculation
results related to fault of the meter is added and the relative and absolute columns are removed.
“”Remove fault types from settings tab in AMT Transducer & Meter. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-11-23
99.09.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transducer, by opening Test Object and changing output to, for example, Current, the value of
Tr-Output changes to amps in the Maximum value field, and by re-opening this window and going to
Transducer Properties the changes applied
to this field are the same. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
In Transducer, Signal
View is updated by changing the output function. “”In Transducer, if the values of the “Maximum value”
field in “Tr-Output” column change, values don’t change when you exit this window and return to it
again. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-12-15
99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If Number of phases is selected single-phases, the default values for voltage
and current are considered by clicking advance view and selecting L1 L2 L3. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER
2020-12-17 99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Linking values inside the test table with Available Values in Advance View including Test Phase with
Test Phase and Generator Setting sections in Advance View. In single-phase mode and when meter functions
are used, by adding multiple
points in different phases and selecting each row, the values are displayed in the Generator Settings
section. “”After selecting Symmetrical inTransducer Properties, you can add points to the test table in
the negative part of the curve.
“”In Maximum value fields for values less than one, the curve is displayed in Transducer Properties. All
Absolute, Relative and Cycle Time units have been corrected in watt hour and var hour. AMT TRANSDUCER &
METER 2021-01-31 99.11.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”correcting the area “Out of Range”
AMT TRANSIENT 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new ROM called "AMT Transient" has been added. The use
and functions of this ROM will be explained in future instructional videos.
AMT VI STARTING 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the past it was not possible to see changes in the
tolerance values on the characteristic curve. There was also no voltage in the "Shot Test" tab in
Prefault. These problems have been fixed in the upcoming version. AMT VI STARTING 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Previously, once the "Voltage References" was changed, the characteristic curve was displayed
incorrectly in "PickUp-DropOff"; this bug has been fixed in the new version. AMT VI STARTING 2021-10-24
21.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”PickUp-DropOff test is performed as a ramp step. AMT VI STARTING 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The
PickUp-DropOff tab is added in this room. “”In the PickUp-DropOff tab, draw Straghit Line option is
added to VI Starting Characteristic. By enabling this option, the user can only draw the right line. You
can also use the Q shortcut key.
“”A marker is added to the lines drawn in the PickUp-DropOff tab, which is moved by moving the cursor in
Signal View. AMT VI STARTING 2021-09-23 21.09.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In VI Starting parameters, two options rel and abs are created to change the numbers. AMT VI STARTING
2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”According to the new formula for calculating two-phase faults in AMT VI Starting room, the Out of
Range area is corrected. AMT VI STARTING 2020-11-14 99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Voltage References section is created in the Settings tab of VI Starting Room for each Fault type
and correcting the report of this case. “”If there is no search line, the ignore nominal Characteristics
section, Disables in Settings
tab.
AUTORECLOSURE 2022-01-18 22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In AutoReclosure, by pressing the Init Test button, all parts
of the assessmet are updated. AUTORECLOSURE 2021-07-25 21.07.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”You can add DC Decay and
Harmonic to a fault signal. AUTORECLOSURE 2021-05-26 21.05.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Two HSR and TDR modes are
added to the Type drop-down field. In TDR, 4 state Prefault, Fault, Dead Time, Reclaim Time, but in HSR,
there are 6 state Prefault, Fault, Dead Time, Fault, Dead Time, Reclaim Time. HSR is also called Fast
mode. AUTORECLOSURE 2021-05-25
21.05.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Binary Input section and in the Signal column, the Received Signal parameter
for the DTT signal is added. AUTORECLOSURE 2021-04-11 21.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Room is created to test
the Auto reclosure function. The steps to test this function are written in a box at the top of the
page. First, it is necessary to complete the Data Table section based on the functions set on the relay,
and then in the second step, introduce
the trip status for binary inputs of the device. The Binary Output section is key for simulation and its
status is determined by the user in four stages: Prefault, Fault, Dead Time and Reclaim Time. In the
Time Assessment section, according
to what the observer and test the man have considered based on the test conditions, the test assessment
is determined.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2023-09-14 23.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Additional information has been added
to the Test Object CVT room. The fields Year, Company, and Country have been added to the existing
information. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The issue of images enlarging after double-clicking on them has been resolved. “”The problem of adding
reports after clicking the "Add to Report" button and also the issue of not displaying the available
options in the report settings
button has been fixed. “” CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Henceforth,
in this room, before performing the relevant tests in the tabs “Secondary Burden”, “Winding Resistance”
and “Short-Circuit Impedance”, it is better to complete the “Test Setting” section first, then the
“Hardware Config” section, and finally,
the “Report Setting” section. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2022-05-09 22.05.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In
the Test Object, a field to determine the type of phase under test and three fields to determine the
capacitance when CVT is selected, has been added. If VT is selected, these three capacitor fields are
removed. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT
2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” By clicking on "Insert Rows", only phase A is added from now on, and
the possibility of phase change to B and C has been created. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2022-03-08
22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "Ratio and Polarity" tab, a new field called "Use voltage booster" has been added. By choosing
"Other" and if you have a transformer up to 2 kV, you can perform this test according to the specified
coefficients. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVT 2022-02-23 22.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By changing the assessment in Assessment, the test result
change. “”To read the primary voltage from Bin 5, you must select Analog Input in the Primary Meas
field. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Voltage Measurement Mode section has been added to the Winding Resistance tab. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVT 2021-11-30 21.11.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Secondary Burden section, problems concerning reports have been fixed. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMER CVT 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”With removing the row in the data table in the test object section the software crashed, it is now
fixed. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2021-03-07 21.08.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Secondary Burden, the Phase column is added to the related table. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CVT
2021-05-25 21.06.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Excitation test method is changed. In this method, which is tabular, first the rows are added by
tapping Insert Rows and then by right-clicking on the row, perform the test by clicking on apply test
and finally report by tapping Add
to Report. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In CVT saturation, if you
change the frequency in the Test Object tab, the Vend value also changes. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
CVT 2021-01-11 99.10.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”For the "Ratio" test, any value can be entered in the "V Test" field; after right-clicking and
selecting "Apply Test", the same value is displayed in the corresponding column in the table.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2023-09-14 23.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Addition of new wiring types in the Timing Test. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Changing the voltage range for the "With Auxiliary Relay"
option to up to 220 volts AC after enabling the AC option. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The “Coil name” field is created in the “Coil” section. The users can add their considering coil name
to the report. “”In the “O-CO2” the assessment of the sections “Close” and “O-t-CO total time” are
changed. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-09-01
22.09.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "DRM" test, "Binary-Input Type" is set to "wet 188" by default. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In previous versions it was not possible to change the binary
inputs 7 and 8. This problem has been fixed in the new version. It should be noted that the column for
"Binary-Input Target" can also be selected for other binary inputs such as binary inputs 7 and 8.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When the power source "AC" was selected, in the open mode and in the third phase, the time
was incorrectly calculated and displayed in the "Supply Voltage". This error is corrected in the new
version. “” When the binary inputs were in "Dry" mode, the timing test calculated all time references
from the first binary value. Therefore,
all times were displayed in the same way. This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version. “” In
"Timing Test" and in the condition "O-CO" the evaluation in the close-open mode was not carried out
correctly. This error is corrected
in the new version. “” In the "Timing Test", it was not possible to change the binary inputs after
selecting "AC" under "Supply Voltage". This error is corrected in the new version. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB
2022-05-24 22.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once the Power Supply was set to External, it was not possible to change the Bin Input options by
selecting another Bin Output option. This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 2022-05-07 22.05.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Motor Current", clicking on the "Init Test" activated binary input 10 by default and assigned it
a unit and a coefficient. When clicking on the row in "Result" in "Contact Resistance" and clicking on
"Apply Test", the value of the
"Mul" field and the "Unit" option in "Calculation" were not updated correctly. This problem has been
fixed in the new version. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-04-11 22.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The photo of the assembeling is modified after Shunt is enabled. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-04-08
22.04.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Since some users do not have the required auxiliary relay and the shunt resistance available in
"Timing test" while using "External Power Supply", two options "With Auxiliary relay" and "Shunt" have
been added. If these options are
enabled, the header image will be changed and the flowchart will be displayed to the user. “” In
"Minimum Pickup", when you set "State Termination" to 1 pole, the number of active binaries are updated
and reduced to one. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB
2022-04-07 22.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Timing Test" and "Minimum Pickup", a new method called "Wet by
Current Source" has been added. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-04-04 22.04.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once you enable
the "Fast Sampling" in the "Timing Test" tab and click on the "Init Test" button, this option is also
activated in the "Extra Setting" tab. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-04-01 22.04.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After loading some files, "the Last Time" was wrongly displayed in some cases; this is now corrected.
“” "Signal View" in "O-CO 2" the second test was not displayed correctly which is now resolved. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new tab called "DRMDemo " has been created. In this tab, the dynamic resistance test of
the key is presented in demo form. “” After clicking on "Init Test" in "Timing", the "Show Actual"
related to binaries, either being " Wet" or " Dry", would become " True". That is, the reference base is
based on the voltage value, which
is 2 volts in " Dry" mode. In this case, whenever the voltage is less than 1 volt, 1 is considered. In "
Wet" mode, if it is greater than the value set by the user in "Threshold", it is considered 1. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 2022-01-18 22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Before, the time between opening and closing in the open-close test was when the open command
was issued to open the key. But now is the time when the key is open to close. This time is about 28 to
30 milliseconds. “”In the o-co test, a new section has been added in the Summary of Result called O-t-Co
total time. In this section,
the tie recorded is the time when the open command is issued so as the key finally opens. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After clearing the results and re-doing the test, the First and Last columns in the Summary of Result
section are updated based on the new results. “”After selecting AC in Supply Voltage, the header image
is updated in Timing. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Timing section, the evaluation of the key state change
from close to open in phase A was shown incorrectly. This bug has been fixed in the new version. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 21.11.22.01 21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By entering a decimal number in the Operating Time section, its value displayed as zero, by changing
the amount of time in the Number of Decimal Places Settings window, the number is displayed correctly in
this section. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB
2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Test Object", there were problems in the "Operating Time"section,
which have been fixed. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the "Test Object" tab,
the "Operating Time" section, by adjusting the maximum time and minimum time, these values are
calculated in milliseconds, causing problems in the evaluation section in the "Timing Resistance"
section. This is now fixed in the new version.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2021-07-12 21.07.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Always in the Timing Test tab, the first package
or opening of the key has been the criterion for assessment. In this version, a new option is created in
the Test Object of the Operating Time section. The user can select their assessment based on the first
or last package or key opening.
“”To calculate the current in the Timing Test tab, two fields Peak Current and Steady-State Current are
used. Sometimes the Steady-State Current value turns negative. The calculation of this field is that it
calculates three points together
in a row. In previous versions, only one condition was considered that if the value
〖Value〗_max-〖Value〗_min/〖Value〗_max, for example, was smaller than 0.01, the Steady-State Current value
would be determined. In the new version, another
condition is made by adding a new option to the Object Test. The value obtained from the formula is
compared with the value entered by the user in the Min. Coil Current field, and if it is larger than
this value, it will be considered
as the Steady-State Current field value, otherwise the Na value will be considered. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB
2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Timing Test tab, a new section called Other is added, as to used to change the status of the
key contact from open to closed or from closed to open. To perform it, first select one of the options
according to the status of the
key, and then click on change position option. For example, if the contact key is closed and you want to
open it, first select close breaker before test option and then click on Change Position. After clicking
on this option, a message
is displayed to the user asking him to check the wire if the winding is open or close, click on Yes and
otherwise click on No. It should be noted that by performing this option, results aren’t recorded in the
report. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB
2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By changing Supply Voltage from DC to AC and vice versa, a message
is displayed to the user showing in which tests the wiring photo has been changed. CIRCUIT BREAKER CB
2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After performing the Contact Resistance test, the values weren’t displayed in the fields of the
Selected section, this is now corrected. CIRCUIT BREAKER CB 2021-03-07 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option for testing the time of keys powered by AC voltage is added to the Test object tab. This
option is located in the Open Close Voltage Setting section. When the AC option is selected, while
creating a warning to change the
wiring, a section called Bin Out is created with the Delay field in the Timing Test tab. In this field,
you can consider between 0 and 10 milliseconds as a delay in calculating the performance time. Since
threshold is not used to calculate
the time, the latency of the relays behind binary outputs should be considered. You can also use this
option in the Minimum Voltage to Operate Circuit Breaker tab to test the minimum voltage of the key
function. Two things should be then
into accuracy can be put on Pulse Ramping and Manual. In either case, you can increase your voltage to
450 volts if you have chosen AC in Test Object. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Signals are displayed correctly in Signal View during and after testing. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2020-11-22
99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Timing Test key, activate the P.S. A-N field by selecting External in the Power Supply section.
“”In CB and in the Minimum Voltage test by selecting New Device, State Termination is placed on Coil
Current and by re-selecting AMT105,
State Termination is placed on Contact. “”Actual values are displayed in all equipment rooms as bold in
Signal View. However, in tests where injection is performed in three-phase mode, the actual values are
shown in circles.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2023-09-14 23.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”New 100-ampere wiring type were added for testing
the current transformation ratio in the CT room. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The option “Standard” is added in “Test Object”. “”In the voltage transformation test, the values of
Primary Voltmeter and Secondary Voltmeter were swapped. Additionally, there was an issue in changing the
tap settings with different
selections of rows. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When you clicked on “Add
to Report” in “Test Object”, the “Class” column had been inserted incorrectly. This problem has been
modified in the upcoming version. “”The list of the “Analog Input” field was updated. Henceforth, just
to read the voltage, you can choose
one of the first 4 binary inputs and run your test according to the changed picture. “”The “Fill Excel
File” and “Developer Mode” options are activated if you want to create your reports in excel files.
“”Since it is possible to test all
three phases simultaneously in one file, it is available to enter the serial number of all three phases
in the “Test Object.” “”In “Excitation,” by changing the values of the columns “Core no.” or “Tap no.”
or “Phase,” the value of the
field “Rct” should be changed. “”Henceforth, in this room, before performing the relevant test in the
tabs “Secondary Burden” and “Winding Resistance”, it is better to complete the “Test Setting” section
first, then the “Hardware Config”
section, and finally, the “Report Setting” section. “”In the “Excitation” and in the section “Current
Measurement Mode”, if the excitation current is less than 5mA, the new option called “Slight Current” is
created. CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CT 2022-10-09 22.10.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If the compound error is 10% for measuring CTs, 5% for 5P protection
CTs, and 10% for 10P protection CTs, the relationship between CT parallel branch current and voltage is
represented by a line in the saturation diagram, and its intersection with the line hypothetically drawn
after determining the knee
point shows FS or ALF. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-09-01 22.09.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” All the fields related
to the "Calculation of Iprimary" section cannot be changed during the saturation test. CURRENT
TRANSFORMER CT 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problems related to the hysteresis curve have been fixed in this version. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
2022-05-24 22.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In DC saturation test, when the CT conversion ratio was small and the software used Bin 1 as Primary,
problems were seen in the calculations. This problem is fixed in the coming version. CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CT 2022-05-07 22.05.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "Ratio and Polarity With Voltage" section, the default settings are taken into account
so that the "%In" column reaches one hundred percent of the rated current without the user having to
change the applied voltage "V test nom". CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” From now on, the binary input Bin. 5 is used in the first stage of the "Excitation test with dc ",
when the CT conversion ratio is low 15.5 or 30.5, reading the voltage from Bin. 10 is not possible and
this is used instead CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CT 2022-04-08 22.04.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In Excitation with dc, the photo of the assembeling has been changed
and a new section called Ratio and Polarity has been added to Step 1. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-03-26
22.03.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The many changes made to this room are discussed the upcoming educational videos. CURRENT
TRANSFORMERCT 2022-03-16 22.03.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once you press the Settings icon of the "Add to Report" button, its list of options are displayed.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The "Ratio and Polarity with Voltage" test method has changed. In the new method, any voltage value
entered in the "V test" field, the same value is applied after the test is executed. Also, if the actual
value of the injected voltage
is greater than 188 V, the binaries are in series with each other. “” After loading some files in "Ratio
and Polarity with Current" test, by changing the value of "I meas". which was read using an ammeter, the
software crashed, this problem
has been solved in the new version. “” The problems related to the "At Calibration State Option" have
been fixed in the new version. “” The image of the assembling in "Ratio and Polarity with Voltage" has
changed. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
2022-01-18 22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
In Secondary Burden, when you click on the Add to Report, the Phase column
is added to the report. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Ratio and Polarity
with voltage, a new field named I test has been created. In this field, when you enter the voltage
value, the current value is displayed as a percentage of the nominal current. “”Calculations for the I
Prime field have been modified. “”In
Excitation, by activating Extra Data, the corresponding table is added to the report. CURRENT
TRANSFORMER CT 2021-12-27 21.12.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the first line of information is deleted after performing the test in the Winding Resistance tab,
the information in the Actual RCT to Test Estimation field in the Excitation tab is removed from the Max
Rct field in the Test Object
tab. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By opening the CT test file based on the
CT type and its class, only some fields related to it are displayed. “”In Excitation with DC, when you
changed the graph from Lissajous RMSDC to Lissajous HysteresisDC and vice versa in Calculation, the
graph was not displayed correctly
in Signal View, this has been fixed. “”In situations where the resistance information on the CT plate is
not available, it is possible to disable Max Rct. “”In Secondary Burden, calculations related to
carrying CT did not use actual current.
This problem is fixed in the new version. “”In the Ratio and Polarity with current section, after
opening the saved test file, the wiring image is displayed correctly. “”In Ratio and Polarity with
voltage, to determine the angle of the
input voltage, instead of the nominal value of 90 degrees, the value of the actual voltage angle is
calculated. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-11-30 21.11.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Tap No. and Core No. Columns in the Report section of the Winding Resistance, Ratio with Voltage and
Ratio with Current are displayed correctly. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT 21.11.22.01 21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the “Excitation with DC” tab, if you apply “Init Test” in the second stage, the wiring of the first
stage was also activated. This bug has been fixed in the new version. “”In the Excitation test with DC,
after completing the first
step of the test, pressing the Clear Test button does not erase the results. Also, no message is
displayed to save this information. “”In the “Excitation with DC”, after completing the first stage of
the test, by clicking on the “Clear
Test”, the results are not deleted. Also, the warning message for asking to save this result is not
displayed anymore. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-11-14 21.11.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once the "Int Test" was pressed, the "Calc.knee.P" and "Show Point" options were not enabled; this
problem has been fixed in the new version. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In previous versions, when the R Man option was activated Ref. Temp., the software would crash. This
has been fixed in this version. “” Additionally, when activating the Don't Change Hardware Setting
option in Step 1: Core Information
and pressing Init Test in Step 2: Rdc and Excitation, the software crashed; this has also been fixed. “”
In previous versions, when you copied and pasted from some fields to other fields inside the software or
from software like "Notepad"
to these fields, the software crashed. This problem is fixed in this version. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
2021-02-25 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The bugs and polarity test problems are fixed in the Excitation Test tab. “”After completing the first
stage of saturation test by DC method, the results of conversion ratio test for the user are displayed
in the CTR field. “”In previous
versions, in the secondary Burden section, after loading the test file, the nominal current wasn’t shown
correctly, which is now fixed. “”In the Test Setting section, by converting the CT core type from
Measuring to Protection, the standard
test table image of the conversion ratio couldn’t be updated, which is now fixed. “”In the Ratio and
Polarity with current section, before the test, the possibility of displaying the percentage of
injectable current to the nominal current
is added. “”In previous versions, in the Ratio and Polarity with voltage section, the percentage of the
equivalent current ratio of the injected voltage wasn’t calculated correctly, which is now fixed in the
new version. The Actual Rct
to Ratio V field is also added in this section. If its value is calculated in the Winding Resistance
tab, this field will take its value from this tab. Otherwise, the value is taken from what is written on
the test object tab. “”In the
CT saturation test, when the wirings are not properly connected or the saturation current is below one
mAh or two saturation points are found a message is displayed to the user. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
2021-09-23 21.09.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option is added on the right-click of the saturation chart in Signal View called Knee Point in
the saturation test. You can also see the changes in the report by enabling each of the three options at
the bottom of this window Aspect,
Logarithm X and Logarithm Y and pressing the Add to Report button. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-09-12
21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Secondary Burden, a new column called I test nom is added. “”If you change the frequency value from
the Test Object tab, you will see the changes in vector View and the test result in the test of
conversion ratio to the current method,
after selecting the Apply Test option. “”If you change the frequency value from the Frequency field, you
will see changes in the Vector View and the test result in the test of conversion ratio to voltage
method, after selecting the Apply
Test option. “”In the second stage of excitation with dc test, the Method field is placed on a current
by default. “”If the Init Test is clicked in the first step after performing the second stage of the
Excitation with dc test, the software
does not show crashed. “”After secondary burden and Winding Resistance tests, the report is added by
clicking add to report chart in Signal View. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Lm field calculations are updated in the Excitation with DC tab of the Knee point calculation
section. “”The wiring photo is shown in secondary burden test. “”From this version onwards the
saturation curve starts from the point 0,0.
In the hysteresis curve, due to current distortion in the test mode, the current method, didn’t display
the correct shape. Calculations related to saturated Inductance or Ls are also added to the software. if
Ls is negative or greater
than 30 millihenry, na is displayed. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT 2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”During the
test performance, the saturation curve in Excitation and Excitation with DC is updated and optimized.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT 2021-08-02 21.08.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Excitation, Ratio and Polarity with current, Ratio and Polarity with voltage and Excitation with
DC, the Core no., Tap no. and phase columns are now created. Also in secondary Burden, the phase column
is added to the related table.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-06-05 21.06.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The test method is changed in secondary burden,
ratio and Polarity with current tabs. In the new method, first add rows by clicking on Insert Rows
option and then by right-clicking on the related row, select apply test option. “”In Ratio and Polarity
with current, Ratio and Polarity
with voltage, a column called %In is added that shows what percentage of the injectable current is
nominal current. By placing the mouse over this cell the related formula is display. CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CT 2021-05-25 21.05.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The test method is changed in the Ratio and Polarity with voltage tab. To perform the test in the new
method, first add rows by tapping Insert Rows, then right-click and select apply test option to perform
the test. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT
2021-05-18 21.05.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By changing the frequency in Test Object, this value is entered in
exitation test with dc and is effective in the relevant calculations. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-03-31
21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Duplicate options in the reporting settings of all tests that no longer exist. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT
2021-02-25 21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you place Apply Standard on any of the standards and save, then open a file, you will see the
selected standard in the Test Object tab. “”After clicking on Init Test in the Excitation Test tab, all
charts are shown correctly. “”The
problem of changing the status to Manual Passed saved files that conversion ratio test of it is passed,
is fixed. “”In the Turns ratio with Current test, if the actual current value has a 20% difference with
the current value entered in
field I test, a message is displayed to the user that by clicking the OK button, the test results will
not be erased. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”At the top of each tab, how to perform the test is displayed in a box. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In report of Current Transformer, to better display the report, some left and right edges weren’t
observed which is now fixed. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Fixing the problem of adding excitation test states in secondary burden test after clicking on Init
Test. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The photos of wiring in Resistance test and Excitation test in CT. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2020-12-02
99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Fix software crashing problem after using ctrl+c combination keys in empty fields in all equipment
rooms. “”Added Excitation Test with DC in Report Setting. “”After Init Testing, the latest Hardware
Configuration changes are preserved.
“”Modify export getting from report to doc format. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the CT saturation test after passing the test by tapping Add to Report and saving the file and
re-opening the file, the pass test result will be shown and manual pass will not be displayed. CURRENT
TRANSFORMER CT 2021-01-10 99.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The standard is added to the report by selecting the "IEC 61869-2" standard and clicking the
"Add to Report" button. “”A "Description" column is added to the report after enabling the Ratio Table
option and clicking the "Add to Report". “”After checking the "Ratio Table" option, if the voltage
exceeds 180 mV the value of the voltage
is measured from binary input 1, and if it is less than 180mV, the value of the voltage is measured from
binary input 10. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-01-11 99.10.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After testing and pressing the „Clear Test“ button, if the results have not been added to the report,
a warning message will be displayed in the instrument module that no report has been added since the
last test. In the previous versions
there were no such warnings. “”by changing „Voltage Measurement Mode“ a message appears for the user,
showing changes in wiring.
HARDWARE 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”D Due to some changes in the Microprocessors and the use of the
third version of it, there were some problems in the hardware which have been fixed in this version. It
should also be noted that the microprocessors used are the first version of LPC, the second version of
7020 and the third version of
the 7020 family A-Linx. HARDWARE 2021-11-15 21.11.15.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.15.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.15.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”There was little difference in the
actual value of current groups. This bug has been solved in the new versions. HARDWARE 2021-04-17
21.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The CPU version in Calibration is displayed in micro CPU. This option is used to specify the type of
micro zero represents micro LPC 80 and number 1 represents micro 7020. In the Panel section, you can see
the type of ADs used for binaries
1 to 10 in the front panel. Also, in the Amplifier section, the switching type and new Amplifiers
installed on the device are specified, indicating that the device is being upgraded. The numbers shown
along with each of the fields indicate
the date and model of the parts used in them, for Panel 1 represents the AD model 1202 and since last
year 2020 has not been used in new devices, number 2 indicates AD model 7606 and about 4 months ago
stopped using it in new devices.
The number 3 represents the AD of the ADS model, which is used in new devices from this date onwards.
Also, the numbers 0, 1 and 2 in front of Amplifier indicate the changes made to the amplifier and
switching module. HARDWARE 2021-03-07
21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The time difference between GPS and UTC in the software is fixed. HARDWARE 2021-01-31
99.11.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Correcting hardware code for binary input 9. This binary input is used in ratio
conversion test with current.
HOME PAGE 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From now on, you can specify the type of device you want to test
in the "Room" tab. HOME PAGE 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The new options called “New by template”,
“Open” and “Open multiple files” are added at the right click on every modules. HOME PAGE 2022-03-08
22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new section called "GPS Tuner" has been added in "Setting". In the past, to sync AMT105 with GPS
and other devices, there were problems due to the time difference. You can enter this time difference in
the "GPS Tuning Time" field
so that such problems do not arise in the end-to-end test. “” The problems with the options related to
the "Output" section in the "PDF Report Creator" window have been fixed. HOME PAGE 2022-01-14
22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After activating the Record Period field and clicking on Apply, if the entered value was greater than
9 seconds, the software crashed, but in the new version, you cannot enter a value greater than 9
seconds. HOME PAGE 2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After connecting to the device, if the word VIVADO is listed in the Version of Micro column,
new option called Update Bootloader is created. After activating this option and clicking on the Update
Firmware button again, the program will be updated, an alert screen will then appear to update the
bootloader. It is important to make
sure that the power supply to the device is not interrupted before doing so. If the device is shut down
while doing this, you can no longer use it and you have to send the device to the company. This takes a
long time, about 2 minutes,
therefore, it is better to do all the steps with a LAN cable. On the alert page, by clicking Yes, the
bootloader packets are sent to the 7020 micro and updated. After doing this step, the color of this
option as well as its name will change
from Update Bootloader to Force Update Bootloader. The Force Update Bootloader option is used when you
want to be sure to update the bootloader again. HOME PAGE 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Report Generator section, the Merge Report section is added. Here, you can merge the added
reports. Three options, Continuous Page Numbering, Table of Content and Delete Added Report Files are
created to continuously number the
pages, tabling of report lists, and the absence of the report files are created separate from each test
file respectively. These options are enabled by default. HOME PAGE 2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In computers with multiple users, it is recommended to right-click on the exe file of the software and
from the very beginning select run this program as an administrator option and perform the installation
process by running the exe
file according to the past. “”In the Setting page, after connecting to the device in the table in the
Connection &hardware tab, can be seen the controller version, the front panel of the device, and the
micro on the device. HOME PAGE 2021-06-05
21.06.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Hardware tab of the Setting page, a new option called Continue after disconnect
is added. This option is not enabled by default. If the network cable test or the connection between the
tester and the laptop is interrupted, the test will continue, but the results aren’t recorded in the
software. HOME PAGE 2021-04-11
21.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Setting window, a new tab called Help is created. There have been a lot
of changes in Help and Videos that you can make a variety of settings in different parts of this tab.
Additional explanations are provided in the relevant videos. HOME PAGE 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By default, the help language is located in the Default Language of Help section and the test date in
the Date/Time section of the Room tab is set in English. To see this change, clear cache Have the
software installed on your system.
HOME PAGE 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By clicking on the version number of sofware page, vebko
website is opened and on which the existing version and past versions as well as what's New videos
related to each version can be download. Also, by clicking on What's New, the Training page of vebko's
website opens. HOME PAGE 2020-06-03
99.03.14.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By entering "Setting" on the first page of the software and going to the "Room"
tab and selecting "Decimal Places", in the "Item Type" field by selecting "Sequencer", the display of
numbers can be changed to 8 decimal places. If the “Number of Decimal Places Setting” toolbar is
selected and clicked on “Load template”,
these changes are visible in “Sequencer”. “”Correcting “Report generator” in “Room” tab. By using report
generator, you can report it without having to open the test file. HOME PAGE 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the new version, the company's Persian name is removed from the main page of the software. HOME
PAGE 2020-11-05 99.08.15.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Setting window many changes are made in the Available Devices. After clicking on start search,
displaying the device information, by right-clicking on the row and selecting the Set a Static IP
Address in Windows option, you can directly
configure the IP of the laptop in two ways Manually and Automaticly. “”Also in this tab are other ways
to change the IP the device by selecting the "Set IP to Device" option and connecting directly to the
device without entering the IP,
in connection & firmware tab. “”the stop search option in available devices tab has been added so that
the user can stop Search. Interface Adaptor Network is also next to this option.
INSTRUMENT TEST 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In “RTD” and “AutoReclosure,” when you clicked on the button
“Init Test”, the software would crash. “”In “Test Object”, the new section called “Device Type” is
created. In this section, before performing any test, set the tester device first.
INSTRUMENT TEST 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” From now on, you can show/hide the table columns on the
"Test Object" tab of "CT" and "CVT" rooms in the report. INSTRUMENT TEST 2022-07-23 22.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new option called "Show/Hide Assessment Columns" has been added to show/hide test results in the
report. It is important to note that after clicking on the Add to Report button, whether in previously
saved files or in files tested
from this version onwards, this option is visible in the "Delete from Report" window after a right
click. INSTRUMENT TEST 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you activate the option "Don’t Change Hardware Settings" and click on "Init Test", the software
usually crashes after the test has been executed. This bug has been fixed in the next version. “” After
selecting the "Edit & Delete
Report" option, the corresponding window was not displayed. This problem is fixed in the new version.
INSTRUMENT TEST 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problem of polarity in the test of the "Ratio and Polarity" using the voltage method in the CT
and also the test of the conversion ratio in the CVT has been solved. INSTRUMENT TEST 2022-02-09
22.02.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The basis of evaluation in Leakage Reactance tests in trans as well as Ratio and Polarity and
Excitation in CVT has been changed based on binary inputs. The users, also, can recalculate the results
by choosing real voltage values as
an evaluation after performing these tests. INSTRUMENT TEST 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Report
view, the title for Name was displayed incorrectly for the corresponding module. INSTRUMENT TEST
2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the Instrument View window closes, you can reopen this window by using the Ctrl+Alt+N combination
keys. INSTRUMENT TEST 2021-04-24 21.04.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new section called Tests is added in the Test Object tab in the CT, CB, CVT and Transformer modules.
Based on their test, the user can activate the tab for each test using the options in this section.
INSTRUMENT TEST 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Generally, by enabling Easy Mode, the wiring images of the boards that are installed on the
Front Panel are displayed in each test and by disabling this option, images of the wiring are displayed
in front panel without having to install these boards.
MEDIUM MODULES 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the “Sequence Test Points to”, the options “All”, “LN”
and “LL” are added to the section “Fault Types”. MEDIUM MODULES 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The
function of the existing options when right-clicking on the test result line, the Show/Hide Report
section, which was faulty in some rooms are now improved. “” In this version, the temporal changes in
the time can be seen in Prefault after
you have received Comtrade from the software in the corresponding file. MEDIUM MODULES 2022-04-19
22.04.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Generally, in the new version of parameters that should not be normally in the output file in
"Exports" are not taken in the new version. For example, in AMT Overcurrent, after exporting "Xrio" in
standard mode and loading it in "Omicron"
software, a parameter called "I sensetive" in "Test Universe" software was not loaded properly; or in
"AMT Distance", the "Line Length" parameter which was taken from the user in kilometres, does not exist
in the standard mode. MEDIUM
MODULES 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you right-clicked on the inactive Generator Differential
Start Curve block in a template containing this block such as 7UM62x in a ROM other than AMT
Differential, the software crashed. This has been fixed in the new version. MEDIUM MODULES 2022-01-14
22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If group B current is selected instead of group A current in Hardware Configuration, the activated
items in Hardware Configuration are displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the Test View window on
the left side. MEDIUM MODULES
2021-12-27 21.12.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Overcurrent and Diff Harmonic, by clicking on Export to CSV, in
, in Overcurrent View and Differential view texts are not displayed. MEDIUM MODULES 2021-10-21
21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In all Medium modules with PickUp-DropOff test, if it was changed in the Prefault time setting tab, it
would not have been applied to Signal View in the Pick up drop tab, this is now fixed in the new
version. MEDIUM MODULES 2021-08-23
21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By changing the binaries in Hardware Config, the binaries used in the trigger
section, theBinary Trigger Condition section, are updated. MEDIUM MODULES 2021-07-19 21.07.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To load xrio files of the xml type a new option is created in the software. For this purpose, first
enter your relay template and then in Load Relay Setting from the Relay Config Type list, Select *. Xml
and continue the rest of the
steps as before. “”4 templates of Sprecher relays are added to the software. MEDIUM MODULES 2021-07-16
21.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Custom, if you create a block with @Room specific name. This specific block is module and is not
deleted by loading the new xrio. Tip 1: The information on this block is saved along with other
information and is not included in the
xrio file. But it is always displayed as the last block in Custom and can be linked to it. Tip 2: In VCC
when external xrio enters, inside that module this block still exists and is displayed in xrio, but the
external xrio is not changed.
MEDIUM MODULES 2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option called Stop test after each shot test is
created in the Extra Setting tab. By enabling this option, after testing each point in shot test, first
the relays of the Analog Output section in the tester is turned off and then the next point is tested.
This option does not exist in
AMT Sequencer and is only in modules where Shot Test, Search Test and Check Test are available. For
example, this has been done for three points. As you can see, when injecting the current for 10 seconds,
for each point, the LEDs in the
Current Output A section are turned on and after the test of each point is finished, the LEDs are turned
off. That means the injections are not performed and the relays are turned off. “”In Load Relay Setting,
a new option called Add missing
blocks and parameters is added. This option can be used to create templates from CSV files taken from
relays. To do this, you first need to create relay menus in the software. by using this method, blocks
and parameters taken from the
relay are made automatically. There are two modes for transferring CSV-format files, or parameters have
paths or no paths are defined for them. First, a CSV file is loaded from the Schneider relay, which is
not defined a path to its blocks
and parameters. In this case, all parameters are created in a block called Missing Parameters. This
time, a CSV file is loaded from the Toshiba relay, which is defined a path to its blocks and parameters.
In this case, there is a path
for parameters, they are categorized according to the same default path. two important points, one is
that each block's ID is made according to its name. Another point about parameters is that some IDs are
not allowed, so IDs are checked
and converted to authorized IDs if they are unauthorized. For this reason, the ID of a parameter may be
different from its ID in the file, but the created Foreign ID matches the file. Type all parameters are
selected from string type because
they are not mentioned in the file. “”A new feature is created to disable testing of one or more points,
disable testing points in one or more fault type, as well as disable testing in one or more tabs if a
point or line is added. For
example, to disable testing one or more points is enough to select them first and then right-click on
them and Disable testing at those points by using the Active option. You can also disable test execution
in one or more tabs by activating
the created check box next to each tab. MEDIUM MODULES 2021-04-11 21.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The duplicate
options at right-clicking on the table of points are removed. MEDIUM MODULES 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "Hardware Configuration" by enabling the "Show Actual Value" option, after going to another tab and
returning to "Hardware Configuration", this option is disabled and the values is changed to "false",
which is now fixed. “”The possibility
of determining "Threshold" for binary inputs in "Dry" mode is added. By default, this number is placed
"1", but the user can enter "0" to "2" of the dc volt in this field. For example, the binary threshold
value "1" is set to "0.7". This
means that if the binary "1" is applied at a voltage of less than 0.7, the binary contact is closed.
“”In all rooms, for example the "AMT Sequencer" room, when the module or a form is out of "dock" mode
and converted to "Undock", The software
isn’t crashed when changing "Scheme" MEDIUM MODULES 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In all rooms, after
opening the old files, the threshold value or threshold voltage of binary inputs in Dry mode is set to
0.2 volts, which is corrected and replaced by 1volt in the new version. “”In all modules, when you
select the “Fill Excel File” in the
“File” menu, after opening a file as an import, the same file is set an export by default. “”In the Fill
Excel File window, after selecting the input and output files the path specified, by closing this
window, this path could not be saved
which is fixed. “”In the “Fill Excel File”, after entering essential information, by clicking the “Start
to Fill”, you can edit the options in “Setting” check box. In this version, these options are as read
only after selecting the “Start
to Fill”. “”In the Fill Excel File problem for the Sequencer room, the Synchronizer section is fixed.
“”If a page called vebko is created in the Excel file, you want to fill in items on this page, after
selecting the desired file, and
clicking on the “Start to Fill” option in previous versions, an error message appears. MEDIUM MODULES
2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In medium rooms such as AMT Distance, after connecting to the device, the start icon is initially
disabled and enabled by adding points to the table. “”In previous versions, it took a few moments to
perform the test after hitting the
start icon, while in the new version the test performs as soon as you click on this icon. “”Fixing the
problems of single test in shot test, check test, search test, etc. tabs “”All features of Impedance
View, Differential Characteristic,
etc. Like Show all tact point, show z act point, etc. are corrected. “”Also, in this section, the Out of
Range Area option is added to display the area outside the injection range of the device. “”In the
Characteristic View window, Short
Keys such as A to display Tact points, Z to display zone numbers for points, R to display the row number
of points, O to display the area outside the device range, and P to display the actual value of
impedance points are created instantaneously.
“”Right-click options such as changing the background color of Characteristic View are enabled on the
characteristics. “”In all medium rooms, Link to Xrio, Remove Link, go to linked value options are added
by right-clicking on any field.
OVERCURRENT QUICK TEST 2021-12-27 21.12.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After clicking the Add to Report button, the software
crashed. This problem has been fixed in the new version. OVERCURRENT QUICK TEST 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” From now on, by clicking on "Add to Report", the software will not crash. OVERCURRENT QUICK TEST
2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The problem of not running the program and the correct operation of the buttons are fixed.
RESISTANCE 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Impedance tab, some of the options under "Measuring By"
have been removed. “”Im Impedanz-Tab wurden einige der Optionen unter "Measuring By" entfernt.
“”Correcting some of the images. RESISTANCE 2021-10-24 21.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Photo of The Resistance Test tab is updated. RESISTANCE 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The impedance
Test tab is added to this room. RESISTANCE 2021-09-17 21.09.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Test Object tab,
a field called Reference Temperature is added. By entering the value of this field, the correction
coefficient is automatically calculated. Also, the Ract field in the Resistance Test tab is added to the
Result section. RESISTANCE 2021-02-23
21.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting any binary input other than binary input 1, the correct shape of
the chart is shown in Signal View. RESISTANCE 2021-01-31 99.11.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Reform of the spelling
of some fields in “Resistance” room.
RGROUND 2021-04-21 21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new Room is designed to measure ground resistance, which testing
stages are written at the top of the tab, respectively. It should be noted that this Room is at the
early stages of the design and in the form of a Demo.
RTD 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "RTD", the "Test Object" tab of the history section is added to
the report.
SETTING 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The CHECK RAM section in the Setting page is removed from the Hardware
tab.
TRANSFORMER 2023-09-14 23.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From now on, you can perform the leakage reactance test UK%
using the new current wiring types. TRANSFORMER 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Henceforth, in this
room, before performing the relevant tests, it is better to complete the “Test Setting” section first,
then the “Hardware Config” section, and finally, the “Report Setting” section. In addition, it should be
noted that two fundamental
changes have been made in this room “Transformer”. 1- Adding a new option, “Wiring Type,” and removing
the “Don’t change Hardware Configuration” option. 2- The way of running the test has changed. So, to run
the test in upcoming versions,
it is enough to click on the “Run” button after completing the three mentioned steps. It is important to
remember that for running the tests in which the table was added, you must first select the desired
added rows, and finally, it is
enough to either use the “Apply Test” option or the “Run” button as before. “”The “Fill Excel File” and
“Developer Mode” options are activated if you want to create your reports in excel files. “”Optimization
of calculations related to
Yd11 vector group. TRANSFORMER 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When the "DETC Tap Changer" option
was activated on the "Winding Resistance" tab, no diagram was shown in the "Plot" section; yet, it is
fixed. “” The calculations of the angle of no-load flow were changed in the "VectorGroup, Turns Ratio,
No load current" and "No load"
tabs. TRANSFORMER 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If the assembling was "Yzn5", the test results were
calculated and displayed incorrectly when the "Read Input Voltage" was set to "Analogue Input". This
error has been fixed in the next version. “” After changing the voltages on the Test Object tab and in
custom mode, it was not possible
to correctly add the voltages in the Test Turns Ratio on the "Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load
tab". This error has been fixed in the next version. TRANSFORMER 2022-05-07 22.05.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” There were some problems with the "Custom" option that have been fixed in the new version. For
example, if the taps were selected in the mode you see after disabling and re-enabling the "OTLC
TapChanger" option, the voltage values in
the table were zero. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-24 22.04.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When the "Read Input Voltage" field
was set to "Analogue Input" in Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load during the single-phase transistor
test and the input voltage was more than 130 V, it was not possible to read this voltage value in
binary, which is now possible in
the new version. In addition, the photo of the assembling changes according to the input voltage.
TRANSFORMER 2022-04-23 22.04.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The relevant settings was not displayed when "By In progress Contact" was selected; the problem is
now fixed. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-21 22.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When testing three-winding transformers, it is possible to drag Plot from the Territory to the
Primary. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-19 22.04.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In some assembelings, "LL" method was used. Therefore, by changing "Read Input Voltage" to "Analog
Input", binary inputs 1 to 3 can be used. “” When the "Winding Resistance" test is done in "LL" mode,
the results can be cleared from
all the three rows using "Clear Result" results and "Remove". “” In previous versions, when the "Zero
Sequence Impedance" test was performed on the "LV" side, once a row was added in this test, "HV" was
inserted by mistake on the Side
column; this has also been resolved. “” If there is a row in the "Z0" section and the vector group
changes in the "Winding Configuration" section so that there is no neutral point grounded star, this row
is erased. “” In "Winding Resistance",
all rows can be put in order in "Down" mode from phase A to phase C. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new method has been added according to the "IEC61378-1" standard in the conversion ratio test. “”
In "Winding Resistance", while being in three-phase mode, the default settings related to "Trigger" has
been modified. “” In "Magnetic
Balance", when reloading the test file, the currents column was not reloaded correctly which is now
fixed. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-01 22.04.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Winding Resistance", the time associated with the "State Time" field was not running properly and
the test would stopp after the duration written in "Initiated Time". This has been fixed in the new
version. TRANSFORMER 2022-02-23
22.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After selecting Automatic Tap Control, you can change the way the taps are moved
up or down from the Preparation section before performing the test. “”Column I Prim. Angle has been
added in No load and TTR tests. The column shows the no-load current angle. “”By placing the tap changer
on the low pressure side and performing
the TTR test, the relevant calculations were done incorrectly which is now resolved. TRANSFORMER
2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From now on, 4 states are created for the Winding Resistance test of each phase after clicking on
Apply Test. Since at the end of the test Error Other occured, by default, Disable Error is active for
the 4th State for 5 seconds. TRANSFORMER
2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”You can see the changes in the Report View by activating the Temperature
Correction option and clicking the Add to Report button. “”After performing the Magnetic Balance test,
saving and reopening this file, the W1 currents are displayed correctly. TRANSFORMER 2022-01-04
22.01.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When you select a three-winding transformer or an autotrans with a tertiary winding in the Type field,
and set the tap changer to the secondary side, there were problems in displaying the plot, which is now
fixed. “”In Magnetic Balance,
when you clicked on Add to Report, two tables w1 and w2 were created in the report. Now you can add them
to the report or delete each one separately in the Report Setting. “”In Winding Resistance, when you
test the primary, secondary and
tertiary resistance together, by clicking Add to Report, the relevant information of HV, LV and MV
tables are displayed separately in the report. TRANSFORMER 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Plot section, some checkboxes, except for Ratio and No load Current, have been disabled. “”In
Winding Resistance, when you click on Add to report, two tables are created based on phase and tap in
the report. Now you can add them
to the report or delete each one separately in the Report Setting. TRANSFORMER 2021-12-27 21.12.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Winding Resistance, if you set the side field on LV, it was not possible to add a row; this has
been fixed in the new version. TRANSFORMER 2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Test Object, new tables named DETC Tap Changer and OLTC Tap Changer have been created to add on
information separately on Load Tap Changer and Deenergized Tap Changer. “”In the Winding Resistance
section, if there was no line, the
software would crash once clicked on the table, this problem has been fixed in the new version. “”In the
Leakage Reactance UK% section, from now on voltage and current measurements are made based on 1st
harmonic instead of Amplitude. TRANSFORMER
2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Turns Ratio and No Load tab, the Vector Group, the locations of
the V phase nom, V phase act, V sec meas and TTR act fields have been changed. TRANSFORMER 21.11.22.01
21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”It is possible to view and control the primary, secondary and tertiary graphs in Winding Resistance.
“”There are more comprehensive reports from the Test Object tab in this section. TRANSFORMER 2021-11-14
21.11.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "Winding Resistance" section, if you test "HV" after "LV", the strong pressure side resistance
values are displayed in the table. TRANSFORMER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Moreover, two new options - "Auto Transformer with tertiary"and "Autotransformer without tertiary" -
have been added to the "Type" section for autotransformer testing. “” Additionally, by changing values
in “Rating voltage” section
and specifying the number of transformer taps in “Tap Changer” section, the voltage table values of “Tap
Changer” section are updated. TRANSFORMER 2021-10-28 21.10.28.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.28.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.28.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”During the test, If the user doesn’t select the desired row by mistake and run the test by using the
Run icon, a fault use to occur, this is now fixed. TRANSFORMER 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In single-phase mode, by adding rows to the table, the software faults when changing tabs from "Table"
to "Plot". This is now fixed in the new version. TRANSFORMER 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If Tap Control Settings is on Manual, the result section values in Continuty Tap Changer are
calculated correctly. “”If you change the tap number or voltage value for one phase in the conversion
ratio test, the other two phases would
change. “”In Magnetic Balance, if there is a connection to the ground on the secondary side, the table
names in Magnetic Balance Result and the report are corrected. “”In the Plot tab, two check boxes are
created to view Ract and Phase
comparison on the weak pressure side. TRANSFORMER 2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Magnetic Balance
tab, after clicking on Insert Rows and adding the table, the wiring photo was hidden under the Magnetic
Balance Result section, which is now corrected. TRANSFORMER 2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If a wiring is selected which in none of the primary, secondary and tertiary coils have a star
connection trans, magnetic balance, Vector Group Check and Zero Sequence Impedance Demo tests cannot be
performed and these options are disabled
in the Tests section. “”The zero trans sequence test is presented in the Zero Sequence Impedance Demo
tab in demo form. First, enter the initial values for calculation in the Impedance section of the Test
Object tab, and then perform the
test by adding the row in the Zero Sequence Impedance Demo tab by right-clicking and selecting the Apply
Test option. As you know, the Zero Sequence Impedance depends on the current passing through the coil,
usually this value related
to the nominal current IN is expressed, which means that the measurement is done with the 3xIN test
current, however, this is not always possible in process, because to avoid the excessive temperature of
the metal parts used in the trans,
the current must be limited. The Zero Sequence Impedance is measured as a function of the test current
and if necessary, the final result is obtained by extrapolation. Test Result: TRANSFORMER 2021-06-18
21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A no load current test is added on the No Load tab. In this tab, you can only calculate the no load
current of trans. TRANSFORMER 2021-05-25 21.06.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Open circuit test is presented in the Open Circuit tab as demo. This test is used to determine the
core losses in the trans and the parameters of the shunt branch of the circuit equivalent to the trans.
TRANSFORMER 2021-05-24 21.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Several changes have been made in the Test Object tab. single phased, three-phased, trans
winding type, with two or three windings, which are now in the transformer data section. In Test Object
and in the Impedance section, you can enter different values for the short circuit impedance. You can
also enter the type and standard
of trans. “”By placing Type on single-phase mode, you can select coefficients 1/1 or 1/√3 different and
according to the values in the Tap changer table is updated. “”The frequency value can be entered in the
Transformer Data section.
One of the applications of this method is in leakage reactance test. TRANSFORMER 2021-04-21 21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The amount of current taken from each voltage source outputs and in each of the trans test modes in
the Magnetic Balance tab in the columns H1_I0, H2_I0 and H3_I0 is displayed. This has been done to
detect loop connection fault in power
transformers. TRANSFORMER 2021-02-25 21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load
tab, a column is added in the table %In that shows an unloaded current in terms of a percentage of the
nominal current. “”In Leakage Reactance, the "Consider HV/LV is equal" option is created. After enabling
this option, the amount of
impedance calculated for primary and secondary is specified in the Result section. Ideally half of it is
for primary and the other half is for secondary. TRANSFORMER 2021-03-0 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Calculations related to the Vector Group Check tab have been corrected. To obtain the probable vector
grouping, after specifying the values in the requested fields and obtaining the result, Amplitude and
phase values in the primary and
secondary side are carried out on a phase-by-phase basis. For example, a file containing the results of
this tab, calculated with previous versions, is uploaded. In this case, because once with previous
versions of Vector Group Check calculations
performed by using the Recalculate option in signal view settings, the calculations written in this new
version are applied, the results change as if can be seen. “”The DY Wiring Image in the Continuity Tap
Changer tab has been corrected.
“”Z and Zn wirings are added to the initial position. For example, tests are made possible for Znyn11
vector grouping. “”In the Vector Group Check tab, photos are added for testing. “”Many hardware and
software changes have been made to
binaries. For this reason, in winding resistance test when the Voltage Measurement Mode was changed from
binary 1 to 10, the test stoped, now this is fixed. TRANSFORMER 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By erasing all rows, the wiring photo is erased with it, and again by tapping Insert Rows and creating
new rows, the wiring photo is also displayed. “”Max Resistance column values are corrected in voltage
measurement mode section. Also,
in the Read Input Voltage field in the Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load tap are created by
switching from Actual Voltage to Analog Input and vice versa, and a warning message is displayed to
change the wiring. “”The help text for
testing is added to the Transformer's Room tabs, as well as changes made to the buttons in terms of
shape and position. “”The results box is added to the Continuty Tap Changer tab. “”in the Vector Group,
Turns Ratio and No Load tap, after
clicking on the gear in the Add to Report button, make adjustments to the report. TRANSFORMER 2020-08-04
99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the test, the ratio of column conversion "VL-L" to "Vin" is changed. In this cell, the entered
voltage is used to calculate the conversion ratio. While in previous versions the voltage entered in the
column "V L-L" is selected by
the user. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-10 99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transformer in Vecor group, Leakage Reactance
and Winding Resistance tests, in single-phase mode, only one row is added each time you click on Insert
Rows. “”By closing the software from launcher windows not only the home page, but also any page from any
of the rooms, are closed even
when a change is clicked. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-14 99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The dimensions of the table in
the Winding Resistance Trans test are changed because when the report was taken in doc format, the
dimensions of the cells were also changed. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Trans or any Room that defines an operation for Signal View, by going to Hardware Configuration and
changing this page, the software doesn’t crash. “”In any of the trans tests which has a table such as
TTR, Magnetic Balance, Winding
Resistance, Leakage Reactance, if you change values in the Test Object tab, a message is displayed,
which if the user clicks No, the values return to the original state. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-26 99.09.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding the possibility to change the field number Start Taps No. On the Test Object tab and seeing the
changes when pressing the Insert Row button. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-28 99.09.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you change the voltage taps column in Custom mode, a warning is displayed to the user. TRANSFORMER
2020-12-28 99.10.08.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If any tick is removed from the "Plot" tab, “Vector Group, Turns Ratio, No Load“ will not be displayed
in the "Report View". “”For the "Magnetic Balance" test of the transformer, its circuit is displayed in
all switching groups to which
this test can be applied, and a message field is displayed for the switching groups that this test is
not applicable. TRANSFORMER 2021-01-20 99.11.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In “Leakage Reactance” tab, the voltage value display is changed and the "Base Voltage" and "Base
Power" columns are added to the report TRANSFORMER 2021-01-26 99.11.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the "Continuity Tap Changer" test two voltage signals are added, the upper diagram shows the
instantaneous value and the lower one the RMS value. Two fields are also added to “State Settings”
section, "Dev. Show" and "Dev. Assessment".
The "Dev. Show" is intended to show the percentage of signals error and the value of this field cannot
be more than "Dev. Assessment".
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST 2022-03-13 22.03.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems appeared after clicking on the "Init
Test" which are now fixed. UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option called
State pausereset termination has been added. This option is used to determine the condition for changing
the state between Time Test and PickUp-DropOff. The condition can be time, pressing the key space or the
OR logic between the two.
“”After clicking the Init Test button, the tables in the Measurement View are updated correctly. UNDER
OVER VOLTAGE TEST 2021-11-14 21.11.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The software crashed once the "Init test" was pressed which is now fixed. UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST
2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In testing tab, you can add up to 20 rows in the Test Plan section by tapping Add Row. This number is
not related to the rows created in the Data Table section of the Test Object tab UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST
2021-01-28 99.11.09.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In this module, the number of states has been increased from 2 to 20. You can add up to 20 states by
selecting “Add”.
VCC 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The “Duplicate” is added on the mouse right click. “”By holding the
“Ctrl” and selecting any of the files, the new version of each of them is copied. “”On the mouse right
clicking, the new option “Comment” is added. This option is used to create a tooltip. “”While performing
each one of tests, you were
separately able to close the relevant window. VCC 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems such as
changing the name of nodes and not being able to copy and paste them have been fixed in this version.
VCC 2022-07-23 22.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the previous version there were problems opening the executed and saved test file, which have been
fixed in the new version. VCC 2022-04-28 22.04.28.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.28.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.28.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After running the test file, the software crashed, which is now fixed. VCC 2022-04-04 22.04.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The function of the Ctrl+O shortcut key has been modified. VCC 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Issues
related to Export comtrade have been fixed. VCC 2021-04-28 21.04.28.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option is created
to load templates related to different relays in the toolbar of this room. In each new version, this
list is more complete. VCC 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Communication in the Hardware menu of this module is corrected. This option is used to send packet
serial. VCC 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The pause form problem is fixed in showing the link and a link such as www.vebko.ir can be entered in
this form. VCC 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After performing the test in VCC, the test result was not added in Report View which is now fixed. VCC
2020-11-14 99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In VCC, Copy and Paste options are added in right click. Also, after adding a new item, the added xrio
doesn’t disappear. VCC 2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Modified Stop Update/Export and Close Selected Node. VCC 2021-02-01 99.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Increase
the clear result speed in the VCC module
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the PickUp test of the differential, the possibility
of specifying the nominal value of the pickup by the user was added. If the test was based on the IBias
current, this value should be determined by the software. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After loading the "Rio" file, the two fields' values of the "Diff Time Setting" section were loaded
incorrectly. This bug has been fixed in the new version. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Adding some items to the "Stability" tab and changing the maximum disturbance in the"Setting" did not
update the time associated with the disturbance status. This problem has been fixed in the upcoming
version. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-05-07
22.05.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Due to the chosen formula and coefficient in "Ibias Calculation", the dashed
error curve was not shifted correctly according to the corresponding differential curve. This problem
has been fixed. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-04-21 22.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After opening the old files, the "Colour" and "Show arrow" columns could be changed for "IDiff" and
"IBias" lines. This error has been fixed. “” After adding the value in the" %" field on the "Search
Test" tab, the software crashed.
This error has been fixed in the new version. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-04-19 22.04.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once
"Toward Line" on the primary side of the direction were chosen, the calculations would not have been
done correctly which is now resolved. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-04-08 22.04.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If a transformer has three windings and the "Reference Winding" is on "Primary", "Secondary" or
"Tertiary"by changing the "Supply Direction", the calculations related to all fault types are calculated
correctly. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-03-26
22.03.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Calculations related to all fault type have been improved once you choose the
"Busbar" in the "Protected Object". AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems related
to "PickUp-DropOff" test regarding some lines in the I bias test mode have been fixed. AMT DIFFERENTIAL
2022-01-04 22.01.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Problems in PickUp-DropOff calculations and display of indicators have been fixed. AMT DIFFERENTIAL
2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the PickUp-DropOff section, in some fault types, there were problems in displaying the result which
is now fixed in the new version. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Select either "Motor" or "Generator" mode in the "Protected Object", and when you put in a value
under Primary, the Secondary will automatically be adjusted accordingly. Additionally, this version of
the program has addressed an issue
where "I diff" and "I bias" streams weren't calculated correctly. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-10-24
21.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Problems with the PickUp-DroppOff tab are now fixed. For example, in the past, after loading the
differential file, currents were displayed in mA, which should have been expend as in be in. Another
problem is the displacement of Idiff
and Ibias columns. Also, Idiff isn’t calculated correctly. “”In Report Setting, the Stability Test table
is ticked by default. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If there was a direction on the third coil in the Supply Direction section, by changing the number of
trans coils from 3 to 2, the software would have crashed, which is now fixed. AMT DIFFERENTIAL
2021-09-23 21.09.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”There were problems with adding a few charts to the differential characteristic that are now fixed in
the new version. For example, if you changed the chart line type this way, the software used to crashed.
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-08-12
21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the wiring is on the secondary side of z, the currents are calculated correctly.
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-07-23 21.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Draw Custom Characteristic, the chart gradient
for the SEPAM S.80 87T relay is now corrected in single-phase mode. Differential characteristics of some
relays are located in this section. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2020-08-17 99.05.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In 99/5/14 version of the software by loading the XRio file, the unit of each quantity was displayed
incorrectly so that units such as MVA or KV were available in the XRIO file yet were recorded in the
wrong software. “”To check, clicking
on the "Import from list" icon in the "Load XRio Converter and Rio file from list" page and a "XRio
Converter" file related to the MiCOM P632 relay is loaded. “”By going to the File menu and clicking on
Load Relay Setting and loading the
Xrio Relay file and then opening the "Differential" block, you can see that the display of the units is
corrected. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2020-11-10 99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Fixing the problem of add to in stability test AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Solving
the problem of loading xrio of GE relay MT DIFFERENTIAL 2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Stability,
by entering the current from Test Settings, magnetic cursor is moved in Differential Characteristic
View. Also, if you zoom out first and then click Optimize all, the cursor will be placed precisely on
the Y axis. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-01-31
99.11.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”correcting report for Stability test: the correct display of the test points in
the report and fixing the size mismatch error after points are added to the test table.
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-04-21 22.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After writing the name "746" in the "Name" field and
selecting the "Busbar" option, a field named "Angle" is added to the "Test View" window. AMT
DIFFERENTIAL 2022-04-07 22.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Calculations related to I bias for Protecta relay has been added. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-03-08
22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”“ "Supply Direction" in "Setting" is changed based on "Reference Winding" and a message is displayed
for the user to solve the differential function test problems in "Ge" relay. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-02-02
22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Whether the Based on Ibias option is enabled or disabled, it has no effect on the PickUp-DropOff test.
Enabling this option, allows you to inject some current in tests of shot, check and search in the
prefault. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-01-14
22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”During the test, in PickUp-DropOff, you can see the movement of the points on
the characteristic and the pass or fail status of the points. Also, after completing the test, by
setting the Vector View to Orange or Blue and moving the cursor, you can see the movement of the points
on the Differential Characteristic.
“”In PickUp-DropOff, you can set the test so that the pickup is done, but the drop off isn’t. You can
also select different modes from the Target Type field. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2022-01-04 22.01.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Once selecting Orange in Vector View in PickUp-DropOff and moving the cursor in this window or in
Signal View, you can see the values of differential and bias currents for all points of the selected
line in Differential Characteristic.
AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you enable all binary inputs and outputs, you
can export "Export Comtrade" from your file. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-09-17 21.09.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From
now on it is possible to add multiple charts to the differential characteristic. To do this, you must
first create a differential block in RIO as many as you want. To do this copy the main block and paste
it to the desired number in RIO.
Drag the charts for the new blocks. Consider one of the blocks as the main block using set as Active
Function option. To see the other charts in Differential Characteristic, select show in Characteristic
option by right-clicking on the
blocks. You can change the color of the charts in the line Item Setting window as you wish. AMT
DIFFERENTIAL 2021-07-25 21.07.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To see the PickUp-DropOff and Stability tests report, simply by right-clicking on Report View and
select the Report Setting option in the tree chart, check the PickUp-DropOff Test and Stability Test
options. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-03-31
21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Differential Protection Parameters page, help images are added when the
Protected Object field is on Motor or Busbar. “”PickUp-DropOff test is enabled for differential
protection in AMT Differential. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-03-07 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The guiding images for selecting primary, secondary and tertiary CT's are placed in the Differential
Protection Propertise page. Images are also placed in Overcurrent Protection Propertise and Transducer
Propertise to select the direction
of PT's and CT's. “”A new option is added to the Settings tab that if this option is enabled on any of
the Relay Test rooms, the test is stopped at any time if a test failed and a message is displayed to the
user. AMT DIFFERENTIAL 2021-01-11
99.10.22.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”adding "Grabber" to draw differential curves according to the picture.
AMT DIFF HARMONICS 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the “Characteristic View” settings, some options
which weren’t displayed correctly are modified. AMT DIFF HARMONIC 2021-07-25 21.07.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The
formulas in this section are corrected. AMT DIFF HARMONICS 2021-04-21 21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After loading
a rio file, you can change the value of the Ixf/Idiff column in the Differential Protection Parameters
and Harmonic tab, after returning to this page, you can see the changes made. AMT DIFF HARMONICS
2021-03-23 21.03.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In three phases fault mode two phases of current were injected, which is now fixed. AMT DIFF HARMONICS
2021-03-07 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you add points while Harmonic Order is on the second harmonic, and then put Harmonic Order on the
fifth harmonic, the points are updated in differential Harmonic Characteristic as well as in the points
table. AMT DIFF HARMONIC 2020-12-02
99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting the three-phase fault in AMT Differential Harmonic, all three phases
are injected and displayed in Signal View.
AMT DIFF HARMONICS 2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Actual values of search and check lines are displayed
horizontally in the Signal View.
AMT DISTANCE 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you clicked on the “No” bottom in the message box of the
“AMTDistanceCharacteristicEditor,” the characteristic curve would be changed. AMT DISTANCE 2022-07-16
22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In this version, calculations related to the "Percent" column have been changed. AMT DISTANCE
2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems related to loading "xrio" or "rios" containing Lens/Tomato and Mho features have been fixed.
AMT DISTANCE 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Going forward, the "Test Point" section's details about impedance zones will be shown completely. AMT
DISTANCE 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By clicking on Medium Detail View, the software crashed that this is now fixed. AMT DISTANCE
2021-08-02 21.08.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In some files, after enabling or disabling Show Tolerance lines in Report setting, some zones weren’t
displayed in Report Setting, which is now corrected in the new version. AMT DISTANCE 2021-03-23
21.03.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Shot Test by adding a point or points and going to Test Object if you clicked on OK and changed the
type of fault in Test View up on returning, the zone in Impedance View was cleared. This problem is
fixed now. AMT DISTANCE 2021-03-07
21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The xrio file taken from P54x relays could not be loaded correctly and the number
of parameters was zero. This is now fixed. AMT DISTANCE 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the past,
negative Z was recorded as zero for reverse zones causing its tolerance to be miscalculated in relative
mode therefore the results were miscalculated in Shot Test and Search Test, this is now fixed. AMT
DISTANCE 2020-11-10 99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In all windows containing Search and Check tests, if you add a line and then you want to clear
it using the Delete key, the points on the curve on the Tolerance lines is not erased and only that
point is removed from the Test view point table. AMT DISTANCE 2020-11-30 99.09.10.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.10.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.10.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Distance and in check test, if two lines with zero and 90 degree angles are added, by enabling and
disabling the Zoom During Test option, the result of the test points are not erased. AMT DISTANCE
2020-12-17 99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Search Test, if you have a search line with the results, by dragging the new search line, a value
will not be displayed in the Reach column for this line, and the size of this column will be adjusted
according to the information written
in it, and the added line can be removed by right-clicking on the row. AMT DISTANCE 2021-01-11
99.10.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After activating "Out of Range" option the software speed is increased. Also, the software speed
decreases after zooming on specifications.
AMT DISTANCE 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the “Report Setting”, the new option “Show All Tact” is
created at the “Search Test”. AMT DISTANCE 2022-09-14 22.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The calculations related
to "Ignore" in Search Test have been changed so as to find the border of the zones, the points that have
already been tested are not tested again. AMT DISTANCE 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”It is possible to see the information of each zone after the test is created. “”The ground coefficient
for each zone is created both in AMT Distance and in AMT sequencer. In AMT Distance, grounding factor
for phase to ground fault option
is considered, where the ground coefficient of different zones if activated is represented by its value
and mode. In this section, there is always a General grounding factor option. This option related to the
main ground coefficient, which
is determined in the Grounding Factor section. By selecting each option, the amount of voltage and
current for single-phase fault changes to the ground. also in AMT Sequencer for when you want to see the
impedance trajectory, this option
is the same as in the designed distance at the bottom of Impedance View. AMT DISTANCE 2021-09-12
21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the System Parameters section, a new field is created to allow the user to enter the line length in
the Line Length section. Also, in the Shot Test tab points table, a new column called Fault Location is
created that explains where
the fault occurred on the load line. If points such as 1 and 2 are not on the load line, they are moved
to new coordinates on the load line. AMT DISTANCE 2021-07-16 21.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option is created in AMT Distance. After activating the |Z| relative option, there are new
options in the relevant list. For example, if 60% of Z2LL Z2-Z1LL Z1 selected option is selected, the
impedance value is calculated in this
way by using the following formula. Z_2-Z_1 ×0.8+Z_1 ×number in "%" field AMT DISTANCE 2020-11-22
99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding “Update conf. files” button in “Load XRio and Rio file from list”: In this page, after once
clicking on this button and double-clicking on the "Distance" block in the "General Test Object" page
and going to the "Distance Protection
Parameters" page, there is a list of types of relays in the "Copy from" field for different Kl
coefficients in all relays. “”In Distance, by going to the Settings tab and selecting Constant test
voltage and ticking the Allow Reduction
of VTest option, the V MaxL-L field is not activated and this mode is activated only by selecting
constant test current and ticking the Allow Reduction of VTest option. “”The number in Max Point Number
must be between 4 and 20, and if
an invalid number is written, a fault message appears. Now it may be set to a number in RIO, but it is
out of range, and this time the user faces a fault message. But if it is allowed in the range and then
the number is invalidated by
changing the value of the number to which it is linked, the test doesn’t run. “”In all medium rooms,
after adding a point in the table of points, you can move between cells of each point with the tab key
and go to the next row by finishing
the cells of a row and see the changes at the same time on the characteristic curve in Characteristic
View. AMT DISTANCE 2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In all medium rooms except AMT Overcurrent, you can display the characteristic curve in zoomed mode in
the report. AMT DISTANCE 2021-01-16 99.10.27.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.27.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.27.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In “Characteristic View” and in “Check Test” and “Search Test” tabs, Single Shot cannot be run with
“Shift” key and the left mouse button. AMT DISTANCE 2021-01-19 99.10.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the ZT Diagram, the nominal time of the points on the curve is displayed by pressing the “t” key.
AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-10-09 22.10.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problems related to the "Active Range" option in directional
mode have been fixed. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-07-23 22.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Two formulae relating to the
Overload function of Siemens relays were added to the attribute library in the "Test Object". AMT
OVERCURRENT 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After "PickUp-DropOff"-Tests, the chart in Signal View was not updated according to the test results.
This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problems with angular tolerance in directional tests have been fixed. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-05-24
22.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "PickUp-DropOff" test, once the running test was stopped, the software crashed, this problem
has been fixed in the new version. “” The "Show Selected Z Act. Point" was displayed incorrectly in the
setting of the Characteristic
View. The problem is fixed in the new version. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-05-08 22.05.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A After
running the test, the margin lines related to “PickUp Start” and “DropOff End” were not displayed on the
characteristic curve in the “Characteristic View” window; this has been fixed in the upcoming version.
AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-03-13
22.03.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the DOC test and in the "PickUp-DropOff" tab, when the "Target Type" was on
"Angle", after clicking "Apply & Start Test", the values were displayed first in amps and then in angles
in the table, which is resolved in the new version. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By adding the diagram in residual mode, different fault types were not displayed correctly nor added,
this problem has been fixed in the new version. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you open a file with the "DOC" test, the color-coding of the safeguarded areas appear accurately.
“” By changing the values of "I Pick-up" and "Time", if the chart in "Tripping characteristic" is
changed, the values of the titled
columns will not return to the default state. “” Additionally, the issue of not saving changes made in
the "User Define" folder of the "Overcurrent" block has been resolved. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-07-12
21.07.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After saving and executing the file, the values of the Pickup Start, Pickup End and Drop Off End
fields are displayed correctly in test view and in Report View. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-04-17 21.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The dimensions of the More Details section box are corrected and placed in Collapse mode by default.
AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the PickUp-DropOff test, if the Target Type field was on The Current or Angle and you were saving
the test file, the values of the Target Type and Drop Off fields were incorrect when you reopened the
file, this is fixed now. AMT OVERCURRENT
2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Correcting the chart values format while using Graber. “”After testing,
all options affecting the test result in the Overcurrent Protection Propertise window are disabled. The
same is done for AMT Distance and AMT Differential. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the "PickUp-DropOff" tab, by opening the "More Details" panel the graphical shape of the table is
displayed correctly. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In AMT Overcurrent, the design of magnetic lines of the Overcurrent Characteristic window is changed
in the PickUp-DropOff test for both Current and Angle modes. “”In AMT overcurrent by going to General
Test Object, the Mange/ Select
Characteristic window by changing the available values for each curves in the User Defined folder, the
curved shape displayed was not updated, which is now fixed. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-11-08 99.08.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Overcurrent room, by changing the value I nomsecondary, the Absolute value is changed by
changing the I Pick-up column. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-11-10 99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Overcurrent, to test PickUp-DropOff if the row is not added, by selecting “Add to” the same value
is added to other fault types, and after performing, saving and even opening that file, the results are
corrected in the created Fault
type. “”In PickUp-DropOff, if a line is added and selected, in the Detail section, there is no values
for the Pickup Act and Drop off Act fields before testing. “”In all Medium rooms, by selecting the row
that results are recorded and
then using the Add to option, the added point in the selected fault type is displayed as Not Tested. AMT
OVERCURRENT 2020-11-16 99.08.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Medium, as in "AMT Overcurrent", by clicking on Add to button, the fault type tick has been
removed. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-11-23 99.09.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Changing the color of the entire tolerance area in Characteristic View. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-11-25
99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Overcurrent, after testing the DC Decay and Harmonic options are disabled. AMT OVERCURRENT
2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If Characteristic View window is closed, by clear resulting, all Tnoms will switch to the original
state. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By changing the Target Type column in the PickUP-DropOff test points table, from Current to Angle mode
and vice versa, available fields in the Test Point section will be updated. “”By erasing the
characteristic curved data, all options
are disabled in the Overcurrent Protection Parameters. “”In overcurrent and in the Test Object window,
the same names cannot be selected for stages. By doing it, a fault message is displayed and the stages
return to original state. AMT
OVERCURRENT 2020-12-17 99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Overcurrent Characteristic settings, by enabling
Show Curve Information, the attribute curve information is displayed, and even in directional mode,
information about angles is shown in the chart. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-12-28 99.10.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Correcting ”Directional plan“ in “Medium detail view“ AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-01-11 99.10.22.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "PickUp-Drop Off" tab, changing the "Target Type" from "Current" to "Angle" deactivates the column
value "Reset Ratio" in the "Angle" mode. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-01-13 99.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you open a saved file and the settings are on current, the settings will be on current by going to
the PickUp-DropOff tab. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-01-31 99.11.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you select “from protected object” in CT Starpoint connection, there will be correction in Pick-Up
– Drop-Off test.
AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The "Setting" tab creates a section called "Directional
Algorithm". The options in this section can be used according to the "Directional" test algorithm used
in the relay to fully cover the power range in two-point faults. “” The function used in the "7SA87
SIEMENS" relay has been included
in this module. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you add and test several points
using the Add to button, when you add a point using the Add button in the PickUp-DropOff tab, the
desired point is added to the last tested fault type. AMT OVERCURRENT 2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By activating the Active Range Limit option and making changes in its fields, you can see the desired
results in Directional Plan and Overcurrent Characteristic. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In directional test and in two-phase fault types, the name of the Angle field has been changed to
Angle VLL, If. The angle entered in this case represents the line-by-line voltage to the fault current.
AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The values in the "Active Range Limits" section were previously determined based on a reference
current. However, thanks to research conducted on "Siemens" and "MiCOM" manuals, these values are now
calculated using the pick-up current. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If there are points in a fault of a particular element and then that element is removed, you can
remove the points added in the removed element fault through the Remove All button. AMT OVERCURRENT
2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the Space Key Press options are enabled, you can stop testing PickUp-DropOff. AMT OVERCURRENT
2021-07-19 21.07.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By enabling the ITest Relative option and selecting one of the stages, the ITest field value is
updated in the Test Point section and the test points table. AMT OVERCURRENT 2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If More Detail section does not display chart information for you, you must disable Beta: Use Unicode
UTF-8 for worldwide language support. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In PickUP-DropOff and in Angle mode, if a point in the directional plan becomes Out of Range, points
are also specified in the test table. In this case, the added point in Medium Detail View is shown in
pink. “”By holding the ctrl button
and right-clicking the curve, points can be added to the test table in Medium Detail View. “”In the
Settings tab and in Add Signal for harmonic current, the new unit % Ifault is used instead of the In
unit, which collects a percentage
of the fault current with the main current. “”In angular PickUp-DropOff, the pickup start and Pickup End
fields values are adjusted from no trip to tripping area, respectively. “”in the "Sequence Test Point
to" page, two new options called
Advance and Simple 2x, 3x, 4x are added. In Advance mode, the previous method is applied, but in Simple
mode 2x, 3x, 4x you can create twice, triple or four times the regulatory current of each fault type.
The same fault type is displayed
according to the elements defined in the Test Object. For example, by selecting an element in Zero
Sequence, two-point faults are not shown in Sequence Test Point to. It has also been added for
directional. In this case,the x°=End Angle-Start
Angle/2 relationship is used to calculate the double, triple and quadruer angles. “”Two options show
test information and Show Time Information have been added in the right click of Medium Detail View. AMT
OVERCURRENT 2020-12-17 99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Directional and to calculate MTA, the MTA option is created in overcurren Protection Parameters.
First, the user in the MTA selects the related formula to the relay, then enters the RCA value in the
side field. After entering this information, other Trip Sector Definition fields will be automatically
completed. “”after right-clicking
the PickUp-DropOff in PickUp-DropOff and selecting another element, the PickUp-DropOff interval changes,
the dashed line, in the characteristic view is also moved and multiplied by the coefficient. “”In
Sequence Test Point to, you can
switch between fields and make changes by pressing the Tab key, and it is also possible for AMT
Distance, AMT Differential and other parts. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-12-28 99.10.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Added the MTA formula in the Element section of the Report View window. AMT OVERCURRENT 2020-12-28
99.10.08.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In PickUp-DropOff, the minimum value of PickUp Start, PickUp End and DropOff End fields is set at 1
mA. “”"Sensitive as a separate fault" option is added to "Overcurrent Protection Parameters". Activating
this option adds a new element,
namely "Sensitive", to the "Selected element type" field. It does not affect other elements and acts
independently. In addition, the current IL1 1 is activated and evaluated via binary inputs 1 and 2.
AMT SEQUENCER 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The points are not displayed in the differential characteristic
when the “State Type” is set to “Tracking”. “”In Device Settings, after changing the frequency in f nom,
the value of time in Period Time did not change. This issue has been resolved in the upcoming version.
AMT SEQUENCER 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting “L1L2” in the “Insert Z Shot,” the phase value is set to 30, -150, and 90, respectively,
in the pre-fault state. “”The software crashed after selecting one of these fault types L1, L2, or L3
and clicking on the “Insert After” option. “”Henceforth, the “Tracking Assessment” section is added to
the “Report View” and you can
activate or deactivate it on the “Report Setting.” “”The problem of not displaying of the “Harmonic
Setting” section in the “Signal View” is solved. “”In the previous versions, if the “State Type” was set
to the “Continuous Ramp,” by changing
the curve on the “Characteristic View” and selecting the overcurrent characteristic, the “Set Mode”
option would alter. “”By selecting the “Value” in the “Harmonic Setting” and moving the cursor, the
related graph was not displayed correctly.
AMT SEQUENCER 2022-10-09 22.10.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problems in "Signal View" related to not displaying
the graph calculate in RMS mode and also not displaying binary signals in "Select Graph for Actual
Binary" mode in a graph have been resolved. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-09-14 22.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After changing the "Type" to "Harmonic", the relevant tables were not updated in the "Detail View",
which has been fixed in the upcoming version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The distance between the 6 endpoints and the trajectory line was removed in this version. Also, by
changing the value of "IE", the existing problems with drawing these points and said line have been
fixed. As of this version, the first
harmonic is used to draw lines and end points AMT SEQUENCER 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The calculations
related to RMS in the Harmonic Order table have been changed. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you set "Type" to "Orange", the status of the states in the diagram above was chaotic. This bug
has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-05-24 22.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When "Overcurrent" option in "Set Mode" is selected then changed to one of the Distance options, the
software crashed. This problem has been solved in the new version. “” If the State Type is on "Quick",
activating the "Advanced View"
option, "Quick Setting" was not displayed; however, it has been fixed in the upcoming version. “” If the
"State Type" was on "Step Ramp", the "Ramp Description Errors" section and the "Con.In Freq Step" option
were not displayed. These
problems have been fixed in the new version. “” The inconsistency between "Table View" and "Detail View"
seen after naming the last State is now fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-05-08 22.05.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” There were problems in the binary outputs which are fixed in this version. For example, if “Bin Out”
2 was selected, the device did not function and a graph was not even seen in the “Signal View”. AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-04-26 22.04.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once the file containing a test with two states, “Pickup” and “Drop-off” was opened and applied
again, the amount of drop-off errors in “Measurement View” would display the wrong “Assessment” column.
This value was not displayed correctly in the state of drop in “Table View”, yet this has been fixed.
AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-24 22.04.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If there are two states where one of the states is "Continuous Ramp", where the first state
has an offset and the second state is with or without offset, an error occurred when activating the
option "Continue last state amplitude", which has now been fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-21 22.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After opening the old files containing "Time Assessment", due to the addition of "t_start" and
"t_end" values, the values of this section were not loaded correctly, which has been fixed in the new
version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you have selected a number of signals to display in "Show Signals", these signals they
would be disabled by opening and closing "Hardware Configuration". This bug has been fixed in the new
version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-11 22.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” By putting values in "Primary Values" mode and clicking the "Export Comtrade", the information is
displayed correctly. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-11 22.04.10.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.10.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.10.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If the "Disable Get Actual" option was enabled in one of the states and disabled in the other by
moving the cursor in the "Signal View", the RMS value in the Data Table would be displayed equal to
"na". This bug has been fixed in the
new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-04 22.04.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When "Save Last Actual Data" was enabled,
the RMS value was zero in some places. This item has been modified in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER
2022-04-04 22.04.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” From now on, "Live Scroll" and "Live Scroll Actual" options cannot be active at the same time. You
can also use "Live Scroll Actual" option for binaries. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems related to copying/pasting a line in "Ramp Assessment" have been fixed. AMT SEQUENCER
2022-02-09 22.02.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Calculations related to the Zero sequence illusion is now fixed in the Symmetrical Component. AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-01-18 22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The quality of the images in the reports have been improved so that users do not have the problems in
zooming and printing as in the past. The problems that existed in the display of Signal View, Vector
View, Characteristic View and
ZT Diagram in the reports are now fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By default, Next Full and Start Time options are disabled before selecting the On GPS. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you activated the Statistical Output mode, after stopping the test and clearing the result, the
software crashed. This problem is fixed in the new version. “”In Detail View, sometimes in the Binary
Inputs section, the labels and values
for each binary were wrong. This bug has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-12-19
21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you set the signal frequency below 25 Hz in harmonic mode, the software would crash by selecting
Orders in Harmonic Type; this has been fixed in the new version. “”Binary inputs graph in Signal view
was not displayed correctly during
the test, this problem has been fixed in the new version. “”Differential and Overcurrent characteristics
were not displayed in the report section which has been corrected. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the items related to the Step Values table are entered in decimal and in milliamperes, because the
accuracy of the numbers entered in this table is one milliampere, the software will round up those
numbers. “”Saving and retrieving
some files would cause an error exception, which has been fixed in the new version. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-11-30 21.11.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By opening saved files with Ramp Assessment, the Act column is displayed correctly. AMT SEQUENCER
21.11.22.01 21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Once you enabled the Static Output and run the test, by stopping the test even by deleting the results
in Signal View, the test time were displayed as 4000 seconds. This case has been resolved. “”If you
enable Frequency in Signal view,
In the Step Ramp mode, and set the Step Ramp Display to Rate d / dt, by changing the Step Value, the
signal was not displayed correctly, which is now resolved. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” This version has resolved the issues with bugs in the static output icon. “” Previously, when edits
were made to the "Hardware Configuration" binaries, the numbers C1, C2, etc. would not appear correctly
in the Comment and "Trigger
Condition" columns of the "Table View" page. This issue has been resolved in this version. “” In
previous versions, the "Level Assessment" would display the assessment result before running a test with
changes to parameters, like changing
the range value. This issue has been corrected in this version. “” After enabling "Show Actual Type" for
binaries 9 and 10, the "Binary Analog Transformer" is updated. “” After changing the name of the
operation, the name of this signal
is updated in the "Setting" of the "Signal View" window. “” If you had saved a file in the Stable
version while the "Signal View" window was open, when you tried to open the same file on the Test
version, the signal wouldn't show up in
the "Signal View" window. However, this bug has been fixed in this new version. “” Once the file with
THD has been uploaded, the details for it are shown in the related table. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-24
21.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When "State Type" is on "Transient", when loading the comtrade file, if there was a rio or xrio with
the name cfg and dat by opening the comtrade file, the xrio file would not be loaded correctly. This is
now fixed in the new version.
AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Vector View, if any of the vectors in the Show Arrow
column were false, the true label would not change the status correctly, this is now fixed in the new
version. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-09-23 21.09.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Signal View, when State Type is placed on Transient. And you were on Current State and selected
Magnitude Harmonic, by moving the cursor in Vector View, the harmonic signal wasn’t displayed correctly.
In this version this has been
fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-09-17 21.09.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By clicking on Import Comtrade while Set Mode
is on Transient, the software crashed which is now fixed in the new version. “”If you changing the
frequency value in the Offset Value table in Step Ramp, the signal shape would not have been displayed
correctly, which is now fixed in
the new version. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When current outputs are in the form
of used by right-clicking on the Actual x 1.2... column in the Voltage Output Signal section and
selecting one of the options, the software crashed, but this is now fixed. “”In previous versions, if
you attributed an output to another
group from one current or voltage group, there would be a problem creating ROCOF. For example, if you
attributed the output of a current group B to the output of a current group A, this bug would appear.
This is now fixed in the new version.
“”After taking the comtrade file from the software, if the related file lacks a digital signal, the 0D
value for it will be recorded in the cfg file. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Right-clicking on the first row of the table in Tracking mode is disabled. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-07-23
21.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If State Type is on Quick and Set Mode on Powers, by changing the Step Value, the output value
wouldn’t have changed, which is now corrected. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-07-17 21.07.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Ramp Assessment, when a Signal characteristic, is selected it is correctly shown in the Act column.
AMT SEQUENCER 2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Default Color option in Vector View performs correctly. Immediately after selecting this option,
the color of the color column cell and the vector color in the graph are colored to the original color.
AMT SEQUENCER 2021-05-26 21.05.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the new versions, if the test isn’t performed, in Measurement view, there is no results
in the Assessment column. “”In Step Ramp, if there is an offset, save and load the file again, the
offset values aren’t change. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-05-09 21.05.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After changing the “Type” from “Normal” to “Orange” or the other options, the track bar in “Vector
View” crashes. This bug is fixed in this version. “”After loading some comtrade files, if the impedance
is higher than a certain limit,
the characteristic curve was displayed as a straight line, which is solved in this version. AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-04-28 21.04.28.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By going to Hardware Configuration and making changes the software. does not crash if in the Ramp
Assessment for the Condition column, Logic had been chosen. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-04-21 21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Step Ramp mode, if you change the offset values of the table values, they aren’t erased by going to
Hardware Configuration and making changes. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-04-17 21.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When a field is linked to a parameter in rio, if the same was done for another field with the same
parameter attributed, the value was zero, which is now fixed in this version. “”By placing Set Mode on
Overcurrent, sensitive option is
removed from fault type list. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The dimensions of the Binary
Analog Transformer section in Signal View is corrected. when binaries 7 and 8 are enabled, you can see
it in this section. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-23 21.03.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If binaries are used to design the test, say two binaries are defined as X and the other binarys
conditional, the test did not perform the condition properly; this problem is now fixed. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-03-17 21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When the actual voltage and current values are enabled, if you open Vector View and place type on
Orange, the values in the Vector View section are updated in the report. “”By enabling the Trigger value
and going from the Analog Output
tab to Trigger and vice versa, the value attributed to each binaries remains constant. “”Values of Link
to Xrio, remove link, go to linked value are corrected in Trigger logic minimum time and Delay after
binary trigger fields. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-03-07 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The PCM option tick is removed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you place Binary-Input Type on Wet Max 188 V Disable Error and its Threshold on AC or DC,
then inject more than this value, for example, 200 volts into the binary, there is no error binary 1
OverVoltage. “”If binary 9 and 10, especially binary 9, are not enabled in binary/ analog input tab,
didn’t put its threshold on AC or
DC and apply the current to binary 9 or voltage to binary 10, Binary Error 9 OverCurrent and Binary
Error 10 OverVoltage faults don’t occur, respectively. For example, if only the first output of the A
current group is enabled and binary
9 is disabled, if you currrent by two wires to binary 9 through the output of 1 A current group, an
Error IA1 Other error is displayed. “”If you put State Type on Step Ramp and then tick Enable Reset and
select Rate Frequency, by giving
the value to the frequency in the Start Values table and going to the Hardware Configuration page, if
you assign some value to the frequency column in step values and final values tables, the frequency
waveform is disrupted, this is now
fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-02-23 21.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The correct operation of cut and paste option
in the Binary / Analog Input tab of the Hardware Configuration page. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-02-22
21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When one of the current outputs or voltage is active and the Show Actual is in True mode, by selecting
and activating the other output, the Show Actual value is also in True mode. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-03
99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By writing a comment in the Table View window, this field could not be updated in the Detail View
window, which is now corrected. “”At the top of the Signal View window, the text box related to test
status is removed. “”In the Vector
View window, after performing the test and selecting type from Normal to Orange mode by moving Cursor,
the values related to Harmonic 1 column were miscalculated. “”By changing the state name and the time in
the "Detail View" window, the
related fields in the "Table View" window are updated in small mode. “”There are problems in changing
state type and updating tables related to that state, now are fixed. For example, by selecting State
Type in Step Ramp mode and placing
Set Mode on ZI Constant, related tables to this mode are displayed, be have after changing the State
Type to Harmonic mode, the tables were not displayed. “”Trigger is linked in the Detail View and Table
View windows. “”By enabling the
Data Table in the Signal View window, and selecting cursors on any signal, these values are displayed in
the Report. “”In Signal View, by enabling the Data Table, scroll down is removed and its size is
automatically adjusted. “”In the
Detail View window, by selecting Step Ramp and placing Set Mode on Powers, if the reactive power value
changes in the Step Values table, in the Signal View window, after enabling the reactive power waveform
in Setting, this waveform is
displayed correctly. “”In the General Test Object page, Show/Hide option tick is removed by default.
“”By changing the characteristic type, its icon also changes in the toolbar. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-05
99.08.15.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In sequencer, the problem with the link magnitudes option in the step ramp mode is fixed. “”the filter
by sender unit did not work the problem is no solved. “”by double-clicking on any the blocks in Link to
XRio window the software used
to crash now if is fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-08 99.08.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If a window closes, by clicking
on its icon reopens it. “”If a module is open, without any changes to the previous module, the message
box that saves the closed module information is not displayed. “”If you have selected the Overcurrent
icon in Normal mode in the Impedance
View window, by changing it to "Transient" while the icon of the overcurrent is disabled in this window,
distance is displayed by default. “”By clicking the combination keys of each window, the related window
opens, while in previous versions,
the software return to thirty seconds by pressing the combination keys. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-10
99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”the signal view high light for state 1 is gone when current state is clicked. Removing the view option
from right-click of the z-graph at the bottom of the cursors. “”Removing the optimize y option from
right-click of z-graph and digital
charts in signal view page “”If Signal View is closed by adding or subtracting states, the trackbar is
refreshed in the Vector View. “”saving and loading the xrio file is fixed. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-14
99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The word Link in Extra Setting tab has been corrected in Hardware Configuration window. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-15 99.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If Communication Mode is in Integrated System mode, by double-clicking on a file when we are connected
to the device, we stay in device connection mode in the opened window. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-16
99.08.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Immediately after testing, the start button is deactivated. “”In Hardware Configuration and in the
Analog Output tab, if one of the values of voltage or current is initially “Not Used” in their tables
then the Show Actual Value is ticked,
after activating the “not Used”, voltage or current is the value changes from False to True. “”Correct
performance of Test Hardware Configuration in Transducer and especially Sequencer “”If a file has a
result, by reopening it and applying
changes to the device, you can see the changes made by reopening the same file. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-22
99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Graphic change of track bar in Signal view. “”Solving the problem in transient table: By loading a
comtrade file, the channel name of this file would have crash the table. “”In loading comtrade files,
the fault of all signals are displayed.
“”From now on, none of binary outputs are enabled by default. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-23 99.09.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”high light of signal view for state 1 disappears when you click on Current State. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transient, if there is a voltage fault by disabling voltages in Hardware Configuration, the fault
isn’t displayed. “”Correcting binary threshold values of Input 9 and 10. “”In Test Object and in Device,
all link to XRio fields can
be changed. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-28 99.09.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In general, if the frequency in any of the
available tables in Detail View is zero, the angle is also zero. “”If the Rate Value per Second option
in Step Ramp is selected, the values in step values table are be in seconds and would return to their
original state by changing State
Type to Quick Values. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Optimize calculations in Step Ramp
if the Con. in Ferq Step option is ticked. “”By selecting Overcurrent in Impedance View by clicking on
the no trip area, magnetic cursor will go to the top of the characteristic view and will not fade. “”By
changing the current value in
the Analog Output Channels section, magnetic cursor is moved on the current axis. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Hardware Configuration page in the Binary/ Analog Input tab, of the description column is
deleted by changing the Show Result column from True to False. “”Step up and Down keys function in Quick
mode have been corrected when Set
Mode is placed on Overcurrent or Differential mode. “”In Quick mode, magnetic cursor is moved by
clicking step up or step down in Characteristic View. “”If you have entered the frequency at zero,
clicking the Phase column will not display
some options in Vector View and Table View. Also, if the signal is DC, in Detail View by right-clicking
on the Phase column, there are only Link to XRio, Remove Link and Go to Linked Value options. “”Fix
Show/Hide option in Vector View.
“”When Set Mode is in Power mode, it is activated for the parameters of active power, reactive power and
The apparent power of link to magnitude and Equal to Magnitude options is enabled.. “”If State Type is
on Harmonic mode, by enabling
and disabling current or voltage groups, the zero value for them #1 Free-Order Harmonic tables and #2
Harmonic Free-Order in the table is considered by default. “”For some Set Modes such as Power or ZI
Constant the frequency column has
been disabled. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-17 99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Insert Z Shot, the current value of
the I test is based on the nominal current. If you change this value, in Table View and Detail View,
these values will be changed equally. “”If State Type is on Tracking mode, you'll see the correct show
of binary outputs signal by zero
and one binary outputs because the start time is set to 2 milliseconds by default. “”All colors changed,
especially in cells such as Table View, Detail View and Vector View. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-28
99.10.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After selecting a signal in “Show Signals” and ticking the related tick in “Settings”, chart will be
displayed in Signal View. “”If the signal is DC, after linking the value of the phase column of the same
signal with the parameter in
XRio after tapping the Balance Angle in the other signal phase column, the value of the DC signal phase
column does not change.
AMT SEQUENCER 2023-09-14 23.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding a new wiring type 2*300 V for voltage outputs in the
AMT205 device. AMT SEQUENCER 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In “Transient”, the displaying of trajectory
with the true RMS values is added. “”In the Hardware Config, another option called “Yes Abs” has been
added to the “Show Result column.” By selecting this option, the positive or negative sign of the value
written in the Threshold column
is not important. For example, if you set the “Threshold” to 50 volts, any voltage that is greater than
positive 50 volts or less than negative 50 volts will be considered as binary 1. “”You can switch the
wiring type based on the tester
device. By selecting an option from the "Hardware Configuration" window, the voltage and current group
wirings will update accordingly. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-09-01 22.09.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The fundamental frequency in "Harmonic" has changed. By selecting "Orders", the maximum frequency
value has increased to 2500 Hz. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” New options to show/hide zones have been added in the "Characteristic View". “” To calculate the RMS
of currents and voltages, a field called "Calculate RMS" has been created. This field contains the
options "None", "FCW" and "HCW".
If you open the old file in this version and the option "RMS" was activated, this field is set to the
option "FCW", otherwise to the option "None". AMT SEQUENCER 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new option called "Disable Actual" has been added. This option allows you to show or not show the
voltage and current outputs in the "Signal View". AMT SEQUENCER 2022-05-30 22.05.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Transient", a new option called "IE" has been added which is a combination of three currents used
in functions to the earth coefficient. By selecting "none", the IE flow is calculated from the sum of
IL1+IL2+IL3 and is used in functions.
However, once other currents are selected it will be used as an IE stream. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-05-24
22.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new option called "Advance View" has been added in "Detail View". Enabling this option provides
more settings of the selected State Type. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-19 22.04.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If there is an active binary input before testing, the "Error Overvoltage of Binary" is by default
and you cannot enable it during testing. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-04-04 22.04.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In all Rooms, after running the test, when "Actual" is active, its time is inserted at the bottom of
the screen, inside the parentheses. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-03-29 22.03.29.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.29.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.29.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new column called "Selectivity" has been added. If the measured voltage value is not clear and, for
example, it is higher than the selected mode, after the specified time in this, it changes to the next
mode so that the correct value
of the read voltage is displayed in "Signal view". “” If your micro device is Vivado7020, you can
display the phase and binary inputs frequency for long time in "Signal View". AMT SEQUENCER 2022-03-26
22.03.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The "Long Time Record" option has made it possible for the user to view values in "Signal View" for a
longer period. The minimum value you can consider for the "Sample Time" field is 100 milliseconds. AMT
SEQUENCER 2022-02-09 22.02.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By default, after clicking on Insert Z Shot, the voltage angles in the three states prefault,
fault, post fault are zero, -120 and 120 degrees, respectively. The current angles in the fault state
L1-L2-L3, 100% are calculated by working out the difference between the voltage angle and the line
angle. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Sequences related to group B flow were missing in the Calculations section and Show Signals
section which are added to the new version. It was also possible to assign the signals selected in the
Show Signals section to cursors in the Data Table. For example, if you enable signals zero sequence I2,
I0 negative sequence in the
Show Signals section, their value are shown correctly. “”From now on, by clicking on Insert Z shot, the
voltage angles in all three states are equal to zero, -120 and 120. “”After selecting Stable Power
Swing, you can add a simultaneous
error with stable power swing. “”In the System Frequency field, you can enter the desired frequency
value in all test cases. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-01-18 22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Table View, when the tables are reduced, you can change the time of each state and the status of
binary outputs and view them simultaneously in Detail View. AMT SEQUENCER 2022-01-04 22.01.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From now on, you can look for the xrio or rio file name in capital letters in the Search box of the
Load XRio and Rio file. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”It is possible to display and read the frequency in the range of 25 to 250 Hz by Binary Inputs. AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-12-07 21.12.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”All power parameters measured with Binary Inputs are displayed in Signal View. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-11-30 21.11.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”New math functions have been added to the Calculated Assessment. “”New fields have been created in
Calculations. In previous versions, these fields were located in the Setting tab of the Signal View
window. AMT SEQUENCER 21.11.22.01
21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the result of multiplying the Order column in the Frequency column is more
than 2 kHz, the value of the Phase and Magnitude columns will be zero for all current outputs. AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-11-14 21.11.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Simulation", the Fault tab is added to create a power fluctuation error in the corresponding test
case. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The "Level Assessment" evaluation has been adjusted so that if the Tolerance column is entered with
100 milliseconds and 20 milliseconds for states 2 and 3, respectively, and 1 and 0 for states 2 and 3 in
the "Start" column, the evaluation
disregards the final 100 milliseconds of state 1 and the initial 100 milliseconds of state 2, as well as
the initial 20 milliseconds of state 3 and the last 20 milliseconds of state 2. After this, the
evaluation is completed based on the
values entered. “” If you enable any binary in "Hardware Configuration", the column containing the
number of states created appear in "Level Assessment". “” A new simulation test case involving three
parallel lines has been added. “” You
can copy and paste the data from a single row in the "Ramp Assessment" tab. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-25
21.10.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”You can see Total Harmonic Distortion THD when State Type is on Harmonic. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-24
21.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Report Setting, level assessment and Ramp Assessment options are disabled and enabled by default,
respectively. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Two new test cases are added in the Simulation section called Double Fault and Parallel Line, bugs and
other test case problems are fixed as well. “”When State Type is on Harmonic, you can select the type
interharmonic or Orders. Interharmonic
mode is the same as before. Orders mode can only be used in one state. In this case, you can add
different harmonics to the table by using the Add New Row and Remove Selected Row buttons. Since the
sampling speed of the AMT105 device for
actuals is 400 microseconds and the speed of making the diagram is 10 microseconds, so in this case, for
actuals, it does not actually represent the exact of what was injected. The number of signals selected
in Hardware Configuration,
Mag and Phase columns for each signal in the Harmonic Order section are added. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-09-23
21.09.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”This icon is designed to give the user faster access to Calculations in the toolbar. “”After
activating the Show Actual Type for each binary, Select Graph for Actual Binary section is activated in
the Signal View. With the number of
voltage and current outputs being activated in Analog Output, you can select voltage and current output
charts for each binary chart in this section, as well as the charts of other binaries, and see this in
Signal View. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-09-17
21.09.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Export Comtrade, if sampling rate is placed on 2 kHz, by opening the dat file
from point 1001 onwards, the number recorded for time in the Comtrade file should be increased by 500
microsecond steps. “”A new option called PID is created at the top of each Room. By using this option,
you can send information to AMPro
Test software. It is important to note that in order to send data, you must also enter port information
in the relevant software. To know the port information, you must go to the Room tab of Communication
Mode in Setting. For example,
in C# a program for this is written by Vebko developers. The amplitude, phase and frequency value for
the first output of voltage group A is written in this program and changes are visible in Vebko
software. “”From now on it is possible
to load the xrio P142 and P342 relays in the Vebko software. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Time Assessment, two new options called t_start and t_end are added in the Start and Stop columns.
By using these two options, the beginning or end of each state can be considered as the beginning or end
of the time assessment. “”It
is acceptable to type the ID in capital letters “”If a number greater than or equal to 24 is entered in
the Start Time field, the value is changed. Also, after running the test, the options in the ON GPS
field are disabled. “”If Value
Assessment or any other tab is selected in Measurement View, after opening the new file from the file
menu, the Measurement View window is placed on the Time Assessment tab by default. “”If a file contains
a value in Time Assessment, after
erasing the results, the software would have crashed in earlier versions. This problem is now fixed.
“”After testing, you cannot change the binary output status in the Analog Output table. “”In Step Ramp,
a new section called Step Ramp
Display is created. This section contains two options: Value and Rate d/dt. The Value option is the same
as before. Rate d/dt is used to test functions that work by changing the values of two elements, such as
Over-excitaion. In the Over-excitaion
function, the rate of voltage and frequency changes and their ratio to each other must be tested. One
important point is that the chart in the fixed Step time, is the same as switching between options. AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new section called Calculations is added to the View menu. This section has been in the
signal view window of the Setting tab of the Operation section in the past, which has had problems such
as not renaming the signal, which is now fixed in the new version. There will also be new features added
to the Calculations window
in the future. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Signal View and in the Setting tab,
by clicking on the Export Comtrade... button, all signals are displayed in the Show Signals section, as
a list in Export Comtrade, the Check channels to export: section. “”When loading some xrio files into
*.xrio and *.xml formats, the
conversion of quantity units are done by default regardless of their unit e.g. kV or volt. “”If in Table
View, the number of states are more than 60, they are updated by moving scroll to the left and right of
the values in each state.
“”A new tab is created in Measurement View called Tracking Assessment. This tab is used in testing the
Power Swing function. Testing this function is important when the relay is blocking the distance relay
after passing the outer zone.
To do this, you first need to list the points in Characteristic View in the First Point Time and End
Point Time columns in this tab. The user selects the number of that shot and the selected number will
appear in Characteristic View. The
time interval between the two points selected in the First Point Time and End Point Time columns are
calculated and evaluated. “”By using the Default Color option, the color of each vector in Vector View
can be restored to default without
the fault message appearing. “”In some xrio files after loading in the software, for parameters that
were Enumeration type, the basis for comparing the ID parameter from the Value column is added. AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Changes have been made in the Analog Output and Binary/ Analog Input tabs in Hardware Configuration.
To enable or disable the actual values in Analog Output, just in the Actual x1.2... column Enter a
coefficient of 1.2 one and two tenths
milliseconds, and it will also be disabled by entering zero. In Binary/Analog Input, to activate is
enough to, in the Show Actual Type column, select AC or DC to activate the Sampling Rate x 400us column
and enter a coefficient of 400
microseconds. “”If the names of ID are typed Persian in adding the parameter in the General Test Object,
a message is displayed to the user that the written characters are not accepted and returns to the
default name. “”If Type is on any
of the options, there will be a Default Color option in Vector View. “”In the Binary/ Analog Input and
Binary Output tabs to disable any of the used binaries, you can use the N key and alt+N combination key
to disable all binaries. As
you can see, the same can be done in the Binaries Output tab to disable binary outputs. “”In Analog
Output and the shown wirings 4x150V, 60VA @ 400mArms, 6x32A, 100VA @ 32A, 3Vrms, 5A and 12Vrms in the
Other section, Not Used button is
added. “”In the Value Assessment tab, two columns called Ratio and Assessment Settings are added. There
are two options for Automatic and Manual in Assessment Settings. In automatic mode, as before,
calculations are performed, but in Manual
mode, the Act cell is activated to order the number entered by the user in dev. calculation. The number
entered in the Ratio column is a coefficient to multiply in the nominal value to calculate Dev. These
options are made to test the
meter. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transient and in the Simulation tab, two stable
power swing and Single line test modes are added. Also, in Unstable power swing mode, a new field called
Measuring Location is added for the user to have the beginning and end of the line, current and voltage
during the oscillation. “”After
opening the Overcurrent block in AMT Sequencer, it can be seen that the Sensitive as seperate fault
option is disabled. “”In some cases, intense instantaneous peaks occur during testing which are not
visible in Signal View. For this purpose,
an option called Sensitive Signal View is added in the Setting so that such peaks can be viewed in Zoom
Out and Optimize all modes. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-06-06 21.06.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To enter the settings of Toshiba relays in the software that is in the form of a csv file, act in the
same way as before. For this purpose, in the General Test Object page, select the Toshiba relay template
from import from list section,
and then enter the csv file from the Load Relay Setting section. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-06-05 21.06.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The application of save last actual data option, which is located in the Extra Setting tab of the
Hardware Configuration page, is that if this option is enabled, if the Actual column of voltage or
current groups is enabled, in the software,
the saved data is coded and deleted after reaching a certain volume. “”To create stable power
oscillations, unstable power oscillations and create all kinds of faults, it is enough to place the
State Type on Transient, enable the Simulation
option and select the mode you want in the Simulation tab and perform the injection. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-05-18 21.05.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Vector View, by selecting DC for binary inputs, binary input cells with Show actual value on DC are
disabled in Harmonic 1, Phase, Real and Imaginary columns. “”If you put the first state on Step Ramp and
the second state on Quick,
the Continue Last State Amplitude option is removed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-05-09 21.05.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After
clicking on “Report Setting”, the two options “Show Grid Lines in Graphs” and “Show Tolerances Lines”
activate by default in General Setting. These two options are used to display grid lines and tolerance
when the “Impedance View” option
is activated in “Report Setting”. “”In the “Setting” tab of the “Signal View”, a new option “Live Scroll
Actual” is created in the “Extra Setting” section. This option is only active if at least one of the
actual value of voltage or current
outputs is “True”. “”In “Ramp Assessment” and “Value Assessment”, if you set the “Signal” column to
“P1.Q1” or “P2.Q2” or “P3.Q3”, only the “Real” and “Imaginary” values are shown in the “Signal Type”
column. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-04-28 21.04.28.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Binary/Analog Input, if you right-click on the binary that is Not Used, select set the
same option, all binaries are Not Used. The application of this option is to unify other binaries,
similar to the selected binary. “”In Tracking mode, during and after testing the table and icon
characteristics are disabled in Impedance
View and the time of this State Type is set to 2 milliseconds by default. “”Combination Cable Setting
and VDC Setting options are available for neutrik cable settings and DC voltage in Hardware
Configuration, respectively. These options
are located in the Setting of the main page of the software and in the Hardware tab. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-04-21 21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Options are considered for displaying the actual values in the Show Signals section for S, P, Q, Power
Factor, Z, Current Differential, and Phase Power Factor. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By stop testing manually, you can switch between the state's in Table View. “”To disable binary inputs
or binary outputs created in the Goose Settings tab, simply use disable Goose Settings by right-clicking
on any of the selected binaries.
“”If you create a block and add a parameter in the General Test Object, some characters cannot be
written in column ID, and if you use lowercase letters or unauthorized characters, a message is
displayed to the user and the software changes
them to capital letters and characters allowed. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-03-17 21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After
you import the scl file, the Min Repitation and Max Repitation columns are separated in the Goose
Setting tab. “”When the names of the state are changed, these changes can be seen in the Ignore before
and Ignore after columns in the Measurement
View window. “”By right-clicking on Vector View and selecting Power and changing the Type to Orange and
moving cursor, the Real and Imaginary values in the table will change. “”For current group B, the
Symmetrical option is created in
Vector View. “”After enabling binary outputs, the related options are added in the Start and Stop
columns. One of the applications of this option is in testing the key performance time by AC voltage
method. There the user must enter the
time of bin Out. Using these options can make time easier to calculate. “”The 3V0 option in Measurement
View is added in the Ramp Assessment tab. “”In Right-clicking on some fields in Device Settings new
options are added. “”Change the
binary outputs to tabular form in Detail View and Table View. “”In all rooms, the device fan activation
icon is placed in the toolbar. In the past, to activate the device fan, you had to go to the Settings
page, the Hardware tab of fan
mode section. If the fan is active, the color is red and if it is inactive, it is blue. It should be
noted that if you are not connected to the device, this icon is disabled. “”This version of Service is
removed and a menu called Socket
Status is created at the top of each page. For this purpose, in Setting and in the Room tab, a field
called Connected Port is created in the Communication Mode section. There is also no longer AMProService
in the Services tab in the Windows
Task Manager. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Goose Setting tab is enabled in the
Hardware Configuration page and you can import SCL-format files in the software. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-06-03 99.03.14.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding shortcuts such as pressing Scroll Mouse or right-clicking +alt on each state to opening detail
view as pop up. “”Adding the ability to perform mathematical operations in fields where numerical values
are entered. For example,
if you want to multiply sqrt2 by 10, simply enter the same operation in the relevant field.
“”Possibility of defining trigger condition in different parts of the software. This is normally done in
the trigger setting section, which is
also added to the table view window, and you can use the options that are placed for different
conditions. “”If you define a few states and need to make the states smaller, you can do this to all
states by right-clicking on the gear and
using small mode. “”If you have multiple active binaries in the measurement view section, you can select
the logic in start and stop conditions and by right-clicking the stop in the view custom setting section
to apply and define the requirements.
“”Adding the live scroll option to the Setting of signal View window. If you tick the live scroll
option, the software performs like an oscilloscope so the signal changes appear live in the Signal View
window. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-08-04
99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Table View, by right-clicking on each voltage and current groups, link magnitude
and Link Angles options for voltage and current are separated. For example, if you select link Magnitude
on a voltage group, you'll see that only voltages are linked together. It is also created for both
current groups A and B. These options
are also created in Detail View. For example, if you enable two current groups and link one of the
groups, the other group is not linked. “”The Link Angles Equal option works in such a way that all three
phases are linked for the same
value. For example, if the first phase enters at 45 degrees, all three phases are 45 degrees. Also, the
performance of the Link Angles Balance option when a value for each phase is entered, the other two
phases are balanced by a 120-degree
difference. For example, if you enter zero for the middle phase, there is 120 degrees difference from
other phases to this. “”For all Test View tabs in medium rooms such as Distance, Differential and
Overcurrent, link to Xrio option is
created and if needed, you can use this in tests. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”It
is also possible to zoom in on the track bar section in the Signal View and Vector View windows, which
are linked together. “”In the bottom panel of the Characteristic View window, two Extended Zone options
are created in Impedance View
to display extended zones and the Horizontal Axis is Relative checkbox in Overcurrent Characteristic to
display the horizontal axis in terms of nominal current. Also in overcurrent characteristic, pan mode
and snap to grid options are
created. “”In Step Ramp mode for Distance and Differential Set Modes, changes points can be seen in
these two modes for all fault types. In the Characteristic View window, for distance and differential
characteristics, differential and
impedance currents can be seen in different fault types. “”In the Signal View window, lines can be
bolded by clicking on the Digital chart. “”In Tracking mode and in Impedance View, by enabling Bold
selected row in tracking, the added
points in each row of this window are displayed on the characteristic curve. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-05
99.08.15.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Signal View, you the line bold by clicking on the digital chart “”After linking to XRio of a field,
the color of the field changes in the selected and deselected mode. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-08 99.08.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you are in Current State mode, by clicking All State, optimize all mode is created in the Signal
View window. “”In Transient mode, the characteristic curve is displayed by selecting a differential
comtrade file and clicking on the
Differential icon in the Characteristic View window. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-15 99.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In
Sequencer, if you're in a state other than State 1, highlight for Current State doesn't disappear. AMT
SEQUENCER 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”I2/I1 value is false in Vector View table, also this value lacks units no volts, no amps, no ohms and
no volt-amps And on the other hand, sometimes the size of this vector became too large and off the
chart, which has also been corrected.
“”If the vector color changes in Vector View, by right-clicking and selecting Default Color, the changed
color returns to the default color. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-23 99.09.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Without opening Report View window, you can use Export Report option in File menu. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Added three items IE1, IE11 and I sensitive to output target column in Current Output Signal section
in Hardware Configuration: so that if all phases of current group A are active and IE1 is selected for
the first phase of current group
B, in fact, the sum of all currents in group A are shown in this phase. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-11-26
99.09.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Added min and max values for threshold as well as false and true reverse values for binary inputs 9
and 10. “”By switching from All State to Current State, the total state signal selected in Signal View
is highlighted. AMT SEQUENCER
2020-11-28 99.09.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding reset Values option in Quick mode. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-02
99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Step Ramp and in the Start Values table, the frequency is Link to Frequency,
by changing the frequency in the Step Values table, as well as by right-clicking and changing DC and
Nominal Values, the frequency column values stay linked. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding the Link Magnitudes option to the available options in the right click of the Magnitude column
in Vector View. “”For rotation and movement in phases, L1 L2 L3L3 L1 L2 option is added to the right
clicks of Phase and Magnitude
columns. This option is also enabled when all voltage and current outputs are active and of AC kind.
“”By clicking on the Link Angles option Equals in the Phase column, all phases will be the same and by
clicking on link angles Balance,
this option will be disabled. “”Added Go to Linked Value option in Vector View. “”By tapping Copy to
Clipboard, for example, in the Vector View window of AMT Differential room, values are added to the
table using the Paste from Vector
View Clipboard option in right-clicking the Table View in AMT Sequencer. “”In Measurment View in all
tabs, right click options are enabled. For each tab, the Show/Hide option has been created exclusively.
“”In Table View, state can be
removed by right-clicking on each state, using the Delete option. Clicking on this option will erase the
same state and by clicking Marked State and Unmarked State, the selected or unselected states will be
deleted. “”In Table View, by
selecting the Append option on any state you are, that state will be added to the end of the state.
There is another option called Default State, which creates the last state with default values by
selecting it. Also the icon of this option
has been added to the toolbar. “”Default State has been added to the Insert Before and Insert After
options available in right-clicking states. “”If data table is enabled in Signal View, the unselected
signal value will be displayed by
selecting one of the signal drop-down field options not ticked in Settings by moving cursor or writing
time in the table. “”In Measurement View, Go to Linked Value, Remove Linked and Linked to Xrio options
have been removed from the right
click of cells that only take text. Also, Go to Linked Value option has been added to the right click of
other cells. In addition, right-clicks of columns such as T Act., T Dev. and Assessment, which are
valued after testing, have been
disabled. “”The Rate Frequency option is created in Step Ramp mode by enabling Enable Reset option. This
option is designed for ROCOF. For example, if the frequency increases from 10 Hz to a nominal frequency
with 0.1 Hz stairs, the signal
shape changes according to what you see in Signal View. AMT SEQUENCER 2020-12-17 99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”All times sent by the device are correct multiples of 400 microseconds in 1 millisecond. If the user
enters a time of 1 millisecond, this number is divided into 400 and becomes the nearest number,2
milliseconds. “”By right-clicking on
the Signal column in Vector View, two options copy to Clipboard and Show/Hide are displayed. AMT
SEQUENCER 2020-12-28 99.10.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In all rooms, this window closes by pressing the Esc key in the General Test Object screen. “”Except
AMT sequencer , In any other room, by pressing the combination keys Ctrl+Shift+t, the related block for
the same room opens on the General
Test Object page. For example, if you are in AMT Synchronizer, after simultaneously tapping these keys,
the Synchronizing Parameters window opens. Also, in all rooms, the Device Settings window opens by
tapping Ctrl+Shift+d. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-01-10 99.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”New wiring have been added in the “Hardware Configuration“ and in the
“Analog out“ tab. This way, if one of the main outputs is out of order, the same voltage and current can
be supplied from other channels to perform the wirings. For example, there are three models of wirings
an shown 1 * 150, 120VA @ 800mArms,
while previously only the output of 1 voltage group A was available for the user. However, if for any
reason this output is out of order, outputs 2 and 3 of voltage group A can be used. AMT SEQUENCER
2021-01-11 99.10.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "Hardware Configuration" and in "Binary / Analog Input" there is a section called "Virtual Binary
Input" with three options "VBin1", "VBin2" and "VBin3", and a section called "Virtual Binary Output"
with three options "VBout1", "VBout2"
and "VBout3". After activating each of the relevant options in the columns "Binary-Input Target",
"Binary-Input Label", "Binary-Output Target" and "Binary-Output Label", some options are added. For
example, after checking the option "VBin1",
the options "VBin1-1" to "VBin1-32" appear in the columns. These two parts are used in "GOOSE". AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-01-16 99.10.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting “Select File to Merge” you can merge two files of this room. After selecting the desired
file and states, in the event of deviations in “Hardware Configuration”, the user is asked for each
added states whether or not to
apply the changes in Hardware configuration to the added states?! If the user clicks “yes”, a state will
be added to the file due to the existing changes in Hardware Configuration. Clicking “No” does not add a
state. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-27
99.11.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you select all 6 current outputs from the "Hardware Configuration", the "Phase"
and "Frequency" columns are displayed in the "Detail View" if "Set Mode" is "Overcurrent: ITest". AMT
SEQUENCER 2021-01-28 99.11.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Setting Threshold value after selecting the "Set all binary like this" option in the "Binary / Analog
Input" tab. “”After selecting "Apply VDC" in "Hardware Configuration" and performing the test, the
auxiliary DC AUX DC switches off
when the test is finished. AMT SEQUENCER 2021-01-28 99.11.09.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”by clicking on the "Distance"
block in the "Test Object, you will go to “Distance Protection Parameters” page. There you can see a
picture that shows the connection of the current and voltage transformer in "CT Start Point" and "PT
Connection" AMT SEQUENCER 2021-02-01
99.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If only one output of voltage group A is active and the "Output Target" and "Output
Label" of the other output are used, the current of voltage group A is the same. If only the second
output of voltage group A is active and you select "VL1-E" for "Output Target" and "Output Label", the
actual current of voltage group
A in microamps, will be the same as if only output 1 of the voltage group A is active.
AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After running the Shot Test, all the points had failed.
This issue has been resolved in the latest version. For instance, this file was tested in prior versions
and if Recalculate was clicked, it would be recalculated and any points that had been failed mistakenly
would pass. AMT SYNCHRONIZER
2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If a point is added in the Synchronizer tab by using the Add button,
the system vector 2 should be moved by changing the cursor in Vector View. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-08-23
21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the “Synchronizer” tab, the values of the column “When CB Close” were calculated incorrectly after
performing a test. Which is now corrected in the new version. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After completing the test, the fields in Synchronizing Parameters were enabled, which is now fixed.
“”The Optimize All Change Fault Type option is removed from the Signal View settings. Also, if you
select a point in Out of Range by
changing the frequency of system 1, the value is shown correctly in the Synchronizer Characteristic
especially for points where the frequency was higher than the nominal frequency. “”After changing tabs,
the trackbar time in Vector View
is updated. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the "Trigger" tab of the "Binary Setting"
section, the icons next to the combo box fit the format displayed inside the field. Real Value can be
viewed in "Signal View" by ticking the Show Actual Value option and adding a point and performing the
test. “”In the Check Test tab,
by enabling the Show Actual Value option after performing the test and clearing the results, the values
in Vector View are displayed correctly. “”The conditions of "Pass" and "Fail" tests are corrected and
specified. “”In the "Shot Test",
"check test" and "Synchronizer" tabs, the "Relative" option is removed. “”After performing "Shot Test"
and saving the file and its results, after reopening the file, the column icon "Assessment" is changed
from "Pass" and "Fail" to "Out
of Range", which is corrected. ”In the "Shot Test" tab, the size of the "Act" column is corrected and
the content inside is displayed correctly. ”In the "Shot Test" tab, when a value in the "User Comment"
column and "Enter" key was clicked,
the software crashed which is now fixed. “”In the "Check Test" tab, the "Linear" group box is removed.
“”In "Synchronizer Characteristic" when the "Show All tAct Point" option is enabled, the software isn’t
crashed. “”In the "Shot Test"
and "Check Test" tabs, by right-clicking on the table of these tabs and selecting the "Recalculate
Point" option, the software crashed which is now fixed. “”After performing the "Synchronizer" test and
saving it, there is no problem opening
this file and loading properly. “”Also, after testing and going to the "General Test Object" window and
returning to the test page, the software isn’t crashed. “”After performing the "synchronizer" test, by
going to the "Shot Test" and
"Check Test" tabs, the points tested in "Synchronizer" are also observed in these tabs, which are
corrected. As you can see, after the "Synchronizer" test, the points selected for the test aren’t added
to other tabs. You can also make
a report of your test results in this module. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In AMT
Synchronizer, section related to the post fault is corrected for all points, so that if there is a close
command in fault, the signal of system 2 is in post fault according to the signal of system 1. Otherwise
the signal of system 2 have
the same prefault value. “”The AMT Synchronizer characteristic was not displayed in the report which is
now fixed. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-11-26 99.09.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After changing the Generator Model in the Type column of the Synchronizer test points table, all
fields will be updated in the Generator Model section. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-11-30 99.09.10.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.10.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.10.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Synchronizer, by changing Connected Voltage in Test Object, the names of the respective fields in
the Shot Test and Synchronizer tabs also change. These changes are also visible in Hardware
Configuration. “”Larger values of ∆V⁄∆t
and ∆F⁄∆t in Synchronizer “”Larger text boxes in the Test Object chart section in Synchronizer “”Chart
Correction in Synchronizer Characteristic: Correction of Lines Drawn in Synchronizer Test “”Report fixes
in Synchronizer “”By right-clicking
on the table and selecting Recalculate Point lines if changed, they will be recalculated and corrected.
“”By default, the Show Row Number option is enabled in Synchronizer Characteristic. “”The fault time for
Synchronizer field value is
set to 50 seconds by default in Settings. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Synchronizer,
the information entered in the Connected Voltage field affects system 1 and system 2 angles and is
visible in Signal View. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-01-11 99.10.22.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After adding test points to the given curve and by going to the "General Test Object" window, the
values of all test points will not be zero upon closing.
AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you select Connected Voltage system 1 in three-phase
mode, you can see the vector displacement by moving the cursor in the Vector View. AMT SYNCHRONIZER
2021-10-29 21.10.29.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.29.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.29.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you change the status of binaries in Hardware Configuration, you can stop or perform the test
according to the new changes. For example, if you move Bin 1 to Bin 6, the changes are applied
correctly. It is important to note that after
changing binaries, the modified binary in the Binary must be redefined Trigger tab. AMT SYNCHRONIZER
2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Shot Test tab, after adding points, the names Tripping and No-Tripping are changed to Closing
and Non-Closing. “”By changing "Reference Signal" in "Vector View", ∆∅ lines are replaced. “”CB Closed
and Close Cmd vectors are added
to Vector View. These vectors are False by default. The pass and fail conditions of the points are
changed to the placement of the CB Closed vector within the allowed area of the operation. “”After
changing the voltage value of system
2, its vector is optimized in vector view graph. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Angle
tolerance lines are created in Vector View. These lines can be changed in "Phi Tolerances". AMT
SYNCHRONIZER 2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Test View, a new button called Quick Test is available. After pressing this button, 8 test points
are created on the boundary areas in the synchronizer characteristic. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-04-21
21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After opening Vector View, the performance area is shown in the Vector Diagram. The performance area
between the two dashes is green. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”There is no “Linked to XRio” option for inactive fields. Also, Remove Link and Go to Linked Value
options are enabled for the fields on which the Linked to XRio option has already been applied. AMT
SYNCHRONIZER 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To pass or fail shot and synchronizer tests, the condition is also included. Also, by default,
the fault time for the shot test is changed to 25 seconds. This time change is due to the fact that if
the angle is not within the allowed range, it will have enough time to reach this range. In the past,
the allowed range in Vector View
was not defined. To get this range, simply add or subtract the angle written in the column ∆Phi from the
nominal angle of system 2. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you place system 1 on L1L2L3 in the Synchronizer Propertise page, after going to the Hardware
Configuration page, you will see that the values in the Output Label column change in the Voltage Output
Signal section. It is also important
to note that system 2 cannot be placed on L1L2L3. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
”In
the "Shot Test" tab, the size of the "Act" column is corrected and the content inside is displayed
correctly. ”In the "Shot Test" tab, when a value in the "User Comment" column and "Enter" key was
clicked, the software crashed which is
now fixed. “”In the toolbar, an icon is designed for "Synchronizer Characteristic" separately. This
window can also be accessed from the "View" menu of the "Synchronizer View" option. AMT SYNCHRONIZER
2020-11-30 99.09.10.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.10.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.10.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Two binary outputs called Start and Stop are added to the Synchronizer tab, so that start in states 1
and 2 and Stop in post fault are short circuits, respectively. “”possibility to view the movement of
voltage vectors of system 2 in
Vector View during testing in Synchronizer “”Added Snap Shot option to report settings in Synchronizer
“”In Synchronizer in the direction where the line rotates, Show Row is displayed on the other side of
the line. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-12-02
99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Transformer Group Phase Shift field calculations were considered. In this field,
a phase change if any is specified, resulting from an optional block or coupling transformer. This value
is given in degrees from 360 degrees to minus 360 degrees. “”After recalculate in synchronizer test, you
can tap New and open a new
synchronizer page. AMT SYNCHRONIZER 2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Synchronizer, the delay after
trigger field value in the Settings tab is linked to the CB close time field value in the
CBConfiguration block. “”In synchronizer test, by changing values from secondary to primary, in the Test
View window table, the deltaV/deltaT column
,The volt unit per second is converted to kilovolt per second.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When the voltage functions were tested for the
first time, by updating the file using New and retesting the voltage functions, all the points were out
of range. This problem is fixed in the new version. “” If the "Symmetrical" option was activated, after
testing the points in the negative
area, the symmetrical points were moved to the positive area. This error has been corrected in the new
version. “” If the "Symmetrical" option is not active, when the value of Input was changed from negative
to positive, the value of Input
was displayed in red in the "Test View" window. This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version. “”
If you selected the option "Symmetrical", when checking the points in the negative range, the actual
injection time differed from the
displayed time, which is now corrected. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When
the Input Meter is on Read from Binary and in the Output, the Open Loop option is selected, the
calculations for the online meter test have been updated. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 21.11.22.01 21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If Test Mode is selected as Mechanism or Output is set on the Open Loop in the Shot Test section,
there will be no problem to change the Time field. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "Transducer Properties"section, if Function is set to "Power Factor"and Characteristic Type is
set to "Quadratic", attempting to switch Function to "V hour" would cause the software to crash.
However, this bug has been rectified
in this version. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-04-11 21.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the online test of the meter,
by changing the input status from Injection to Read from Binary, the points added to the table are
cleared. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By switching from primary to secondary and vice versa, this change does not affect the output in
Signal View. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After adding a few points and clicking on one of them and going to the Test Object window and clicking
on OK, by returning to the Test View window, magnetic cursor will remain on the same spot selected in
Transducer Characteristic. AMT
TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-03-23 21.03.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If points are added before changing the table of
points, by changing the output in Transducer Properties they are removed. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER
2021-03-17 21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting the Phase [V-I] function, the field values in Advance View are displayed correctly by
selecting points. “”By enabling the L-L Voltage function, the Generator Setting section is corrected.
“”Power Factor correction and negative
gradient value is created for all functions even in Symmetrical mode. “”If you select one of the
functions of Wh or Varh from the Transducer Properties page and put Input on Read from Binary mode, the
test points are changed in the Test
Point section. “”In the Power Factor test, advance view, Generator Settings and Power Factor Sign
sections are corrected. In the x-axis diagram, it represents the angle and this angle is obtained from
the algebraic sum of voltage and current
angles. If it is pre-phase Capacitive Circuit Leading Power Factor, the current waveform is ahead of the
voltage, and if it is after phase Inductive circuit Lagging Power Factor, the voltage waveform is ahead
of the current. AMT TRANSDUCER
& METER 2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you open a saved file, all output and input values are displayed
correctly. “”As you can see, the points inside the tolerance failed, and that's because the tolerance
values were calculated based on Relative. In this version, both Relative and Absolute conditions are
considered, which by hitting the
Recalculate Point option, the points inside the tolerance are recalculated and passed. Also, the values
of the points are displayed correctly after activating the Show Row Number and Show AllAct Point options
in the Transducer Characteristic
window. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The value of device error column in
the table of points is corrected after the test is performed. If the point evaluation is failed, the
‘na’ value is inserted in this column. “”Correcting the field format in the Test Point section based on
the selected functions in the
Transducer Propertise page. “”If you enable symmetrical option from transducer Propertise page, the
current limit is set from -200 to +200 mAh and for voltages from -500 to +500 mV. Also, there have been
writing modifications in some fields.
“”The Pulse option in the Transducer Propertise page is enabled when one of the Wh or Varh options is
selected in the Functions section. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "AMT Transducer" after adding a point, the "Device Error" column is uneditable. “”After performing
the test in Signal View, for the binaries 9 and 10 waveforms weren’t displayed which is fixed and also
the results are recorded in
the table. “”In the "Shot Test" tab, the "Apply to" fields and "Wave Form" box cannot be edited. AMT
TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-08-17 99.06.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you open a saved file that has results, the Absolute Error and Device Error columns are updated and
visible. “”By opening “Report view” the Transducer characteristic is visible in the report. AMT
TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-11-14 99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transducer by going to Test Object in meter mode, it can be observed that saturation is
removed. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-11-15 99.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Inside the Transducer Properties window
in tolerance section, default value of the Relative field is 0.25%. By changing the secondary and
primary values, it does not affect the output values and only affects the input values. AMT TRANSDUCER &
METER 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To test the meter in Transducer, for example, if the number of pulses is 100, watt hour is 500 kW, the
ratio of CT conversion 2000 to 1 and the ratio of PT conversion is 400 kV to 110 selected, then adding
the point to the table is added
to the desired value table and is not the same as previous versions of Out of Range. “”In Transducer and
in advanced view section, changes have been made to voltage values in low powers injection. “”The
minimizing and maximizing problem
in Transducer, causing no display or delay in the Characteristic View display, is fixed. “”In Meter, the
shape of the characteristic curve has been corrected. “”Remove fault types from settings tab in AMT
Transducer & Meter. AMT TRANSDUCER
& METER 2020-11-23 99.09.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.03.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transducer, by opening Test Object and changing output to,
for example, Current, the value of Tr-Output changes to amps in the Maximum value field, and by
re-opening this window and going to Transducer Properties the changes applied to this field are the
same. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-11-25
99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
In Transducer, Signal View is updated by changing the output function. “”In Transducer,
if the values of the “Maximum value” field in “Tr-Output” column change, values don’t change when you
exit this window and return to it again. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If Number of phases is selected single-phases, the default values for voltage and current are
considered by clicking advance view and selecting L1 L2 L3. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-12-17
99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Maximum value fields for values less than one, the curve is displayed in Transducer Properties. All
Absolute, Relative and Cycle Time units have been corrected in watt hour and var hour. AMT TRANSDUCER &
METER 2021-01-31 99.11.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”correcting the area “Out of Range”
AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new option called "Voltage Method" has been added
to the tension functions. This option measures the voltage from actual voltages or binary values. The
assembling illustration is added to the "Setting" tab. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2022-04-23 22.04.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” According to the values selected by the user from the “Minimum Value”, “Maximum Value”, and
“Saturation Range” fields, “Bin. 10” or “Bin. 1” are selected to measure the voltage. If the maximum
value of these three fields is greater
than 200 mV, “Bin. 1” is used otherwise “Bin. 10” is selected. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2022-04-21
22.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The possibility of testing the transducers with an output of 1 volt is created using Bin. AMT
TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Two options, "I houre" and "V hour", have been added to the "Function" section. AMT TRANSDUCER &
METER 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Clear Actual Data option is created by right-clicking on the table of points. This option can be
used to remove the actual values of analog signals in the online meter test. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER
2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Online values of the meter are added in the table of points as well as in the report. AMT TRANSDUCER &
METER 2021-08-02 21.08.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Reference Meter option is created in the Transducer Propertise input meter section. According to
the selection of reference meter energy, in function, based on the watt hour Wh or var hour varh and the
number of puls should be entered
in the Ref in and Ref Out fields, respectively. The puls received from reference meter are sent to
binary 4 and the desired meter to binary 8. It should be noted that reference meters can be measured in
every 4 quadrants of the power chart,
usually measuring active and reactive energy. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-07-23 21.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In offline meter test, 5 test modes are defined in Test View. “”Load: Injection of current and voltage
for a specified period of time to check the overall performance of meter. “”Mechanism: Injection of
nominal current and voltage for
the specified amount of energy. “”"Mechanism": Dieser Testmodus ermöglicht die Einspeisung einer
bekannten Energiemenge in den Zähler für einen definierten Zeitraum. “”Injection: Continuous voltage and
current injection to check connections.
“”No-Load: Injection of nominal voltage and zero current, to check the performance of Meter. In this
section, there is also a time relation for the minimum duration of the test. “”Creep: Injection of 0.5%
nominal current with nominal voltage
to check start counting Meter. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-07-16 21.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To create pulse
manually, a new button is created in the Output Details section called Pulse Manual. AMT TRANSDUCER &
METER 2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transducer Properties, a new section called Pulse Type is added. In this section, the user can
specify whether the pulse count is based on the upward or downward edge. “”Depending on the meter, you
can select 3-Phase 4 wire or 3-Phase
3 wire modes in Transducer Properties. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the
online test calibration of the meter by Clamp, the dc shift value is token into account. For example, if
values in Transducer Properties are selected as such, the fields in the test Hardware Config for binary
5 are displayed correctly.
AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If Output is an Open Loop function, after testing,
a box is displayed for the user to take the read value from the user and after entering it, the test
will continue or end if there is a point or points. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-03-17 21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Voltage and current values, active, reactive power and energy for online meter testing are displayed
online. “”Run a Varh function test online correctly “”In some functions such as Phase [V-V], Phase
[I-I], DC Current, etc. The Number
of Phases section should not be enabled. In the past, if such functions were selected, this section
would be activated by pressing the OK button and going back to the Transducer Properties page. “”A new
option is created in Settings called
Settle Time. The time of this option is at the beginning of fault and during this time the voltage and
current are injected, but no calculation is done. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2021-02-23 21.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Quadratic chart is added to the Transducer Propertise window. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-08-17
99.06.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By using the “Communication” option, you can send a Packet to any device using a LAN cable, serial
port or wifi. in the “Communication” page, you can add as many ethernet and serial modules as you want.
Packet is sent separately by pressing
the Send button in each module. You can use the Start Send option to send all packets. If the field next
to this option is on Each in Term, all packets are sent in series, and if it is on All together, you can
send all packets at the same
time by having the number of LAN and Serial ports. there would be More details in the upcoming training
videos. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-11-15 99.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transducer, a new option called WH/pulse Detection has been added in the Test Hardware Config. The
function of this option is that voltage and current are injected before testing and at least two pulses
must be read in order to read
the value of watt hour, the last pulse and the average value. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-11-16
99.08.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Symmetrical option was added in Transducer for negative power injection in meter test. AMT TRANSDUCER
& METER 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The minimum pulse displayed on the characteristic changed from 10 pulses to 100 pulses. “”Moving
points in Transducer based on Input Act and Output Act values “”In Meter for inject mode, the test time
is added to 110% of the time of
a pulse inside the Time field. “”In Meter and in the table, the calculation results related to fault of
the meter is added and the relative and absolute columns are removed. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-11-25
99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
In Transducer, Signal View is updated by changing the output function. AMT TRANSDUCER & METER 2020-12-17
99.09.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Linking values inside the test table with Available Values in Advance View including Test Phase with
Test Phase and Generator Setting sections in Advance View. In single-phase mode and when meter functions
are used, by adding multiple
points in different phases and selecting each row, the values are displayed in the Generator Settings
section. “”After selecting Symmetrical inTransducer Properties, you can add points to the test table in
the negative part of the curve.
AMT TRANSIENT 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new ROM called "AMT Transient" has been added. The use
and functions of this ROM will be explained in future instructional videos.
AMT VI STARTING 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the past it was not possible to see changes in the
tolerance values on the characteristic curve. There was also no voltage in the "Shot Test" tab in
Prefault. These problems have been fixed in the upcoming version. AMT VI STARTING 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Previously, once the "Voltage References" was changed, the characteristic curve was displayed
incorrectly in "PickUp-DropOff"; this bug has been fixed in the new version. AMT VI STARTING 2021-02-22
21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”According to the new formula for calculating two-phase faults in AMT VI Starting room, the Out of
Range area is corrected. AMT VI STARTING 2020-11-14 99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If there is no search line, the ignore nominal Characteristics section, Disables in Settings tab.
AMT VI STARTING 2021-10-24 21.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”PickUp-DropOff test is performed as a ramp step. AMT VI
STARTING 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The PickUp-DropOff tab is added in this room. “”In the PickUp-DropOff
tab, draw Straghit Line option is added to VI Starting Characteristic. By enabling this option, the user
can only draw the right line. You can also use the Q shortcut key. “”A marker is added to the lines
drawn in the PickUp-DropOff tab,
which is moved by moving the cursor in Signal View. AMT VI STARTING 2021-09-23 21.09.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In
VI Starting parameters, two options rel and abs are created to change the numbers. AMT VI STARTING
2020-11-14 99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Voltage References section is created in the Settings tab of VI Starting Room for each Fault type
and correcting the report of this case.
AUTORECLOSURE 2022-01-18 22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In AutoReclosure, by pressing the Init Test button, all parts
of the assessmet are updated.
AUTORECLOSURE 2021-07-25 21.07.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”You can add DC Decay and Harmonic to a fault signal. AUTORECLOSURE
2021-05-26 21.05.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Two HSR and TDR modes are added to the Type drop-down field. In TDR,
4 state Prefault, Fault, Dead Time, Reclaim Time, but in HSR, there are 6 state Prefault, Fault, Dead
Time, Fault, Dead Time, Reclaim Time. HSR is also called Fast mode. AUTORECLOSURE 2021-05-25 21.05.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Binary Input section and in the Signal column, the Received Signal parameter for the DTT signal
is added. AUTORECLOSURE 2021-04-11 21.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Room is created to test the Auto reclosure function. The steps to test this function are written in a
box at the top of the page. First, it is necessary to complete the Data Table section based on the
functions set on the relay, and
then in the second step, introduce the trip status for binary inputs of the device. The Binary Output
section is key for simulation and its status is determined by the user in four stages: Prefault, Fault,
Dead Time and Reclaim Time. In
the Time Assessment section, according to what the observer and test the man have considered based on
the test conditions, the test assessment is determined.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The issue of images enlarging after double-clicking
on them has been resolved. “”The problem of adding reports after clicking the "Add to Report" button and
also the issue of not displaying the available options in the report settings button has been fixed.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT
2021-11-30 21.11.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Secondary Burden section, problems concerning reports have been
fixed. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CVT 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”With removing the row in the
data table in the test object section the software crashed, it is now fixed. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVT 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In CVT saturation, if you change the frequency in the Test Object tab, the Vend value also changes.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CVT 2021-01-11 99.10.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”For the "Ratio" test, any value can be entered in the "V Test" field; after right-clicking and
selecting "Apply Test", the same value is displayed in the corresponding column in the table.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2023-09-14 23.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Additional information has been added
to the Test Object CVT room. The fields Year, Company, and Country have been added to the existing
information. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Henceforth, in this room, before
performing the relevant tests in the tabs “Secondary Burden”, “Winding Resistance” and “Short-Circuit
Impedance”, it is better to complete the “Test Setting” section first, then the “Hardware Config”
section, and finally, the “Report Setting”
section. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2022-05-09 22.05.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the Test Object, a field
to determine the type of phase under test and three fields to determine the capacitance when CVT is
selected, has been added. If VT is selected, these three capacitor fields are removed. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVT 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” By clicking on "Insert Rows", only phase A is added from now on, and the possibility of phase
change to B and C has been created. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "Ratio and Polarity" tab, a new field called "Use voltage booster" has been added. By choosing
"Other" and if you have a transformer up to 2 kV, you can perform this test according to the specified
coefficients. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVT 2022-02-23 22.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By changing the assessment in Assessment, the test result
change. “”To read the primary voltage from Bin 5, you must select Analog Input in the Primary Meas
field. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERCVT 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Voltage Measurement Mode section has been added to the Winding Resistance tab. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERCVT 2021-03-07 21.08.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Secondary Burden, the Phase column is added to the related table. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CVT
2021-05-25 21.06.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Excitation test method is changed. In this method, which is tabular, first the rows are added by
tapping Insert Rows and then by right-clicking on the row, perform the test by clicking on apply test
and finally report by tapping Add
to Report.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Changing the voltage range for the "With Auxiliary Relay"
option to up to 220 volts AC after enabling the AC option. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the “O-CO2” the assessment of the sections “Close” and “O-t-CO total time” are changed. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In previous versions it was not possible to change the binary inputs 7 and 8. This problem has been
fixed in the new version. It should be noted that the column for "Binary-Input Target" can also be
selected for other binary inputs
such as binary inputs 7 and 8. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When the power source
"AC" was selected, in the open mode and in the third phase, the time was incorrectly calculated and
displayed in the "Supply Voltage". This error is corrected in the new version. “” When the binary inputs
were in "Dry" mode, the timing
test calculated all time references from the first binary value. Therefore, all times were displayed in
the same way. This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version. “” In "Timing Test" and in the
condition "O-CO" the evaluation in
the close-open mode was not carried out correctly. This error is corrected in the new version. “” In the
"Timing Test", it was not possible to change the binary inputs after selecting "AC" under "Supply
Voltage". This error is corrected
in the new version. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-05-24 22.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once the Power Supply was set
to External, it was not possible to change the Bin Input options by selecting another Bin Output option.
This problem has been fixed in the upcoming version. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-05-07 22.05.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Motor Current", clicking on the "Init Test" activated binary input 10 by default and assigned it
a unit and a coefficient. When clicking on the row in "Result" in "Contact Resistance" and clicking on
"Apply Test", the value of the
"Mul" field and the "Unit" option in "Calculation" were not updated correctly. This problem has been
fixed in the new version. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-04-11 22.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The photo of the assembeling is modified after Shunt is enabled. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-04-01
22.04.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After loading some files, "the Last Time" was wrongly displayed in some cases; this is now corrected.
“” "Signal View" in "O-CO 2" the second test was not displayed correctly which is now resolved. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After clearing the results and re-doing the test, the First and Last columns in the Summary
of Result section are updated based on the new results. “”After selecting AC in Supply Voltage, the
header image is updated in Timing. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Timing section, the evaluation of the key state change from close to open in phase A was shown
incorrectly. This bug has been fixed in the new version. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 21.11.22.01 21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By entering a decimal number in the Operating Time section, its value displayed as zero, by changing
the amount of time in the Number of Decimal Places Settings window, the number is displayed correctly in
this section. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB
2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Test Object", there were problems in the "Operating Time"section,
which have been fixed. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the "Test Object" tab,
the "Operating Time" section, by adjusting the maximum time and minimum time, these values are
calculated in milliseconds, causing problems in the evaluation section in the "Timing Resistance"
section. This is now fixed in the new version.
CIRCUIT BREAKER CB 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After performing the Contact Resistance test, the
values weren’t displayed in the fields of the Selected section, this is now corrected. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB
2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Signals are displayed correctly in Signal View during and after testing. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2020-11-22
99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In CB and in the Minimum Voltage test by selecting New Device, State Termination is placed on Coil
Current and by re-selecting AMT105, State Termination is placed on Contact.
CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2023-09-14 23.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Addition of new wiring types in the Timing Test. CIRCUIT
BREAKERCB 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The “Coil name” field is created in the “Coil” section. The
users can add their considering coil name to the report. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-09-01 22.09.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "DRM" test, "Binary-Input Type" is set to "wet 188" by default. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-04-08
22.04.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Since some users do not have the required auxiliary relay and the shunt resistance available in
"Timing test" while using "External Power Supply", two options "With Auxiliary relay" and "Shunt" have
been added. If these options are
enabled, the header image will be changed and the flowchart will be displayed to the user. “” In
"Minimum Pickup", when you set "State Termination" to 1 pole, the number of active binaries are updated
and reduced to one. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB
2022-04-07 22.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Timing Test" and "Minimum Pickup", a new method called "Wet by
Current Source" has been added. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-04-04 22.04.03.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once you enable
the "Fast Sampling" in the "Timing Test" tab and click on the "Init Test" button, this option is also
activated in the "Extra Setting" tab. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new tab called "DRMDemo " has been created. In this tab, the dynamic resistance test of the key is
presented in demo form. “” After clicking on "Init Test" in "Timing", the "Show Actual" related to
binaries, either being " Wet" or
" Dry", would become " True". That is, the reference base is based on the voltage value, which is 2
volts in " Dry" mode. In this case, whenever the voltage is less than 1 volt, 1 is considered. In " Wet"
mode, if it is greater than the
value set by the user in "Threshold", it is considered 1. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2022-01-18 22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Before, the time between opening and closing in the open-close test was when the open command was
issued to open the key. But now is the time when the key is open to close. This time is about 28 to 30
milliseconds. “”In the o-co test,
a new section has been added in the Summary of Result called O-t-Co total time. In this section, the tie
recorded is the time when the open command is issued so as the key finally opens. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB
2021-07-12 21.07.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Always in the Timing Test tab, the first package or opening of the key has been the criterion for
assessment. In this version, a new option is created in the Test Object of the Operating Time section.
The user can select their assessment
based on the first or last package or key opening. “”To calculate the current in the Timing Test tab,
two fields Peak Current and Steady-State Current are used. Sometimes the Steady-State Current value
turns negative. The calculation of
this field is that it calculates three points together in a row. In previous versions, only one
condition was considered that if the value 〖Value〗_max-〖Value〗_min/〖Value〗_max, for example, was smaller
than 0.01, the Steady-State Current
value would be determined. In the new version, another condition is made by adding a new option to the
Object Test. The value obtained from the formula is compared with the value entered by the user in the
Min. Coil Current field, and
if it is larger than this value, it will be considered as the Steady-State Current field value,
otherwise the Na value will be considered. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Timing Test tab, a new section called Other is added, as to used to change the status of the
key contact from open to closed or from closed to open. To perform it, first select one of the options
according to the status of the
key, and then click on change position option. For example, if the contact key is closed and you want to
open it, first select close breaker before test option and then click on Change Position. After clicking
on this option, a message
is displayed to the user asking him to check the wire if the winding is open or close, click on Yes and
otherwise click on No. It should be noted that by performing this option, results aren’t recorded in the
report. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB
2021-04-07 21.04.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By changing Supply Voltage from DC to AC and vice versa, a message
is displayed to the user showing in which tests the wiring photo has been changed. CIRCUIT BREAKER CB
2021-03-07 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option for testing the time of keys powered by AC voltage is added to the Test object tab. This
option is located in the Open Close Voltage Setting section. When the AC option is selected, while
creating a warning to change the
wiring, a section called Bin Out is created with the Delay field in the Timing Test tab. In this field,
you can consider between 0 and 10 milliseconds as a delay in calculating the performance time. Since
threshold is not used to calculate
the time, the latency of the relays behind binary outputs should be considered. You can also use this
option in the Minimum Voltage to Operate Circuit Breaker tab to test the minimum voltage of the key
function. Two things should be then
into accuracy can be put on Pulse Ramping and Manual. In either case, you can increase your voltage to
450 volts if you have chosen AC in Test Object. CIRCUIT BREAKERCB 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Timing Test key, activate the P.S. A-N field by selecting External in the Power Supply section.
“”Actual values are displayed in all equipment rooms as bold in Signal View. However, in tests where
injection is performed in three-phase
mode, the actual values are shown in circles.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the voltage transformation test, the values of
Primary Voltmeter and Secondary Voltmeter were swapped. Additionally, there was an issue in changing the
tap settings with different selections of rows. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When you clicked on “Add to Report” in “Test Object”, the “Class” column had been inserted
incorrectly. This problem has been modified in the upcoming version. “”The list of the “Analog Input”
field was updated. Henceforth, just to read
the voltage, you can choose one of the first 4 binary inputs and run your test according to the changed
picture. “”In “Excitation,” by changing the values of the columns “Core no.” or “Tap no.” or “Phase,”
the value of the field “Rct”
should be changed. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problems related to
the hysteresis curve have been fixed in this version. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-05-24 22.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In DC saturation test, when the CT conversion ratio was small and the software used Bin 1 as Primary,
problems were seen in the calculations. This problem is fixed in the coming version. CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CT 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After loading some files in "Ratio and Polarity with Current" test, by changing the value
of "I meas". which was read using an ammeter, the software crashed, this problem has been solved in the
new version. “” The problems related to the "At Calibration State Option" have been fixed in the new
version. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
2022-01-18 22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
In Secondary Burden, when you click on the Add to Report, the Phase column
is added to the report. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Calculations for the
I Prime field have been modified. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Excitation
with DC, when you changed the graph from Lissajous RMSDC to Lissajous HysteresisDC and vice versa in
Calculation, the graph was not displayed correctly in Signal View, this has been fixed. “”In Secondary
Burden, calculations related to
carrying CT did not use actual current. This problem is fixed in the new version. “”In the Ratio and
Polarity with current section, after opening the saved test file, the wiring image is displayed
correctly. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT 21.11.22.01
21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the “Excitation with DC” tab, if you apply “Init Test” in the second stage,
the wiring of the first stage was also activated. This bug has been fixed in the new version. “”In the
Excitation test with DC, after completing the first step of the test, pressing the Clear Test button
does not erase the results. Also,
no message is displayed to save this information. “”In the “Excitation with DC”, after completing the
first stage of the test, by clicking on the “Clear Test”, the results are not deleted. Also, the warning
message for asking to save this
result is not displayed anymore. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-11-14 21.11.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once the "Int
Test" was pressed, the "Calc.knee.P" and "Show Point" options were not enabled; this problem has been
fixed in the new version. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In previous versions, when the R Man option was activated Ref. Temp., the software would crash. This
has been fixed in this version. “” Additionally, when activating the Don't Change Hardware Setting
option in Step 1: Core Information
and pressing Init Test in Step 2: Rdc and Excitation, the software crashed; this has also been fixed. “”
In previous versions, when you copied and pasted from some fields to other fields inside the software or
from software like "Notepad"
to these fields, the software crashed. This problem is fixed in this version. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
2021-02-25 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The bugs and polarity test problems are fixed in the Excitation Test tab. “”In previous versions, in
the secondary Burden section, after loading the test file, the nominal current wasn’t shown correctly,
which is now fixed. “”In the
Test Setting section, by converting the CT core type from Measuring to Protection, the standard test
table image of the conversion ratio couldn’t be updated, which is now fixed. “”In previous versions, in
the Ratio and Polarity with voltage
section, the percentage of the equivalent current ratio of the injected voltage wasn’t calculated
correctly, which is now fixed in the new version. The Actual Rct to Ratio V field is also added in this
section. If its value is calculated
in the Winding Resistance tab, this field will take its value from this tab. Otherwise, the value is
taken from what is written on the test object tab. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the second stage of excitation with dc test, the Method field is placed on a current by default.
“”If the Init Test is clicked in the first step after performing the second stage of the Excitation with
dc test, the software does not
show crashed. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The Lm field calculations are
updated in the Excitation with DC tab of the Knee point calculation section. “”From this version onwards
the saturation curve starts from the point 0,0. In the hysteresis curve, due to current distortion in
the test mode, the current method,
didn’t display the correct shape. Calculations related to saturated Inductance or Ls are also added to
the software. if Ls is negative or greater than 30 millihenry, na is displayed. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT
2021-08-12 21.08.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”During the test performance, the saturation curve in Excitation and Excitation with DC is updated and
optimized. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT 2021-05-18 21.05.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By changing the frequency in Test Object, this value is entered in exitation test with dc and is
effective in the relevant calculations. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Duplicate options in the reporting settings of all tests that no longer exist. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT
2021-02-25 21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After clicking on Init Test in the Excitation Test tab, all charts are shown correctly. “”The problem
of changing the status to Manual Passed saved files that conversion ratio test of it is passed, is
fixed. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2020-08-04
99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In report of Current Transformer, to better display the report, some left and
right edges weren’t observed which is now fixed. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2020-11-22 99.09.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Fixing the problem of adding excitation test states in secondary burden test after clicking on Init
Test. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The photos of wiring in Resistance test and Excitation test in CT. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2020-12-02
99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Fix software crashing problem after using ctrl+c combination keys in empty fields in all equipment
rooms. “”After Init Testing, the latest Hardware Configuration changes are preserved. “”Modify export
getting from report to doc format.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2020-12-15 99.09.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the CT saturation test after passing the
test by tapping Add to Report and saving the file and re-opening the file, the pass test result will be
shown and manual pass will not be displayed.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2023-09-14 23.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”New 100-ampere wiring type were added for testing
the current transformation ratio in the CT room. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The option “Standard” is added in “Test Object”. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The “Fill Excel File” and “Developer Mode” options are activated if you want to create your reports in
excel files. “”Since it is possible to test all three phases simultaneously in one file, it is available
to enter the serial number
of all three phases in the “Test Object.” “”Henceforth, in this room, before performing the relevant
test in the tabs “Secondary Burden” and “Winding Resistance”, it is better to complete the “Test
Setting” section first, then the “Hardware
Config” section, and finally, the “Report Setting” section. “”In the “Excitation” and in the section
“Current Measurement Mode”, if the excitation current is less than 5mA, the new option called “Slight
Current” is created. CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CT 2022-10-09 22.10.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.10.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If the compound error is 10% for measuring CTs, 5% for 5P protection
CTs, and 10% for 10P protection CTs, the relationship between CT parallel branch current and voltage is
represented by a line in the saturation diagram, and its intersection with the line hypothetically drawn
after determining the knee
point shows FS or ALF. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-09-01 22.09.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.09.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” All the fields related
to the "Calculation of Iprimary" section cannot be changed during the saturation test. CURRENT
TRANSFORMER CT 2022-05-07 22.05.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "Ratio and Polarity With Voltage" section, the default settings are taken into account so that
the "%In" column reaches one hundred percent of the rated current without the user having to change the
applied voltage "V test nom".
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” From now on, the binary input Bin. 5 is used
in the first stage of the "Excitation test with dc ", when the CT conversion ratio is low 15.5 or 30.5,
reading the voltage from Bin. 10 is not possible and this is used instead CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
2022-04-08 22.04.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In Excitation with dc, the photo of the assembeling has been changed and a new section called Ratio
and Polarity has been added to Step 1. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-03-26 22.03.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The many changes made to this room are discussed the upcoming educational videos. CURRENT
TRANSFORMERCT 2022-03-16 22.03.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Once you press the Settings icon of the "Add to Report" button, its list of options are displayed.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The "Ratio and Polarity with Voltage" test method has changed. In the new method, any voltage value
entered in the "V test" field, the same value is applied after the test is executed. Also, if the actual
value of the injected voltage
is greater than 188 V, the binaries are in series with each other. “” The image of the assembling in
"Ratio and Polarity with Voltage" has changed. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2022-01-18 22.01.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
In Secondary Burden, when you click on the Add to Report, the Phase column is added to the report.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Ratio and Polarity with voltage, a new field named I test has been created. In this field, when you
enter the voltage value, the current value is displayed as a percentage of the nominal current. “”In
Excitation, by activating Extra
Data, the corresponding table is added to the report. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-12-27 21.12.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the first line of information is deleted after performing the test in the Winding Resistance tab,
the information in the Actual RCT to Test Estimation field in the Excitation tab is removed from the Max
Rct field in the Test Object
tab. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By opening the CT test file based on the
CT type and its class, only some fields related to it are displayed. “”In situations where the
resistance information on the CT plate is not available, it is possible to disable Max Rct. “”In Ratio
and Polarity with voltage, to determine
the angle of the input voltage, instead of the nominal value of 90 degrees, the value of the actual
voltage angle is calculated. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-11-30 21.11.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Tap No. and Core No. Columns in the Report section of the Winding Resistance, Ratio with Voltage and
Ratio with Current are displayed correctly. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-02-25 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After completing the first stage of saturation test by DC method, the results of conversion ratio test
for the user are displayed in the CTR field. “”In the Ratio and Polarity with current section, before
the test, the possibility of
displaying the percentage of injectable current to the nominal current is added. “”In the CT saturation
test, when the wirings are not properly connected or the saturation current is below one mAh or two
saturation points are found a message
is displayed to the user. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-09-23 21.09.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option is added
on the right-click of the saturation chart in Signal View called Knee Point in the saturation test. You
can also see the changes in the report by enabling each of the three options at the bottom of this
window Aspect, Logarithm X and Logarithm
Y and pressing the Add to Report button. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In
Secondary Burden, a new column called I test nom is added. “”If you change the frequency value from the
Test Object tab, you will see the changes in vector View and the test result in the test of conversion
ratio to the current method,
after selecting the Apply Test option. “”If you change the frequency value from the Frequency field, you
will see changes in the Vector View and the test result in the test of conversion ratio to voltage
method, after selecting the Apply
Test option. “”After secondary burden and Winding Resistance tests, the report is added by clicking add
to report chart in Signal View. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The wiring photo is shown in secondary burden test. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT 2021-08-02 21.08.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Excitation, Ratio and Polarity with current, Ratio and Polarity with voltage and Excitation with
DC, the Core no., Tap no. and phase columns are now created. Also in secondary Burden, the phase column
is added to the related table.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-06-05 21.06.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The test method is changed in secondary burden,
ratio and Polarity with current tabs. In the new method, first add rows by clicking on Insert Rows
option and then by right-clicking on the related row, select apply test option. “”In Ratio and Polarity
with current, Ratio and Polarity
with voltage, a column called %In is added that shows what percentage of the injectable current is
nominal current. By placing the mouse over this cell the related formula is display. CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CT 2021-05-25 21.05.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The test method is changed in the Ratio and Polarity with voltage tab. To perform the test in the new
method, first add rows by tapping Insert Rows, then right-click and select apply test option to perform
the test. CURRENT TRANSFORMERCT
2021-02-25 21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you place Apply Standard on any of the standards and save, then
open a file, you will see the selected standard in the Test Object tab. “”In the Turns ratio with
Current test, if the actual current value has a 20% difference with the current value entered in field I
test, a message is displayed to
the user that by clicking the OK button, the test results will not be erased. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”At the top of each tab, how to perform the test is displayed in a box. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Added Excitation Test with DC in Report Setting. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT 2021-01-10 99.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The standard is added to the report by selecting the "IEC 61869-2" standard and clicking the "Add to
Report" button. “”A "Description" column is added to the report after enabling the Ratio Table option
and clicking the "Add to Report".
“”After checking the "Ratio Table" option, if the voltage exceeds 180 mV the value of the voltage is
measured from binary input 1, and if it is less than 180mV, the value of the voltage is measured from
binary input 10. CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CT 2021-01-11 99.10.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After testing and pressing the „Clear Test“ button, if the results
have not been added to the report, a warning message will be displayed in the instrument module that no
report has been added since the last test. In the previous versions there were no such warnings. “”by
changing „Voltage Measurement
Mode“ a message appears for the user, showing changes in wiring.
HARDWARE 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”D Due to some changes in the Microprocessors and the use of the
third version of it, there were some problems in the hardware which have been fixed in this version. It
should also be noted that the microprocessors used are the first version of LPC, the second version of
7020 and the third version of
the 7020 family A-Linx. HARDWARE 2021-11-15 21.11.15.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.15.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.15.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”There was little difference in the
actual value of current groups. This bug has been solved in the new versions. HARDWARE 2021-03-07
21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The time difference between GPS and UTC in the software is fixed. HARDWARE 2021-01-31 99.11.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Correcting hardware code for binary input 9. This binary input is used in ratio conversion test with
current.
HARDWARE 2021-04-17 21.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The CPU version in Calibration is displayed in micro CPU. This
option is used to specify the type of micro zero represents micro LPC 80 and number 1 represents micro
7020. In the Panel section, you can see the type of ADs used for binaries 1 to 10 in the front panel.
Also, in the Amplifier section,
the switching type and new Amplifiers installed on the device are specified, indicating that the device
is being upgraded. The numbers shown along with each of the fields indicate the date and model of the
parts used in them, for Panel
1 represents the AD model 1202 and since last year 2020 has not been used in new devices, number 2
indicates AD model 7606 and about 4 months ago stopped using it in new devices. The number 3 represents
the AD of the ADS model, which is
used in new devices from this date onwards. Also, the numbers 0, 1 and 2 in front of Amplifier indicate
the changes made to the amplifier and switching module.
HOME PAGE 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problems with the options related to the "Output" section
in the "PDF Report Creator" window have been fixed. HOME PAGE 2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After
activating the Record Period field and clicking on Apply, if the entered value was greater than 9
seconds, the software crashed, but in the new version, you cannot enter a value greater than 9 seconds.
HOME PAGE 2020-06-03 99.03.14.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Correcting “Report generator” in “Room” tab. By using report generator, you can report it
without having to open the test file. HOME PAGE 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the new version,
the company's Persian name is removed from the main page of the software.
HOME PAGE 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From now on, you can specify the type of device you want to test
in the "Room" tab. HOME PAGE 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The new options called “New by template”,
“Open” and “Open multiple files” are added at the right click on every modules. HOME PAGE 2022-03-08
22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new section called "GPS Tuner" has been added in "Setting". In the past, to sync AMT105 with GPS
and other devices, there were problems due to the time difference. You can enter this time difference in
the "GPS Tuning Time" field
so that such problems do not arise in the end-to-end test. HOME PAGE 2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After connecting to the device, if the word VIVADO is listed in the Version of Micro column, new
option called Update Bootloader is created. After activating this option and clicking on the Update
Firmware button again, the program will
be updated, an alert screen will then appear to update the bootloader. It is important to make sure that
the power supply to the device is not interrupted before doing so. If the device is shut down while
doing this, you can no longer
use it and you have to send the device to the company. This takes a long time, about 2 minutes,
therefore, it is better to do all the steps with a LAN cable. On the alert page, by clicking Yes, the
bootloader packets are sent to the 7020
micro and updated. After doing this step, the color of this option as well as its name will change from
Update Bootloader to Force Update Bootloader. The Force Update Bootloader option is used when you want
to be sure to update the bootloader
again. HOME PAGE 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Report Generator section, the Merge Report
section is added. Here, you can merge the added reports. Three options, Continuous Page Numbering, Table
of Content and Delete Added Report Files are created to continuously number the pages, tabling of report
lists, and the absence of
the report files are created separate from each test file respectively. These options are enabled by
default. HOME PAGE 2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In computers with multiple users, it is recommended to right-click on the exe file of the software and
from the very beginning select run this program as an administrator option and perform the installation
process by running the exe
file according to the past. “”In the Setting page, after connecting to the device in the table in the
Connection &hardware tab, can be seen the controller version, the front panel of the device, and the
micro on the device. HOME PAGE 2021-06-05
21.06.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Hardware tab of the Setting page, a new option called Continue after disconnect
is added. This option is not enabled by default. If the network cable test or the connection between the
tester and the laptop is interrupted, the test will continue, but the results aren’t recorded in the
software. HOME PAGE 2021-04-11
21.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Setting window, a new tab called Help is created. There have been a lot
of changes in Help and Videos that you can make a variety of settings in different parts of this tab.
Additional explanations are provided in the relevant videos. HOME PAGE 2021-03-31 21.03.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By default, the help language is located in the Default Language of Help section and the test date in
the Date/Time section of the Room tab is set in English. To see this change, clear cache Have the
software installed on your system.
HOME PAGE 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By clicking on the version number of sofware page, vebko
website is opened and on which the existing version and past versions as well as what's New videos
related to each version can be download. Also, by clicking on What's New, the Training page of vebko's
website opens. HOME PAGE 2020-06-03
99.03.14.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.03.14.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By entering "Setting" on the first page of the software and going to the "Room"
tab and selecting "Decimal Places", in the "Item Type" field by selecting "Sequencer", the display of
numbers can be changed to 8 decimal places. If the “Number of Decimal Places Setting” toolbar is
selected and clicked on “Load template”,
these changes are visible in “Sequencer”. HOME PAGE 2020-11-05 99.08.15.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.15.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Setting window
many changes are made in the Available Devices. After clicking on start search, displaying the device
information, by right-clicking on the row and selecting the Set a Static IP Address in Windows option,
you can directly configure the
IP of the laptop in two ways Manually and Automaticly. “”Also in this tab are other ways to change the
IP the device by selecting the "Set IP to Device" option and connecting directly to the device without
entering the IP, in connection
& firmware tab. “”the stop search option in available devices tab has been added so that the user can
stop Search. Interface Adaptor Network is also next to this option.
INSTRUMENT TEST 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In “RTD” and “AutoReclosure,” when you clicked on the button
“Init Test”, the software would crash.
INSTRUMENT TEST 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In “Test Object”, the new section called “Device Type”
is created. In this section, before performing any test, set the tester device first.
INSTRUMENT TEST 2022-07-06 22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If you activate the option "Don’t Change Hardware Settings"
and click on "Init Test", the software usually crashes after the test has been executed. This bug has
been fixed in the next version. “” After selecting the "Edit & Delete Report" option, the corresponding
window was not displayed. This
problem is fixed in the new version. INSTRUMENT TEST 2022-03-08 22.03.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The problem of
polarity in the test of the "Ratio and Polarity" using the voltage method in the CT and also the test of
the conversion ratio in the CVT has been solved. INSTRUMENT TEST 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Report view, the title for Name was displayed incorrectly for the corresponding module.
INSTRUMENT TEST 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” From now on, you can show/hide the table columns on the
"Test Object" tab of "CT" and "CVT" rooms in the report. INSTRUMENT TEST 2022-07-23 22.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new option called "Show/Hide Assessment Columns" has been added to show/hide test results in the
report. It is important to note that after clicking on the Add to Report button, whether in previously
saved files or in files tested
from this version onwards, this option is visible in the "Delete from Report" window after a right
click. INSTRUMENT TEST 2022-02-09 22.02.09.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.09.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The basis of evaluation in Leakage Reactance tests in trans as well as Ratio and Polarity and
Excitation in CVT has been changed based on binary inputs. The users, also, can recalculate the results
by choosing real voltage values as
an evaluation after performing these tests. INSTRUMENT TEST 2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If the
Instrument View window closes, you can reopen this window by using the Ctrl+Alt+N combination keys.
INSTRUMENT TEST 2021-04-24 21.04.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new section called Tests is added in the Test Object tab in the CT, CB, CVT and Transformer modules.
Based on their test, the user can activate the tab for each test using the options in this section.
INSTRUMENT TEST 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Generally, by enabling Easy Mode, the wiring images of the boards that are installed on the
Front Panel are displayed in each test and by disabling this option, images of the wiring are displayed
in front panel without having to install these boards.
MEDIUM MODULES 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The function of the existing options when right-clicking
on the test result line, the Show/Hide Report section, which was faulty in some rooms are now improved.
MEDIUM MODULES 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you right-clicked on the inactive Generator Differential Start Curve block in a template containing
this block such as 7UM62x in a ROM other than AMT Differential, the software crashed. This has been
fixed in the new version. MEDIUM
MODULES 2021-12-27 21.12.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Overcurrent and Diff Harmonic, by clicking on Export to
CSV, in , in Overcurrent View and Differential view texts are not displayed. MEDIUM MODULES 2021-10-21
21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In all Medium modules with PickUp-DropOff test, if it was changed in the Prefault time setting tab, it
would not have been applied to Signal View in the Pick up drop tab, this is now fixed in the new
version. MEDIUM MODULES 2021-04-11
21.04.11.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.11.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The duplicate options at right-clicking on the table of points are removed. MEDIUM
MODULES 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "Hardware Configuration" by enabling the "Show Actual Value"
option, after going to another tab and returning to "Hardware Configuration", this option is disabled
and the values is changed to "false", which is now fixed. “”In all rooms, for example the "AMT
Sequencer" room, when the module or a
form is out of "dock" mode and converted to "Undock", The software isn’t crashed when changing "Scheme"
MEDIUM MODULES 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In all rooms, after opening the old files, the threshold value or threshold voltage of binary inputs
in Dry mode is set to 0.2 volts, which is corrected and replaced by 1volt in the new version. “”In the
Fill Excel File window, after
selecting the input and output files the path specified, by closing this window, this path could not be
saved which is fixed. “”In the “Fill Excel File”, after entering essential information, by clicking the
“Start to Fill”, you can edit
the options in “Setting” check box. In this version, these options are as read only after selecting the
“Start to Fill”. “”In the Fill Excel File problem for the Sequencer room, the Synchronizer section is
fixed. “”If a page called vebko
is created in the Excel file, you want to fill in items on this page, after selecting the desired file,
and clicking on the “Start to Fill” option in previous versions, an error message appears. MEDIUM
MODULES 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In medium rooms such as AMT Distance, after connecting to the device, the start icon is initially
disabled and enabled by adding points to the table. “”In previous versions, it took a few moments to
perform the test after hitting the
start icon, while in the new version the test performs as soon as you click on this icon. “”Fixing the
problems of single test in shot test, check test, search test, etc. tabs “”All features of Impedance
View, Differential Characteristic,
etc. Like Show all tact point, show z act point, etc. are corrected.
MEDIUM MODULES 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the “Sequence Test Points to”, the options “All”, “LN”
and “LL” are added to the section “Fault Types”. MEDIUM MODULES 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In
this version, the temporal changes in the time can be seen in Prefault after you have received Comtrade
from the software in the corresponding file. MEDIUM MODULES 2022-04-19 22.04.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Generally, in the new version of parameters that should not be normally in the output file in
"Exports" are not taken in the new version. For example, in AMT Overcurrent, after exporting "Xrio" in
standard mode and loading it in "Omicron"
software, a parameter called "I sensetive" in "Test Universe" software was not loaded properly; or in
"AMT Distance", the "Line Length" parameter which was taken from the user in kilometres, does not exist
in the standard mode. MEDIUM
MODULES 2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If group B current is selected instead of group A current in
Hardware Configuration, the activated items in Hardware Configuration are displayed in the status bar at
the bottom of the Test View window on the left side. MEDIUM MODULES 2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By changing the binaries in Hardware Config, the binaries used in the trigger section, theBinary
Trigger Condition section, are updated. MEDIUM MODULES 2021-07-19 21.07.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”To load xrio files of the xml type a new option is created in the software. For this purpose, first
enter your relay template and then in Load Relay Setting from the Relay Config Type list, Select *. Xml
and continue the rest of the
steps as before. “”4 templates of Sprecher relays are added to the software. MEDIUM MODULES 2021-07-16
21.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Custom, if you create a block with @Room specific name. This specific block is module and is not
deleted by loading the new xrio. Tip 1: The information on this block is saved along with other
information and is not included in the
xrio file. But it is always displayed as the last block in Custom and can be linked to it. Tip 2: In VCC
when external xrio enters, inside that module this block still exists and is displayed in xrio, but the
external xrio is not changed.
MEDIUM MODULES 2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option called Stop test after each shot test is
created in the Extra Setting tab. By enabling this option, after testing each point in shot test, first
the relays of the Analog Output section in the tester is turned off and then the next point is tested.
This option does not exist in
AMT Sequencer and is only in modules where Shot Test, Search Test and Check Test are available. For
example, this has been done for three points. As you can see, when injecting the current for 10 seconds,
for each point, the LEDs in the
Current Output A section are turned on and after the test of each point is finished, the LEDs are turned
off. That means the injections are not performed and the relays are turned off. “”In Load Relay Setting,
a new option called Add missing
blocks and parameters is added. This option can be used to create templates from CSV files taken from
relays. To do this, you first need to create relay menus in the software. by using this method, blocks
and parameters taken from the
relay are made automatically. There are two modes for transferring CSV-format files, or parameters have
paths or no paths are defined for them. First, a CSV file is loaded from the Schneider relay, which is
not defined a path to its blocks
and parameters. In this case, all parameters are created in a block called Missing Parameters. This
time, a CSV file is loaded from the Toshiba relay, which is defined a path to its blocks and parameters.
In this case, there is a path
for parameters, they are categorized according to the same default path. two important points, one is
that each block's ID is made according to its name. Another point about parameters is that some IDs are
not allowed, so IDs are checked
and converted to authorized IDs if they are unauthorized. For this reason, the ID of a parameter may be
different from its ID in the file, but the created Foreign ID matches the file. Type all parameters are
selected from string type because
they are not mentioned in the file. “”A new feature is created to disable testing of one or more points,
disable testing points in one or more fault type, as well as disable testing in one or more tabs if a
point or line is added. For
example, to disable testing one or more points is enough to select them first and then right-click on
them and Disable testing at those points by using the Active option. You can also disable test execution
in one or more tabs by activating
the created check box next to each tab. MEDIUM MODULES 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The possibility
of determining "Threshold" for binary inputs in "Dry" mode is added. By default, this number is placed
"1", but the user can enter "0" to "2" of the dc volt in this field. For example, the binary threshold
value "1" is set to "0.7". This
means that if the binary "1" is applied at a voltage of less than 0.7, the binary contact is closed.
MEDIUM MODULES 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In all modules, when you select the “Fill Excel File” in the “File” menu, after opening a file as an
import, the same file is set an export by default. MEDIUM MODULES 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Also, in this section, the Out of Range Area option is added to display the area outside the injection
range of the device. “”In the Characteristic View window, Short Keys such as A to display Tact points, Z
to display zone numbers for
points, R to display the row number of points, O to display the area outside the device range, and P to
display the actual value of impedance points are created instantaneously. “”Right-click options such as
changing the background color
of Characteristic View are enabled on the characteristics. “”In all medium rooms, Link to Xrio, Remove
Link, go to linked value options are added by right-clicking on any field.
OVERCURRENT QUICK TEST 2021-12-27 21.12.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After clicking the Add to Report button, the software
crashed. This problem has been fixed in the new version. OVERCURRENT QUICK TEST 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” From now on, by clicking on "Add to Report", the software will not crash. OVERCURRENT QUICK TEST
2021-02-25 21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The problem of not running the program and the correct operation of the buttons are fixed.
RESISTANCE 2023-08-25 23.08.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.08.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Impedance tab, some of the options under "Measuring By"
have been removed. “”Im Impedanz-Tab wurden einige der Optionen unter "Measuring By" entfernt.
“”Correcting some of the images. RESISTANCE 2021-02-23 21.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By selecting any binary input other than binary input 1, the correct shape of the chart is shown in
Signal View. RESISTANCE 2021-01-31 99.11.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Reform of the spelling of some fields in “Resistance” room.
RESISTANCE 2021-10-24 21.10.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Photo of The Resistance Test tab is updated. RESISTANCE 2021-10-21
21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The impedance Test tab is added to this room. RESISTANCE 2021-09-17 21.09.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Test Object tab, a field called Reference Temperature is added. By entering the value
of this field, the correction coefficient is automatically calculated. Also, the Ract field in the
Resistance Test tab is added to the Result section.
RGROUND 2021-04-21 21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new Room is designed to measure ground resistance, which testing
stages are written at the top of the tab, respectively. It should be noted that this Room is at the
early stages of the design and in the form of a Demo.
RTD 2020-08-04 99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In "RTD", the "Test Object" tab of the history section is added to
the report.
SETTING 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The CHECK RAM section in the Setting page is removed from the Hardware
tab.
TRANSFORMER 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Optimization of calculations related to Yd11 vector group.
TRANSFORMER 2022-07-16 22.07.16.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.16.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When the "DETC Tap Changer" option was activated on the
"Winding Resistance" tab, no diagram was shown in the "Plot" section; yet, it is fixed. “” The
calculations of the angle of no-load flow were changed in the "VectorGroup, Turns Ratio, No load
current" and "No load" tabs. TRANSFORMER 2022-07-06
22.07.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” If the assembling was "Yzn5", the test results were calculated and displayed
incorrectly when the "Read Input Voltage" was set to "Analogue Input". This error has been fixed in the
next version. “” After changing the voltages on the Test Object tab and in custom mode, it was not
possible to correctly add the voltages
in the Test Turns Ratio on the "Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load tab". This error has been fixed in
the next version. TRANSFORMER 2022-05-07 22.05.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.05.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” There were some problems with the "Custom" option that have been fixed in the new version. For
example, if the taps were selected in the mode you see after disabling and re-enabling the "OTLC
TapChanger" option, the voltage values in
the table were zero. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-23 22.04.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The relevant settings was not displayed
when "By In progress Contact" was selected; the problem is now fixed. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-19 22.04.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In previous versions, when the "Zero Sequence Impedance" test was performed on the "LV" side, once a
row was added in this test, "HV" was inserted by mistake on the Side column; this has also been
resolved. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Winding Resistance", while being in three-phase mode, the default settings related to
"Trigger" has been modified. “” In "Magnetic Balance", when reloading the test file, the currents column
was not reloaded correctly which is now fixed. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-01 22.04.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In "Winding Resistance", the time associated with the "State Time" field was not running properly and
the test would stopp after the duration written in "Initiated Time". This has been fixed in the new
version. TRANSFORMER 2022-02-23
22.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By placing the tap changer on the low pressure side and performing the TTR test,
the relevant calculations were done incorrectly which is now resolved. TRANSFORMER 2022-01-14
22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After performing the Magnetic Balance test, saving and reopening this file, the W1 currents are
displayed correctly. TRANSFORMER 2022-01-04 22.01.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”When you select a three-winding transformer or an autotrans with a tertiary winding in the Type field,
and set the tap changer to the secondary side, there were problems in displaying the plot, which is now
fixed. TRANSFORMER 2021-12-31
21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Plot section, some checkboxes, except for Ratio and No load Current, have
been disabled. TRANSFORMER 2021-12-27 21.12.27.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.27.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Winding Resistance, if you set the side
field on LV, it was not possible to add a row; this has been fixed in the new version. TRANSFORMER
2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Winding Resistance section, if there was no line, the software would crash once clicked on the
table, this problem has been fixed in the new version. TRANSFORMER 2021-11-30 21.11.30.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.30.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Turns Ratio and No Load tab, the Vector Group, the locations of the V phase nom, V phase act, V sec
meas and TTR act fields have been changed. TRANSFORMER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Additionally, by changing values in “Rating voltage” section and specifying the number of transformer
taps in “Tap Changer” section, the voltage table values of “Tap Changer” section are updated.
TRANSFORMER 2021-10-28 21.10.28.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.28.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.28.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”During the test, If the user doesn’t select the desired row by mistake and run the test by using the
Run icon, a fault use to occur, this is now fixed. TRANSFORMER 2021-10-21 21.10.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.10.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In single-phase mode, by adding rows to the table, the software faults when changing tabs from "Table"
to "Plot". This is now fixed in the new version. TRANSFORMER 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If Tap Control Settings is on Manual, the result section values in Continuty Tap Changer are
calculated correctly. “”In Magnetic Balance, if there is a connection to the ground on the secondary
side, the table names in Magnetic Balance
Result and the report are corrected. TRANSFORMER 2021-08-23 21.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Magnetic Balance
tab, after clicking on Insert Rows and adding the table, the wiring photo was hidden under the Magnetic
Balance Result section, which is now corrected. TRANSFORMER 2021-03-0 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Calculations related to the Vector Group Check tab have been corrected. To obtain the probable vector
grouping, after specifying the values in the requested fields and obtaining the result, Amplitude and
phase values in the primary and
secondary side are carried out on a phase-by-phase basis. For example, a file containing the results of
this tab, calculated with previous versions, is uploaded. In this case, because once with previous
versions of Vector Group Check calculations
performed by using the Recalculate option in signal view settings, the calculations written in this new
version are applied, the results change as if can be seen. “”The DY Wiring Image in the Continuity Tap
Changer tab has been corrected.
“”Many hardware and software changes have been made to binaries. For this reason, in winding resistance
test when the Voltage Measurement Mode was changed from binary 1 to 10, the test stoped, now this is
fixed. TRANSFORMER 2021-02-22
21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”By erasing all rows, the wiring photo is erased with it, and again by tapping
Insert Rows and creating new rows, the wiring photo is also displayed. TRANSFORMER 2020-08-04
99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the test, the ratio of column conversion "VL-L" to "Vin" is changed. In this cell, the entered
voltage is used to calculate the conversion ratio. While in previous versions the voltage entered in the
column "V L-L" is selected by
the user. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-10 99.08.20.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.20.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Transformer in Vecor group, Leakage Reactance
and Winding Resistance tests, in single-phase mode, only one row is added each time you click on Insert
Rows. “”By closing the software from launcher windows not only the home page, but also any page from any
of the rooms, are closed even
when a change is clicked. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-14 99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The dimensions of the table in
the Winding Resistance Trans test are changed because when the report was taken in doc format, the
dimensions of the cells were also changed. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Trans or any Room that defines an operation for Signal View, by going to Hardware Configuration and
changing this page, the software doesn’t crash. TRANSFORMER 2020-12-28 99.10.08.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.10.08.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If any tick is removed from the "Plot" tab, “Vector Group, Turns Ratio, No Load“ will not be displayed
in the "Report View". “”For the "Magnetic Balance" test of the transformer, its circuit is displayed in
all switching groups to which
this test can be applied, and a message field is displayed for the switching groups that this test is
not applicable.
TRANSFORMER 2023-09-14 23.09.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.09.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From now on, you can perform the leakage reactance test UK%
using the new current wiring types. TRANSFORMER 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Henceforth, in this
room, before performing the relevant tests, it is better to complete the “Test Setting” section first,
then the “Hardware Config” section, and finally, the “Report Setting” section. In addition, it should be
noted that two fundamental
changes have been made in this room “Transformer”. 1- Adding a new option, “Wiring Type,” and removing
the “Don’t change Hardware Configuration” option. 2- The way of running the test has changed. So, to run
the test in upcoming versions,
it is enough to click on the “Run” button after completing the three mentioned steps. It is important to
remember that for running the tests in which the table was added, you must first select the desired
added rows, and finally, it is
enough to either use the “Apply Test” option or the “Run” button as before. “”The “Fill Excel File” and
“Developer Mode” options are activated if you want to create your reports in excel files. TRANSFORMER
2022-04-24 22.04.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When the "Read Input Voltage" field was set to "Analogue Input" in Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No
Load during the single-phase transistor test and the input voltage was more than 130 V, it was not
possible to read this voltage value
in binary, which is now possible in the new version. In addition, the photo of the assembling changes
according to the input voltage. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-21 22.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” When testing three-winding transformers, it is possible to drag Plot from the Territory to the
Primary. TRANSFORMER 2022-04-19 22.04.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In some assembelings, "LL" method was used. Therefore, by changing "Read Input Voltage" to "Analog
Input", binary inputs 1 to 3 can be used. “” When the "Winding Resistance" test is done in "LL" mode,
the results can be cleared from
all the three rows using "Clear Result" results and "Remove". “” If there is a row in the "Z0" section
and the vector group changes in the "Winding Configuration" section so that there is no neutral point
grounded star, this row is erased.
“” In "Winding Resistance", all rows can be put in order in "Down" mode from phase A to phase C.
TRANSFORMER 2022-04-17 22.04.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” A new method has been added according to the "IEC61378-1" standard in the conversion ratio test.
TRANSFORMER 2022-02-23 22.02.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After selecting Automatic Tap Control, you can change the way the taps are moved up or down from the
Preparation section before performing the test. “”Column I Prim. Angle has been added in No load and TTR
tests. The column shows the
no-load current angle. TRANSFORMER 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”From now on, 4 states are created
for the Winding Resistance test of each phase after clicking on Apply Test. Since at the end of the test
Error Other occured, by default, Disable Error is active for the 4th State for 5 seconds. TRANSFORMER
2022-01-14 22.01.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”You can see the changes in the Report View by activating the Temperature Correction option and
clicking the Add to Report button. TRANSFORMER 2022-01-04 22.01.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.01.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Magnetic Balance, when you clicked on Add to Report, two tables w1 and w2 were created in the
report. Now you can add them to the report or delete each one separately in the Report Setting. “”In
Winding Resistance, when you test the
primary, secondary and tertiary resistance together, by clicking Add to Report, the relevant information
of HV, LV and MV tables are displayed separately in the report. TRANSFORMER 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Winding Resistance, when you click on Add to report, two tables are created based on phase and tap
in the report. Now you can add them to the report or delete each one separately in the Report Setting.
TRANSFORMER 2021-12-19 21.12.19.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.19.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In Test Object, new tables named DETC Tap Changer and OLTC Tap Changer have been created to
add on information separately on Load Tap Changer and Deenergized Tap Changer. “”In the Leakage
Reactance UK% section, from now on voltage and current measurements are made based on 1st harmonic
instead of Amplitude. TRANSFORMER 21.11.22.01
21.11.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”It is possible to view and control the primary, secondary and tertiary graphs
in Winding Resistance. “”There are more comprehensive reports from the Test Object tab in this section.
TRANSFORMER 2021-11-14 21.11.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the "Winding Resistance" section, if you test "HV" after "LV", the strong pressure side resistance
values are displayed in the table. TRANSFORMER 2021-11-13 21.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Moreover, two new options - "Auto Transformer with tertiary"and "Autotransformer without tertiary" -
have been added to the "Type" section for autotransformer testing. TRANSFORMER 2021-09-12 21.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you change the tap number or voltage value for one phase in the conversion ratio test, the other
two phases would change. “”In the Plot tab, two check boxes are created to view Ract and Phase
comparison on the weak pressure side.
TRANSFORMER 2021-07-07 21.07.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.07.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If a wiring is selected which in none of the primary, secondary
and tertiary coils have a star connection trans, magnetic balance, Vector Group Check and Zero Sequence
Impedance Demo tests cannot be performed and these options are disabled in the Tests section. “”The zero
trans sequence test is presented
in the Zero Sequence Impedance Demo tab in demo form. First, enter the initial values for calculation in
the Impedance section of the Test Object tab, and then perform the test by adding the row in the Zero
Sequence Impedance Demo tab
by right-clicking and selecting the Apply Test option. As you know, the Zero Sequence Impedance depends
on the current passing through the coil, usually this value related to the nominal current IN is
expressed, which means that the measurement
is done with the 3xIN test current, however, this is not always possible in process, because to avoid
the excessive temperature of the metal parts used in the trans, the current must be limited. The Zero
Sequence Impedance is measured
as a function of the test current and if necessary, the final result is obtained by extrapolation. Test
Result: TRANSFORMER 2021-06-18 21.06.18.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.18.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A no load current test is added on the No Load tab. In this tab, you can only calculate the no load
current of trans. TRANSFORMER 2021-05-25 21.06.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.06.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Open circuit test is presented in the Open Circuit tab as demo. This test is used to determine the
core losses in the trans and the parameters of the shunt branch of the circuit equivalent to the trans.
TRANSFORMER 2021-05-24 21.05.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.05.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Several changes have been made in the Test Object tab. single phased, three-phased, trans
winding type, with two or three windings, which are now in the transformer data section. In Test Object
and in the Impedance section, you can enter different values for the short circuit impedance. You can
also enter the type and standard
of trans. “”By placing Type on single-phase mode, you can select coefficients 1/1 or 1/√3 different and
according to the values in the Tap changer table is updated. “”The frequency value can be entered in the
Transformer Data section.
One of the applications of this method is in leakage reactance test. TRANSFORMER 2021-04-21 21.04.21.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.21.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The amount of current taken from each voltage source outputs and in each of the trans test modes in
the Magnetic Balance tab in the columns H1_I0, H2_I0 and H3_I0 is displayed. This has been done to
detect loop connection fault in power
transformers. TRANSFORMER 2021-02-25 21.03.17.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.17.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load
tab, a column is added in the table %In that shows an unloaded current in terms of a percentage of the
nominal current. “”In Leakage Reactance, the "Consider HV/LV is equal" option is created. After enabling
this option, the amount of
impedance calculated for primary and secondary is specified in the Result section. Ideally half of it is
for primary and the other half is for secondary. TRANSFORMER 2021-03-0 21.03.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.03.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Z and Zn wirings are added to the initial position. For example, tests are made possible for Znyn11
vector grouping. “”In the Vector Group Check tab, photos are added for testing. TRANSFORMER 2021-02-22
21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Max Resistance column values are corrected in voltage measurement mode section. Also, in the Read
Input Voltage field in the Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load tap are created by switching from
Actual Voltage to Analog Input and vice
versa, and a warning message is displayed to change the wiring. “”The help text for testing is added to
the Transformer's Room tabs, as well as changes made to the buttons in terms of shape and position.
“”The results box is added to the
Continuty Tap Changer tab. “”in the Vector Group, Turns Ratio and No Load tap, after clicking on the
gear in the Add to Report button, make adjustments to the report. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-25 99.09.05.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.05.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In any of the trans tests which has a table such as TTR, Magnetic Balance, Winding Resistance, Leakage
Reactance, if you change values in the Test Object tab, a message is displayed, which if the user clicks
No, the values return to
the original state. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-26 99.09.06.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.06.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Adding the possibility to change the
field number Start Taps No. On the Test Object tab and seeing the changes when pressing the Insert Row
button. TRANSFORMER 2020-11-28 99.09.08.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.08.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”If you change the voltage taps column in Custom mode, a warning is displayed to the user. TRANSFORMER
2021-01-20 99.11.01.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.01.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.01.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In “Leakage Reactance” tab, the voltage value display is changed and the "Base Voltage" and "Base
Power" columns are added to the report TRANSFORMER 2021-01-26 99.11.07.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.07.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.07.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In the "Continuity Tap Changer" test two voltage signals are added, the upper diagram shows the
instantaneous value and the lower one the RMS value. Two fields are also added to “State Settings”
section, "Dev. Show" and "Dev. Assessment".
The "Dev. Show" is intended to show the percentage of signals error and the value of this field cannot
be more than "Dev. Assessment".
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST 2022-03-13 22.03.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.03.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems appeared after clicking on the "Init
Test" which are now fixed. UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After clicking the
Init Test button, the tables in the Measurement View are updated correctly. UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST
2021-11-14 21.11.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.11.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The software crashed once the "Init test" was pressed which is now fixed.
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST 2022-02-02 22.02.02.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.02.02.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option called State pausereset termination
has been added. This option is used to determine the condition for changing the state between Time Test
and PickUp-DropOff. The condition can be time, pressing the key space or the OR logic between the two.
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST 2021-02-25
21.02.25.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.25.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In testing tab, you can add up to 20 rows in the Test Plan section by tapping
Add Row. This number is not related to the rows created in the Data Table section of the Test Object tab
UNDER OVER VOLTAGE TEST 2021-01-28 99.11.09.02
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.02/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.09.02_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In this module, the number of states has been increased from 2 to 20. You can add up to 20 states by
selecting “Add”.
VCC 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”While performing each one of tests, you were separately able to close
the relevant window. VCC 2022-08-23 22.08.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.08.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” Problems such as changing the name of nodes
and not being able to copy and paste them have been fixed in this version. VCC 2022-07-23 22.07.23.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.07.23.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” In the previous version there were problems opening the executed and saved test file, which have been
fixed in the new version. VCC 2022-04-28 22.04.28.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.28.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.28.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” After running the test file, the software crashed, which is now fixed. VCC 2022-04-04 22.04.04.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2022.04.04.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“” The function of the Ctrl+O shortcut key has been modified. VCC 2021-12-31 21.12.31.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.12.31.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Issues
related to Export comtrade have been fixed. VCC 2021-02-22 21.02.22.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.02.22.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Communication in the
Hardware menu of this module is corrected. This option is used to send packet serial. VCC 2020-08-04
99.05.14.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.05.14.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The pause form problem is fixed in showing the link and a link such as www.vebko.ir can be entered in
this form. VCC 2020-11-03 99.08.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”After performing the test in VCC, the test result was not added in Report View which is now fixed. VCC
2020-12-02 99.09.12.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.09.12.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Modified Stop Update/Export and Close Selected Node. VCC 2021-02-01 99.11.13.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.13.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.11.13.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”Increase
the clear result speed in the VCC module
VCC 2023-06-26 23.06.26.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2023.06.26.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”The “Duplicate” is added on the mouse right click. “”By holding the
“Ctrl” and selecting any of the files, the new version of each of them is copied. “”On the mouse right
clicking, the new option “Comment” is added. This option is used to create a tooltip. VCC 2021-04-28
21.04.28.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2021.04.28.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”A new option is created to load templates related to different relays in the toolbar of this room. In
each new version, this list is more complete. VCC 2020-11-14 99.08.24.01
@LINKHREFSTERT@HTTPS://VEBKO.ORG/DOWNLOADS/INSTRUCTIONS/WHATSNEW/TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01/001_TEST-AMPRO%2099.08.24.01_001_EN.MP4@LINKHREFEND@
“”In VCC, Copy and Paste options are added in right click. Also, after adding a new item, the added xrio
doesn’t disappear.